+ All Categories
Home > Documents > National Assessment Guideline - Kiwa · PDF fileThe NEN-EN 10080:2005 is not a harmonised...

National Assessment Guideline - Kiwa · PDF fileThe NEN-EN 10080:2005 is not a harmonised...

Date post: 20-Mar-2018
Category:
Upload: dangkhue
View: 220 times
Download: 1 times
Share this document with a friend
33
Established by the Board of Experts Reinforcing Materials, dated 1 October 2009 Accepted by the Building Harmonisation Committee of the Stichting Bouwkwaliteit dated 24 June 2010 This document is a translation of BRL 0501 "Betonstaal" of 2010-09-01 The document is published by KIWA N.V. In case of disputes the Dutch language version of BRL0501 is legally binding. BRL 0501 01 September 2010 National Assessment Guideline For the KOMO ® product certificate for Reinforcing steel (Steel for the reinforcement of concrete)
Transcript
Page 1: National Assessment Guideline - Kiwa · PDF fileThe NEN-EN 10080:2005 is not a harmonised standard and therefore a CE mark can not yet be attached to the products covered by this BRL

Established by the Board of Experts Reinforcing Materials dated 1 October 2009 Accepted by the Building Harmonisation Committee of the Stichting Bouwkwaliteit dated 24 June 2010 This document is a translation of BRL 0501 Betonstaal of 2010-09-01 The document is published by KIWA NV In case of disputes the Dutch language version of BRL0501 is legally binding

BRL 0501

01 September 2010

National Assessment Guideline For the KOMOreg product certificate for

Reinforcing steel (Steel for the reinforcement of concrete)

National Assessment Guideline BRL 0501 01 September 2010 copy Kiwa NV - -

1

Preface of Kiwa

This National Assessment Guideline (BRL = BeoordelingsRichtLijn) was drawn up by the Board of Experts lsquoReinforcing Materialsrsquo of Kiwa representing all stakeholders in the area of reinforcing steel This board also guides the performance of certification and if necessary revises this National Assessment Guideline This board is referred to where lsquoBoard of Expertsrsquo is mentioned in this National Assessment Guideline Kiwa will apply this National Assessment Guideline in connection with the Kiwa Regulations for Product Certification These regulations contain the procedures applied by Kiwa during the audit for obtaining the product certificate as well as the procedures for external inspections The governing Board of Experts must re-establish this BRL at least once every 5 years but before 1 September 2015 at the latest The NEN 6008 lsquoReinforcing steelrsquo 1991 with amendment sheet A11997 was highly out-of-date and by now this standard (NEN 60082008) has been reviewed in a condensed version based on the European standard NEN-EN 100802005 lsquoSteel for the reinforcement of concrete - Weldable reinforcing steel ndash Generalrsquo The reviewed version of this assessment guideline is in line with NEN-EN 10080 and NEN 6008 and thus lays the foundation of (product) certification of reinforcing steel in conformity with the Dutch requirements Binding statement This assessment guideline has been declared binding by Kiwa as from 01 September 2010

Kiwa Nederland BV

Sir W Churchill-laan 273

PO Box 70

2280 AB RIJSWIJK Tel 070 414 44 00 Fax +31 (0)70 414 44 20 wwwkiwanl copy Kiwa NV All rights reserved No part of this publication may be reproduced stored in a computerised database or published in any form or by any means whether electronic mechanical photocopying recording or otherwise without prior permission in writing from the publisher Without prejudice to the acceptance of the Assessment Guideline by the Building Harmonisation Committee of the Stichting Bouwkwaliteit as a National Assessment Guideline all rights rest with Kiwa Use of this Assessment Guideline by third parties for any purpose whatsoever is only allowed after entering into a written agreement with Kiwa defining the right of use

National Assessment Guideline BRL 0501 01 September 2010 copy Kiwa NV - -

2

Table of contents

1 Introduction 4 11 General 4 12 Area of application 4 13 CE mark 4 14 Acceptance of audit reports provided by the supplier 4 15 Certificate 5

2 Terminology 6 21 Terms 6 22 Definitions 6 23 Indication of reinforcing steel types 7 24 Reinforcing steel on coils 8

3 Procedure for obtaining a quality statement 9 31 Initial audit 9 32 Certification 9

4 Product requirements and determination methods 10 41 General 10 42 Product requirements and determination methods 10 43 Product requirements supplementary to and contrary to NEN-EN 10080 and NEN

6008 the following applies 10 431 Lattice girders 10 432 Non-profiled or slightly profiled reinforcing steel 10 433 Geometry of the profiling determination of fR and fP 10 434 Standard deviations 11 435 Geometry longitudinal rib 11 436 Nominal mass per metre 11 437 Extra value for a2 11 438 Chemical composition of reinforcing steel 11 439 Nominal diameters preferred range 12 4310 Values for a1 - a4 12 4311 Rib row distance Σe 13 44 Determination methods and test criteria Supplementary and contrary to NEN-EN

10080 and NEN 6008 the following applies 13 441 Preliminary audit for acceptance 13 442 Inspection for the attributive properties 13 4421 Inspection of the bend-bend tensile test with initial audit and during external

inspections (audit testing) 13 443 Inspection for the variable properties 14 4431 Inspection for the fatigue strength in initial audit 15 4432 Inspection for the fatigue strength in periodic external inspections (audit testing) 16 45 Biannual reporting 16 46 Identification 17 47 Certification mark 17

5 Requirements to the quality system 18 51 General 18

National Assessment Guideline BRL 0501 01 September 2010 copy Kiwa NV - -

3

52 Administrator of the quality system 18 53 Internal quality controlquality plan 18 54 Procedures and work instructions 18 55 Other requirements to the quality system 18 551 Reinforcing steel 18 552 Storage of reinforcing steel 19

6 Requirements for the functioning of a test laboratory for testing reinforcing steel andor point welded reinforcement fabrics 20

61 The supplier has its own laboratory for testing reinforcing steel for its variable and attributive properties 20

62 Outsourcing of testing 20 63 Verification audit 20 631 Variable properties 21 632 Attributive properties 22

7 Summary audit and inspection 23

8 Requirements of de certification institute 24 81 General 24 82 Certification staff 24 821 Qualification requirements 24 8211 Qualification requirements for the certification executives of a CI meeting the

requirements set out in EN 45011 25 8212 Supplementary qualification requirements for the certification executives of a CI as

determined by the Board of Experts for the subject of this BRL 25 822 Qualification 25 83 Initial audit report 26 84 Decision about granting the certificate 26 85 Presentation of the quality statement 26 86 Nature and frequency of external inspections 26 87 Reporting to the Board of Experts 26 88 Interpretation of requirements 26 89 Specific rules defined by the Board of Experts 26

9 List of documents mentioned 27 91 Standardsnormative documents 27

Annexes Annex 1 Model certificate Annex 2 Model for internal quality control schedule Annex 3 Sampling and testing overview Annex 4 Model for biannual reporting on reinforcing steel

National Assessment Guideline BRL 0501 01 September 2010 copy Kiwa NV - -

4

1 Introduction

11 General The requirements included in this assessment guideline are applied by certification institutes acknowledged for this purpose by the Dutch Accreditation Council when handling an application for or continuation of a product certificate for Reinforcing Steel The quality statement to be issued is designated as KOMOreg product certificate The technical area of the BRL is H9 - Steel for applications in concrete reinforcing steel prestressing steel prestressing systems thermal bridges coupling systems lattice girders steel fibres and glass-fibre bars Besides the requirements laid down in this assessment guideline the certification and attestation institutes will have additional requirements in the sense of general procedural requirements of certification and attestation as stated in the general certification and attestation regulations of the institute concerned This assessment guideline replaces BRL number 0501 dated 2000-01-15 including amendment sheet dated 2005-01-18 In any case the validity of the quality statements issued on the basis of this assessment guideline will terminate one year after this BRL was declared binding During the performance of the certification activities the certification institutes must meet the requirements laid down in the chapter lsquoRequirements of certification institutesrsquo

12 Area of application The products are in conformity with NEN 60082008 in line with NEN-EN 100802005 and intended for application in concrete constructions Explanation The European standard NEN-EN 100802005 provides the general requirements definitions and testing requirements for the performance properties of weldable reinforcing steel but does not provide a more detailed definition of reinforcing steel types with the corresponding performance requirements Therefore the Dutch standard NEN 60082008 provides the performance requirements (number values) of the Dutch reinforcing steel types that comply with NEN-EN 100802005 This will be described in more detail in this BRL

13 CE mark Relationship between the Building Decree and the European Construction Products Directive (CPD 89106EEC) No harmonised European standard (NEN-EN) is applicable to these products yet The NEN-EN 100802005 is not a harmonised standard and therefore a CE mark can not yet be attached to the products covered by this BRL

14 Acceptance of audit reports provided by the supplier If the supplier submits reports of audit institutes or laboratories in order to demonstrate that the requirements of the BRL are met they must show that these were drawn up by an institute that complies with the applicable accreditation standard being bull NEN-EN-ISOIEC 17025 for laboratories bull NEN-EN-ISOIEC 17020 for inspection institutes bull NEN-EN 45011 for certification institutes certifying products bull NEN-EN-ISOIEC 17021 for certification institutes certifying systems bull NEN-EN-ISOIEC 17024 for certification institutes certifying persons

National Assessment Guideline BRL 0501 01 September 2010 copy Kiwa NV - -

5

The institute is supposed to meet these criteria when it can submit an accreditation certificate issued by the Dutch Authority for Accreditation (RvA) or an accreditation institute with which the RvA has entered into an agreement of mutual acceptance This accreditation must apply to the specific audit required for this BRL If no accreditation certificate can be submitted the certification institute itself will verify whether the accreditation standard is met or (have) perform(ed) the audit concerned again itself

15 Certificate The model of the KOMOreg product certificate based on this BRL is included as an annex to this BRL

National Assessment Guideline BRL 0501 01 September 2010 copy Kiwa NV - -

6

2 Terminology

21 Terms This assessment guideline uses the following definitions bull Assessment guideline The arrangements made in the Board of Experts concerning the subject of certification bull Board of Experts The Board of Experts lsquoReinforcing Materialsrsquo bull Supplier

The party responsible for continuous compliance of the products with the requirements the certification has been based on

bull Internal Quality Control (IQC) schedule A description of the quality inspections performed by the supplier as part of its quality system

bull Initial audit (type audit) The preliminary audit to determine whether all requirements set out in the BRL are met bull Internal production inspection audit (by the manufacturer)

The continuous internal production inspection audit to make sure that the certified products constantly comply with the requirements set out in the BRL For this the manufacturer performs among other things tensile tests bending tests measurements of the geometry of the profiling and chemical analyses The fatigue tests are usually performed in an external laboratory

bull External periodic audit The external audit performed after granting of the certificate to make sure that the certified products constantly comply with the requirements set out in the BRL During the external periodic audit the certification institute takes random samples for tensile and bending tests measurements of the geometry of the profiling and chemical analyses Additionally samples are periodically assigned for performing fatigue tests This is also called lsquoaudit testingrsquo The results are tested against the requirements set out in the BRL

bull External verification audit The external verification audit performed during the initial audit and subsequently every two years for verification of the determination of the variable and attributive properties For this two series of similar test pieces are taken the test results of which are compared in pairs for their mutual differences

22 Definitions In addition to the terms and definitions in NEN-EN 100802005 the following definitions apply in this BRL bull Fatigue strength

NEN 6008 requires for the fatigue strength a minimum tension ripple 2σa with an upper tensile of 06 Re (Cv) A tension ripple is the tension change from a middle tension through an upper and lower tension back to the middle tension (2σa = tension ripple)

National Assessment Guideline BRL 0501 01 September 2010 copy Kiwa NV - -

7

Bovenspanning = upper force Middenspanning = middle force Onderspanning = lower force Cyclus = cycle Figure 1 stress change

bull Nominal diameter (d) The diameter of an imaginary bar with a circle-shaped cross-section of the same length and volume as the actual bar with profiled surface excluding tolerances bull Variable properties Property to which a quantitative value is assigned when assessing the measurement In NEN 6008 these are the properties 02 yield limit (Rp02) or flow limit (Re) yield at maximum load (Agt) the tensile strengthflow limit ratio (RmRe) the ratio of the actual flow limitnominal flow limit (ReactRenom) and fatigue strength (2σa) In conformity with NEN-EN 10080 section 7333 the upper flow limit (ReH) applies to the flow limit (Re) If there is no flow the 02 yield limit (Rp02) is to be determined

bull Attributive properties Property to which a value is assigned during the assessment that can only be regarded as good or wrong In NEN 6008 these are the properties nominal diameter mass per length profiling (profile factors fR fP rib height rib distance rib width rib flank angle rib (inclination) angle distance of rib rows and longitudinal rib) bending test shearing test and chemical composition bull Bendndashbend back tensile test Supplementary to NEN-EN-10080 and NEN 6008 the bend-bend back tensile test (attributive) is to be performed to determine whether the reinforcing steel types B500B and B500C in the diameter range le 16 mm can be bent back after having been bent 90deg retaining the required mechanical properties also see 4421 bull Characteristic value Value of a property with a certain chance of exceeding or undershooting in a hypothetical infinite test series In this BRL the characteristic value is the value of a property with a chance of exceeding of 5 (p = 095) or 10 (p = 090) with a probability level of W = 90 or W = 75 with a normally assumed spread bull Cv values These are the specified minimum (maximum) characteristic values as defined in NEN 6008 bull a1 a2 a3 a4 value The a-values are value increasesdecreases (the so-called extra values in accordance with NEN 6008) with respect to the specified Cv values see the examples given below Here x is the average value and X is the individual value -- a1 x ge Cv + a1 (eg Re a1 = 10 so average value x ge 510 MPa) -- a2 X ge Cv ndash a2 (eg Re a1 = 15 so individual value x ge 485 MPa) -- a3 x le Cv + a3 (eg RmRe a3 = 0) -- a4 X le Cv + a4 (eg RmRe a4 = 002)

23 Indication of reinforcing steel types The reinforcing steel types are indicated as follows in NEN 60082008 (shortened for a full overview see NEN 6008 table 1)

National Assessment Guideline BRL 0501 01 September 2010 copy Kiwa NV - -

8

Cv values for Quality indication

NEN 60082008

(new)

Quality indication

NEN 60081991 (old)

Rm (MPa) Re (MPa) RmRe Re act Re nom

Agt ()

B 500 A FeB 500 HKN

550

500 500

105a -

- -

30ab 275

B 500 B B 500 C

FeB 500 HWL FeB 500 HK

550 550

500 500 500 500

108 115 c -le135 - -

- lt125 - -

50b 75bc 325 325

See for the footnotes NEN 6008 table 1 Table 1

24 Reinforcing steel on coils The mechanical properties of reinforcing steel obtained from winding reinforcing steel on coils substantially change during this production process in particular the yield at maximum load (Agt) Therefore NEN 6008 prescribes a 05 surplus value for the Agt (Cv) of reinforcing steel on coils The Agt (Cv) is then for B500 A 35 for B500 B 55 and for B500 C 8 respectively NB Reinforcing steel on coils is not covered by BRL 0501 but by BRL 0503

National Assessment Guideline BRL 0501 01 September 2010 copy Kiwa NV - -

9

3 Procedure for obtaining a quality statement

31 Initial audit The initial audit to be performed by the certification institute takes place by means of the performance and product requirements incorporated in this assessment guideline including test methods and will include depending on the nature of the product to be certified bull (Sample) testing to determine whether the products meet the product andor performance

requirements bull Assessment of the production process bull Assessment of the quality system and the IQC schedule bull Testing for the presence and functioning of other required procedures bull Assessment of the supplierrsquos processing regulations

32 Certification Upon completion of the initial audit the results are presented to the decision-maker This party will assess the results and determine whether the certificate can be granted or that additional data andor audits are needed before the certificate can be granted

National Assessment Guideline BRL 0501 01 September 2010 copy Kiwa NV - -

10

4 Product requirements and determination methods

41 General This chapter includes the product requirements that reinforcing steel must comply with as well as the determination methods to make sure that the requirements are complied with These requirements will be part of the technical specification of the product that is included in the product certificate The product certificate states that the reinforcing steel complies with article 4 of BRL 0501 which also implies that the reinforcing steel complies with NEN 6720 article 512 or NEN-EN 1990NEN-EN 1991-12 including the national annexes

42 Product requirements and determination methods The requirements and the determination methods for reinforcing steel have been laid down in

Number Title Date of issue NEN-EN 10080 Steel for the reinforcement of concrete ndash

Weldable reinforcing steel - General May 2005

NEN-EN 10080 1) Dutch translation Staal voor het wapenen van beton ndash Lasbaar betonstaal - Algemeen

June 2005

NEN 6008 Steel for the reinforcement of concrete July 2008 NEN-EN-ISO 15630-1

Steel for the reinforcement of concrete and prestressing of concrete ndash Test methods ndash Part 1 reinforcing bars wire rod and wire

2002-04-15

NEN-EN-ISO 15630-2

Steel for the reinforcement of concrete and prestressing of concrete ndash Test methods ndash Part 2 welded fabric

2002-04-15

1) The English version lsquoNEN-EN 10080 May 2005rsquo is binding Table 2

43 Product requirements supplementary to and contrary to NEN-EN 10080 and NEN 6008 the following applies

431 Lattice girders What has been stated about lattice girders in NEN-EN 10080 and NEN 6008 does not apply to this assessment guideline see for this BRL 0502 lsquoLattice girdersrsquo

432 Non-profiled or slightly profiled reinforcing steel Non-profiled or slightly profiled reinforcing steel is outside the scope of the regime of this BRL it may only be applied to lattice girders

433 Geometry of the profiling determination of fR and fP Determination of the profile factor fR andor fP is done in conformity with NEN-EN-ISO 15630-1 art 113

For determining fR and fP use can be made of the simplified formulas in conformity with NEN-EN-ISO 15630-1 article 1133 a and b Use of the simplified formulas in conformity with NEN-EN-ISO 15630-1 article 1133 c and 1133d is not allowed In order to make use of the simplified formulas in conformity with articles 1133a and 1133b it must be determined in advance during the initial audit whether use of the reinforcing steel produced by the supplier and the proposed simplified formula (Trapezium or Simpson) produces results for fR and fP

National Assessment Guideline BRL 0501 01 September 2010 copy Kiwa NV - -

11

that are greater than or equal to the value that is obtained when using the general formula for determining fR and fP (in conformity with article 1131)

434 Standard deviations Supplementary to the NEN-EN- 10080 and NEN 6008 the following values are valid for the maximum standard deviations of the variable properties

Re (MPa)

Re(act)Re(nom) RmRe Agt ()

B500A bars coils point welded fabric

30 006 002 15

B500B bars coils point welded fabric

30 006 002 bars 20 coils 20 point welded fabric 15

B500C bars coils point welded fabric

30 006 002 bars 25 coils 25 point welded fabric 15

Table 3

435 Geometry longitudinal rib Supplementary to NEN-EN-ISO 15630-1 art 1032 the rib width of the longitudinal rib if present must be measured as well The rib width is analogically measured as the rib height The requirements with respect to the longitudinal rib are mentioned in NEN 6008 table 1

436 Nominal mass per metre Contrary to NEN 6008 table 1 read lsquothe allowable deviation from the nominal mass per meterrsquo for lsquotolerance nominal diameterrsquo

437 Extra value for a2 Contrary to NEN 6008 table 1 lsquoextra valuersquo read a2 = 05 for the Agt of B500A

438 Chemical composition of reinforcing steel Contrary to NEN-EN-10080 (Dutch translation) art 713 table 2 explanation a the following applies Exceeding the maximum value for the carbon content by 003 (mass percentage) is allowed provided that the value of the carbon equivalent is decreased by 002 (mass percentage)rdquo

National Assessment Guideline BRL 0501 01 September 2010 copy Kiwa NV - -

12

439 Nominal diameters preferred range Supplementary to NEN-EN10080 the table below mentions the general and the preferred range of the nominal diameters The nominal diameters between brackets ( ) are not preferred diameters Nominal diameter

mm

Bars Coils and bars

straightened from coils

Point welded fabric

Nominal surface of the cross section

mm2

Nominal mass per

metre

kgm 40 (x) 126 0099 45 (x) 159 0125 50 (x) x 196 0154 55 (x) (x) 238 0187 60 x x x 283 0222 65 (x) (x) 332 0260 70 x x 385 0302 75 (x) (x) 442 0347 80 x x x 503 0395 85 (x) (x) 567 0445 90 x x 636 0499 95 (x) (x) 709 0556 100 x x x 785 0617 110 (x) x 950 0746 120 x x x 113 0888 140 x x x 154 121 160 x x x 201 158 200 x 314 247 250 x 491 385 280 (x) 616 483 320 x 804 631 400 x 1257 986 500 x 1963 154

Table 4

4310 Values for a1 - a4 NEN EN 100802005 section 81312 provides insufficient clarity and interpretation of how to apply these a-values The a-values included in NEN 60082008 are the absolute minimummaximum a-values that with respect to the a2 and a 4 values are for determining the individual absolute minimum and maximum variable mechanical properties as referred to in NEN EN 100802005 section 11 (testing in case of a dispute)

However when assessing the variable test results per test unit during the production inspection in the factory in conformity with NEN EN 100802005 section 813 1 in case of b) the manufacturer himself shall determine the a1234-values of the population concerned and record this in a solid procedure With these determined manufacturer-specific a-values every test unit must be tested in order to meet the required quality level in the long term ( x - ks ge Cv or x + ks le Cv) The a-values of the manufacturer must al least comply with the absolute minimummaximum a-values included in NEN 60082008 but they are usually higherlower (ie more critical)

The solid procedures with the a-values recorded for each population must always be up-to-date and demonstrate to the satisfaction of the CI that with this the required Cv values (for the longer term) are complied with If these solid procedures are (still) missing in conformity with NEN EN 100802005 section 8131 only situation a) applies so in principle all individual values of the test unit must comply with the specified Cv value

National Assessment Guideline BRL 0501 01 September 2010 copy Kiwa NV - -

13

When determining the a-values solid procedures are preferably applied using the standard deviations and the assumption probabilities

4311 Rib row distance Σe Contrary to NEN 6008 table 1 and analogue with NEN-EN 10080 read for lsquodistance rib rowsdistance Σe le 075drsquo The projection of the cross ribs must cover at least 75 of the circumference of the reinforcing steel to be calculated based on the nominal diameter In formula total distance between the rib rows Σe lt 025 πd

44 Determination methods and test criteria Supplementary and contrary to NEN-EN 10080 and NEN 6008 the following applies

441 Preliminary audit for acceptance Supplementary to NEN-EN 10080 the following data are to be provided for each of the diameters given by the certification institute before the start of the initial audit -- test results of 60 pieces from at least 3 casting loads with 20 samples each the individual

test results of 02 yield limit or flow limit ((Rp02 or Re) yield at maximum load (Agt) the tensile strength02 yield or flow limit ratio RmRp02 or Re if applicable the ratio of the actual 02 yield limit or flow limitthe nominal 02 yield limit or flow limit (ReactRenom) Also the statistic processing of these data with average value ( x ) standard deviation (s) and characteristic value (Cv)

-- test results of 5 pieces from the same loads with 5 samples each the individual test results of the bendability shearing force of point welded reinforcement fabrics mass per metre and profiling (profile factors fR fP rib height rib distance rib width rib flank α rib (inclination) angle distance between the rib rows and the longitudinal rib)

-- chemical composition of each casting load -- (casting) load numbers and roller data (min 10 tons per diameter) -- drawing or sketch of the profiling and the factory brand

442 Inspection for the attributive properties NEN-EN 10080 gives insufficient interpretation of the termination methods and test criteria for inspections for the attributive properties bendability shearing force with point welded reinforcement fabrics mass per metre and profiling (profile factors fR fP rib height rib distance rib width rib flank α rib (inclination) angle β distance between the rib rows and the longitudinal rib Contrary to NEN-EN 10080 with these attributive properties the sampling and the conformity assessment is done as follows -- with the continuous internal production inspection not for each test unit but repeatedly

for the 15 last tested bars of a diameter or a diameter-weld combination -- with the initial audit the test series is to be extended to 15 samples if necessary and to 60

samples when there is initial rejection -- with the periodic external inspection (audit) the results of the attributive properties

obtained during the audit are to be added to the internal test results of the manufacturer Testing If a maximum of 2 of the 15 measurements do not comply the sampling can be extended by 45 extra measurements with respect to the attributive property concerned In this case the attributive properties of a total of 60 test bars are available The property concerned then still complies if not more than 2 of the 60 measurements do not comply with the NEN 6008 The profiling is increasingly measured using an optical camera The manual measurement will be valid in case of disputes

4421 Inspection of the bend-bend tensile test with initial audit and during external inspections (audit testing) By means of a bend-bend back tensile test it is determined whether the reinforcing steel types B500B and B500C in the diameter range le 16 mm can be bent back once with an angle of 90deg

National Assessment Guideline BRL 0501 01 September 2010 copy Kiwa NV - -

14

without significant decrease of the Rp02 or Re RmRe and Agt compared with the non-bent bars The values may not be below the mentioned Cv values for the reinforcing steel type and delivery condition concerned Sampling and testing frequency

Delivery condition Diameter Inspection frequency bars and coils B500BB500C

d le 16 mm 6 samples of different barscoils from 3 (casting) loads for each selected diameter Samples are to be taken from the same barsloads as for the regular tensile tests

Performance of the test Take a sample of reinforcing steel of sufficient length for doing 2 tensile tests A normal tensile test is performed with the one part and a bend-bend back tensile test with the other part The minimum length for the bendbend back tensile test is 70 cm The preparation of the tensile test including the way of ageing and the way of bending is done in accordance with the stipulations in NEN-EN 10080 with the exception of the way of bending back and the bending mandrel diameter to be used The bending mandrel diameter is maximum 4d Bend the bar over a bending mandrel of maximum 4d with a maximum angle of 90deg Mark the bending zone (length ca 9d) Place the test piece in a vice or the like Place an appropriate pipe over the part of the test piece to be bent back preferably with an internal pipe diameter that is max 2 mm larger than the diameter of the test piece and bend the test piece straight again Try to make the test piece as straight as possible Here the difference between the one part and the other part of the test piece may be maximally the diameter of the test piece (the bayonet forming) Age the test piece in conformity with the stipulations of NEN-EN 10080 and perform the tensile test The test is considered to be satisfactory when - the results do not show any significant differences with the results of the non-bent test

pieces - the values are above the set Cv values If the values are not satisfactory find the cause and repeat the tests if necessary

443 Inspection for the variable properties Contrary to NEN-EN 10080 the sampling and testing is done in conformity with BRL 0501 annex 3 for the variable properties 02 yield limit or flow limit (Rp02 or Re) yield at maximum load (Agt) the tensile strength02 yield or flow limit ratio RmRp02 or Re if applicable the ratio of the actual 02 yield limit or flow limitthe nominal 02 yield limit or flow limit (ReactRenom) and the fatigue strength NEN-EN 10080 provides insufficient interpretation of the test requirements the determination methods and the test criteria for inspection for the fatigue properties Therefore the requirements given below apply supplementary to NEN-EN 10080

National Assessment Guideline BRL 0501 01 September 2010 copy Kiwa NV - -

15

4431 Inspection for the fatigue strength in initial audit Sampling and testing frequency

Delivery condition

Diameter Inspection frequency

bars and coils for d le 28 mm the middle and largest of the diameter range For d gt 28 mm the largest diameter

6 samples of different barscoils from 3 (casting) loads for each selected diameter (18 bars per diameter)

point welded fabrics

The smallest middle and largest diameter of the diameter range (always with the least favourable diameter combination)

5 samples of different bars with a point weld from 3 test units for each selected diameter (15 bars per diameter)

Test method a semi-statistical This simplified test is regarded as sufficient if the requirements given below are met

With reinforcing steel bars and coils B500B and B500C in the diameter range d le 28 mm with

the requirement aσ2 ge 175 MPa

a2σ = 175 MPa a2σ = 200 MPa Number of samples 10 sup2) Number of samples 8 sup2) Stress changes (106) Break Stress changes (106) Break

lt 15 lt 20 ge 20

none le l ge 9

lt 075 075 lt 10 10 lt 20 ge 20

none le l

le 2 1)

ge 5 1) le 3 breaks if no break occurred up to 1x106 tension changes sup2) total number 10 + 8 = 18

Table 5

With reinforcing steel bars B500B and B500C in the diameter range d gt 28 mm with the

requirement aσ2 ge 145 MPa

a2σ = 145 MPa a2σ = 170 MPa Number of samples 10 sup2) Number of samples 8 sup2) Stress changes (106) Break Stress changes (106) Break

lt 15 lt 20 ge 20

none le l ge 9

lt 075 075 lt 15 15 lt 20 ge 20

none le 2

le 2 1)

ge 4 1) le 4 breaks if no break occurred up to 15 x 106 tension changes sup2) total number 10 + 8 = 18

Table 6

With point welded fabrics B500A B500B and B500C as well as reinforcing steel bars and coils

B500A with the requirement aσ2 ge 100 MPa

a2σ = 100 MPa a2σ = 180 MPa Number of samples 10 sup1) Number of samples 5 sup1) Stress changes (106) Break Stress changes (106) Break

lt 15 lt 20 ge 20

none le l ge 9

lt 025 025 lt 05 ge 05

none le 3 ge 2

sup1) total number 10 + 5 = 15 Table 7

National Assessment Guideline BRL 0501 01 September 2010 copy Kiwa NV - -

16

Test method b fully statistical This test is done with the appropriate statistic methods considering the requirements p = 095 W = 75 set out in NEN 6008

Here the requirement Cv le x ndash ks must be complied with where x = the average value in which max 2 million load changes must be maintained

for the individual value of one test bar s = the estimate of the standard deviation of the population k = variation coefficient according to the table below (in conformity with ISO 16269-6) Cv = the characteristic value for the tension changes 1 106

n k n k n k n k 15 199 20 193 30 187 50 181 16 199 25 190 40 183 100 176 18 195

Table 8

4432 Inspection for the fatigue strength in periodic external inspections (audit testing) The numbers of test bars of one diameter given below are tested on an annual basis The sampling takes place in the presence of the inspector and is part of the audit testing -- barscoils 5 per year -- point welded fabrics 5 per year provided that in a period of 5 years at least 80 of all certified diameters (diameter combinations) has been tested With the 80 mentioned at least the following must have been tested

bull For barscoils the largest diameter in the range d le 28 mm and the largest diameter in the range d gt 28 mm

bull For point welded fabrics the smallest and the largest diameters always with the least favourable diameter combination

The test is considered to be satisfactory if

bull with the barscoils max 1 sample broke at lt 20106 stress changes and the other 4 samples have at least resisted 20106 tension changes

bull with the point welded fabrics max 1 sample broke at between 10106 and 20106 stress changes and the other 4 samples have at least resisted 20106 stress changes

For barscoils and point welded fabrics only a re-inspection can take place if no more than 2 samples broke at fewer than 20 106 stress changes In this case 5 extra samples are to be tested whereby no breaks at lt 20 106 stress changes may occur In this case the test series is satisfactory If this is not complied with further testing is necessary to find the cause and corrective measures are to be taken in order to avoid reoccurrence If necessary a new initial audit for the fatigue strength is to be performed

45 Biannual reporting The test results of all test units of the continuous inspections are to be collected and statistically evaluated for Re Agt RmRe and ReactRenom (if relevant) based on data of the production of the previous six months or the 200 most recent data dependent on which is the largest number These data shall biannually be sent to the certification institute in conformity with the model in annex 4

National Assessment Guideline BRL 0501 01 September 2010 copy Kiwa NV - -

17

46 Identification Contrary to NEN-EN 10080 art 101211 the product numbers (technical classes) are not assigned by a European organisation However the other requirements concerning the identification are observed in conformity with NEN 6008 and NEN-EN 10080

47 Certification mark Each packaging unit must have a label with the following obligatory indications

bull KOMO mark bull product certificate number + delivery condition (bars coils fabrics) bull the reinforcing steel type and the manufacturer number bull name andor logo of the manufacturer bull mentioning BRL0501

A packaging unit can be characterised

bull with reinforcing steel on coils as lsquothe coilrsquo marking min 1 label per coil bull with reinforcing steel bars as lsquothe bundlesrsquo marking min 1 label per bundle bull with point welded fabrics as lsquonumber of fabricsrsquo marking at least 1 label per unit of max

40 reinforcement fabrics or max 2 tons Additionally each point welded fabric in which only externally purchased and delivered reinforcing steel has been used must be marked in an indelible and non-removable way For example when using a ldquoSchlatter Etikettiermachinen Methoderdquo or equivalent the point welded reinforcement fabrics are to be marked with at least 1 label

National Assessment Guideline BRL 0501 01 September 2010 copy Kiwa NV - -

18

5 Requirements to the quality system

51 General This chapter includes the requirements that the quality system of the supplier has to meet

52 Administrator of the quality system A staff member is to be appointed as quality system manager within the organisational structure

53 Internal quality controlquality plan The supplier must have and use a schedule for internal quality control (an IQC schedule) in accordance with the model indicated in annex 2 In this IQC schedule the following must be demonstrably recorded

bull what aspects the manufacturer will inspect bull what methods will be used for these inspections bull the frequency of these inspections bull how to record and file the inspection results bull aspects with respect to the production of point welded reinforcement fabrics

Also the supplier must have a procedure for organising the production process of any post-stretching alignment and the reinforcement fabrics to be point welded and how this is implemented inspected and monitored This IQC schedule must have been derived from the IQC schedule included in the annex and must have been set up such that it gives the CI enough confidence that the requirements set out in this assessment guideline are continuously met

This must function at least 3 months before issuing the certificate

54 Procedures and work instructions The supplier must be able to submit

bull procedures for - handling out of spec products and (semi-)products to be repaired - corrective measures after observed defects - handling complaints about products andor services delivered - monitoring the quality using the extra value a - a4 - the work instructions and inspection forms used including the biannual reporting

(see annex 4)

55 Other requirements to the quality system

551 Reinforcing steel The following are regarded as sufficient proof that the purchased reinforcing steel complies with the product standard mentioned (NEN 6008) and other technical specifications

bull KOMO quality statement issued on the basis of BRL 0501 lsquoReinforcing steelrsquo by a certification andor attestation institute acknowledged by the Dutch Authority for Accreditation for the discipline involved

bull a (quality) statement the equivalence of which with the above-mentioned KOMO quality statement has been demonstrated

The traceability of the purchased reinforcing steel is guaranteed by the rolling mark and the labelling The origin (certificate number) of the reinforcing steel must be recorded at the initial audit

National Assessment Guideline BRL 0501 01 September 2010 copy Kiwa NV - -

19

552 Storage of reinforcing steel Reinforcing steel must be stored free from the ground Store and label reinforcing steel such that the chance of exchange for instance with foreign qualities is eliminated

National Assessment Guideline BRL 0501 01 September 2010 copy Kiwa NV - -

20

6 Requirements for the functioning of a test laboratory for testing reinforcing steel andor point welded reinforcement fabrics

61 The supplier has its own laboratory for testing reinforcing steel for its variable and attributive properties The laboratory equipment as well as the test methods must comply with

bull NEN-EN 10002-22001 Metallic materials tensile testing part 1 method of testing at ambient temperature

bull NEN-EN-ISO 15630-12002 Steel for the reinforcement and prestressing of concrete Test methods ndash Part 1 reinforcing bars wire rod and wire June 2002

bull NEN-EN-ISO 15630-22002 Steel for the reinforcement and prestressing of concrete Test methods ndash Part 2 welded fabric

Measuring equipment that has not been classified for one of the above-mentioned standards can be used as soon as they have been tested assessed and qualified by the CI

62 Outsourcing of testing Tests for the chemical composition and the fatigue strength of reinforcing steel can be outsourced as well De test results can be indicated as being lsquoperformed in a reliable wayrsquo if

bull The tests have been performed by a laboratory that meets the accreditation standard referred to in article 14 of this BRL NEN-EN-ISOIEC 17025 lsquoGeneral requirements for the competence of testing and calibration laboratoriesrsquo This accreditation must concern the performance of tests in conformity with the outsourcing assignment Besides a 31 or a 22 certificate of the results in conformity with NEN-EN 10204 is to be submitted or

bull The supplier receives the test results of the chemical composition from a company that has a product certificate of the lsquotechnical disciplinersquo (H9) mentioned in this BRL with the CI and the relevant measuring equipment in the laboratory concerned is covered by the product certificate audit

If the above requirements are not complied with the certification institute will perform or have performed the audit concerned itself In this case the certification institute will base its test on the accreditation standard NEN-EN-ISOIEC 17025

63 Verification audit An initial audit includes external verification of both the attributive and the variable properties Also an external verification for the performance of the used tensile tests takes place every two years The diameter is to be selected such that the diameters that occur most are tested in a period of 5 years When using a new tensile testing machinemeasuring equipment a verification audit is to be performed as well

National Assessment Guideline BRL 0501 01 September 2010 copy Kiwa NV - -

21

631 Variable properties For the verification of variable properties (the results of the tensile test) at least 15 random samples of one selected diameter must be taken in the presence of the inspector (audit testing) for each selected reinforcing steel type each of a length suitable for two test pieces for testing The selected representative diameters must change at the two-yearly verification With bars and coils the samples must have been spread over at least 3 loads of 1 diameter The samples for point welded reinforcement fabrics and the corresponding bars must come from 1 diameter combination produced on different days For each sample the two collected test pieces must be marked and then the test pieces must be bundled into two series of at least 15 test pieces A third series can be taken as spare series in case of discussions about the achieved results One series must be tested in the presence of the inspector at the manufacturerrsquos The inspector must have the other series tested at an external laboratory The time between the performances of both test series must be short enough to allow for neglecting any natural ageing of the testing material The test (tensile test) includes determination of the 02 yield limit or flow limit (Re) the tensile strength (Rm) the RmRe ratio and the yield with maximum load (Agt) of each individual test piece The thus obtained two series of measurement pairs must then be tested for their differences between both performances of the test Any systematic differences are to be tracked and eliminated

With the statistic comparison of two different performances of tests the differences of paired measurements are to be checked in relation with the hypothesis that the expected value of the average difference is zero (Student test) Rejection of this hypothesis indicates that there is a possibility of systematic differences For each variable property the xfi (i = 1n) of the measurement results of the manufacturer and the xei (i = 1hellip n) of the external institute must be calculated separately

bull Difference vi = xfi ndash xei considering the positive or negative difference and then the average difference

= sum

=

n

iiv

nv

1

1

bull standard deviation of the differences

minus

minus= sum

=

2

1

2

11 vnv

ns

n

iiv

bull value vsvt =

It must be verified for the variable properties the 02 yield limit or flow limit (Reee ) the tensile strength (Rmmm ) and the yield with maximum load (Aggg ttt ) whether or not t exceeds a critical limit to The critical values to depend on the number of tests and have been derived from ISO 3301 1975 with a = 001 (see table 9)

National Assessment Guideline BRL 0501 01 September 2010 copy Kiwa NV - -

22

Table 9 ndash Critical values of to

n to n to n to

10 103 11 096 12 090 13 085 14 080

15 077 16 074 17 071 18 068 19 066

20 064 25 056 30 050 35 047 40 043

If t gt to the hypothesis that there is no difference between the two series of paired measurements is rejected and so the cause of this must be found and eliminated This does not apply when sv and v are both below the reference values Sov and Vo in table 9 because of insufficient relevance

If t le to the hypothesis that there is no difference between the two series of paired measurements is not rejected The test can then be concluded unless Sv ge Sov In this case the standard deviation of the differences is excessive showing that the material concerned is unsuitable for the verification test Further investigation is then required

Table 10 ndash Reference values of Sov and Vo

sov vo 02 yield limit or flow limit 15 15 Tensile strength in MPa 15 20 Yield at maximum load in B500A B500B B500C

11 25 30

11 25 30

632 Attributive properties For the verification of attributive properties (mass per length chemical composition profiling bending test and if necessary a shearing test) the measurements of mass per length and profiling must be done in advance with the two series of at least 15 test pieces meant for the tensile test (see above) For the measurements of the bending test and shearing test (if applicable) the number of test pieces from the above described random samples must be extended with at least 5 test pieces for the bending test and if necessary the shearing test For the verification assessment of the chemical composition the number of test pieces is limited to a series of 3 test pieces from 3 test units Any combinations in the random samples of the above-mentioned verification assessments are allowed The test series at the manufacturerrsquos and the series of external tests (see above) should not produce other differences than those that can unambiguously be explained and eliminated

National Assessment Guideline BRL 0501 01 September 2010 copy Kiwa NV - -

23

7 Summary audit and inspection

Below a summary is provided of the tests to be performed for certification bull Initial audit the audit to determine whether all requirements in the BRL are met bull Inspection audit the audit performed after granting the certificate to determine whether

the certified products continuously meet the requirements set in the BRL Also indicates the frequency of the inspection audits to be performed by the certification institute (CI)

bull Inspection of the quality system inspection for compliance with the IQC schedule and the procedures

Here the frequency with which the certification institute must perform an inspection audit is indicated as well

Audit related to

Supervision by CI after granting the certificate1)

Requirement description Article BRL Initial audit

Inspection2) Frequency Product requirements bull Indication of product 2342 X X continuously bull Variable properties 4243 X X 34 x per year bull Chemical composition 4243 X X 34 x per year bull Bending test 42 X X 34 x per year bull Shearing test 42 X X 4 x per year bull Fatigue strength 4244 X X 1 x per year bull Geometry form 4243 X X 34 x per year bull Mass per unit 4243 X X 34 x per year bull Dimensions of fabricsbars 42 X X 34 x per year bull Bendndashbend back tensile

test 42 X X 3 x per year

Own testing laboratory bull Own laboratory 61 X X 1 x per year bull Outsourcing of tests 62 X X 34 x per year bull Verification audit 63 X X 1 x per 2 years System requirements bull IQC schedule 5 X X 34 x per year bull Quality mark 4647 X X 34 x per year

Table 11

1) In case of significant changes in the production process to be assessed by the CI the product requirements need to be tested again

2) The inspector or the certificate holder in the presence of the inspector will determine all product properties that can be performed within the visiting time (maximum 1 day) If this is not possible the CI and the certificate holder will make arrangements with respect to how the inspection will be performed

Inspection of the quality system The certification institute checks if the manufacturer meets the quality system requirements in chapter 5 of this BRL according to the frequency in article 86 of this BRL

National Assessment Guideline BRL 0501 01 September 2010 copy Kiwa NV - -

24

8 Requirements of de certification institute

81 General The certification institute must meet the requirements set out in EN 45011 Besides for the purpose of this BRL the institute must have been accredited by the Dutch Authority for Accreditation (RvA) or a similar body (an accreditation institute with which the RvA has entered into an agreement of mutual acceptance) The certification institute must have a set of regulations or a similar document defining the general rules to be observed during certification These particularly include bull The general rules for performance of the initial audit to be structured as follows

o The way in which suppliers are informed about the handling of a request o The performance of the audit o The decision based on the audit performed

bull The general rules concerning the performance of inspections and the inspection aspects used here

bull The measures the certification institute must take in case of defects bull The rules for terminating a certificate bull The possibility to make an appeal against decisions or measures of the certification

institute

82 Certification staff Staff involved in certification procedures include bull Auditors charged with performing the initial audit and assessing the reports of the

inspectors bull Inspectors charged with performing the external inspection at the supplierrsquos bull Decision-makers charged with taking decisions based on the initial audits performed

about continuation of certification based on inspections performed and about the necessity to take corrective measures

821 Qualification requirements A distinction is made with respect to 8211 Qualification requirements for the certification executives of a CI meeting the

requirements set out in EN 45011 8212 Supplementary qualification requirements for the certification executives of a CI as

determined by the Board of Experts for the subject of this BRL

National Assessment Guideline BRL 0501 01 September 2010 copy Kiwa NV - -

25

8211 Qualification requirements for the certification executives of a CI meeting the requirements set out in EN 45011

The qualification of the certification executives of a CI must comply with chapter 5 of EN 45011 The manual of the CI must describe how the qualification of the certification executives is performed

EN45011

Auditor

initial product assessment and assessment of the

production location

Inspector

assessment product location field and

projects after granting of certificate

Decision-maker

for granting and extending a certificate

Education General

Higher Vocational thinking and working level

Intermediate vocational working and thinking level

Higher Vocational thinking and working level

Education Specific

Basic training for auditing Basic training for auditing

Basic training for auditing

Experience General

1 year of relevant working experience with min 4 audits including 1 full initial audit done independently under supervision

1 year of relevant working experience with min 4 audits including 1 done independent under supervision

4 years of relevant working experience of which at least 1 year with respect to certification

Experience Specific

knowledge of BRL at detailed level and 4 audits related to the specific BRL or to similar BRLs

knowledge of BRL at detailed level and 4 audits related to the specific BRL or to similar BRLs

Basic knowledge of the specific certification schedule

8212 Supplementary qualification requirements for the certification executives of a CI as determined by the Board of Experts for the subject of this BRL

Certification staff Education Experience Auditor Higher vocational education level in one of the

following disciplines - Constructional engineering - Civil engineering - Mechanical engineering

2 years

Inspector Intermediate vocational education level in one of the following disciplines - ConstructionalCivil engineering - Materials science - Mechanical engineering

2 years

Decision-maker Higher vocational education level in one of the following disciplines - Constructional engineering - Civil engineering - Quality science - Mechanical engineering

4 years Managerial experience

822 Qualification Certification staff must be demonstrably qualified by comparing the education and experience with the requirements set out above If qualification takes place based on deviating criteria this must be laid down in writing The qualification authority is vested with

National Assessment Guideline BRL 0501 01 September 2010 copy Kiwa NV - -

26

bull Decision-makers qualification of auditors and inspectors bull Management of the certification institute qualification of decision-makers

83 Initial audit report The certification institute records the findings of the initial audit in a report The report must meet the following requirements bull Completeness the report makes a statement about all requirements set out in the

assessment guideline bull Traceability the findings the statement are based on must have been recorded in a

traceable way bull Basis for decision the decision-maker for granting a certificate must be able to base his

decision on the findings recorded in the report

84 Decision about granting the certificate The decision concerning the granting of the certificate must be made by a decision-maker who is qualified to do so and who has not been involved in the certificate audit himself The decision must have been recorded in a traceable way

85 Presentation of the quality statement The product certificate must be presented in conformity with the model included in the annex

86 Nature and frequency of external inspections The certification institute must regularly inspect the supplier for compliance with his obligations The Board of Experts will decide upon the frequency of the inspections At the time this assessment guideline took effect the frequency was set to bull 3 inspection visits per year at suppliers of hot-rolled products bull 4 inspection visits per year at suppliers of other products Inspections will in any case pertain to a number of matters including bull The product specifications laid down in the product specification bull The supplierrsquos production process bull The supplierrsquos IQC schedule and the results of the inspections performed by the supplier bull The correct way of marking the certified products bull Compliance with the required procedures The certification institute will lay down the findings of each inspection performed in a report in a traceable way

87 Reporting to the Board of Experts The certification institute must report on the certification activities performed at least once a year The report must include the following subjects bull Mutations in number of certificates (newlapsed) bull Number of inspections performed in relation to the determined frequency bull Inspection results bull Measures imposed in case of defects bull Complaints received from third parties with respect to certified products

88 Interpretation of requirements The Board of Experts may lay down the requirements set in this assessment guideline in a single separate interpretation document The certification institute is obliged to ensure whether an interpretation document has been drawn up and if so must make use of the interpretations laid down in this

89 Specific rules defined by the Board of Experts The Board of Experts has not defined specific rules that are to be followed with certification by the certification institute

National Assessment Guideline BRL 0501 01 September 2010 copy Kiwa NV - -

27

9 List of documents mentioned

91 Standardsnormative documents

NEN 6008 2008 Reinforcing steel NEN 6720 1995 Technical foundations for building constructions - TGB 1990 ndash

Regulations for concrete - TGB 1990 ndash Structural requirements and calculation methods (VBC 1995) September 1995 including amendment sheet A4 December 2007

NEN 6722 2002 Regulations for concrete ndash Execution December 2002 NEN 6723 1995 Regulations for concrete - Bridges ndash (VBB June 1995) Structural requirements

and calculation methods December 1995 including amendment sheet A1 December 2003

NEN-EN 1992 2005 Design of concrete structures NEN-EN 1994 2005 Design of composite steel and concrete structures NEN-EN 10002 2001 Metallic materials tensile testing - Part 1 Method of testing at ambient

temperature August 2001 NEN-EN 10080 2005 Steel for the reinforcement of concrete ndash Weldable reinforcing steel - General NEN-EN 10204 2004 Metallic products - Types of inspection documents October 2004 NEN-EN 45012 1998 General requirements for bodies operating assessment and

certificationregistration of quality systems NEN-EN-ISO 376 2004 Metallic materials - Calibration of force-proving instruments used for the

verification of uniaxial testing machines NEN-EN-ISO 7500-1 2004 Metallic materials - Verification of static uniaxial testing machines ndash

Part 1 Tensilecompression testing machines - Verification and calibration of the force-measuring system August 2004

NEN-EN-ISO 9513 2002 Metallic materials ndash Calibration of extensometers for uniaxial testing October 2002

NEN-EN-ISO 15630-1 2002 Steel for the reinforcement and prestressing of concrete - Test methods ndash Part 1 Reinforcing bars wire rod and wire June 2002

NEN-EN-ISO 15630-2 2002 Steel for the reinforcement and prestressing of concrete - Test methods ndash Part 2 Welded fabric

NEN-EN-ISOIEC 17020

2004 General criteria for the operation of various types of bodies performing inspection

NEN-EN-ISOIEC 17024

2003 Conformity assessment - General requirements for bodies operating certification of persons

NEN-EN-ISOIEC 17025

2005 General requirements for the competence of testing and calibration laboratories

ISO 3301 1975 Statistical interpretation of data ndash Comparison of two means in the case of paired observations

ISO 4965 1979 Axial load fatigue testing machines - Dynamic force calibration - Strain gauge technique April 1979

ISO 16269-6 2005 Statistical interpretation of data Determination of statistical tolerance intervals

Annex I Model certificate

Issued Replaces Issued date Valid until Indefinite Page 1 of 2

KOMOreg

Product certificate

ltName Productgt ltCertificate holdergt

STATEMENT OF CI This product certificate was issued on the basis of BRL lsquo lsquo in conformity with the regulations for Product Certification CI declares that the justifiable confidence exists that the name product supplied by the certificate holder meets the technical specifications laid down in this product certificate provided that name product has the KOMOreg mark as indicated in this product certificate Director CI Advice refer to wwwltCIgtnl to see if this certificate is valid

Certificate holder T F E I

Assessed Quality system Product

Periodic check

reg is a collective brand of Stichting Bouwkwaliteit

Annex II Model for IQC schedule or framework of IQC schedule

Subjects Aspects Method Frequency Registration

Basic materials or supplied materials bull Recipe sheets bull Inspection of incoming raw

materials bull Mechanical bull Chemical

Production process production equipment material bull Procedures bull Work instructions bull Equipment bull Material bull Process inspection

End products

Measuring and testing equipment

Measuring and testing equipment bull Measuring devices bull Calibration bull Outsourced tests

Logistics bull Internal transport bull Storage bull Packaging bull Preservation bull Identification or marking

of semi-finished and end products

Corrective measures Complaints handling

Annex III Sampling and testing overview

Type

on

derz

oek

1)

Doo

rlope

nd

inte

rn fa

brie

kson

derz

oek

Perio

diek

ex

tern

ond

erzo

ek (a

udit)

To

elat

ings

onde

rzoe

k

(type

onde

rzoe

k)

Type

bet

onst

aal

stav

enro

llen

per d

iam

eter

ge

punt

last

e w

apn

ette

n pe

r dia

-com

bina

tie

stav

enro

llen

3 bp

e va

n 1

diam

eter

8)

gepu

ntla

ste

wap

net

ten

3 bp

e va

n 1

dia-

com

bina

tie 7)

8)

stav

enro

llen

3 bp

e pe

r di

amet

er 6)

gepu

ntla

ste

wap

net

ten

3 bp

e pe

r dia

-co

mbi

natie

6) 7

) R

e 1

per 3

0 t

m

in 3

per

bpe

m

in 2

per

bpe

1

lang

s + d

war

s 5

per b

pe

5 pe

r bpe

3

lang

s + 2

dw

ars

10 p

er b

pe

10 p

er b

pe

5 la

ngs +

5 d

war

s R

mR

e id

em

idem

id

em

idem

id

em

idem

R

eac

tRe

nom

2)

idem

id

em

idem

id

em

idem

id

em

Agt

idem

id

em

idem

id

em

idem

id

em

Bui

gpro

ef

1 pe

r bpe

4)

idem

2

per b

pe

2 pe

r bpe

1

lang

s + 1

dw

ars

5 pe

r bpe

5

per b

pe

3 la

ngs +

2 d

war

s M

assa

per

m

idem

id

em 5)

id

em

idem

5)

idem

id

em 5)

G

eom

etrie

opp

en

pro

fielfa

ctor

id

em

idem

id

em

idem

id

em

Idem

Che

mis

che

sa

men

st +

Ceq

3)

1 pe

r lad

ing

1

per l

adin

g 1

per l

adin

g 1

per l

adin

g 1

per l

adin

g 1

per l

adin

g

Afs

chui

fpro

ef

nv

t m

in 2

per

bpe

n

vt

3 pe

r bpe

n

vt

3 pe

r bpe

B

uig-

te

rugb

uigt

rekp

roe

f

nv

t n

vt

2 pe

r bpe

n

vt

2 pe

r bpe

n

vt

Afm

etin

gen

nv

t m

in 1

per

bpe

n

vt

1 pe

r bpe

n

vt

1 pe

r bpe

V

erm

oeiin

g n

vt

nv

t 5

per j

aar

5 pe

r jaa

r 6

per b

pe 9)

5

per b

pe 10

)

1) The audit is always for each manufacturing process (hot-rolled-cooled -cold-stretched cold-profiles) of a certain type of reinforcing steel 2) If applicable (B500C) 3) Chemical composition + Ceq to be determined and submitted by the steel manufacturer not for each diameter (combination) 4) For bending mass and geometry surface + frfp min 1 per 150 tons 5) Can be determined for welding 6) Smallest largest and intermediate diameters (always skipping 2 consecutive diameters) of the range (deviating from EN 10080) 7) Always the most critical diameter combination that occurs 8) In a period of a maximum of 5 years number and spreading of diameters 9) For d le 28 mm the largest and middle diameters for gt 28 mm the largest diameter 10) The largest middle and smallest diameters Test unit is defined as -- barscoils the load or a part of the load (for bending mass and geometryprofile min 1 per 90 t) -- point welded reinforcement fabrics 50 tons of the same combination of reinforcing steel types and diameters manufactured with the same point welding machine

Annex IV Model for biannual reporting on reinforcing steel

Page 2: National Assessment Guideline - Kiwa · PDF fileThe NEN-EN 10080:2005 is not a harmonised standard and therefore a CE mark can not yet be attached to the products covered by this BRL

National Assessment Guideline BRL 0501 01 September 2010 copy Kiwa NV - -

1

Preface of Kiwa

This National Assessment Guideline (BRL = BeoordelingsRichtLijn) was drawn up by the Board of Experts lsquoReinforcing Materialsrsquo of Kiwa representing all stakeholders in the area of reinforcing steel This board also guides the performance of certification and if necessary revises this National Assessment Guideline This board is referred to where lsquoBoard of Expertsrsquo is mentioned in this National Assessment Guideline Kiwa will apply this National Assessment Guideline in connection with the Kiwa Regulations for Product Certification These regulations contain the procedures applied by Kiwa during the audit for obtaining the product certificate as well as the procedures for external inspections The governing Board of Experts must re-establish this BRL at least once every 5 years but before 1 September 2015 at the latest The NEN 6008 lsquoReinforcing steelrsquo 1991 with amendment sheet A11997 was highly out-of-date and by now this standard (NEN 60082008) has been reviewed in a condensed version based on the European standard NEN-EN 100802005 lsquoSteel for the reinforcement of concrete - Weldable reinforcing steel ndash Generalrsquo The reviewed version of this assessment guideline is in line with NEN-EN 10080 and NEN 6008 and thus lays the foundation of (product) certification of reinforcing steel in conformity with the Dutch requirements Binding statement This assessment guideline has been declared binding by Kiwa as from 01 September 2010

Kiwa Nederland BV

Sir W Churchill-laan 273

PO Box 70

2280 AB RIJSWIJK Tel 070 414 44 00 Fax +31 (0)70 414 44 20 wwwkiwanl copy Kiwa NV All rights reserved No part of this publication may be reproduced stored in a computerised database or published in any form or by any means whether electronic mechanical photocopying recording or otherwise without prior permission in writing from the publisher Without prejudice to the acceptance of the Assessment Guideline by the Building Harmonisation Committee of the Stichting Bouwkwaliteit as a National Assessment Guideline all rights rest with Kiwa Use of this Assessment Guideline by third parties for any purpose whatsoever is only allowed after entering into a written agreement with Kiwa defining the right of use

National Assessment Guideline BRL 0501 01 September 2010 copy Kiwa NV - -

2

Table of contents

1 Introduction 4 11 General 4 12 Area of application 4 13 CE mark 4 14 Acceptance of audit reports provided by the supplier 4 15 Certificate 5

2 Terminology 6 21 Terms 6 22 Definitions 6 23 Indication of reinforcing steel types 7 24 Reinforcing steel on coils 8

3 Procedure for obtaining a quality statement 9 31 Initial audit 9 32 Certification 9

4 Product requirements and determination methods 10 41 General 10 42 Product requirements and determination methods 10 43 Product requirements supplementary to and contrary to NEN-EN 10080 and NEN

6008 the following applies 10 431 Lattice girders 10 432 Non-profiled or slightly profiled reinforcing steel 10 433 Geometry of the profiling determination of fR and fP 10 434 Standard deviations 11 435 Geometry longitudinal rib 11 436 Nominal mass per metre 11 437 Extra value for a2 11 438 Chemical composition of reinforcing steel 11 439 Nominal diameters preferred range 12 4310 Values for a1 - a4 12 4311 Rib row distance Σe 13 44 Determination methods and test criteria Supplementary and contrary to NEN-EN

10080 and NEN 6008 the following applies 13 441 Preliminary audit for acceptance 13 442 Inspection for the attributive properties 13 4421 Inspection of the bend-bend tensile test with initial audit and during external

inspections (audit testing) 13 443 Inspection for the variable properties 14 4431 Inspection for the fatigue strength in initial audit 15 4432 Inspection for the fatigue strength in periodic external inspections (audit testing) 16 45 Biannual reporting 16 46 Identification 17 47 Certification mark 17

5 Requirements to the quality system 18 51 General 18

National Assessment Guideline BRL 0501 01 September 2010 copy Kiwa NV - -

3

52 Administrator of the quality system 18 53 Internal quality controlquality plan 18 54 Procedures and work instructions 18 55 Other requirements to the quality system 18 551 Reinforcing steel 18 552 Storage of reinforcing steel 19

6 Requirements for the functioning of a test laboratory for testing reinforcing steel andor point welded reinforcement fabrics 20

61 The supplier has its own laboratory for testing reinforcing steel for its variable and attributive properties 20

62 Outsourcing of testing 20 63 Verification audit 20 631 Variable properties 21 632 Attributive properties 22

7 Summary audit and inspection 23

8 Requirements of de certification institute 24 81 General 24 82 Certification staff 24 821 Qualification requirements 24 8211 Qualification requirements for the certification executives of a CI meeting the

requirements set out in EN 45011 25 8212 Supplementary qualification requirements for the certification executives of a CI as

determined by the Board of Experts for the subject of this BRL 25 822 Qualification 25 83 Initial audit report 26 84 Decision about granting the certificate 26 85 Presentation of the quality statement 26 86 Nature and frequency of external inspections 26 87 Reporting to the Board of Experts 26 88 Interpretation of requirements 26 89 Specific rules defined by the Board of Experts 26

9 List of documents mentioned 27 91 Standardsnormative documents 27

Annexes Annex 1 Model certificate Annex 2 Model for internal quality control schedule Annex 3 Sampling and testing overview Annex 4 Model for biannual reporting on reinforcing steel

National Assessment Guideline BRL 0501 01 September 2010 copy Kiwa NV - -

4

1 Introduction

11 General The requirements included in this assessment guideline are applied by certification institutes acknowledged for this purpose by the Dutch Accreditation Council when handling an application for or continuation of a product certificate for Reinforcing Steel The quality statement to be issued is designated as KOMOreg product certificate The technical area of the BRL is H9 - Steel for applications in concrete reinforcing steel prestressing steel prestressing systems thermal bridges coupling systems lattice girders steel fibres and glass-fibre bars Besides the requirements laid down in this assessment guideline the certification and attestation institutes will have additional requirements in the sense of general procedural requirements of certification and attestation as stated in the general certification and attestation regulations of the institute concerned This assessment guideline replaces BRL number 0501 dated 2000-01-15 including amendment sheet dated 2005-01-18 In any case the validity of the quality statements issued on the basis of this assessment guideline will terminate one year after this BRL was declared binding During the performance of the certification activities the certification institutes must meet the requirements laid down in the chapter lsquoRequirements of certification institutesrsquo

12 Area of application The products are in conformity with NEN 60082008 in line with NEN-EN 100802005 and intended for application in concrete constructions Explanation The European standard NEN-EN 100802005 provides the general requirements definitions and testing requirements for the performance properties of weldable reinforcing steel but does not provide a more detailed definition of reinforcing steel types with the corresponding performance requirements Therefore the Dutch standard NEN 60082008 provides the performance requirements (number values) of the Dutch reinforcing steel types that comply with NEN-EN 100802005 This will be described in more detail in this BRL

13 CE mark Relationship between the Building Decree and the European Construction Products Directive (CPD 89106EEC) No harmonised European standard (NEN-EN) is applicable to these products yet The NEN-EN 100802005 is not a harmonised standard and therefore a CE mark can not yet be attached to the products covered by this BRL

14 Acceptance of audit reports provided by the supplier If the supplier submits reports of audit institutes or laboratories in order to demonstrate that the requirements of the BRL are met they must show that these were drawn up by an institute that complies with the applicable accreditation standard being bull NEN-EN-ISOIEC 17025 for laboratories bull NEN-EN-ISOIEC 17020 for inspection institutes bull NEN-EN 45011 for certification institutes certifying products bull NEN-EN-ISOIEC 17021 for certification institutes certifying systems bull NEN-EN-ISOIEC 17024 for certification institutes certifying persons

National Assessment Guideline BRL 0501 01 September 2010 copy Kiwa NV - -

5

The institute is supposed to meet these criteria when it can submit an accreditation certificate issued by the Dutch Authority for Accreditation (RvA) or an accreditation institute with which the RvA has entered into an agreement of mutual acceptance This accreditation must apply to the specific audit required for this BRL If no accreditation certificate can be submitted the certification institute itself will verify whether the accreditation standard is met or (have) perform(ed) the audit concerned again itself

15 Certificate The model of the KOMOreg product certificate based on this BRL is included as an annex to this BRL

National Assessment Guideline BRL 0501 01 September 2010 copy Kiwa NV - -

6

2 Terminology

21 Terms This assessment guideline uses the following definitions bull Assessment guideline The arrangements made in the Board of Experts concerning the subject of certification bull Board of Experts The Board of Experts lsquoReinforcing Materialsrsquo bull Supplier

The party responsible for continuous compliance of the products with the requirements the certification has been based on

bull Internal Quality Control (IQC) schedule A description of the quality inspections performed by the supplier as part of its quality system

bull Initial audit (type audit) The preliminary audit to determine whether all requirements set out in the BRL are met bull Internal production inspection audit (by the manufacturer)

The continuous internal production inspection audit to make sure that the certified products constantly comply with the requirements set out in the BRL For this the manufacturer performs among other things tensile tests bending tests measurements of the geometry of the profiling and chemical analyses The fatigue tests are usually performed in an external laboratory

bull External periodic audit The external audit performed after granting of the certificate to make sure that the certified products constantly comply with the requirements set out in the BRL During the external periodic audit the certification institute takes random samples for tensile and bending tests measurements of the geometry of the profiling and chemical analyses Additionally samples are periodically assigned for performing fatigue tests This is also called lsquoaudit testingrsquo The results are tested against the requirements set out in the BRL

bull External verification audit The external verification audit performed during the initial audit and subsequently every two years for verification of the determination of the variable and attributive properties For this two series of similar test pieces are taken the test results of which are compared in pairs for their mutual differences

22 Definitions In addition to the terms and definitions in NEN-EN 100802005 the following definitions apply in this BRL bull Fatigue strength

NEN 6008 requires for the fatigue strength a minimum tension ripple 2σa with an upper tensile of 06 Re (Cv) A tension ripple is the tension change from a middle tension through an upper and lower tension back to the middle tension (2σa = tension ripple)

National Assessment Guideline BRL 0501 01 September 2010 copy Kiwa NV - -

7

Bovenspanning = upper force Middenspanning = middle force Onderspanning = lower force Cyclus = cycle Figure 1 stress change

bull Nominal diameter (d) The diameter of an imaginary bar with a circle-shaped cross-section of the same length and volume as the actual bar with profiled surface excluding tolerances bull Variable properties Property to which a quantitative value is assigned when assessing the measurement In NEN 6008 these are the properties 02 yield limit (Rp02) or flow limit (Re) yield at maximum load (Agt) the tensile strengthflow limit ratio (RmRe) the ratio of the actual flow limitnominal flow limit (ReactRenom) and fatigue strength (2σa) In conformity with NEN-EN 10080 section 7333 the upper flow limit (ReH) applies to the flow limit (Re) If there is no flow the 02 yield limit (Rp02) is to be determined

bull Attributive properties Property to which a value is assigned during the assessment that can only be regarded as good or wrong In NEN 6008 these are the properties nominal diameter mass per length profiling (profile factors fR fP rib height rib distance rib width rib flank angle rib (inclination) angle distance of rib rows and longitudinal rib) bending test shearing test and chemical composition bull Bendndashbend back tensile test Supplementary to NEN-EN-10080 and NEN 6008 the bend-bend back tensile test (attributive) is to be performed to determine whether the reinforcing steel types B500B and B500C in the diameter range le 16 mm can be bent back after having been bent 90deg retaining the required mechanical properties also see 4421 bull Characteristic value Value of a property with a certain chance of exceeding or undershooting in a hypothetical infinite test series In this BRL the characteristic value is the value of a property with a chance of exceeding of 5 (p = 095) or 10 (p = 090) with a probability level of W = 90 or W = 75 with a normally assumed spread bull Cv values These are the specified minimum (maximum) characteristic values as defined in NEN 6008 bull a1 a2 a3 a4 value The a-values are value increasesdecreases (the so-called extra values in accordance with NEN 6008) with respect to the specified Cv values see the examples given below Here x is the average value and X is the individual value -- a1 x ge Cv + a1 (eg Re a1 = 10 so average value x ge 510 MPa) -- a2 X ge Cv ndash a2 (eg Re a1 = 15 so individual value x ge 485 MPa) -- a3 x le Cv + a3 (eg RmRe a3 = 0) -- a4 X le Cv + a4 (eg RmRe a4 = 002)

23 Indication of reinforcing steel types The reinforcing steel types are indicated as follows in NEN 60082008 (shortened for a full overview see NEN 6008 table 1)

National Assessment Guideline BRL 0501 01 September 2010 copy Kiwa NV - -

8

Cv values for Quality indication

NEN 60082008

(new)

Quality indication

NEN 60081991 (old)

Rm (MPa) Re (MPa) RmRe Re act Re nom

Agt ()

B 500 A FeB 500 HKN

550

500 500

105a -

- -

30ab 275

B 500 B B 500 C

FeB 500 HWL FeB 500 HK

550 550

500 500 500 500

108 115 c -le135 - -

- lt125 - -

50b 75bc 325 325

See for the footnotes NEN 6008 table 1 Table 1

24 Reinforcing steel on coils The mechanical properties of reinforcing steel obtained from winding reinforcing steel on coils substantially change during this production process in particular the yield at maximum load (Agt) Therefore NEN 6008 prescribes a 05 surplus value for the Agt (Cv) of reinforcing steel on coils The Agt (Cv) is then for B500 A 35 for B500 B 55 and for B500 C 8 respectively NB Reinforcing steel on coils is not covered by BRL 0501 but by BRL 0503

National Assessment Guideline BRL 0501 01 September 2010 copy Kiwa NV - -

9

3 Procedure for obtaining a quality statement

31 Initial audit The initial audit to be performed by the certification institute takes place by means of the performance and product requirements incorporated in this assessment guideline including test methods and will include depending on the nature of the product to be certified bull (Sample) testing to determine whether the products meet the product andor performance

requirements bull Assessment of the production process bull Assessment of the quality system and the IQC schedule bull Testing for the presence and functioning of other required procedures bull Assessment of the supplierrsquos processing regulations

32 Certification Upon completion of the initial audit the results are presented to the decision-maker This party will assess the results and determine whether the certificate can be granted or that additional data andor audits are needed before the certificate can be granted

National Assessment Guideline BRL 0501 01 September 2010 copy Kiwa NV - -

10

4 Product requirements and determination methods

41 General This chapter includes the product requirements that reinforcing steel must comply with as well as the determination methods to make sure that the requirements are complied with These requirements will be part of the technical specification of the product that is included in the product certificate The product certificate states that the reinforcing steel complies with article 4 of BRL 0501 which also implies that the reinforcing steel complies with NEN 6720 article 512 or NEN-EN 1990NEN-EN 1991-12 including the national annexes

42 Product requirements and determination methods The requirements and the determination methods for reinforcing steel have been laid down in

Number Title Date of issue NEN-EN 10080 Steel for the reinforcement of concrete ndash

Weldable reinforcing steel - General May 2005

NEN-EN 10080 1) Dutch translation Staal voor het wapenen van beton ndash Lasbaar betonstaal - Algemeen

June 2005

NEN 6008 Steel for the reinforcement of concrete July 2008 NEN-EN-ISO 15630-1

Steel for the reinforcement of concrete and prestressing of concrete ndash Test methods ndash Part 1 reinforcing bars wire rod and wire

2002-04-15

NEN-EN-ISO 15630-2

Steel for the reinforcement of concrete and prestressing of concrete ndash Test methods ndash Part 2 welded fabric

2002-04-15

1) The English version lsquoNEN-EN 10080 May 2005rsquo is binding Table 2

43 Product requirements supplementary to and contrary to NEN-EN 10080 and NEN 6008 the following applies

431 Lattice girders What has been stated about lattice girders in NEN-EN 10080 and NEN 6008 does not apply to this assessment guideline see for this BRL 0502 lsquoLattice girdersrsquo

432 Non-profiled or slightly profiled reinforcing steel Non-profiled or slightly profiled reinforcing steel is outside the scope of the regime of this BRL it may only be applied to lattice girders

433 Geometry of the profiling determination of fR and fP Determination of the profile factor fR andor fP is done in conformity with NEN-EN-ISO 15630-1 art 113

For determining fR and fP use can be made of the simplified formulas in conformity with NEN-EN-ISO 15630-1 article 1133 a and b Use of the simplified formulas in conformity with NEN-EN-ISO 15630-1 article 1133 c and 1133d is not allowed In order to make use of the simplified formulas in conformity with articles 1133a and 1133b it must be determined in advance during the initial audit whether use of the reinforcing steel produced by the supplier and the proposed simplified formula (Trapezium or Simpson) produces results for fR and fP

National Assessment Guideline BRL 0501 01 September 2010 copy Kiwa NV - -

11

that are greater than or equal to the value that is obtained when using the general formula for determining fR and fP (in conformity with article 1131)

434 Standard deviations Supplementary to the NEN-EN- 10080 and NEN 6008 the following values are valid for the maximum standard deviations of the variable properties

Re (MPa)

Re(act)Re(nom) RmRe Agt ()

B500A bars coils point welded fabric

30 006 002 15

B500B bars coils point welded fabric

30 006 002 bars 20 coils 20 point welded fabric 15

B500C bars coils point welded fabric

30 006 002 bars 25 coils 25 point welded fabric 15

Table 3

435 Geometry longitudinal rib Supplementary to NEN-EN-ISO 15630-1 art 1032 the rib width of the longitudinal rib if present must be measured as well The rib width is analogically measured as the rib height The requirements with respect to the longitudinal rib are mentioned in NEN 6008 table 1

436 Nominal mass per metre Contrary to NEN 6008 table 1 read lsquothe allowable deviation from the nominal mass per meterrsquo for lsquotolerance nominal diameterrsquo

437 Extra value for a2 Contrary to NEN 6008 table 1 lsquoextra valuersquo read a2 = 05 for the Agt of B500A

438 Chemical composition of reinforcing steel Contrary to NEN-EN-10080 (Dutch translation) art 713 table 2 explanation a the following applies Exceeding the maximum value for the carbon content by 003 (mass percentage) is allowed provided that the value of the carbon equivalent is decreased by 002 (mass percentage)rdquo

National Assessment Guideline BRL 0501 01 September 2010 copy Kiwa NV - -

12

439 Nominal diameters preferred range Supplementary to NEN-EN10080 the table below mentions the general and the preferred range of the nominal diameters The nominal diameters between brackets ( ) are not preferred diameters Nominal diameter

mm

Bars Coils and bars

straightened from coils

Point welded fabric

Nominal surface of the cross section

mm2

Nominal mass per

metre

kgm 40 (x) 126 0099 45 (x) 159 0125 50 (x) x 196 0154 55 (x) (x) 238 0187 60 x x x 283 0222 65 (x) (x) 332 0260 70 x x 385 0302 75 (x) (x) 442 0347 80 x x x 503 0395 85 (x) (x) 567 0445 90 x x 636 0499 95 (x) (x) 709 0556 100 x x x 785 0617 110 (x) x 950 0746 120 x x x 113 0888 140 x x x 154 121 160 x x x 201 158 200 x 314 247 250 x 491 385 280 (x) 616 483 320 x 804 631 400 x 1257 986 500 x 1963 154

Table 4

4310 Values for a1 - a4 NEN EN 100802005 section 81312 provides insufficient clarity and interpretation of how to apply these a-values The a-values included in NEN 60082008 are the absolute minimummaximum a-values that with respect to the a2 and a 4 values are for determining the individual absolute minimum and maximum variable mechanical properties as referred to in NEN EN 100802005 section 11 (testing in case of a dispute)

However when assessing the variable test results per test unit during the production inspection in the factory in conformity with NEN EN 100802005 section 813 1 in case of b) the manufacturer himself shall determine the a1234-values of the population concerned and record this in a solid procedure With these determined manufacturer-specific a-values every test unit must be tested in order to meet the required quality level in the long term ( x - ks ge Cv or x + ks le Cv) The a-values of the manufacturer must al least comply with the absolute minimummaximum a-values included in NEN 60082008 but they are usually higherlower (ie more critical)

The solid procedures with the a-values recorded for each population must always be up-to-date and demonstrate to the satisfaction of the CI that with this the required Cv values (for the longer term) are complied with If these solid procedures are (still) missing in conformity with NEN EN 100802005 section 8131 only situation a) applies so in principle all individual values of the test unit must comply with the specified Cv value

National Assessment Guideline BRL 0501 01 September 2010 copy Kiwa NV - -

13

When determining the a-values solid procedures are preferably applied using the standard deviations and the assumption probabilities

4311 Rib row distance Σe Contrary to NEN 6008 table 1 and analogue with NEN-EN 10080 read for lsquodistance rib rowsdistance Σe le 075drsquo The projection of the cross ribs must cover at least 75 of the circumference of the reinforcing steel to be calculated based on the nominal diameter In formula total distance between the rib rows Σe lt 025 πd

44 Determination methods and test criteria Supplementary and contrary to NEN-EN 10080 and NEN 6008 the following applies

441 Preliminary audit for acceptance Supplementary to NEN-EN 10080 the following data are to be provided for each of the diameters given by the certification institute before the start of the initial audit -- test results of 60 pieces from at least 3 casting loads with 20 samples each the individual

test results of 02 yield limit or flow limit ((Rp02 or Re) yield at maximum load (Agt) the tensile strength02 yield or flow limit ratio RmRp02 or Re if applicable the ratio of the actual 02 yield limit or flow limitthe nominal 02 yield limit or flow limit (ReactRenom) Also the statistic processing of these data with average value ( x ) standard deviation (s) and characteristic value (Cv)

-- test results of 5 pieces from the same loads with 5 samples each the individual test results of the bendability shearing force of point welded reinforcement fabrics mass per metre and profiling (profile factors fR fP rib height rib distance rib width rib flank α rib (inclination) angle distance between the rib rows and the longitudinal rib)

-- chemical composition of each casting load -- (casting) load numbers and roller data (min 10 tons per diameter) -- drawing or sketch of the profiling and the factory brand

442 Inspection for the attributive properties NEN-EN 10080 gives insufficient interpretation of the termination methods and test criteria for inspections for the attributive properties bendability shearing force with point welded reinforcement fabrics mass per metre and profiling (profile factors fR fP rib height rib distance rib width rib flank α rib (inclination) angle β distance between the rib rows and the longitudinal rib Contrary to NEN-EN 10080 with these attributive properties the sampling and the conformity assessment is done as follows -- with the continuous internal production inspection not for each test unit but repeatedly

for the 15 last tested bars of a diameter or a diameter-weld combination -- with the initial audit the test series is to be extended to 15 samples if necessary and to 60

samples when there is initial rejection -- with the periodic external inspection (audit) the results of the attributive properties

obtained during the audit are to be added to the internal test results of the manufacturer Testing If a maximum of 2 of the 15 measurements do not comply the sampling can be extended by 45 extra measurements with respect to the attributive property concerned In this case the attributive properties of a total of 60 test bars are available The property concerned then still complies if not more than 2 of the 60 measurements do not comply with the NEN 6008 The profiling is increasingly measured using an optical camera The manual measurement will be valid in case of disputes

4421 Inspection of the bend-bend tensile test with initial audit and during external inspections (audit testing) By means of a bend-bend back tensile test it is determined whether the reinforcing steel types B500B and B500C in the diameter range le 16 mm can be bent back once with an angle of 90deg

National Assessment Guideline BRL 0501 01 September 2010 copy Kiwa NV - -

14

without significant decrease of the Rp02 or Re RmRe and Agt compared with the non-bent bars The values may not be below the mentioned Cv values for the reinforcing steel type and delivery condition concerned Sampling and testing frequency

Delivery condition Diameter Inspection frequency bars and coils B500BB500C

d le 16 mm 6 samples of different barscoils from 3 (casting) loads for each selected diameter Samples are to be taken from the same barsloads as for the regular tensile tests

Performance of the test Take a sample of reinforcing steel of sufficient length for doing 2 tensile tests A normal tensile test is performed with the one part and a bend-bend back tensile test with the other part The minimum length for the bendbend back tensile test is 70 cm The preparation of the tensile test including the way of ageing and the way of bending is done in accordance with the stipulations in NEN-EN 10080 with the exception of the way of bending back and the bending mandrel diameter to be used The bending mandrel diameter is maximum 4d Bend the bar over a bending mandrel of maximum 4d with a maximum angle of 90deg Mark the bending zone (length ca 9d) Place the test piece in a vice or the like Place an appropriate pipe over the part of the test piece to be bent back preferably with an internal pipe diameter that is max 2 mm larger than the diameter of the test piece and bend the test piece straight again Try to make the test piece as straight as possible Here the difference between the one part and the other part of the test piece may be maximally the diameter of the test piece (the bayonet forming) Age the test piece in conformity with the stipulations of NEN-EN 10080 and perform the tensile test The test is considered to be satisfactory when - the results do not show any significant differences with the results of the non-bent test

pieces - the values are above the set Cv values If the values are not satisfactory find the cause and repeat the tests if necessary

443 Inspection for the variable properties Contrary to NEN-EN 10080 the sampling and testing is done in conformity with BRL 0501 annex 3 for the variable properties 02 yield limit or flow limit (Rp02 or Re) yield at maximum load (Agt) the tensile strength02 yield or flow limit ratio RmRp02 or Re if applicable the ratio of the actual 02 yield limit or flow limitthe nominal 02 yield limit or flow limit (ReactRenom) and the fatigue strength NEN-EN 10080 provides insufficient interpretation of the test requirements the determination methods and the test criteria for inspection for the fatigue properties Therefore the requirements given below apply supplementary to NEN-EN 10080

National Assessment Guideline BRL 0501 01 September 2010 copy Kiwa NV - -

15

4431 Inspection for the fatigue strength in initial audit Sampling and testing frequency

Delivery condition

Diameter Inspection frequency

bars and coils for d le 28 mm the middle and largest of the diameter range For d gt 28 mm the largest diameter

6 samples of different barscoils from 3 (casting) loads for each selected diameter (18 bars per diameter)

point welded fabrics

The smallest middle and largest diameter of the diameter range (always with the least favourable diameter combination)

5 samples of different bars with a point weld from 3 test units for each selected diameter (15 bars per diameter)

Test method a semi-statistical This simplified test is regarded as sufficient if the requirements given below are met

With reinforcing steel bars and coils B500B and B500C in the diameter range d le 28 mm with

the requirement aσ2 ge 175 MPa

a2σ = 175 MPa a2σ = 200 MPa Number of samples 10 sup2) Number of samples 8 sup2) Stress changes (106) Break Stress changes (106) Break

lt 15 lt 20 ge 20

none le l ge 9

lt 075 075 lt 10 10 lt 20 ge 20

none le l

le 2 1)

ge 5 1) le 3 breaks if no break occurred up to 1x106 tension changes sup2) total number 10 + 8 = 18

Table 5

With reinforcing steel bars B500B and B500C in the diameter range d gt 28 mm with the

requirement aσ2 ge 145 MPa

a2σ = 145 MPa a2σ = 170 MPa Number of samples 10 sup2) Number of samples 8 sup2) Stress changes (106) Break Stress changes (106) Break

lt 15 lt 20 ge 20

none le l ge 9

lt 075 075 lt 15 15 lt 20 ge 20

none le 2

le 2 1)

ge 4 1) le 4 breaks if no break occurred up to 15 x 106 tension changes sup2) total number 10 + 8 = 18

Table 6

With point welded fabrics B500A B500B and B500C as well as reinforcing steel bars and coils

B500A with the requirement aσ2 ge 100 MPa

a2σ = 100 MPa a2σ = 180 MPa Number of samples 10 sup1) Number of samples 5 sup1) Stress changes (106) Break Stress changes (106) Break

lt 15 lt 20 ge 20

none le l ge 9

lt 025 025 lt 05 ge 05

none le 3 ge 2

sup1) total number 10 + 5 = 15 Table 7

National Assessment Guideline BRL 0501 01 September 2010 copy Kiwa NV - -

16

Test method b fully statistical This test is done with the appropriate statistic methods considering the requirements p = 095 W = 75 set out in NEN 6008

Here the requirement Cv le x ndash ks must be complied with where x = the average value in which max 2 million load changes must be maintained

for the individual value of one test bar s = the estimate of the standard deviation of the population k = variation coefficient according to the table below (in conformity with ISO 16269-6) Cv = the characteristic value for the tension changes 1 106

n k n k n k n k 15 199 20 193 30 187 50 181 16 199 25 190 40 183 100 176 18 195

Table 8

4432 Inspection for the fatigue strength in periodic external inspections (audit testing) The numbers of test bars of one diameter given below are tested on an annual basis The sampling takes place in the presence of the inspector and is part of the audit testing -- barscoils 5 per year -- point welded fabrics 5 per year provided that in a period of 5 years at least 80 of all certified diameters (diameter combinations) has been tested With the 80 mentioned at least the following must have been tested

bull For barscoils the largest diameter in the range d le 28 mm and the largest diameter in the range d gt 28 mm

bull For point welded fabrics the smallest and the largest diameters always with the least favourable diameter combination

The test is considered to be satisfactory if

bull with the barscoils max 1 sample broke at lt 20106 stress changes and the other 4 samples have at least resisted 20106 tension changes

bull with the point welded fabrics max 1 sample broke at between 10106 and 20106 stress changes and the other 4 samples have at least resisted 20106 stress changes

For barscoils and point welded fabrics only a re-inspection can take place if no more than 2 samples broke at fewer than 20 106 stress changes In this case 5 extra samples are to be tested whereby no breaks at lt 20 106 stress changes may occur In this case the test series is satisfactory If this is not complied with further testing is necessary to find the cause and corrective measures are to be taken in order to avoid reoccurrence If necessary a new initial audit for the fatigue strength is to be performed

45 Biannual reporting The test results of all test units of the continuous inspections are to be collected and statistically evaluated for Re Agt RmRe and ReactRenom (if relevant) based on data of the production of the previous six months or the 200 most recent data dependent on which is the largest number These data shall biannually be sent to the certification institute in conformity with the model in annex 4

National Assessment Guideline BRL 0501 01 September 2010 copy Kiwa NV - -

17

46 Identification Contrary to NEN-EN 10080 art 101211 the product numbers (technical classes) are not assigned by a European organisation However the other requirements concerning the identification are observed in conformity with NEN 6008 and NEN-EN 10080

47 Certification mark Each packaging unit must have a label with the following obligatory indications

bull KOMO mark bull product certificate number + delivery condition (bars coils fabrics) bull the reinforcing steel type and the manufacturer number bull name andor logo of the manufacturer bull mentioning BRL0501

A packaging unit can be characterised

bull with reinforcing steel on coils as lsquothe coilrsquo marking min 1 label per coil bull with reinforcing steel bars as lsquothe bundlesrsquo marking min 1 label per bundle bull with point welded fabrics as lsquonumber of fabricsrsquo marking at least 1 label per unit of max

40 reinforcement fabrics or max 2 tons Additionally each point welded fabric in which only externally purchased and delivered reinforcing steel has been used must be marked in an indelible and non-removable way For example when using a ldquoSchlatter Etikettiermachinen Methoderdquo or equivalent the point welded reinforcement fabrics are to be marked with at least 1 label

National Assessment Guideline BRL 0501 01 September 2010 copy Kiwa NV - -

18

5 Requirements to the quality system

51 General This chapter includes the requirements that the quality system of the supplier has to meet

52 Administrator of the quality system A staff member is to be appointed as quality system manager within the organisational structure

53 Internal quality controlquality plan The supplier must have and use a schedule for internal quality control (an IQC schedule) in accordance with the model indicated in annex 2 In this IQC schedule the following must be demonstrably recorded

bull what aspects the manufacturer will inspect bull what methods will be used for these inspections bull the frequency of these inspections bull how to record and file the inspection results bull aspects with respect to the production of point welded reinforcement fabrics

Also the supplier must have a procedure for organising the production process of any post-stretching alignment and the reinforcement fabrics to be point welded and how this is implemented inspected and monitored This IQC schedule must have been derived from the IQC schedule included in the annex and must have been set up such that it gives the CI enough confidence that the requirements set out in this assessment guideline are continuously met

This must function at least 3 months before issuing the certificate

54 Procedures and work instructions The supplier must be able to submit

bull procedures for - handling out of spec products and (semi-)products to be repaired - corrective measures after observed defects - handling complaints about products andor services delivered - monitoring the quality using the extra value a - a4 - the work instructions and inspection forms used including the biannual reporting

(see annex 4)

55 Other requirements to the quality system

551 Reinforcing steel The following are regarded as sufficient proof that the purchased reinforcing steel complies with the product standard mentioned (NEN 6008) and other technical specifications

bull KOMO quality statement issued on the basis of BRL 0501 lsquoReinforcing steelrsquo by a certification andor attestation institute acknowledged by the Dutch Authority for Accreditation for the discipline involved

bull a (quality) statement the equivalence of which with the above-mentioned KOMO quality statement has been demonstrated

The traceability of the purchased reinforcing steel is guaranteed by the rolling mark and the labelling The origin (certificate number) of the reinforcing steel must be recorded at the initial audit

National Assessment Guideline BRL 0501 01 September 2010 copy Kiwa NV - -

19

552 Storage of reinforcing steel Reinforcing steel must be stored free from the ground Store and label reinforcing steel such that the chance of exchange for instance with foreign qualities is eliminated

National Assessment Guideline BRL 0501 01 September 2010 copy Kiwa NV - -

20

6 Requirements for the functioning of a test laboratory for testing reinforcing steel andor point welded reinforcement fabrics

61 The supplier has its own laboratory for testing reinforcing steel for its variable and attributive properties The laboratory equipment as well as the test methods must comply with

bull NEN-EN 10002-22001 Metallic materials tensile testing part 1 method of testing at ambient temperature

bull NEN-EN-ISO 15630-12002 Steel for the reinforcement and prestressing of concrete Test methods ndash Part 1 reinforcing bars wire rod and wire June 2002

bull NEN-EN-ISO 15630-22002 Steel for the reinforcement and prestressing of concrete Test methods ndash Part 2 welded fabric

Measuring equipment that has not been classified for one of the above-mentioned standards can be used as soon as they have been tested assessed and qualified by the CI

62 Outsourcing of testing Tests for the chemical composition and the fatigue strength of reinforcing steel can be outsourced as well De test results can be indicated as being lsquoperformed in a reliable wayrsquo if

bull The tests have been performed by a laboratory that meets the accreditation standard referred to in article 14 of this BRL NEN-EN-ISOIEC 17025 lsquoGeneral requirements for the competence of testing and calibration laboratoriesrsquo This accreditation must concern the performance of tests in conformity with the outsourcing assignment Besides a 31 or a 22 certificate of the results in conformity with NEN-EN 10204 is to be submitted or

bull The supplier receives the test results of the chemical composition from a company that has a product certificate of the lsquotechnical disciplinersquo (H9) mentioned in this BRL with the CI and the relevant measuring equipment in the laboratory concerned is covered by the product certificate audit

If the above requirements are not complied with the certification institute will perform or have performed the audit concerned itself In this case the certification institute will base its test on the accreditation standard NEN-EN-ISOIEC 17025

63 Verification audit An initial audit includes external verification of both the attributive and the variable properties Also an external verification for the performance of the used tensile tests takes place every two years The diameter is to be selected such that the diameters that occur most are tested in a period of 5 years When using a new tensile testing machinemeasuring equipment a verification audit is to be performed as well

National Assessment Guideline BRL 0501 01 September 2010 copy Kiwa NV - -

21

631 Variable properties For the verification of variable properties (the results of the tensile test) at least 15 random samples of one selected diameter must be taken in the presence of the inspector (audit testing) for each selected reinforcing steel type each of a length suitable for two test pieces for testing The selected representative diameters must change at the two-yearly verification With bars and coils the samples must have been spread over at least 3 loads of 1 diameter The samples for point welded reinforcement fabrics and the corresponding bars must come from 1 diameter combination produced on different days For each sample the two collected test pieces must be marked and then the test pieces must be bundled into two series of at least 15 test pieces A third series can be taken as spare series in case of discussions about the achieved results One series must be tested in the presence of the inspector at the manufacturerrsquos The inspector must have the other series tested at an external laboratory The time between the performances of both test series must be short enough to allow for neglecting any natural ageing of the testing material The test (tensile test) includes determination of the 02 yield limit or flow limit (Re) the tensile strength (Rm) the RmRe ratio and the yield with maximum load (Agt) of each individual test piece The thus obtained two series of measurement pairs must then be tested for their differences between both performances of the test Any systematic differences are to be tracked and eliminated

With the statistic comparison of two different performances of tests the differences of paired measurements are to be checked in relation with the hypothesis that the expected value of the average difference is zero (Student test) Rejection of this hypothesis indicates that there is a possibility of systematic differences For each variable property the xfi (i = 1n) of the measurement results of the manufacturer and the xei (i = 1hellip n) of the external institute must be calculated separately

bull Difference vi = xfi ndash xei considering the positive or negative difference and then the average difference

= sum

=

n

iiv

nv

1

1

bull standard deviation of the differences

minus

minus= sum

=

2

1

2

11 vnv

ns

n

iiv

bull value vsvt =

It must be verified for the variable properties the 02 yield limit or flow limit (Reee ) the tensile strength (Rmmm ) and the yield with maximum load (Aggg ttt ) whether or not t exceeds a critical limit to The critical values to depend on the number of tests and have been derived from ISO 3301 1975 with a = 001 (see table 9)

National Assessment Guideline BRL 0501 01 September 2010 copy Kiwa NV - -

22

Table 9 ndash Critical values of to

n to n to n to

10 103 11 096 12 090 13 085 14 080

15 077 16 074 17 071 18 068 19 066

20 064 25 056 30 050 35 047 40 043

If t gt to the hypothesis that there is no difference between the two series of paired measurements is rejected and so the cause of this must be found and eliminated This does not apply when sv and v are both below the reference values Sov and Vo in table 9 because of insufficient relevance

If t le to the hypothesis that there is no difference between the two series of paired measurements is not rejected The test can then be concluded unless Sv ge Sov In this case the standard deviation of the differences is excessive showing that the material concerned is unsuitable for the verification test Further investigation is then required

Table 10 ndash Reference values of Sov and Vo

sov vo 02 yield limit or flow limit 15 15 Tensile strength in MPa 15 20 Yield at maximum load in B500A B500B B500C

11 25 30

11 25 30

632 Attributive properties For the verification of attributive properties (mass per length chemical composition profiling bending test and if necessary a shearing test) the measurements of mass per length and profiling must be done in advance with the two series of at least 15 test pieces meant for the tensile test (see above) For the measurements of the bending test and shearing test (if applicable) the number of test pieces from the above described random samples must be extended with at least 5 test pieces for the bending test and if necessary the shearing test For the verification assessment of the chemical composition the number of test pieces is limited to a series of 3 test pieces from 3 test units Any combinations in the random samples of the above-mentioned verification assessments are allowed The test series at the manufacturerrsquos and the series of external tests (see above) should not produce other differences than those that can unambiguously be explained and eliminated

National Assessment Guideline BRL 0501 01 September 2010 copy Kiwa NV - -

23

7 Summary audit and inspection

Below a summary is provided of the tests to be performed for certification bull Initial audit the audit to determine whether all requirements in the BRL are met bull Inspection audit the audit performed after granting the certificate to determine whether

the certified products continuously meet the requirements set in the BRL Also indicates the frequency of the inspection audits to be performed by the certification institute (CI)

bull Inspection of the quality system inspection for compliance with the IQC schedule and the procedures

Here the frequency with which the certification institute must perform an inspection audit is indicated as well

Audit related to

Supervision by CI after granting the certificate1)

Requirement description Article BRL Initial audit

Inspection2) Frequency Product requirements bull Indication of product 2342 X X continuously bull Variable properties 4243 X X 34 x per year bull Chemical composition 4243 X X 34 x per year bull Bending test 42 X X 34 x per year bull Shearing test 42 X X 4 x per year bull Fatigue strength 4244 X X 1 x per year bull Geometry form 4243 X X 34 x per year bull Mass per unit 4243 X X 34 x per year bull Dimensions of fabricsbars 42 X X 34 x per year bull Bendndashbend back tensile

test 42 X X 3 x per year

Own testing laboratory bull Own laboratory 61 X X 1 x per year bull Outsourcing of tests 62 X X 34 x per year bull Verification audit 63 X X 1 x per 2 years System requirements bull IQC schedule 5 X X 34 x per year bull Quality mark 4647 X X 34 x per year

Table 11

1) In case of significant changes in the production process to be assessed by the CI the product requirements need to be tested again

2) The inspector or the certificate holder in the presence of the inspector will determine all product properties that can be performed within the visiting time (maximum 1 day) If this is not possible the CI and the certificate holder will make arrangements with respect to how the inspection will be performed

Inspection of the quality system The certification institute checks if the manufacturer meets the quality system requirements in chapter 5 of this BRL according to the frequency in article 86 of this BRL

National Assessment Guideline BRL 0501 01 September 2010 copy Kiwa NV - -

24

8 Requirements of de certification institute

81 General The certification institute must meet the requirements set out in EN 45011 Besides for the purpose of this BRL the institute must have been accredited by the Dutch Authority for Accreditation (RvA) or a similar body (an accreditation institute with which the RvA has entered into an agreement of mutual acceptance) The certification institute must have a set of regulations or a similar document defining the general rules to be observed during certification These particularly include bull The general rules for performance of the initial audit to be structured as follows

o The way in which suppliers are informed about the handling of a request o The performance of the audit o The decision based on the audit performed

bull The general rules concerning the performance of inspections and the inspection aspects used here

bull The measures the certification institute must take in case of defects bull The rules for terminating a certificate bull The possibility to make an appeal against decisions or measures of the certification

institute

82 Certification staff Staff involved in certification procedures include bull Auditors charged with performing the initial audit and assessing the reports of the

inspectors bull Inspectors charged with performing the external inspection at the supplierrsquos bull Decision-makers charged with taking decisions based on the initial audits performed

about continuation of certification based on inspections performed and about the necessity to take corrective measures

821 Qualification requirements A distinction is made with respect to 8211 Qualification requirements for the certification executives of a CI meeting the

requirements set out in EN 45011 8212 Supplementary qualification requirements for the certification executives of a CI as

determined by the Board of Experts for the subject of this BRL

National Assessment Guideline BRL 0501 01 September 2010 copy Kiwa NV - -

25

8211 Qualification requirements for the certification executives of a CI meeting the requirements set out in EN 45011

The qualification of the certification executives of a CI must comply with chapter 5 of EN 45011 The manual of the CI must describe how the qualification of the certification executives is performed

EN45011

Auditor

initial product assessment and assessment of the

production location

Inspector

assessment product location field and

projects after granting of certificate

Decision-maker

for granting and extending a certificate

Education General

Higher Vocational thinking and working level

Intermediate vocational working and thinking level

Higher Vocational thinking and working level

Education Specific

Basic training for auditing Basic training for auditing

Basic training for auditing

Experience General

1 year of relevant working experience with min 4 audits including 1 full initial audit done independently under supervision

1 year of relevant working experience with min 4 audits including 1 done independent under supervision

4 years of relevant working experience of which at least 1 year with respect to certification

Experience Specific

knowledge of BRL at detailed level and 4 audits related to the specific BRL or to similar BRLs

knowledge of BRL at detailed level and 4 audits related to the specific BRL or to similar BRLs

Basic knowledge of the specific certification schedule

8212 Supplementary qualification requirements for the certification executives of a CI as determined by the Board of Experts for the subject of this BRL

Certification staff Education Experience Auditor Higher vocational education level in one of the

following disciplines - Constructional engineering - Civil engineering - Mechanical engineering

2 years

Inspector Intermediate vocational education level in one of the following disciplines - ConstructionalCivil engineering - Materials science - Mechanical engineering

2 years

Decision-maker Higher vocational education level in one of the following disciplines - Constructional engineering - Civil engineering - Quality science - Mechanical engineering

4 years Managerial experience

822 Qualification Certification staff must be demonstrably qualified by comparing the education and experience with the requirements set out above If qualification takes place based on deviating criteria this must be laid down in writing The qualification authority is vested with

National Assessment Guideline BRL 0501 01 September 2010 copy Kiwa NV - -

26

bull Decision-makers qualification of auditors and inspectors bull Management of the certification institute qualification of decision-makers

83 Initial audit report The certification institute records the findings of the initial audit in a report The report must meet the following requirements bull Completeness the report makes a statement about all requirements set out in the

assessment guideline bull Traceability the findings the statement are based on must have been recorded in a

traceable way bull Basis for decision the decision-maker for granting a certificate must be able to base his

decision on the findings recorded in the report

84 Decision about granting the certificate The decision concerning the granting of the certificate must be made by a decision-maker who is qualified to do so and who has not been involved in the certificate audit himself The decision must have been recorded in a traceable way

85 Presentation of the quality statement The product certificate must be presented in conformity with the model included in the annex

86 Nature and frequency of external inspections The certification institute must regularly inspect the supplier for compliance with his obligations The Board of Experts will decide upon the frequency of the inspections At the time this assessment guideline took effect the frequency was set to bull 3 inspection visits per year at suppliers of hot-rolled products bull 4 inspection visits per year at suppliers of other products Inspections will in any case pertain to a number of matters including bull The product specifications laid down in the product specification bull The supplierrsquos production process bull The supplierrsquos IQC schedule and the results of the inspections performed by the supplier bull The correct way of marking the certified products bull Compliance with the required procedures The certification institute will lay down the findings of each inspection performed in a report in a traceable way

87 Reporting to the Board of Experts The certification institute must report on the certification activities performed at least once a year The report must include the following subjects bull Mutations in number of certificates (newlapsed) bull Number of inspections performed in relation to the determined frequency bull Inspection results bull Measures imposed in case of defects bull Complaints received from third parties with respect to certified products

88 Interpretation of requirements The Board of Experts may lay down the requirements set in this assessment guideline in a single separate interpretation document The certification institute is obliged to ensure whether an interpretation document has been drawn up and if so must make use of the interpretations laid down in this

89 Specific rules defined by the Board of Experts The Board of Experts has not defined specific rules that are to be followed with certification by the certification institute

National Assessment Guideline BRL 0501 01 September 2010 copy Kiwa NV - -

27

9 List of documents mentioned

91 Standardsnormative documents

NEN 6008 2008 Reinforcing steel NEN 6720 1995 Technical foundations for building constructions - TGB 1990 ndash

Regulations for concrete - TGB 1990 ndash Structural requirements and calculation methods (VBC 1995) September 1995 including amendment sheet A4 December 2007

NEN 6722 2002 Regulations for concrete ndash Execution December 2002 NEN 6723 1995 Regulations for concrete - Bridges ndash (VBB June 1995) Structural requirements

and calculation methods December 1995 including amendment sheet A1 December 2003

NEN-EN 1992 2005 Design of concrete structures NEN-EN 1994 2005 Design of composite steel and concrete structures NEN-EN 10002 2001 Metallic materials tensile testing - Part 1 Method of testing at ambient

temperature August 2001 NEN-EN 10080 2005 Steel for the reinforcement of concrete ndash Weldable reinforcing steel - General NEN-EN 10204 2004 Metallic products - Types of inspection documents October 2004 NEN-EN 45012 1998 General requirements for bodies operating assessment and

certificationregistration of quality systems NEN-EN-ISO 376 2004 Metallic materials - Calibration of force-proving instruments used for the

verification of uniaxial testing machines NEN-EN-ISO 7500-1 2004 Metallic materials - Verification of static uniaxial testing machines ndash

Part 1 Tensilecompression testing machines - Verification and calibration of the force-measuring system August 2004

NEN-EN-ISO 9513 2002 Metallic materials ndash Calibration of extensometers for uniaxial testing October 2002

NEN-EN-ISO 15630-1 2002 Steel for the reinforcement and prestressing of concrete - Test methods ndash Part 1 Reinforcing bars wire rod and wire June 2002

NEN-EN-ISO 15630-2 2002 Steel for the reinforcement and prestressing of concrete - Test methods ndash Part 2 Welded fabric

NEN-EN-ISOIEC 17020

2004 General criteria for the operation of various types of bodies performing inspection

NEN-EN-ISOIEC 17024

2003 Conformity assessment - General requirements for bodies operating certification of persons

NEN-EN-ISOIEC 17025

2005 General requirements for the competence of testing and calibration laboratories

ISO 3301 1975 Statistical interpretation of data ndash Comparison of two means in the case of paired observations

ISO 4965 1979 Axial load fatigue testing machines - Dynamic force calibration - Strain gauge technique April 1979

ISO 16269-6 2005 Statistical interpretation of data Determination of statistical tolerance intervals

Annex I Model certificate

Issued Replaces Issued date Valid until Indefinite Page 1 of 2

KOMOreg

Product certificate

ltName Productgt ltCertificate holdergt

STATEMENT OF CI This product certificate was issued on the basis of BRL lsquo lsquo in conformity with the regulations for Product Certification CI declares that the justifiable confidence exists that the name product supplied by the certificate holder meets the technical specifications laid down in this product certificate provided that name product has the KOMOreg mark as indicated in this product certificate Director CI Advice refer to wwwltCIgtnl to see if this certificate is valid

Certificate holder T F E I

Assessed Quality system Product

Periodic check

reg is a collective brand of Stichting Bouwkwaliteit

Annex II Model for IQC schedule or framework of IQC schedule

Subjects Aspects Method Frequency Registration

Basic materials or supplied materials bull Recipe sheets bull Inspection of incoming raw

materials bull Mechanical bull Chemical

Production process production equipment material bull Procedures bull Work instructions bull Equipment bull Material bull Process inspection

End products

Measuring and testing equipment

Measuring and testing equipment bull Measuring devices bull Calibration bull Outsourced tests

Logistics bull Internal transport bull Storage bull Packaging bull Preservation bull Identification or marking

of semi-finished and end products

Corrective measures Complaints handling

Annex III Sampling and testing overview

Type

on

derz

oek

1)

Doo

rlope

nd

inte

rn fa

brie

kson

derz

oek

Perio

diek

ex

tern

ond

erzo

ek (a

udit)

To

elat

ings

onde

rzoe

k

(type

onde

rzoe

k)

Type

bet

onst

aal

stav

enro

llen

per d

iam

eter

ge

punt

last

e w

apn

ette

n pe

r dia

-com

bina

tie

stav

enro

llen

3 bp

e va

n 1

diam

eter

8)

gepu

ntla

ste

wap

net

ten

3 bp

e va

n 1

dia-

com

bina

tie 7)

8)

stav

enro

llen

3 bp

e pe

r di

amet

er 6)

gepu

ntla

ste

wap

net

ten

3 bp

e pe

r dia

-co

mbi

natie

6) 7

) R

e 1

per 3

0 t

m

in 3

per

bpe

m

in 2

per

bpe

1

lang

s + d

war

s 5

per b

pe

5 pe

r bpe

3

lang

s + 2

dw

ars

10 p

er b

pe

10 p

er b

pe

5 la

ngs +

5 d

war

s R

mR

e id

em

idem

id

em

idem

id

em

idem

R

eac

tRe

nom

2)

idem

id

em

idem

id

em

idem

id

em

Agt

idem

id

em

idem

id

em

idem

id

em

Bui

gpro

ef

1 pe

r bpe

4)

idem

2

per b

pe

2 pe

r bpe

1

lang

s + 1

dw

ars

5 pe

r bpe

5

per b

pe

3 la

ngs +

2 d

war

s M

assa

per

m

idem

id

em 5)

id

em

idem

5)

idem

id

em 5)

G

eom

etrie

opp

en

pro

fielfa

ctor

id

em

idem

id

em

idem

id

em

Idem

Che

mis

che

sa

men

st +

Ceq

3)

1 pe

r lad

ing

1

per l

adin

g 1

per l

adin

g 1

per l

adin

g 1

per l

adin

g 1

per l

adin

g

Afs

chui

fpro

ef

nv

t m

in 2

per

bpe

n

vt

3 pe

r bpe

n

vt

3 pe

r bpe

B

uig-

te

rugb

uigt

rekp

roe

f

nv

t n

vt

2 pe

r bpe

n

vt

2 pe

r bpe

n

vt

Afm

etin

gen

nv

t m

in 1

per

bpe

n

vt

1 pe

r bpe

n

vt

1 pe

r bpe

V

erm

oeiin

g n

vt

nv

t 5

per j

aar

5 pe

r jaa

r 6

per b

pe 9)

5

per b

pe 10

)

1) The audit is always for each manufacturing process (hot-rolled-cooled -cold-stretched cold-profiles) of a certain type of reinforcing steel 2) If applicable (B500C) 3) Chemical composition + Ceq to be determined and submitted by the steel manufacturer not for each diameter (combination) 4) For bending mass and geometry surface + frfp min 1 per 150 tons 5) Can be determined for welding 6) Smallest largest and intermediate diameters (always skipping 2 consecutive diameters) of the range (deviating from EN 10080) 7) Always the most critical diameter combination that occurs 8) In a period of a maximum of 5 years number and spreading of diameters 9) For d le 28 mm the largest and middle diameters for gt 28 mm the largest diameter 10) The largest middle and smallest diameters Test unit is defined as -- barscoils the load or a part of the load (for bending mass and geometryprofile min 1 per 90 t) -- point welded reinforcement fabrics 50 tons of the same combination of reinforcing steel types and diameters manufactured with the same point welding machine

Annex IV Model for biannual reporting on reinforcing steel

Page 3: National Assessment Guideline - Kiwa · PDF fileThe NEN-EN 10080:2005 is not a harmonised standard and therefore a CE mark can not yet be attached to the products covered by this BRL

National Assessment Guideline BRL 0501 01 September 2010 copy Kiwa NV - -

2

Table of contents

1 Introduction 4 11 General 4 12 Area of application 4 13 CE mark 4 14 Acceptance of audit reports provided by the supplier 4 15 Certificate 5

2 Terminology 6 21 Terms 6 22 Definitions 6 23 Indication of reinforcing steel types 7 24 Reinforcing steel on coils 8

3 Procedure for obtaining a quality statement 9 31 Initial audit 9 32 Certification 9

4 Product requirements and determination methods 10 41 General 10 42 Product requirements and determination methods 10 43 Product requirements supplementary to and contrary to NEN-EN 10080 and NEN

6008 the following applies 10 431 Lattice girders 10 432 Non-profiled or slightly profiled reinforcing steel 10 433 Geometry of the profiling determination of fR and fP 10 434 Standard deviations 11 435 Geometry longitudinal rib 11 436 Nominal mass per metre 11 437 Extra value for a2 11 438 Chemical composition of reinforcing steel 11 439 Nominal diameters preferred range 12 4310 Values for a1 - a4 12 4311 Rib row distance Σe 13 44 Determination methods and test criteria Supplementary and contrary to NEN-EN

10080 and NEN 6008 the following applies 13 441 Preliminary audit for acceptance 13 442 Inspection for the attributive properties 13 4421 Inspection of the bend-bend tensile test with initial audit and during external

inspections (audit testing) 13 443 Inspection for the variable properties 14 4431 Inspection for the fatigue strength in initial audit 15 4432 Inspection for the fatigue strength in periodic external inspections (audit testing) 16 45 Biannual reporting 16 46 Identification 17 47 Certification mark 17

5 Requirements to the quality system 18 51 General 18

National Assessment Guideline BRL 0501 01 September 2010 copy Kiwa NV - -

3

52 Administrator of the quality system 18 53 Internal quality controlquality plan 18 54 Procedures and work instructions 18 55 Other requirements to the quality system 18 551 Reinforcing steel 18 552 Storage of reinforcing steel 19

6 Requirements for the functioning of a test laboratory for testing reinforcing steel andor point welded reinforcement fabrics 20

61 The supplier has its own laboratory for testing reinforcing steel for its variable and attributive properties 20

62 Outsourcing of testing 20 63 Verification audit 20 631 Variable properties 21 632 Attributive properties 22

7 Summary audit and inspection 23

8 Requirements of de certification institute 24 81 General 24 82 Certification staff 24 821 Qualification requirements 24 8211 Qualification requirements for the certification executives of a CI meeting the

requirements set out in EN 45011 25 8212 Supplementary qualification requirements for the certification executives of a CI as

determined by the Board of Experts for the subject of this BRL 25 822 Qualification 25 83 Initial audit report 26 84 Decision about granting the certificate 26 85 Presentation of the quality statement 26 86 Nature and frequency of external inspections 26 87 Reporting to the Board of Experts 26 88 Interpretation of requirements 26 89 Specific rules defined by the Board of Experts 26

9 List of documents mentioned 27 91 Standardsnormative documents 27

Annexes Annex 1 Model certificate Annex 2 Model for internal quality control schedule Annex 3 Sampling and testing overview Annex 4 Model for biannual reporting on reinforcing steel

National Assessment Guideline BRL 0501 01 September 2010 copy Kiwa NV - -

4

1 Introduction

11 General The requirements included in this assessment guideline are applied by certification institutes acknowledged for this purpose by the Dutch Accreditation Council when handling an application for or continuation of a product certificate for Reinforcing Steel The quality statement to be issued is designated as KOMOreg product certificate The technical area of the BRL is H9 - Steel for applications in concrete reinforcing steel prestressing steel prestressing systems thermal bridges coupling systems lattice girders steel fibres and glass-fibre bars Besides the requirements laid down in this assessment guideline the certification and attestation institutes will have additional requirements in the sense of general procedural requirements of certification and attestation as stated in the general certification and attestation regulations of the institute concerned This assessment guideline replaces BRL number 0501 dated 2000-01-15 including amendment sheet dated 2005-01-18 In any case the validity of the quality statements issued on the basis of this assessment guideline will terminate one year after this BRL was declared binding During the performance of the certification activities the certification institutes must meet the requirements laid down in the chapter lsquoRequirements of certification institutesrsquo

12 Area of application The products are in conformity with NEN 60082008 in line with NEN-EN 100802005 and intended for application in concrete constructions Explanation The European standard NEN-EN 100802005 provides the general requirements definitions and testing requirements for the performance properties of weldable reinforcing steel but does not provide a more detailed definition of reinforcing steel types with the corresponding performance requirements Therefore the Dutch standard NEN 60082008 provides the performance requirements (number values) of the Dutch reinforcing steel types that comply with NEN-EN 100802005 This will be described in more detail in this BRL

13 CE mark Relationship between the Building Decree and the European Construction Products Directive (CPD 89106EEC) No harmonised European standard (NEN-EN) is applicable to these products yet The NEN-EN 100802005 is not a harmonised standard and therefore a CE mark can not yet be attached to the products covered by this BRL

14 Acceptance of audit reports provided by the supplier If the supplier submits reports of audit institutes or laboratories in order to demonstrate that the requirements of the BRL are met they must show that these were drawn up by an institute that complies with the applicable accreditation standard being bull NEN-EN-ISOIEC 17025 for laboratories bull NEN-EN-ISOIEC 17020 for inspection institutes bull NEN-EN 45011 for certification institutes certifying products bull NEN-EN-ISOIEC 17021 for certification institutes certifying systems bull NEN-EN-ISOIEC 17024 for certification institutes certifying persons

National Assessment Guideline BRL 0501 01 September 2010 copy Kiwa NV - -

5

The institute is supposed to meet these criteria when it can submit an accreditation certificate issued by the Dutch Authority for Accreditation (RvA) or an accreditation institute with which the RvA has entered into an agreement of mutual acceptance This accreditation must apply to the specific audit required for this BRL If no accreditation certificate can be submitted the certification institute itself will verify whether the accreditation standard is met or (have) perform(ed) the audit concerned again itself

15 Certificate The model of the KOMOreg product certificate based on this BRL is included as an annex to this BRL

National Assessment Guideline BRL 0501 01 September 2010 copy Kiwa NV - -

6

2 Terminology

21 Terms This assessment guideline uses the following definitions bull Assessment guideline The arrangements made in the Board of Experts concerning the subject of certification bull Board of Experts The Board of Experts lsquoReinforcing Materialsrsquo bull Supplier

The party responsible for continuous compliance of the products with the requirements the certification has been based on

bull Internal Quality Control (IQC) schedule A description of the quality inspections performed by the supplier as part of its quality system

bull Initial audit (type audit) The preliminary audit to determine whether all requirements set out in the BRL are met bull Internal production inspection audit (by the manufacturer)

The continuous internal production inspection audit to make sure that the certified products constantly comply with the requirements set out in the BRL For this the manufacturer performs among other things tensile tests bending tests measurements of the geometry of the profiling and chemical analyses The fatigue tests are usually performed in an external laboratory

bull External periodic audit The external audit performed after granting of the certificate to make sure that the certified products constantly comply with the requirements set out in the BRL During the external periodic audit the certification institute takes random samples for tensile and bending tests measurements of the geometry of the profiling and chemical analyses Additionally samples are periodically assigned for performing fatigue tests This is also called lsquoaudit testingrsquo The results are tested against the requirements set out in the BRL

bull External verification audit The external verification audit performed during the initial audit and subsequently every two years for verification of the determination of the variable and attributive properties For this two series of similar test pieces are taken the test results of which are compared in pairs for their mutual differences

22 Definitions In addition to the terms and definitions in NEN-EN 100802005 the following definitions apply in this BRL bull Fatigue strength

NEN 6008 requires for the fatigue strength a minimum tension ripple 2σa with an upper tensile of 06 Re (Cv) A tension ripple is the tension change from a middle tension through an upper and lower tension back to the middle tension (2σa = tension ripple)

National Assessment Guideline BRL 0501 01 September 2010 copy Kiwa NV - -

7

Bovenspanning = upper force Middenspanning = middle force Onderspanning = lower force Cyclus = cycle Figure 1 stress change

bull Nominal diameter (d) The diameter of an imaginary bar with a circle-shaped cross-section of the same length and volume as the actual bar with profiled surface excluding tolerances bull Variable properties Property to which a quantitative value is assigned when assessing the measurement In NEN 6008 these are the properties 02 yield limit (Rp02) or flow limit (Re) yield at maximum load (Agt) the tensile strengthflow limit ratio (RmRe) the ratio of the actual flow limitnominal flow limit (ReactRenom) and fatigue strength (2σa) In conformity with NEN-EN 10080 section 7333 the upper flow limit (ReH) applies to the flow limit (Re) If there is no flow the 02 yield limit (Rp02) is to be determined

bull Attributive properties Property to which a value is assigned during the assessment that can only be regarded as good or wrong In NEN 6008 these are the properties nominal diameter mass per length profiling (profile factors fR fP rib height rib distance rib width rib flank angle rib (inclination) angle distance of rib rows and longitudinal rib) bending test shearing test and chemical composition bull Bendndashbend back tensile test Supplementary to NEN-EN-10080 and NEN 6008 the bend-bend back tensile test (attributive) is to be performed to determine whether the reinforcing steel types B500B and B500C in the diameter range le 16 mm can be bent back after having been bent 90deg retaining the required mechanical properties also see 4421 bull Characteristic value Value of a property with a certain chance of exceeding or undershooting in a hypothetical infinite test series In this BRL the characteristic value is the value of a property with a chance of exceeding of 5 (p = 095) or 10 (p = 090) with a probability level of W = 90 or W = 75 with a normally assumed spread bull Cv values These are the specified minimum (maximum) characteristic values as defined in NEN 6008 bull a1 a2 a3 a4 value The a-values are value increasesdecreases (the so-called extra values in accordance with NEN 6008) with respect to the specified Cv values see the examples given below Here x is the average value and X is the individual value -- a1 x ge Cv + a1 (eg Re a1 = 10 so average value x ge 510 MPa) -- a2 X ge Cv ndash a2 (eg Re a1 = 15 so individual value x ge 485 MPa) -- a3 x le Cv + a3 (eg RmRe a3 = 0) -- a4 X le Cv + a4 (eg RmRe a4 = 002)

23 Indication of reinforcing steel types The reinforcing steel types are indicated as follows in NEN 60082008 (shortened for a full overview see NEN 6008 table 1)

National Assessment Guideline BRL 0501 01 September 2010 copy Kiwa NV - -

8

Cv values for Quality indication

NEN 60082008

(new)

Quality indication

NEN 60081991 (old)

Rm (MPa) Re (MPa) RmRe Re act Re nom

Agt ()

B 500 A FeB 500 HKN

550

500 500

105a -

- -

30ab 275

B 500 B B 500 C

FeB 500 HWL FeB 500 HK

550 550

500 500 500 500

108 115 c -le135 - -

- lt125 - -

50b 75bc 325 325

See for the footnotes NEN 6008 table 1 Table 1

24 Reinforcing steel on coils The mechanical properties of reinforcing steel obtained from winding reinforcing steel on coils substantially change during this production process in particular the yield at maximum load (Agt) Therefore NEN 6008 prescribes a 05 surplus value for the Agt (Cv) of reinforcing steel on coils The Agt (Cv) is then for B500 A 35 for B500 B 55 and for B500 C 8 respectively NB Reinforcing steel on coils is not covered by BRL 0501 but by BRL 0503

National Assessment Guideline BRL 0501 01 September 2010 copy Kiwa NV - -

9

3 Procedure for obtaining a quality statement

31 Initial audit The initial audit to be performed by the certification institute takes place by means of the performance and product requirements incorporated in this assessment guideline including test methods and will include depending on the nature of the product to be certified bull (Sample) testing to determine whether the products meet the product andor performance

requirements bull Assessment of the production process bull Assessment of the quality system and the IQC schedule bull Testing for the presence and functioning of other required procedures bull Assessment of the supplierrsquos processing regulations

32 Certification Upon completion of the initial audit the results are presented to the decision-maker This party will assess the results and determine whether the certificate can be granted or that additional data andor audits are needed before the certificate can be granted

National Assessment Guideline BRL 0501 01 September 2010 copy Kiwa NV - -

10

4 Product requirements and determination methods

41 General This chapter includes the product requirements that reinforcing steel must comply with as well as the determination methods to make sure that the requirements are complied with These requirements will be part of the technical specification of the product that is included in the product certificate The product certificate states that the reinforcing steel complies with article 4 of BRL 0501 which also implies that the reinforcing steel complies with NEN 6720 article 512 or NEN-EN 1990NEN-EN 1991-12 including the national annexes

42 Product requirements and determination methods The requirements and the determination methods for reinforcing steel have been laid down in

Number Title Date of issue NEN-EN 10080 Steel for the reinforcement of concrete ndash

Weldable reinforcing steel - General May 2005

NEN-EN 10080 1) Dutch translation Staal voor het wapenen van beton ndash Lasbaar betonstaal - Algemeen

June 2005

NEN 6008 Steel for the reinforcement of concrete July 2008 NEN-EN-ISO 15630-1

Steel for the reinforcement of concrete and prestressing of concrete ndash Test methods ndash Part 1 reinforcing bars wire rod and wire

2002-04-15

NEN-EN-ISO 15630-2

Steel for the reinforcement of concrete and prestressing of concrete ndash Test methods ndash Part 2 welded fabric

2002-04-15

1) The English version lsquoNEN-EN 10080 May 2005rsquo is binding Table 2

43 Product requirements supplementary to and contrary to NEN-EN 10080 and NEN 6008 the following applies

431 Lattice girders What has been stated about lattice girders in NEN-EN 10080 and NEN 6008 does not apply to this assessment guideline see for this BRL 0502 lsquoLattice girdersrsquo

432 Non-profiled or slightly profiled reinforcing steel Non-profiled or slightly profiled reinforcing steel is outside the scope of the regime of this BRL it may only be applied to lattice girders

433 Geometry of the profiling determination of fR and fP Determination of the profile factor fR andor fP is done in conformity with NEN-EN-ISO 15630-1 art 113

For determining fR and fP use can be made of the simplified formulas in conformity with NEN-EN-ISO 15630-1 article 1133 a and b Use of the simplified formulas in conformity with NEN-EN-ISO 15630-1 article 1133 c and 1133d is not allowed In order to make use of the simplified formulas in conformity with articles 1133a and 1133b it must be determined in advance during the initial audit whether use of the reinforcing steel produced by the supplier and the proposed simplified formula (Trapezium or Simpson) produces results for fR and fP

National Assessment Guideline BRL 0501 01 September 2010 copy Kiwa NV - -

11

that are greater than or equal to the value that is obtained when using the general formula for determining fR and fP (in conformity with article 1131)

434 Standard deviations Supplementary to the NEN-EN- 10080 and NEN 6008 the following values are valid for the maximum standard deviations of the variable properties

Re (MPa)

Re(act)Re(nom) RmRe Agt ()

B500A bars coils point welded fabric

30 006 002 15

B500B bars coils point welded fabric

30 006 002 bars 20 coils 20 point welded fabric 15

B500C bars coils point welded fabric

30 006 002 bars 25 coils 25 point welded fabric 15

Table 3

435 Geometry longitudinal rib Supplementary to NEN-EN-ISO 15630-1 art 1032 the rib width of the longitudinal rib if present must be measured as well The rib width is analogically measured as the rib height The requirements with respect to the longitudinal rib are mentioned in NEN 6008 table 1

436 Nominal mass per metre Contrary to NEN 6008 table 1 read lsquothe allowable deviation from the nominal mass per meterrsquo for lsquotolerance nominal diameterrsquo

437 Extra value for a2 Contrary to NEN 6008 table 1 lsquoextra valuersquo read a2 = 05 for the Agt of B500A

438 Chemical composition of reinforcing steel Contrary to NEN-EN-10080 (Dutch translation) art 713 table 2 explanation a the following applies Exceeding the maximum value for the carbon content by 003 (mass percentage) is allowed provided that the value of the carbon equivalent is decreased by 002 (mass percentage)rdquo

National Assessment Guideline BRL 0501 01 September 2010 copy Kiwa NV - -

12

439 Nominal diameters preferred range Supplementary to NEN-EN10080 the table below mentions the general and the preferred range of the nominal diameters The nominal diameters between brackets ( ) are not preferred diameters Nominal diameter

mm

Bars Coils and bars

straightened from coils

Point welded fabric

Nominal surface of the cross section

mm2

Nominal mass per

metre

kgm 40 (x) 126 0099 45 (x) 159 0125 50 (x) x 196 0154 55 (x) (x) 238 0187 60 x x x 283 0222 65 (x) (x) 332 0260 70 x x 385 0302 75 (x) (x) 442 0347 80 x x x 503 0395 85 (x) (x) 567 0445 90 x x 636 0499 95 (x) (x) 709 0556 100 x x x 785 0617 110 (x) x 950 0746 120 x x x 113 0888 140 x x x 154 121 160 x x x 201 158 200 x 314 247 250 x 491 385 280 (x) 616 483 320 x 804 631 400 x 1257 986 500 x 1963 154

Table 4

4310 Values for a1 - a4 NEN EN 100802005 section 81312 provides insufficient clarity and interpretation of how to apply these a-values The a-values included in NEN 60082008 are the absolute minimummaximum a-values that with respect to the a2 and a 4 values are for determining the individual absolute minimum and maximum variable mechanical properties as referred to in NEN EN 100802005 section 11 (testing in case of a dispute)

However when assessing the variable test results per test unit during the production inspection in the factory in conformity with NEN EN 100802005 section 813 1 in case of b) the manufacturer himself shall determine the a1234-values of the population concerned and record this in a solid procedure With these determined manufacturer-specific a-values every test unit must be tested in order to meet the required quality level in the long term ( x - ks ge Cv or x + ks le Cv) The a-values of the manufacturer must al least comply with the absolute minimummaximum a-values included in NEN 60082008 but they are usually higherlower (ie more critical)

The solid procedures with the a-values recorded for each population must always be up-to-date and demonstrate to the satisfaction of the CI that with this the required Cv values (for the longer term) are complied with If these solid procedures are (still) missing in conformity with NEN EN 100802005 section 8131 only situation a) applies so in principle all individual values of the test unit must comply with the specified Cv value

National Assessment Guideline BRL 0501 01 September 2010 copy Kiwa NV - -

13

When determining the a-values solid procedures are preferably applied using the standard deviations and the assumption probabilities

4311 Rib row distance Σe Contrary to NEN 6008 table 1 and analogue with NEN-EN 10080 read for lsquodistance rib rowsdistance Σe le 075drsquo The projection of the cross ribs must cover at least 75 of the circumference of the reinforcing steel to be calculated based on the nominal diameter In formula total distance between the rib rows Σe lt 025 πd

44 Determination methods and test criteria Supplementary and contrary to NEN-EN 10080 and NEN 6008 the following applies

441 Preliminary audit for acceptance Supplementary to NEN-EN 10080 the following data are to be provided for each of the diameters given by the certification institute before the start of the initial audit -- test results of 60 pieces from at least 3 casting loads with 20 samples each the individual

test results of 02 yield limit or flow limit ((Rp02 or Re) yield at maximum load (Agt) the tensile strength02 yield or flow limit ratio RmRp02 or Re if applicable the ratio of the actual 02 yield limit or flow limitthe nominal 02 yield limit or flow limit (ReactRenom) Also the statistic processing of these data with average value ( x ) standard deviation (s) and characteristic value (Cv)

-- test results of 5 pieces from the same loads with 5 samples each the individual test results of the bendability shearing force of point welded reinforcement fabrics mass per metre and profiling (profile factors fR fP rib height rib distance rib width rib flank α rib (inclination) angle distance between the rib rows and the longitudinal rib)

-- chemical composition of each casting load -- (casting) load numbers and roller data (min 10 tons per diameter) -- drawing or sketch of the profiling and the factory brand

442 Inspection for the attributive properties NEN-EN 10080 gives insufficient interpretation of the termination methods and test criteria for inspections for the attributive properties bendability shearing force with point welded reinforcement fabrics mass per metre and profiling (profile factors fR fP rib height rib distance rib width rib flank α rib (inclination) angle β distance between the rib rows and the longitudinal rib Contrary to NEN-EN 10080 with these attributive properties the sampling and the conformity assessment is done as follows -- with the continuous internal production inspection not for each test unit but repeatedly

for the 15 last tested bars of a diameter or a diameter-weld combination -- with the initial audit the test series is to be extended to 15 samples if necessary and to 60

samples when there is initial rejection -- with the periodic external inspection (audit) the results of the attributive properties

obtained during the audit are to be added to the internal test results of the manufacturer Testing If a maximum of 2 of the 15 measurements do not comply the sampling can be extended by 45 extra measurements with respect to the attributive property concerned In this case the attributive properties of a total of 60 test bars are available The property concerned then still complies if not more than 2 of the 60 measurements do not comply with the NEN 6008 The profiling is increasingly measured using an optical camera The manual measurement will be valid in case of disputes

4421 Inspection of the bend-bend tensile test with initial audit and during external inspections (audit testing) By means of a bend-bend back tensile test it is determined whether the reinforcing steel types B500B and B500C in the diameter range le 16 mm can be bent back once with an angle of 90deg

National Assessment Guideline BRL 0501 01 September 2010 copy Kiwa NV - -

14

without significant decrease of the Rp02 or Re RmRe and Agt compared with the non-bent bars The values may not be below the mentioned Cv values for the reinforcing steel type and delivery condition concerned Sampling and testing frequency

Delivery condition Diameter Inspection frequency bars and coils B500BB500C

d le 16 mm 6 samples of different barscoils from 3 (casting) loads for each selected diameter Samples are to be taken from the same barsloads as for the regular tensile tests

Performance of the test Take a sample of reinforcing steel of sufficient length for doing 2 tensile tests A normal tensile test is performed with the one part and a bend-bend back tensile test with the other part The minimum length for the bendbend back tensile test is 70 cm The preparation of the tensile test including the way of ageing and the way of bending is done in accordance with the stipulations in NEN-EN 10080 with the exception of the way of bending back and the bending mandrel diameter to be used The bending mandrel diameter is maximum 4d Bend the bar over a bending mandrel of maximum 4d with a maximum angle of 90deg Mark the bending zone (length ca 9d) Place the test piece in a vice or the like Place an appropriate pipe over the part of the test piece to be bent back preferably with an internal pipe diameter that is max 2 mm larger than the diameter of the test piece and bend the test piece straight again Try to make the test piece as straight as possible Here the difference between the one part and the other part of the test piece may be maximally the diameter of the test piece (the bayonet forming) Age the test piece in conformity with the stipulations of NEN-EN 10080 and perform the tensile test The test is considered to be satisfactory when - the results do not show any significant differences with the results of the non-bent test

pieces - the values are above the set Cv values If the values are not satisfactory find the cause and repeat the tests if necessary

443 Inspection for the variable properties Contrary to NEN-EN 10080 the sampling and testing is done in conformity with BRL 0501 annex 3 for the variable properties 02 yield limit or flow limit (Rp02 or Re) yield at maximum load (Agt) the tensile strength02 yield or flow limit ratio RmRp02 or Re if applicable the ratio of the actual 02 yield limit or flow limitthe nominal 02 yield limit or flow limit (ReactRenom) and the fatigue strength NEN-EN 10080 provides insufficient interpretation of the test requirements the determination methods and the test criteria for inspection for the fatigue properties Therefore the requirements given below apply supplementary to NEN-EN 10080

National Assessment Guideline BRL 0501 01 September 2010 copy Kiwa NV - -

15

4431 Inspection for the fatigue strength in initial audit Sampling and testing frequency

Delivery condition

Diameter Inspection frequency

bars and coils for d le 28 mm the middle and largest of the diameter range For d gt 28 mm the largest diameter

6 samples of different barscoils from 3 (casting) loads for each selected diameter (18 bars per diameter)

point welded fabrics

The smallest middle and largest diameter of the diameter range (always with the least favourable diameter combination)

5 samples of different bars with a point weld from 3 test units for each selected diameter (15 bars per diameter)

Test method a semi-statistical This simplified test is regarded as sufficient if the requirements given below are met

With reinforcing steel bars and coils B500B and B500C in the diameter range d le 28 mm with

the requirement aσ2 ge 175 MPa

a2σ = 175 MPa a2σ = 200 MPa Number of samples 10 sup2) Number of samples 8 sup2) Stress changes (106) Break Stress changes (106) Break

lt 15 lt 20 ge 20

none le l ge 9

lt 075 075 lt 10 10 lt 20 ge 20

none le l

le 2 1)

ge 5 1) le 3 breaks if no break occurred up to 1x106 tension changes sup2) total number 10 + 8 = 18

Table 5

With reinforcing steel bars B500B and B500C in the diameter range d gt 28 mm with the

requirement aσ2 ge 145 MPa

a2σ = 145 MPa a2σ = 170 MPa Number of samples 10 sup2) Number of samples 8 sup2) Stress changes (106) Break Stress changes (106) Break

lt 15 lt 20 ge 20

none le l ge 9

lt 075 075 lt 15 15 lt 20 ge 20

none le 2

le 2 1)

ge 4 1) le 4 breaks if no break occurred up to 15 x 106 tension changes sup2) total number 10 + 8 = 18

Table 6

With point welded fabrics B500A B500B and B500C as well as reinforcing steel bars and coils

B500A with the requirement aσ2 ge 100 MPa

a2σ = 100 MPa a2σ = 180 MPa Number of samples 10 sup1) Number of samples 5 sup1) Stress changes (106) Break Stress changes (106) Break

lt 15 lt 20 ge 20

none le l ge 9

lt 025 025 lt 05 ge 05

none le 3 ge 2

sup1) total number 10 + 5 = 15 Table 7

National Assessment Guideline BRL 0501 01 September 2010 copy Kiwa NV - -

16

Test method b fully statistical This test is done with the appropriate statistic methods considering the requirements p = 095 W = 75 set out in NEN 6008

Here the requirement Cv le x ndash ks must be complied with where x = the average value in which max 2 million load changes must be maintained

for the individual value of one test bar s = the estimate of the standard deviation of the population k = variation coefficient according to the table below (in conformity with ISO 16269-6) Cv = the characteristic value for the tension changes 1 106

n k n k n k n k 15 199 20 193 30 187 50 181 16 199 25 190 40 183 100 176 18 195

Table 8

4432 Inspection for the fatigue strength in periodic external inspections (audit testing) The numbers of test bars of one diameter given below are tested on an annual basis The sampling takes place in the presence of the inspector and is part of the audit testing -- barscoils 5 per year -- point welded fabrics 5 per year provided that in a period of 5 years at least 80 of all certified diameters (diameter combinations) has been tested With the 80 mentioned at least the following must have been tested

bull For barscoils the largest diameter in the range d le 28 mm and the largest diameter in the range d gt 28 mm

bull For point welded fabrics the smallest and the largest diameters always with the least favourable diameter combination

The test is considered to be satisfactory if

bull with the barscoils max 1 sample broke at lt 20106 stress changes and the other 4 samples have at least resisted 20106 tension changes

bull with the point welded fabrics max 1 sample broke at between 10106 and 20106 stress changes and the other 4 samples have at least resisted 20106 stress changes

For barscoils and point welded fabrics only a re-inspection can take place if no more than 2 samples broke at fewer than 20 106 stress changes In this case 5 extra samples are to be tested whereby no breaks at lt 20 106 stress changes may occur In this case the test series is satisfactory If this is not complied with further testing is necessary to find the cause and corrective measures are to be taken in order to avoid reoccurrence If necessary a new initial audit for the fatigue strength is to be performed

45 Biannual reporting The test results of all test units of the continuous inspections are to be collected and statistically evaluated for Re Agt RmRe and ReactRenom (if relevant) based on data of the production of the previous six months or the 200 most recent data dependent on which is the largest number These data shall biannually be sent to the certification institute in conformity with the model in annex 4

National Assessment Guideline BRL 0501 01 September 2010 copy Kiwa NV - -

17

46 Identification Contrary to NEN-EN 10080 art 101211 the product numbers (technical classes) are not assigned by a European organisation However the other requirements concerning the identification are observed in conformity with NEN 6008 and NEN-EN 10080

47 Certification mark Each packaging unit must have a label with the following obligatory indications

bull KOMO mark bull product certificate number + delivery condition (bars coils fabrics) bull the reinforcing steel type and the manufacturer number bull name andor logo of the manufacturer bull mentioning BRL0501

A packaging unit can be characterised

bull with reinforcing steel on coils as lsquothe coilrsquo marking min 1 label per coil bull with reinforcing steel bars as lsquothe bundlesrsquo marking min 1 label per bundle bull with point welded fabrics as lsquonumber of fabricsrsquo marking at least 1 label per unit of max

40 reinforcement fabrics or max 2 tons Additionally each point welded fabric in which only externally purchased and delivered reinforcing steel has been used must be marked in an indelible and non-removable way For example when using a ldquoSchlatter Etikettiermachinen Methoderdquo or equivalent the point welded reinforcement fabrics are to be marked with at least 1 label

National Assessment Guideline BRL 0501 01 September 2010 copy Kiwa NV - -

18

5 Requirements to the quality system

51 General This chapter includes the requirements that the quality system of the supplier has to meet

52 Administrator of the quality system A staff member is to be appointed as quality system manager within the organisational structure

53 Internal quality controlquality plan The supplier must have and use a schedule for internal quality control (an IQC schedule) in accordance with the model indicated in annex 2 In this IQC schedule the following must be demonstrably recorded

bull what aspects the manufacturer will inspect bull what methods will be used for these inspections bull the frequency of these inspections bull how to record and file the inspection results bull aspects with respect to the production of point welded reinforcement fabrics

Also the supplier must have a procedure for organising the production process of any post-stretching alignment and the reinforcement fabrics to be point welded and how this is implemented inspected and monitored This IQC schedule must have been derived from the IQC schedule included in the annex and must have been set up such that it gives the CI enough confidence that the requirements set out in this assessment guideline are continuously met

This must function at least 3 months before issuing the certificate

54 Procedures and work instructions The supplier must be able to submit

bull procedures for - handling out of spec products and (semi-)products to be repaired - corrective measures after observed defects - handling complaints about products andor services delivered - monitoring the quality using the extra value a - a4 - the work instructions and inspection forms used including the biannual reporting

(see annex 4)

55 Other requirements to the quality system

551 Reinforcing steel The following are regarded as sufficient proof that the purchased reinforcing steel complies with the product standard mentioned (NEN 6008) and other technical specifications

bull KOMO quality statement issued on the basis of BRL 0501 lsquoReinforcing steelrsquo by a certification andor attestation institute acknowledged by the Dutch Authority for Accreditation for the discipline involved

bull a (quality) statement the equivalence of which with the above-mentioned KOMO quality statement has been demonstrated

The traceability of the purchased reinforcing steel is guaranteed by the rolling mark and the labelling The origin (certificate number) of the reinforcing steel must be recorded at the initial audit

National Assessment Guideline BRL 0501 01 September 2010 copy Kiwa NV - -

19

552 Storage of reinforcing steel Reinforcing steel must be stored free from the ground Store and label reinforcing steel such that the chance of exchange for instance with foreign qualities is eliminated

National Assessment Guideline BRL 0501 01 September 2010 copy Kiwa NV - -

20

6 Requirements for the functioning of a test laboratory for testing reinforcing steel andor point welded reinforcement fabrics

61 The supplier has its own laboratory for testing reinforcing steel for its variable and attributive properties The laboratory equipment as well as the test methods must comply with

bull NEN-EN 10002-22001 Metallic materials tensile testing part 1 method of testing at ambient temperature

bull NEN-EN-ISO 15630-12002 Steel for the reinforcement and prestressing of concrete Test methods ndash Part 1 reinforcing bars wire rod and wire June 2002

bull NEN-EN-ISO 15630-22002 Steel for the reinforcement and prestressing of concrete Test methods ndash Part 2 welded fabric

Measuring equipment that has not been classified for one of the above-mentioned standards can be used as soon as they have been tested assessed and qualified by the CI

62 Outsourcing of testing Tests for the chemical composition and the fatigue strength of reinforcing steel can be outsourced as well De test results can be indicated as being lsquoperformed in a reliable wayrsquo if

bull The tests have been performed by a laboratory that meets the accreditation standard referred to in article 14 of this BRL NEN-EN-ISOIEC 17025 lsquoGeneral requirements for the competence of testing and calibration laboratoriesrsquo This accreditation must concern the performance of tests in conformity with the outsourcing assignment Besides a 31 or a 22 certificate of the results in conformity with NEN-EN 10204 is to be submitted or

bull The supplier receives the test results of the chemical composition from a company that has a product certificate of the lsquotechnical disciplinersquo (H9) mentioned in this BRL with the CI and the relevant measuring equipment in the laboratory concerned is covered by the product certificate audit

If the above requirements are not complied with the certification institute will perform or have performed the audit concerned itself In this case the certification institute will base its test on the accreditation standard NEN-EN-ISOIEC 17025

63 Verification audit An initial audit includes external verification of both the attributive and the variable properties Also an external verification for the performance of the used tensile tests takes place every two years The diameter is to be selected such that the diameters that occur most are tested in a period of 5 years When using a new tensile testing machinemeasuring equipment a verification audit is to be performed as well

National Assessment Guideline BRL 0501 01 September 2010 copy Kiwa NV - -

21

631 Variable properties For the verification of variable properties (the results of the tensile test) at least 15 random samples of one selected diameter must be taken in the presence of the inspector (audit testing) for each selected reinforcing steel type each of a length suitable for two test pieces for testing The selected representative diameters must change at the two-yearly verification With bars and coils the samples must have been spread over at least 3 loads of 1 diameter The samples for point welded reinforcement fabrics and the corresponding bars must come from 1 diameter combination produced on different days For each sample the two collected test pieces must be marked and then the test pieces must be bundled into two series of at least 15 test pieces A third series can be taken as spare series in case of discussions about the achieved results One series must be tested in the presence of the inspector at the manufacturerrsquos The inspector must have the other series tested at an external laboratory The time between the performances of both test series must be short enough to allow for neglecting any natural ageing of the testing material The test (tensile test) includes determination of the 02 yield limit or flow limit (Re) the tensile strength (Rm) the RmRe ratio and the yield with maximum load (Agt) of each individual test piece The thus obtained two series of measurement pairs must then be tested for their differences between both performances of the test Any systematic differences are to be tracked and eliminated

With the statistic comparison of two different performances of tests the differences of paired measurements are to be checked in relation with the hypothesis that the expected value of the average difference is zero (Student test) Rejection of this hypothesis indicates that there is a possibility of systematic differences For each variable property the xfi (i = 1n) of the measurement results of the manufacturer and the xei (i = 1hellip n) of the external institute must be calculated separately

bull Difference vi = xfi ndash xei considering the positive or negative difference and then the average difference

= sum

=

n

iiv

nv

1

1

bull standard deviation of the differences

minus

minus= sum

=

2

1

2

11 vnv

ns

n

iiv

bull value vsvt =

It must be verified for the variable properties the 02 yield limit or flow limit (Reee ) the tensile strength (Rmmm ) and the yield with maximum load (Aggg ttt ) whether or not t exceeds a critical limit to The critical values to depend on the number of tests and have been derived from ISO 3301 1975 with a = 001 (see table 9)

National Assessment Guideline BRL 0501 01 September 2010 copy Kiwa NV - -

22

Table 9 ndash Critical values of to

n to n to n to

10 103 11 096 12 090 13 085 14 080

15 077 16 074 17 071 18 068 19 066

20 064 25 056 30 050 35 047 40 043

If t gt to the hypothesis that there is no difference between the two series of paired measurements is rejected and so the cause of this must be found and eliminated This does not apply when sv and v are both below the reference values Sov and Vo in table 9 because of insufficient relevance

If t le to the hypothesis that there is no difference between the two series of paired measurements is not rejected The test can then be concluded unless Sv ge Sov In this case the standard deviation of the differences is excessive showing that the material concerned is unsuitable for the verification test Further investigation is then required

Table 10 ndash Reference values of Sov and Vo

sov vo 02 yield limit or flow limit 15 15 Tensile strength in MPa 15 20 Yield at maximum load in B500A B500B B500C

11 25 30

11 25 30

632 Attributive properties For the verification of attributive properties (mass per length chemical composition profiling bending test and if necessary a shearing test) the measurements of mass per length and profiling must be done in advance with the two series of at least 15 test pieces meant for the tensile test (see above) For the measurements of the bending test and shearing test (if applicable) the number of test pieces from the above described random samples must be extended with at least 5 test pieces for the bending test and if necessary the shearing test For the verification assessment of the chemical composition the number of test pieces is limited to a series of 3 test pieces from 3 test units Any combinations in the random samples of the above-mentioned verification assessments are allowed The test series at the manufacturerrsquos and the series of external tests (see above) should not produce other differences than those that can unambiguously be explained and eliminated

National Assessment Guideline BRL 0501 01 September 2010 copy Kiwa NV - -

23

7 Summary audit and inspection

Below a summary is provided of the tests to be performed for certification bull Initial audit the audit to determine whether all requirements in the BRL are met bull Inspection audit the audit performed after granting the certificate to determine whether

the certified products continuously meet the requirements set in the BRL Also indicates the frequency of the inspection audits to be performed by the certification institute (CI)

bull Inspection of the quality system inspection for compliance with the IQC schedule and the procedures

Here the frequency with which the certification institute must perform an inspection audit is indicated as well

Audit related to

Supervision by CI after granting the certificate1)

Requirement description Article BRL Initial audit

Inspection2) Frequency Product requirements bull Indication of product 2342 X X continuously bull Variable properties 4243 X X 34 x per year bull Chemical composition 4243 X X 34 x per year bull Bending test 42 X X 34 x per year bull Shearing test 42 X X 4 x per year bull Fatigue strength 4244 X X 1 x per year bull Geometry form 4243 X X 34 x per year bull Mass per unit 4243 X X 34 x per year bull Dimensions of fabricsbars 42 X X 34 x per year bull Bendndashbend back tensile

test 42 X X 3 x per year

Own testing laboratory bull Own laboratory 61 X X 1 x per year bull Outsourcing of tests 62 X X 34 x per year bull Verification audit 63 X X 1 x per 2 years System requirements bull IQC schedule 5 X X 34 x per year bull Quality mark 4647 X X 34 x per year

Table 11

1) In case of significant changes in the production process to be assessed by the CI the product requirements need to be tested again

2) The inspector or the certificate holder in the presence of the inspector will determine all product properties that can be performed within the visiting time (maximum 1 day) If this is not possible the CI and the certificate holder will make arrangements with respect to how the inspection will be performed

Inspection of the quality system The certification institute checks if the manufacturer meets the quality system requirements in chapter 5 of this BRL according to the frequency in article 86 of this BRL

National Assessment Guideline BRL 0501 01 September 2010 copy Kiwa NV - -

24

8 Requirements of de certification institute

81 General The certification institute must meet the requirements set out in EN 45011 Besides for the purpose of this BRL the institute must have been accredited by the Dutch Authority for Accreditation (RvA) or a similar body (an accreditation institute with which the RvA has entered into an agreement of mutual acceptance) The certification institute must have a set of regulations or a similar document defining the general rules to be observed during certification These particularly include bull The general rules for performance of the initial audit to be structured as follows

o The way in which suppliers are informed about the handling of a request o The performance of the audit o The decision based on the audit performed

bull The general rules concerning the performance of inspections and the inspection aspects used here

bull The measures the certification institute must take in case of defects bull The rules for terminating a certificate bull The possibility to make an appeal against decisions or measures of the certification

institute

82 Certification staff Staff involved in certification procedures include bull Auditors charged with performing the initial audit and assessing the reports of the

inspectors bull Inspectors charged with performing the external inspection at the supplierrsquos bull Decision-makers charged with taking decisions based on the initial audits performed

about continuation of certification based on inspections performed and about the necessity to take corrective measures

821 Qualification requirements A distinction is made with respect to 8211 Qualification requirements for the certification executives of a CI meeting the

requirements set out in EN 45011 8212 Supplementary qualification requirements for the certification executives of a CI as

determined by the Board of Experts for the subject of this BRL

National Assessment Guideline BRL 0501 01 September 2010 copy Kiwa NV - -

25

8211 Qualification requirements for the certification executives of a CI meeting the requirements set out in EN 45011

The qualification of the certification executives of a CI must comply with chapter 5 of EN 45011 The manual of the CI must describe how the qualification of the certification executives is performed

EN45011

Auditor

initial product assessment and assessment of the

production location

Inspector

assessment product location field and

projects after granting of certificate

Decision-maker

for granting and extending a certificate

Education General

Higher Vocational thinking and working level

Intermediate vocational working and thinking level

Higher Vocational thinking and working level

Education Specific

Basic training for auditing Basic training for auditing

Basic training for auditing

Experience General

1 year of relevant working experience with min 4 audits including 1 full initial audit done independently under supervision

1 year of relevant working experience with min 4 audits including 1 done independent under supervision

4 years of relevant working experience of which at least 1 year with respect to certification

Experience Specific

knowledge of BRL at detailed level and 4 audits related to the specific BRL or to similar BRLs

knowledge of BRL at detailed level and 4 audits related to the specific BRL or to similar BRLs

Basic knowledge of the specific certification schedule

8212 Supplementary qualification requirements for the certification executives of a CI as determined by the Board of Experts for the subject of this BRL

Certification staff Education Experience Auditor Higher vocational education level in one of the

following disciplines - Constructional engineering - Civil engineering - Mechanical engineering

2 years

Inspector Intermediate vocational education level in one of the following disciplines - ConstructionalCivil engineering - Materials science - Mechanical engineering

2 years

Decision-maker Higher vocational education level in one of the following disciplines - Constructional engineering - Civil engineering - Quality science - Mechanical engineering

4 years Managerial experience

822 Qualification Certification staff must be demonstrably qualified by comparing the education and experience with the requirements set out above If qualification takes place based on deviating criteria this must be laid down in writing The qualification authority is vested with

National Assessment Guideline BRL 0501 01 September 2010 copy Kiwa NV - -

26

bull Decision-makers qualification of auditors and inspectors bull Management of the certification institute qualification of decision-makers

83 Initial audit report The certification institute records the findings of the initial audit in a report The report must meet the following requirements bull Completeness the report makes a statement about all requirements set out in the

assessment guideline bull Traceability the findings the statement are based on must have been recorded in a

traceable way bull Basis for decision the decision-maker for granting a certificate must be able to base his

decision on the findings recorded in the report

84 Decision about granting the certificate The decision concerning the granting of the certificate must be made by a decision-maker who is qualified to do so and who has not been involved in the certificate audit himself The decision must have been recorded in a traceable way

85 Presentation of the quality statement The product certificate must be presented in conformity with the model included in the annex

86 Nature and frequency of external inspections The certification institute must regularly inspect the supplier for compliance with his obligations The Board of Experts will decide upon the frequency of the inspections At the time this assessment guideline took effect the frequency was set to bull 3 inspection visits per year at suppliers of hot-rolled products bull 4 inspection visits per year at suppliers of other products Inspections will in any case pertain to a number of matters including bull The product specifications laid down in the product specification bull The supplierrsquos production process bull The supplierrsquos IQC schedule and the results of the inspections performed by the supplier bull The correct way of marking the certified products bull Compliance with the required procedures The certification institute will lay down the findings of each inspection performed in a report in a traceable way

87 Reporting to the Board of Experts The certification institute must report on the certification activities performed at least once a year The report must include the following subjects bull Mutations in number of certificates (newlapsed) bull Number of inspections performed in relation to the determined frequency bull Inspection results bull Measures imposed in case of defects bull Complaints received from third parties with respect to certified products

88 Interpretation of requirements The Board of Experts may lay down the requirements set in this assessment guideline in a single separate interpretation document The certification institute is obliged to ensure whether an interpretation document has been drawn up and if so must make use of the interpretations laid down in this

89 Specific rules defined by the Board of Experts The Board of Experts has not defined specific rules that are to be followed with certification by the certification institute

National Assessment Guideline BRL 0501 01 September 2010 copy Kiwa NV - -

27

9 List of documents mentioned

91 Standardsnormative documents

NEN 6008 2008 Reinforcing steel NEN 6720 1995 Technical foundations for building constructions - TGB 1990 ndash

Regulations for concrete - TGB 1990 ndash Structural requirements and calculation methods (VBC 1995) September 1995 including amendment sheet A4 December 2007

NEN 6722 2002 Regulations for concrete ndash Execution December 2002 NEN 6723 1995 Regulations for concrete - Bridges ndash (VBB June 1995) Structural requirements

and calculation methods December 1995 including amendment sheet A1 December 2003

NEN-EN 1992 2005 Design of concrete structures NEN-EN 1994 2005 Design of composite steel and concrete structures NEN-EN 10002 2001 Metallic materials tensile testing - Part 1 Method of testing at ambient

temperature August 2001 NEN-EN 10080 2005 Steel for the reinforcement of concrete ndash Weldable reinforcing steel - General NEN-EN 10204 2004 Metallic products - Types of inspection documents October 2004 NEN-EN 45012 1998 General requirements for bodies operating assessment and

certificationregistration of quality systems NEN-EN-ISO 376 2004 Metallic materials - Calibration of force-proving instruments used for the

verification of uniaxial testing machines NEN-EN-ISO 7500-1 2004 Metallic materials - Verification of static uniaxial testing machines ndash

Part 1 Tensilecompression testing machines - Verification and calibration of the force-measuring system August 2004

NEN-EN-ISO 9513 2002 Metallic materials ndash Calibration of extensometers for uniaxial testing October 2002

NEN-EN-ISO 15630-1 2002 Steel for the reinforcement and prestressing of concrete - Test methods ndash Part 1 Reinforcing bars wire rod and wire June 2002

NEN-EN-ISO 15630-2 2002 Steel for the reinforcement and prestressing of concrete - Test methods ndash Part 2 Welded fabric

NEN-EN-ISOIEC 17020

2004 General criteria for the operation of various types of bodies performing inspection

NEN-EN-ISOIEC 17024

2003 Conformity assessment - General requirements for bodies operating certification of persons

NEN-EN-ISOIEC 17025

2005 General requirements for the competence of testing and calibration laboratories

ISO 3301 1975 Statistical interpretation of data ndash Comparison of two means in the case of paired observations

ISO 4965 1979 Axial load fatigue testing machines - Dynamic force calibration - Strain gauge technique April 1979

ISO 16269-6 2005 Statistical interpretation of data Determination of statistical tolerance intervals

Annex I Model certificate

Issued Replaces Issued date Valid until Indefinite Page 1 of 2

KOMOreg

Product certificate

ltName Productgt ltCertificate holdergt

STATEMENT OF CI This product certificate was issued on the basis of BRL lsquo lsquo in conformity with the regulations for Product Certification CI declares that the justifiable confidence exists that the name product supplied by the certificate holder meets the technical specifications laid down in this product certificate provided that name product has the KOMOreg mark as indicated in this product certificate Director CI Advice refer to wwwltCIgtnl to see if this certificate is valid

Certificate holder T F E I

Assessed Quality system Product

Periodic check

reg is a collective brand of Stichting Bouwkwaliteit

Annex II Model for IQC schedule or framework of IQC schedule

Subjects Aspects Method Frequency Registration

Basic materials or supplied materials bull Recipe sheets bull Inspection of incoming raw

materials bull Mechanical bull Chemical

Production process production equipment material bull Procedures bull Work instructions bull Equipment bull Material bull Process inspection

End products

Measuring and testing equipment

Measuring and testing equipment bull Measuring devices bull Calibration bull Outsourced tests

Logistics bull Internal transport bull Storage bull Packaging bull Preservation bull Identification or marking

of semi-finished and end products

Corrective measures Complaints handling

Annex III Sampling and testing overview

Type

on

derz

oek

1)

Doo

rlope

nd

inte

rn fa

brie

kson

derz

oek

Perio

diek

ex

tern

ond

erzo

ek (a

udit)

To

elat

ings

onde

rzoe

k

(type

onde

rzoe

k)

Type

bet

onst

aal

stav

enro

llen

per d

iam

eter

ge

punt

last

e w

apn

ette

n pe

r dia

-com

bina

tie

stav

enro

llen

3 bp

e va

n 1

diam

eter

8)

gepu

ntla

ste

wap

net

ten

3 bp

e va

n 1

dia-

com

bina

tie 7)

8)

stav

enro

llen

3 bp

e pe

r di

amet

er 6)

gepu

ntla

ste

wap

net

ten

3 bp

e pe

r dia

-co

mbi

natie

6) 7

) R

e 1

per 3

0 t

m

in 3

per

bpe

m

in 2

per

bpe

1

lang

s + d

war

s 5

per b

pe

5 pe

r bpe

3

lang

s + 2

dw

ars

10 p

er b

pe

10 p

er b

pe

5 la

ngs +

5 d

war

s R

mR

e id

em

idem

id

em

idem

id

em

idem

R

eac

tRe

nom

2)

idem

id

em

idem

id

em

idem

id

em

Agt

idem

id

em

idem

id

em

idem

id

em

Bui

gpro

ef

1 pe

r bpe

4)

idem

2

per b

pe

2 pe

r bpe

1

lang

s + 1

dw

ars

5 pe

r bpe

5

per b

pe

3 la

ngs +

2 d

war

s M

assa

per

m

idem

id

em 5)

id

em

idem

5)

idem

id

em 5)

G

eom

etrie

opp

en

pro

fielfa

ctor

id

em

idem

id

em

idem

id

em

Idem

Che

mis

che

sa

men

st +

Ceq

3)

1 pe

r lad

ing

1

per l

adin

g 1

per l

adin

g 1

per l

adin

g 1

per l

adin

g 1

per l

adin

g

Afs

chui

fpro

ef

nv

t m

in 2

per

bpe

n

vt

3 pe

r bpe

n

vt

3 pe

r bpe

B

uig-

te

rugb

uigt

rekp

roe

f

nv

t n

vt

2 pe

r bpe

n

vt

2 pe

r bpe

n

vt

Afm

etin

gen

nv

t m

in 1

per

bpe

n

vt

1 pe

r bpe

n

vt

1 pe

r bpe

V

erm

oeiin

g n

vt

nv

t 5

per j

aar

5 pe

r jaa

r 6

per b

pe 9)

5

per b

pe 10

)

1) The audit is always for each manufacturing process (hot-rolled-cooled -cold-stretched cold-profiles) of a certain type of reinforcing steel 2) If applicable (B500C) 3) Chemical composition + Ceq to be determined and submitted by the steel manufacturer not for each diameter (combination) 4) For bending mass and geometry surface + frfp min 1 per 150 tons 5) Can be determined for welding 6) Smallest largest and intermediate diameters (always skipping 2 consecutive diameters) of the range (deviating from EN 10080) 7) Always the most critical diameter combination that occurs 8) In a period of a maximum of 5 years number and spreading of diameters 9) For d le 28 mm the largest and middle diameters for gt 28 mm the largest diameter 10) The largest middle and smallest diameters Test unit is defined as -- barscoils the load or a part of the load (for bending mass and geometryprofile min 1 per 90 t) -- point welded reinforcement fabrics 50 tons of the same combination of reinforcing steel types and diameters manufactured with the same point welding machine

Annex IV Model for biannual reporting on reinforcing steel

Page 4: National Assessment Guideline - Kiwa · PDF fileThe NEN-EN 10080:2005 is not a harmonised standard and therefore a CE mark can not yet be attached to the products covered by this BRL

National Assessment Guideline BRL 0501 01 September 2010 copy Kiwa NV - -

3

52 Administrator of the quality system 18 53 Internal quality controlquality plan 18 54 Procedures and work instructions 18 55 Other requirements to the quality system 18 551 Reinforcing steel 18 552 Storage of reinforcing steel 19

6 Requirements for the functioning of a test laboratory for testing reinforcing steel andor point welded reinforcement fabrics 20

61 The supplier has its own laboratory for testing reinforcing steel for its variable and attributive properties 20

62 Outsourcing of testing 20 63 Verification audit 20 631 Variable properties 21 632 Attributive properties 22

7 Summary audit and inspection 23

8 Requirements of de certification institute 24 81 General 24 82 Certification staff 24 821 Qualification requirements 24 8211 Qualification requirements for the certification executives of a CI meeting the

requirements set out in EN 45011 25 8212 Supplementary qualification requirements for the certification executives of a CI as

determined by the Board of Experts for the subject of this BRL 25 822 Qualification 25 83 Initial audit report 26 84 Decision about granting the certificate 26 85 Presentation of the quality statement 26 86 Nature and frequency of external inspections 26 87 Reporting to the Board of Experts 26 88 Interpretation of requirements 26 89 Specific rules defined by the Board of Experts 26

9 List of documents mentioned 27 91 Standardsnormative documents 27

Annexes Annex 1 Model certificate Annex 2 Model for internal quality control schedule Annex 3 Sampling and testing overview Annex 4 Model for biannual reporting on reinforcing steel

National Assessment Guideline BRL 0501 01 September 2010 copy Kiwa NV - -

4

1 Introduction

11 General The requirements included in this assessment guideline are applied by certification institutes acknowledged for this purpose by the Dutch Accreditation Council when handling an application for or continuation of a product certificate for Reinforcing Steel The quality statement to be issued is designated as KOMOreg product certificate The technical area of the BRL is H9 - Steel for applications in concrete reinforcing steel prestressing steel prestressing systems thermal bridges coupling systems lattice girders steel fibres and glass-fibre bars Besides the requirements laid down in this assessment guideline the certification and attestation institutes will have additional requirements in the sense of general procedural requirements of certification and attestation as stated in the general certification and attestation regulations of the institute concerned This assessment guideline replaces BRL number 0501 dated 2000-01-15 including amendment sheet dated 2005-01-18 In any case the validity of the quality statements issued on the basis of this assessment guideline will terminate one year after this BRL was declared binding During the performance of the certification activities the certification institutes must meet the requirements laid down in the chapter lsquoRequirements of certification institutesrsquo

12 Area of application The products are in conformity with NEN 60082008 in line with NEN-EN 100802005 and intended for application in concrete constructions Explanation The European standard NEN-EN 100802005 provides the general requirements definitions and testing requirements for the performance properties of weldable reinforcing steel but does not provide a more detailed definition of reinforcing steel types with the corresponding performance requirements Therefore the Dutch standard NEN 60082008 provides the performance requirements (number values) of the Dutch reinforcing steel types that comply with NEN-EN 100802005 This will be described in more detail in this BRL

13 CE mark Relationship between the Building Decree and the European Construction Products Directive (CPD 89106EEC) No harmonised European standard (NEN-EN) is applicable to these products yet The NEN-EN 100802005 is not a harmonised standard and therefore a CE mark can not yet be attached to the products covered by this BRL

14 Acceptance of audit reports provided by the supplier If the supplier submits reports of audit institutes or laboratories in order to demonstrate that the requirements of the BRL are met they must show that these were drawn up by an institute that complies with the applicable accreditation standard being bull NEN-EN-ISOIEC 17025 for laboratories bull NEN-EN-ISOIEC 17020 for inspection institutes bull NEN-EN 45011 for certification institutes certifying products bull NEN-EN-ISOIEC 17021 for certification institutes certifying systems bull NEN-EN-ISOIEC 17024 for certification institutes certifying persons

National Assessment Guideline BRL 0501 01 September 2010 copy Kiwa NV - -

5

The institute is supposed to meet these criteria when it can submit an accreditation certificate issued by the Dutch Authority for Accreditation (RvA) or an accreditation institute with which the RvA has entered into an agreement of mutual acceptance This accreditation must apply to the specific audit required for this BRL If no accreditation certificate can be submitted the certification institute itself will verify whether the accreditation standard is met or (have) perform(ed) the audit concerned again itself

15 Certificate The model of the KOMOreg product certificate based on this BRL is included as an annex to this BRL

National Assessment Guideline BRL 0501 01 September 2010 copy Kiwa NV - -

6

2 Terminology

21 Terms This assessment guideline uses the following definitions bull Assessment guideline The arrangements made in the Board of Experts concerning the subject of certification bull Board of Experts The Board of Experts lsquoReinforcing Materialsrsquo bull Supplier

The party responsible for continuous compliance of the products with the requirements the certification has been based on

bull Internal Quality Control (IQC) schedule A description of the quality inspections performed by the supplier as part of its quality system

bull Initial audit (type audit) The preliminary audit to determine whether all requirements set out in the BRL are met bull Internal production inspection audit (by the manufacturer)

The continuous internal production inspection audit to make sure that the certified products constantly comply with the requirements set out in the BRL For this the manufacturer performs among other things tensile tests bending tests measurements of the geometry of the profiling and chemical analyses The fatigue tests are usually performed in an external laboratory

bull External periodic audit The external audit performed after granting of the certificate to make sure that the certified products constantly comply with the requirements set out in the BRL During the external periodic audit the certification institute takes random samples for tensile and bending tests measurements of the geometry of the profiling and chemical analyses Additionally samples are periodically assigned for performing fatigue tests This is also called lsquoaudit testingrsquo The results are tested against the requirements set out in the BRL

bull External verification audit The external verification audit performed during the initial audit and subsequently every two years for verification of the determination of the variable and attributive properties For this two series of similar test pieces are taken the test results of which are compared in pairs for their mutual differences

22 Definitions In addition to the terms and definitions in NEN-EN 100802005 the following definitions apply in this BRL bull Fatigue strength

NEN 6008 requires for the fatigue strength a minimum tension ripple 2σa with an upper tensile of 06 Re (Cv) A tension ripple is the tension change from a middle tension through an upper and lower tension back to the middle tension (2σa = tension ripple)

National Assessment Guideline BRL 0501 01 September 2010 copy Kiwa NV - -

7

Bovenspanning = upper force Middenspanning = middle force Onderspanning = lower force Cyclus = cycle Figure 1 stress change

bull Nominal diameter (d) The diameter of an imaginary bar with a circle-shaped cross-section of the same length and volume as the actual bar with profiled surface excluding tolerances bull Variable properties Property to which a quantitative value is assigned when assessing the measurement In NEN 6008 these are the properties 02 yield limit (Rp02) or flow limit (Re) yield at maximum load (Agt) the tensile strengthflow limit ratio (RmRe) the ratio of the actual flow limitnominal flow limit (ReactRenom) and fatigue strength (2σa) In conformity with NEN-EN 10080 section 7333 the upper flow limit (ReH) applies to the flow limit (Re) If there is no flow the 02 yield limit (Rp02) is to be determined

bull Attributive properties Property to which a value is assigned during the assessment that can only be regarded as good or wrong In NEN 6008 these are the properties nominal diameter mass per length profiling (profile factors fR fP rib height rib distance rib width rib flank angle rib (inclination) angle distance of rib rows and longitudinal rib) bending test shearing test and chemical composition bull Bendndashbend back tensile test Supplementary to NEN-EN-10080 and NEN 6008 the bend-bend back tensile test (attributive) is to be performed to determine whether the reinforcing steel types B500B and B500C in the diameter range le 16 mm can be bent back after having been bent 90deg retaining the required mechanical properties also see 4421 bull Characteristic value Value of a property with a certain chance of exceeding or undershooting in a hypothetical infinite test series In this BRL the characteristic value is the value of a property with a chance of exceeding of 5 (p = 095) or 10 (p = 090) with a probability level of W = 90 or W = 75 with a normally assumed spread bull Cv values These are the specified minimum (maximum) characteristic values as defined in NEN 6008 bull a1 a2 a3 a4 value The a-values are value increasesdecreases (the so-called extra values in accordance with NEN 6008) with respect to the specified Cv values see the examples given below Here x is the average value and X is the individual value -- a1 x ge Cv + a1 (eg Re a1 = 10 so average value x ge 510 MPa) -- a2 X ge Cv ndash a2 (eg Re a1 = 15 so individual value x ge 485 MPa) -- a3 x le Cv + a3 (eg RmRe a3 = 0) -- a4 X le Cv + a4 (eg RmRe a4 = 002)

23 Indication of reinforcing steel types The reinforcing steel types are indicated as follows in NEN 60082008 (shortened for a full overview see NEN 6008 table 1)

National Assessment Guideline BRL 0501 01 September 2010 copy Kiwa NV - -

8

Cv values for Quality indication

NEN 60082008

(new)

Quality indication

NEN 60081991 (old)

Rm (MPa) Re (MPa) RmRe Re act Re nom

Agt ()

B 500 A FeB 500 HKN

550

500 500

105a -

- -

30ab 275

B 500 B B 500 C

FeB 500 HWL FeB 500 HK

550 550

500 500 500 500

108 115 c -le135 - -

- lt125 - -

50b 75bc 325 325

See for the footnotes NEN 6008 table 1 Table 1

24 Reinforcing steel on coils The mechanical properties of reinforcing steel obtained from winding reinforcing steel on coils substantially change during this production process in particular the yield at maximum load (Agt) Therefore NEN 6008 prescribes a 05 surplus value for the Agt (Cv) of reinforcing steel on coils The Agt (Cv) is then for B500 A 35 for B500 B 55 and for B500 C 8 respectively NB Reinforcing steel on coils is not covered by BRL 0501 but by BRL 0503

National Assessment Guideline BRL 0501 01 September 2010 copy Kiwa NV - -

9

3 Procedure for obtaining a quality statement

31 Initial audit The initial audit to be performed by the certification institute takes place by means of the performance and product requirements incorporated in this assessment guideline including test methods and will include depending on the nature of the product to be certified bull (Sample) testing to determine whether the products meet the product andor performance

requirements bull Assessment of the production process bull Assessment of the quality system and the IQC schedule bull Testing for the presence and functioning of other required procedures bull Assessment of the supplierrsquos processing regulations

32 Certification Upon completion of the initial audit the results are presented to the decision-maker This party will assess the results and determine whether the certificate can be granted or that additional data andor audits are needed before the certificate can be granted

National Assessment Guideline BRL 0501 01 September 2010 copy Kiwa NV - -

10

4 Product requirements and determination methods

41 General This chapter includes the product requirements that reinforcing steel must comply with as well as the determination methods to make sure that the requirements are complied with These requirements will be part of the technical specification of the product that is included in the product certificate The product certificate states that the reinforcing steel complies with article 4 of BRL 0501 which also implies that the reinforcing steel complies with NEN 6720 article 512 or NEN-EN 1990NEN-EN 1991-12 including the national annexes

42 Product requirements and determination methods The requirements and the determination methods for reinforcing steel have been laid down in

Number Title Date of issue NEN-EN 10080 Steel for the reinforcement of concrete ndash

Weldable reinforcing steel - General May 2005

NEN-EN 10080 1) Dutch translation Staal voor het wapenen van beton ndash Lasbaar betonstaal - Algemeen

June 2005

NEN 6008 Steel for the reinforcement of concrete July 2008 NEN-EN-ISO 15630-1

Steel for the reinforcement of concrete and prestressing of concrete ndash Test methods ndash Part 1 reinforcing bars wire rod and wire

2002-04-15

NEN-EN-ISO 15630-2

Steel for the reinforcement of concrete and prestressing of concrete ndash Test methods ndash Part 2 welded fabric

2002-04-15

1) The English version lsquoNEN-EN 10080 May 2005rsquo is binding Table 2

43 Product requirements supplementary to and contrary to NEN-EN 10080 and NEN 6008 the following applies

431 Lattice girders What has been stated about lattice girders in NEN-EN 10080 and NEN 6008 does not apply to this assessment guideline see for this BRL 0502 lsquoLattice girdersrsquo

432 Non-profiled or slightly profiled reinforcing steel Non-profiled or slightly profiled reinforcing steel is outside the scope of the regime of this BRL it may only be applied to lattice girders

433 Geometry of the profiling determination of fR and fP Determination of the profile factor fR andor fP is done in conformity with NEN-EN-ISO 15630-1 art 113

For determining fR and fP use can be made of the simplified formulas in conformity with NEN-EN-ISO 15630-1 article 1133 a and b Use of the simplified formulas in conformity with NEN-EN-ISO 15630-1 article 1133 c and 1133d is not allowed In order to make use of the simplified formulas in conformity with articles 1133a and 1133b it must be determined in advance during the initial audit whether use of the reinforcing steel produced by the supplier and the proposed simplified formula (Trapezium or Simpson) produces results for fR and fP

National Assessment Guideline BRL 0501 01 September 2010 copy Kiwa NV - -

11

that are greater than or equal to the value that is obtained when using the general formula for determining fR and fP (in conformity with article 1131)

434 Standard deviations Supplementary to the NEN-EN- 10080 and NEN 6008 the following values are valid for the maximum standard deviations of the variable properties

Re (MPa)

Re(act)Re(nom) RmRe Agt ()

B500A bars coils point welded fabric

30 006 002 15

B500B bars coils point welded fabric

30 006 002 bars 20 coils 20 point welded fabric 15

B500C bars coils point welded fabric

30 006 002 bars 25 coils 25 point welded fabric 15

Table 3

435 Geometry longitudinal rib Supplementary to NEN-EN-ISO 15630-1 art 1032 the rib width of the longitudinal rib if present must be measured as well The rib width is analogically measured as the rib height The requirements with respect to the longitudinal rib are mentioned in NEN 6008 table 1

436 Nominal mass per metre Contrary to NEN 6008 table 1 read lsquothe allowable deviation from the nominal mass per meterrsquo for lsquotolerance nominal diameterrsquo

437 Extra value for a2 Contrary to NEN 6008 table 1 lsquoextra valuersquo read a2 = 05 for the Agt of B500A

438 Chemical composition of reinforcing steel Contrary to NEN-EN-10080 (Dutch translation) art 713 table 2 explanation a the following applies Exceeding the maximum value for the carbon content by 003 (mass percentage) is allowed provided that the value of the carbon equivalent is decreased by 002 (mass percentage)rdquo

National Assessment Guideline BRL 0501 01 September 2010 copy Kiwa NV - -

12

439 Nominal diameters preferred range Supplementary to NEN-EN10080 the table below mentions the general and the preferred range of the nominal diameters The nominal diameters between brackets ( ) are not preferred diameters Nominal diameter

mm

Bars Coils and bars

straightened from coils

Point welded fabric

Nominal surface of the cross section

mm2

Nominal mass per

metre

kgm 40 (x) 126 0099 45 (x) 159 0125 50 (x) x 196 0154 55 (x) (x) 238 0187 60 x x x 283 0222 65 (x) (x) 332 0260 70 x x 385 0302 75 (x) (x) 442 0347 80 x x x 503 0395 85 (x) (x) 567 0445 90 x x 636 0499 95 (x) (x) 709 0556 100 x x x 785 0617 110 (x) x 950 0746 120 x x x 113 0888 140 x x x 154 121 160 x x x 201 158 200 x 314 247 250 x 491 385 280 (x) 616 483 320 x 804 631 400 x 1257 986 500 x 1963 154

Table 4

4310 Values for a1 - a4 NEN EN 100802005 section 81312 provides insufficient clarity and interpretation of how to apply these a-values The a-values included in NEN 60082008 are the absolute minimummaximum a-values that with respect to the a2 and a 4 values are for determining the individual absolute minimum and maximum variable mechanical properties as referred to in NEN EN 100802005 section 11 (testing in case of a dispute)

However when assessing the variable test results per test unit during the production inspection in the factory in conformity with NEN EN 100802005 section 813 1 in case of b) the manufacturer himself shall determine the a1234-values of the population concerned and record this in a solid procedure With these determined manufacturer-specific a-values every test unit must be tested in order to meet the required quality level in the long term ( x - ks ge Cv or x + ks le Cv) The a-values of the manufacturer must al least comply with the absolute minimummaximum a-values included in NEN 60082008 but they are usually higherlower (ie more critical)

The solid procedures with the a-values recorded for each population must always be up-to-date and demonstrate to the satisfaction of the CI that with this the required Cv values (for the longer term) are complied with If these solid procedures are (still) missing in conformity with NEN EN 100802005 section 8131 only situation a) applies so in principle all individual values of the test unit must comply with the specified Cv value

National Assessment Guideline BRL 0501 01 September 2010 copy Kiwa NV - -

13

When determining the a-values solid procedures are preferably applied using the standard deviations and the assumption probabilities

4311 Rib row distance Σe Contrary to NEN 6008 table 1 and analogue with NEN-EN 10080 read for lsquodistance rib rowsdistance Σe le 075drsquo The projection of the cross ribs must cover at least 75 of the circumference of the reinforcing steel to be calculated based on the nominal diameter In formula total distance between the rib rows Σe lt 025 πd

44 Determination methods and test criteria Supplementary and contrary to NEN-EN 10080 and NEN 6008 the following applies

441 Preliminary audit for acceptance Supplementary to NEN-EN 10080 the following data are to be provided for each of the diameters given by the certification institute before the start of the initial audit -- test results of 60 pieces from at least 3 casting loads with 20 samples each the individual

test results of 02 yield limit or flow limit ((Rp02 or Re) yield at maximum load (Agt) the tensile strength02 yield or flow limit ratio RmRp02 or Re if applicable the ratio of the actual 02 yield limit or flow limitthe nominal 02 yield limit or flow limit (ReactRenom) Also the statistic processing of these data with average value ( x ) standard deviation (s) and characteristic value (Cv)

-- test results of 5 pieces from the same loads with 5 samples each the individual test results of the bendability shearing force of point welded reinforcement fabrics mass per metre and profiling (profile factors fR fP rib height rib distance rib width rib flank α rib (inclination) angle distance between the rib rows and the longitudinal rib)

-- chemical composition of each casting load -- (casting) load numbers and roller data (min 10 tons per diameter) -- drawing or sketch of the profiling and the factory brand

442 Inspection for the attributive properties NEN-EN 10080 gives insufficient interpretation of the termination methods and test criteria for inspections for the attributive properties bendability shearing force with point welded reinforcement fabrics mass per metre and profiling (profile factors fR fP rib height rib distance rib width rib flank α rib (inclination) angle β distance between the rib rows and the longitudinal rib Contrary to NEN-EN 10080 with these attributive properties the sampling and the conformity assessment is done as follows -- with the continuous internal production inspection not for each test unit but repeatedly

for the 15 last tested bars of a diameter or a diameter-weld combination -- with the initial audit the test series is to be extended to 15 samples if necessary and to 60

samples when there is initial rejection -- with the periodic external inspection (audit) the results of the attributive properties

obtained during the audit are to be added to the internal test results of the manufacturer Testing If a maximum of 2 of the 15 measurements do not comply the sampling can be extended by 45 extra measurements with respect to the attributive property concerned In this case the attributive properties of a total of 60 test bars are available The property concerned then still complies if not more than 2 of the 60 measurements do not comply with the NEN 6008 The profiling is increasingly measured using an optical camera The manual measurement will be valid in case of disputes

4421 Inspection of the bend-bend tensile test with initial audit and during external inspections (audit testing) By means of a bend-bend back tensile test it is determined whether the reinforcing steel types B500B and B500C in the diameter range le 16 mm can be bent back once with an angle of 90deg

National Assessment Guideline BRL 0501 01 September 2010 copy Kiwa NV - -

14

without significant decrease of the Rp02 or Re RmRe and Agt compared with the non-bent bars The values may not be below the mentioned Cv values for the reinforcing steel type and delivery condition concerned Sampling and testing frequency

Delivery condition Diameter Inspection frequency bars and coils B500BB500C

d le 16 mm 6 samples of different barscoils from 3 (casting) loads for each selected diameter Samples are to be taken from the same barsloads as for the regular tensile tests

Performance of the test Take a sample of reinforcing steel of sufficient length for doing 2 tensile tests A normal tensile test is performed with the one part and a bend-bend back tensile test with the other part The minimum length for the bendbend back tensile test is 70 cm The preparation of the tensile test including the way of ageing and the way of bending is done in accordance with the stipulations in NEN-EN 10080 with the exception of the way of bending back and the bending mandrel diameter to be used The bending mandrel diameter is maximum 4d Bend the bar over a bending mandrel of maximum 4d with a maximum angle of 90deg Mark the bending zone (length ca 9d) Place the test piece in a vice or the like Place an appropriate pipe over the part of the test piece to be bent back preferably with an internal pipe diameter that is max 2 mm larger than the diameter of the test piece and bend the test piece straight again Try to make the test piece as straight as possible Here the difference between the one part and the other part of the test piece may be maximally the diameter of the test piece (the bayonet forming) Age the test piece in conformity with the stipulations of NEN-EN 10080 and perform the tensile test The test is considered to be satisfactory when - the results do not show any significant differences with the results of the non-bent test

pieces - the values are above the set Cv values If the values are not satisfactory find the cause and repeat the tests if necessary

443 Inspection for the variable properties Contrary to NEN-EN 10080 the sampling and testing is done in conformity with BRL 0501 annex 3 for the variable properties 02 yield limit or flow limit (Rp02 or Re) yield at maximum load (Agt) the tensile strength02 yield or flow limit ratio RmRp02 or Re if applicable the ratio of the actual 02 yield limit or flow limitthe nominal 02 yield limit or flow limit (ReactRenom) and the fatigue strength NEN-EN 10080 provides insufficient interpretation of the test requirements the determination methods and the test criteria for inspection for the fatigue properties Therefore the requirements given below apply supplementary to NEN-EN 10080

National Assessment Guideline BRL 0501 01 September 2010 copy Kiwa NV - -

15

4431 Inspection for the fatigue strength in initial audit Sampling and testing frequency

Delivery condition

Diameter Inspection frequency

bars and coils for d le 28 mm the middle and largest of the diameter range For d gt 28 mm the largest diameter

6 samples of different barscoils from 3 (casting) loads for each selected diameter (18 bars per diameter)

point welded fabrics

The smallest middle and largest diameter of the diameter range (always with the least favourable diameter combination)

5 samples of different bars with a point weld from 3 test units for each selected diameter (15 bars per diameter)

Test method a semi-statistical This simplified test is regarded as sufficient if the requirements given below are met

With reinforcing steel bars and coils B500B and B500C in the diameter range d le 28 mm with

the requirement aσ2 ge 175 MPa

a2σ = 175 MPa a2σ = 200 MPa Number of samples 10 sup2) Number of samples 8 sup2) Stress changes (106) Break Stress changes (106) Break

lt 15 lt 20 ge 20

none le l ge 9

lt 075 075 lt 10 10 lt 20 ge 20

none le l

le 2 1)

ge 5 1) le 3 breaks if no break occurred up to 1x106 tension changes sup2) total number 10 + 8 = 18

Table 5

With reinforcing steel bars B500B and B500C in the diameter range d gt 28 mm with the

requirement aσ2 ge 145 MPa

a2σ = 145 MPa a2σ = 170 MPa Number of samples 10 sup2) Number of samples 8 sup2) Stress changes (106) Break Stress changes (106) Break

lt 15 lt 20 ge 20

none le l ge 9

lt 075 075 lt 15 15 lt 20 ge 20

none le 2

le 2 1)

ge 4 1) le 4 breaks if no break occurred up to 15 x 106 tension changes sup2) total number 10 + 8 = 18

Table 6

With point welded fabrics B500A B500B and B500C as well as reinforcing steel bars and coils

B500A with the requirement aσ2 ge 100 MPa

a2σ = 100 MPa a2σ = 180 MPa Number of samples 10 sup1) Number of samples 5 sup1) Stress changes (106) Break Stress changes (106) Break

lt 15 lt 20 ge 20

none le l ge 9

lt 025 025 lt 05 ge 05

none le 3 ge 2

sup1) total number 10 + 5 = 15 Table 7

National Assessment Guideline BRL 0501 01 September 2010 copy Kiwa NV - -

16

Test method b fully statistical This test is done with the appropriate statistic methods considering the requirements p = 095 W = 75 set out in NEN 6008

Here the requirement Cv le x ndash ks must be complied with where x = the average value in which max 2 million load changes must be maintained

for the individual value of one test bar s = the estimate of the standard deviation of the population k = variation coefficient according to the table below (in conformity with ISO 16269-6) Cv = the characteristic value for the tension changes 1 106

n k n k n k n k 15 199 20 193 30 187 50 181 16 199 25 190 40 183 100 176 18 195

Table 8

4432 Inspection for the fatigue strength in periodic external inspections (audit testing) The numbers of test bars of one diameter given below are tested on an annual basis The sampling takes place in the presence of the inspector and is part of the audit testing -- barscoils 5 per year -- point welded fabrics 5 per year provided that in a period of 5 years at least 80 of all certified diameters (diameter combinations) has been tested With the 80 mentioned at least the following must have been tested

bull For barscoils the largest diameter in the range d le 28 mm and the largest diameter in the range d gt 28 mm

bull For point welded fabrics the smallest and the largest diameters always with the least favourable diameter combination

The test is considered to be satisfactory if

bull with the barscoils max 1 sample broke at lt 20106 stress changes and the other 4 samples have at least resisted 20106 tension changes

bull with the point welded fabrics max 1 sample broke at between 10106 and 20106 stress changes and the other 4 samples have at least resisted 20106 stress changes

For barscoils and point welded fabrics only a re-inspection can take place if no more than 2 samples broke at fewer than 20 106 stress changes In this case 5 extra samples are to be tested whereby no breaks at lt 20 106 stress changes may occur In this case the test series is satisfactory If this is not complied with further testing is necessary to find the cause and corrective measures are to be taken in order to avoid reoccurrence If necessary a new initial audit for the fatigue strength is to be performed

45 Biannual reporting The test results of all test units of the continuous inspections are to be collected and statistically evaluated for Re Agt RmRe and ReactRenom (if relevant) based on data of the production of the previous six months or the 200 most recent data dependent on which is the largest number These data shall biannually be sent to the certification institute in conformity with the model in annex 4

National Assessment Guideline BRL 0501 01 September 2010 copy Kiwa NV - -

17

46 Identification Contrary to NEN-EN 10080 art 101211 the product numbers (technical classes) are not assigned by a European organisation However the other requirements concerning the identification are observed in conformity with NEN 6008 and NEN-EN 10080

47 Certification mark Each packaging unit must have a label with the following obligatory indications

bull KOMO mark bull product certificate number + delivery condition (bars coils fabrics) bull the reinforcing steel type and the manufacturer number bull name andor logo of the manufacturer bull mentioning BRL0501

A packaging unit can be characterised

bull with reinforcing steel on coils as lsquothe coilrsquo marking min 1 label per coil bull with reinforcing steel bars as lsquothe bundlesrsquo marking min 1 label per bundle bull with point welded fabrics as lsquonumber of fabricsrsquo marking at least 1 label per unit of max

40 reinforcement fabrics or max 2 tons Additionally each point welded fabric in which only externally purchased and delivered reinforcing steel has been used must be marked in an indelible and non-removable way For example when using a ldquoSchlatter Etikettiermachinen Methoderdquo or equivalent the point welded reinforcement fabrics are to be marked with at least 1 label

National Assessment Guideline BRL 0501 01 September 2010 copy Kiwa NV - -

18

5 Requirements to the quality system

51 General This chapter includes the requirements that the quality system of the supplier has to meet

52 Administrator of the quality system A staff member is to be appointed as quality system manager within the organisational structure

53 Internal quality controlquality plan The supplier must have and use a schedule for internal quality control (an IQC schedule) in accordance with the model indicated in annex 2 In this IQC schedule the following must be demonstrably recorded

bull what aspects the manufacturer will inspect bull what methods will be used for these inspections bull the frequency of these inspections bull how to record and file the inspection results bull aspects with respect to the production of point welded reinforcement fabrics

Also the supplier must have a procedure for organising the production process of any post-stretching alignment and the reinforcement fabrics to be point welded and how this is implemented inspected and monitored This IQC schedule must have been derived from the IQC schedule included in the annex and must have been set up such that it gives the CI enough confidence that the requirements set out in this assessment guideline are continuously met

This must function at least 3 months before issuing the certificate

54 Procedures and work instructions The supplier must be able to submit

bull procedures for - handling out of spec products and (semi-)products to be repaired - corrective measures after observed defects - handling complaints about products andor services delivered - monitoring the quality using the extra value a - a4 - the work instructions and inspection forms used including the biannual reporting

(see annex 4)

55 Other requirements to the quality system

551 Reinforcing steel The following are regarded as sufficient proof that the purchased reinforcing steel complies with the product standard mentioned (NEN 6008) and other technical specifications

bull KOMO quality statement issued on the basis of BRL 0501 lsquoReinforcing steelrsquo by a certification andor attestation institute acknowledged by the Dutch Authority for Accreditation for the discipline involved

bull a (quality) statement the equivalence of which with the above-mentioned KOMO quality statement has been demonstrated

The traceability of the purchased reinforcing steel is guaranteed by the rolling mark and the labelling The origin (certificate number) of the reinforcing steel must be recorded at the initial audit

National Assessment Guideline BRL 0501 01 September 2010 copy Kiwa NV - -

19

552 Storage of reinforcing steel Reinforcing steel must be stored free from the ground Store and label reinforcing steel such that the chance of exchange for instance with foreign qualities is eliminated

National Assessment Guideline BRL 0501 01 September 2010 copy Kiwa NV - -

20

6 Requirements for the functioning of a test laboratory for testing reinforcing steel andor point welded reinforcement fabrics

61 The supplier has its own laboratory for testing reinforcing steel for its variable and attributive properties The laboratory equipment as well as the test methods must comply with

bull NEN-EN 10002-22001 Metallic materials tensile testing part 1 method of testing at ambient temperature

bull NEN-EN-ISO 15630-12002 Steel for the reinforcement and prestressing of concrete Test methods ndash Part 1 reinforcing bars wire rod and wire June 2002

bull NEN-EN-ISO 15630-22002 Steel for the reinforcement and prestressing of concrete Test methods ndash Part 2 welded fabric

Measuring equipment that has not been classified for one of the above-mentioned standards can be used as soon as they have been tested assessed and qualified by the CI

62 Outsourcing of testing Tests for the chemical composition and the fatigue strength of reinforcing steel can be outsourced as well De test results can be indicated as being lsquoperformed in a reliable wayrsquo if

bull The tests have been performed by a laboratory that meets the accreditation standard referred to in article 14 of this BRL NEN-EN-ISOIEC 17025 lsquoGeneral requirements for the competence of testing and calibration laboratoriesrsquo This accreditation must concern the performance of tests in conformity with the outsourcing assignment Besides a 31 or a 22 certificate of the results in conformity with NEN-EN 10204 is to be submitted or

bull The supplier receives the test results of the chemical composition from a company that has a product certificate of the lsquotechnical disciplinersquo (H9) mentioned in this BRL with the CI and the relevant measuring equipment in the laboratory concerned is covered by the product certificate audit

If the above requirements are not complied with the certification institute will perform or have performed the audit concerned itself In this case the certification institute will base its test on the accreditation standard NEN-EN-ISOIEC 17025

63 Verification audit An initial audit includes external verification of both the attributive and the variable properties Also an external verification for the performance of the used tensile tests takes place every two years The diameter is to be selected such that the diameters that occur most are tested in a period of 5 years When using a new tensile testing machinemeasuring equipment a verification audit is to be performed as well

National Assessment Guideline BRL 0501 01 September 2010 copy Kiwa NV - -

21

631 Variable properties For the verification of variable properties (the results of the tensile test) at least 15 random samples of one selected diameter must be taken in the presence of the inspector (audit testing) for each selected reinforcing steel type each of a length suitable for two test pieces for testing The selected representative diameters must change at the two-yearly verification With bars and coils the samples must have been spread over at least 3 loads of 1 diameter The samples for point welded reinforcement fabrics and the corresponding bars must come from 1 diameter combination produced on different days For each sample the two collected test pieces must be marked and then the test pieces must be bundled into two series of at least 15 test pieces A third series can be taken as spare series in case of discussions about the achieved results One series must be tested in the presence of the inspector at the manufacturerrsquos The inspector must have the other series tested at an external laboratory The time between the performances of both test series must be short enough to allow for neglecting any natural ageing of the testing material The test (tensile test) includes determination of the 02 yield limit or flow limit (Re) the tensile strength (Rm) the RmRe ratio and the yield with maximum load (Agt) of each individual test piece The thus obtained two series of measurement pairs must then be tested for their differences between both performances of the test Any systematic differences are to be tracked and eliminated

With the statistic comparison of two different performances of tests the differences of paired measurements are to be checked in relation with the hypothesis that the expected value of the average difference is zero (Student test) Rejection of this hypothesis indicates that there is a possibility of systematic differences For each variable property the xfi (i = 1n) of the measurement results of the manufacturer and the xei (i = 1hellip n) of the external institute must be calculated separately

bull Difference vi = xfi ndash xei considering the positive or negative difference and then the average difference

= sum

=

n

iiv

nv

1

1

bull standard deviation of the differences

minus

minus= sum

=

2

1

2

11 vnv

ns

n

iiv

bull value vsvt =

It must be verified for the variable properties the 02 yield limit or flow limit (Reee ) the tensile strength (Rmmm ) and the yield with maximum load (Aggg ttt ) whether or not t exceeds a critical limit to The critical values to depend on the number of tests and have been derived from ISO 3301 1975 with a = 001 (see table 9)

National Assessment Guideline BRL 0501 01 September 2010 copy Kiwa NV - -

22

Table 9 ndash Critical values of to

n to n to n to

10 103 11 096 12 090 13 085 14 080

15 077 16 074 17 071 18 068 19 066

20 064 25 056 30 050 35 047 40 043

If t gt to the hypothesis that there is no difference between the two series of paired measurements is rejected and so the cause of this must be found and eliminated This does not apply when sv and v are both below the reference values Sov and Vo in table 9 because of insufficient relevance

If t le to the hypothesis that there is no difference between the two series of paired measurements is not rejected The test can then be concluded unless Sv ge Sov In this case the standard deviation of the differences is excessive showing that the material concerned is unsuitable for the verification test Further investigation is then required

Table 10 ndash Reference values of Sov and Vo

sov vo 02 yield limit or flow limit 15 15 Tensile strength in MPa 15 20 Yield at maximum load in B500A B500B B500C

11 25 30

11 25 30

632 Attributive properties For the verification of attributive properties (mass per length chemical composition profiling bending test and if necessary a shearing test) the measurements of mass per length and profiling must be done in advance with the two series of at least 15 test pieces meant for the tensile test (see above) For the measurements of the bending test and shearing test (if applicable) the number of test pieces from the above described random samples must be extended with at least 5 test pieces for the bending test and if necessary the shearing test For the verification assessment of the chemical composition the number of test pieces is limited to a series of 3 test pieces from 3 test units Any combinations in the random samples of the above-mentioned verification assessments are allowed The test series at the manufacturerrsquos and the series of external tests (see above) should not produce other differences than those that can unambiguously be explained and eliminated

National Assessment Guideline BRL 0501 01 September 2010 copy Kiwa NV - -

23

7 Summary audit and inspection

Below a summary is provided of the tests to be performed for certification bull Initial audit the audit to determine whether all requirements in the BRL are met bull Inspection audit the audit performed after granting the certificate to determine whether

the certified products continuously meet the requirements set in the BRL Also indicates the frequency of the inspection audits to be performed by the certification institute (CI)

bull Inspection of the quality system inspection for compliance with the IQC schedule and the procedures

Here the frequency with which the certification institute must perform an inspection audit is indicated as well

Audit related to

Supervision by CI after granting the certificate1)

Requirement description Article BRL Initial audit

Inspection2) Frequency Product requirements bull Indication of product 2342 X X continuously bull Variable properties 4243 X X 34 x per year bull Chemical composition 4243 X X 34 x per year bull Bending test 42 X X 34 x per year bull Shearing test 42 X X 4 x per year bull Fatigue strength 4244 X X 1 x per year bull Geometry form 4243 X X 34 x per year bull Mass per unit 4243 X X 34 x per year bull Dimensions of fabricsbars 42 X X 34 x per year bull Bendndashbend back tensile

test 42 X X 3 x per year

Own testing laboratory bull Own laboratory 61 X X 1 x per year bull Outsourcing of tests 62 X X 34 x per year bull Verification audit 63 X X 1 x per 2 years System requirements bull IQC schedule 5 X X 34 x per year bull Quality mark 4647 X X 34 x per year

Table 11

1) In case of significant changes in the production process to be assessed by the CI the product requirements need to be tested again

2) The inspector or the certificate holder in the presence of the inspector will determine all product properties that can be performed within the visiting time (maximum 1 day) If this is not possible the CI and the certificate holder will make arrangements with respect to how the inspection will be performed

Inspection of the quality system The certification institute checks if the manufacturer meets the quality system requirements in chapter 5 of this BRL according to the frequency in article 86 of this BRL

National Assessment Guideline BRL 0501 01 September 2010 copy Kiwa NV - -

24

8 Requirements of de certification institute

81 General The certification institute must meet the requirements set out in EN 45011 Besides for the purpose of this BRL the institute must have been accredited by the Dutch Authority for Accreditation (RvA) or a similar body (an accreditation institute with which the RvA has entered into an agreement of mutual acceptance) The certification institute must have a set of regulations or a similar document defining the general rules to be observed during certification These particularly include bull The general rules for performance of the initial audit to be structured as follows

o The way in which suppliers are informed about the handling of a request o The performance of the audit o The decision based on the audit performed

bull The general rules concerning the performance of inspections and the inspection aspects used here

bull The measures the certification institute must take in case of defects bull The rules for terminating a certificate bull The possibility to make an appeal against decisions or measures of the certification

institute

82 Certification staff Staff involved in certification procedures include bull Auditors charged with performing the initial audit and assessing the reports of the

inspectors bull Inspectors charged with performing the external inspection at the supplierrsquos bull Decision-makers charged with taking decisions based on the initial audits performed

about continuation of certification based on inspections performed and about the necessity to take corrective measures

821 Qualification requirements A distinction is made with respect to 8211 Qualification requirements for the certification executives of a CI meeting the

requirements set out in EN 45011 8212 Supplementary qualification requirements for the certification executives of a CI as

determined by the Board of Experts for the subject of this BRL

National Assessment Guideline BRL 0501 01 September 2010 copy Kiwa NV - -

25

8211 Qualification requirements for the certification executives of a CI meeting the requirements set out in EN 45011

The qualification of the certification executives of a CI must comply with chapter 5 of EN 45011 The manual of the CI must describe how the qualification of the certification executives is performed

EN45011

Auditor

initial product assessment and assessment of the

production location

Inspector

assessment product location field and

projects after granting of certificate

Decision-maker

for granting and extending a certificate

Education General

Higher Vocational thinking and working level

Intermediate vocational working and thinking level

Higher Vocational thinking and working level

Education Specific

Basic training for auditing Basic training for auditing

Basic training for auditing

Experience General

1 year of relevant working experience with min 4 audits including 1 full initial audit done independently under supervision

1 year of relevant working experience with min 4 audits including 1 done independent under supervision

4 years of relevant working experience of which at least 1 year with respect to certification

Experience Specific

knowledge of BRL at detailed level and 4 audits related to the specific BRL or to similar BRLs

knowledge of BRL at detailed level and 4 audits related to the specific BRL or to similar BRLs

Basic knowledge of the specific certification schedule

8212 Supplementary qualification requirements for the certification executives of a CI as determined by the Board of Experts for the subject of this BRL

Certification staff Education Experience Auditor Higher vocational education level in one of the

following disciplines - Constructional engineering - Civil engineering - Mechanical engineering

2 years

Inspector Intermediate vocational education level in one of the following disciplines - ConstructionalCivil engineering - Materials science - Mechanical engineering

2 years

Decision-maker Higher vocational education level in one of the following disciplines - Constructional engineering - Civil engineering - Quality science - Mechanical engineering

4 years Managerial experience

822 Qualification Certification staff must be demonstrably qualified by comparing the education and experience with the requirements set out above If qualification takes place based on deviating criteria this must be laid down in writing The qualification authority is vested with

National Assessment Guideline BRL 0501 01 September 2010 copy Kiwa NV - -

26

bull Decision-makers qualification of auditors and inspectors bull Management of the certification institute qualification of decision-makers

83 Initial audit report The certification institute records the findings of the initial audit in a report The report must meet the following requirements bull Completeness the report makes a statement about all requirements set out in the

assessment guideline bull Traceability the findings the statement are based on must have been recorded in a

traceable way bull Basis for decision the decision-maker for granting a certificate must be able to base his

decision on the findings recorded in the report

84 Decision about granting the certificate The decision concerning the granting of the certificate must be made by a decision-maker who is qualified to do so and who has not been involved in the certificate audit himself The decision must have been recorded in a traceable way

85 Presentation of the quality statement The product certificate must be presented in conformity with the model included in the annex

86 Nature and frequency of external inspections The certification institute must regularly inspect the supplier for compliance with his obligations The Board of Experts will decide upon the frequency of the inspections At the time this assessment guideline took effect the frequency was set to bull 3 inspection visits per year at suppliers of hot-rolled products bull 4 inspection visits per year at suppliers of other products Inspections will in any case pertain to a number of matters including bull The product specifications laid down in the product specification bull The supplierrsquos production process bull The supplierrsquos IQC schedule and the results of the inspections performed by the supplier bull The correct way of marking the certified products bull Compliance with the required procedures The certification institute will lay down the findings of each inspection performed in a report in a traceable way

87 Reporting to the Board of Experts The certification institute must report on the certification activities performed at least once a year The report must include the following subjects bull Mutations in number of certificates (newlapsed) bull Number of inspections performed in relation to the determined frequency bull Inspection results bull Measures imposed in case of defects bull Complaints received from third parties with respect to certified products

88 Interpretation of requirements The Board of Experts may lay down the requirements set in this assessment guideline in a single separate interpretation document The certification institute is obliged to ensure whether an interpretation document has been drawn up and if so must make use of the interpretations laid down in this

89 Specific rules defined by the Board of Experts The Board of Experts has not defined specific rules that are to be followed with certification by the certification institute

National Assessment Guideline BRL 0501 01 September 2010 copy Kiwa NV - -

27

9 List of documents mentioned

91 Standardsnormative documents

NEN 6008 2008 Reinforcing steel NEN 6720 1995 Technical foundations for building constructions - TGB 1990 ndash

Regulations for concrete - TGB 1990 ndash Structural requirements and calculation methods (VBC 1995) September 1995 including amendment sheet A4 December 2007

NEN 6722 2002 Regulations for concrete ndash Execution December 2002 NEN 6723 1995 Regulations for concrete - Bridges ndash (VBB June 1995) Structural requirements

and calculation methods December 1995 including amendment sheet A1 December 2003

NEN-EN 1992 2005 Design of concrete structures NEN-EN 1994 2005 Design of composite steel and concrete structures NEN-EN 10002 2001 Metallic materials tensile testing - Part 1 Method of testing at ambient

temperature August 2001 NEN-EN 10080 2005 Steel for the reinforcement of concrete ndash Weldable reinforcing steel - General NEN-EN 10204 2004 Metallic products - Types of inspection documents October 2004 NEN-EN 45012 1998 General requirements for bodies operating assessment and

certificationregistration of quality systems NEN-EN-ISO 376 2004 Metallic materials - Calibration of force-proving instruments used for the

verification of uniaxial testing machines NEN-EN-ISO 7500-1 2004 Metallic materials - Verification of static uniaxial testing machines ndash

Part 1 Tensilecompression testing machines - Verification and calibration of the force-measuring system August 2004

NEN-EN-ISO 9513 2002 Metallic materials ndash Calibration of extensometers for uniaxial testing October 2002

NEN-EN-ISO 15630-1 2002 Steel for the reinforcement and prestressing of concrete - Test methods ndash Part 1 Reinforcing bars wire rod and wire June 2002

NEN-EN-ISO 15630-2 2002 Steel for the reinforcement and prestressing of concrete - Test methods ndash Part 2 Welded fabric

NEN-EN-ISOIEC 17020

2004 General criteria for the operation of various types of bodies performing inspection

NEN-EN-ISOIEC 17024

2003 Conformity assessment - General requirements for bodies operating certification of persons

NEN-EN-ISOIEC 17025

2005 General requirements for the competence of testing and calibration laboratories

ISO 3301 1975 Statistical interpretation of data ndash Comparison of two means in the case of paired observations

ISO 4965 1979 Axial load fatigue testing machines - Dynamic force calibration - Strain gauge technique April 1979

ISO 16269-6 2005 Statistical interpretation of data Determination of statistical tolerance intervals

Annex I Model certificate

Issued Replaces Issued date Valid until Indefinite Page 1 of 2

KOMOreg

Product certificate

ltName Productgt ltCertificate holdergt

STATEMENT OF CI This product certificate was issued on the basis of BRL lsquo lsquo in conformity with the regulations for Product Certification CI declares that the justifiable confidence exists that the name product supplied by the certificate holder meets the technical specifications laid down in this product certificate provided that name product has the KOMOreg mark as indicated in this product certificate Director CI Advice refer to wwwltCIgtnl to see if this certificate is valid

Certificate holder T F E I

Assessed Quality system Product

Periodic check

reg is a collective brand of Stichting Bouwkwaliteit

Annex II Model for IQC schedule or framework of IQC schedule

Subjects Aspects Method Frequency Registration

Basic materials or supplied materials bull Recipe sheets bull Inspection of incoming raw

materials bull Mechanical bull Chemical

Production process production equipment material bull Procedures bull Work instructions bull Equipment bull Material bull Process inspection

End products

Measuring and testing equipment

Measuring and testing equipment bull Measuring devices bull Calibration bull Outsourced tests

Logistics bull Internal transport bull Storage bull Packaging bull Preservation bull Identification or marking

of semi-finished and end products

Corrective measures Complaints handling

Annex III Sampling and testing overview

Type

on

derz

oek

1)

Doo

rlope

nd

inte

rn fa

brie

kson

derz

oek

Perio

diek

ex

tern

ond

erzo

ek (a

udit)

To

elat

ings

onde

rzoe

k

(type

onde

rzoe

k)

Type

bet

onst

aal

stav

enro

llen

per d

iam

eter

ge

punt

last

e w

apn

ette

n pe

r dia

-com

bina

tie

stav

enro

llen

3 bp

e va

n 1

diam

eter

8)

gepu

ntla

ste

wap

net

ten

3 bp

e va

n 1

dia-

com

bina

tie 7)

8)

stav

enro

llen

3 bp

e pe

r di

amet

er 6)

gepu

ntla

ste

wap

net

ten

3 bp

e pe

r dia

-co

mbi

natie

6) 7

) R

e 1

per 3

0 t

m

in 3

per

bpe

m

in 2

per

bpe

1

lang

s + d

war

s 5

per b

pe

5 pe

r bpe

3

lang

s + 2

dw

ars

10 p

er b

pe

10 p

er b

pe

5 la

ngs +

5 d

war

s R

mR

e id

em

idem

id

em

idem

id

em

idem

R

eac

tRe

nom

2)

idem

id

em

idem

id

em

idem

id

em

Agt

idem

id

em

idem

id

em

idem

id

em

Bui

gpro

ef

1 pe

r bpe

4)

idem

2

per b

pe

2 pe

r bpe

1

lang

s + 1

dw

ars

5 pe

r bpe

5

per b

pe

3 la

ngs +

2 d

war

s M

assa

per

m

idem

id

em 5)

id

em

idem

5)

idem

id

em 5)

G

eom

etrie

opp

en

pro

fielfa

ctor

id

em

idem

id

em

idem

id

em

Idem

Che

mis

che

sa

men

st +

Ceq

3)

1 pe

r lad

ing

1

per l

adin

g 1

per l

adin

g 1

per l

adin

g 1

per l

adin

g 1

per l

adin

g

Afs

chui

fpro

ef

nv

t m

in 2

per

bpe

n

vt

3 pe

r bpe

n

vt

3 pe

r bpe

B

uig-

te

rugb

uigt

rekp

roe

f

nv

t n

vt

2 pe

r bpe

n

vt

2 pe

r bpe

n

vt

Afm

etin

gen

nv

t m

in 1

per

bpe

n

vt

1 pe

r bpe

n

vt

1 pe

r bpe

V

erm

oeiin

g n

vt

nv

t 5

per j

aar

5 pe

r jaa

r 6

per b

pe 9)

5

per b

pe 10

)

1) The audit is always for each manufacturing process (hot-rolled-cooled -cold-stretched cold-profiles) of a certain type of reinforcing steel 2) If applicable (B500C) 3) Chemical composition + Ceq to be determined and submitted by the steel manufacturer not for each diameter (combination) 4) For bending mass and geometry surface + frfp min 1 per 150 tons 5) Can be determined for welding 6) Smallest largest and intermediate diameters (always skipping 2 consecutive diameters) of the range (deviating from EN 10080) 7) Always the most critical diameter combination that occurs 8) In a period of a maximum of 5 years number and spreading of diameters 9) For d le 28 mm the largest and middle diameters for gt 28 mm the largest diameter 10) The largest middle and smallest diameters Test unit is defined as -- barscoils the load or a part of the load (for bending mass and geometryprofile min 1 per 90 t) -- point welded reinforcement fabrics 50 tons of the same combination of reinforcing steel types and diameters manufactured with the same point welding machine

Annex IV Model for biannual reporting on reinforcing steel

Page 5: National Assessment Guideline - Kiwa · PDF fileThe NEN-EN 10080:2005 is not a harmonised standard and therefore a CE mark can not yet be attached to the products covered by this BRL

National Assessment Guideline BRL 0501 01 September 2010 copy Kiwa NV - -

4

1 Introduction

11 General The requirements included in this assessment guideline are applied by certification institutes acknowledged for this purpose by the Dutch Accreditation Council when handling an application for or continuation of a product certificate for Reinforcing Steel The quality statement to be issued is designated as KOMOreg product certificate The technical area of the BRL is H9 - Steel for applications in concrete reinforcing steel prestressing steel prestressing systems thermal bridges coupling systems lattice girders steel fibres and glass-fibre bars Besides the requirements laid down in this assessment guideline the certification and attestation institutes will have additional requirements in the sense of general procedural requirements of certification and attestation as stated in the general certification and attestation regulations of the institute concerned This assessment guideline replaces BRL number 0501 dated 2000-01-15 including amendment sheet dated 2005-01-18 In any case the validity of the quality statements issued on the basis of this assessment guideline will terminate one year after this BRL was declared binding During the performance of the certification activities the certification institutes must meet the requirements laid down in the chapter lsquoRequirements of certification institutesrsquo

12 Area of application The products are in conformity with NEN 60082008 in line with NEN-EN 100802005 and intended for application in concrete constructions Explanation The European standard NEN-EN 100802005 provides the general requirements definitions and testing requirements for the performance properties of weldable reinforcing steel but does not provide a more detailed definition of reinforcing steel types with the corresponding performance requirements Therefore the Dutch standard NEN 60082008 provides the performance requirements (number values) of the Dutch reinforcing steel types that comply with NEN-EN 100802005 This will be described in more detail in this BRL

13 CE mark Relationship between the Building Decree and the European Construction Products Directive (CPD 89106EEC) No harmonised European standard (NEN-EN) is applicable to these products yet The NEN-EN 100802005 is not a harmonised standard and therefore a CE mark can not yet be attached to the products covered by this BRL

14 Acceptance of audit reports provided by the supplier If the supplier submits reports of audit institutes or laboratories in order to demonstrate that the requirements of the BRL are met they must show that these were drawn up by an institute that complies with the applicable accreditation standard being bull NEN-EN-ISOIEC 17025 for laboratories bull NEN-EN-ISOIEC 17020 for inspection institutes bull NEN-EN 45011 for certification institutes certifying products bull NEN-EN-ISOIEC 17021 for certification institutes certifying systems bull NEN-EN-ISOIEC 17024 for certification institutes certifying persons

National Assessment Guideline BRL 0501 01 September 2010 copy Kiwa NV - -

5

The institute is supposed to meet these criteria when it can submit an accreditation certificate issued by the Dutch Authority for Accreditation (RvA) or an accreditation institute with which the RvA has entered into an agreement of mutual acceptance This accreditation must apply to the specific audit required for this BRL If no accreditation certificate can be submitted the certification institute itself will verify whether the accreditation standard is met or (have) perform(ed) the audit concerned again itself

15 Certificate The model of the KOMOreg product certificate based on this BRL is included as an annex to this BRL

National Assessment Guideline BRL 0501 01 September 2010 copy Kiwa NV - -

6

2 Terminology

21 Terms This assessment guideline uses the following definitions bull Assessment guideline The arrangements made in the Board of Experts concerning the subject of certification bull Board of Experts The Board of Experts lsquoReinforcing Materialsrsquo bull Supplier

The party responsible for continuous compliance of the products with the requirements the certification has been based on

bull Internal Quality Control (IQC) schedule A description of the quality inspections performed by the supplier as part of its quality system

bull Initial audit (type audit) The preliminary audit to determine whether all requirements set out in the BRL are met bull Internal production inspection audit (by the manufacturer)

The continuous internal production inspection audit to make sure that the certified products constantly comply with the requirements set out in the BRL For this the manufacturer performs among other things tensile tests bending tests measurements of the geometry of the profiling and chemical analyses The fatigue tests are usually performed in an external laboratory

bull External periodic audit The external audit performed after granting of the certificate to make sure that the certified products constantly comply with the requirements set out in the BRL During the external periodic audit the certification institute takes random samples for tensile and bending tests measurements of the geometry of the profiling and chemical analyses Additionally samples are periodically assigned for performing fatigue tests This is also called lsquoaudit testingrsquo The results are tested against the requirements set out in the BRL

bull External verification audit The external verification audit performed during the initial audit and subsequently every two years for verification of the determination of the variable and attributive properties For this two series of similar test pieces are taken the test results of which are compared in pairs for their mutual differences

22 Definitions In addition to the terms and definitions in NEN-EN 100802005 the following definitions apply in this BRL bull Fatigue strength

NEN 6008 requires for the fatigue strength a minimum tension ripple 2σa with an upper tensile of 06 Re (Cv) A tension ripple is the tension change from a middle tension through an upper and lower tension back to the middle tension (2σa = tension ripple)

National Assessment Guideline BRL 0501 01 September 2010 copy Kiwa NV - -

7

Bovenspanning = upper force Middenspanning = middle force Onderspanning = lower force Cyclus = cycle Figure 1 stress change

bull Nominal diameter (d) The diameter of an imaginary bar with a circle-shaped cross-section of the same length and volume as the actual bar with profiled surface excluding tolerances bull Variable properties Property to which a quantitative value is assigned when assessing the measurement In NEN 6008 these are the properties 02 yield limit (Rp02) or flow limit (Re) yield at maximum load (Agt) the tensile strengthflow limit ratio (RmRe) the ratio of the actual flow limitnominal flow limit (ReactRenom) and fatigue strength (2σa) In conformity with NEN-EN 10080 section 7333 the upper flow limit (ReH) applies to the flow limit (Re) If there is no flow the 02 yield limit (Rp02) is to be determined

bull Attributive properties Property to which a value is assigned during the assessment that can only be regarded as good or wrong In NEN 6008 these are the properties nominal diameter mass per length profiling (profile factors fR fP rib height rib distance rib width rib flank angle rib (inclination) angle distance of rib rows and longitudinal rib) bending test shearing test and chemical composition bull Bendndashbend back tensile test Supplementary to NEN-EN-10080 and NEN 6008 the bend-bend back tensile test (attributive) is to be performed to determine whether the reinforcing steel types B500B and B500C in the diameter range le 16 mm can be bent back after having been bent 90deg retaining the required mechanical properties also see 4421 bull Characteristic value Value of a property with a certain chance of exceeding or undershooting in a hypothetical infinite test series In this BRL the characteristic value is the value of a property with a chance of exceeding of 5 (p = 095) or 10 (p = 090) with a probability level of W = 90 or W = 75 with a normally assumed spread bull Cv values These are the specified minimum (maximum) characteristic values as defined in NEN 6008 bull a1 a2 a3 a4 value The a-values are value increasesdecreases (the so-called extra values in accordance with NEN 6008) with respect to the specified Cv values see the examples given below Here x is the average value and X is the individual value -- a1 x ge Cv + a1 (eg Re a1 = 10 so average value x ge 510 MPa) -- a2 X ge Cv ndash a2 (eg Re a1 = 15 so individual value x ge 485 MPa) -- a3 x le Cv + a3 (eg RmRe a3 = 0) -- a4 X le Cv + a4 (eg RmRe a4 = 002)

23 Indication of reinforcing steel types The reinforcing steel types are indicated as follows in NEN 60082008 (shortened for a full overview see NEN 6008 table 1)

National Assessment Guideline BRL 0501 01 September 2010 copy Kiwa NV - -

8

Cv values for Quality indication

NEN 60082008

(new)

Quality indication

NEN 60081991 (old)

Rm (MPa) Re (MPa) RmRe Re act Re nom

Agt ()

B 500 A FeB 500 HKN

550

500 500

105a -

- -

30ab 275

B 500 B B 500 C

FeB 500 HWL FeB 500 HK

550 550

500 500 500 500

108 115 c -le135 - -

- lt125 - -

50b 75bc 325 325

See for the footnotes NEN 6008 table 1 Table 1

24 Reinforcing steel on coils The mechanical properties of reinforcing steel obtained from winding reinforcing steel on coils substantially change during this production process in particular the yield at maximum load (Agt) Therefore NEN 6008 prescribes a 05 surplus value for the Agt (Cv) of reinforcing steel on coils The Agt (Cv) is then for B500 A 35 for B500 B 55 and for B500 C 8 respectively NB Reinforcing steel on coils is not covered by BRL 0501 but by BRL 0503

National Assessment Guideline BRL 0501 01 September 2010 copy Kiwa NV - -

9

3 Procedure for obtaining a quality statement

31 Initial audit The initial audit to be performed by the certification institute takes place by means of the performance and product requirements incorporated in this assessment guideline including test methods and will include depending on the nature of the product to be certified bull (Sample) testing to determine whether the products meet the product andor performance

requirements bull Assessment of the production process bull Assessment of the quality system and the IQC schedule bull Testing for the presence and functioning of other required procedures bull Assessment of the supplierrsquos processing regulations

32 Certification Upon completion of the initial audit the results are presented to the decision-maker This party will assess the results and determine whether the certificate can be granted or that additional data andor audits are needed before the certificate can be granted

National Assessment Guideline BRL 0501 01 September 2010 copy Kiwa NV - -

10

4 Product requirements and determination methods

41 General This chapter includes the product requirements that reinforcing steel must comply with as well as the determination methods to make sure that the requirements are complied with These requirements will be part of the technical specification of the product that is included in the product certificate The product certificate states that the reinforcing steel complies with article 4 of BRL 0501 which also implies that the reinforcing steel complies with NEN 6720 article 512 or NEN-EN 1990NEN-EN 1991-12 including the national annexes

42 Product requirements and determination methods The requirements and the determination methods for reinforcing steel have been laid down in

Number Title Date of issue NEN-EN 10080 Steel for the reinforcement of concrete ndash

Weldable reinforcing steel - General May 2005

NEN-EN 10080 1) Dutch translation Staal voor het wapenen van beton ndash Lasbaar betonstaal - Algemeen

June 2005

NEN 6008 Steel for the reinforcement of concrete July 2008 NEN-EN-ISO 15630-1

Steel for the reinforcement of concrete and prestressing of concrete ndash Test methods ndash Part 1 reinforcing bars wire rod and wire

2002-04-15

NEN-EN-ISO 15630-2

Steel for the reinforcement of concrete and prestressing of concrete ndash Test methods ndash Part 2 welded fabric

2002-04-15

1) The English version lsquoNEN-EN 10080 May 2005rsquo is binding Table 2

43 Product requirements supplementary to and contrary to NEN-EN 10080 and NEN 6008 the following applies

431 Lattice girders What has been stated about lattice girders in NEN-EN 10080 and NEN 6008 does not apply to this assessment guideline see for this BRL 0502 lsquoLattice girdersrsquo

432 Non-profiled or slightly profiled reinforcing steel Non-profiled or slightly profiled reinforcing steel is outside the scope of the regime of this BRL it may only be applied to lattice girders

433 Geometry of the profiling determination of fR and fP Determination of the profile factor fR andor fP is done in conformity with NEN-EN-ISO 15630-1 art 113

For determining fR and fP use can be made of the simplified formulas in conformity with NEN-EN-ISO 15630-1 article 1133 a and b Use of the simplified formulas in conformity with NEN-EN-ISO 15630-1 article 1133 c and 1133d is not allowed In order to make use of the simplified formulas in conformity with articles 1133a and 1133b it must be determined in advance during the initial audit whether use of the reinforcing steel produced by the supplier and the proposed simplified formula (Trapezium or Simpson) produces results for fR and fP

National Assessment Guideline BRL 0501 01 September 2010 copy Kiwa NV - -

11

that are greater than or equal to the value that is obtained when using the general formula for determining fR and fP (in conformity with article 1131)

434 Standard deviations Supplementary to the NEN-EN- 10080 and NEN 6008 the following values are valid for the maximum standard deviations of the variable properties

Re (MPa)

Re(act)Re(nom) RmRe Agt ()

B500A bars coils point welded fabric

30 006 002 15

B500B bars coils point welded fabric

30 006 002 bars 20 coils 20 point welded fabric 15

B500C bars coils point welded fabric

30 006 002 bars 25 coils 25 point welded fabric 15

Table 3

435 Geometry longitudinal rib Supplementary to NEN-EN-ISO 15630-1 art 1032 the rib width of the longitudinal rib if present must be measured as well The rib width is analogically measured as the rib height The requirements with respect to the longitudinal rib are mentioned in NEN 6008 table 1

436 Nominal mass per metre Contrary to NEN 6008 table 1 read lsquothe allowable deviation from the nominal mass per meterrsquo for lsquotolerance nominal diameterrsquo

437 Extra value for a2 Contrary to NEN 6008 table 1 lsquoextra valuersquo read a2 = 05 for the Agt of B500A

438 Chemical composition of reinforcing steel Contrary to NEN-EN-10080 (Dutch translation) art 713 table 2 explanation a the following applies Exceeding the maximum value for the carbon content by 003 (mass percentage) is allowed provided that the value of the carbon equivalent is decreased by 002 (mass percentage)rdquo

National Assessment Guideline BRL 0501 01 September 2010 copy Kiwa NV - -

12

439 Nominal diameters preferred range Supplementary to NEN-EN10080 the table below mentions the general and the preferred range of the nominal diameters The nominal diameters between brackets ( ) are not preferred diameters Nominal diameter

mm

Bars Coils and bars

straightened from coils

Point welded fabric

Nominal surface of the cross section

mm2

Nominal mass per

metre

kgm 40 (x) 126 0099 45 (x) 159 0125 50 (x) x 196 0154 55 (x) (x) 238 0187 60 x x x 283 0222 65 (x) (x) 332 0260 70 x x 385 0302 75 (x) (x) 442 0347 80 x x x 503 0395 85 (x) (x) 567 0445 90 x x 636 0499 95 (x) (x) 709 0556 100 x x x 785 0617 110 (x) x 950 0746 120 x x x 113 0888 140 x x x 154 121 160 x x x 201 158 200 x 314 247 250 x 491 385 280 (x) 616 483 320 x 804 631 400 x 1257 986 500 x 1963 154

Table 4

4310 Values for a1 - a4 NEN EN 100802005 section 81312 provides insufficient clarity and interpretation of how to apply these a-values The a-values included in NEN 60082008 are the absolute minimummaximum a-values that with respect to the a2 and a 4 values are for determining the individual absolute minimum and maximum variable mechanical properties as referred to in NEN EN 100802005 section 11 (testing in case of a dispute)

However when assessing the variable test results per test unit during the production inspection in the factory in conformity with NEN EN 100802005 section 813 1 in case of b) the manufacturer himself shall determine the a1234-values of the population concerned and record this in a solid procedure With these determined manufacturer-specific a-values every test unit must be tested in order to meet the required quality level in the long term ( x - ks ge Cv or x + ks le Cv) The a-values of the manufacturer must al least comply with the absolute minimummaximum a-values included in NEN 60082008 but they are usually higherlower (ie more critical)

The solid procedures with the a-values recorded for each population must always be up-to-date and demonstrate to the satisfaction of the CI that with this the required Cv values (for the longer term) are complied with If these solid procedures are (still) missing in conformity with NEN EN 100802005 section 8131 only situation a) applies so in principle all individual values of the test unit must comply with the specified Cv value

National Assessment Guideline BRL 0501 01 September 2010 copy Kiwa NV - -

13

When determining the a-values solid procedures are preferably applied using the standard deviations and the assumption probabilities

4311 Rib row distance Σe Contrary to NEN 6008 table 1 and analogue with NEN-EN 10080 read for lsquodistance rib rowsdistance Σe le 075drsquo The projection of the cross ribs must cover at least 75 of the circumference of the reinforcing steel to be calculated based on the nominal diameter In formula total distance between the rib rows Σe lt 025 πd

44 Determination methods and test criteria Supplementary and contrary to NEN-EN 10080 and NEN 6008 the following applies

441 Preliminary audit for acceptance Supplementary to NEN-EN 10080 the following data are to be provided for each of the diameters given by the certification institute before the start of the initial audit -- test results of 60 pieces from at least 3 casting loads with 20 samples each the individual

test results of 02 yield limit or flow limit ((Rp02 or Re) yield at maximum load (Agt) the tensile strength02 yield or flow limit ratio RmRp02 or Re if applicable the ratio of the actual 02 yield limit or flow limitthe nominal 02 yield limit or flow limit (ReactRenom) Also the statistic processing of these data with average value ( x ) standard deviation (s) and characteristic value (Cv)

-- test results of 5 pieces from the same loads with 5 samples each the individual test results of the bendability shearing force of point welded reinforcement fabrics mass per metre and profiling (profile factors fR fP rib height rib distance rib width rib flank α rib (inclination) angle distance between the rib rows and the longitudinal rib)

-- chemical composition of each casting load -- (casting) load numbers and roller data (min 10 tons per diameter) -- drawing or sketch of the profiling and the factory brand

442 Inspection for the attributive properties NEN-EN 10080 gives insufficient interpretation of the termination methods and test criteria for inspections for the attributive properties bendability shearing force with point welded reinforcement fabrics mass per metre and profiling (profile factors fR fP rib height rib distance rib width rib flank α rib (inclination) angle β distance between the rib rows and the longitudinal rib Contrary to NEN-EN 10080 with these attributive properties the sampling and the conformity assessment is done as follows -- with the continuous internal production inspection not for each test unit but repeatedly

for the 15 last tested bars of a diameter or a diameter-weld combination -- with the initial audit the test series is to be extended to 15 samples if necessary and to 60

samples when there is initial rejection -- with the periodic external inspection (audit) the results of the attributive properties

obtained during the audit are to be added to the internal test results of the manufacturer Testing If a maximum of 2 of the 15 measurements do not comply the sampling can be extended by 45 extra measurements with respect to the attributive property concerned In this case the attributive properties of a total of 60 test bars are available The property concerned then still complies if not more than 2 of the 60 measurements do not comply with the NEN 6008 The profiling is increasingly measured using an optical camera The manual measurement will be valid in case of disputes

4421 Inspection of the bend-bend tensile test with initial audit and during external inspections (audit testing) By means of a bend-bend back tensile test it is determined whether the reinforcing steel types B500B and B500C in the diameter range le 16 mm can be bent back once with an angle of 90deg

National Assessment Guideline BRL 0501 01 September 2010 copy Kiwa NV - -

14

without significant decrease of the Rp02 or Re RmRe and Agt compared with the non-bent bars The values may not be below the mentioned Cv values for the reinforcing steel type and delivery condition concerned Sampling and testing frequency

Delivery condition Diameter Inspection frequency bars and coils B500BB500C

d le 16 mm 6 samples of different barscoils from 3 (casting) loads for each selected diameter Samples are to be taken from the same barsloads as for the regular tensile tests

Performance of the test Take a sample of reinforcing steel of sufficient length for doing 2 tensile tests A normal tensile test is performed with the one part and a bend-bend back tensile test with the other part The minimum length for the bendbend back tensile test is 70 cm The preparation of the tensile test including the way of ageing and the way of bending is done in accordance with the stipulations in NEN-EN 10080 with the exception of the way of bending back and the bending mandrel diameter to be used The bending mandrel diameter is maximum 4d Bend the bar over a bending mandrel of maximum 4d with a maximum angle of 90deg Mark the bending zone (length ca 9d) Place the test piece in a vice or the like Place an appropriate pipe over the part of the test piece to be bent back preferably with an internal pipe diameter that is max 2 mm larger than the diameter of the test piece and bend the test piece straight again Try to make the test piece as straight as possible Here the difference between the one part and the other part of the test piece may be maximally the diameter of the test piece (the bayonet forming) Age the test piece in conformity with the stipulations of NEN-EN 10080 and perform the tensile test The test is considered to be satisfactory when - the results do not show any significant differences with the results of the non-bent test

pieces - the values are above the set Cv values If the values are not satisfactory find the cause and repeat the tests if necessary

443 Inspection for the variable properties Contrary to NEN-EN 10080 the sampling and testing is done in conformity with BRL 0501 annex 3 for the variable properties 02 yield limit or flow limit (Rp02 or Re) yield at maximum load (Agt) the tensile strength02 yield or flow limit ratio RmRp02 or Re if applicable the ratio of the actual 02 yield limit or flow limitthe nominal 02 yield limit or flow limit (ReactRenom) and the fatigue strength NEN-EN 10080 provides insufficient interpretation of the test requirements the determination methods and the test criteria for inspection for the fatigue properties Therefore the requirements given below apply supplementary to NEN-EN 10080

National Assessment Guideline BRL 0501 01 September 2010 copy Kiwa NV - -

15

4431 Inspection for the fatigue strength in initial audit Sampling and testing frequency

Delivery condition

Diameter Inspection frequency

bars and coils for d le 28 mm the middle and largest of the diameter range For d gt 28 mm the largest diameter

6 samples of different barscoils from 3 (casting) loads for each selected diameter (18 bars per diameter)

point welded fabrics

The smallest middle and largest diameter of the diameter range (always with the least favourable diameter combination)

5 samples of different bars with a point weld from 3 test units for each selected diameter (15 bars per diameter)

Test method a semi-statistical This simplified test is regarded as sufficient if the requirements given below are met

With reinforcing steel bars and coils B500B and B500C in the diameter range d le 28 mm with

the requirement aσ2 ge 175 MPa

a2σ = 175 MPa a2σ = 200 MPa Number of samples 10 sup2) Number of samples 8 sup2) Stress changes (106) Break Stress changes (106) Break

lt 15 lt 20 ge 20

none le l ge 9

lt 075 075 lt 10 10 lt 20 ge 20

none le l

le 2 1)

ge 5 1) le 3 breaks if no break occurred up to 1x106 tension changes sup2) total number 10 + 8 = 18

Table 5

With reinforcing steel bars B500B and B500C in the diameter range d gt 28 mm with the

requirement aσ2 ge 145 MPa

a2σ = 145 MPa a2σ = 170 MPa Number of samples 10 sup2) Number of samples 8 sup2) Stress changes (106) Break Stress changes (106) Break

lt 15 lt 20 ge 20

none le l ge 9

lt 075 075 lt 15 15 lt 20 ge 20

none le 2

le 2 1)

ge 4 1) le 4 breaks if no break occurred up to 15 x 106 tension changes sup2) total number 10 + 8 = 18

Table 6

With point welded fabrics B500A B500B and B500C as well as reinforcing steel bars and coils

B500A with the requirement aσ2 ge 100 MPa

a2σ = 100 MPa a2σ = 180 MPa Number of samples 10 sup1) Number of samples 5 sup1) Stress changes (106) Break Stress changes (106) Break

lt 15 lt 20 ge 20

none le l ge 9

lt 025 025 lt 05 ge 05

none le 3 ge 2

sup1) total number 10 + 5 = 15 Table 7

National Assessment Guideline BRL 0501 01 September 2010 copy Kiwa NV - -

16

Test method b fully statistical This test is done with the appropriate statistic methods considering the requirements p = 095 W = 75 set out in NEN 6008

Here the requirement Cv le x ndash ks must be complied with where x = the average value in which max 2 million load changes must be maintained

for the individual value of one test bar s = the estimate of the standard deviation of the population k = variation coefficient according to the table below (in conformity with ISO 16269-6) Cv = the characteristic value for the tension changes 1 106

n k n k n k n k 15 199 20 193 30 187 50 181 16 199 25 190 40 183 100 176 18 195

Table 8

4432 Inspection for the fatigue strength in periodic external inspections (audit testing) The numbers of test bars of one diameter given below are tested on an annual basis The sampling takes place in the presence of the inspector and is part of the audit testing -- barscoils 5 per year -- point welded fabrics 5 per year provided that in a period of 5 years at least 80 of all certified diameters (diameter combinations) has been tested With the 80 mentioned at least the following must have been tested

bull For barscoils the largest diameter in the range d le 28 mm and the largest diameter in the range d gt 28 mm

bull For point welded fabrics the smallest and the largest diameters always with the least favourable diameter combination

The test is considered to be satisfactory if

bull with the barscoils max 1 sample broke at lt 20106 stress changes and the other 4 samples have at least resisted 20106 tension changes

bull with the point welded fabrics max 1 sample broke at between 10106 and 20106 stress changes and the other 4 samples have at least resisted 20106 stress changes

For barscoils and point welded fabrics only a re-inspection can take place if no more than 2 samples broke at fewer than 20 106 stress changes In this case 5 extra samples are to be tested whereby no breaks at lt 20 106 stress changes may occur In this case the test series is satisfactory If this is not complied with further testing is necessary to find the cause and corrective measures are to be taken in order to avoid reoccurrence If necessary a new initial audit for the fatigue strength is to be performed

45 Biannual reporting The test results of all test units of the continuous inspections are to be collected and statistically evaluated for Re Agt RmRe and ReactRenom (if relevant) based on data of the production of the previous six months or the 200 most recent data dependent on which is the largest number These data shall biannually be sent to the certification institute in conformity with the model in annex 4

National Assessment Guideline BRL 0501 01 September 2010 copy Kiwa NV - -

17

46 Identification Contrary to NEN-EN 10080 art 101211 the product numbers (technical classes) are not assigned by a European organisation However the other requirements concerning the identification are observed in conformity with NEN 6008 and NEN-EN 10080

47 Certification mark Each packaging unit must have a label with the following obligatory indications

bull KOMO mark bull product certificate number + delivery condition (bars coils fabrics) bull the reinforcing steel type and the manufacturer number bull name andor logo of the manufacturer bull mentioning BRL0501

A packaging unit can be characterised

bull with reinforcing steel on coils as lsquothe coilrsquo marking min 1 label per coil bull with reinforcing steel bars as lsquothe bundlesrsquo marking min 1 label per bundle bull with point welded fabrics as lsquonumber of fabricsrsquo marking at least 1 label per unit of max

40 reinforcement fabrics or max 2 tons Additionally each point welded fabric in which only externally purchased and delivered reinforcing steel has been used must be marked in an indelible and non-removable way For example when using a ldquoSchlatter Etikettiermachinen Methoderdquo or equivalent the point welded reinforcement fabrics are to be marked with at least 1 label

National Assessment Guideline BRL 0501 01 September 2010 copy Kiwa NV - -

18

5 Requirements to the quality system

51 General This chapter includes the requirements that the quality system of the supplier has to meet

52 Administrator of the quality system A staff member is to be appointed as quality system manager within the organisational structure

53 Internal quality controlquality plan The supplier must have and use a schedule for internal quality control (an IQC schedule) in accordance with the model indicated in annex 2 In this IQC schedule the following must be demonstrably recorded

bull what aspects the manufacturer will inspect bull what methods will be used for these inspections bull the frequency of these inspections bull how to record and file the inspection results bull aspects with respect to the production of point welded reinforcement fabrics

Also the supplier must have a procedure for organising the production process of any post-stretching alignment and the reinforcement fabrics to be point welded and how this is implemented inspected and monitored This IQC schedule must have been derived from the IQC schedule included in the annex and must have been set up such that it gives the CI enough confidence that the requirements set out in this assessment guideline are continuously met

This must function at least 3 months before issuing the certificate

54 Procedures and work instructions The supplier must be able to submit

bull procedures for - handling out of spec products and (semi-)products to be repaired - corrective measures after observed defects - handling complaints about products andor services delivered - monitoring the quality using the extra value a - a4 - the work instructions and inspection forms used including the biannual reporting

(see annex 4)

55 Other requirements to the quality system

551 Reinforcing steel The following are regarded as sufficient proof that the purchased reinforcing steel complies with the product standard mentioned (NEN 6008) and other technical specifications

bull KOMO quality statement issued on the basis of BRL 0501 lsquoReinforcing steelrsquo by a certification andor attestation institute acknowledged by the Dutch Authority for Accreditation for the discipline involved

bull a (quality) statement the equivalence of which with the above-mentioned KOMO quality statement has been demonstrated

The traceability of the purchased reinforcing steel is guaranteed by the rolling mark and the labelling The origin (certificate number) of the reinforcing steel must be recorded at the initial audit

National Assessment Guideline BRL 0501 01 September 2010 copy Kiwa NV - -

19

552 Storage of reinforcing steel Reinforcing steel must be stored free from the ground Store and label reinforcing steel such that the chance of exchange for instance with foreign qualities is eliminated

National Assessment Guideline BRL 0501 01 September 2010 copy Kiwa NV - -

20

6 Requirements for the functioning of a test laboratory for testing reinforcing steel andor point welded reinforcement fabrics

61 The supplier has its own laboratory for testing reinforcing steel for its variable and attributive properties The laboratory equipment as well as the test methods must comply with

bull NEN-EN 10002-22001 Metallic materials tensile testing part 1 method of testing at ambient temperature

bull NEN-EN-ISO 15630-12002 Steel for the reinforcement and prestressing of concrete Test methods ndash Part 1 reinforcing bars wire rod and wire June 2002

bull NEN-EN-ISO 15630-22002 Steel for the reinforcement and prestressing of concrete Test methods ndash Part 2 welded fabric

Measuring equipment that has not been classified for one of the above-mentioned standards can be used as soon as they have been tested assessed and qualified by the CI

62 Outsourcing of testing Tests for the chemical composition and the fatigue strength of reinforcing steel can be outsourced as well De test results can be indicated as being lsquoperformed in a reliable wayrsquo if

bull The tests have been performed by a laboratory that meets the accreditation standard referred to in article 14 of this BRL NEN-EN-ISOIEC 17025 lsquoGeneral requirements for the competence of testing and calibration laboratoriesrsquo This accreditation must concern the performance of tests in conformity with the outsourcing assignment Besides a 31 or a 22 certificate of the results in conformity with NEN-EN 10204 is to be submitted or

bull The supplier receives the test results of the chemical composition from a company that has a product certificate of the lsquotechnical disciplinersquo (H9) mentioned in this BRL with the CI and the relevant measuring equipment in the laboratory concerned is covered by the product certificate audit

If the above requirements are not complied with the certification institute will perform or have performed the audit concerned itself In this case the certification institute will base its test on the accreditation standard NEN-EN-ISOIEC 17025

63 Verification audit An initial audit includes external verification of both the attributive and the variable properties Also an external verification for the performance of the used tensile tests takes place every two years The diameter is to be selected such that the diameters that occur most are tested in a period of 5 years When using a new tensile testing machinemeasuring equipment a verification audit is to be performed as well

National Assessment Guideline BRL 0501 01 September 2010 copy Kiwa NV - -

21

631 Variable properties For the verification of variable properties (the results of the tensile test) at least 15 random samples of one selected diameter must be taken in the presence of the inspector (audit testing) for each selected reinforcing steel type each of a length suitable for two test pieces for testing The selected representative diameters must change at the two-yearly verification With bars and coils the samples must have been spread over at least 3 loads of 1 diameter The samples for point welded reinforcement fabrics and the corresponding bars must come from 1 diameter combination produced on different days For each sample the two collected test pieces must be marked and then the test pieces must be bundled into two series of at least 15 test pieces A third series can be taken as spare series in case of discussions about the achieved results One series must be tested in the presence of the inspector at the manufacturerrsquos The inspector must have the other series tested at an external laboratory The time between the performances of both test series must be short enough to allow for neglecting any natural ageing of the testing material The test (tensile test) includes determination of the 02 yield limit or flow limit (Re) the tensile strength (Rm) the RmRe ratio and the yield with maximum load (Agt) of each individual test piece The thus obtained two series of measurement pairs must then be tested for their differences between both performances of the test Any systematic differences are to be tracked and eliminated

With the statistic comparison of two different performances of tests the differences of paired measurements are to be checked in relation with the hypothesis that the expected value of the average difference is zero (Student test) Rejection of this hypothesis indicates that there is a possibility of systematic differences For each variable property the xfi (i = 1n) of the measurement results of the manufacturer and the xei (i = 1hellip n) of the external institute must be calculated separately

bull Difference vi = xfi ndash xei considering the positive or negative difference and then the average difference

= sum

=

n

iiv

nv

1

1

bull standard deviation of the differences

minus

minus= sum

=

2

1

2

11 vnv

ns

n

iiv

bull value vsvt =

It must be verified for the variable properties the 02 yield limit or flow limit (Reee ) the tensile strength (Rmmm ) and the yield with maximum load (Aggg ttt ) whether or not t exceeds a critical limit to The critical values to depend on the number of tests and have been derived from ISO 3301 1975 with a = 001 (see table 9)

National Assessment Guideline BRL 0501 01 September 2010 copy Kiwa NV - -

22

Table 9 ndash Critical values of to

n to n to n to

10 103 11 096 12 090 13 085 14 080

15 077 16 074 17 071 18 068 19 066

20 064 25 056 30 050 35 047 40 043

If t gt to the hypothesis that there is no difference between the two series of paired measurements is rejected and so the cause of this must be found and eliminated This does not apply when sv and v are both below the reference values Sov and Vo in table 9 because of insufficient relevance

If t le to the hypothesis that there is no difference between the two series of paired measurements is not rejected The test can then be concluded unless Sv ge Sov In this case the standard deviation of the differences is excessive showing that the material concerned is unsuitable for the verification test Further investigation is then required

Table 10 ndash Reference values of Sov and Vo

sov vo 02 yield limit or flow limit 15 15 Tensile strength in MPa 15 20 Yield at maximum load in B500A B500B B500C

11 25 30

11 25 30

632 Attributive properties For the verification of attributive properties (mass per length chemical composition profiling bending test and if necessary a shearing test) the measurements of mass per length and profiling must be done in advance with the two series of at least 15 test pieces meant for the tensile test (see above) For the measurements of the bending test and shearing test (if applicable) the number of test pieces from the above described random samples must be extended with at least 5 test pieces for the bending test and if necessary the shearing test For the verification assessment of the chemical composition the number of test pieces is limited to a series of 3 test pieces from 3 test units Any combinations in the random samples of the above-mentioned verification assessments are allowed The test series at the manufacturerrsquos and the series of external tests (see above) should not produce other differences than those that can unambiguously be explained and eliminated

National Assessment Guideline BRL 0501 01 September 2010 copy Kiwa NV - -

23

7 Summary audit and inspection

Below a summary is provided of the tests to be performed for certification bull Initial audit the audit to determine whether all requirements in the BRL are met bull Inspection audit the audit performed after granting the certificate to determine whether

the certified products continuously meet the requirements set in the BRL Also indicates the frequency of the inspection audits to be performed by the certification institute (CI)

bull Inspection of the quality system inspection for compliance with the IQC schedule and the procedures

Here the frequency with which the certification institute must perform an inspection audit is indicated as well

Audit related to

Supervision by CI after granting the certificate1)

Requirement description Article BRL Initial audit

Inspection2) Frequency Product requirements bull Indication of product 2342 X X continuously bull Variable properties 4243 X X 34 x per year bull Chemical composition 4243 X X 34 x per year bull Bending test 42 X X 34 x per year bull Shearing test 42 X X 4 x per year bull Fatigue strength 4244 X X 1 x per year bull Geometry form 4243 X X 34 x per year bull Mass per unit 4243 X X 34 x per year bull Dimensions of fabricsbars 42 X X 34 x per year bull Bendndashbend back tensile

test 42 X X 3 x per year

Own testing laboratory bull Own laboratory 61 X X 1 x per year bull Outsourcing of tests 62 X X 34 x per year bull Verification audit 63 X X 1 x per 2 years System requirements bull IQC schedule 5 X X 34 x per year bull Quality mark 4647 X X 34 x per year

Table 11

1) In case of significant changes in the production process to be assessed by the CI the product requirements need to be tested again

2) The inspector or the certificate holder in the presence of the inspector will determine all product properties that can be performed within the visiting time (maximum 1 day) If this is not possible the CI and the certificate holder will make arrangements with respect to how the inspection will be performed

Inspection of the quality system The certification institute checks if the manufacturer meets the quality system requirements in chapter 5 of this BRL according to the frequency in article 86 of this BRL

National Assessment Guideline BRL 0501 01 September 2010 copy Kiwa NV - -

24

8 Requirements of de certification institute

81 General The certification institute must meet the requirements set out in EN 45011 Besides for the purpose of this BRL the institute must have been accredited by the Dutch Authority for Accreditation (RvA) or a similar body (an accreditation institute with which the RvA has entered into an agreement of mutual acceptance) The certification institute must have a set of regulations or a similar document defining the general rules to be observed during certification These particularly include bull The general rules for performance of the initial audit to be structured as follows

o The way in which suppliers are informed about the handling of a request o The performance of the audit o The decision based on the audit performed

bull The general rules concerning the performance of inspections and the inspection aspects used here

bull The measures the certification institute must take in case of defects bull The rules for terminating a certificate bull The possibility to make an appeal against decisions or measures of the certification

institute

82 Certification staff Staff involved in certification procedures include bull Auditors charged with performing the initial audit and assessing the reports of the

inspectors bull Inspectors charged with performing the external inspection at the supplierrsquos bull Decision-makers charged with taking decisions based on the initial audits performed

about continuation of certification based on inspections performed and about the necessity to take corrective measures

821 Qualification requirements A distinction is made with respect to 8211 Qualification requirements for the certification executives of a CI meeting the

requirements set out in EN 45011 8212 Supplementary qualification requirements for the certification executives of a CI as

determined by the Board of Experts for the subject of this BRL

National Assessment Guideline BRL 0501 01 September 2010 copy Kiwa NV - -

25

8211 Qualification requirements for the certification executives of a CI meeting the requirements set out in EN 45011

The qualification of the certification executives of a CI must comply with chapter 5 of EN 45011 The manual of the CI must describe how the qualification of the certification executives is performed

EN45011

Auditor

initial product assessment and assessment of the

production location

Inspector

assessment product location field and

projects after granting of certificate

Decision-maker

for granting and extending a certificate

Education General

Higher Vocational thinking and working level

Intermediate vocational working and thinking level

Higher Vocational thinking and working level

Education Specific

Basic training for auditing Basic training for auditing

Basic training for auditing

Experience General

1 year of relevant working experience with min 4 audits including 1 full initial audit done independently under supervision

1 year of relevant working experience with min 4 audits including 1 done independent under supervision

4 years of relevant working experience of which at least 1 year with respect to certification

Experience Specific

knowledge of BRL at detailed level and 4 audits related to the specific BRL or to similar BRLs

knowledge of BRL at detailed level and 4 audits related to the specific BRL or to similar BRLs

Basic knowledge of the specific certification schedule

8212 Supplementary qualification requirements for the certification executives of a CI as determined by the Board of Experts for the subject of this BRL

Certification staff Education Experience Auditor Higher vocational education level in one of the

following disciplines - Constructional engineering - Civil engineering - Mechanical engineering

2 years

Inspector Intermediate vocational education level in one of the following disciplines - ConstructionalCivil engineering - Materials science - Mechanical engineering

2 years

Decision-maker Higher vocational education level in one of the following disciplines - Constructional engineering - Civil engineering - Quality science - Mechanical engineering

4 years Managerial experience

822 Qualification Certification staff must be demonstrably qualified by comparing the education and experience with the requirements set out above If qualification takes place based on deviating criteria this must be laid down in writing The qualification authority is vested with

National Assessment Guideline BRL 0501 01 September 2010 copy Kiwa NV - -

26

bull Decision-makers qualification of auditors and inspectors bull Management of the certification institute qualification of decision-makers

83 Initial audit report The certification institute records the findings of the initial audit in a report The report must meet the following requirements bull Completeness the report makes a statement about all requirements set out in the

assessment guideline bull Traceability the findings the statement are based on must have been recorded in a

traceable way bull Basis for decision the decision-maker for granting a certificate must be able to base his

decision on the findings recorded in the report

84 Decision about granting the certificate The decision concerning the granting of the certificate must be made by a decision-maker who is qualified to do so and who has not been involved in the certificate audit himself The decision must have been recorded in a traceable way

85 Presentation of the quality statement The product certificate must be presented in conformity with the model included in the annex

86 Nature and frequency of external inspections The certification institute must regularly inspect the supplier for compliance with his obligations The Board of Experts will decide upon the frequency of the inspections At the time this assessment guideline took effect the frequency was set to bull 3 inspection visits per year at suppliers of hot-rolled products bull 4 inspection visits per year at suppliers of other products Inspections will in any case pertain to a number of matters including bull The product specifications laid down in the product specification bull The supplierrsquos production process bull The supplierrsquos IQC schedule and the results of the inspections performed by the supplier bull The correct way of marking the certified products bull Compliance with the required procedures The certification institute will lay down the findings of each inspection performed in a report in a traceable way

87 Reporting to the Board of Experts The certification institute must report on the certification activities performed at least once a year The report must include the following subjects bull Mutations in number of certificates (newlapsed) bull Number of inspections performed in relation to the determined frequency bull Inspection results bull Measures imposed in case of defects bull Complaints received from third parties with respect to certified products

88 Interpretation of requirements The Board of Experts may lay down the requirements set in this assessment guideline in a single separate interpretation document The certification institute is obliged to ensure whether an interpretation document has been drawn up and if so must make use of the interpretations laid down in this

89 Specific rules defined by the Board of Experts The Board of Experts has not defined specific rules that are to be followed with certification by the certification institute

National Assessment Guideline BRL 0501 01 September 2010 copy Kiwa NV - -

27

9 List of documents mentioned

91 Standardsnormative documents

NEN 6008 2008 Reinforcing steel NEN 6720 1995 Technical foundations for building constructions - TGB 1990 ndash

Regulations for concrete - TGB 1990 ndash Structural requirements and calculation methods (VBC 1995) September 1995 including amendment sheet A4 December 2007

NEN 6722 2002 Regulations for concrete ndash Execution December 2002 NEN 6723 1995 Regulations for concrete - Bridges ndash (VBB June 1995) Structural requirements

and calculation methods December 1995 including amendment sheet A1 December 2003

NEN-EN 1992 2005 Design of concrete structures NEN-EN 1994 2005 Design of composite steel and concrete structures NEN-EN 10002 2001 Metallic materials tensile testing - Part 1 Method of testing at ambient

temperature August 2001 NEN-EN 10080 2005 Steel for the reinforcement of concrete ndash Weldable reinforcing steel - General NEN-EN 10204 2004 Metallic products - Types of inspection documents October 2004 NEN-EN 45012 1998 General requirements for bodies operating assessment and

certificationregistration of quality systems NEN-EN-ISO 376 2004 Metallic materials - Calibration of force-proving instruments used for the

verification of uniaxial testing machines NEN-EN-ISO 7500-1 2004 Metallic materials - Verification of static uniaxial testing machines ndash

Part 1 Tensilecompression testing machines - Verification and calibration of the force-measuring system August 2004

NEN-EN-ISO 9513 2002 Metallic materials ndash Calibration of extensometers for uniaxial testing October 2002

NEN-EN-ISO 15630-1 2002 Steel for the reinforcement and prestressing of concrete - Test methods ndash Part 1 Reinforcing bars wire rod and wire June 2002

NEN-EN-ISO 15630-2 2002 Steel for the reinforcement and prestressing of concrete - Test methods ndash Part 2 Welded fabric

NEN-EN-ISOIEC 17020

2004 General criteria for the operation of various types of bodies performing inspection

NEN-EN-ISOIEC 17024

2003 Conformity assessment - General requirements for bodies operating certification of persons

NEN-EN-ISOIEC 17025

2005 General requirements for the competence of testing and calibration laboratories

ISO 3301 1975 Statistical interpretation of data ndash Comparison of two means in the case of paired observations

ISO 4965 1979 Axial load fatigue testing machines - Dynamic force calibration - Strain gauge technique April 1979

ISO 16269-6 2005 Statistical interpretation of data Determination of statistical tolerance intervals

Annex I Model certificate

Issued Replaces Issued date Valid until Indefinite Page 1 of 2

KOMOreg

Product certificate

ltName Productgt ltCertificate holdergt

STATEMENT OF CI This product certificate was issued on the basis of BRL lsquo lsquo in conformity with the regulations for Product Certification CI declares that the justifiable confidence exists that the name product supplied by the certificate holder meets the technical specifications laid down in this product certificate provided that name product has the KOMOreg mark as indicated in this product certificate Director CI Advice refer to wwwltCIgtnl to see if this certificate is valid

Certificate holder T F E I

Assessed Quality system Product

Periodic check

reg is a collective brand of Stichting Bouwkwaliteit

Annex II Model for IQC schedule or framework of IQC schedule

Subjects Aspects Method Frequency Registration

Basic materials or supplied materials bull Recipe sheets bull Inspection of incoming raw

materials bull Mechanical bull Chemical

Production process production equipment material bull Procedures bull Work instructions bull Equipment bull Material bull Process inspection

End products

Measuring and testing equipment

Measuring and testing equipment bull Measuring devices bull Calibration bull Outsourced tests

Logistics bull Internal transport bull Storage bull Packaging bull Preservation bull Identification or marking

of semi-finished and end products

Corrective measures Complaints handling

Annex III Sampling and testing overview

Type

on

derz

oek

1)

Doo

rlope

nd

inte

rn fa

brie

kson

derz

oek

Perio

diek

ex

tern

ond

erzo

ek (a

udit)

To

elat

ings

onde

rzoe

k

(type

onde

rzoe

k)

Type

bet

onst

aal

stav

enro

llen

per d

iam

eter

ge

punt

last

e w

apn

ette

n pe

r dia

-com

bina

tie

stav

enro

llen

3 bp

e va

n 1

diam

eter

8)

gepu

ntla

ste

wap

net

ten

3 bp

e va

n 1

dia-

com

bina

tie 7)

8)

stav

enro

llen

3 bp

e pe

r di

amet

er 6)

gepu

ntla

ste

wap

net

ten

3 bp

e pe

r dia

-co

mbi

natie

6) 7

) R

e 1

per 3

0 t

m

in 3

per

bpe

m

in 2

per

bpe

1

lang

s + d

war

s 5

per b

pe

5 pe

r bpe

3

lang

s + 2

dw

ars

10 p

er b

pe

10 p

er b

pe

5 la

ngs +

5 d

war

s R

mR

e id

em

idem

id

em

idem

id

em

idem

R

eac

tRe

nom

2)

idem

id

em

idem

id

em

idem

id

em

Agt

idem

id

em

idem

id

em

idem

id

em

Bui

gpro

ef

1 pe

r bpe

4)

idem

2

per b

pe

2 pe

r bpe

1

lang

s + 1

dw

ars

5 pe

r bpe

5

per b

pe

3 la

ngs +

2 d

war

s M

assa

per

m

idem

id

em 5)

id

em

idem

5)

idem

id

em 5)

G

eom

etrie

opp

en

pro

fielfa

ctor

id

em

idem

id

em

idem

id

em

Idem

Che

mis

che

sa

men

st +

Ceq

3)

1 pe

r lad

ing

1

per l

adin

g 1

per l

adin

g 1

per l

adin

g 1

per l

adin

g 1

per l

adin

g

Afs

chui

fpro

ef

nv

t m

in 2

per

bpe

n

vt

3 pe

r bpe

n

vt

3 pe

r bpe

B

uig-

te

rugb

uigt

rekp

roe

f

nv

t n

vt

2 pe

r bpe

n

vt

2 pe

r bpe

n

vt

Afm

etin

gen

nv

t m

in 1

per

bpe

n

vt

1 pe

r bpe

n

vt

1 pe

r bpe

V

erm

oeiin

g n

vt

nv

t 5

per j

aar

5 pe

r jaa

r 6

per b

pe 9)

5

per b

pe 10

)

1) The audit is always for each manufacturing process (hot-rolled-cooled -cold-stretched cold-profiles) of a certain type of reinforcing steel 2) If applicable (B500C) 3) Chemical composition + Ceq to be determined and submitted by the steel manufacturer not for each diameter (combination) 4) For bending mass and geometry surface + frfp min 1 per 150 tons 5) Can be determined for welding 6) Smallest largest and intermediate diameters (always skipping 2 consecutive diameters) of the range (deviating from EN 10080) 7) Always the most critical diameter combination that occurs 8) In a period of a maximum of 5 years number and spreading of diameters 9) For d le 28 mm the largest and middle diameters for gt 28 mm the largest diameter 10) The largest middle and smallest diameters Test unit is defined as -- barscoils the load or a part of the load (for bending mass and geometryprofile min 1 per 90 t) -- point welded reinforcement fabrics 50 tons of the same combination of reinforcing steel types and diameters manufactured with the same point welding machine

Annex IV Model for biannual reporting on reinforcing steel

Page 6: National Assessment Guideline - Kiwa · PDF fileThe NEN-EN 10080:2005 is not a harmonised standard and therefore a CE mark can not yet be attached to the products covered by this BRL

National Assessment Guideline BRL 0501 01 September 2010 copy Kiwa NV - -

5

The institute is supposed to meet these criteria when it can submit an accreditation certificate issued by the Dutch Authority for Accreditation (RvA) or an accreditation institute with which the RvA has entered into an agreement of mutual acceptance This accreditation must apply to the specific audit required for this BRL If no accreditation certificate can be submitted the certification institute itself will verify whether the accreditation standard is met or (have) perform(ed) the audit concerned again itself

15 Certificate The model of the KOMOreg product certificate based on this BRL is included as an annex to this BRL

National Assessment Guideline BRL 0501 01 September 2010 copy Kiwa NV - -

6

2 Terminology

21 Terms This assessment guideline uses the following definitions bull Assessment guideline The arrangements made in the Board of Experts concerning the subject of certification bull Board of Experts The Board of Experts lsquoReinforcing Materialsrsquo bull Supplier

The party responsible for continuous compliance of the products with the requirements the certification has been based on

bull Internal Quality Control (IQC) schedule A description of the quality inspections performed by the supplier as part of its quality system

bull Initial audit (type audit) The preliminary audit to determine whether all requirements set out in the BRL are met bull Internal production inspection audit (by the manufacturer)

The continuous internal production inspection audit to make sure that the certified products constantly comply with the requirements set out in the BRL For this the manufacturer performs among other things tensile tests bending tests measurements of the geometry of the profiling and chemical analyses The fatigue tests are usually performed in an external laboratory

bull External periodic audit The external audit performed after granting of the certificate to make sure that the certified products constantly comply with the requirements set out in the BRL During the external periodic audit the certification institute takes random samples for tensile and bending tests measurements of the geometry of the profiling and chemical analyses Additionally samples are periodically assigned for performing fatigue tests This is also called lsquoaudit testingrsquo The results are tested against the requirements set out in the BRL

bull External verification audit The external verification audit performed during the initial audit and subsequently every two years for verification of the determination of the variable and attributive properties For this two series of similar test pieces are taken the test results of which are compared in pairs for their mutual differences

22 Definitions In addition to the terms and definitions in NEN-EN 100802005 the following definitions apply in this BRL bull Fatigue strength

NEN 6008 requires for the fatigue strength a minimum tension ripple 2σa with an upper tensile of 06 Re (Cv) A tension ripple is the tension change from a middle tension through an upper and lower tension back to the middle tension (2σa = tension ripple)

National Assessment Guideline BRL 0501 01 September 2010 copy Kiwa NV - -

7

Bovenspanning = upper force Middenspanning = middle force Onderspanning = lower force Cyclus = cycle Figure 1 stress change

bull Nominal diameter (d) The diameter of an imaginary bar with a circle-shaped cross-section of the same length and volume as the actual bar with profiled surface excluding tolerances bull Variable properties Property to which a quantitative value is assigned when assessing the measurement In NEN 6008 these are the properties 02 yield limit (Rp02) or flow limit (Re) yield at maximum load (Agt) the tensile strengthflow limit ratio (RmRe) the ratio of the actual flow limitnominal flow limit (ReactRenom) and fatigue strength (2σa) In conformity with NEN-EN 10080 section 7333 the upper flow limit (ReH) applies to the flow limit (Re) If there is no flow the 02 yield limit (Rp02) is to be determined

bull Attributive properties Property to which a value is assigned during the assessment that can only be regarded as good or wrong In NEN 6008 these are the properties nominal diameter mass per length profiling (profile factors fR fP rib height rib distance rib width rib flank angle rib (inclination) angle distance of rib rows and longitudinal rib) bending test shearing test and chemical composition bull Bendndashbend back tensile test Supplementary to NEN-EN-10080 and NEN 6008 the bend-bend back tensile test (attributive) is to be performed to determine whether the reinforcing steel types B500B and B500C in the diameter range le 16 mm can be bent back after having been bent 90deg retaining the required mechanical properties also see 4421 bull Characteristic value Value of a property with a certain chance of exceeding or undershooting in a hypothetical infinite test series In this BRL the characteristic value is the value of a property with a chance of exceeding of 5 (p = 095) or 10 (p = 090) with a probability level of W = 90 or W = 75 with a normally assumed spread bull Cv values These are the specified minimum (maximum) characteristic values as defined in NEN 6008 bull a1 a2 a3 a4 value The a-values are value increasesdecreases (the so-called extra values in accordance with NEN 6008) with respect to the specified Cv values see the examples given below Here x is the average value and X is the individual value -- a1 x ge Cv + a1 (eg Re a1 = 10 so average value x ge 510 MPa) -- a2 X ge Cv ndash a2 (eg Re a1 = 15 so individual value x ge 485 MPa) -- a3 x le Cv + a3 (eg RmRe a3 = 0) -- a4 X le Cv + a4 (eg RmRe a4 = 002)

23 Indication of reinforcing steel types The reinforcing steel types are indicated as follows in NEN 60082008 (shortened for a full overview see NEN 6008 table 1)

National Assessment Guideline BRL 0501 01 September 2010 copy Kiwa NV - -

8

Cv values for Quality indication

NEN 60082008

(new)

Quality indication

NEN 60081991 (old)

Rm (MPa) Re (MPa) RmRe Re act Re nom

Agt ()

B 500 A FeB 500 HKN

550

500 500

105a -

- -

30ab 275

B 500 B B 500 C

FeB 500 HWL FeB 500 HK

550 550

500 500 500 500

108 115 c -le135 - -

- lt125 - -

50b 75bc 325 325

See for the footnotes NEN 6008 table 1 Table 1

24 Reinforcing steel on coils The mechanical properties of reinforcing steel obtained from winding reinforcing steel on coils substantially change during this production process in particular the yield at maximum load (Agt) Therefore NEN 6008 prescribes a 05 surplus value for the Agt (Cv) of reinforcing steel on coils The Agt (Cv) is then for B500 A 35 for B500 B 55 and for B500 C 8 respectively NB Reinforcing steel on coils is not covered by BRL 0501 but by BRL 0503

National Assessment Guideline BRL 0501 01 September 2010 copy Kiwa NV - -

9

3 Procedure for obtaining a quality statement

31 Initial audit The initial audit to be performed by the certification institute takes place by means of the performance and product requirements incorporated in this assessment guideline including test methods and will include depending on the nature of the product to be certified bull (Sample) testing to determine whether the products meet the product andor performance

requirements bull Assessment of the production process bull Assessment of the quality system and the IQC schedule bull Testing for the presence and functioning of other required procedures bull Assessment of the supplierrsquos processing regulations

32 Certification Upon completion of the initial audit the results are presented to the decision-maker This party will assess the results and determine whether the certificate can be granted or that additional data andor audits are needed before the certificate can be granted

National Assessment Guideline BRL 0501 01 September 2010 copy Kiwa NV - -

10

4 Product requirements and determination methods

41 General This chapter includes the product requirements that reinforcing steel must comply with as well as the determination methods to make sure that the requirements are complied with These requirements will be part of the technical specification of the product that is included in the product certificate The product certificate states that the reinforcing steel complies with article 4 of BRL 0501 which also implies that the reinforcing steel complies with NEN 6720 article 512 or NEN-EN 1990NEN-EN 1991-12 including the national annexes

42 Product requirements and determination methods The requirements and the determination methods for reinforcing steel have been laid down in

Number Title Date of issue NEN-EN 10080 Steel for the reinforcement of concrete ndash

Weldable reinforcing steel - General May 2005

NEN-EN 10080 1) Dutch translation Staal voor het wapenen van beton ndash Lasbaar betonstaal - Algemeen

June 2005

NEN 6008 Steel for the reinforcement of concrete July 2008 NEN-EN-ISO 15630-1

Steel for the reinforcement of concrete and prestressing of concrete ndash Test methods ndash Part 1 reinforcing bars wire rod and wire

2002-04-15

NEN-EN-ISO 15630-2

Steel for the reinforcement of concrete and prestressing of concrete ndash Test methods ndash Part 2 welded fabric

2002-04-15

1) The English version lsquoNEN-EN 10080 May 2005rsquo is binding Table 2

43 Product requirements supplementary to and contrary to NEN-EN 10080 and NEN 6008 the following applies

431 Lattice girders What has been stated about lattice girders in NEN-EN 10080 and NEN 6008 does not apply to this assessment guideline see for this BRL 0502 lsquoLattice girdersrsquo

432 Non-profiled or slightly profiled reinforcing steel Non-profiled or slightly profiled reinforcing steel is outside the scope of the regime of this BRL it may only be applied to lattice girders

433 Geometry of the profiling determination of fR and fP Determination of the profile factor fR andor fP is done in conformity with NEN-EN-ISO 15630-1 art 113

For determining fR and fP use can be made of the simplified formulas in conformity with NEN-EN-ISO 15630-1 article 1133 a and b Use of the simplified formulas in conformity with NEN-EN-ISO 15630-1 article 1133 c and 1133d is not allowed In order to make use of the simplified formulas in conformity with articles 1133a and 1133b it must be determined in advance during the initial audit whether use of the reinforcing steel produced by the supplier and the proposed simplified formula (Trapezium or Simpson) produces results for fR and fP

National Assessment Guideline BRL 0501 01 September 2010 copy Kiwa NV - -

11

that are greater than or equal to the value that is obtained when using the general formula for determining fR and fP (in conformity with article 1131)

434 Standard deviations Supplementary to the NEN-EN- 10080 and NEN 6008 the following values are valid for the maximum standard deviations of the variable properties

Re (MPa)

Re(act)Re(nom) RmRe Agt ()

B500A bars coils point welded fabric

30 006 002 15

B500B bars coils point welded fabric

30 006 002 bars 20 coils 20 point welded fabric 15

B500C bars coils point welded fabric

30 006 002 bars 25 coils 25 point welded fabric 15

Table 3

435 Geometry longitudinal rib Supplementary to NEN-EN-ISO 15630-1 art 1032 the rib width of the longitudinal rib if present must be measured as well The rib width is analogically measured as the rib height The requirements with respect to the longitudinal rib are mentioned in NEN 6008 table 1

436 Nominal mass per metre Contrary to NEN 6008 table 1 read lsquothe allowable deviation from the nominal mass per meterrsquo for lsquotolerance nominal diameterrsquo

437 Extra value for a2 Contrary to NEN 6008 table 1 lsquoextra valuersquo read a2 = 05 for the Agt of B500A

438 Chemical composition of reinforcing steel Contrary to NEN-EN-10080 (Dutch translation) art 713 table 2 explanation a the following applies Exceeding the maximum value for the carbon content by 003 (mass percentage) is allowed provided that the value of the carbon equivalent is decreased by 002 (mass percentage)rdquo

National Assessment Guideline BRL 0501 01 September 2010 copy Kiwa NV - -

12

439 Nominal diameters preferred range Supplementary to NEN-EN10080 the table below mentions the general and the preferred range of the nominal diameters The nominal diameters between brackets ( ) are not preferred diameters Nominal diameter

mm

Bars Coils and bars

straightened from coils

Point welded fabric

Nominal surface of the cross section

mm2

Nominal mass per

metre

kgm 40 (x) 126 0099 45 (x) 159 0125 50 (x) x 196 0154 55 (x) (x) 238 0187 60 x x x 283 0222 65 (x) (x) 332 0260 70 x x 385 0302 75 (x) (x) 442 0347 80 x x x 503 0395 85 (x) (x) 567 0445 90 x x 636 0499 95 (x) (x) 709 0556 100 x x x 785 0617 110 (x) x 950 0746 120 x x x 113 0888 140 x x x 154 121 160 x x x 201 158 200 x 314 247 250 x 491 385 280 (x) 616 483 320 x 804 631 400 x 1257 986 500 x 1963 154

Table 4

4310 Values for a1 - a4 NEN EN 100802005 section 81312 provides insufficient clarity and interpretation of how to apply these a-values The a-values included in NEN 60082008 are the absolute minimummaximum a-values that with respect to the a2 and a 4 values are for determining the individual absolute minimum and maximum variable mechanical properties as referred to in NEN EN 100802005 section 11 (testing in case of a dispute)

However when assessing the variable test results per test unit during the production inspection in the factory in conformity with NEN EN 100802005 section 813 1 in case of b) the manufacturer himself shall determine the a1234-values of the population concerned and record this in a solid procedure With these determined manufacturer-specific a-values every test unit must be tested in order to meet the required quality level in the long term ( x - ks ge Cv or x + ks le Cv) The a-values of the manufacturer must al least comply with the absolute minimummaximum a-values included in NEN 60082008 but they are usually higherlower (ie more critical)

The solid procedures with the a-values recorded for each population must always be up-to-date and demonstrate to the satisfaction of the CI that with this the required Cv values (for the longer term) are complied with If these solid procedures are (still) missing in conformity with NEN EN 100802005 section 8131 only situation a) applies so in principle all individual values of the test unit must comply with the specified Cv value

National Assessment Guideline BRL 0501 01 September 2010 copy Kiwa NV - -

13

When determining the a-values solid procedures are preferably applied using the standard deviations and the assumption probabilities

4311 Rib row distance Σe Contrary to NEN 6008 table 1 and analogue with NEN-EN 10080 read for lsquodistance rib rowsdistance Σe le 075drsquo The projection of the cross ribs must cover at least 75 of the circumference of the reinforcing steel to be calculated based on the nominal diameter In formula total distance between the rib rows Σe lt 025 πd

44 Determination methods and test criteria Supplementary and contrary to NEN-EN 10080 and NEN 6008 the following applies

441 Preliminary audit for acceptance Supplementary to NEN-EN 10080 the following data are to be provided for each of the diameters given by the certification institute before the start of the initial audit -- test results of 60 pieces from at least 3 casting loads with 20 samples each the individual

test results of 02 yield limit or flow limit ((Rp02 or Re) yield at maximum load (Agt) the tensile strength02 yield or flow limit ratio RmRp02 or Re if applicable the ratio of the actual 02 yield limit or flow limitthe nominal 02 yield limit or flow limit (ReactRenom) Also the statistic processing of these data with average value ( x ) standard deviation (s) and characteristic value (Cv)

-- test results of 5 pieces from the same loads with 5 samples each the individual test results of the bendability shearing force of point welded reinforcement fabrics mass per metre and profiling (profile factors fR fP rib height rib distance rib width rib flank α rib (inclination) angle distance between the rib rows and the longitudinal rib)

-- chemical composition of each casting load -- (casting) load numbers and roller data (min 10 tons per diameter) -- drawing or sketch of the profiling and the factory brand

442 Inspection for the attributive properties NEN-EN 10080 gives insufficient interpretation of the termination methods and test criteria for inspections for the attributive properties bendability shearing force with point welded reinforcement fabrics mass per metre and profiling (profile factors fR fP rib height rib distance rib width rib flank α rib (inclination) angle β distance between the rib rows and the longitudinal rib Contrary to NEN-EN 10080 with these attributive properties the sampling and the conformity assessment is done as follows -- with the continuous internal production inspection not for each test unit but repeatedly

for the 15 last tested bars of a diameter or a diameter-weld combination -- with the initial audit the test series is to be extended to 15 samples if necessary and to 60

samples when there is initial rejection -- with the periodic external inspection (audit) the results of the attributive properties

obtained during the audit are to be added to the internal test results of the manufacturer Testing If a maximum of 2 of the 15 measurements do not comply the sampling can be extended by 45 extra measurements with respect to the attributive property concerned In this case the attributive properties of a total of 60 test bars are available The property concerned then still complies if not more than 2 of the 60 measurements do not comply with the NEN 6008 The profiling is increasingly measured using an optical camera The manual measurement will be valid in case of disputes

4421 Inspection of the bend-bend tensile test with initial audit and during external inspections (audit testing) By means of a bend-bend back tensile test it is determined whether the reinforcing steel types B500B and B500C in the diameter range le 16 mm can be bent back once with an angle of 90deg

National Assessment Guideline BRL 0501 01 September 2010 copy Kiwa NV - -

14

without significant decrease of the Rp02 or Re RmRe and Agt compared with the non-bent bars The values may not be below the mentioned Cv values for the reinforcing steel type and delivery condition concerned Sampling and testing frequency

Delivery condition Diameter Inspection frequency bars and coils B500BB500C

d le 16 mm 6 samples of different barscoils from 3 (casting) loads for each selected diameter Samples are to be taken from the same barsloads as for the regular tensile tests

Performance of the test Take a sample of reinforcing steel of sufficient length for doing 2 tensile tests A normal tensile test is performed with the one part and a bend-bend back tensile test with the other part The minimum length for the bendbend back tensile test is 70 cm The preparation of the tensile test including the way of ageing and the way of bending is done in accordance with the stipulations in NEN-EN 10080 with the exception of the way of bending back and the bending mandrel diameter to be used The bending mandrel diameter is maximum 4d Bend the bar over a bending mandrel of maximum 4d with a maximum angle of 90deg Mark the bending zone (length ca 9d) Place the test piece in a vice or the like Place an appropriate pipe over the part of the test piece to be bent back preferably with an internal pipe diameter that is max 2 mm larger than the diameter of the test piece and bend the test piece straight again Try to make the test piece as straight as possible Here the difference between the one part and the other part of the test piece may be maximally the diameter of the test piece (the bayonet forming) Age the test piece in conformity with the stipulations of NEN-EN 10080 and perform the tensile test The test is considered to be satisfactory when - the results do not show any significant differences with the results of the non-bent test

pieces - the values are above the set Cv values If the values are not satisfactory find the cause and repeat the tests if necessary

443 Inspection for the variable properties Contrary to NEN-EN 10080 the sampling and testing is done in conformity with BRL 0501 annex 3 for the variable properties 02 yield limit or flow limit (Rp02 or Re) yield at maximum load (Agt) the tensile strength02 yield or flow limit ratio RmRp02 or Re if applicable the ratio of the actual 02 yield limit or flow limitthe nominal 02 yield limit or flow limit (ReactRenom) and the fatigue strength NEN-EN 10080 provides insufficient interpretation of the test requirements the determination methods and the test criteria for inspection for the fatigue properties Therefore the requirements given below apply supplementary to NEN-EN 10080

National Assessment Guideline BRL 0501 01 September 2010 copy Kiwa NV - -

15

4431 Inspection for the fatigue strength in initial audit Sampling and testing frequency

Delivery condition

Diameter Inspection frequency

bars and coils for d le 28 mm the middle and largest of the diameter range For d gt 28 mm the largest diameter

6 samples of different barscoils from 3 (casting) loads for each selected diameter (18 bars per diameter)

point welded fabrics

The smallest middle and largest diameter of the diameter range (always with the least favourable diameter combination)

5 samples of different bars with a point weld from 3 test units for each selected diameter (15 bars per diameter)

Test method a semi-statistical This simplified test is regarded as sufficient if the requirements given below are met

With reinforcing steel bars and coils B500B and B500C in the diameter range d le 28 mm with

the requirement aσ2 ge 175 MPa

a2σ = 175 MPa a2σ = 200 MPa Number of samples 10 sup2) Number of samples 8 sup2) Stress changes (106) Break Stress changes (106) Break

lt 15 lt 20 ge 20

none le l ge 9

lt 075 075 lt 10 10 lt 20 ge 20

none le l

le 2 1)

ge 5 1) le 3 breaks if no break occurred up to 1x106 tension changes sup2) total number 10 + 8 = 18

Table 5

With reinforcing steel bars B500B and B500C in the diameter range d gt 28 mm with the

requirement aσ2 ge 145 MPa

a2σ = 145 MPa a2σ = 170 MPa Number of samples 10 sup2) Number of samples 8 sup2) Stress changes (106) Break Stress changes (106) Break

lt 15 lt 20 ge 20

none le l ge 9

lt 075 075 lt 15 15 lt 20 ge 20

none le 2

le 2 1)

ge 4 1) le 4 breaks if no break occurred up to 15 x 106 tension changes sup2) total number 10 + 8 = 18

Table 6

With point welded fabrics B500A B500B and B500C as well as reinforcing steel bars and coils

B500A with the requirement aσ2 ge 100 MPa

a2σ = 100 MPa a2σ = 180 MPa Number of samples 10 sup1) Number of samples 5 sup1) Stress changes (106) Break Stress changes (106) Break

lt 15 lt 20 ge 20

none le l ge 9

lt 025 025 lt 05 ge 05

none le 3 ge 2

sup1) total number 10 + 5 = 15 Table 7

National Assessment Guideline BRL 0501 01 September 2010 copy Kiwa NV - -

16

Test method b fully statistical This test is done with the appropriate statistic methods considering the requirements p = 095 W = 75 set out in NEN 6008

Here the requirement Cv le x ndash ks must be complied with where x = the average value in which max 2 million load changes must be maintained

for the individual value of one test bar s = the estimate of the standard deviation of the population k = variation coefficient according to the table below (in conformity with ISO 16269-6) Cv = the characteristic value for the tension changes 1 106

n k n k n k n k 15 199 20 193 30 187 50 181 16 199 25 190 40 183 100 176 18 195

Table 8

4432 Inspection for the fatigue strength in periodic external inspections (audit testing) The numbers of test bars of one diameter given below are tested on an annual basis The sampling takes place in the presence of the inspector and is part of the audit testing -- barscoils 5 per year -- point welded fabrics 5 per year provided that in a period of 5 years at least 80 of all certified diameters (diameter combinations) has been tested With the 80 mentioned at least the following must have been tested

bull For barscoils the largest diameter in the range d le 28 mm and the largest diameter in the range d gt 28 mm

bull For point welded fabrics the smallest and the largest diameters always with the least favourable diameter combination

The test is considered to be satisfactory if

bull with the barscoils max 1 sample broke at lt 20106 stress changes and the other 4 samples have at least resisted 20106 tension changes

bull with the point welded fabrics max 1 sample broke at between 10106 and 20106 stress changes and the other 4 samples have at least resisted 20106 stress changes

For barscoils and point welded fabrics only a re-inspection can take place if no more than 2 samples broke at fewer than 20 106 stress changes In this case 5 extra samples are to be tested whereby no breaks at lt 20 106 stress changes may occur In this case the test series is satisfactory If this is not complied with further testing is necessary to find the cause and corrective measures are to be taken in order to avoid reoccurrence If necessary a new initial audit for the fatigue strength is to be performed

45 Biannual reporting The test results of all test units of the continuous inspections are to be collected and statistically evaluated for Re Agt RmRe and ReactRenom (if relevant) based on data of the production of the previous six months or the 200 most recent data dependent on which is the largest number These data shall biannually be sent to the certification institute in conformity with the model in annex 4

National Assessment Guideline BRL 0501 01 September 2010 copy Kiwa NV - -

17

46 Identification Contrary to NEN-EN 10080 art 101211 the product numbers (technical classes) are not assigned by a European organisation However the other requirements concerning the identification are observed in conformity with NEN 6008 and NEN-EN 10080

47 Certification mark Each packaging unit must have a label with the following obligatory indications

bull KOMO mark bull product certificate number + delivery condition (bars coils fabrics) bull the reinforcing steel type and the manufacturer number bull name andor logo of the manufacturer bull mentioning BRL0501

A packaging unit can be characterised

bull with reinforcing steel on coils as lsquothe coilrsquo marking min 1 label per coil bull with reinforcing steel bars as lsquothe bundlesrsquo marking min 1 label per bundle bull with point welded fabrics as lsquonumber of fabricsrsquo marking at least 1 label per unit of max

40 reinforcement fabrics or max 2 tons Additionally each point welded fabric in which only externally purchased and delivered reinforcing steel has been used must be marked in an indelible and non-removable way For example when using a ldquoSchlatter Etikettiermachinen Methoderdquo or equivalent the point welded reinforcement fabrics are to be marked with at least 1 label

National Assessment Guideline BRL 0501 01 September 2010 copy Kiwa NV - -

18

5 Requirements to the quality system

51 General This chapter includes the requirements that the quality system of the supplier has to meet

52 Administrator of the quality system A staff member is to be appointed as quality system manager within the organisational structure

53 Internal quality controlquality plan The supplier must have and use a schedule for internal quality control (an IQC schedule) in accordance with the model indicated in annex 2 In this IQC schedule the following must be demonstrably recorded

bull what aspects the manufacturer will inspect bull what methods will be used for these inspections bull the frequency of these inspections bull how to record and file the inspection results bull aspects with respect to the production of point welded reinforcement fabrics

Also the supplier must have a procedure for organising the production process of any post-stretching alignment and the reinforcement fabrics to be point welded and how this is implemented inspected and monitored This IQC schedule must have been derived from the IQC schedule included in the annex and must have been set up such that it gives the CI enough confidence that the requirements set out in this assessment guideline are continuously met

This must function at least 3 months before issuing the certificate

54 Procedures and work instructions The supplier must be able to submit

bull procedures for - handling out of spec products and (semi-)products to be repaired - corrective measures after observed defects - handling complaints about products andor services delivered - monitoring the quality using the extra value a - a4 - the work instructions and inspection forms used including the biannual reporting

(see annex 4)

55 Other requirements to the quality system

551 Reinforcing steel The following are regarded as sufficient proof that the purchased reinforcing steel complies with the product standard mentioned (NEN 6008) and other technical specifications

bull KOMO quality statement issued on the basis of BRL 0501 lsquoReinforcing steelrsquo by a certification andor attestation institute acknowledged by the Dutch Authority for Accreditation for the discipline involved

bull a (quality) statement the equivalence of which with the above-mentioned KOMO quality statement has been demonstrated

The traceability of the purchased reinforcing steel is guaranteed by the rolling mark and the labelling The origin (certificate number) of the reinforcing steel must be recorded at the initial audit

National Assessment Guideline BRL 0501 01 September 2010 copy Kiwa NV - -

19

552 Storage of reinforcing steel Reinforcing steel must be stored free from the ground Store and label reinforcing steel such that the chance of exchange for instance with foreign qualities is eliminated

National Assessment Guideline BRL 0501 01 September 2010 copy Kiwa NV - -

20

6 Requirements for the functioning of a test laboratory for testing reinforcing steel andor point welded reinforcement fabrics

61 The supplier has its own laboratory for testing reinforcing steel for its variable and attributive properties The laboratory equipment as well as the test methods must comply with

bull NEN-EN 10002-22001 Metallic materials tensile testing part 1 method of testing at ambient temperature

bull NEN-EN-ISO 15630-12002 Steel for the reinforcement and prestressing of concrete Test methods ndash Part 1 reinforcing bars wire rod and wire June 2002

bull NEN-EN-ISO 15630-22002 Steel for the reinforcement and prestressing of concrete Test methods ndash Part 2 welded fabric

Measuring equipment that has not been classified for one of the above-mentioned standards can be used as soon as they have been tested assessed and qualified by the CI

62 Outsourcing of testing Tests for the chemical composition and the fatigue strength of reinforcing steel can be outsourced as well De test results can be indicated as being lsquoperformed in a reliable wayrsquo if

bull The tests have been performed by a laboratory that meets the accreditation standard referred to in article 14 of this BRL NEN-EN-ISOIEC 17025 lsquoGeneral requirements for the competence of testing and calibration laboratoriesrsquo This accreditation must concern the performance of tests in conformity with the outsourcing assignment Besides a 31 or a 22 certificate of the results in conformity with NEN-EN 10204 is to be submitted or

bull The supplier receives the test results of the chemical composition from a company that has a product certificate of the lsquotechnical disciplinersquo (H9) mentioned in this BRL with the CI and the relevant measuring equipment in the laboratory concerned is covered by the product certificate audit

If the above requirements are not complied with the certification institute will perform or have performed the audit concerned itself In this case the certification institute will base its test on the accreditation standard NEN-EN-ISOIEC 17025

63 Verification audit An initial audit includes external verification of both the attributive and the variable properties Also an external verification for the performance of the used tensile tests takes place every two years The diameter is to be selected such that the diameters that occur most are tested in a period of 5 years When using a new tensile testing machinemeasuring equipment a verification audit is to be performed as well

National Assessment Guideline BRL 0501 01 September 2010 copy Kiwa NV - -

21

631 Variable properties For the verification of variable properties (the results of the tensile test) at least 15 random samples of one selected diameter must be taken in the presence of the inspector (audit testing) for each selected reinforcing steel type each of a length suitable for two test pieces for testing The selected representative diameters must change at the two-yearly verification With bars and coils the samples must have been spread over at least 3 loads of 1 diameter The samples for point welded reinforcement fabrics and the corresponding bars must come from 1 diameter combination produced on different days For each sample the two collected test pieces must be marked and then the test pieces must be bundled into two series of at least 15 test pieces A third series can be taken as spare series in case of discussions about the achieved results One series must be tested in the presence of the inspector at the manufacturerrsquos The inspector must have the other series tested at an external laboratory The time between the performances of both test series must be short enough to allow for neglecting any natural ageing of the testing material The test (tensile test) includes determination of the 02 yield limit or flow limit (Re) the tensile strength (Rm) the RmRe ratio and the yield with maximum load (Agt) of each individual test piece The thus obtained two series of measurement pairs must then be tested for their differences between both performances of the test Any systematic differences are to be tracked and eliminated

With the statistic comparison of two different performances of tests the differences of paired measurements are to be checked in relation with the hypothesis that the expected value of the average difference is zero (Student test) Rejection of this hypothesis indicates that there is a possibility of systematic differences For each variable property the xfi (i = 1n) of the measurement results of the manufacturer and the xei (i = 1hellip n) of the external institute must be calculated separately

bull Difference vi = xfi ndash xei considering the positive or negative difference and then the average difference

= sum

=

n

iiv

nv

1

1

bull standard deviation of the differences

minus

minus= sum

=

2

1

2

11 vnv

ns

n

iiv

bull value vsvt =

It must be verified for the variable properties the 02 yield limit or flow limit (Reee ) the tensile strength (Rmmm ) and the yield with maximum load (Aggg ttt ) whether or not t exceeds a critical limit to The critical values to depend on the number of tests and have been derived from ISO 3301 1975 with a = 001 (see table 9)

National Assessment Guideline BRL 0501 01 September 2010 copy Kiwa NV - -

22

Table 9 ndash Critical values of to

n to n to n to

10 103 11 096 12 090 13 085 14 080

15 077 16 074 17 071 18 068 19 066

20 064 25 056 30 050 35 047 40 043

If t gt to the hypothesis that there is no difference between the two series of paired measurements is rejected and so the cause of this must be found and eliminated This does not apply when sv and v are both below the reference values Sov and Vo in table 9 because of insufficient relevance

If t le to the hypothesis that there is no difference between the two series of paired measurements is not rejected The test can then be concluded unless Sv ge Sov In this case the standard deviation of the differences is excessive showing that the material concerned is unsuitable for the verification test Further investigation is then required

Table 10 ndash Reference values of Sov and Vo

sov vo 02 yield limit or flow limit 15 15 Tensile strength in MPa 15 20 Yield at maximum load in B500A B500B B500C

11 25 30

11 25 30

632 Attributive properties For the verification of attributive properties (mass per length chemical composition profiling bending test and if necessary a shearing test) the measurements of mass per length and profiling must be done in advance with the two series of at least 15 test pieces meant for the tensile test (see above) For the measurements of the bending test and shearing test (if applicable) the number of test pieces from the above described random samples must be extended with at least 5 test pieces for the bending test and if necessary the shearing test For the verification assessment of the chemical composition the number of test pieces is limited to a series of 3 test pieces from 3 test units Any combinations in the random samples of the above-mentioned verification assessments are allowed The test series at the manufacturerrsquos and the series of external tests (see above) should not produce other differences than those that can unambiguously be explained and eliminated

National Assessment Guideline BRL 0501 01 September 2010 copy Kiwa NV - -

23

7 Summary audit and inspection

Below a summary is provided of the tests to be performed for certification bull Initial audit the audit to determine whether all requirements in the BRL are met bull Inspection audit the audit performed after granting the certificate to determine whether

the certified products continuously meet the requirements set in the BRL Also indicates the frequency of the inspection audits to be performed by the certification institute (CI)

bull Inspection of the quality system inspection for compliance with the IQC schedule and the procedures

Here the frequency with which the certification institute must perform an inspection audit is indicated as well

Audit related to

Supervision by CI after granting the certificate1)

Requirement description Article BRL Initial audit

Inspection2) Frequency Product requirements bull Indication of product 2342 X X continuously bull Variable properties 4243 X X 34 x per year bull Chemical composition 4243 X X 34 x per year bull Bending test 42 X X 34 x per year bull Shearing test 42 X X 4 x per year bull Fatigue strength 4244 X X 1 x per year bull Geometry form 4243 X X 34 x per year bull Mass per unit 4243 X X 34 x per year bull Dimensions of fabricsbars 42 X X 34 x per year bull Bendndashbend back tensile

test 42 X X 3 x per year

Own testing laboratory bull Own laboratory 61 X X 1 x per year bull Outsourcing of tests 62 X X 34 x per year bull Verification audit 63 X X 1 x per 2 years System requirements bull IQC schedule 5 X X 34 x per year bull Quality mark 4647 X X 34 x per year

Table 11

1) In case of significant changes in the production process to be assessed by the CI the product requirements need to be tested again

2) The inspector or the certificate holder in the presence of the inspector will determine all product properties that can be performed within the visiting time (maximum 1 day) If this is not possible the CI and the certificate holder will make arrangements with respect to how the inspection will be performed

Inspection of the quality system The certification institute checks if the manufacturer meets the quality system requirements in chapter 5 of this BRL according to the frequency in article 86 of this BRL

National Assessment Guideline BRL 0501 01 September 2010 copy Kiwa NV - -

24

8 Requirements of de certification institute

81 General The certification institute must meet the requirements set out in EN 45011 Besides for the purpose of this BRL the institute must have been accredited by the Dutch Authority for Accreditation (RvA) or a similar body (an accreditation institute with which the RvA has entered into an agreement of mutual acceptance) The certification institute must have a set of regulations or a similar document defining the general rules to be observed during certification These particularly include bull The general rules for performance of the initial audit to be structured as follows

o The way in which suppliers are informed about the handling of a request o The performance of the audit o The decision based on the audit performed

bull The general rules concerning the performance of inspections and the inspection aspects used here

bull The measures the certification institute must take in case of defects bull The rules for terminating a certificate bull The possibility to make an appeal against decisions or measures of the certification

institute

82 Certification staff Staff involved in certification procedures include bull Auditors charged with performing the initial audit and assessing the reports of the

inspectors bull Inspectors charged with performing the external inspection at the supplierrsquos bull Decision-makers charged with taking decisions based on the initial audits performed

about continuation of certification based on inspections performed and about the necessity to take corrective measures

821 Qualification requirements A distinction is made with respect to 8211 Qualification requirements for the certification executives of a CI meeting the

requirements set out in EN 45011 8212 Supplementary qualification requirements for the certification executives of a CI as

determined by the Board of Experts for the subject of this BRL

National Assessment Guideline BRL 0501 01 September 2010 copy Kiwa NV - -

25

8211 Qualification requirements for the certification executives of a CI meeting the requirements set out in EN 45011

The qualification of the certification executives of a CI must comply with chapter 5 of EN 45011 The manual of the CI must describe how the qualification of the certification executives is performed

EN45011

Auditor

initial product assessment and assessment of the

production location

Inspector

assessment product location field and

projects after granting of certificate

Decision-maker

for granting and extending a certificate

Education General

Higher Vocational thinking and working level

Intermediate vocational working and thinking level

Higher Vocational thinking and working level

Education Specific

Basic training for auditing Basic training for auditing

Basic training for auditing

Experience General

1 year of relevant working experience with min 4 audits including 1 full initial audit done independently under supervision

1 year of relevant working experience with min 4 audits including 1 done independent under supervision

4 years of relevant working experience of which at least 1 year with respect to certification

Experience Specific

knowledge of BRL at detailed level and 4 audits related to the specific BRL or to similar BRLs

knowledge of BRL at detailed level and 4 audits related to the specific BRL or to similar BRLs

Basic knowledge of the specific certification schedule

8212 Supplementary qualification requirements for the certification executives of a CI as determined by the Board of Experts for the subject of this BRL

Certification staff Education Experience Auditor Higher vocational education level in one of the

following disciplines - Constructional engineering - Civil engineering - Mechanical engineering

2 years

Inspector Intermediate vocational education level in one of the following disciplines - ConstructionalCivil engineering - Materials science - Mechanical engineering

2 years

Decision-maker Higher vocational education level in one of the following disciplines - Constructional engineering - Civil engineering - Quality science - Mechanical engineering

4 years Managerial experience

822 Qualification Certification staff must be demonstrably qualified by comparing the education and experience with the requirements set out above If qualification takes place based on deviating criteria this must be laid down in writing The qualification authority is vested with

National Assessment Guideline BRL 0501 01 September 2010 copy Kiwa NV - -

26

bull Decision-makers qualification of auditors and inspectors bull Management of the certification institute qualification of decision-makers

83 Initial audit report The certification institute records the findings of the initial audit in a report The report must meet the following requirements bull Completeness the report makes a statement about all requirements set out in the

assessment guideline bull Traceability the findings the statement are based on must have been recorded in a

traceable way bull Basis for decision the decision-maker for granting a certificate must be able to base his

decision on the findings recorded in the report

84 Decision about granting the certificate The decision concerning the granting of the certificate must be made by a decision-maker who is qualified to do so and who has not been involved in the certificate audit himself The decision must have been recorded in a traceable way

85 Presentation of the quality statement The product certificate must be presented in conformity with the model included in the annex

86 Nature and frequency of external inspections The certification institute must regularly inspect the supplier for compliance with his obligations The Board of Experts will decide upon the frequency of the inspections At the time this assessment guideline took effect the frequency was set to bull 3 inspection visits per year at suppliers of hot-rolled products bull 4 inspection visits per year at suppliers of other products Inspections will in any case pertain to a number of matters including bull The product specifications laid down in the product specification bull The supplierrsquos production process bull The supplierrsquos IQC schedule and the results of the inspections performed by the supplier bull The correct way of marking the certified products bull Compliance with the required procedures The certification institute will lay down the findings of each inspection performed in a report in a traceable way

87 Reporting to the Board of Experts The certification institute must report on the certification activities performed at least once a year The report must include the following subjects bull Mutations in number of certificates (newlapsed) bull Number of inspections performed in relation to the determined frequency bull Inspection results bull Measures imposed in case of defects bull Complaints received from third parties with respect to certified products

88 Interpretation of requirements The Board of Experts may lay down the requirements set in this assessment guideline in a single separate interpretation document The certification institute is obliged to ensure whether an interpretation document has been drawn up and if so must make use of the interpretations laid down in this

89 Specific rules defined by the Board of Experts The Board of Experts has not defined specific rules that are to be followed with certification by the certification institute

National Assessment Guideline BRL 0501 01 September 2010 copy Kiwa NV - -

27

9 List of documents mentioned

91 Standardsnormative documents

NEN 6008 2008 Reinforcing steel NEN 6720 1995 Technical foundations for building constructions - TGB 1990 ndash

Regulations for concrete - TGB 1990 ndash Structural requirements and calculation methods (VBC 1995) September 1995 including amendment sheet A4 December 2007

NEN 6722 2002 Regulations for concrete ndash Execution December 2002 NEN 6723 1995 Regulations for concrete - Bridges ndash (VBB June 1995) Structural requirements

and calculation methods December 1995 including amendment sheet A1 December 2003

NEN-EN 1992 2005 Design of concrete structures NEN-EN 1994 2005 Design of composite steel and concrete structures NEN-EN 10002 2001 Metallic materials tensile testing - Part 1 Method of testing at ambient

temperature August 2001 NEN-EN 10080 2005 Steel for the reinforcement of concrete ndash Weldable reinforcing steel - General NEN-EN 10204 2004 Metallic products - Types of inspection documents October 2004 NEN-EN 45012 1998 General requirements for bodies operating assessment and

certificationregistration of quality systems NEN-EN-ISO 376 2004 Metallic materials - Calibration of force-proving instruments used for the

verification of uniaxial testing machines NEN-EN-ISO 7500-1 2004 Metallic materials - Verification of static uniaxial testing machines ndash

Part 1 Tensilecompression testing machines - Verification and calibration of the force-measuring system August 2004

NEN-EN-ISO 9513 2002 Metallic materials ndash Calibration of extensometers for uniaxial testing October 2002

NEN-EN-ISO 15630-1 2002 Steel for the reinforcement and prestressing of concrete - Test methods ndash Part 1 Reinforcing bars wire rod and wire June 2002

NEN-EN-ISO 15630-2 2002 Steel for the reinforcement and prestressing of concrete - Test methods ndash Part 2 Welded fabric

NEN-EN-ISOIEC 17020

2004 General criteria for the operation of various types of bodies performing inspection

NEN-EN-ISOIEC 17024

2003 Conformity assessment - General requirements for bodies operating certification of persons

NEN-EN-ISOIEC 17025

2005 General requirements for the competence of testing and calibration laboratories

ISO 3301 1975 Statistical interpretation of data ndash Comparison of two means in the case of paired observations

ISO 4965 1979 Axial load fatigue testing machines - Dynamic force calibration - Strain gauge technique April 1979

ISO 16269-6 2005 Statistical interpretation of data Determination of statistical tolerance intervals

Annex I Model certificate

Issued Replaces Issued date Valid until Indefinite Page 1 of 2

KOMOreg

Product certificate

ltName Productgt ltCertificate holdergt

STATEMENT OF CI This product certificate was issued on the basis of BRL lsquo lsquo in conformity with the regulations for Product Certification CI declares that the justifiable confidence exists that the name product supplied by the certificate holder meets the technical specifications laid down in this product certificate provided that name product has the KOMOreg mark as indicated in this product certificate Director CI Advice refer to wwwltCIgtnl to see if this certificate is valid

Certificate holder T F E I

Assessed Quality system Product

Periodic check

reg is a collective brand of Stichting Bouwkwaliteit

Annex II Model for IQC schedule or framework of IQC schedule

Subjects Aspects Method Frequency Registration

Basic materials or supplied materials bull Recipe sheets bull Inspection of incoming raw

materials bull Mechanical bull Chemical

Production process production equipment material bull Procedures bull Work instructions bull Equipment bull Material bull Process inspection

End products

Measuring and testing equipment

Measuring and testing equipment bull Measuring devices bull Calibration bull Outsourced tests

Logistics bull Internal transport bull Storage bull Packaging bull Preservation bull Identification or marking

of semi-finished and end products

Corrective measures Complaints handling

Annex III Sampling and testing overview

Type

on

derz

oek

1)

Doo

rlope

nd

inte

rn fa

brie

kson

derz

oek

Perio

diek

ex

tern

ond

erzo

ek (a

udit)

To

elat

ings

onde

rzoe

k

(type

onde

rzoe

k)

Type

bet

onst

aal

stav

enro

llen

per d

iam

eter

ge

punt

last

e w

apn

ette

n pe

r dia

-com

bina

tie

stav

enro

llen

3 bp

e va

n 1

diam

eter

8)

gepu

ntla

ste

wap

net

ten

3 bp

e va

n 1

dia-

com

bina

tie 7)

8)

stav

enro

llen

3 bp

e pe

r di

amet

er 6)

gepu

ntla

ste

wap

net

ten

3 bp

e pe

r dia

-co

mbi

natie

6) 7

) R

e 1

per 3

0 t

m

in 3

per

bpe

m

in 2

per

bpe

1

lang

s + d

war

s 5

per b

pe

5 pe

r bpe

3

lang

s + 2

dw

ars

10 p

er b

pe

10 p

er b

pe

5 la

ngs +

5 d

war

s R

mR

e id

em

idem

id

em

idem

id

em

idem

R

eac

tRe

nom

2)

idem

id

em

idem

id

em

idem

id

em

Agt

idem

id

em

idem

id

em

idem

id

em

Bui

gpro

ef

1 pe

r bpe

4)

idem

2

per b

pe

2 pe

r bpe

1

lang

s + 1

dw

ars

5 pe

r bpe

5

per b

pe

3 la

ngs +

2 d

war

s M

assa

per

m

idem

id

em 5)

id

em

idem

5)

idem

id

em 5)

G

eom

etrie

opp

en

pro

fielfa

ctor

id

em

idem

id

em

idem

id

em

Idem

Che

mis

che

sa

men

st +

Ceq

3)

1 pe

r lad

ing

1

per l

adin

g 1

per l

adin

g 1

per l

adin

g 1

per l

adin

g 1

per l

adin

g

Afs

chui

fpro

ef

nv

t m

in 2

per

bpe

n

vt

3 pe

r bpe

n

vt

3 pe

r bpe

B

uig-

te

rugb

uigt

rekp

roe

f

nv

t n

vt

2 pe

r bpe

n

vt

2 pe

r bpe

n

vt

Afm

etin

gen

nv

t m

in 1

per

bpe

n

vt

1 pe

r bpe

n

vt

1 pe

r bpe

V

erm

oeiin

g n

vt

nv

t 5

per j

aar

5 pe

r jaa

r 6

per b

pe 9)

5

per b

pe 10

)

1) The audit is always for each manufacturing process (hot-rolled-cooled -cold-stretched cold-profiles) of a certain type of reinforcing steel 2) If applicable (B500C) 3) Chemical composition + Ceq to be determined and submitted by the steel manufacturer not for each diameter (combination) 4) For bending mass and geometry surface + frfp min 1 per 150 tons 5) Can be determined for welding 6) Smallest largest and intermediate diameters (always skipping 2 consecutive diameters) of the range (deviating from EN 10080) 7) Always the most critical diameter combination that occurs 8) In a period of a maximum of 5 years number and spreading of diameters 9) For d le 28 mm the largest and middle diameters for gt 28 mm the largest diameter 10) The largest middle and smallest diameters Test unit is defined as -- barscoils the load or a part of the load (for bending mass and geometryprofile min 1 per 90 t) -- point welded reinforcement fabrics 50 tons of the same combination of reinforcing steel types and diameters manufactured with the same point welding machine

Annex IV Model for biannual reporting on reinforcing steel

Page 7: National Assessment Guideline - Kiwa · PDF fileThe NEN-EN 10080:2005 is not a harmonised standard and therefore a CE mark can not yet be attached to the products covered by this BRL

National Assessment Guideline BRL 0501 01 September 2010 copy Kiwa NV - -

6

2 Terminology

21 Terms This assessment guideline uses the following definitions bull Assessment guideline The arrangements made in the Board of Experts concerning the subject of certification bull Board of Experts The Board of Experts lsquoReinforcing Materialsrsquo bull Supplier

The party responsible for continuous compliance of the products with the requirements the certification has been based on

bull Internal Quality Control (IQC) schedule A description of the quality inspections performed by the supplier as part of its quality system

bull Initial audit (type audit) The preliminary audit to determine whether all requirements set out in the BRL are met bull Internal production inspection audit (by the manufacturer)

The continuous internal production inspection audit to make sure that the certified products constantly comply with the requirements set out in the BRL For this the manufacturer performs among other things tensile tests bending tests measurements of the geometry of the profiling and chemical analyses The fatigue tests are usually performed in an external laboratory

bull External periodic audit The external audit performed after granting of the certificate to make sure that the certified products constantly comply with the requirements set out in the BRL During the external periodic audit the certification institute takes random samples for tensile and bending tests measurements of the geometry of the profiling and chemical analyses Additionally samples are periodically assigned for performing fatigue tests This is also called lsquoaudit testingrsquo The results are tested against the requirements set out in the BRL

bull External verification audit The external verification audit performed during the initial audit and subsequently every two years for verification of the determination of the variable and attributive properties For this two series of similar test pieces are taken the test results of which are compared in pairs for their mutual differences

22 Definitions In addition to the terms and definitions in NEN-EN 100802005 the following definitions apply in this BRL bull Fatigue strength

NEN 6008 requires for the fatigue strength a minimum tension ripple 2σa with an upper tensile of 06 Re (Cv) A tension ripple is the tension change from a middle tension through an upper and lower tension back to the middle tension (2σa = tension ripple)

National Assessment Guideline BRL 0501 01 September 2010 copy Kiwa NV - -

7

Bovenspanning = upper force Middenspanning = middle force Onderspanning = lower force Cyclus = cycle Figure 1 stress change

bull Nominal diameter (d) The diameter of an imaginary bar with a circle-shaped cross-section of the same length and volume as the actual bar with profiled surface excluding tolerances bull Variable properties Property to which a quantitative value is assigned when assessing the measurement In NEN 6008 these are the properties 02 yield limit (Rp02) or flow limit (Re) yield at maximum load (Agt) the tensile strengthflow limit ratio (RmRe) the ratio of the actual flow limitnominal flow limit (ReactRenom) and fatigue strength (2σa) In conformity with NEN-EN 10080 section 7333 the upper flow limit (ReH) applies to the flow limit (Re) If there is no flow the 02 yield limit (Rp02) is to be determined

bull Attributive properties Property to which a value is assigned during the assessment that can only be regarded as good or wrong In NEN 6008 these are the properties nominal diameter mass per length profiling (profile factors fR fP rib height rib distance rib width rib flank angle rib (inclination) angle distance of rib rows and longitudinal rib) bending test shearing test and chemical composition bull Bendndashbend back tensile test Supplementary to NEN-EN-10080 and NEN 6008 the bend-bend back tensile test (attributive) is to be performed to determine whether the reinforcing steel types B500B and B500C in the diameter range le 16 mm can be bent back after having been bent 90deg retaining the required mechanical properties also see 4421 bull Characteristic value Value of a property with a certain chance of exceeding or undershooting in a hypothetical infinite test series In this BRL the characteristic value is the value of a property with a chance of exceeding of 5 (p = 095) or 10 (p = 090) with a probability level of W = 90 or W = 75 with a normally assumed spread bull Cv values These are the specified minimum (maximum) characteristic values as defined in NEN 6008 bull a1 a2 a3 a4 value The a-values are value increasesdecreases (the so-called extra values in accordance with NEN 6008) with respect to the specified Cv values see the examples given below Here x is the average value and X is the individual value -- a1 x ge Cv + a1 (eg Re a1 = 10 so average value x ge 510 MPa) -- a2 X ge Cv ndash a2 (eg Re a1 = 15 so individual value x ge 485 MPa) -- a3 x le Cv + a3 (eg RmRe a3 = 0) -- a4 X le Cv + a4 (eg RmRe a4 = 002)

23 Indication of reinforcing steel types The reinforcing steel types are indicated as follows in NEN 60082008 (shortened for a full overview see NEN 6008 table 1)

National Assessment Guideline BRL 0501 01 September 2010 copy Kiwa NV - -

8

Cv values for Quality indication

NEN 60082008

(new)

Quality indication

NEN 60081991 (old)

Rm (MPa) Re (MPa) RmRe Re act Re nom

Agt ()

B 500 A FeB 500 HKN

550

500 500

105a -

- -

30ab 275

B 500 B B 500 C

FeB 500 HWL FeB 500 HK

550 550

500 500 500 500

108 115 c -le135 - -

- lt125 - -

50b 75bc 325 325

See for the footnotes NEN 6008 table 1 Table 1

24 Reinforcing steel on coils The mechanical properties of reinforcing steel obtained from winding reinforcing steel on coils substantially change during this production process in particular the yield at maximum load (Agt) Therefore NEN 6008 prescribes a 05 surplus value for the Agt (Cv) of reinforcing steel on coils The Agt (Cv) is then for B500 A 35 for B500 B 55 and for B500 C 8 respectively NB Reinforcing steel on coils is not covered by BRL 0501 but by BRL 0503

National Assessment Guideline BRL 0501 01 September 2010 copy Kiwa NV - -

9

3 Procedure for obtaining a quality statement

31 Initial audit The initial audit to be performed by the certification institute takes place by means of the performance and product requirements incorporated in this assessment guideline including test methods and will include depending on the nature of the product to be certified bull (Sample) testing to determine whether the products meet the product andor performance

requirements bull Assessment of the production process bull Assessment of the quality system and the IQC schedule bull Testing for the presence and functioning of other required procedures bull Assessment of the supplierrsquos processing regulations

32 Certification Upon completion of the initial audit the results are presented to the decision-maker This party will assess the results and determine whether the certificate can be granted or that additional data andor audits are needed before the certificate can be granted

National Assessment Guideline BRL 0501 01 September 2010 copy Kiwa NV - -

10

4 Product requirements and determination methods

41 General This chapter includes the product requirements that reinforcing steel must comply with as well as the determination methods to make sure that the requirements are complied with These requirements will be part of the technical specification of the product that is included in the product certificate The product certificate states that the reinforcing steel complies with article 4 of BRL 0501 which also implies that the reinforcing steel complies with NEN 6720 article 512 or NEN-EN 1990NEN-EN 1991-12 including the national annexes

42 Product requirements and determination methods The requirements and the determination methods for reinforcing steel have been laid down in

Number Title Date of issue NEN-EN 10080 Steel for the reinforcement of concrete ndash

Weldable reinforcing steel - General May 2005

NEN-EN 10080 1) Dutch translation Staal voor het wapenen van beton ndash Lasbaar betonstaal - Algemeen

June 2005

NEN 6008 Steel for the reinforcement of concrete July 2008 NEN-EN-ISO 15630-1

Steel for the reinforcement of concrete and prestressing of concrete ndash Test methods ndash Part 1 reinforcing bars wire rod and wire

2002-04-15

NEN-EN-ISO 15630-2

Steel for the reinforcement of concrete and prestressing of concrete ndash Test methods ndash Part 2 welded fabric

2002-04-15

1) The English version lsquoNEN-EN 10080 May 2005rsquo is binding Table 2

43 Product requirements supplementary to and contrary to NEN-EN 10080 and NEN 6008 the following applies

431 Lattice girders What has been stated about lattice girders in NEN-EN 10080 and NEN 6008 does not apply to this assessment guideline see for this BRL 0502 lsquoLattice girdersrsquo

432 Non-profiled or slightly profiled reinforcing steel Non-profiled or slightly profiled reinforcing steel is outside the scope of the regime of this BRL it may only be applied to lattice girders

433 Geometry of the profiling determination of fR and fP Determination of the profile factor fR andor fP is done in conformity with NEN-EN-ISO 15630-1 art 113

For determining fR and fP use can be made of the simplified formulas in conformity with NEN-EN-ISO 15630-1 article 1133 a and b Use of the simplified formulas in conformity with NEN-EN-ISO 15630-1 article 1133 c and 1133d is not allowed In order to make use of the simplified formulas in conformity with articles 1133a and 1133b it must be determined in advance during the initial audit whether use of the reinforcing steel produced by the supplier and the proposed simplified formula (Trapezium or Simpson) produces results for fR and fP

National Assessment Guideline BRL 0501 01 September 2010 copy Kiwa NV - -

11

that are greater than or equal to the value that is obtained when using the general formula for determining fR and fP (in conformity with article 1131)

434 Standard deviations Supplementary to the NEN-EN- 10080 and NEN 6008 the following values are valid for the maximum standard deviations of the variable properties

Re (MPa)

Re(act)Re(nom) RmRe Agt ()

B500A bars coils point welded fabric

30 006 002 15

B500B bars coils point welded fabric

30 006 002 bars 20 coils 20 point welded fabric 15

B500C bars coils point welded fabric

30 006 002 bars 25 coils 25 point welded fabric 15

Table 3

435 Geometry longitudinal rib Supplementary to NEN-EN-ISO 15630-1 art 1032 the rib width of the longitudinal rib if present must be measured as well The rib width is analogically measured as the rib height The requirements with respect to the longitudinal rib are mentioned in NEN 6008 table 1

436 Nominal mass per metre Contrary to NEN 6008 table 1 read lsquothe allowable deviation from the nominal mass per meterrsquo for lsquotolerance nominal diameterrsquo

437 Extra value for a2 Contrary to NEN 6008 table 1 lsquoextra valuersquo read a2 = 05 for the Agt of B500A

438 Chemical composition of reinforcing steel Contrary to NEN-EN-10080 (Dutch translation) art 713 table 2 explanation a the following applies Exceeding the maximum value for the carbon content by 003 (mass percentage) is allowed provided that the value of the carbon equivalent is decreased by 002 (mass percentage)rdquo

National Assessment Guideline BRL 0501 01 September 2010 copy Kiwa NV - -

12

439 Nominal diameters preferred range Supplementary to NEN-EN10080 the table below mentions the general and the preferred range of the nominal diameters The nominal diameters between brackets ( ) are not preferred diameters Nominal diameter

mm

Bars Coils and bars

straightened from coils

Point welded fabric

Nominal surface of the cross section

mm2

Nominal mass per

metre

kgm 40 (x) 126 0099 45 (x) 159 0125 50 (x) x 196 0154 55 (x) (x) 238 0187 60 x x x 283 0222 65 (x) (x) 332 0260 70 x x 385 0302 75 (x) (x) 442 0347 80 x x x 503 0395 85 (x) (x) 567 0445 90 x x 636 0499 95 (x) (x) 709 0556 100 x x x 785 0617 110 (x) x 950 0746 120 x x x 113 0888 140 x x x 154 121 160 x x x 201 158 200 x 314 247 250 x 491 385 280 (x) 616 483 320 x 804 631 400 x 1257 986 500 x 1963 154

Table 4

4310 Values for a1 - a4 NEN EN 100802005 section 81312 provides insufficient clarity and interpretation of how to apply these a-values The a-values included in NEN 60082008 are the absolute minimummaximum a-values that with respect to the a2 and a 4 values are for determining the individual absolute minimum and maximum variable mechanical properties as referred to in NEN EN 100802005 section 11 (testing in case of a dispute)

However when assessing the variable test results per test unit during the production inspection in the factory in conformity with NEN EN 100802005 section 813 1 in case of b) the manufacturer himself shall determine the a1234-values of the population concerned and record this in a solid procedure With these determined manufacturer-specific a-values every test unit must be tested in order to meet the required quality level in the long term ( x - ks ge Cv or x + ks le Cv) The a-values of the manufacturer must al least comply with the absolute minimummaximum a-values included in NEN 60082008 but they are usually higherlower (ie more critical)

The solid procedures with the a-values recorded for each population must always be up-to-date and demonstrate to the satisfaction of the CI that with this the required Cv values (for the longer term) are complied with If these solid procedures are (still) missing in conformity with NEN EN 100802005 section 8131 only situation a) applies so in principle all individual values of the test unit must comply with the specified Cv value

National Assessment Guideline BRL 0501 01 September 2010 copy Kiwa NV - -

13

When determining the a-values solid procedures are preferably applied using the standard deviations and the assumption probabilities

4311 Rib row distance Σe Contrary to NEN 6008 table 1 and analogue with NEN-EN 10080 read for lsquodistance rib rowsdistance Σe le 075drsquo The projection of the cross ribs must cover at least 75 of the circumference of the reinforcing steel to be calculated based on the nominal diameter In formula total distance between the rib rows Σe lt 025 πd

44 Determination methods and test criteria Supplementary and contrary to NEN-EN 10080 and NEN 6008 the following applies

441 Preliminary audit for acceptance Supplementary to NEN-EN 10080 the following data are to be provided for each of the diameters given by the certification institute before the start of the initial audit -- test results of 60 pieces from at least 3 casting loads with 20 samples each the individual

test results of 02 yield limit or flow limit ((Rp02 or Re) yield at maximum load (Agt) the tensile strength02 yield or flow limit ratio RmRp02 or Re if applicable the ratio of the actual 02 yield limit or flow limitthe nominal 02 yield limit or flow limit (ReactRenom) Also the statistic processing of these data with average value ( x ) standard deviation (s) and characteristic value (Cv)

-- test results of 5 pieces from the same loads with 5 samples each the individual test results of the bendability shearing force of point welded reinforcement fabrics mass per metre and profiling (profile factors fR fP rib height rib distance rib width rib flank α rib (inclination) angle distance between the rib rows and the longitudinal rib)

-- chemical composition of each casting load -- (casting) load numbers and roller data (min 10 tons per diameter) -- drawing or sketch of the profiling and the factory brand

442 Inspection for the attributive properties NEN-EN 10080 gives insufficient interpretation of the termination methods and test criteria for inspections for the attributive properties bendability shearing force with point welded reinforcement fabrics mass per metre and profiling (profile factors fR fP rib height rib distance rib width rib flank α rib (inclination) angle β distance between the rib rows and the longitudinal rib Contrary to NEN-EN 10080 with these attributive properties the sampling and the conformity assessment is done as follows -- with the continuous internal production inspection not for each test unit but repeatedly

for the 15 last tested bars of a diameter or a diameter-weld combination -- with the initial audit the test series is to be extended to 15 samples if necessary and to 60

samples when there is initial rejection -- with the periodic external inspection (audit) the results of the attributive properties

obtained during the audit are to be added to the internal test results of the manufacturer Testing If a maximum of 2 of the 15 measurements do not comply the sampling can be extended by 45 extra measurements with respect to the attributive property concerned In this case the attributive properties of a total of 60 test bars are available The property concerned then still complies if not more than 2 of the 60 measurements do not comply with the NEN 6008 The profiling is increasingly measured using an optical camera The manual measurement will be valid in case of disputes

4421 Inspection of the bend-bend tensile test with initial audit and during external inspections (audit testing) By means of a bend-bend back tensile test it is determined whether the reinforcing steel types B500B and B500C in the diameter range le 16 mm can be bent back once with an angle of 90deg

National Assessment Guideline BRL 0501 01 September 2010 copy Kiwa NV - -

14

without significant decrease of the Rp02 or Re RmRe and Agt compared with the non-bent bars The values may not be below the mentioned Cv values for the reinforcing steel type and delivery condition concerned Sampling and testing frequency

Delivery condition Diameter Inspection frequency bars and coils B500BB500C

d le 16 mm 6 samples of different barscoils from 3 (casting) loads for each selected diameter Samples are to be taken from the same barsloads as for the regular tensile tests

Performance of the test Take a sample of reinforcing steel of sufficient length for doing 2 tensile tests A normal tensile test is performed with the one part and a bend-bend back tensile test with the other part The minimum length for the bendbend back tensile test is 70 cm The preparation of the tensile test including the way of ageing and the way of bending is done in accordance with the stipulations in NEN-EN 10080 with the exception of the way of bending back and the bending mandrel diameter to be used The bending mandrel diameter is maximum 4d Bend the bar over a bending mandrel of maximum 4d with a maximum angle of 90deg Mark the bending zone (length ca 9d) Place the test piece in a vice or the like Place an appropriate pipe over the part of the test piece to be bent back preferably with an internal pipe diameter that is max 2 mm larger than the diameter of the test piece and bend the test piece straight again Try to make the test piece as straight as possible Here the difference between the one part and the other part of the test piece may be maximally the diameter of the test piece (the bayonet forming) Age the test piece in conformity with the stipulations of NEN-EN 10080 and perform the tensile test The test is considered to be satisfactory when - the results do not show any significant differences with the results of the non-bent test

pieces - the values are above the set Cv values If the values are not satisfactory find the cause and repeat the tests if necessary

443 Inspection for the variable properties Contrary to NEN-EN 10080 the sampling and testing is done in conformity with BRL 0501 annex 3 for the variable properties 02 yield limit or flow limit (Rp02 or Re) yield at maximum load (Agt) the tensile strength02 yield or flow limit ratio RmRp02 or Re if applicable the ratio of the actual 02 yield limit or flow limitthe nominal 02 yield limit or flow limit (ReactRenom) and the fatigue strength NEN-EN 10080 provides insufficient interpretation of the test requirements the determination methods and the test criteria for inspection for the fatigue properties Therefore the requirements given below apply supplementary to NEN-EN 10080

National Assessment Guideline BRL 0501 01 September 2010 copy Kiwa NV - -

15

4431 Inspection for the fatigue strength in initial audit Sampling and testing frequency

Delivery condition

Diameter Inspection frequency

bars and coils for d le 28 mm the middle and largest of the diameter range For d gt 28 mm the largest diameter

6 samples of different barscoils from 3 (casting) loads for each selected diameter (18 bars per diameter)

point welded fabrics

The smallest middle and largest diameter of the diameter range (always with the least favourable diameter combination)

5 samples of different bars with a point weld from 3 test units for each selected diameter (15 bars per diameter)

Test method a semi-statistical This simplified test is regarded as sufficient if the requirements given below are met

With reinforcing steel bars and coils B500B and B500C in the diameter range d le 28 mm with

the requirement aσ2 ge 175 MPa

a2σ = 175 MPa a2σ = 200 MPa Number of samples 10 sup2) Number of samples 8 sup2) Stress changes (106) Break Stress changes (106) Break

lt 15 lt 20 ge 20

none le l ge 9

lt 075 075 lt 10 10 lt 20 ge 20

none le l

le 2 1)

ge 5 1) le 3 breaks if no break occurred up to 1x106 tension changes sup2) total number 10 + 8 = 18

Table 5

With reinforcing steel bars B500B and B500C in the diameter range d gt 28 mm with the

requirement aσ2 ge 145 MPa

a2σ = 145 MPa a2σ = 170 MPa Number of samples 10 sup2) Number of samples 8 sup2) Stress changes (106) Break Stress changes (106) Break

lt 15 lt 20 ge 20

none le l ge 9

lt 075 075 lt 15 15 lt 20 ge 20

none le 2

le 2 1)

ge 4 1) le 4 breaks if no break occurred up to 15 x 106 tension changes sup2) total number 10 + 8 = 18

Table 6

With point welded fabrics B500A B500B and B500C as well as reinforcing steel bars and coils

B500A with the requirement aσ2 ge 100 MPa

a2σ = 100 MPa a2σ = 180 MPa Number of samples 10 sup1) Number of samples 5 sup1) Stress changes (106) Break Stress changes (106) Break

lt 15 lt 20 ge 20

none le l ge 9

lt 025 025 lt 05 ge 05

none le 3 ge 2

sup1) total number 10 + 5 = 15 Table 7

National Assessment Guideline BRL 0501 01 September 2010 copy Kiwa NV - -

16

Test method b fully statistical This test is done with the appropriate statistic methods considering the requirements p = 095 W = 75 set out in NEN 6008

Here the requirement Cv le x ndash ks must be complied with where x = the average value in which max 2 million load changes must be maintained

for the individual value of one test bar s = the estimate of the standard deviation of the population k = variation coefficient according to the table below (in conformity with ISO 16269-6) Cv = the characteristic value for the tension changes 1 106

n k n k n k n k 15 199 20 193 30 187 50 181 16 199 25 190 40 183 100 176 18 195

Table 8

4432 Inspection for the fatigue strength in periodic external inspections (audit testing) The numbers of test bars of one diameter given below are tested on an annual basis The sampling takes place in the presence of the inspector and is part of the audit testing -- barscoils 5 per year -- point welded fabrics 5 per year provided that in a period of 5 years at least 80 of all certified diameters (diameter combinations) has been tested With the 80 mentioned at least the following must have been tested

bull For barscoils the largest diameter in the range d le 28 mm and the largest diameter in the range d gt 28 mm

bull For point welded fabrics the smallest and the largest diameters always with the least favourable diameter combination

The test is considered to be satisfactory if

bull with the barscoils max 1 sample broke at lt 20106 stress changes and the other 4 samples have at least resisted 20106 tension changes

bull with the point welded fabrics max 1 sample broke at between 10106 and 20106 stress changes and the other 4 samples have at least resisted 20106 stress changes

For barscoils and point welded fabrics only a re-inspection can take place if no more than 2 samples broke at fewer than 20 106 stress changes In this case 5 extra samples are to be tested whereby no breaks at lt 20 106 stress changes may occur In this case the test series is satisfactory If this is not complied with further testing is necessary to find the cause and corrective measures are to be taken in order to avoid reoccurrence If necessary a new initial audit for the fatigue strength is to be performed

45 Biannual reporting The test results of all test units of the continuous inspections are to be collected and statistically evaluated for Re Agt RmRe and ReactRenom (if relevant) based on data of the production of the previous six months or the 200 most recent data dependent on which is the largest number These data shall biannually be sent to the certification institute in conformity with the model in annex 4

National Assessment Guideline BRL 0501 01 September 2010 copy Kiwa NV - -

17

46 Identification Contrary to NEN-EN 10080 art 101211 the product numbers (technical classes) are not assigned by a European organisation However the other requirements concerning the identification are observed in conformity with NEN 6008 and NEN-EN 10080

47 Certification mark Each packaging unit must have a label with the following obligatory indications

bull KOMO mark bull product certificate number + delivery condition (bars coils fabrics) bull the reinforcing steel type and the manufacturer number bull name andor logo of the manufacturer bull mentioning BRL0501

A packaging unit can be characterised

bull with reinforcing steel on coils as lsquothe coilrsquo marking min 1 label per coil bull with reinforcing steel bars as lsquothe bundlesrsquo marking min 1 label per bundle bull with point welded fabrics as lsquonumber of fabricsrsquo marking at least 1 label per unit of max

40 reinforcement fabrics or max 2 tons Additionally each point welded fabric in which only externally purchased and delivered reinforcing steel has been used must be marked in an indelible and non-removable way For example when using a ldquoSchlatter Etikettiermachinen Methoderdquo or equivalent the point welded reinforcement fabrics are to be marked with at least 1 label

National Assessment Guideline BRL 0501 01 September 2010 copy Kiwa NV - -

18

5 Requirements to the quality system

51 General This chapter includes the requirements that the quality system of the supplier has to meet

52 Administrator of the quality system A staff member is to be appointed as quality system manager within the organisational structure

53 Internal quality controlquality plan The supplier must have and use a schedule for internal quality control (an IQC schedule) in accordance with the model indicated in annex 2 In this IQC schedule the following must be demonstrably recorded

bull what aspects the manufacturer will inspect bull what methods will be used for these inspections bull the frequency of these inspections bull how to record and file the inspection results bull aspects with respect to the production of point welded reinforcement fabrics

Also the supplier must have a procedure for organising the production process of any post-stretching alignment and the reinforcement fabrics to be point welded and how this is implemented inspected and monitored This IQC schedule must have been derived from the IQC schedule included in the annex and must have been set up such that it gives the CI enough confidence that the requirements set out in this assessment guideline are continuously met

This must function at least 3 months before issuing the certificate

54 Procedures and work instructions The supplier must be able to submit

bull procedures for - handling out of spec products and (semi-)products to be repaired - corrective measures after observed defects - handling complaints about products andor services delivered - monitoring the quality using the extra value a - a4 - the work instructions and inspection forms used including the biannual reporting

(see annex 4)

55 Other requirements to the quality system

551 Reinforcing steel The following are regarded as sufficient proof that the purchased reinforcing steel complies with the product standard mentioned (NEN 6008) and other technical specifications

bull KOMO quality statement issued on the basis of BRL 0501 lsquoReinforcing steelrsquo by a certification andor attestation institute acknowledged by the Dutch Authority for Accreditation for the discipline involved

bull a (quality) statement the equivalence of which with the above-mentioned KOMO quality statement has been demonstrated

The traceability of the purchased reinforcing steel is guaranteed by the rolling mark and the labelling The origin (certificate number) of the reinforcing steel must be recorded at the initial audit

National Assessment Guideline BRL 0501 01 September 2010 copy Kiwa NV - -

19

552 Storage of reinforcing steel Reinforcing steel must be stored free from the ground Store and label reinforcing steel such that the chance of exchange for instance with foreign qualities is eliminated

National Assessment Guideline BRL 0501 01 September 2010 copy Kiwa NV - -

20

6 Requirements for the functioning of a test laboratory for testing reinforcing steel andor point welded reinforcement fabrics

61 The supplier has its own laboratory for testing reinforcing steel for its variable and attributive properties The laboratory equipment as well as the test methods must comply with

bull NEN-EN 10002-22001 Metallic materials tensile testing part 1 method of testing at ambient temperature

bull NEN-EN-ISO 15630-12002 Steel for the reinforcement and prestressing of concrete Test methods ndash Part 1 reinforcing bars wire rod and wire June 2002

bull NEN-EN-ISO 15630-22002 Steel for the reinforcement and prestressing of concrete Test methods ndash Part 2 welded fabric

Measuring equipment that has not been classified for one of the above-mentioned standards can be used as soon as they have been tested assessed and qualified by the CI

62 Outsourcing of testing Tests for the chemical composition and the fatigue strength of reinforcing steel can be outsourced as well De test results can be indicated as being lsquoperformed in a reliable wayrsquo if

bull The tests have been performed by a laboratory that meets the accreditation standard referred to in article 14 of this BRL NEN-EN-ISOIEC 17025 lsquoGeneral requirements for the competence of testing and calibration laboratoriesrsquo This accreditation must concern the performance of tests in conformity with the outsourcing assignment Besides a 31 or a 22 certificate of the results in conformity with NEN-EN 10204 is to be submitted or

bull The supplier receives the test results of the chemical composition from a company that has a product certificate of the lsquotechnical disciplinersquo (H9) mentioned in this BRL with the CI and the relevant measuring equipment in the laboratory concerned is covered by the product certificate audit

If the above requirements are not complied with the certification institute will perform or have performed the audit concerned itself In this case the certification institute will base its test on the accreditation standard NEN-EN-ISOIEC 17025

63 Verification audit An initial audit includes external verification of both the attributive and the variable properties Also an external verification for the performance of the used tensile tests takes place every two years The diameter is to be selected such that the diameters that occur most are tested in a period of 5 years When using a new tensile testing machinemeasuring equipment a verification audit is to be performed as well

National Assessment Guideline BRL 0501 01 September 2010 copy Kiwa NV - -

21

631 Variable properties For the verification of variable properties (the results of the tensile test) at least 15 random samples of one selected diameter must be taken in the presence of the inspector (audit testing) for each selected reinforcing steel type each of a length suitable for two test pieces for testing The selected representative diameters must change at the two-yearly verification With bars and coils the samples must have been spread over at least 3 loads of 1 diameter The samples for point welded reinforcement fabrics and the corresponding bars must come from 1 diameter combination produced on different days For each sample the two collected test pieces must be marked and then the test pieces must be bundled into two series of at least 15 test pieces A third series can be taken as spare series in case of discussions about the achieved results One series must be tested in the presence of the inspector at the manufacturerrsquos The inspector must have the other series tested at an external laboratory The time between the performances of both test series must be short enough to allow for neglecting any natural ageing of the testing material The test (tensile test) includes determination of the 02 yield limit or flow limit (Re) the tensile strength (Rm) the RmRe ratio and the yield with maximum load (Agt) of each individual test piece The thus obtained two series of measurement pairs must then be tested for their differences between both performances of the test Any systematic differences are to be tracked and eliminated

With the statistic comparison of two different performances of tests the differences of paired measurements are to be checked in relation with the hypothesis that the expected value of the average difference is zero (Student test) Rejection of this hypothesis indicates that there is a possibility of systematic differences For each variable property the xfi (i = 1n) of the measurement results of the manufacturer and the xei (i = 1hellip n) of the external institute must be calculated separately

bull Difference vi = xfi ndash xei considering the positive or negative difference and then the average difference

= sum

=

n

iiv

nv

1

1

bull standard deviation of the differences

minus

minus= sum

=

2

1

2

11 vnv

ns

n

iiv

bull value vsvt =

It must be verified for the variable properties the 02 yield limit or flow limit (Reee ) the tensile strength (Rmmm ) and the yield with maximum load (Aggg ttt ) whether or not t exceeds a critical limit to The critical values to depend on the number of tests and have been derived from ISO 3301 1975 with a = 001 (see table 9)

National Assessment Guideline BRL 0501 01 September 2010 copy Kiwa NV - -

22

Table 9 ndash Critical values of to

n to n to n to

10 103 11 096 12 090 13 085 14 080

15 077 16 074 17 071 18 068 19 066

20 064 25 056 30 050 35 047 40 043

If t gt to the hypothesis that there is no difference between the two series of paired measurements is rejected and so the cause of this must be found and eliminated This does not apply when sv and v are both below the reference values Sov and Vo in table 9 because of insufficient relevance

If t le to the hypothesis that there is no difference between the two series of paired measurements is not rejected The test can then be concluded unless Sv ge Sov In this case the standard deviation of the differences is excessive showing that the material concerned is unsuitable for the verification test Further investigation is then required

Table 10 ndash Reference values of Sov and Vo

sov vo 02 yield limit or flow limit 15 15 Tensile strength in MPa 15 20 Yield at maximum load in B500A B500B B500C

11 25 30

11 25 30

632 Attributive properties For the verification of attributive properties (mass per length chemical composition profiling bending test and if necessary a shearing test) the measurements of mass per length and profiling must be done in advance with the two series of at least 15 test pieces meant for the tensile test (see above) For the measurements of the bending test and shearing test (if applicable) the number of test pieces from the above described random samples must be extended with at least 5 test pieces for the bending test and if necessary the shearing test For the verification assessment of the chemical composition the number of test pieces is limited to a series of 3 test pieces from 3 test units Any combinations in the random samples of the above-mentioned verification assessments are allowed The test series at the manufacturerrsquos and the series of external tests (see above) should not produce other differences than those that can unambiguously be explained and eliminated

National Assessment Guideline BRL 0501 01 September 2010 copy Kiwa NV - -

23

7 Summary audit and inspection

Below a summary is provided of the tests to be performed for certification bull Initial audit the audit to determine whether all requirements in the BRL are met bull Inspection audit the audit performed after granting the certificate to determine whether

the certified products continuously meet the requirements set in the BRL Also indicates the frequency of the inspection audits to be performed by the certification institute (CI)

bull Inspection of the quality system inspection for compliance with the IQC schedule and the procedures

Here the frequency with which the certification institute must perform an inspection audit is indicated as well

Audit related to

Supervision by CI after granting the certificate1)

Requirement description Article BRL Initial audit

Inspection2) Frequency Product requirements bull Indication of product 2342 X X continuously bull Variable properties 4243 X X 34 x per year bull Chemical composition 4243 X X 34 x per year bull Bending test 42 X X 34 x per year bull Shearing test 42 X X 4 x per year bull Fatigue strength 4244 X X 1 x per year bull Geometry form 4243 X X 34 x per year bull Mass per unit 4243 X X 34 x per year bull Dimensions of fabricsbars 42 X X 34 x per year bull Bendndashbend back tensile

test 42 X X 3 x per year

Own testing laboratory bull Own laboratory 61 X X 1 x per year bull Outsourcing of tests 62 X X 34 x per year bull Verification audit 63 X X 1 x per 2 years System requirements bull IQC schedule 5 X X 34 x per year bull Quality mark 4647 X X 34 x per year

Table 11

1) In case of significant changes in the production process to be assessed by the CI the product requirements need to be tested again

2) The inspector or the certificate holder in the presence of the inspector will determine all product properties that can be performed within the visiting time (maximum 1 day) If this is not possible the CI and the certificate holder will make arrangements with respect to how the inspection will be performed

Inspection of the quality system The certification institute checks if the manufacturer meets the quality system requirements in chapter 5 of this BRL according to the frequency in article 86 of this BRL

National Assessment Guideline BRL 0501 01 September 2010 copy Kiwa NV - -

24

8 Requirements of de certification institute

81 General The certification institute must meet the requirements set out in EN 45011 Besides for the purpose of this BRL the institute must have been accredited by the Dutch Authority for Accreditation (RvA) or a similar body (an accreditation institute with which the RvA has entered into an agreement of mutual acceptance) The certification institute must have a set of regulations or a similar document defining the general rules to be observed during certification These particularly include bull The general rules for performance of the initial audit to be structured as follows

o The way in which suppliers are informed about the handling of a request o The performance of the audit o The decision based on the audit performed

bull The general rules concerning the performance of inspections and the inspection aspects used here

bull The measures the certification institute must take in case of defects bull The rules for terminating a certificate bull The possibility to make an appeal against decisions or measures of the certification

institute

82 Certification staff Staff involved in certification procedures include bull Auditors charged with performing the initial audit and assessing the reports of the

inspectors bull Inspectors charged with performing the external inspection at the supplierrsquos bull Decision-makers charged with taking decisions based on the initial audits performed

about continuation of certification based on inspections performed and about the necessity to take corrective measures

821 Qualification requirements A distinction is made with respect to 8211 Qualification requirements for the certification executives of a CI meeting the

requirements set out in EN 45011 8212 Supplementary qualification requirements for the certification executives of a CI as

determined by the Board of Experts for the subject of this BRL

National Assessment Guideline BRL 0501 01 September 2010 copy Kiwa NV - -

25

8211 Qualification requirements for the certification executives of a CI meeting the requirements set out in EN 45011

The qualification of the certification executives of a CI must comply with chapter 5 of EN 45011 The manual of the CI must describe how the qualification of the certification executives is performed

EN45011

Auditor

initial product assessment and assessment of the

production location

Inspector

assessment product location field and

projects after granting of certificate

Decision-maker

for granting and extending a certificate

Education General

Higher Vocational thinking and working level

Intermediate vocational working and thinking level

Higher Vocational thinking and working level

Education Specific

Basic training for auditing Basic training for auditing

Basic training for auditing

Experience General

1 year of relevant working experience with min 4 audits including 1 full initial audit done independently under supervision

1 year of relevant working experience with min 4 audits including 1 done independent under supervision

4 years of relevant working experience of which at least 1 year with respect to certification

Experience Specific

knowledge of BRL at detailed level and 4 audits related to the specific BRL or to similar BRLs

knowledge of BRL at detailed level and 4 audits related to the specific BRL or to similar BRLs

Basic knowledge of the specific certification schedule

8212 Supplementary qualification requirements for the certification executives of a CI as determined by the Board of Experts for the subject of this BRL

Certification staff Education Experience Auditor Higher vocational education level in one of the

following disciplines - Constructional engineering - Civil engineering - Mechanical engineering

2 years

Inspector Intermediate vocational education level in one of the following disciplines - ConstructionalCivil engineering - Materials science - Mechanical engineering

2 years

Decision-maker Higher vocational education level in one of the following disciplines - Constructional engineering - Civil engineering - Quality science - Mechanical engineering

4 years Managerial experience

822 Qualification Certification staff must be demonstrably qualified by comparing the education and experience with the requirements set out above If qualification takes place based on deviating criteria this must be laid down in writing The qualification authority is vested with

National Assessment Guideline BRL 0501 01 September 2010 copy Kiwa NV - -

26

bull Decision-makers qualification of auditors and inspectors bull Management of the certification institute qualification of decision-makers

83 Initial audit report The certification institute records the findings of the initial audit in a report The report must meet the following requirements bull Completeness the report makes a statement about all requirements set out in the

assessment guideline bull Traceability the findings the statement are based on must have been recorded in a

traceable way bull Basis for decision the decision-maker for granting a certificate must be able to base his

decision on the findings recorded in the report

84 Decision about granting the certificate The decision concerning the granting of the certificate must be made by a decision-maker who is qualified to do so and who has not been involved in the certificate audit himself The decision must have been recorded in a traceable way

85 Presentation of the quality statement The product certificate must be presented in conformity with the model included in the annex

86 Nature and frequency of external inspections The certification institute must regularly inspect the supplier for compliance with his obligations The Board of Experts will decide upon the frequency of the inspections At the time this assessment guideline took effect the frequency was set to bull 3 inspection visits per year at suppliers of hot-rolled products bull 4 inspection visits per year at suppliers of other products Inspections will in any case pertain to a number of matters including bull The product specifications laid down in the product specification bull The supplierrsquos production process bull The supplierrsquos IQC schedule and the results of the inspections performed by the supplier bull The correct way of marking the certified products bull Compliance with the required procedures The certification institute will lay down the findings of each inspection performed in a report in a traceable way

87 Reporting to the Board of Experts The certification institute must report on the certification activities performed at least once a year The report must include the following subjects bull Mutations in number of certificates (newlapsed) bull Number of inspections performed in relation to the determined frequency bull Inspection results bull Measures imposed in case of defects bull Complaints received from third parties with respect to certified products

88 Interpretation of requirements The Board of Experts may lay down the requirements set in this assessment guideline in a single separate interpretation document The certification institute is obliged to ensure whether an interpretation document has been drawn up and if so must make use of the interpretations laid down in this

89 Specific rules defined by the Board of Experts The Board of Experts has not defined specific rules that are to be followed with certification by the certification institute

National Assessment Guideline BRL 0501 01 September 2010 copy Kiwa NV - -

27

9 List of documents mentioned

91 Standardsnormative documents

NEN 6008 2008 Reinforcing steel NEN 6720 1995 Technical foundations for building constructions - TGB 1990 ndash

Regulations for concrete - TGB 1990 ndash Structural requirements and calculation methods (VBC 1995) September 1995 including amendment sheet A4 December 2007

NEN 6722 2002 Regulations for concrete ndash Execution December 2002 NEN 6723 1995 Regulations for concrete - Bridges ndash (VBB June 1995) Structural requirements

and calculation methods December 1995 including amendment sheet A1 December 2003

NEN-EN 1992 2005 Design of concrete structures NEN-EN 1994 2005 Design of composite steel and concrete structures NEN-EN 10002 2001 Metallic materials tensile testing - Part 1 Method of testing at ambient

temperature August 2001 NEN-EN 10080 2005 Steel for the reinforcement of concrete ndash Weldable reinforcing steel - General NEN-EN 10204 2004 Metallic products - Types of inspection documents October 2004 NEN-EN 45012 1998 General requirements for bodies operating assessment and

certificationregistration of quality systems NEN-EN-ISO 376 2004 Metallic materials - Calibration of force-proving instruments used for the

verification of uniaxial testing machines NEN-EN-ISO 7500-1 2004 Metallic materials - Verification of static uniaxial testing machines ndash

Part 1 Tensilecompression testing machines - Verification and calibration of the force-measuring system August 2004

NEN-EN-ISO 9513 2002 Metallic materials ndash Calibration of extensometers for uniaxial testing October 2002

NEN-EN-ISO 15630-1 2002 Steel for the reinforcement and prestressing of concrete - Test methods ndash Part 1 Reinforcing bars wire rod and wire June 2002

NEN-EN-ISO 15630-2 2002 Steel for the reinforcement and prestressing of concrete - Test methods ndash Part 2 Welded fabric

NEN-EN-ISOIEC 17020

2004 General criteria for the operation of various types of bodies performing inspection

NEN-EN-ISOIEC 17024

2003 Conformity assessment - General requirements for bodies operating certification of persons

NEN-EN-ISOIEC 17025

2005 General requirements for the competence of testing and calibration laboratories

ISO 3301 1975 Statistical interpretation of data ndash Comparison of two means in the case of paired observations

ISO 4965 1979 Axial load fatigue testing machines - Dynamic force calibration - Strain gauge technique April 1979

ISO 16269-6 2005 Statistical interpretation of data Determination of statistical tolerance intervals

Annex I Model certificate

Issued Replaces Issued date Valid until Indefinite Page 1 of 2

KOMOreg

Product certificate

ltName Productgt ltCertificate holdergt

STATEMENT OF CI This product certificate was issued on the basis of BRL lsquo lsquo in conformity with the regulations for Product Certification CI declares that the justifiable confidence exists that the name product supplied by the certificate holder meets the technical specifications laid down in this product certificate provided that name product has the KOMOreg mark as indicated in this product certificate Director CI Advice refer to wwwltCIgtnl to see if this certificate is valid

Certificate holder T F E I

Assessed Quality system Product

Periodic check

reg is a collective brand of Stichting Bouwkwaliteit

Annex II Model for IQC schedule or framework of IQC schedule

Subjects Aspects Method Frequency Registration

Basic materials or supplied materials bull Recipe sheets bull Inspection of incoming raw

materials bull Mechanical bull Chemical

Production process production equipment material bull Procedures bull Work instructions bull Equipment bull Material bull Process inspection

End products

Measuring and testing equipment

Measuring and testing equipment bull Measuring devices bull Calibration bull Outsourced tests

Logistics bull Internal transport bull Storage bull Packaging bull Preservation bull Identification or marking

of semi-finished and end products

Corrective measures Complaints handling

Annex III Sampling and testing overview

Type

on

derz

oek

1)

Doo

rlope

nd

inte

rn fa

brie

kson

derz

oek

Perio

diek

ex

tern

ond

erzo

ek (a

udit)

To

elat

ings

onde

rzoe

k

(type

onde

rzoe

k)

Type

bet

onst

aal

stav

enro

llen

per d

iam

eter

ge

punt

last

e w

apn

ette

n pe

r dia

-com

bina

tie

stav

enro

llen

3 bp

e va

n 1

diam

eter

8)

gepu

ntla

ste

wap

net

ten

3 bp

e va

n 1

dia-

com

bina

tie 7)

8)

stav

enro

llen

3 bp

e pe

r di

amet

er 6)

gepu

ntla

ste

wap

net

ten

3 bp

e pe

r dia

-co

mbi

natie

6) 7

) R

e 1

per 3

0 t

m

in 3

per

bpe

m

in 2

per

bpe

1

lang

s + d

war

s 5

per b

pe

5 pe

r bpe

3

lang

s + 2

dw

ars

10 p

er b

pe

10 p

er b

pe

5 la

ngs +

5 d

war

s R

mR

e id

em

idem

id

em

idem

id

em

idem

R

eac

tRe

nom

2)

idem

id

em

idem

id

em

idem

id

em

Agt

idem

id

em

idem

id

em

idem

id

em

Bui

gpro

ef

1 pe

r bpe

4)

idem

2

per b

pe

2 pe

r bpe

1

lang

s + 1

dw

ars

5 pe

r bpe

5

per b

pe

3 la

ngs +

2 d

war

s M

assa

per

m

idem

id

em 5)

id

em

idem

5)

idem

id

em 5)

G

eom

etrie

opp

en

pro

fielfa

ctor

id

em

idem

id

em

idem

id

em

Idem

Che

mis

che

sa

men

st +

Ceq

3)

1 pe

r lad

ing

1

per l

adin

g 1

per l

adin

g 1

per l

adin

g 1

per l

adin

g 1

per l

adin

g

Afs

chui

fpro

ef

nv

t m

in 2

per

bpe

n

vt

3 pe

r bpe

n

vt

3 pe

r bpe

B

uig-

te

rugb

uigt

rekp

roe

f

nv

t n

vt

2 pe

r bpe

n

vt

2 pe

r bpe

n

vt

Afm

etin

gen

nv

t m

in 1

per

bpe

n

vt

1 pe

r bpe

n

vt

1 pe

r bpe

V

erm

oeiin

g n

vt

nv

t 5

per j

aar

5 pe

r jaa

r 6

per b

pe 9)

5

per b

pe 10

)

1) The audit is always for each manufacturing process (hot-rolled-cooled -cold-stretched cold-profiles) of a certain type of reinforcing steel 2) If applicable (B500C) 3) Chemical composition + Ceq to be determined and submitted by the steel manufacturer not for each diameter (combination) 4) For bending mass and geometry surface + frfp min 1 per 150 tons 5) Can be determined for welding 6) Smallest largest and intermediate diameters (always skipping 2 consecutive diameters) of the range (deviating from EN 10080) 7) Always the most critical diameter combination that occurs 8) In a period of a maximum of 5 years number and spreading of diameters 9) For d le 28 mm the largest and middle diameters for gt 28 mm the largest diameter 10) The largest middle and smallest diameters Test unit is defined as -- barscoils the load or a part of the load (for bending mass and geometryprofile min 1 per 90 t) -- point welded reinforcement fabrics 50 tons of the same combination of reinforcing steel types and diameters manufactured with the same point welding machine

Annex IV Model for biannual reporting on reinforcing steel

Page 8: National Assessment Guideline - Kiwa · PDF fileThe NEN-EN 10080:2005 is not a harmonised standard and therefore a CE mark can not yet be attached to the products covered by this BRL

National Assessment Guideline BRL 0501 01 September 2010 copy Kiwa NV - -

7

Bovenspanning = upper force Middenspanning = middle force Onderspanning = lower force Cyclus = cycle Figure 1 stress change

bull Nominal diameter (d) The diameter of an imaginary bar with a circle-shaped cross-section of the same length and volume as the actual bar with profiled surface excluding tolerances bull Variable properties Property to which a quantitative value is assigned when assessing the measurement In NEN 6008 these are the properties 02 yield limit (Rp02) or flow limit (Re) yield at maximum load (Agt) the tensile strengthflow limit ratio (RmRe) the ratio of the actual flow limitnominal flow limit (ReactRenom) and fatigue strength (2σa) In conformity with NEN-EN 10080 section 7333 the upper flow limit (ReH) applies to the flow limit (Re) If there is no flow the 02 yield limit (Rp02) is to be determined

bull Attributive properties Property to which a value is assigned during the assessment that can only be regarded as good or wrong In NEN 6008 these are the properties nominal diameter mass per length profiling (profile factors fR fP rib height rib distance rib width rib flank angle rib (inclination) angle distance of rib rows and longitudinal rib) bending test shearing test and chemical composition bull Bendndashbend back tensile test Supplementary to NEN-EN-10080 and NEN 6008 the bend-bend back tensile test (attributive) is to be performed to determine whether the reinforcing steel types B500B and B500C in the diameter range le 16 mm can be bent back after having been bent 90deg retaining the required mechanical properties also see 4421 bull Characteristic value Value of a property with a certain chance of exceeding or undershooting in a hypothetical infinite test series In this BRL the characteristic value is the value of a property with a chance of exceeding of 5 (p = 095) or 10 (p = 090) with a probability level of W = 90 or W = 75 with a normally assumed spread bull Cv values These are the specified minimum (maximum) characteristic values as defined in NEN 6008 bull a1 a2 a3 a4 value The a-values are value increasesdecreases (the so-called extra values in accordance with NEN 6008) with respect to the specified Cv values see the examples given below Here x is the average value and X is the individual value -- a1 x ge Cv + a1 (eg Re a1 = 10 so average value x ge 510 MPa) -- a2 X ge Cv ndash a2 (eg Re a1 = 15 so individual value x ge 485 MPa) -- a3 x le Cv + a3 (eg RmRe a3 = 0) -- a4 X le Cv + a4 (eg RmRe a4 = 002)

23 Indication of reinforcing steel types The reinforcing steel types are indicated as follows in NEN 60082008 (shortened for a full overview see NEN 6008 table 1)

National Assessment Guideline BRL 0501 01 September 2010 copy Kiwa NV - -

8

Cv values for Quality indication

NEN 60082008

(new)

Quality indication

NEN 60081991 (old)

Rm (MPa) Re (MPa) RmRe Re act Re nom

Agt ()

B 500 A FeB 500 HKN

550

500 500

105a -

- -

30ab 275

B 500 B B 500 C

FeB 500 HWL FeB 500 HK

550 550

500 500 500 500

108 115 c -le135 - -

- lt125 - -

50b 75bc 325 325

See for the footnotes NEN 6008 table 1 Table 1

24 Reinforcing steel on coils The mechanical properties of reinforcing steel obtained from winding reinforcing steel on coils substantially change during this production process in particular the yield at maximum load (Agt) Therefore NEN 6008 prescribes a 05 surplus value for the Agt (Cv) of reinforcing steel on coils The Agt (Cv) is then for B500 A 35 for B500 B 55 and for B500 C 8 respectively NB Reinforcing steel on coils is not covered by BRL 0501 but by BRL 0503

National Assessment Guideline BRL 0501 01 September 2010 copy Kiwa NV - -

9

3 Procedure for obtaining a quality statement

31 Initial audit The initial audit to be performed by the certification institute takes place by means of the performance and product requirements incorporated in this assessment guideline including test methods and will include depending on the nature of the product to be certified bull (Sample) testing to determine whether the products meet the product andor performance

requirements bull Assessment of the production process bull Assessment of the quality system and the IQC schedule bull Testing for the presence and functioning of other required procedures bull Assessment of the supplierrsquos processing regulations

32 Certification Upon completion of the initial audit the results are presented to the decision-maker This party will assess the results and determine whether the certificate can be granted or that additional data andor audits are needed before the certificate can be granted

National Assessment Guideline BRL 0501 01 September 2010 copy Kiwa NV - -

10

4 Product requirements and determination methods

41 General This chapter includes the product requirements that reinforcing steel must comply with as well as the determination methods to make sure that the requirements are complied with These requirements will be part of the technical specification of the product that is included in the product certificate The product certificate states that the reinforcing steel complies with article 4 of BRL 0501 which also implies that the reinforcing steel complies with NEN 6720 article 512 or NEN-EN 1990NEN-EN 1991-12 including the national annexes

42 Product requirements and determination methods The requirements and the determination methods for reinforcing steel have been laid down in

Number Title Date of issue NEN-EN 10080 Steel for the reinforcement of concrete ndash

Weldable reinforcing steel - General May 2005

NEN-EN 10080 1) Dutch translation Staal voor het wapenen van beton ndash Lasbaar betonstaal - Algemeen

June 2005

NEN 6008 Steel for the reinforcement of concrete July 2008 NEN-EN-ISO 15630-1

Steel for the reinforcement of concrete and prestressing of concrete ndash Test methods ndash Part 1 reinforcing bars wire rod and wire

2002-04-15

NEN-EN-ISO 15630-2

Steel for the reinforcement of concrete and prestressing of concrete ndash Test methods ndash Part 2 welded fabric

2002-04-15

1) The English version lsquoNEN-EN 10080 May 2005rsquo is binding Table 2

43 Product requirements supplementary to and contrary to NEN-EN 10080 and NEN 6008 the following applies

431 Lattice girders What has been stated about lattice girders in NEN-EN 10080 and NEN 6008 does not apply to this assessment guideline see for this BRL 0502 lsquoLattice girdersrsquo

432 Non-profiled or slightly profiled reinforcing steel Non-profiled or slightly profiled reinforcing steel is outside the scope of the regime of this BRL it may only be applied to lattice girders

433 Geometry of the profiling determination of fR and fP Determination of the profile factor fR andor fP is done in conformity with NEN-EN-ISO 15630-1 art 113

For determining fR and fP use can be made of the simplified formulas in conformity with NEN-EN-ISO 15630-1 article 1133 a and b Use of the simplified formulas in conformity with NEN-EN-ISO 15630-1 article 1133 c and 1133d is not allowed In order to make use of the simplified formulas in conformity with articles 1133a and 1133b it must be determined in advance during the initial audit whether use of the reinforcing steel produced by the supplier and the proposed simplified formula (Trapezium or Simpson) produces results for fR and fP

National Assessment Guideline BRL 0501 01 September 2010 copy Kiwa NV - -

11

that are greater than or equal to the value that is obtained when using the general formula for determining fR and fP (in conformity with article 1131)

434 Standard deviations Supplementary to the NEN-EN- 10080 and NEN 6008 the following values are valid for the maximum standard deviations of the variable properties

Re (MPa)

Re(act)Re(nom) RmRe Agt ()

B500A bars coils point welded fabric

30 006 002 15

B500B bars coils point welded fabric

30 006 002 bars 20 coils 20 point welded fabric 15

B500C bars coils point welded fabric

30 006 002 bars 25 coils 25 point welded fabric 15

Table 3

435 Geometry longitudinal rib Supplementary to NEN-EN-ISO 15630-1 art 1032 the rib width of the longitudinal rib if present must be measured as well The rib width is analogically measured as the rib height The requirements with respect to the longitudinal rib are mentioned in NEN 6008 table 1

436 Nominal mass per metre Contrary to NEN 6008 table 1 read lsquothe allowable deviation from the nominal mass per meterrsquo for lsquotolerance nominal diameterrsquo

437 Extra value for a2 Contrary to NEN 6008 table 1 lsquoextra valuersquo read a2 = 05 for the Agt of B500A

438 Chemical composition of reinforcing steel Contrary to NEN-EN-10080 (Dutch translation) art 713 table 2 explanation a the following applies Exceeding the maximum value for the carbon content by 003 (mass percentage) is allowed provided that the value of the carbon equivalent is decreased by 002 (mass percentage)rdquo

National Assessment Guideline BRL 0501 01 September 2010 copy Kiwa NV - -

12

439 Nominal diameters preferred range Supplementary to NEN-EN10080 the table below mentions the general and the preferred range of the nominal diameters The nominal diameters between brackets ( ) are not preferred diameters Nominal diameter

mm

Bars Coils and bars

straightened from coils

Point welded fabric

Nominal surface of the cross section

mm2

Nominal mass per

metre

kgm 40 (x) 126 0099 45 (x) 159 0125 50 (x) x 196 0154 55 (x) (x) 238 0187 60 x x x 283 0222 65 (x) (x) 332 0260 70 x x 385 0302 75 (x) (x) 442 0347 80 x x x 503 0395 85 (x) (x) 567 0445 90 x x 636 0499 95 (x) (x) 709 0556 100 x x x 785 0617 110 (x) x 950 0746 120 x x x 113 0888 140 x x x 154 121 160 x x x 201 158 200 x 314 247 250 x 491 385 280 (x) 616 483 320 x 804 631 400 x 1257 986 500 x 1963 154

Table 4

4310 Values for a1 - a4 NEN EN 100802005 section 81312 provides insufficient clarity and interpretation of how to apply these a-values The a-values included in NEN 60082008 are the absolute minimummaximum a-values that with respect to the a2 and a 4 values are for determining the individual absolute minimum and maximum variable mechanical properties as referred to in NEN EN 100802005 section 11 (testing in case of a dispute)

However when assessing the variable test results per test unit during the production inspection in the factory in conformity with NEN EN 100802005 section 813 1 in case of b) the manufacturer himself shall determine the a1234-values of the population concerned and record this in a solid procedure With these determined manufacturer-specific a-values every test unit must be tested in order to meet the required quality level in the long term ( x - ks ge Cv or x + ks le Cv) The a-values of the manufacturer must al least comply with the absolute minimummaximum a-values included in NEN 60082008 but they are usually higherlower (ie more critical)

The solid procedures with the a-values recorded for each population must always be up-to-date and demonstrate to the satisfaction of the CI that with this the required Cv values (for the longer term) are complied with If these solid procedures are (still) missing in conformity with NEN EN 100802005 section 8131 only situation a) applies so in principle all individual values of the test unit must comply with the specified Cv value

National Assessment Guideline BRL 0501 01 September 2010 copy Kiwa NV - -

13

When determining the a-values solid procedures are preferably applied using the standard deviations and the assumption probabilities

4311 Rib row distance Σe Contrary to NEN 6008 table 1 and analogue with NEN-EN 10080 read for lsquodistance rib rowsdistance Σe le 075drsquo The projection of the cross ribs must cover at least 75 of the circumference of the reinforcing steel to be calculated based on the nominal diameter In formula total distance between the rib rows Σe lt 025 πd

44 Determination methods and test criteria Supplementary and contrary to NEN-EN 10080 and NEN 6008 the following applies

441 Preliminary audit for acceptance Supplementary to NEN-EN 10080 the following data are to be provided for each of the diameters given by the certification institute before the start of the initial audit -- test results of 60 pieces from at least 3 casting loads with 20 samples each the individual

test results of 02 yield limit or flow limit ((Rp02 or Re) yield at maximum load (Agt) the tensile strength02 yield or flow limit ratio RmRp02 or Re if applicable the ratio of the actual 02 yield limit or flow limitthe nominal 02 yield limit or flow limit (ReactRenom) Also the statistic processing of these data with average value ( x ) standard deviation (s) and characteristic value (Cv)

-- test results of 5 pieces from the same loads with 5 samples each the individual test results of the bendability shearing force of point welded reinforcement fabrics mass per metre and profiling (profile factors fR fP rib height rib distance rib width rib flank α rib (inclination) angle distance between the rib rows and the longitudinal rib)

-- chemical composition of each casting load -- (casting) load numbers and roller data (min 10 tons per diameter) -- drawing or sketch of the profiling and the factory brand

442 Inspection for the attributive properties NEN-EN 10080 gives insufficient interpretation of the termination methods and test criteria for inspections for the attributive properties bendability shearing force with point welded reinforcement fabrics mass per metre and profiling (profile factors fR fP rib height rib distance rib width rib flank α rib (inclination) angle β distance between the rib rows and the longitudinal rib Contrary to NEN-EN 10080 with these attributive properties the sampling and the conformity assessment is done as follows -- with the continuous internal production inspection not for each test unit but repeatedly

for the 15 last tested bars of a diameter or a diameter-weld combination -- with the initial audit the test series is to be extended to 15 samples if necessary and to 60

samples when there is initial rejection -- with the periodic external inspection (audit) the results of the attributive properties

obtained during the audit are to be added to the internal test results of the manufacturer Testing If a maximum of 2 of the 15 measurements do not comply the sampling can be extended by 45 extra measurements with respect to the attributive property concerned In this case the attributive properties of a total of 60 test bars are available The property concerned then still complies if not more than 2 of the 60 measurements do not comply with the NEN 6008 The profiling is increasingly measured using an optical camera The manual measurement will be valid in case of disputes

4421 Inspection of the bend-bend tensile test with initial audit and during external inspections (audit testing) By means of a bend-bend back tensile test it is determined whether the reinforcing steel types B500B and B500C in the diameter range le 16 mm can be bent back once with an angle of 90deg

National Assessment Guideline BRL 0501 01 September 2010 copy Kiwa NV - -

14

without significant decrease of the Rp02 or Re RmRe and Agt compared with the non-bent bars The values may not be below the mentioned Cv values for the reinforcing steel type and delivery condition concerned Sampling and testing frequency

Delivery condition Diameter Inspection frequency bars and coils B500BB500C

d le 16 mm 6 samples of different barscoils from 3 (casting) loads for each selected diameter Samples are to be taken from the same barsloads as for the regular tensile tests

Performance of the test Take a sample of reinforcing steel of sufficient length for doing 2 tensile tests A normal tensile test is performed with the one part and a bend-bend back tensile test with the other part The minimum length for the bendbend back tensile test is 70 cm The preparation of the tensile test including the way of ageing and the way of bending is done in accordance with the stipulations in NEN-EN 10080 with the exception of the way of bending back and the bending mandrel diameter to be used The bending mandrel diameter is maximum 4d Bend the bar over a bending mandrel of maximum 4d with a maximum angle of 90deg Mark the bending zone (length ca 9d) Place the test piece in a vice or the like Place an appropriate pipe over the part of the test piece to be bent back preferably with an internal pipe diameter that is max 2 mm larger than the diameter of the test piece and bend the test piece straight again Try to make the test piece as straight as possible Here the difference between the one part and the other part of the test piece may be maximally the diameter of the test piece (the bayonet forming) Age the test piece in conformity with the stipulations of NEN-EN 10080 and perform the tensile test The test is considered to be satisfactory when - the results do not show any significant differences with the results of the non-bent test

pieces - the values are above the set Cv values If the values are not satisfactory find the cause and repeat the tests if necessary

443 Inspection for the variable properties Contrary to NEN-EN 10080 the sampling and testing is done in conformity with BRL 0501 annex 3 for the variable properties 02 yield limit or flow limit (Rp02 or Re) yield at maximum load (Agt) the tensile strength02 yield or flow limit ratio RmRp02 or Re if applicable the ratio of the actual 02 yield limit or flow limitthe nominal 02 yield limit or flow limit (ReactRenom) and the fatigue strength NEN-EN 10080 provides insufficient interpretation of the test requirements the determination methods and the test criteria for inspection for the fatigue properties Therefore the requirements given below apply supplementary to NEN-EN 10080

National Assessment Guideline BRL 0501 01 September 2010 copy Kiwa NV - -

15

4431 Inspection for the fatigue strength in initial audit Sampling and testing frequency

Delivery condition

Diameter Inspection frequency

bars and coils for d le 28 mm the middle and largest of the diameter range For d gt 28 mm the largest diameter

6 samples of different barscoils from 3 (casting) loads for each selected diameter (18 bars per diameter)

point welded fabrics

The smallest middle and largest diameter of the diameter range (always with the least favourable diameter combination)

5 samples of different bars with a point weld from 3 test units for each selected diameter (15 bars per diameter)

Test method a semi-statistical This simplified test is regarded as sufficient if the requirements given below are met

With reinforcing steel bars and coils B500B and B500C in the diameter range d le 28 mm with

the requirement aσ2 ge 175 MPa

a2σ = 175 MPa a2σ = 200 MPa Number of samples 10 sup2) Number of samples 8 sup2) Stress changes (106) Break Stress changes (106) Break

lt 15 lt 20 ge 20

none le l ge 9

lt 075 075 lt 10 10 lt 20 ge 20

none le l

le 2 1)

ge 5 1) le 3 breaks if no break occurred up to 1x106 tension changes sup2) total number 10 + 8 = 18

Table 5

With reinforcing steel bars B500B and B500C in the diameter range d gt 28 mm with the

requirement aσ2 ge 145 MPa

a2σ = 145 MPa a2σ = 170 MPa Number of samples 10 sup2) Number of samples 8 sup2) Stress changes (106) Break Stress changes (106) Break

lt 15 lt 20 ge 20

none le l ge 9

lt 075 075 lt 15 15 lt 20 ge 20

none le 2

le 2 1)

ge 4 1) le 4 breaks if no break occurred up to 15 x 106 tension changes sup2) total number 10 + 8 = 18

Table 6

With point welded fabrics B500A B500B and B500C as well as reinforcing steel bars and coils

B500A with the requirement aσ2 ge 100 MPa

a2σ = 100 MPa a2σ = 180 MPa Number of samples 10 sup1) Number of samples 5 sup1) Stress changes (106) Break Stress changes (106) Break

lt 15 lt 20 ge 20

none le l ge 9

lt 025 025 lt 05 ge 05

none le 3 ge 2

sup1) total number 10 + 5 = 15 Table 7

National Assessment Guideline BRL 0501 01 September 2010 copy Kiwa NV - -

16

Test method b fully statistical This test is done with the appropriate statistic methods considering the requirements p = 095 W = 75 set out in NEN 6008

Here the requirement Cv le x ndash ks must be complied with where x = the average value in which max 2 million load changes must be maintained

for the individual value of one test bar s = the estimate of the standard deviation of the population k = variation coefficient according to the table below (in conformity with ISO 16269-6) Cv = the characteristic value for the tension changes 1 106

n k n k n k n k 15 199 20 193 30 187 50 181 16 199 25 190 40 183 100 176 18 195

Table 8

4432 Inspection for the fatigue strength in periodic external inspections (audit testing) The numbers of test bars of one diameter given below are tested on an annual basis The sampling takes place in the presence of the inspector and is part of the audit testing -- barscoils 5 per year -- point welded fabrics 5 per year provided that in a period of 5 years at least 80 of all certified diameters (diameter combinations) has been tested With the 80 mentioned at least the following must have been tested

bull For barscoils the largest diameter in the range d le 28 mm and the largest diameter in the range d gt 28 mm

bull For point welded fabrics the smallest and the largest diameters always with the least favourable diameter combination

The test is considered to be satisfactory if

bull with the barscoils max 1 sample broke at lt 20106 stress changes and the other 4 samples have at least resisted 20106 tension changes

bull with the point welded fabrics max 1 sample broke at between 10106 and 20106 stress changes and the other 4 samples have at least resisted 20106 stress changes

For barscoils and point welded fabrics only a re-inspection can take place if no more than 2 samples broke at fewer than 20 106 stress changes In this case 5 extra samples are to be tested whereby no breaks at lt 20 106 stress changes may occur In this case the test series is satisfactory If this is not complied with further testing is necessary to find the cause and corrective measures are to be taken in order to avoid reoccurrence If necessary a new initial audit for the fatigue strength is to be performed

45 Biannual reporting The test results of all test units of the continuous inspections are to be collected and statistically evaluated for Re Agt RmRe and ReactRenom (if relevant) based on data of the production of the previous six months or the 200 most recent data dependent on which is the largest number These data shall biannually be sent to the certification institute in conformity with the model in annex 4

National Assessment Guideline BRL 0501 01 September 2010 copy Kiwa NV - -

17

46 Identification Contrary to NEN-EN 10080 art 101211 the product numbers (technical classes) are not assigned by a European organisation However the other requirements concerning the identification are observed in conformity with NEN 6008 and NEN-EN 10080

47 Certification mark Each packaging unit must have a label with the following obligatory indications

bull KOMO mark bull product certificate number + delivery condition (bars coils fabrics) bull the reinforcing steel type and the manufacturer number bull name andor logo of the manufacturer bull mentioning BRL0501

A packaging unit can be characterised

bull with reinforcing steel on coils as lsquothe coilrsquo marking min 1 label per coil bull with reinforcing steel bars as lsquothe bundlesrsquo marking min 1 label per bundle bull with point welded fabrics as lsquonumber of fabricsrsquo marking at least 1 label per unit of max

40 reinforcement fabrics or max 2 tons Additionally each point welded fabric in which only externally purchased and delivered reinforcing steel has been used must be marked in an indelible and non-removable way For example when using a ldquoSchlatter Etikettiermachinen Methoderdquo or equivalent the point welded reinforcement fabrics are to be marked with at least 1 label

National Assessment Guideline BRL 0501 01 September 2010 copy Kiwa NV - -

18

5 Requirements to the quality system

51 General This chapter includes the requirements that the quality system of the supplier has to meet

52 Administrator of the quality system A staff member is to be appointed as quality system manager within the organisational structure

53 Internal quality controlquality plan The supplier must have and use a schedule for internal quality control (an IQC schedule) in accordance with the model indicated in annex 2 In this IQC schedule the following must be demonstrably recorded

bull what aspects the manufacturer will inspect bull what methods will be used for these inspections bull the frequency of these inspections bull how to record and file the inspection results bull aspects with respect to the production of point welded reinforcement fabrics

Also the supplier must have a procedure for organising the production process of any post-stretching alignment and the reinforcement fabrics to be point welded and how this is implemented inspected and monitored This IQC schedule must have been derived from the IQC schedule included in the annex and must have been set up such that it gives the CI enough confidence that the requirements set out in this assessment guideline are continuously met

This must function at least 3 months before issuing the certificate

54 Procedures and work instructions The supplier must be able to submit

bull procedures for - handling out of spec products and (semi-)products to be repaired - corrective measures after observed defects - handling complaints about products andor services delivered - monitoring the quality using the extra value a - a4 - the work instructions and inspection forms used including the biannual reporting

(see annex 4)

55 Other requirements to the quality system

551 Reinforcing steel The following are regarded as sufficient proof that the purchased reinforcing steel complies with the product standard mentioned (NEN 6008) and other technical specifications

bull KOMO quality statement issued on the basis of BRL 0501 lsquoReinforcing steelrsquo by a certification andor attestation institute acknowledged by the Dutch Authority for Accreditation for the discipline involved

bull a (quality) statement the equivalence of which with the above-mentioned KOMO quality statement has been demonstrated

The traceability of the purchased reinforcing steel is guaranteed by the rolling mark and the labelling The origin (certificate number) of the reinforcing steel must be recorded at the initial audit

National Assessment Guideline BRL 0501 01 September 2010 copy Kiwa NV - -

19

552 Storage of reinforcing steel Reinforcing steel must be stored free from the ground Store and label reinforcing steel such that the chance of exchange for instance with foreign qualities is eliminated

National Assessment Guideline BRL 0501 01 September 2010 copy Kiwa NV - -

20

6 Requirements for the functioning of a test laboratory for testing reinforcing steel andor point welded reinforcement fabrics

61 The supplier has its own laboratory for testing reinforcing steel for its variable and attributive properties The laboratory equipment as well as the test methods must comply with

bull NEN-EN 10002-22001 Metallic materials tensile testing part 1 method of testing at ambient temperature

bull NEN-EN-ISO 15630-12002 Steel for the reinforcement and prestressing of concrete Test methods ndash Part 1 reinforcing bars wire rod and wire June 2002

bull NEN-EN-ISO 15630-22002 Steel for the reinforcement and prestressing of concrete Test methods ndash Part 2 welded fabric

Measuring equipment that has not been classified for one of the above-mentioned standards can be used as soon as they have been tested assessed and qualified by the CI

62 Outsourcing of testing Tests for the chemical composition and the fatigue strength of reinforcing steel can be outsourced as well De test results can be indicated as being lsquoperformed in a reliable wayrsquo if

bull The tests have been performed by a laboratory that meets the accreditation standard referred to in article 14 of this BRL NEN-EN-ISOIEC 17025 lsquoGeneral requirements for the competence of testing and calibration laboratoriesrsquo This accreditation must concern the performance of tests in conformity with the outsourcing assignment Besides a 31 or a 22 certificate of the results in conformity with NEN-EN 10204 is to be submitted or

bull The supplier receives the test results of the chemical composition from a company that has a product certificate of the lsquotechnical disciplinersquo (H9) mentioned in this BRL with the CI and the relevant measuring equipment in the laboratory concerned is covered by the product certificate audit

If the above requirements are not complied with the certification institute will perform or have performed the audit concerned itself In this case the certification institute will base its test on the accreditation standard NEN-EN-ISOIEC 17025

63 Verification audit An initial audit includes external verification of both the attributive and the variable properties Also an external verification for the performance of the used tensile tests takes place every two years The diameter is to be selected such that the diameters that occur most are tested in a period of 5 years When using a new tensile testing machinemeasuring equipment a verification audit is to be performed as well

National Assessment Guideline BRL 0501 01 September 2010 copy Kiwa NV - -

21

631 Variable properties For the verification of variable properties (the results of the tensile test) at least 15 random samples of one selected diameter must be taken in the presence of the inspector (audit testing) for each selected reinforcing steel type each of a length suitable for two test pieces for testing The selected representative diameters must change at the two-yearly verification With bars and coils the samples must have been spread over at least 3 loads of 1 diameter The samples for point welded reinforcement fabrics and the corresponding bars must come from 1 diameter combination produced on different days For each sample the two collected test pieces must be marked and then the test pieces must be bundled into two series of at least 15 test pieces A third series can be taken as spare series in case of discussions about the achieved results One series must be tested in the presence of the inspector at the manufacturerrsquos The inspector must have the other series tested at an external laboratory The time between the performances of both test series must be short enough to allow for neglecting any natural ageing of the testing material The test (tensile test) includes determination of the 02 yield limit or flow limit (Re) the tensile strength (Rm) the RmRe ratio and the yield with maximum load (Agt) of each individual test piece The thus obtained two series of measurement pairs must then be tested for their differences between both performances of the test Any systematic differences are to be tracked and eliminated

With the statistic comparison of two different performances of tests the differences of paired measurements are to be checked in relation with the hypothesis that the expected value of the average difference is zero (Student test) Rejection of this hypothesis indicates that there is a possibility of systematic differences For each variable property the xfi (i = 1n) of the measurement results of the manufacturer and the xei (i = 1hellip n) of the external institute must be calculated separately

bull Difference vi = xfi ndash xei considering the positive or negative difference and then the average difference

= sum

=

n

iiv

nv

1

1

bull standard deviation of the differences

minus

minus= sum

=

2

1

2

11 vnv

ns

n

iiv

bull value vsvt =

It must be verified for the variable properties the 02 yield limit or flow limit (Reee ) the tensile strength (Rmmm ) and the yield with maximum load (Aggg ttt ) whether or not t exceeds a critical limit to The critical values to depend on the number of tests and have been derived from ISO 3301 1975 with a = 001 (see table 9)

National Assessment Guideline BRL 0501 01 September 2010 copy Kiwa NV - -

22

Table 9 ndash Critical values of to

n to n to n to

10 103 11 096 12 090 13 085 14 080

15 077 16 074 17 071 18 068 19 066

20 064 25 056 30 050 35 047 40 043

If t gt to the hypothesis that there is no difference between the two series of paired measurements is rejected and so the cause of this must be found and eliminated This does not apply when sv and v are both below the reference values Sov and Vo in table 9 because of insufficient relevance

If t le to the hypothesis that there is no difference between the two series of paired measurements is not rejected The test can then be concluded unless Sv ge Sov In this case the standard deviation of the differences is excessive showing that the material concerned is unsuitable for the verification test Further investigation is then required

Table 10 ndash Reference values of Sov and Vo

sov vo 02 yield limit or flow limit 15 15 Tensile strength in MPa 15 20 Yield at maximum load in B500A B500B B500C

11 25 30

11 25 30

632 Attributive properties For the verification of attributive properties (mass per length chemical composition profiling bending test and if necessary a shearing test) the measurements of mass per length and profiling must be done in advance with the two series of at least 15 test pieces meant for the tensile test (see above) For the measurements of the bending test and shearing test (if applicable) the number of test pieces from the above described random samples must be extended with at least 5 test pieces for the bending test and if necessary the shearing test For the verification assessment of the chemical composition the number of test pieces is limited to a series of 3 test pieces from 3 test units Any combinations in the random samples of the above-mentioned verification assessments are allowed The test series at the manufacturerrsquos and the series of external tests (see above) should not produce other differences than those that can unambiguously be explained and eliminated

National Assessment Guideline BRL 0501 01 September 2010 copy Kiwa NV - -

23

7 Summary audit and inspection

Below a summary is provided of the tests to be performed for certification bull Initial audit the audit to determine whether all requirements in the BRL are met bull Inspection audit the audit performed after granting the certificate to determine whether

the certified products continuously meet the requirements set in the BRL Also indicates the frequency of the inspection audits to be performed by the certification institute (CI)

bull Inspection of the quality system inspection for compliance with the IQC schedule and the procedures

Here the frequency with which the certification institute must perform an inspection audit is indicated as well

Audit related to

Supervision by CI after granting the certificate1)

Requirement description Article BRL Initial audit

Inspection2) Frequency Product requirements bull Indication of product 2342 X X continuously bull Variable properties 4243 X X 34 x per year bull Chemical composition 4243 X X 34 x per year bull Bending test 42 X X 34 x per year bull Shearing test 42 X X 4 x per year bull Fatigue strength 4244 X X 1 x per year bull Geometry form 4243 X X 34 x per year bull Mass per unit 4243 X X 34 x per year bull Dimensions of fabricsbars 42 X X 34 x per year bull Bendndashbend back tensile

test 42 X X 3 x per year

Own testing laboratory bull Own laboratory 61 X X 1 x per year bull Outsourcing of tests 62 X X 34 x per year bull Verification audit 63 X X 1 x per 2 years System requirements bull IQC schedule 5 X X 34 x per year bull Quality mark 4647 X X 34 x per year

Table 11

1) In case of significant changes in the production process to be assessed by the CI the product requirements need to be tested again

2) The inspector or the certificate holder in the presence of the inspector will determine all product properties that can be performed within the visiting time (maximum 1 day) If this is not possible the CI and the certificate holder will make arrangements with respect to how the inspection will be performed

Inspection of the quality system The certification institute checks if the manufacturer meets the quality system requirements in chapter 5 of this BRL according to the frequency in article 86 of this BRL

National Assessment Guideline BRL 0501 01 September 2010 copy Kiwa NV - -

24

8 Requirements of de certification institute

81 General The certification institute must meet the requirements set out in EN 45011 Besides for the purpose of this BRL the institute must have been accredited by the Dutch Authority for Accreditation (RvA) or a similar body (an accreditation institute with which the RvA has entered into an agreement of mutual acceptance) The certification institute must have a set of regulations or a similar document defining the general rules to be observed during certification These particularly include bull The general rules for performance of the initial audit to be structured as follows

o The way in which suppliers are informed about the handling of a request o The performance of the audit o The decision based on the audit performed

bull The general rules concerning the performance of inspections and the inspection aspects used here

bull The measures the certification institute must take in case of defects bull The rules for terminating a certificate bull The possibility to make an appeal against decisions or measures of the certification

institute

82 Certification staff Staff involved in certification procedures include bull Auditors charged with performing the initial audit and assessing the reports of the

inspectors bull Inspectors charged with performing the external inspection at the supplierrsquos bull Decision-makers charged with taking decisions based on the initial audits performed

about continuation of certification based on inspections performed and about the necessity to take corrective measures

821 Qualification requirements A distinction is made with respect to 8211 Qualification requirements for the certification executives of a CI meeting the

requirements set out in EN 45011 8212 Supplementary qualification requirements for the certification executives of a CI as

determined by the Board of Experts for the subject of this BRL

National Assessment Guideline BRL 0501 01 September 2010 copy Kiwa NV - -

25

8211 Qualification requirements for the certification executives of a CI meeting the requirements set out in EN 45011

The qualification of the certification executives of a CI must comply with chapter 5 of EN 45011 The manual of the CI must describe how the qualification of the certification executives is performed

EN45011

Auditor

initial product assessment and assessment of the

production location

Inspector

assessment product location field and

projects after granting of certificate

Decision-maker

for granting and extending a certificate

Education General

Higher Vocational thinking and working level

Intermediate vocational working and thinking level

Higher Vocational thinking and working level

Education Specific

Basic training for auditing Basic training for auditing

Basic training for auditing

Experience General

1 year of relevant working experience with min 4 audits including 1 full initial audit done independently under supervision

1 year of relevant working experience with min 4 audits including 1 done independent under supervision

4 years of relevant working experience of which at least 1 year with respect to certification

Experience Specific

knowledge of BRL at detailed level and 4 audits related to the specific BRL or to similar BRLs

knowledge of BRL at detailed level and 4 audits related to the specific BRL or to similar BRLs

Basic knowledge of the specific certification schedule

8212 Supplementary qualification requirements for the certification executives of a CI as determined by the Board of Experts for the subject of this BRL

Certification staff Education Experience Auditor Higher vocational education level in one of the

following disciplines - Constructional engineering - Civil engineering - Mechanical engineering

2 years

Inspector Intermediate vocational education level in one of the following disciplines - ConstructionalCivil engineering - Materials science - Mechanical engineering

2 years

Decision-maker Higher vocational education level in one of the following disciplines - Constructional engineering - Civil engineering - Quality science - Mechanical engineering

4 years Managerial experience

822 Qualification Certification staff must be demonstrably qualified by comparing the education and experience with the requirements set out above If qualification takes place based on deviating criteria this must be laid down in writing The qualification authority is vested with

National Assessment Guideline BRL 0501 01 September 2010 copy Kiwa NV - -

26

bull Decision-makers qualification of auditors and inspectors bull Management of the certification institute qualification of decision-makers

83 Initial audit report The certification institute records the findings of the initial audit in a report The report must meet the following requirements bull Completeness the report makes a statement about all requirements set out in the

assessment guideline bull Traceability the findings the statement are based on must have been recorded in a

traceable way bull Basis for decision the decision-maker for granting a certificate must be able to base his

decision on the findings recorded in the report

84 Decision about granting the certificate The decision concerning the granting of the certificate must be made by a decision-maker who is qualified to do so and who has not been involved in the certificate audit himself The decision must have been recorded in a traceable way

85 Presentation of the quality statement The product certificate must be presented in conformity with the model included in the annex

86 Nature and frequency of external inspections The certification institute must regularly inspect the supplier for compliance with his obligations The Board of Experts will decide upon the frequency of the inspections At the time this assessment guideline took effect the frequency was set to bull 3 inspection visits per year at suppliers of hot-rolled products bull 4 inspection visits per year at suppliers of other products Inspections will in any case pertain to a number of matters including bull The product specifications laid down in the product specification bull The supplierrsquos production process bull The supplierrsquos IQC schedule and the results of the inspections performed by the supplier bull The correct way of marking the certified products bull Compliance with the required procedures The certification institute will lay down the findings of each inspection performed in a report in a traceable way

87 Reporting to the Board of Experts The certification institute must report on the certification activities performed at least once a year The report must include the following subjects bull Mutations in number of certificates (newlapsed) bull Number of inspections performed in relation to the determined frequency bull Inspection results bull Measures imposed in case of defects bull Complaints received from third parties with respect to certified products

88 Interpretation of requirements The Board of Experts may lay down the requirements set in this assessment guideline in a single separate interpretation document The certification institute is obliged to ensure whether an interpretation document has been drawn up and if so must make use of the interpretations laid down in this

89 Specific rules defined by the Board of Experts The Board of Experts has not defined specific rules that are to be followed with certification by the certification institute

National Assessment Guideline BRL 0501 01 September 2010 copy Kiwa NV - -

27

9 List of documents mentioned

91 Standardsnormative documents

NEN 6008 2008 Reinforcing steel NEN 6720 1995 Technical foundations for building constructions - TGB 1990 ndash

Regulations for concrete - TGB 1990 ndash Structural requirements and calculation methods (VBC 1995) September 1995 including amendment sheet A4 December 2007

NEN 6722 2002 Regulations for concrete ndash Execution December 2002 NEN 6723 1995 Regulations for concrete - Bridges ndash (VBB June 1995) Structural requirements

and calculation methods December 1995 including amendment sheet A1 December 2003

NEN-EN 1992 2005 Design of concrete structures NEN-EN 1994 2005 Design of composite steel and concrete structures NEN-EN 10002 2001 Metallic materials tensile testing - Part 1 Method of testing at ambient

temperature August 2001 NEN-EN 10080 2005 Steel for the reinforcement of concrete ndash Weldable reinforcing steel - General NEN-EN 10204 2004 Metallic products - Types of inspection documents October 2004 NEN-EN 45012 1998 General requirements for bodies operating assessment and

certificationregistration of quality systems NEN-EN-ISO 376 2004 Metallic materials - Calibration of force-proving instruments used for the

verification of uniaxial testing machines NEN-EN-ISO 7500-1 2004 Metallic materials - Verification of static uniaxial testing machines ndash

Part 1 Tensilecompression testing machines - Verification and calibration of the force-measuring system August 2004

NEN-EN-ISO 9513 2002 Metallic materials ndash Calibration of extensometers for uniaxial testing October 2002

NEN-EN-ISO 15630-1 2002 Steel for the reinforcement and prestressing of concrete - Test methods ndash Part 1 Reinforcing bars wire rod and wire June 2002

NEN-EN-ISO 15630-2 2002 Steel for the reinforcement and prestressing of concrete - Test methods ndash Part 2 Welded fabric

NEN-EN-ISOIEC 17020

2004 General criteria for the operation of various types of bodies performing inspection

NEN-EN-ISOIEC 17024

2003 Conformity assessment - General requirements for bodies operating certification of persons

NEN-EN-ISOIEC 17025

2005 General requirements for the competence of testing and calibration laboratories

ISO 3301 1975 Statistical interpretation of data ndash Comparison of two means in the case of paired observations

ISO 4965 1979 Axial load fatigue testing machines - Dynamic force calibration - Strain gauge technique April 1979

ISO 16269-6 2005 Statistical interpretation of data Determination of statistical tolerance intervals

Annex I Model certificate

Issued Replaces Issued date Valid until Indefinite Page 1 of 2

KOMOreg

Product certificate

ltName Productgt ltCertificate holdergt

STATEMENT OF CI This product certificate was issued on the basis of BRL lsquo lsquo in conformity with the regulations for Product Certification CI declares that the justifiable confidence exists that the name product supplied by the certificate holder meets the technical specifications laid down in this product certificate provided that name product has the KOMOreg mark as indicated in this product certificate Director CI Advice refer to wwwltCIgtnl to see if this certificate is valid

Certificate holder T F E I

Assessed Quality system Product

Periodic check

reg is a collective brand of Stichting Bouwkwaliteit

Annex II Model for IQC schedule or framework of IQC schedule

Subjects Aspects Method Frequency Registration

Basic materials or supplied materials bull Recipe sheets bull Inspection of incoming raw

materials bull Mechanical bull Chemical

Production process production equipment material bull Procedures bull Work instructions bull Equipment bull Material bull Process inspection

End products

Measuring and testing equipment

Measuring and testing equipment bull Measuring devices bull Calibration bull Outsourced tests

Logistics bull Internal transport bull Storage bull Packaging bull Preservation bull Identification or marking

of semi-finished and end products

Corrective measures Complaints handling

Annex III Sampling and testing overview

Type

on

derz

oek

1)

Doo

rlope

nd

inte

rn fa

brie

kson

derz

oek

Perio

diek

ex

tern

ond

erzo

ek (a

udit)

To

elat

ings

onde

rzoe

k

(type

onde

rzoe

k)

Type

bet

onst

aal

stav

enro

llen

per d

iam

eter

ge

punt

last

e w

apn

ette

n pe

r dia

-com

bina

tie

stav

enro

llen

3 bp

e va

n 1

diam

eter

8)

gepu

ntla

ste

wap

net

ten

3 bp

e va

n 1

dia-

com

bina

tie 7)

8)

stav

enro

llen

3 bp

e pe

r di

amet

er 6)

gepu

ntla

ste

wap

net

ten

3 bp

e pe

r dia

-co

mbi

natie

6) 7

) R

e 1

per 3

0 t

m

in 3

per

bpe

m

in 2

per

bpe

1

lang

s + d

war

s 5

per b

pe

5 pe

r bpe

3

lang

s + 2

dw

ars

10 p

er b

pe

10 p

er b

pe

5 la

ngs +

5 d

war

s R

mR

e id

em

idem

id

em

idem

id

em

idem

R

eac

tRe

nom

2)

idem

id

em

idem

id

em

idem

id

em

Agt

idem

id

em

idem

id

em

idem

id

em

Bui

gpro

ef

1 pe

r bpe

4)

idem

2

per b

pe

2 pe

r bpe

1

lang

s + 1

dw

ars

5 pe

r bpe

5

per b

pe

3 la

ngs +

2 d

war

s M

assa

per

m

idem

id

em 5)

id

em

idem

5)

idem

id

em 5)

G

eom

etrie

opp

en

pro

fielfa

ctor

id

em

idem

id

em

idem

id

em

Idem

Che

mis

che

sa

men

st +

Ceq

3)

1 pe

r lad

ing

1

per l

adin

g 1

per l

adin

g 1

per l

adin

g 1

per l

adin

g 1

per l

adin

g

Afs

chui

fpro

ef

nv

t m

in 2

per

bpe

n

vt

3 pe

r bpe

n

vt

3 pe

r bpe

B

uig-

te

rugb

uigt

rekp

roe

f

nv

t n

vt

2 pe

r bpe

n

vt

2 pe

r bpe

n

vt

Afm

etin

gen

nv

t m

in 1

per

bpe

n

vt

1 pe

r bpe

n

vt

1 pe

r bpe

V

erm

oeiin

g n

vt

nv

t 5

per j

aar

5 pe

r jaa

r 6

per b

pe 9)

5

per b

pe 10

)

1) The audit is always for each manufacturing process (hot-rolled-cooled -cold-stretched cold-profiles) of a certain type of reinforcing steel 2) If applicable (B500C) 3) Chemical composition + Ceq to be determined and submitted by the steel manufacturer not for each diameter (combination) 4) For bending mass and geometry surface + frfp min 1 per 150 tons 5) Can be determined for welding 6) Smallest largest and intermediate diameters (always skipping 2 consecutive diameters) of the range (deviating from EN 10080) 7) Always the most critical diameter combination that occurs 8) In a period of a maximum of 5 years number and spreading of diameters 9) For d le 28 mm the largest and middle diameters for gt 28 mm the largest diameter 10) The largest middle and smallest diameters Test unit is defined as -- barscoils the load or a part of the load (for bending mass and geometryprofile min 1 per 90 t) -- point welded reinforcement fabrics 50 tons of the same combination of reinforcing steel types and diameters manufactured with the same point welding machine

Annex IV Model for biannual reporting on reinforcing steel

Page 9: National Assessment Guideline - Kiwa · PDF fileThe NEN-EN 10080:2005 is not a harmonised standard and therefore a CE mark can not yet be attached to the products covered by this BRL

National Assessment Guideline BRL 0501 01 September 2010 copy Kiwa NV - -

8

Cv values for Quality indication

NEN 60082008

(new)

Quality indication

NEN 60081991 (old)

Rm (MPa) Re (MPa) RmRe Re act Re nom

Agt ()

B 500 A FeB 500 HKN

550

500 500

105a -

- -

30ab 275

B 500 B B 500 C

FeB 500 HWL FeB 500 HK

550 550

500 500 500 500

108 115 c -le135 - -

- lt125 - -

50b 75bc 325 325

See for the footnotes NEN 6008 table 1 Table 1

24 Reinforcing steel on coils The mechanical properties of reinforcing steel obtained from winding reinforcing steel on coils substantially change during this production process in particular the yield at maximum load (Agt) Therefore NEN 6008 prescribes a 05 surplus value for the Agt (Cv) of reinforcing steel on coils The Agt (Cv) is then for B500 A 35 for B500 B 55 and for B500 C 8 respectively NB Reinforcing steel on coils is not covered by BRL 0501 but by BRL 0503

National Assessment Guideline BRL 0501 01 September 2010 copy Kiwa NV - -

9

3 Procedure for obtaining a quality statement

31 Initial audit The initial audit to be performed by the certification institute takes place by means of the performance and product requirements incorporated in this assessment guideline including test methods and will include depending on the nature of the product to be certified bull (Sample) testing to determine whether the products meet the product andor performance

requirements bull Assessment of the production process bull Assessment of the quality system and the IQC schedule bull Testing for the presence and functioning of other required procedures bull Assessment of the supplierrsquos processing regulations

32 Certification Upon completion of the initial audit the results are presented to the decision-maker This party will assess the results and determine whether the certificate can be granted or that additional data andor audits are needed before the certificate can be granted

National Assessment Guideline BRL 0501 01 September 2010 copy Kiwa NV - -

10

4 Product requirements and determination methods

41 General This chapter includes the product requirements that reinforcing steel must comply with as well as the determination methods to make sure that the requirements are complied with These requirements will be part of the technical specification of the product that is included in the product certificate The product certificate states that the reinforcing steel complies with article 4 of BRL 0501 which also implies that the reinforcing steel complies with NEN 6720 article 512 or NEN-EN 1990NEN-EN 1991-12 including the national annexes

42 Product requirements and determination methods The requirements and the determination methods for reinforcing steel have been laid down in

Number Title Date of issue NEN-EN 10080 Steel for the reinforcement of concrete ndash

Weldable reinforcing steel - General May 2005

NEN-EN 10080 1) Dutch translation Staal voor het wapenen van beton ndash Lasbaar betonstaal - Algemeen

June 2005

NEN 6008 Steel for the reinforcement of concrete July 2008 NEN-EN-ISO 15630-1

Steel for the reinforcement of concrete and prestressing of concrete ndash Test methods ndash Part 1 reinforcing bars wire rod and wire

2002-04-15

NEN-EN-ISO 15630-2

Steel for the reinforcement of concrete and prestressing of concrete ndash Test methods ndash Part 2 welded fabric

2002-04-15

1) The English version lsquoNEN-EN 10080 May 2005rsquo is binding Table 2

43 Product requirements supplementary to and contrary to NEN-EN 10080 and NEN 6008 the following applies

431 Lattice girders What has been stated about lattice girders in NEN-EN 10080 and NEN 6008 does not apply to this assessment guideline see for this BRL 0502 lsquoLattice girdersrsquo

432 Non-profiled or slightly profiled reinforcing steel Non-profiled or slightly profiled reinforcing steel is outside the scope of the regime of this BRL it may only be applied to lattice girders

433 Geometry of the profiling determination of fR and fP Determination of the profile factor fR andor fP is done in conformity with NEN-EN-ISO 15630-1 art 113

For determining fR and fP use can be made of the simplified formulas in conformity with NEN-EN-ISO 15630-1 article 1133 a and b Use of the simplified formulas in conformity with NEN-EN-ISO 15630-1 article 1133 c and 1133d is not allowed In order to make use of the simplified formulas in conformity with articles 1133a and 1133b it must be determined in advance during the initial audit whether use of the reinforcing steel produced by the supplier and the proposed simplified formula (Trapezium or Simpson) produces results for fR and fP

National Assessment Guideline BRL 0501 01 September 2010 copy Kiwa NV - -

11

that are greater than or equal to the value that is obtained when using the general formula for determining fR and fP (in conformity with article 1131)

434 Standard deviations Supplementary to the NEN-EN- 10080 and NEN 6008 the following values are valid for the maximum standard deviations of the variable properties

Re (MPa)

Re(act)Re(nom) RmRe Agt ()

B500A bars coils point welded fabric

30 006 002 15

B500B bars coils point welded fabric

30 006 002 bars 20 coils 20 point welded fabric 15

B500C bars coils point welded fabric

30 006 002 bars 25 coils 25 point welded fabric 15

Table 3

435 Geometry longitudinal rib Supplementary to NEN-EN-ISO 15630-1 art 1032 the rib width of the longitudinal rib if present must be measured as well The rib width is analogically measured as the rib height The requirements with respect to the longitudinal rib are mentioned in NEN 6008 table 1

436 Nominal mass per metre Contrary to NEN 6008 table 1 read lsquothe allowable deviation from the nominal mass per meterrsquo for lsquotolerance nominal diameterrsquo

437 Extra value for a2 Contrary to NEN 6008 table 1 lsquoextra valuersquo read a2 = 05 for the Agt of B500A

438 Chemical composition of reinforcing steel Contrary to NEN-EN-10080 (Dutch translation) art 713 table 2 explanation a the following applies Exceeding the maximum value for the carbon content by 003 (mass percentage) is allowed provided that the value of the carbon equivalent is decreased by 002 (mass percentage)rdquo

National Assessment Guideline BRL 0501 01 September 2010 copy Kiwa NV - -

12

439 Nominal diameters preferred range Supplementary to NEN-EN10080 the table below mentions the general and the preferred range of the nominal diameters The nominal diameters between brackets ( ) are not preferred diameters Nominal diameter

mm

Bars Coils and bars

straightened from coils

Point welded fabric

Nominal surface of the cross section

mm2

Nominal mass per

metre

kgm 40 (x) 126 0099 45 (x) 159 0125 50 (x) x 196 0154 55 (x) (x) 238 0187 60 x x x 283 0222 65 (x) (x) 332 0260 70 x x 385 0302 75 (x) (x) 442 0347 80 x x x 503 0395 85 (x) (x) 567 0445 90 x x 636 0499 95 (x) (x) 709 0556 100 x x x 785 0617 110 (x) x 950 0746 120 x x x 113 0888 140 x x x 154 121 160 x x x 201 158 200 x 314 247 250 x 491 385 280 (x) 616 483 320 x 804 631 400 x 1257 986 500 x 1963 154

Table 4

4310 Values for a1 - a4 NEN EN 100802005 section 81312 provides insufficient clarity and interpretation of how to apply these a-values The a-values included in NEN 60082008 are the absolute minimummaximum a-values that with respect to the a2 and a 4 values are for determining the individual absolute minimum and maximum variable mechanical properties as referred to in NEN EN 100802005 section 11 (testing in case of a dispute)

However when assessing the variable test results per test unit during the production inspection in the factory in conformity with NEN EN 100802005 section 813 1 in case of b) the manufacturer himself shall determine the a1234-values of the population concerned and record this in a solid procedure With these determined manufacturer-specific a-values every test unit must be tested in order to meet the required quality level in the long term ( x - ks ge Cv or x + ks le Cv) The a-values of the manufacturer must al least comply with the absolute minimummaximum a-values included in NEN 60082008 but they are usually higherlower (ie more critical)

The solid procedures with the a-values recorded for each population must always be up-to-date and demonstrate to the satisfaction of the CI that with this the required Cv values (for the longer term) are complied with If these solid procedures are (still) missing in conformity with NEN EN 100802005 section 8131 only situation a) applies so in principle all individual values of the test unit must comply with the specified Cv value

National Assessment Guideline BRL 0501 01 September 2010 copy Kiwa NV - -

13

When determining the a-values solid procedures are preferably applied using the standard deviations and the assumption probabilities

4311 Rib row distance Σe Contrary to NEN 6008 table 1 and analogue with NEN-EN 10080 read for lsquodistance rib rowsdistance Σe le 075drsquo The projection of the cross ribs must cover at least 75 of the circumference of the reinforcing steel to be calculated based on the nominal diameter In formula total distance between the rib rows Σe lt 025 πd

44 Determination methods and test criteria Supplementary and contrary to NEN-EN 10080 and NEN 6008 the following applies

441 Preliminary audit for acceptance Supplementary to NEN-EN 10080 the following data are to be provided for each of the diameters given by the certification institute before the start of the initial audit -- test results of 60 pieces from at least 3 casting loads with 20 samples each the individual

test results of 02 yield limit or flow limit ((Rp02 or Re) yield at maximum load (Agt) the tensile strength02 yield or flow limit ratio RmRp02 or Re if applicable the ratio of the actual 02 yield limit or flow limitthe nominal 02 yield limit or flow limit (ReactRenom) Also the statistic processing of these data with average value ( x ) standard deviation (s) and characteristic value (Cv)

-- test results of 5 pieces from the same loads with 5 samples each the individual test results of the bendability shearing force of point welded reinforcement fabrics mass per metre and profiling (profile factors fR fP rib height rib distance rib width rib flank α rib (inclination) angle distance between the rib rows and the longitudinal rib)

-- chemical composition of each casting load -- (casting) load numbers and roller data (min 10 tons per diameter) -- drawing or sketch of the profiling and the factory brand

442 Inspection for the attributive properties NEN-EN 10080 gives insufficient interpretation of the termination methods and test criteria for inspections for the attributive properties bendability shearing force with point welded reinforcement fabrics mass per metre and profiling (profile factors fR fP rib height rib distance rib width rib flank α rib (inclination) angle β distance between the rib rows and the longitudinal rib Contrary to NEN-EN 10080 with these attributive properties the sampling and the conformity assessment is done as follows -- with the continuous internal production inspection not for each test unit but repeatedly

for the 15 last tested bars of a diameter or a diameter-weld combination -- with the initial audit the test series is to be extended to 15 samples if necessary and to 60

samples when there is initial rejection -- with the periodic external inspection (audit) the results of the attributive properties

obtained during the audit are to be added to the internal test results of the manufacturer Testing If a maximum of 2 of the 15 measurements do not comply the sampling can be extended by 45 extra measurements with respect to the attributive property concerned In this case the attributive properties of a total of 60 test bars are available The property concerned then still complies if not more than 2 of the 60 measurements do not comply with the NEN 6008 The profiling is increasingly measured using an optical camera The manual measurement will be valid in case of disputes

4421 Inspection of the bend-bend tensile test with initial audit and during external inspections (audit testing) By means of a bend-bend back tensile test it is determined whether the reinforcing steel types B500B and B500C in the diameter range le 16 mm can be bent back once with an angle of 90deg

National Assessment Guideline BRL 0501 01 September 2010 copy Kiwa NV - -

14

without significant decrease of the Rp02 or Re RmRe and Agt compared with the non-bent bars The values may not be below the mentioned Cv values for the reinforcing steel type and delivery condition concerned Sampling and testing frequency

Delivery condition Diameter Inspection frequency bars and coils B500BB500C

d le 16 mm 6 samples of different barscoils from 3 (casting) loads for each selected diameter Samples are to be taken from the same barsloads as for the regular tensile tests

Performance of the test Take a sample of reinforcing steel of sufficient length for doing 2 tensile tests A normal tensile test is performed with the one part and a bend-bend back tensile test with the other part The minimum length for the bendbend back tensile test is 70 cm The preparation of the tensile test including the way of ageing and the way of bending is done in accordance with the stipulations in NEN-EN 10080 with the exception of the way of bending back and the bending mandrel diameter to be used The bending mandrel diameter is maximum 4d Bend the bar over a bending mandrel of maximum 4d with a maximum angle of 90deg Mark the bending zone (length ca 9d) Place the test piece in a vice or the like Place an appropriate pipe over the part of the test piece to be bent back preferably with an internal pipe diameter that is max 2 mm larger than the diameter of the test piece and bend the test piece straight again Try to make the test piece as straight as possible Here the difference between the one part and the other part of the test piece may be maximally the diameter of the test piece (the bayonet forming) Age the test piece in conformity with the stipulations of NEN-EN 10080 and perform the tensile test The test is considered to be satisfactory when - the results do not show any significant differences with the results of the non-bent test

pieces - the values are above the set Cv values If the values are not satisfactory find the cause and repeat the tests if necessary

443 Inspection for the variable properties Contrary to NEN-EN 10080 the sampling and testing is done in conformity with BRL 0501 annex 3 for the variable properties 02 yield limit or flow limit (Rp02 or Re) yield at maximum load (Agt) the tensile strength02 yield or flow limit ratio RmRp02 or Re if applicable the ratio of the actual 02 yield limit or flow limitthe nominal 02 yield limit or flow limit (ReactRenom) and the fatigue strength NEN-EN 10080 provides insufficient interpretation of the test requirements the determination methods and the test criteria for inspection for the fatigue properties Therefore the requirements given below apply supplementary to NEN-EN 10080

National Assessment Guideline BRL 0501 01 September 2010 copy Kiwa NV - -

15

4431 Inspection for the fatigue strength in initial audit Sampling and testing frequency

Delivery condition

Diameter Inspection frequency

bars and coils for d le 28 mm the middle and largest of the diameter range For d gt 28 mm the largest diameter

6 samples of different barscoils from 3 (casting) loads for each selected diameter (18 bars per diameter)

point welded fabrics

The smallest middle and largest diameter of the diameter range (always with the least favourable diameter combination)

5 samples of different bars with a point weld from 3 test units for each selected diameter (15 bars per diameter)

Test method a semi-statistical This simplified test is regarded as sufficient if the requirements given below are met

With reinforcing steel bars and coils B500B and B500C in the diameter range d le 28 mm with

the requirement aσ2 ge 175 MPa

a2σ = 175 MPa a2σ = 200 MPa Number of samples 10 sup2) Number of samples 8 sup2) Stress changes (106) Break Stress changes (106) Break

lt 15 lt 20 ge 20

none le l ge 9

lt 075 075 lt 10 10 lt 20 ge 20

none le l

le 2 1)

ge 5 1) le 3 breaks if no break occurred up to 1x106 tension changes sup2) total number 10 + 8 = 18

Table 5

With reinforcing steel bars B500B and B500C in the diameter range d gt 28 mm with the

requirement aσ2 ge 145 MPa

a2σ = 145 MPa a2σ = 170 MPa Number of samples 10 sup2) Number of samples 8 sup2) Stress changes (106) Break Stress changes (106) Break

lt 15 lt 20 ge 20

none le l ge 9

lt 075 075 lt 15 15 lt 20 ge 20

none le 2

le 2 1)

ge 4 1) le 4 breaks if no break occurred up to 15 x 106 tension changes sup2) total number 10 + 8 = 18

Table 6

With point welded fabrics B500A B500B and B500C as well as reinforcing steel bars and coils

B500A with the requirement aσ2 ge 100 MPa

a2σ = 100 MPa a2σ = 180 MPa Number of samples 10 sup1) Number of samples 5 sup1) Stress changes (106) Break Stress changes (106) Break

lt 15 lt 20 ge 20

none le l ge 9

lt 025 025 lt 05 ge 05

none le 3 ge 2

sup1) total number 10 + 5 = 15 Table 7

National Assessment Guideline BRL 0501 01 September 2010 copy Kiwa NV - -

16

Test method b fully statistical This test is done with the appropriate statistic methods considering the requirements p = 095 W = 75 set out in NEN 6008

Here the requirement Cv le x ndash ks must be complied with where x = the average value in which max 2 million load changes must be maintained

for the individual value of one test bar s = the estimate of the standard deviation of the population k = variation coefficient according to the table below (in conformity with ISO 16269-6) Cv = the characteristic value for the tension changes 1 106

n k n k n k n k 15 199 20 193 30 187 50 181 16 199 25 190 40 183 100 176 18 195

Table 8

4432 Inspection for the fatigue strength in periodic external inspections (audit testing) The numbers of test bars of one diameter given below are tested on an annual basis The sampling takes place in the presence of the inspector and is part of the audit testing -- barscoils 5 per year -- point welded fabrics 5 per year provided that in a period of 5 years at least 80 of all certified diameters (diameter combinations) has been tested With the 80 mentioned at least the following must have been tested

bull For barscoils the largest diameter in the range d le 28 mm and the largest diameter in the range d gt 28 mm

bull For point welded fabrics the smallest and the largest diameters always with the least favourable diameter combination

The test is considered to be satisfactory if

bull with the barscoils max 1 sample broke at lt 20106 stress changes and the other 4 samples have at least resisted 20106 tension changes

bull with the point welded fabrics max 1 sample broke at between 10106 and 20106 stress changes and the other 4 samples have at least resisted 20106 stress changes

For barscoils and point welded fabrics only a re-inspection can take place if no more than 2 samples broke at fewer than 20 106 stress changes In this case 5 extra samples are to be tested whereby no breaks at lt 20 106 stress changes may occur In this case the test series is satisfactory If this is not complied with further testing is necessary to find the cause and corrective measures are to be taken in order to avoid reoccurrence If necessary a new initial audit for the fatigue strength is to be performed

45 Biannual reporting The test results of all test units of the continuous inspections are to be collected and statistically evaluated for Re Agt RmRe and ReactRenom (if relevant) based on data of the production of the previous six months or the 200 most recent data dependent on which is the largest number These data shall biannually be sent to the certification institute in conformity with the model in annex 4

National Assessment Guideline BRL 0501 01 September 2010 copy Kiwa NV - -

17

46 Identification Contrary to NEN-EN 10080 art 101211 the product numbers (technical classes) are not assigned by a European organisation However the other requirements concerning the identification are observed in conformity with NEN 6008 and NEN-EN 10080

47 Certification mark Each packaging unit must have a label with the following obligatory indications

bull KOMO mark bull product certificate number + delivery condition (bars coils fabrics) bull the reinforcing steel type and the manufacturer number bull name andor logo of the manufacturer bull mentioning BRL0501

A packaging unit can be characterised

bull with reinforcing steel on coils as lsquothe coilrsquo marking min 1 label per coil bull with reinforcing steel bars as lsquothe bundlesrsquo marking min 1 label per bundle bull with point welded fabrics as lsquonumber of fabricsrsquo marking at least 1 label per unit of max

40 reinforcement fabrics or max 2 tons Additionally each point welded fabric in which only externally purchased and delivered reinforcing steel has been used must be marked in an indelible and non-removable way For example when using a ldquoSchlatter Etikettiermachinen Methoderdquo or equivalent the point welded reinforcement fabrics are to be marked with at least 1 label

National Assessment Guideline BRL 0501 01 September 2010 copy Kiwa NV - -

18

5 Requirements to the quality system

51 General This chapter includes the requirements that the quality system of the supplier has to meet

52 Administrator of the quality system A staff member is to be appointed as quality system manager within the organisational structure

53 Internal quality controlquality plan The supplier must have and use a schedule for internal quality control (an IQC schedule) in accordance with the model indicated in annex 2 In this IQC schedule the following must be demonstrably recorded

bull what aspects the manufacturer will inspect bull what methods will be used for these inspections bull the frequency of these inspections bull how to record and file the inspection results bull aspects with respect to the production of point welded reinforcement fabrics

Also the supplier must have a procedure for organising the production process of any post-stretching alignment and the reinforcement fabrics to be point welded and how this is implemented inspected and monitored This IQC schedule must have been derived from the IQC schedule included in the annex and must have been set up such that it gives the CI enough confidence that the requirements set out in this assessment guideline are continuously met

This must function at least 3 months before issuing the certificate

54 Procedures and work instructions The supplier must be able to submit

bull procedures for - handling out of spec products and (semi-)products to be repaired - corrective measures after observed defects - handling complaints about products andor services delivered - monitoring the quality using the extra value a - a4 - the work instructions and inspection forms used including the biannual reporting

(see annex 4)

55 Other requirements to the quality system

551 Reinforcing steel The following are regarded as sufficient proof that the purchased reinforcing steel complies with the product standard mentioned (NEN 6008) and other technical specifications

bull KOMO quality statement issued on the basis of BRL 0501 lsquoReinforcing steelrsquo by a certification andor attestation institute acknowledged by the Dutch Authority for Accreditation for the discipline involved

bull a (quality) statement the equivalence of which with the above-mentioned KOMO quality statement has been demonstrated

The traceability of the purchased reinforcing steel is guaranteed by the rolling mark and the labelling The origin (certificate number) of the reinforcing steel must be recorded at the initial audit

National Assessment Guideline BRL 0501 01 September 2010 copy Kiwa NV - -

19

552 Storage of reinforcing steel Reinforcing steel must be stored free from the ground Store and label reinforcing steel such that the chance of exchange for instance with foreign qualities is eliminated

National Assessment Guideline BRL 0501 01 September 2010 copy Kiwa NV - -

20

6 Requirements for the functioning of a test laboratory for testing reinforcing steel andor point welded reinforcement fabrics

61 The supplier has its own laboratory for testing reinforcing steel for its variable and attributive properties The laboratory equipment as well as the test methods must comply with

bull NEN-EN 10002-22001 Metallic materials tensile testing part 1 method of testing at ambient temperature

bull NEN-EN-ISO 15630-12002 Steel for the reinforcement and prestressing of concrete Test methods ndash Part 1 reinforcing bars wire rod and wire June 2002

bull NEN-EN-ISO 15630-22002 Steel for the reinforcement and prestressing of concrete Test methods ndash Part 2 welded fabric

Measuring equipment that has not been classified for one of the above-mentioned standards can be used as soon as they have been tested assessed and qualified by the CI

62 Outsourcing of testing Tests for the chemical composition and the fatigue strength of reinforcing steel can be outsourced as well De test results can be indicated as being lsquoperformed in a reliable wayrsquo if

bull The tests have been performed by a laboratory that meets the accreditation standard referred to in article 14 of this BRL NEN-EN-ISOIEC 17025 lsquoGeneral requirements for the competence of testing and calibration laboratoriesrsquo This accreditation must concern the performance of tests in conformity with the outsourcing assignment Besides a 31 or a 22 certificate of the results in conformity with NEN-EN 10204 is to be submitted or

bull The supplier receives the test results of the chemical composition from a company that has a product certificate of the lsquotechnical disciplinersquo (H9) mentioned in this BRL with the CI and the relevant measuring equipment in the laboratory concerned is covered by the product certificate audit

If the above requirements are not complied with the certification institute will perform or have performed the audit concerned itself In this case the certification institute will base its test on the accreditation standard NEN-EN-ISOIEC 17025

63 Verification audit An initial audit includes external verification of both the attributive and the variable properties Also an external verification for the performance of the used tensile tests takes place every two years The diameter is to be selected such that the diameters that occur most are tested in a period of 5 years When using a new tensile testing machinemeasuring equipment a verification audit is to be performed as well

National Assessment Guideline BRL 0501 01 September 2010 copy Kiwa NV - -

21

631 Variable properties For the verification of variable properties (the results of the tensile test) at least 15 random samples of one selected diameter must be taken in the presence of the inspector (audit testing) for each selected reinforcing steel type each of a length suitable for two test pieces for testing The selected representative diameters must change at the two-yearly verification With bars and coils the samples must have been spread over at least 3 loads of 1 diameter The samples for point welded reinforcement fabrics and the corresponding bars must come from 1 diameter combination produced on different days For each sample the two collected test pieces must be marked and then the test pieces must be bundled into two series of at least 15 test pieces A third series can be taken as spare series in case of discussions about the achieved results One series must be tested in the presence of the inspector at the manufacturerrsquos The inspector must have the other series tested at an external laboratory The time between the performances of both test series must be short enough to allow for neglecting any natural ageing of the testing material The test (tensile test) includes determination of the 02 yield limit or flow limit (Re) the tensile strength (Rm) the RmRe ratio and the yield with maximum load (Agt) of each individual test piece The thus obtained two series of measurement pairs must then be tested for their differences between both performances of the test Any systematic differences are to be tracked and eliminated

With the statistic comparison of two different performances of tests the differences of paired measurements are to be checked in relation with the hypothesis that the expected value of the average difference is zero (Student test) Rejection of this hypothesis indicates that there is a possibility of systematic differences For each variable property the xfi (i = 1n) of the measurement results of the manufacturer and the xei (i = 1hellip n) of the external institute must be calculated separately

bull Difference vi = xfi ndash xei considering the positive or negative difference and then the average difference

= sum

=

n

iiv

nv

1

1

bull standard deviation of the differences

minus

minus= sum

=

2

1

2

11 vnv

ns

n

iiv

bull value vsvt =

It must be verified for the variable properties the 02 yield limit or flow limit (Reee ) the tensile strength (Rmmm ) and the yield with maximum load (Aggg ttt ) whether or not t exceeds a critical limit to The critical values to depend on the number of tests and have been derived from ISO 3301 1975 with a = 001 (see table 9)

National Assessment Guideline BRL 0501 01 September 2010 copy Kiwa NV - -

22

Table 9 ndash Critical values of to

n to n to n to

10 103 11 096 12 090 13 085 14 080

15 077 16 074 17 071 18 068 19 066

20 064 25 056 30 050 35 047 40 043

If t gt to the hypothesis that there is no difference between the two series of paired measurements is rejected and so the cause of this must be found and eliminated This does not apply when sv and v are both below the reference values Sov and Vo in table 9 because of insufficient relevance

If t le to the hypothesis that there is no difference between the two series of paired measurements is not rejected The test can then be concluded unless Sv ge Sov In this case the standard deviation of the differences is excessive showing that the material concerned is unsuitable for the verification test Further investigation is then required

Table 10 ndash Reference values of Sov and Vo

sov vo 02 yield limit or flow limit 15 15 Tensile strength in MPa 15 20 Yield at maximum load in B500A B500B B500C

11 25 30

11 25 30

632 Attributive properties For the verification of attributive properties (mass per length chemical composition profiling bending test and if necessary a shearing test) the measurements of mass per length and profiling must be done in advance with the two series of at least 15 test pieces meant for the tensile test (see above) For the measurements of the bending test and shearing test (if applicable) the number of test pieces from the above described random samples must be extended with at least 5 test pieces for the bending test and if necessary the shearing test For the verification assessment of the chemical composition the number of test pieces is limited to a series of 3 test pieces from 3 test units Any combinations in the random samples of the above-mentioned verification assessments are allowed The test series at the manufacturerrsquos and the series of external tests (see above) should not produce other differences than those that can unambiguously be explained and eliminated

National Assessment Guideline BRL 0501 01 September 2010 copy Kiwa NV - -

23

7 Summary audit and inspection

Below a summary is provided of the tests to be performed for certification bull Initial audit the audit to determine whether all requirements in the BRL are met bull Inspection audit the audit performed after granting the certificate to determine whether

the certified products continuously meet the requirements set in the BRL Also indicates the frequency of the inspection audits to be performed by the certification institute (CI)

bull Inspection of the quality system inspection for compliance with the IQC schedule and the procedures

Here the frequency with which the certification institute must perform an inspection audit is indicated as well

Audit related to

Supervision by CI after granting the certificate1)

Requirement description Article BRL Initial audit

Inspection2) Frequency Product requirements bull Indication of product 2342 X X continuously bull Variable properties 4243 X X 34 x per year bull Chemical composition 4243 X X 34 x per year bull Bending test 42 X X 34 x per year bull Shearing test 42 X X 4 x per year bull Fatigue strength 4244 X X 1 x per year bull Geometry form 4243 X X 34 x per year bull Mass per unit 4243 X X 34 x per year bull Dimensions of fabricsbars 42 X X 34 x per year bull Bendndashbend back tensile

test 42 X X 3 x per year

Own testing laboratory bull Own laboratory 61 X X 1 x per year bull Outsourcing of tests 62 X X 34 x per year bull Verification audit 63 X X 1 x per 2 years System requirements bull IQC schedule 5 X X 34 x per year bull Quality mark 4647 X X 34 x per year

Table 11

1) In case of significant changes in the production process to be assessed by the CI the product requirements need to be tested again

2) The inspector or the certificate holder in the presence of the inspector will determine all product properties that can be performed within the visiting time (maximum 1 day) If this is not possible the CI and the certificate holder will make arrangements with respect to how the inspection will be performed

Inspection of the quality system The certification institute checks if the manufacturer meets the quality system requirements in chapter 5 of this BRL according to the frequency in article 86 of this BRL

National Assessment Guideline BRL 0501 01 September 2010 copy Kiwa NV - -

24

8 Requirements of de certification institute

81 General The certification institute must meet the requirements set out in EN 45011 Besides for the purpose of this BRL the institute must have been accredited by the Dutch Authority for Accreditation (RvA) or a similar body (an accreditation institute with which the RvA has entered into an agreement of mutual acceptance) The certification institute must have a set of regulations or a similar document defining the general rules to be observed during certification These particularly include bull The general rules for performance of the initial audit to be structured as follows

o The way in which suppliers are informed about the handling of a request o The performance of the audit o The decision based on the audit performed

bull The general rules concerning the performance of inspections and the inspection aspects used here

bull The measures the certification institute must take in case of defects bull The rules for terminating a certificate bull The possibility to make an appeal against decisions or measures of the certification

institute

82 Certification staff Staff involved in certification procedures include bull Auditors charged with performing the initial audit and assessing the reports of the

inspectors bull Inspectors charged with performing the external inspection at the supplierrsquos bull Decision-makers charged with taking decisions based on the initial audits performed

about continuation of certification based on inspections performed and about the necessity to take corrective measures

821 Qualification requirements A distinction is made with respect to 8211 Qualification requirements for the certification executives of a CI meeting the

requirements set out in EN 45011 8212 Supplementary qualification requirements for the certification executives of a CI as

determined by the Board of Experts for the subject of this BRL

National Assessment Guideline BRL 0501 01 September 2010 copy Kiwa NV - -

25

8211 Qualification requirements for the certification executives of a CI meeting the requirements set out in EN 45011

The qualification of the certification executives of a CI must comply with chapter 5 of EN 45011 The manual of the CI must describe how the qualification of the certification executives is performed

EN45011

Auditor

initial product assessment and assessment of the

production location

Inspector

assessment product location field and

projects after granting of certificate

Decision-maker

for granting and extending a certificate

Education General

Higher Vocational thinking and working level

Intermediate vocational working and thinking level

Higher Vocational thinking and working level

Education Specific

Basic training for auditing Basic training for auditing

Basic training for auditing

Experience General

1 year of relevant working experience with min 4 audits including 1 full initial audit done independently under supervision

1 year of relevant working experience with min 4 audits including 1 done independent under supervision

4 years of relevant working experience of which at least 1 year with respect to certification

Experience Specific

knowledge of BRL at detailed level and 4 audits related to the specific BRL or to similar BRLs

knowledge of BRL at detailed level and 4 audits related to the specific BRL or to similar BRLs

Basic knowledge of the specific certification schedule

8212 Supplementary qualification requirements for the certification executives of a CI as determined by the Board of Experts for the subject of this BRL

Certification staff Education Experience Auditor Higher vocational education level in one of the

following disciplines - Constructional engineering - Civil engineering - Mechanical engineering

2 years

Inspector Intermediate vocational education level in one of the following disciplines - ConstructionalCivil engineering - Materials science - Mechanical engineering

2 years

Decision-maker Higher vocational education level in one of the following disciplines - Constructional engineering - Civil engineering - Quality science - Mechanical engineering

4 years Managerial experience

822 Qualification Certification staff must be demonstrably qualified by comparing the education and experience with the requirements set out above If qualification takes place based on deviating criteria this must be laid down in writing The qualification authority is vested with

National Assessment Guideline BRL 0501 01 September 2010 copy Kiwa NV - -

26

bull Decision-makers qualification of auditors and inspectors bull Management of the certification institute qualification of decision-makers

83 Initial audit report The certification institute records the findings of the initial audit in a report The report must meet the following requirements bull Completeness the report makes a statement about all requirements set out in the

assessment guideline bull Traceability the findings the statement are based on must have been recorded in a

traceable way bull Basis for decision the decision-maker for granting a certificate must be able to base his

decision on the findings recorded in the report

84 Decision about granting the certificate The decision concerning the granting of the certificate must be made by a decision-maker who is qualified to do so and who has not been involved in the certificate audit himself The decision must have been recorded in a traceable way

85 Presentation of the quality statement The product certificate must be presented in conformity with the model included in the annex

86 Nature and frequency of external inspections The certification institute must regularly inspect the supplier for compliance with his obligations The Board of Experts will decide upon the frequency of the inspections At the time this assessment guideline took effect the frequency was set to bull 3 inspection visits per year at suppliers of hot-rolled products bull 4 inspection visits per year at suppliers of other products Inspections will in any case pertain to a number of matters including bull The product specifications laid down in the product specification bull The supplierrsquos production process bull The supplierrsquos IQC schedule and the results of the inspections performed by the supplier bull The correct way of marking the certified products bull Compliance with the required procedures The certification institute will lay down the findings of each inspection performed in a report in a traceable way

87 Reporting to the Board of Experts The certification institute must report on the certification activities performed at least once a year The report must include the following subjects bull Mutations in number of certificates (newlapsed) bull Number of inspections performed in relation to the determined frequency bull Inspection results bull Measures imposed in case of defects bull Complaints received from third parties with respect to certified products

88 Interpretation of requirements The Board of Experts may lay down the requirements set in this assessment guideline in a single separate interpretation document The certification institute is obliged to ensure whether an interpretation document has been drawn up and if so must make use of the interpretations laid down in this

89 Specific rules defined by the Board of Experts The Board of Experts has not defined specific rules that are to be followed with certification by the certification institute

National Assessment Guideline BRL 0501 01 September 2010 copy Kiwa NV - -

27

9 List of documents mentioned

91 Standardsnormative documents

NEN 6008 2008 Reinforcing steel NEN 6720 1995 Technical foundations for building constructions - TGB 1990 ndash

Regulations for concrete - TGB 1990 ndash Structural requirements and calculation methods (VBC 1995) September 1995 including amendment sheet A4 December 2007

NEN 6722 2002 Regulations for concrete ndash Execution December 2002 NEN 6723 1995 Regulations for concrete - Bridges ndash (VBB June 1995) Structural requirements

and calculation methods December 1995 including amendment sheet A1 December 2003

NEN-EN 1992 2005 Design of concrete structures NEN-EN 1994 2005 Design of composite steel and concrete structures NEN-EN 10002 2001 Metallic materials tensile testing - Part 1 Method of testing at ambient

temperature August 2001 NEN-EN 10080 2005 Steel for the reinforcement of concrete ndash Weldable reinforcing steel - General NEN-EN 10204 2004 Metallic products - Types of inspection documents October 2004 NEN-EN 45012 1998 General requirements for bodies operating assessment and

certificationregistration of quality systems NEN-EN-ISO 376 2004 Metallic materials - Calibration of force-proving instruments used for the

verification of uniaxial testing machines NEN-EN-ISO 7500-1 2004 Metallic materials - Verification of static uniaxial testing machines ndash

Part 1 Tensilecompression testing machines - Verification and calibration of the force-measuring system August 2004

NEN-EN-ISO 9513 2002 Metallic materials ndash Calibration of extensometers for uniaxial testing October 2002

NEN-EN-ISO 15630-1 2002 Steel for the reinforcement and prestressing of concrete - Test methods ndash Part 1 Reinforcing bars wire rod and wire June 2002

NEN-EN-ISO 15630-2 2002 Steel for the reinforcement and prestressing of concrete - Test methods ndash Part 2 Welded fabric

NEN-EN-ISOIEC 17020

2004 General criteria for the operation of various types of bodies performing inspection

NEN-EN-ISOIEC 17024

2003 Conformity assessment - General requirements for bodies operating certification of persons

NEN-EN-ISOIEC 17025

2005 General requirements for the competence of testing and calibration laboratories

ISO 3301 1975 Statistical interpretation of data ndash Comparison of two means in the case of paired observations

ISO 4965 1979 Axial load fatigue testing machines - Dynamic force calibration - Strain gauge technique April 1979

ISO 16269-6 2005 Statistical interpretation of data Determination of statistical tolerance intervals

Annex I Model certificate

Issued Replaces Issued date Valid until Indefinite Page 1 of 2

KOMOreg

Product certificate

ltName Productgt ltCertificate holdergt

STATEMENT OF CI This product certificate was issued on the basis of BRL lsquo lsquo in conformity with the regulations for Product Certification CI declares that the justifiable confidence exists that the name product supplied by the certificate holder meets the technical specifications laid down in this product certificate provided that name product has the KOMOreg mark as indicated in this product certificate Director CI Advice refer to wwwltCIgtnl to see if this certificate is valid

Certificate holder T F E I

Assessed Quality system Product

Periodic check

reg is a collective brand of Stichting Bouwkwaliteit

Annex II Model for IQC schedule or framework of IQC schedule

Subjects Aspects Method Frequency Registration

Basic materials or supplied materials bull Recipe sheets bull Inspection of incoming raw

materials bull Mechanical bull Chemical

Production process production equipment material bull Procedures bull Work instructions bull Equipment bull Material bull Process inspection

End products

Measuring and testing equipment

Measuring and testing equipment bull Measuring devices bull Calibration bull Outsourced tests

Logistics bull Internal transport bull Storage bull Packaging bull Preservation bull Identification or marking

of semi-finished and end products

Corrective measures Complaints handling

Annex III Sampling and testing overview

Type

on

derz

oek

1)

Doo

rlope

nd

inte

rn fa

brie

kson

derz

oek

Perio

diek

ex

tern

ond

erzo

ek (a

udit)

To

elat

ings

onde

rzoe

k

(type

onde

rzoe

k)

Type

bet

onst

aal

stav

enro

llen

per d

iam

eter

ge

punt

last

e w

apn

ette

n pe

r dia

-com

bina

tie

stav

enro

llen

3 bp

e va

n 1

diam

eter

8)

gepu

ntla

ste

wap

net

ten

3 bp

e va

n 1

dia-

com

bina

tie 7)

8)

stav

enro

llen

3 bp

e pe

r di

amet

er 6)

gepu

ntla

ste

wap

net

ten

3 bp

e pe

r dia

-co

mbi

natie

6) 7

) R

e 1

per 3

0 t

m

in 3

per

bpe

m

in 2

per

bpe

1

lang

s + d

war

s 5

per b

pe

5 pe

r bpe

3

lang

s + 2

dw

ars

10 p

er b

pe

10 p

er b

pe

5 la

ngs +

5 d

war

s R

mR

e id

em

idem

id

em

idem

id

em

idem

R

eac

tRe

nom

2)

idem

id

em

idem

id

em

idem

id

em

Agt

idem

id

em

idem

id

em

idem

id

em

Bui

gpro

ef

1 pe

r bpe

4)

idem

2

per b

pe

2 pe

r bpe

1

lang

s + 1

dw

ars

5 pe

r bpe

5

per b

pe

3 la

ngs +

2 d

war

s M

assa

per

m

idem

id

em 5)

id

em

idem

5)

idem

id

em 5)

G

eom

etrie

opp

en

pro

fielfa

ctor

id

em

idem

id

em

idem

id

em

Idem

Che

mis

che

sa

men

st +

Ceq

3)

1 pe

r lad

ing

1

per l

adin

g 1

per l

adin

g 1

per l

adin

g 1

per l

adin

g 1

per l

adin

g

Afs

chui

fpro

ef

nv

t m

in 2

per

bpe

n

vt

3 pe

r bpe

n

vt

3 pe

r bpe

B

uig-

te

rugb

uigt

rekp

roe

f

nv

t n

vt

2 pe

r bpe

n

vt

2 pe

r bpe

n

vt

Afm

etin

gen

nv

t m

in 1

per

bpe

n

vt

1 pe

r bpe

n

vt

1 pe

r bpe

V

erm

oeiin

g n

vt

nv

t 5

per j

aar

5 pe

r jaa

r 6

per b

pe 9)

5

per b

pe 10

)

1) The audit is always for each manufacturing process (hot-rolled-cooled -cold-stretched cold-profiles) of a certain type of reinforcing steel 2) If applicable (B500C) 3) Chemical composition + Ceq to be determined and submitted by the steel manufacturer not for each diameter (combination) 4) For bending mass and geometry surface + frfp min 1 per 150 tons 5) Can be determined for welding 6) Smallest largest and intermediate diameters (always skipping 2 consecutive diameters) of the range (deviating from EN 10080) 7) Always the most critical diameter combination that occurs 8) In a period of a maximum of 5 years number and spreading of diameters 9) For d le 28 mm the largest and middle diameters for gt 28 mm the largest diameter 10) The largest middle and smallest diameters Test unit is defined as -- barscoils the load or a part of the load (for bending mass and geometryprofile min 1 per 90 t) -- point welded reinforcement fabrics 50 tons of the same combination of reinforcing steel types and diameters manufactured with the same point welding machine

Annex IV Model for biannual reporting on reinforcing steel

Page 10: National Assessment Guideline - Kiwa · PDF fileThe NEN-EN 10080:2005 is not a harmonised standard and therefore a CE mark can not yet be attached to the products covered by this BRL

National Assessment Guideline BRL 0501 01 September 2010 copy Kiwa NV - -

9

3 Procedure for obtaining a quality statement

31 Initial audit The initial audit to be performed by the certification institute takes place by means of the performance and product requirements incorporated in this assessment guideline including test methods and will include depending on the nature of the product to be certified bull (Sample) testing to determine whether the products meet the product andor performance

requirements bull Assessment of the production process bull Assessment of the quality system and the IQC schedule bull Testing for the presence and functioning of other required procedures bull Assessment of the supplierrsquos processing regulations

32 Certification Upon completion of the initial audit the results are presented to the decision-maker This party will assess the results and determine whether the certificate can be granted or that additional data andor audits are needed before the certificate can be granted

National Assessment Guideline BRL 0501 01 September 2010 copy Kiwa NV - -

10

4 Product requirements and determination methods

41 General This chapter includes the product requirements that reinforcing steel must comply with as well as the determination methods to make sure that the requirements are complied with These requirements will be part of the technical specification of the product that is included in the product certificate The product certificate states that the reinforcing steel complies with article 4 of BRL 0501 which also implies that the reinforcing steel complies with NEN 6720 article 512 or NEN-EN 1990NEN-EN 1991-12 including the national annexes

42 Product requirements and determination methods The requirements and the determination methods for reinforcing steel have been laid down in

Number Title Date of issue NEN-EN 10080 Steel for the reinforcement of concrete ndash

Weldable reinforcing steel - General May 2005

NEN-EN 10080 1) Dutch translation Staal voor het wapenen van beton ndash Lasbaar betonstaal - Algemeen

June 2005

NEN 6008 Steel for the reinforcement of concrete July 2008 NEN-EN-ISO 15630-1

Steel for the reinforcement of concrete and prestressing of concrete ndash Test methods ndash Part 1 reinforcing bars wire rod and wire

2002-04-15

NEN-EN-ISO 15630-2

Steel for the reinforcement of concrete and prestressing of concrete ndash Test methods ndash Part 2 welded fabric

2002-04-15

1) The English version lsquoNEN-EN 10080 May 2005rsquo is binding Table 2

43 Product requirements supplementary to and contrary to NEN-EN 10080 and NEN 6008 the following applies

431 Lattice girders What has been stated about lattice girders in NEN-EN 10080 and NEN 6008 does not apply to this assessment guideline see for this BRL 0502 lsquoLattice girdersrsquo

432 Non-profiled or slightly profiled reinforcing steel Non-profiled or slightly profiled reinforcing steel is outside the scope of the regime of this BRL it may only be applied to lattice girders

433 Geometry of the profiling determination of fR and fP Determination of the profile factor fR andor fP is done in conformity with NEN-EN-ISO 15630-1 art 113

For determining fR and fP use can be made of the simplified formulas in conformity with NEN-EN-ISO 15630-1 article 1133 a and b Use of the simplified formulas in conformity with NEN-EN-ISO 15630-1 article 1133 c and 1133d is not allowed In order to make use of the simplified formulas in conformity with articles 1133a and 1133b it must be determined in advance during the initial audit whether use of the reinforcing steel produced by the supplier and the proposed simplified formula (Trapezium or Simpson) produces results for fR and fP

National Assessment Guideline BRL 0501 01 September 2010 copy Kiwa NV - -

11

that are greater than or equal to the value that is obtained when using the general formula for determining fR and fP (in conformity with article 1131)

434 Standard deviations Supplementary to the NEN-EN- 10080 and NEN 6008 the following values are valid for the maximum standard deviations of the variable properties

Re (MPa)

Re(act)Re(nom) RmRe Agt ()

B500A bars coils point welded fabric

30 006 002 15

B500B bars coils point welded fabric

30 006 002 bars 20 coils 20 point welded fabric 15

B500C bars coils point welded fabric

30 006 002 bars 25 coils 25 point welded fabric 15

Table 3

435 Geometry longitudinal rib Supplementary to NEN-EN-ISO 15630-1 art 1032 the rib width of the longitudinal rib if present must be measured as well The rib width is analogically measured as the rib height The requirements with respect to the longitudinal rib are mentioned in NEN 6008 table 1

436 Nominal mass per metre Contrary to NEN 6008 table 1 read lsquothe allowable deviation from the nominal mass per meterrsquo for lsquotolerance nominal diameterrsquo

437 Extra value for a2 Contrary to NEN 6008 table 1 lsquoextra valuersquo read a2 = 05 for the Agt of B500A

438 Chemical composition of reinforcing steel Contrary to NEN-EN-10080 (Dutch translation) art 713 table 2 explanation a the following applies Exceeding the maximum value for the carbon content by 003 (mass percentage) is allowed provided that the value of the carbon equivalent is decreased by 002 (mass percentage)rdquo

National Assessment Guideline BRL 0501 01 September 2010 copy Kiwa NV - -

12

439 Nominal diameters preferred range Supplementary to NEN-EN10080 the table below mentions the general and the preferred range of the nominal diameters The nominal diameters between brackets ( ) are not preferred diameters Nominal diameter

mm

Bars Coils and bars

straightened from coils

Point welded fabric

Nominal surface of the cross section

mm2

Nominal mass per

metre

kgm 40 (x) 126 0099 45 (x) 159 0125 50 (x) x 196 0154 55 (x) (x) 238 0187 60 x x x 283 0222 65 (x) (x) 332 0260 70 x x 385 0302 75 (x) (x) 442 0347 80 x x x 503 0395 85 (x) (x) 567 0445 90 x x 636 0499 95 (x) (x) 709 0556 100 x x x 785 0617 110 (x) x 950 0746 120 x x x 113 0888 140 x x x 154 121 160 x x x 201 158 200 x 314 247 250 x 491 385 280 (x) 616 483 320 x 804 631 400 x 1257 986 500 x 1963 154

Table 4

4310 Values for a1 - a4 NEN EN 100802005 section 81312 provides insufficient clarity and interpretation of how to apply these a-values The a-values included in NEN 60082008 are the absolute minimummaximum a-values that with respect to the a2 and a 4 values are for determining the individual absolute minimum and maximum variable mechanical properties as referred to in NEN EN 100802005 section 11 (testing in case of a dispute)

However when assessing the variable test results per test unit during the production inspection in the factory in conformity with NEN EN 100802005 section 813 1 in case of b) the manufacturer himself shall determine the a1234-values of the population concerned and record this in a solid procedure With these determined manufacturer-specific a-values every test unit must be tested in order to meet the required quality level in the long term ( x - ks ge Cv or x + ks le Cv) The a-values of the manufacturer must al least comply with the absolute minimummaximum a-values included in NEN 60082008 but they are usually higherlower (ie more critical)

The solid procedures with the a-values recorded for each population must always be up-to-date and demonstrate to the satisfaction of the CI that with this the required Cv values (for the longer term) are complied with If these solid procedures are (still) missing in conformity with NEN EN 100802005 section 8131 only situation a) applies so in principle all individual values of the test unit must comply with the specified Cv value

National Assessment Guideline BRL 0501 01 September 2010 copy Kiwa NV - -

13

When determining the a-values solid procedures are preferably applied using the standard deviations and the assumption probabilities

4311 Rib row distance Σe Contrary to NEN 6008 table 1 and analogue with NEN-EN 10080 read for lsquodistance rib rowsdistance Σe le 075drsquo The projection of the cross ribs must cover at least 75 of the circumference of the reinforcing steel to be calculated based on the nominal diameter In formula total distance between the rib rows Σe lt 025 πd

44 Determination methods and test criteria Supplementary and contrary to NEN-EN 10080 and NEN 6008 the following applies

441 Preliminary audit for acceptance Supplementary to NEN-EN 10080 the following data are to be provided for each of the diameters given by the certification institute before the start of the initial audit -- test results of 60 pieces from at least 3 casting loads with 20 samples each the individual

test results of 02 yield limit or flow limit ((Rp02 or Re) yield at maximum load (Agt) the tensile strength02 yield or flow limit ratio RmRp02 or Re if applicable the ratio of the actual 02 yield limit or flow limitthe nominal 02 yield limit or flow limit (ReactRenom) Also the statistic processing of these data with average value ( x ) standard deviation (s) and characteristic value (Cv)

-- test results of 5 pieces from the same loads with 5 samples each the individual test results of the bendability shearing force of point welded reinforcement fabrics mass per metre and profiling (profile factors fR fP rib height rib distance rib width rib flank α rib (inclination) angle distance between the rib rows and the longitudinal rib)

-- chemical composition of each casting load -- (casting) load numbers and roller data (min 10 tons per diameter) -- drawing or sketch of the profiling and the factory brand

442 Inspection for the attributive properties NEN-EN 10080 gives insufficient interpretation of the termination methods and test criteria for inspections for the attributive properties bendability shearing force with point welded reinforcement fabrics mass per metre and profiling (profile factors fR fP rib height rib distance rib width rib flank α rib (inclination) angle β distance between the rib rows and the longitudinal rib Contrary to NEN-EN 10080 with these attributive properties the sampling and the conformity assessment is done as follows -- with the continuous internal production inspection not for each test unit but repeatedly

for the 15 last tested bars of a diameter or a diameter-weld combination -- with the initial audit the test series is to be extended to 15 samples if necessary and to 60

samples when there is initial rejection -- with the periodic external inspection (audit) the results of the attributive properties

obtained during the audit are to be added to the internal test results of the manufacturer Testing If a maximum of 2 of the 15 measurements do not comply the sampling can be extended by 45 extra measurements with respect to the attributive property concerned In this case the attributive properties of a total of 60 test bars are available The property concerned then still complies if not more than 2 of the 60 measurements do not comply with the NEN 6008 The profiling is increasingly measured using an optical camera The manual measurement will be valid in case of disputes

4421 Inspection of the bend-bend tensile test with initial audit and during external inspections (audit testing) By means of a bend-bend back tensile test it is determined whether the reinforcing steel types B500B and B500C in the diameter range le 16 mm can be bent back once with an angle of 90deg

National Assessment Guideline BRL 0501 01 September 2010 copy Kiwa NV - -

14

without significant decrease of the Rp02 or Re RmRe and Agt compared with the non-bent bars The values may not be below the mentioned Cv values for the reinforcing steel type and delivery condition concerned Sampling and testing frequency

Delivery condition Diameter Inspection frequency bars and coils B500BB500C

d le 16 mm 6 samples of different barscoils from 3 (casting) loads for each selected diameter Samples are to be taken from the same barsloads as for the regular tensile tests

Performance of the test Take a sample of reinforcing steel of sufficient length for doing 2 tensile tests A normal tensile test is performed with the one part and a bend-bend back tensile test with the other part The minimum length for the bendbend back tensile test is 70 cm The preparation of the tensile test including the way of ageing and the way of bending is done in accordance with the stipulations in NEN-EN 10080 with the exception of the way of bending back and the bending mandrel diameter to be used The bending mandrel diameter is maximum 4d Bend the bar over a bending mandrel of maximum 4d with a maximum angle of 90deg Mark the bending zone (length ca 9d) Place the test piece in a vice or the like Place an appropriate pipe over the part of the test piece to be bent back preferably with an internal pipe diameter that is max 2 mm larger than the diameter of the test piece and bend the test piece straight again Try to make the test piece as straight as possible Here the difference between the one part and the other part of the test piece may be maximally the diameter of the test piece (the bayonet forming) Age the test piece in conformity with the stipulations of NEN-EN 10080 and perform the tensile test The test is considered to be satisfactory when - the results do not show any significant differences with the results of the non-bent test

pieces - the values are above the set Cv values If the values are not satisfactory find the cause and repeat the tests if necessary

443 Inspection for the variable properties Contrary to NEN-EN 10080 the sampling and testing is done in conformity with BRL 0501 annex 3 for the variable properties 02 yield limit or flow limit (Rp02 or Re) yield at maximum load (Agt) the tensile strength02 yield or flow limit ratio RmRp02 or Re if applicable the ratio of the actual 02 yield limit or flow limitthe nominal 02 yield limit or flow limit (ReactRenom) and the fatigue strength NEN-EN 10080 provides insufficient interpretation of the test requirements the determination methods and the test criteria for inspection for the fatigue properties Therefore the requirements given below apply supplementary to NEN-EN 10080

National Assessment Guideline BRL 0501 01 September 2010 copy Kiwa NV - -

15

4431 Inspection for the fatigue strength in initial audit Sampling and testing frequency

Delivery condition

Diameter Inspection frequency

bars and coils for d le 28 mm the middle and largest of the diameter range For d gt 28 mm the largest diameter

6 samples of different barscoils from 3 (casting) loads for each selected diameter (18 bars per diameter)

point welded fabrics

The smallest middle and largest diameter of the diameter range (always with the least favourable diameter combination)

5 samples of different bars with a point weld from 3 test units for each selected diameter (15 bars per diameter)

Test method a semi-statistical This simplified test is regarded as sufficient if the requirements given below are met

With reinforcing steel bars and coils B500B and B500C in the diameter range d le 28 mm with

the requirement aσ2 ge 175 MPa

a2σ = 175 MPa a2σ = 200 MPa Number of samples 10 sup2) Number of samples 8 sup2) Stress changes (106) Break Stress changes (106) Break

lt 15 lt 20 ge 20

none le l ge 9

lt 075 075 lt 10 10 lt 20 ge 20

none le l

le 2 1)

ge 5 1) le 3 breaks if no break occurred up to 1x106 tension changes sup2) total number 10 + 8 = 18

Table 5

With reinforcing steel bars B500B and B500C in the diameter range d gt 28 mm with the

requirement aσ2 ge 145 MPa

a2σ = 145 MPa a2σ = 170 MPa Number of samples 10 sup2) Number of samples 8 sup2) Stress changes (106) Break Stress changes (106) Break

lt 15 lt 20 ge 20

none le l ge 9

lt 075 075 lt 15 15 lt 20 ge 20

none le 2

le 2 1)

ge 4 1) le 4 breaks if no break occurred up to 15 x 106 tension changes sup2) total number 10 + 8 = 18

Table 6

With point welded fabrics B500A B500B and B500C as well as reinforcing steel bars and coils

B500A with the requirement aσ2 ge 100 MPa

a2σ = 100 MPa a2σ = 180 MPa Number of samples 10 sup1) Number of samples 5 sup1) Stress changes (106) Break Stress changes (106) Break

lt 15 lt 20 ge 20

none le l ge 9

lt 025 025 lt 05 ge 05

none le 3 ge 2

sup1) total number 10 + 5 = 15 Table 7

National Assessment Guideline BRL 0501 01 September 2010 copy Kiwa NV - -

16

Test method b fully statistical This test is done with the appropriate statistic methods considering the requirements p = 095 W = 75 set out in NEN 6008

Here the requirement Cv le x ndash ks must be complied with where x = the average value in which max 2 million load changes must be maintained

for the individual value of one test bar s = the estimate of the standard deviation of the population k = variation coefficient according to the table below (in conformity with ISO 16269-6) Cv = the characteristic value for the tension changes 1 106

n k n k n k n k 15 199 20 193 30 187 50 181 16 199 25 190 40 183 100 176 18 195

Table 8

4432 Inspection for the fatigue strength in periodic external inspections (audit testing) The numbers of test bars of one diameter given below are tested on an annual basis The sampling takes place in the presence of the inspector and is part of the audit testing -- barscoils 5 per year -- point welded fabrics 5 per year provided that in a period of 5 years at least 80 of all certified diameters (diameter combinations) has been tested With the 80 mentioned at least the following must have been tested

bull For barscoils the largest diameter in the range d le 28 mm and the largest diameter in the range d gt 28 mm

bull For point welded fabrics the smallest and the largest diameters always with the least favourable diameter combination

The test is considered to be satisfactory if

bull with the barscoils max 1 sample broke at lt 20106 stress changes and the other 4 samples have at least resisted 20106 tension changes

bull with the point welded fabrics max 1 sample broke at between 10106 and 20106 stress changes and the other 4 samples have at least resisted 20106 stress changes

For barscoils and point welded fabrics only a re-inspection can take place if no more than 2 samples broke at fewer than 20 106 stress changes In this case 5 extra samples are to be tested whereby no breaks at lt 20 106 stress changes may occur In this case the test series is satisfactory If this is not complied with further testing is necessary to find the cause and corrective measures are to be taken in order to avoid reoccurrence If necessary a new initial audit for the fatigue strength is to be performed

45 Biannual reporting The test results of all test units of the continuous inspections are to be collected and statistically evaluated for Re Agt RmRe and ReactRenom (if relevant) based on data of the production of the previous six months or the 200 most recent data dependent on which is the largest number These data shall biannually be sent to the certification institute in conformity with the model in annex 4

National Assessment Guideline BRL 0501 01 September 2010 copy Kiwa NV - -

17

46 Identification Contrary to NEN-EN 10080 art 101211 the product numbers (technical classes) are not assigned by a European organisation However the other requirements concerning the identification are observed in conformity with NEN 6008 and NEN-EN 10080

47 Certification mark Each packaging unit must have a label with the following obligatory indications

bull KOMO mark bull product certificate number + delivery condition (bars coils fabrics) bull the reinforcing steel type and the manufacturer number bull name andor logo of the manufacturer bull mentioning BRL0501

A packaging unit can be characterised

bull with reinforcing steel on coils as lsquothe coilrsquo marking min 1 label per coil bull with reinforcing steel bars as lsquothe bundlesrsquo marking min 1 label per bundle bull with point welded fabrics as lsquonumber of fabricsrsquo marking at least 1 label per unit of max

40 reinforcement fabrics or max 2 tons Additionally each point welded fabric in which only externally purchased and delivered reinforcing steel has been used must be marked in an indelible and non-removable way For example when using a ldquoSchlatter Etikettiermachinen Methoderdquo or equivalent the point welded reinforcement fabrics are to be marked with at least 1 label

National Assessment Guideline BRL 0501 01 September 2010 copy Kiwa NV - -

18

5 Requirements to the quality system

51 General This chapter includes the requirements that the quality system of the supplier has to meet

52 Administrator of the quality system A staff member is to be appointed as quality system manager within the organisational structure

53 Internal quality controlquality plan The supplier must have and use a schedule for internal quality control (an IQC schedule) in accordance with the model indicated in annex 2 In this IQC schedule the following must be demonstrably recorded

bull what aspects the manufacturer will inspect bull what methods will be used for these inspections bull the frequency of these inspections bull how to record and file the inspection results bull aspects with respect to the production of point welded reinforcement fabrics

Also the supplier must have a procedure for organising the production process of any post-stretching alignment and the reinforcement fabrics to be point welded and how this is implemented inspected and monitored This IQC schedule must have been derived from the IQC schedule included in the annex and must have been set up such that it gives the CI enough confidence that the requirements set out in this assessment guideline are continuously met

This must function at least 3 months before issuing the certificate

54 Procedures and work instructions The supplier must be able to submit

bull procedures for - handling out of spec products and (semi-)products to be repaired - corrective measures after observed defects - handling complaints about products andor services delivered - monitoring the quality using the extra value a - a4 - the work instructions and inspection forms used including the biannual reporting

(see annex 4)

55 Other requirements to the quality system

551 Reinforcing steel The following are regarded as sufficient proof that the purchased reinforcing steel complies with the product standard mentioned (NEN 6008) and other technical specifications

bull KOMO quality statement issued on the basis of BRL 0501 lsquoReinforcing steelrsquo by a certification andor attestation institute acknowledged by the Dutch Authority for Accreditation for the discipline involved

bull a (quality) statement the equivalence of which with the above-mentioned KOMO quality statement has been demonstrated

The traceability of the purchased reinforcing steel is guaranteed by the rolling mark and the labelling The origin (certificate number) of the reinforcing steel must be recorded at the initial audit

National Assessment Guideline BRL 0501 01 September 2010 copy Kiwa NV - -

19

552 Storage of reinforcing steel Reinforcing steel must be stored free from the ground Store and label reinforcing steel such that the chance of exchange for instance with foreign qualities is eliminated

National Assessment Guideline BRL 0501 01 September 2010 copy Kiwa NV - -

20

6 Requirements for the functioning of a test laboratory for testing reinforcing steel andor point welded reinforcement fabrics

61 The supplier has its own laboratory for testing reinforcing steel for its variable and attributive properties The laboratory equipment as well as the test methods must comply with

bull NEN-EN 10002-22001 Metallic materials tensile testing part 1 method of testing at ambient temperature

bull NEN-EN-ISO 15630-12002 Steel for the reinforcement and prestressing of concrete Test methods ndash Part 1 reinforcing bars wire rod and wire June 2002

bull NEN-EN-ISO 15630-22002 Steel for the reinforcement and prestressing of concrete Test methods ndash Part 2 welded fabric

Measuring equipment that has not been classified for one of the above-mentioned standards can be used as soon as they have been tested assessed and qualified by the CI

62 Outsourcing of testing Tests for the chemical composition and the fatigue strength of reinforcing steel can be outsourced as well De test results can be indicated as being lsquoperformed in a reliable wayrsquo if

bull The tests have been performed by a laboratory that meets the accreditation standard referred to in article 14 of this BRL NEN-EN-ISOIEC 17025 lsquoGeneral requirements for the competence of testing and calibration laboratoriesrsquo This accreditation must concern the performance of tests in conformity with the outsourcing assignment Besides a 31 or a 22 certificate of the results in conformity with NEN-EN 10204 is to be submitted or

bull The supplier receives the test results of the chemical composition from a company that has a product certificate of the lsquotechnical disciplinersquo (H9) mentioned in this BRL with the CI and the relevant measuring equipment in the laboratory concerned is covered by the product certificate audit

If the above requirements are not complied with the certification institute will perform or have performed the audit concerned itself In this case the certification institute will base its test on the accreditation standard NEN-EN-ISOIEC 17025

63 Verification audit An initial audit includes external verification of both the attributive and the variable properties Also an external verification for the performance of the used tensile tests takes place every two years The diameter is to be selected such that the diameters that occur most are tested in a period of 5 years When using a new tensile testing machinemeasuring equipment a verification audit is to be performed as well

National Assessment Guideline BRL 0501 01 September 2010 copy Kiwa NV - -

21

631 Variable properties For the verification of variable properties (the results of the tensile test) at least 15 random samples of one selected diameter must be taken in the presence of the inspector (audit testing) for each selected reinforcing steel type each of a length suitable for two test pieces for testing The selected representative diameters must change at the two-yearly verification With bars and coils the samples must have been spread over at least 3 loads of 1 diameter The samples for point welded reinforcement fabrics and the corresponding bars must come from 1 diameter combination produced on different days For each sample the two collected test pieces must be marked and then the test pieces must be bundled into two series of at least 15 test pieces A third series can be taken as spare series in case of discussions about the achieved results One series must be tested in the presence of the inspector at the manufacturerrsquos The inspector must have the other series tested at an external laboratory The time between the performances of both test series must be short enough to allow for neglecting any natural ageing of the testing material The test (tensile test) includes determination of the 02 yield limit or flow limit (Re) the tensile strength (Rm) the RmRe ratio and the yield with maximum load (Agt) of each individual test piece The thus obtained two series of measurement pairs must then be tested for their differences between both performances of the test Any systematic differences are to be tracked and eliminated

With the statistic comparison of two different performances of tests the differences of paired measurements are to be checked in relation with the hypothesis that the expected value of the average difference is zero (Student test) Rejection of this hypothesis indicates that there is a possibility of systematic differences For each variable property the xfi (i = 1n) of the measurement results of the manufacturer and the xei (i = 1hellip n) of the external institute must be calculated separately

bull Difference vi = xfi ndash xei considering the positive or negative difference and then the average difference

= sum

=

n

iiv

nv

1

1

bull standard deviation of the differences

minus

minus= sum

=

2

1

2

11 vnv

ns

n

iiv

bull value vsvt =

It must be verified for the variable properties the 02 yield limit or flow limit (Reee ) the tensile strength (Rmmm ) and the yield with maximum load (Aggg ttt ) whether or not t exceeds a critical limit to The critical values to depend on the number of tests and have been derived from ISO 3301 1975 with a = 001 (see table 9)

National Assessment Guideline BRL 0501 01 September 2010 copy Kiwa NV - -

22

Table 9 ndash Critical values of to

n to n to n to

10 103 11 096 12 090 13 085 14 080

15 077 16 074 17 071 18 068 19 066

20 064 25 056 30 050 35 047 40 043

If t gt to the hypothesis that there is no difference between the two series of paired measurements is rejected and so the cause of this must be found and eliminated This does not apply when sv and v are both below the reference values Sov and Vo in table 9 because of insufficient relevance

If t le to the hypothesis that there is no difference between the two series of paired measurements is not rejected The test can then be concluded unless Sv ge Sov In this case the standard deviation of the differences is excessive showing that the material concerned is unsuitable for the verification test Further investigation is then required

Table 10 ndash Reference values of Sov and Vo

sov vo 02 yield limit or flow limit 15 15 Tensile strength in MPa 15 20 Yield at maximum load in B500A B500B B500C

11 25 30

11 25 30

632 Attributive properties For the verification of attributive properties (mass per length chemical composition profiling bending test and if necessary a shearing test) the measurements of mass per length and profiling must be done in advance with the two series of at least 15 test pieces meant for the tensile test (see above) For the measurements of the bending test and shearing test (if applicable) the number of test pieces from the above described random samples must be extended with at least 5 test pieces for the bending test and if necessary the shearing test For the verification assessment of the chemical composition the number of test pieces is limited to a series of 3 test pieces from 3 test units Any combinations in the random samples of the above-mentioned verification assessments are allowed The test series at the manufacturerrsquos and the series of external tests (see above) should not produce other differences than those that can unambiguously be explained and eliminated

National Assessment Guideline BRL 0501 01 September 2010 copy Kiwa NV - -

23

7 Summary audit and inspection

Below a summary is provided of the tests to be performed for certification bull Initial audit the audit to determine whether all requirements in the BRL are met bull Inspection audit the audit performed after granting the certificate to determine whether

the certified products continuously meet the requirements set in the BRL Also indicates the frequency of the inspection audits to be performed by the certification institute (CI)

bull Inspection of the quality system inspection for compliance with the IQC schedule and the procedures

Here the frequency with which the certification institute must perform an inspection audit is indicated as well

Audit related to

Supervision by CI after granting the certificate1)

Requirement description Article BRL Initial audit

Inspection2) Frequency Product requirements bull Indication of product 2342 X X continuously bull Variable properties 4243 X X 34 x per year bull Chemical composition 4243 X X 34 x per year bull Bending test 42 X X 34 x per year bull Shearing test 42 X X 4 x per year bull Fatigue strength 4244 X X 1 x per year bull Geometry form 4243 X X 34 x per year bull Mass per unit 4243 X X 34 x per year bull Dimensions of fabricsbars 42 X X 34 x per year bull Bendndashbend back tensile

test 42 X X 3 x per year

Own testing laboratory bull Own laboratory 61 X X 1 x per year bull Outsourcing of tests 62 X X 34 x per year bull Verification audit 63 X X 1 x per 2 years System requirements bull IQC schedule 5 X X 34 x per year bull Quality mark 4647 X X 34 x per year

Table 11

1) In case of significant changes in the production process to be assessed by the CI the product requirements need to be tested again

2) The inspector or the certificate holder in the presence of the inspector will determine all product properties that can be performed within the visiting time (maximum 1 day) If this is not possible the CI and the certificate holder will make arrangements with respect to how the inspection will be performed

Inspection of the quality system The certification institute checks if the manufacturer meets the quality system requirements in chapter 5 of this BRL according to the frequency in article 86 of this BRL

National Assessment Guideline BRL 0501 01 September 2010 copy Kiwa NV - -

24

8 Requirements of de certification institute

81 General The certification institute must meet the requirements set out in EN 45011 Besides for the purpose of this BRL the institute must have been accredited by the Dutch Authority for Accreditation (RvA) or a similar body (an accreditation institute with which the RvA has entered into an agreement of mutual acceptance) The certification institute must have a set of regulations or a similar document defining the general rules to be observed during certification These particularly include bull The general rules for performance of the initial audit to be structured as follows

o The way in which suppliers are informed about the handling of a request o The performance of the audit o The decision based on the audit performed

bull The general rules concerning the performance of inspections and the inspection aspects used here

bull The measures the certification institute must take in case of defects bull The rules for terminating a certificate bull The possibility to make an appeal against decisions or measures of the certification

institute

82 Certification staff Staff involved in certification procedures include bull Auditors charged with performing the initial audit and assessing the reports of the

inspectors bull Inspectors charged with performing the external inspection at the supplierrsquos bull Decision-makers charged with taking decisions based on the initial audits performed

about continuation of certification based on inspections performed and about the necessity to take corrective measures

821 Qualification requirements A distinction is made with respect to 8211 Qualification requirements for the certification executives of a CI meeting the

requirements set out in EN 45011 8212 Supplementary qualification requirements for the certification executives of a CI as

determined by the Board of Experts for the subject of this BRL

National Assessment Guideline BRL 0501 01 September 2010 copy Kiwa NV - -

25

8211 Qualification requirements for the certification executives of a CI meeting the requirements set out in EN 45011

The qualification of the certification executives of a CI must comply with chapter 5 of EN 45011 The manual of the CI must describe how the qualification of the certification executives is performed

EN45011

Auditor

initial product assessment and assessment of the

production location

Inspector

assessment product location field and

projects after granting of certificate

Decision-maker

for granting and extending a certificate

Education General

Higher Vocational thinking and working level

Intermediate vocational working and thinking level

Higher Vocational thinking and working level

Education Specific

Basic training for auditing Basic training for auditing

Basic training for auditing

Experience General

1 year of relevant working experience with min 4 audits including 1 full initial audit done independently under supervision

1 year of relevant working experience with min 4 audits including 1 done independent under supervision

4 years of relevant working experience of which at least 1 year with respect to certification

Experience Specific

knowledge of BRL at detailed level and 4 audits related to the specific BRL or to similar BRLs

knowledge of BRL at detailed level and 4 audits related to the specific BRL or to similar BRLs

Basic knowledge of the specific certification schedule

8212 Supplementary qualification requirements for the certification executives of a CI as determined by the Board of Experts for the subject of this BRL

Certification staff Education Experience Auditor Higher vocational education level in one of the

following disciplines - Constructional engineering - Civil engineering - Mechanical engineering

2 years

Inspector Intermediate vocational education level in one of the following disciplines - ConstructionalCivil engineering - Materials science - Mechanical engineering

2 years

Decision-maker Higher vocational education level in one of the following disciplines - Constructional engineering - Civil engineering - Quality science - Mechanical engineering

4 years Managerial experience

822 Qualification Certification staff must be demonstrably qualified by comparing the education and experience with the requirements set out above If qualification takes place based on deviating criteria this must be laid down in writing The qualification authority is vested with

National Assessment Guideline BRL 0501 01 September 2010 copy Kiwa NV - -

26

bull Decision-makers qualification of auditors and inspectors bull Management of the certification institute qualification of decision-makers

83 Initial audit report The certification institute records the findings of the initial audit in a report The report must meet the following requirements bull Completeness the report makes a statement about all requirements set out in the

assessment guideline bull Traceability the findings the statement are based on must have been recorded in a

traceable way bull Basis for decision the decision-maker for granting a certificate must be able to base his

decision on the findings recorded in the report

84 Decision about granting the certificate The decision concerning the granting of the certificate must be made by a decision-maker who is qualified to do so and who has not been involved in the certificate audit himself The decision must have been recorded in a traceable way

85 Presentation of the quality statement The product certificate must be presented in conformity with the model included in the annex

86 Nature and frequency of external inspections The certification institute must regularly inspect the supplier for compliance with his obligations The Board of Experts will decide upon the frequency of the inspections At the time this assessment guideline took effect the frequency was set to bull 3 inspection visits per year at suppliers of hot-rolled products bull 4 inspection visits per year at suppliers of other products Inspections will in any case pertain to a number of matters including bull The product specifications laid down in the product specification bull The supplierrsquos production process bull The supplierrsquos IQC schedule and the results of the inspections performed by the supplier bull The correct way of marking the certified products bull Compliance with the required procedures The certification institute will lay down the findings of each inspection performed in a report in a traceable way

87 Reporting to the Board of Experts The certification institute must report on the certification activities performed at least once a year The report must include the following subjects bull Mutations in number of certificates (newlapsed) bull Number of inspections performed in relation to the determined frequency bull Inspection results bull Measures imposed in case of defects bull Complaints received from third parties with respect to certified products

88 Interpretation of requirements The Board of Experts may lay down the requirements set in this assessment guideline in a single separate interpretation document The certification institute is obliged to ensure whether an interpretation document has been drawn up and if so must make use of the interpretations laid down in this

89 Specific rules defined by the Board of Experts The Board of Experts has not defined specific rules that are to be followed with certification by the certification institute

National Assessment Guideline BRL 0501 01 September 2010 copy Kiwa NV - -

27

9 List of documents mentioned

91 Standardsnormative documents

NEN 6008 2008 Reinforcing steel NEN 6720 1995 Technical foundations for building constructions - TGB 1990 ndash

Regulations for concrete - TGB 1990 ndash Structural requirements and calculation methods (VBC 1995) September 1995 including amendment sheet A4 December 2007

NEN 6722 2002 Regulations for concrete ndash Execution December 2002 NEN 6723 1995 Regulations for concrete - Bridges ndash (VBB June 1995) Structural requirements

and calculation methods December 1995 including amendment sheet A1 December 2003

NEN-EN 1992 2005 Design of concrete structures NEN-EN 1994 2005 Design of composite steel and concrete structures NEN-EN 10002 2001 Metallic materials tensile testing - Part 1 Method of testing at ambient

temperature August 2001 NEN-EN 10080 2005 Steel for the reinforcement of concrete ndash Weldable reinforcing steel - General NEN-EN 10204 2004 Metallic products - Types of inspection documents October 2004 NEN-EN 45012 1998 General requirements for bodies operating assessment and

certificationregistration of quality systems NEN-EN-ISO 376 2004 Metallic materials - Calibration of force-proving instruments used for the

verification of uniaxial testing machines NEN-EN-ISO 7500-1 2004 Metallic materials - Verification of static uniaxial testing machines ndash

Part 1 Tensilecompression testing machines - Verification and calibration of the force-measuring system August 2004

NEN-EN-ISO 9513 2002 Metallic materials ndash Calibration of extensometers for uniaxial testing October 2002

NEN-EN-ISO 15630-1 2002 Steel for the reinforcement and prestressing of concrete - Test methods ndash Part 1 Reinforcing bars wire rod and wire June 2002

NEN-EN-ISO 15630-2 2002 Steel for the reinforcement and prestressing of concrete - Test methods ndash Part 2 Welded fabric

NEN-EN-ISOIEC 17020

2004 General criteria for the operation of various types of bodies performing inspection

NEN-EN-ISOIEC 17024

2003 Conformity assessment - General requirements for bodies operating certification of persons

NEN-EN-ISOIEC 17025

2005 General requirements for the competence of testing and calibration laboratories

ISO 3301 1975 Statistical interpretation of data ndash Comparison of two means in the case of paired observations

ISO 4965 1979 Axial load fatigue testing machines - Dynamic force calibration - Strain gauge technique April 1979

ISO 16269-6 2005 Statistical interpretation of data Determination of statistical tolerance intervals

Annex I Model certificate

Issued Replaces Issued date Valid until Indefinite Page 1 of 2

KOMOreg

Product certificate

ltName Productgt ltCertificate holdergt

STATEMENT OF CI This product certificate was issued on the basis of BRL lsquo lsquo in conformity with the regulations for Product Certification CI declares that the justifiable confidence exists that the name product supplied by the certificate holder meets the technical specifications laid down in this product certificate provided that name product has the KOMOreg mark as indicated in this product certificate Director CI Advice refer to wwwltCIgtnl to see if this certificate is valid

Certificate holder T F E I

Assessed Quality system Product

Periodic check

reg is a collective brand of Stichting Bouwkwaliteit

Annex II Model for IQC schedule or framework of IQC schedule

Subjects Aspects Method Frequency Registration

Basic materials or supplied materials bull Recipe sheets bull Inspection of incoming raw

materials bull Mechanical bull Chemical

Production process production equipment material bull Procedures bull Work instructions bull Equipment bull Material bull Process inspection

End products

Measuring and testing equipment

Measuring and testing equipment bull Measuring devices bull Calibration bull Outsourced tests

Logistics bull Internal transport bull Storage bull Packaging bull Preservation bull Identification or marking

of semi-finished and end products

Corrective measures Complaints handling

Annex III Sampling and testing overview

Type

on

derz

oek

1)

Doo

rlope

nd

inte

rn fa

brie

kson

derz

oek

Perio

diek

ex

tern

ond

erzo

ek (a

udit)

To

elat

ings

onde

rzoe

k

(type

onde

rzoe

k)

Type

bet

onst

aal

stav

enro

llen

per d

iam

eter

ge

punt

last

e w

apn

ette

n pe

r dia

-com

bina

tie

stav

enro

llen

3 bp

e va

n 1

diam

eter

8)

gepu

ntla

ste

wap

net

ten

3 bp

e va

n 1

dia-

com

bina

tie 7)

8)

stav

enro

llen

3 bp

e pe

r di

amet

er 6)

gepu

ntla

ste

wap

net

ten

3 bp

e pe

r dia

-co

mbi

natie

6) 7

) R

e 1

per 3

0 t

m

in 3

per

bpe

m

in 2

per

bpe

1

lang

s + d

war

s 5

per b

pe

5 pe

r bpe

3

lang

s + 2

dw

ars

10 p

er b

pe

10 p

er b

pe

5 la

ngs +

5 d

war

s R

mR

e id

em

idem

id

em

idem

id

em

idem

R

eac

tRe

nom

2)

idem

id

em

idem

id

em

idem

id

em

Agt

idem

id

em

idem

id

em

idem

id

em

Bui

gpro

ef

1 pe

r bpe

4)

idem

2

per b

pe

2 pe

r bpe

1

lang

s + 1

dw

ars

5 pe

r bpe

5

per b

pe

3 la

ngs +

2 d

war

s M

assa

per

m

idem

id

em 5)

id

em

idem

5)

idem

id

em 5)

G

eom

etrie

opp

en

pro

fielfa

ctor

id

em

idem

id

em

idem

id

em

Idem

Che

mis

che

sa

men

st +

Ceq

3)

1 pe

r lad

ing

1

per l

adin

g 1

per l

adin

g 1

per l

adin

g 1

per l

adin

g 1

per l

adin

g

Afs

chui

fpro

ef

nv

t m

in 2

per

bpe

n

vt

3 pe

r bpe

n

vt

3 pe

r bpe

B

uig-

te

rugb

uigt

rekp

roe

f

nv

t n

vt

2 pe

r bpe

n

vt

2 pe

r bpe

n

vt

Afm

etin

gen

nv

t m

in 1

per

bpe

n

vt

1 pe

r bpe

n

vt

1 pe

r bpe

V

erm

oeiin

g n

vt

nv

t 5

per j

aar

5 pe

r jaa

r 6

per b

pe 9)

5

per b

pe 10

)

1) The audit is always for each manufacturing process (hot-rolled-cooled -cold-stretched cold-profiles) of a certain type of reinforcing steel 2) If applicable (B500C) 3) Chemical composition + Ceq to be determined and submitted by the steel manufacturer not for each diameter (combination) 4) For bending mass and geometry surface + frfp min 1 per 150 tons 5) Can be determined for welding 6) Smallest largest and intermediate diameters (always skipping 2 consecutive diameters) of the range (deviating from EN 10080) 7) Always the most critical diameter combination that occurs 8) In a period of a maximum of 5 years number and spreading of diameters 9) For d le 28 mm the largest and middle diameters for gt 28 mm the largest diameter 10) The largest middle and smallest diameters Test unit is defined as -- barscoils the load or a part of the load (for bending mass and geometryprofile min 1 per 90 t) -- point welded reinforcement fabrics 50 tons of the same combination of reinforcing steel types and diameters manufactured with the same point welding machine

Annex IV Model for biannual reporting on reinforcing steel

Page 11: National Assessment Guideline - Kiwa · PDF fileThe NEN-EN 10080:2005 is not a harmonised standard and therefore a CE mark can not yet be attached to the products covered by this BRL

National Assessment Guideline BRL 0501 01 September 2010 copy Kiwa NV - -

10

4 Product requirements and determination methods

41 General This chapter includes the product requirements that reinforcing steel must comply with as well as the determination methods to make sure that the requirements are complied with These requirements will be part of the technical specification of the product that is included in the product certificate The product certificate states that the reinforcing steel complies with article 4 of BRL 0501 which also implies that the reinforcing steel complies with NEN 6720 article 512 or NEN-EN 1990NEN-EN 1991-12 including the national annexes

42 Product requirements and determination methods The requirements and the determination methods for reinforcing steel have been laid down in

Number Title Date of issue NEN-EN 10080 Steel for the reinforcement of concrete ndash

Weldable reinforcing steel - General May 2005

NEN-EN 10080 1) Dutch translation Staal voor het wapenen van beton ndash Lasbaar betonstaal - Algemeen

June 2005

NEN 6008 Steel for the reinforcement of concrete July 2008 NEN-EN-ISO 15630-1

Steel for the reinforcement of concrete and prestressing of concrete ndash Test methods ndash Part 1 reinforcing bars wire rod and wire

2002-04-15

NEN-EN-ISO 15630-2

Steel for the reinforcement of concrete and prestressing of concrete ndash Test methods ndash Part 2 welded fabric

2002-04-15

1) The English version lsquoNEN-EN 10080 May 2005rsquo is binding Table 2

43 Product requirements supplementary to and contrary to NEN-EN 10080 and NEN 6008 the following applies

431 Lattice girders What has been stated about lattice girders in NEN-EN 10080 and NEN 6008 does not apply to this assessment guideline see for this BRL 0502 lsquoLattice girdersrsquo

432 Non-profiled or slightly profiled reinforcing steel Non-profiled or slightly profiled reinforcing steel is outside the scope of the regime of this BRL it may only be applied to lattice girders

433 Geometry of the profiling determination of fR and fP Determination of the profile factor fR andor fP is done in conformity with NEN-EN-ISO 15630-1 art 113

For determining fR and fP use can be made of the simplified formulas in conformity with NEN-EN-ISO 15630-1 article 1133 a and b Use of the simplified formulas in conformity with NEN-EN-ISO 15630-1 article 1133 c and 1133d is not allowed In order to make use of the simplified formulas in conformity with articles 1133a and 1133b it must be determined in advance during the initial audit whether use of the reinforcing steel produced by the supplier and the proposed simplified formula (Trapezium or Simpson) produces results for fR and fP

National Assessment Guideline BRL 0501 01 September 2010 copy Kiwa NV - -

11

that are greater than or equal to the value that is obtained when using the general formula for determining fR and fP (in conformity with article 1131)

434 Standard deviations Supplementary to the NEN-EN- 10080 and NEN 6008 the following values are valid for the maximum standard deviations of the variable properties

Re (MPa)

Re(act)Re(nom) RmRe Agt ()

B500A bars coils point welded fabric

30 006 002 15

B500B bars coils point welded fabric

30 006 002 bars 20 coils 20 point welded fabric 15

B500C bars coils point welded fabric

30 006 002 bars 25 coils 25 point welded fabric 15

Table 3

435 Geometry longitudinal rib Supplementary to NEN-EN-ISO 15630-1 art 1032 the rib width of the longitudinal rib if present must be measured as well The rib width is analogically measured as the rib height The requirements with respect to the longitudinal rib are mentioned in NEN 6008 table 1

436 Nominal mass per metre Contrary to NEN 6008 table 1 read lsquothe allowable deviation from the nominal mass per meterrsquo for lsquotolerance nominal diameterrsquo

437 Extra value for a2 Contrary to NEN 6008 table 1 lsquoextra valuersquo read a2 = 05 for the Agt of B500A

438 Chemical composition of reinforcing steel Contrary to NEN-EN-10080 (Dutch translation) art 713 table 2 explanation a the following applies Exceeding the maximum value for the carbon content by 003 (mass percentage) is allowed provided that the value of the carbon equivalent is decreased by 002 (mass percentage)rdquo

National Assessment Guideline BRL 0501 01 September 2010 copy Kiwa NV - -

12

439 Nominal diameters preferred range Supplementary to NEN-EN10080 the table below mentions the general and the preferred range of the nominal diameters The nominal diameters between brackets ( ) are not preferred diameters Nominal diameter

mm

Bars Coils and bars

straightened from coils

Point welded fabric

Nominal surface of the cross section

mm2

Nominal mass per

metre

kgm 40 (x) 126 0099 45 (x) 159 0125 50 (x) x 196 0154 55 (x) (x) 238 0187 60 x x x 283 0222 65 (x) (x) 332 0260 70 x x 385 0302 75 (x) (x) 442 0347 80 x x x 503 0395 85 (x) (x) 567 0445 90 x x 636 0499 95 (x) (x) 709 0556 100 x x x 785 0617 110 (x) x 950 0746 120 x x x 113 0888 140 x x x 154 121 160 x x x 201 158 200 x 314 247 250 x 491 385 280 (x) 616 483 320 x 804 631 400 x 1257 986 500 x 1963 154

Table 4

4310 Values for a1 - a4 NEN EN 100802005 section 81312 provides insufficient clarity and interpretation of how to apply these a-values The a-values included in NEN 60082008 are the absolute minimummaximum a-values that with respect to the a2 and a 4 values are for determining the individual absolute minimum and maximum variable mechanical properties as referred to in NEN EN 100802005 section 11 (testing in case of a dispute)

However when assessing the variable test results per test unit during the production inspection in the factory in conformity with NEN EN 100802005 section 813 1 in case of b) the manufacturer himself shall determine the a1234-values of the population concerned and record this in a solid procedure With these determined manufacturer-specific a-values every test unit must be tested in order to meet the required quality level in the long term ( x - ks ge Cv or x + ks le Cv) The a-values of the manufacturer must al least comply with the absolute minimummaximum a-values included in NEN 60082008 but they are usually higherlower (ie more critical)

The solid procedures with the a-values recorded for each population must always be up-to-date and demonstrate to the satisfaction of the CI that with this the required Cv values (for the longer term) are complied with If these solid procedures are (still) missing in conformity with NEN EN 100802005 section 8131 only situation a) applies so in principle all individual values of the test unit must comply with the specified Cv value

National Assessment Guideline BRL 0501 01 September 2010 copy Kiwa NV - -

13

When determining the a-values solid procedures are preferably applied using the standard deviations and the assumption probabilities

4311 Rib row distance Σe Contrary to NEN 6008 table 1 and analogue with NEN-EN 10080 read for lsquodistance rib rowsdistance Σe le 075drsquo The projection of the cross ribs must cover at least 75 of the circumference of the reinforcing steel to be calculated based on the nominal diameter In formula total distance between the rib rows Σe lt 025 πd

44 Determination methods and test criteria Supplementary and contrary to NEN-EN 10080 and NEN 6008 the following applies

441 Preliminary audit for acceptance Supplementary to NEN-EN 10080 the following data are to be provided for each of the diameters given by the certification institute before the start of the initial audit -- test results of 60 pieces from at least 3 casting loads with 20 samples each the individual

test results of 02 yield limit or flow limit ((Rp02 or Re) yield at maximum load (Agt) the tensile strength02 yield or flow limit ratio RmRp02 or Re if applicable the ratio of the actual 02 yield limit or flow limitthe nominal 02 yield limit or flow limit (ReactRenom) Also the statistic processing of these data with average value ( x ) standard deviation (s) and characteristic value (Cv)

-- test results of 5 pieces from the same loads with 5 samples each the individual test results of the bendability shearing force of point welded reinforcement fabrics mass per metre and profiling (profile factors fR fP rib height rib distance rib width rib flank α rib (inclination) angle distance between the rib rows and the longitudinal rib)

-- chemical composition of each casting load -- (casting) load numbers and roller data (min 10 tons per diameter) -- drawing or sketch of the profiling and the factory brand

442 Inspection for the attributive properties NEN-EN 10080 gives insufficient interpretation of the termination methods and test criteria for inspections for the attributive properties bendability shearing force with point welded reinforcement fabrics mass per metre and profiling (profile factors fR fP rib height rib distance rib width rib flank α rib (inclination) angle β distance between the rib rows and the longitudinal rib Contrary to NEN-EN 10080 with these attributive properties the sampling and the conformity assessment is done as follows -- with the continuous internal production inspection not for each test unit but repeatedly

for the 15 last tested bars of a diameter or a diameter-weld combination -- with the initial audit the test series is to be extended to 15 samples if necessary and to 60

samples when there is initial rejection -- with the periodic external inspection (audit) the results of the attributive properties

obtained during the audit are to be added to the internal test results of the manufacturer Testing If a maximum of 2 of the 15 measurements do not comply the sampling can be extended by 45 extra measurements with respect to the attributive property concerned In this case the attributive properties of a total of 60 test bars are available The property concerned then still complies if not more than 2 of the 60 measurements do not comply with the NEN 6008 The profiling is increasingly measured using an optical camera The manual measurement will be valid in case of disputes

4421 Inspection of the bend-bend tensile test with initial audit and during external inspections (audit testing) By means of a bend-bend back tensile test it is determined whether the reinforcing steel types B500B and B500C in the diameter range le 16 mm can be bent back once with an angle of 90deg

National Assessment Guideline BRL 0501 01 September 2010 copy Kiwa NV - -

14

without significant decrease of the Rp02 or Re RmRe and Agt compared with the non-bent bars The values may not be below the mentioned Cv values for the reinforcing steel type and delivery condition concerned Sampling and testing frequency

Delivery condition Diameter Inspection frequency bars and coils B500BB500C

d le 16 mm 6 samples of different barscoils from 3 (casting) loads for each selected diameter Samples are to be taken from the same barsloads as for the regular tensile tests

Performance of the test Take a sample of reinforcing steel of sufficient length for doing 2 tensile tests A normal tensile test is performed with the one part and a bend-bend back tensile test with the other part The minimum length for the bendbend back tensile test is 70 cm The preparation of the tensile test including the way of ageing and the way of bending is done in accordance with the stipulations in NEN-EN 10080 with the exception of the way of bending back and the bending mandrel diameter to be used The bending mandrel diameter is maximum 4d Bend the bar over a bending mandrel of maximum 4d with a maximum angle of 90deg Mark the bending zone (length ca 9d) Place the test piece in a vice or the like Place an appropriate pipe over the part of the test piece to be bent back preferably with an internal pipe diameter that is max 2 mm larger than the diameter of the test piece and bend the test piece straight again Try to make the test piece as straight as possible Here the difference between the one part and the other part of the test piece may be maximally the diameter of the test piece (the bayonet forming) Age the test piece in conformity with the stipulations of NEN-EN 10080 and perform the tensile test The test is considered to be satisfactory when - the results do not show any significant differences with the results of the non-bent test

pieces - the values are above the set Cv values If the values are not satisfactory find the cause and repeat the tests if necessary

443 Inspection for the variable properties Contrary to NEN-EN 10080 the sampling and testing is done in conformity with BRL 0501 annex 3 for the variable properties 02 yield limit or flow limit (Rp02 or Re) yield at maximum load (Agt) the tensile strength02 yield or flow limit ratio RmRp02 or Re if applicable the ratio of the actual 02 yield limit or flow limitthe nominal 02 yield limit or flow limit (ReactRenom) and the fatigue strength NEN-EN 10080 provides insufficient interpretation of the test requirements the determination methods and the test criteria for inspection for the fatigue properties Therefore the requirements given below apply supplementary to NEN-EN 10080

National Assessment Guideline BRL 0501 01 September 2010 copy Kiwa NV - -

15

4431 Inspection for the fatigue strength in initial audit Sampling and testing frequency

Delivery condition

Diameter Inspection frequency

bars and coils for d le 28 mm the middle and largest of the diameter range For d gt 28 mm the largest diameter

6 samples of different barscoils from 3 (casting) loads for each selected diameter (18 bars per diameter)

point welded fabrics

The smallest middle and largest diameter of the diameter range (always with the least favourable diameter combination)

5 samples of different bars with a point weld from 3 test units for each selected diameter (15 bars per diameter)

Test method a semi-statistical This simplified test is regarded as sufficient if the requirements given below are met

With reinforcing steel bars and coils B500B and B500C in the diameter range d le 28 mm with

the requirement aσ2 ge 175 MPa

a2σ = 175 MPa a2σ = 200 MPa Number of samples 10 sup2) Number of samples 8 sup2) Stress changes (106) Break Stress changes (106) Break

lt 15 lt 20 ge 20

none le l ge 9

lt 075 075 lt 10 10 lt 20 ge 20

none le l

le 2 1)

ge 5 1) le 3 breaks if no break occurred up to 1x106 tension changes sup2) total number 10 + 8 = 18

Table 5

With reinforcing steel bars B500B and B500C in the diameter range d gt 28 mm with the

requirement aσ2 ge 145 MPa

a2σ = 145 MPa a2σ = 170 MPa Number of samples 10 sup2) Number of samples 8 sup2) Stress changes (106) Break Stress changes (106) Break

lt 15 lt 20 ge 20

none le l ge 9

lt 075 075 lt 15 15 lt 20 ge 20

none le 2

le 2 1)

ge 4 1) le 4 breaks if no break occurred up to 15 x 106 tension changes sup2) total number 10 + 8 = 18

Table 6

With point welded fabrics B500A B500B and B500C as well as reinforcing steel bars and coils

B500A with the requirement aσ2 ge 100 MPa

a2σ = 100 MPa a2σ = 180 MPa Number of samples 10 sup1) Number of samples 5 sup1) Stress changes (106) Break Stress changes (106) Break

lt 15 lt 20 ge 20

none le l ge 9

lt 025 025 lt 05 ge 05

none le 3 ge 2

sup1) total number 10 + 5 = 15 Table 7

National Assessment Guideline BRL 0501 01 September 2010 copy Kiwa NV - -

16

Test method b fully statistical This test is done with the appropriate statistic methods considering the requirements p = 095 W = 75 set out in NEN 6008

Here the requirement Cv le x ndash ks must be complied with where x = the average value in which max 2 million load changes must be maintained

for the individual value of one test bar s = the estimate of the standard deviation of the population k = variation coefficient according to the table below (in conformity with ISO 16269-6) Cv = the characteristic value for the tension changes 1 106

n k n k n k n k 15 199 20 193 30 187 50 181 16 199 25 190 40 183 100 176 18 195

Table 8

4432 Inspection for the fatigue strength in periodic external inspections (audit testing) The numbers of test bars of one diameter given below are tested on an annual basis The sampling takes place in the presence of the inspector and is part of the audit testing -- barscoils 5 per year -- point welded fabrics 5 per year provided that in a period of 5 years at least 80 of all certified diameters (diameter combinations) has been tested With the 80 mentioned at least the following must have been tested

bull For barscoils the largest diameter in the range d le 28 mm and the largest diameter in the range d gt 28 mm

bull For point welded fabrics the smallest and the largest diameters always with the least favourable diameter combination

The test is considered to be satisfactory if

bull with the barscoils max 1 sample broke at lt 20106 stress changes and the other 4 samples have at least resisted 20106 tension changes

bull with the point welded fabrics max 1 sample broke at between 10106 and 20106 stress changes and the other 4 samples have at least resisted 20106 stress changes

For barscoils and point welded fabrics only a re-inspection can take place if no more than 2 samples broke at fewer than 20 106 stress changes In this case 5 extra samples are to be tested whereby no breaks at lt 20 106 stress changes may occur In this case the test series is satisfactory If this is not complied with further testing is necessary to find the cause and corrective measures are to be taken in order to avoid reoccurrence If necessary a new initial audit for the fatigue strength is to be performed

45 Biannual reporting The test results of all test units of the continuous inspections are to be collected and statistically evaluated for Re Agt RmRe and ReactRenom (if relevant) based on data of the production of the previous six months or the 200 most recent data dependent on which is the largest number These data shall biannually be sent to the certification institute in conformity with the model in annex 4

National Assessment Guideline BRL 0501 01 September 2010 copy Kiwa NV - -

17

46 Identification Contrary to NEN-EN 10080 art 101211 the product numbers (technical classes) are not assigned by a European organisation However the other requirements concerning the identification are observed in conformity with NEN 6008 and NEN-EN 10080

47 Certification mark Each packaging unit must have a label with the following obligatory indications

bull KOMO mark bull product certificate number + delivery condition (bars coils fabrics) bull the reinforcing steel type and the manufacturer number bull name andor logo of the manufacturer bull mentioning BRL0501

A packaging unit can be characterised

bull with reinforcing steel on coils as lsquothe coilrsquo marking min 1 label per coil bull with reinforcing steel bars as lsquothe bundlesrsquo marking min 1 label per bundle bull with point welded fabrics as lsquonumber of fabricsrsquo marking at least 1 label per unit of max

40 reinforcement fabrics or max 2 tons Additionally each point welded fabric in which only externally purchased and delivered reinforcing steel has been used must be marked in an indelible and non-removable way For example when using a ldquoSchlatter Etikettiermachinen Methoderdquo or equivalent the point welded reinforcement fabrics are to be marked with at least 1 label

National Assessment Guideline BRL 0501 01 September 2010 copy Kiwa NV - -

18

5 Requirements to the quality system

51 General This chapter includes the requirements that the quality system of the supplier has to meet

52 Administrator of the quality system A staff member is to be appointed as quality system manager within the organisational structure

53 Internal quality controlquality plan The supplier must have and use a schedule for internal quality control (an IQC schedule) in accordance with the model indicated in annex 2 In this IQC schedule the following must be demonstrably recorded

bull what aspects the manufacturer will inspect bull what methods will be used for these inspections bull the frequency of these inspections bull how to record and file the inspection results bull aspects with respect to the production of point welded reinforcement fabrics

Also the supplier must have a procedure for organising the production process of any post-stretching alignment and the reinforcement fabrics to be point welded and how this is implemented inspected and monitored This IQC schedule must have been derived from the IQC schedule included in the annex and must have been set up such that it gives the CI enough confidence that the requirements set out in this assessment guideline are continuously met

This must function at least 3 months before issuing the certificate

54 Procedures and work instructions The supplier must be able to submit

bull procedures for - handling out of spec products and (semi-)products to be repaired - corrective measures after observed defects - handling complaints about products andor services delivered - monitoring the quality using the extra value a - a4 - the work instructions and inspection forms used including the biannual reporting

(see annex 4)

55 Other requirements to the quality system

551 Reinforcing steel The following are regarded as sufficient proof that the purchased reinforcing steel complies with the product standard mentioned (NEN 6008) and other technical specifications

bull KOMO quality statement issued on the basis of BRL 0501 lsquoReinforcing steelrsquo by a certification andor attestation institute acknowledged by the Dutch Authority for Accreditation for the discipline involved

bull a (quality) statement the equivalence of which with the above-mentioned KOMO quality statement has been demonstrated

The traceability of the purchased reinforcing steel is guaranteed by the rolling mark and the labelling The origin (certificate number) of the reinforcing steel must be recorded at the initial audit

National Assessment Guideline BRL 0501 01 September 2010 copy Kiwa NV - -

19

552 Storage of reinforcing steel Reinforcing steel must be stored free from the ground Store and label reinforcing steel such that the chance of exchange for instance with foreign qualities is eliminated

National Assessment Guideline BRL 0501 01 September 2010 copy Kiwa NV - -

20

6 Requirements for the functioning of a test laboratory for testing reinforcing steel andor point welded reinforcement fabrics

61 The supplier has its own laboratory for testing reinforcing steel for its variable and attributive properties The laboratory equipment as well as the test methods must comply with

bull NEN-EN 10002-22001 Metallic materials tensile testing part 1 method of testing at ambient temperature

bull NEN-EN-ISO 15630-12002 Steel for the reinforcement and prestressing of concrete Test methods ndash Part 1 reinforcing bars wire rod and wire June 2002

bull NEN-EN-ISO 15630-22002 Steel for the reinforcement and prestressing of concrete Test methods ndash Part 2 welded fabric

Measuring equipment that has not been classified for one of the above-mentioned standards can be used as soon as they have been tested assessed and qualified by the CI

62 Outsourcing of testing Tests for the chemical composition and the fatigue strength of reinforcing steel can be outsourced as well De test results can be indicated as being lsquoperformed in a reliable wayrsquo if

bull The tests have been performed by a laboratory that meets the accreditation standard referred to in article 14 of this BRL NEN-EN-ISOIEC 17025 lsquoGeneral requirements for the competence of testing and calibration laboratoriesrsquo This accreditation must concern the performance of tests in conformity with the outsourcing assignment Besides a 31 or a 22 certificate of the results in conformity with NEN-EN 10204 is to be submitted or

bull The supplier receives the test results of the chemical composition from a company that has a product certificate of the lsquotechnical disciplinersquo (H9) mentioned in this BRL with the CI and the relevant measuring equipment in the laboratory concerned is covered by the product certificate audit

If the above requirements are not complied with the certification institute will perform or have performed the audit concerned itself In this case the certification institute will base its test on the accreditation standard NEN-EN-ISOIEC 17025

63 Verification audit An initial audit includes external verification of both the attributive and the variable properties Also an external verification for the performance of the used tensile tests takes place every two years The diameter is to be selected such that the diameters that occur most are tested in a period of 5 years When using a new tensile testing machinemeasuring equipment a verification audit is to be performed as well

National Assessment Guideline BRL 0501 01 September 2010 copy Kiwa NV - -

21

631 Variable properties For the verification of variable properties (the results of the tensile test) at least 15 random samples of one selected diameter must be taken in the presence of the inspector (audit testing) for each selected reinforcing steel type each of a length suitable for two test pieces for testing The selected representative diameters must change at the two-yearly verification With bars and coils the samples must have been spread over at least 3 loads of 1 diameter The samples for point welded reinforcement fabrics and the corresponding bars must come from 1 diameter combination produced on different days For each sample the two collected test pieces must be marked and then the test pieces must be bundled into two series of at least 15 test pieces A third series can be taken as spare series in case of discussions about the achieved results One series must be tested in the presence of the inspector at the manufacturerrsquos The inspector must have the other series tested at an external laboratory The time between the performances of both test series must be short enough to allow for neglecting any natural ageing of the testing material The test (tensile test) includes determination of the 02 yield limit or flow limit (Re) the tensile strength (Rm) the RmRe ratio and the yield with maximum load (Agt) of each individual test piece The thus obtained two series of measurement pairs must then be tested for their differences between both performances of the test Any systematic differences are to be tracked and eliminated

With the statistic comparison of two different performances of tests the differences of paired measurements are to be checked in relation with the hypothesis that the expected value of the average difference is zero (Student test) Rejection of this hypothesis indicates that there is a possibility of systematic differences For each variable property the xfi (i = 1n) of the measurement results of the manufacturer and the xei (i = 1hellip n) of the external institute must be calculated separately

bull Difference vi = xfi ndash xei considering the positive or negative difference and then the average difference

= sum

=

n

iiv

nv

1

1

bull standard deviation of the differences

minus

minus= sum

=

2

1

2

11 vnv

ns

n

iiv

bull value vsvt =

It must be verified for the variable properties the 02 yield limit or flow limit (Reee ) the tensile strength (Rmmm ) and the yield with maximum load (Aggg ttt ) whether or not t exceeds a critical limit to The critical values to depend on the number of tests and have been derived from ISO 3301 1975 with a = 001 (see table 9)

National Assessment Guideline BRL 0501 01 September 2010 copy Kiwa NV - -

22

Table 9 ndash Critical values of to

n to n to n to

10 103 11 096 12 090 13 085 14 080

15 077 16 074 17 071 18 068 19 066

20 064 25 056 30 050 35 047 40 043

If t gt to the hypothesis that there is no difference between the two series of paired measurements is rejected and so the cause of this must be found and eliminated This does not apply when sv and v are both below the reference values Sov and Vo in table 9 because of insufficient relevance

If t le to the hypothesis that there is no difference between the two series of paired measurements is not rejected The test can then be concluded unless Sv ge Sov In this case the standard deviation of the differences is excessive showing that the material concerned is unsuitable for the verification test Further investigation is then required

Table 10 ndash Reference values of Sov and Vo

sov vo 02 yield limit or flow limit 15 15 Tensile strength in MPa 15 20 Yield at maximum load in B500A B500B B500C

11 25 30

11 25 30

632 Attributive properties For the verification of attributive properties (mass per length chemical composition profiling bending test and if necessary a shearing test) the measurements of mass per length and profiling must be done in advance with the two series of at least 15 test pieces meant for the tensile test (see above) For the measurements of the bending test and shearing test (if applicable) the number of test pieces from the above described random samples must be extended with at least 5 test pieces for the bending test and if necessary the shearing test For the verification assessment of the chemical composition the number of test pieces is limited to a series of 3 test pieces from 3 test units Any combinations in the random samples of the above-mentioned verification assessments are allowed The test series at the manufacturerrsquos and the series of external tests (see above) should not produce other differences than those that can unambiguously be explained and eliminated

National Assessment Guideline BRL 0501 01 September 2010 copy Kiwa NV - -

23

7 Summary audit and inspection

Below a summary is provided of the tests to be performed for certification bull Initial audit the audit to determine whether all requirements in the BRL are met bull Inspection audit the audit performed after granting the certificate to determine whether

the certified products continuously meet the requirements set in the BRL Also indicates the frequency of the inspection audits to be performed by the certification institute (CI)

bull Inspection of the quality system inspection for compliance with the IQC schedule and the procedures

Here the frequency with which the certification institute must perform an inspection audit is indicated as well

Audit related to

Supervision by CI after granting the certificate1)

Requirement description Article BRL Initial audit

Inspection2) Frequency Product requirements bull Indication of product 2342 X X continuously bull Variable properties 4243 X X 34 x per year bull Chemical composition 4243 X X 34 x per year bull Bending test 42 X X 34 x per year bull Shearing test 42 X X 4 x per year bull Fatigue strength 4244 X X 1 x per year bull Geometry form 4243 X X 34 x per year bull Mass per unit 4243 X X 34 x per year bull Dimensions of fabricsbars 42 X X 34 x per year bull Bendndashbend back tensile

test 42 X X 3 x per year

Own testing laboratory bull Own laboratory 61 X X 1 x per year bull Outsourcing of tests 62 X X 34 x per year bull Verification audit 63 X X 1 x per 2 years System requirements bull IQC schedule 5 X X 34 x per year bull Quality mark 4647 X X 34 x per year

Table 11

1) In case of significant changes in the production process to be assessed by the CI the product requirements need to be tested again

2) The inspector or the certificate holder in the presence of the inspector will determine all product properties that can be performed within the visiting time (maximum 1 day) If this is not possible the CI and the certificate holder will make arrangements with respect to how the inspection will be performed

Inspection of the quality system The certification institute checks if the manufacturer meets the quality system requirements in chapter 5 of this BRL according to the frequency in article 86 of this BRL

National Assessment Guideline BRL 0501 01 September 2010 copy Kiwa NV - -

24

8 Requirements of de certification institute

81 General The certification institute must meet the requirements set out in EN 45011 Besides for the purpose of this BRL the institute must have been accredited by the Dutch Authority for Accreditation (RvA) or a similar body (an accreditation institute with which the RvA has entered into an agreement of mutual acceptance) The certification institute must have a set of regulations or a similar document defining the general rules to be observed during certification These particularly include bull The general rules for performance of the initial audit to be structured as follows

o The way in which suppliers are informed about the handling of a request o The performance of the audit o The decision based on the audit performed

bull The general rules concerning the performance of inspections and the inspection aspects used here

bull The measures the certification institute must take in case of defects bull The rules for terminating a certificate bull The possibility to make an appeal against decisions or measures of the certification

institute

82 Certification staff Staff involved in certification procedures include bull Auditors charged with performing the initial audit and assessing the reports of the

inspectors bull Inspectors charged with performing the external inspection at the supplierrsquos bull Decision-makers charged with taking decisions based on the initial audits performed

about continuation of certification based on inspections performed and about the necessity to take corrective measures

821 Qualification requirements A distinction is made with respect to 8211 Qualification requirements for the certification executives of a CI meeting the

requirements set out in EN 45011 8212 Supplementary qualification requirements for the certification executives of a CI as

determined by the Board of Experts for the subject of this BRL

National Assessment Guideline BRL 0501 01 September 2010 copy Kiwa NV - -

25

8211 Qualification requirements for the certification executives of a CI meeting the requirements set out in EN 45011

The qualification of the certification executives of a CI must comply with chapter 5 of EN 45011 The manual of the CI must describe how the qualification of the certification executives is performed

EN45011

Auditor

initial product assessment and assessment of the

production location

Inspector

assessment product location field and

projects after granting of certificate

Decision-maker

for granting and extending a certificate

Education General

Higher Vocational thinking and working level

Intermediate vocational working and thinking level

Higher Vocational thinking and working level

Education Specific

Basic training for auditing Basic training for auditing

Basic training for auditing

Experience General

1 year of relevant working experience with min 4 audits including 1 full initial audit done independently under supervision

1 year of relevant working experience with min 4 audits including 1 done independent under supervision

4 years of relevant working experience of which at least 1 year with respect to certification

Experience Specific

knowledge of BRL at detailed level and 4 audits related to the specific BRL or to similar BRLs

knowledge of BRL at detailed level and 4 audits related to the specific BRL or to similar BRLs

Basic knowledge of the specific certification schedule

8212 Supplementary qualification requirements for the certification executives of a CI as determined by the Board of Experts for the subject of this BRL

Certification staff Education Experience Auditor Higher vocational education level in one of the

following disciplines - Constructional engineering - Civil engineering - Mechanical engineering

2 years

Inspector Intermediate vocational education level in one of the following disciplines - ConstructionalCivil engineering - Materials science - Mechanical engineering

2 years

Decision-maker Higher vocational education level in one of the following disciplines - Constructional engineering - Civil engineering - Quality science - Mechanical engineering

4 years Managerial experience

822 Qualification Certification staff must be demonstrably qualified by comparing the education and experience with the requirements set out above If qualification takes place based on deviating criteria this must be laid down in writing The qualification authority is vested with

National Assessment Guideline BRL 0501 01 September 2010 copy Kiwa NV - -

26

bull Decision-makers qualification of auditors and inspectors bull Management of the certification institute qualification of decision-makers

83 Initial audit report The certification institute records the findings of the initial audit in a report The report must meet the following requirements bull Completeness the report makes a statement about all requirements set out in the

assessment guideline bull Traceability the findings the statement are based on must have been recorded in a

traceable way bull Basis for decision the decision-maker for granting a certificate must be able to base his

decision on the findings recorded in the report

84 Decision about granting the certificate The decision concerning the granting of the certificate must be made by a decision-maker who is qualified to do so and who has not been involved in the certificate audit himself The decision must have been recorded in a traceable way

85 Presentation of the quality statement The product certificate must be presented in conformity with the model included in the annex

86 Nature and frequency of external inspections The certification institute must regularly inspect the supplier for compliance with his obligations The Board of Experts will decide upon the frequency of the inspections At the time this assessment guideline took effect the frequency was set to bull 3 inspection visits per year at suppliers of hot-rolled products bull 4 inspection visits per year at suppliers of other products Inspections will in any case pertain to a number of matters including bull The product specifications laid down in the product specification bull The supplierrsquos production process bull The supplierrsquos IQC schedule and the results of the inspections performed by the supplier bull The correct way of marking the certified products bull Compliance with the required procedures The certification institute will lay down the findings of each inspection performed in a report in a traceable way

87 Reporting to the Board of Experts The certification institute must report on the certification activities performed at least once a year The report must include the following subjects bull Mutations in number of certificates (newlapsed) bull Number of inspections performed in relation to the determined frequency bull Inspection results bull Measures imposed in case of defects bull Complaints received from third parties with respect to certified products

88 Interpretation of requirements The Board of Experts may lay down the requirements set in this assessment guideline in a single separate interpretation document The certification institute is obliged to ensure whether an interpretation document has been drawn up and if so must make use of the interpretations laid down in this

89 Specific rules defined by the Board of Experts The Board of Experts has not defined specific rules that are to be followed with certification by the certification institute

National Assessment Guideline BRL 0501 01 September 2010 copy Kiwa NV - -

27

9 List of documents mentioned

91 Standardsnormative documents

NEN 6008 2008 Reinforcing steel NEN 6720 1995 Technical foundations for building constructions - TGB 1990 ndash

Regulations for concrete - TGB 1990 ndash Structural requirements and calculation methods (VBC 1995) September 1995 including amendment sheet A4 December 2007

NEN 6722 2002 Regulations for concrete ndash Execution December 2002 NEN 6723 1995 Regulations for concrete - Bridges ndash (VBB June 1995) Structural requirements

and calculation methods December 1995 including amendment sheet A1 December 2003

NEN-EN 1992 2005 Design of concrete structures NEN-EN 1994 2005 Design of composite steel and concrete structures NEN-EN 10002 2001 Metallic materials tensile testing - Part 1 Method of testing at ambient

temperature August 2001 NEN-EN 10080 2005 Steel for the reinforcement of concrete ndash Weldable reinforcing steel - General NEN-EN 10204 2004 Metallic products - Types of inspection documents October 2004 NEN-EN 45012 1998 General requirements for bodies operating assessment and

certificationregistration of quality systems NEN-EN-ISO 376 2004 Metallic materials - Calibration of force-proving instruments used for the

verification of uniaxial testing machines NEN-EN-ISO 7500-1 2004 Metallic materials - Verification of static uniaxial testing machines ndash

Part 1 Tensilecompression testing machines - Verification and calibration of the force-measuring system August 2004

NEN-EN-ISO 9513 2002 Metallic materials ndash Calibration of extensometers for uniaxial testing October 2002

NEN-EN-ISO 15630-1 2002 Steel for the reinforcement and prestressing of concrete - Test methods ndash Part 1 Reinforcing bars wire rod and wire June 2002

NEN-EN-ISO 15630-2 2002 Steel for the reinforcement and prestressing of concrete - Test methods ndash Part 2 Welded fabric

NEN-EN-ISOIEC 17020

2004 General criteria for the operation of various types of bodies performing inspection

NEN-EN-ISOIEC 17024

2003 Conformity assessment - General requirements for bodies operating certification of persons

NEN-EN-ISOIEC 17025

2005 General requirements for the competence of testing and calibration laboratories

ISO 3301 1975 Statistical interpretation of data ndash Comparison of two means in the case of paired observations

ISO 4965 1979 Axial load fatigue testing machines - Dynamic force calibration - Strain gauge technique April 1979

ISO 16269-6 2005 Statistical interpretation of data Determination of statistical tolerance intervals

Annex I Model certificate

Issued Replaces Issued date Valid until Indefinite Page 1 of 2

KOMOreg

Product certificate

ltName Productgt ltCertificate holdergt

STATEMENT OF CI This product certificate was issued on the basis of BRL lsquo lsquo in conformity with the regulations for Product Certification CI declares that the justifiable confidence exists that the name product supplied by the certificate holder meets the technical specifications laid down in this product certificate provided that name product has the KOMOreg mark as indicated in this product certificate Director CI Advice refer to wwwltCIgtnl to see if this certificate is valid

Certificate holder T F E I

Assessed Quality system Product

Periodic check

reg is a collective brand of Stichting Bouwkwaliteit

Annex II Model for IQC schedule or framework of IQC schedule

Subjects Aspects Method Frequency Registration

Basic materials or supplied materials bull Recipe sheets bull Inspection of incoming raw

materials bull Mechanical bull Chemical

Production process production equipment material bull Procedures bull Work instructions bull Equipment bull Material bull Process inspection

End products

Measuring and testing equipment

Measuring and testing equipment bull Measuring devices bull Calibration bull Outsourced tests

Logistics bull Internal transport bull Storage bull Packaging bull Preservation bull Identification or marking

of semi-finished and end products

Corrective measures Complaints handling

Annex III Sampling and testing overview

Type

on

derz

oek

1)

Doo

rlope

nd

inte

rn fa

brie

kson

derz

oek

Perio

diek

ex

tern

ond

erzo

ek (a

udit)

To

elat

ings

onde

rzoe

k

(type

onde

rzoe

k)

Type

bet

onst

aal

stav

enro

llen

per d

iam

eter

ge

punt

last

e w

apn

ette

n pe

r dia

-com

bina

tie

stav

enro

llen

3 bp

e va

n 1

diam

eter

8)

gepu

ntla

ste

wap

net

ten

3 bp

e va

n 1

dia-

com

bina

tie 7)

8)

stav

enro

llen

3 bp

e pe

r di

amet

er 6)

gepu

ntla

ste

wap

net

ten

3 bp

e pe

r dia

-co

mbi

natie

6) 7

) R

e 1

per 3

0 t

m

in 3

per

bpe

m

in 2

per

bpe

1

lang

s + d

war

s 5

per b

pe

5 pe

r bpe

3

lang

s + 2

dw

ars

10 p

er b

pe

10 p

er b

pe

5 la

ngs +

5 d

war

s R

mR

e id

em

idem

id

em

idem

id

em

idem

R

eac

tRe

nom

2)

idem

id

em

idem

id

em

idem

id

em

Agt

idem

id

em

idem

id

em

idem

id

em

Bui

gpro

ef

1 pe

r bpe

4)

idem

2

per b

pe

2 pe

r bpe

1

lang

s + 1

dw

ars

5 pe

r bpe

5

per b

pe

3 la

ngs +

2 d

war

s M

assa

per

m

idem

id

em 5)

id

em

idem

5)

idem

id

em 5)

G

eom

etrie

opp

en

pro

fielfa

ctor

id

em

idem

id

em

idem

id

em

Idem

Che

mis

che

sa

men

st +

Ceq

3)

1 pe

r lad

ing

1

per l

adin

g 1

per l

adin

g 1

per l

adin

g 1

per l

adin

g 1

per l

adin

g

Afs

chui

fpro

ef

nv

t m

in 2

per

bpe

n

vt

3 pe

r bpe

n

vt

3 pe

r bpe

B

uig-

te

rugb

uigt

rekp

roe

f

nv

t n

vt

2 pe

r bpe

n

vt

2 pe

r bpe

n

vt

Afm

etin

gen

nv

t m

in 1

per

bpe

n

vt

1 pe

r bpe

n

vt

1 pe

r bpe

V

erm

oeiin

g n

vt

nv

t 5

per j

aar

5 pe

r jaa

r 6

per b

pe 9)

5

per b

pe 10

)

1) The audit is always for each manufacturing process (hot-rolled-cooled -cold-stretched cold-profiles) of a certain type of reinforcing steel 2) If applicable (B500C) 3) Chemical composition + Ceq to be determined and submitted by the steel manufacturer not for each diameter (combination) 4) For bending mass and geometry surface + frfp min 1 per 150 tons 5) Can be determined for welding 6) Smallest largest and intermediate diameters (always skipping 2 consecutive diameters) of the range (deviating from EN 10080) 7) Always the most critical diameter combination that occurs 8) In a period of a maximum of 5 years number and spreading of diameters 9) For d le 28 mm the largest and middle diameters for gt 28 mm the largest diameter 10) The largest middle and smallest diameters Test unit is defined as -- barscoils the load or a part of the load (for bending mass and geometryprofile min 1 per 90 t) -- point welded reinforcement fabrics 50 tons of the same combination of reinforcing steel types and diameters manufactured with the same point welding machine

Annex IV Model for biannual reporting on reinforcing steel

Page 12: National Assessment Guideline - Kiwa · PDF fileThe NEN-EN 10080:2005 is not a harmonised standard and therefore a CE mark can not yet be attached to the products covered by this BRL

National Assessment Guideline BRL 0501 01 September 2010 copy Kiwa NV - -

11

that are greater than or equal to the value that is obtained when using the general formula for determining fR and fP (in conformity with article 1131)

434 Standard deviations Supplementary to the NEN-EN- 10080 and NEN 6008 the following values are valid for the maximum standard deviations of the variable properties

Re (MPa)

Re(act)Re(nom) RmRe Agt ()

B500A bars coils point welded fabric

30 006 002 15

B500B bars coils point welded fabric

30 006 002 bars 20 coils 20 point welded fabric 15

B500C bars coils point welded fabric

30 006 002 bars 25 coils 25 point welded fabric 15

Table 3

435 Geometry longitudinal rib Supplementary to NEN-EN-ISO 15630-1 art 1032 the rib width of the longitudinal rib if present must be measured as well The rib width is analogically measured as the rib height The requirements with respect to the longitudinal rib are mentioned in NEN 6008 table 1

436 Nominal mass per metre Contrary to NEN 6008 table 1 read lsquothe allowable deviation from the nominal mass per meterrsquo for lsquotolerance nominal diameterrsquo

437 Extra value for a2 Contrary to NEN 6008 table 1 lsquoextra valuersquo read a2 = 05 for the Agt of B500A

438 Chemical composition of reinforcing steel Contrary to NEN-EN-10080 (Dutch translation) art 713 table 2 explanation a the following applies Exceeding the maximum value for the carbon content by 003 (mass percentage) is allowed provided that the value of the carbon equivalent is decreased by 002 (mass percentage)rdquo

National Assessment Guideline BRL 0501 01 September 2010 copy Kiwa NV - -

12

439 Nominal diameters preferred range Supplementary to NEN-EN10080 the table below mentions the general and the preferred range of the nominal diameters The nominal diameters between brackets ( ) are not preferred diameters Nominal diameter

mm

Bars Coils and bars

straightened from coils

Point welded fabric

Nominal surface of the cross section

mm2

Nominal mass per

metre

kgm 40 (x) 126 0099 45 (x) 159 0125 50 (x) x 196 0154 55 (x) (x) 238 0187 60 x x x 283 0222 65 (x) (x) 332 0260 70 x x 385 0302 75 (x) (x) 442 0347 80 x x x 503 0395 85 (x) (x) 567 0445 90 x x 636 0499 95 (x) (x) 709 0556 100 x x x 785 0617 110 (x) x 950 0746 120 x x x 113 0888 140 x x x 154 121 160 x x x 201 158 200 x 314 247 250 x 491 385 280 (x) 616 483 320 x 804 631 400 x 1257 986 500 x 1963 154

Table 4

4310 Values for a1 - a4 NEN EN 100802005 section 81312 provides insufficient clarity and interpretation of how to apply these a-values The a-values included in NEN 60082008 are the absolute minimummaximum a-values that with respect to the a2 and a 4 values are for determining the individual absolute minimum and maximum variable mechanical properties as referred to in NEN EN 100802005 section 11 (testing in case of a dispute)

However when assessing the variable test results per test unit during the production inspection in the factory in conformity with NEN EN 100802005 section 813 1 in case of b) the manufacturer himself shall determine the a1234-values of the population concerned and record this in a solid procedure With these determined manufacturer-specific a-values every test unit must be tested in order to meet the required quality level in the long term ( x - ks ge Cv or x + ks le Cv) The a-values of the manufacturer must al least comply with the absolute minimummaximum a-values included in NEN 60082008 but they are usually higherlower (ie more critical)

The solid procedures with the a-values recorded for each population must always be up-to-date and demonstrate to the satisfaction of the CI that with this the required Cv values (for the longer term) are complied with If these solid procedures are (still) missing in conformity with NEN EN 100802005 section 8131 only situation a) applies so in principle all individual values of the test unit must comply with the specified Cv value

National Assessment Guideline BRL 0501 01 September 2010 copy Kiwa NV - -

13

When determining the a-values solid procedures are preferably applied using the standard deviations and the assumption probabilities

4311 Rib row distance Σe Contrary to NEN 6008 table 1 and analogue with NEN-EN 10080 read for lsquodistance rib rowsdistance Σe le 075drsquo The projection of the cross ribs must cover at least 75 of the circumference of the reinforcing steel to be calculated based on the nominal diameter In formula total distance between the rib rows Σe lt 025 πd

44 Determination methods and test criteria Supplementary and contrary to NEN-EN 10080 and NEN 6008 the following applies

441 Preliminary audit for acceptance Supplementary to NEN-EN 10080 the following data are to be provided for each of the diameters given by the certification institute before the start of the initial audit -- test results of 60 pieces from at least 3 casting loads with 20 samples each the individual

test results of 02 yield limit or flow limit ((Rp02 or Re) yield at maximum load (Agt) the tensile strength02 yield or flow limit ratio RmRp02 or Re if applicable the ratio of the actual 02 yield limit or flow limitthe nominal 02 yield limit or flow limit (ReactRenom) Also the statistic processing of these data with average value ( x ) standard deviation (s) and characteristic value (Cv)

-- test results of 5 pieces from the same loads with 5 samples each the individual test results of the bendability shearing force of point welded reinforcement fabrics mass per metre and profiling (profile factors fR fP rib height rib distance rib width rib flank α rib (inclination) angle distance between the rib rows and the longitudinal rib)

-- chemical composition of each casting load -- (casting) load numbers and roller data (min 10 tons per diameter) -- drawing or sketch of the profiling and the factory brand

442 Inspection for the attributive properties NEN-EN 10080 gives insufficient interpretation of the termination methods and test criteria for inspections for the attributive properties bendability shearing force with point welded reinforcement fabrics mass per metre and profiling (profile factors fR fP rib height rib distance rib width rib flank α rib (inclination) angle β distance between the rib rows and the longitudinal rib Contrary to NEN-EN 10080 with these attributive properties the sampling and the conformity assessment is done as follows -- with the continuous internal production inspection not for each test unit but repeatedly

for the 15 last tested bars of a diameter or a diameter-weld combination -- with the initial audit the test series is to be extended to 15 samples if necessary and to 60

samples when there is initial rejection -- with the periodic external inspection (audit) the results of the attributive properties

obtained during the audit are to be added to the internal test results of the manufacturer Testing If a maximum of 2 of the 15 measurements do not comply the sampling can be extended by 45 extra measurements with respect to the attributive property concerned In this case the attributive properties of a total of 60 test bars are available The property concerned then still complies if not more than 2 of the 60 measurements do not comply with the NEN 6008 The profiling is increasingly measured using an optical camera The manual measurement will be valid in case of disputes

4421 Inspection of the bend-bend tensile test with initial audit and during external inspections (audit testing) By means of a bend-bend back tensile test it is determined whether the reinforcing steel types B500B and B500C in the diameter range le 16 mm can be bent back once with an angle of 90deg

National Assessment Guideline BRL 0501 01 September 2010 copy Kiwa NV - -

14

without significant decrease of the Rp02 or Re RmRe and Agt compared with the non-bent bars The values may not be below the mentioned Cv values for the reinforcing steel type and delivery condition concerned Sampling and testing frequency

Delivery condition Diameter Inspection frequency bars and coils B500BB500C

d le 16 mm 6 samples of different barscoils from 3 (casting) loads for each selected diameter Samples are to be taken from the same barsloads as for the regular tensile tests

Performance of the test Take a sample of reinforcing steel of sufficient length for doing 2 tensile tests A normal tensile test is performed with the one part and a bend-bend back tensile test with the other part The minimum length for the bendbend back tensile test is 70 cm The preparation of the tensile test including the way of ageing and the way of bending is done in accordance with the stipulations in NEN-EN 10080 with the exception of the way of bending back and the bending mandrel diameter to be used The bending mandrel diameter is maximum 4d Bend the bar over a bending mandrel of maximum 4d with a maximum angle of 90deg Mark the bending zone (length ca 9d) Place the test piece in a vice or the like Place an appropriate pipe over the part of the test piece to be bent back preferably with an internal pipe diameter that is max 2 mm larger than the diameter of the test piece and bend the test piece straight again Try to make the test piece as straight as possible Here the difference between the one part and the other part of the test piece may be maximally the diameter of the test piece (the bayonet forming) Age the test piece in conformity with the stipulations of NEN-EN 10080 and perform the tensile test The test is considered to be satisfactory when - the results do not show any significant differences with the results of the non-bent test

pieces - the values are above the set Cv values If the values are not satisfactory find the cause and repeat the tests if necessary

443 Inspection for the variable properties Contrary to NEN-EN 10080 the sampling and testing is done in conformity with BRL 0501 annex 3 for the variable properties 02 yield limit or flow limit (Rp02 or Re) yield at maximum load (Agt) the tensile strength02 yield or flow limit ratio RmRp02 or Re if applicable the ratio of the actual 02 yield limit or flow limitthe nominal 02 yield limit or flow limit (ReactRenom) and the fatigue strength NEN-EN 10080 provides insufficient interpretation of the test requirements the determination methods and the test criteria for inspection for the fatigue properties Therefore the requirements given below apply supplementary to NEN-EN 10080

National Assessment Guideline BRL 0501 01 September 2010 copy Kiwa NV - -

15

4431 Inspection for the fatigue strength in initial audit Sampling and testing frequency

Delivery condition

Diameter Inspection frequency

bars and coils for d le 28 mm the middle and largest of the diameter range For d gt 28 mm the largest diameter

6 samples of different barscoils from 3 (casting) loads for each selected diameter (18 bars per diameter)

point welded fabrics

The smallest middle and largest diameter of the diameter range (always with the least favourable diameter combination)

5 samples of different bars with a point weld from 3 test units for each selected diameter (15 bars per diameter)

Test method a semi-statistical This simplified test is regarded as sufficient if the requirements given below are met

With reinforcing steel bars and coils B500B and B500C in the diameter range d le 28 mm with

the requirement aσ2 ge 175 MPa

a2σ = 175 MPa a2σ = 200 MPa Number of samples 10 sup2) Number of samples 8 sup2) Stress changes (106) Break Stress changes (106) Break

lt 15 lt 20 ge 20

none le l ge 9

lt 075 075 lt 10 10 lt 20 ge 20

none le l

le 2 1)

ge 5 1) le 3 breaks if no break occurred up to 1x106 tension changes sup2) total number 10 + 8 = 18

Table 5

With reinforcing steel bars B500B and B500C in the diameter range d gt 28 mm with the

requirement aσ2 ge 145 MPa

a2σ = 145 MPa a2σ = 170 MPa Number of samples 10 sup2) Number of samples 8 sup2) Stress changes (106) Break Stress changes (106) Break

lt 15 lt 20 ge 20

none le l ge 9

lt 075 075 lt 15 15 lt 20 ge 20

none le 2

le 2 1)

ge 4 1) le 4 breaks if no break occurred up to 15 x 106 tension changes sup2) total number 10 + 8 = 18

Table 6

With point welded fabrics B500A B500B and B500C as well as reinforcing steel bars and coils

B500A with the requirement aσ2 ge 100 MPa

a2σ = 100 MPa a2σ = 180 MPa Number of samples 10 sup1) Number of samples 5 sup1) Stress changes (106) Break Stress changes (106) Break

lt 15 lt 20 ge 20

none le l ge 9

lt 025 025 lt 05 ge 05

none le 3 ge 2

sup1) total number 10 + 5 = 15 Table 7

National Assessment Guideline BRL 0501 01 September 2010 copy Kiwa NV - -

16

Test method b fully statistical This test is done with the appropriate statistic methods considering the requirements p = 095 W = 75 set out in NEN 6008

Here the requirement Cv le x ndash ks must be complied with where x = the average value in which max 2 million load changes must be maintained

for the individual value of one test bar s = the estimate of the standard deviation of the population k = variation coefficient according to the table below (in conformity with ISO 16269-6) Cv = the characteristic value for the tension changes 1 106

n k n k n k n k 15 199 20 193 30 187 50 181 16 199 25 190 40 183 100 176 18 195

Table 8

4432 Inspection for the fatigue strength in periodic external inspections (audit testing) The numbers of test bars of one diameter given below are tested on an annual basis The sampling takes place in the presence of the inspector and is part of the audit testing -- barscoils 5 per year -- point welded fabrics 5 per year provided that in a period of 5 years at least 80 of all certified diameters (diameter combinations) has been tested With the 80 mentioned at least the following must have been tested

bull For barscoils the largest diameter in the range d le 28 mm and the largest diameter in the range d gt 28 mm

bull For point welded fabrics the smallest and the largest diameters always with the least favourable diameter combination

The test is considered to be satisfactory if

bull with the barscoils max 1 sample broke at lt 20106 stress changes and the other 4 samples have at least resisted 20106 tension changes

bull with the point welded fabrics max 1 sample broke at between 10106 and 20106 stress changes and the other 4 samples have at least resisted 20106 stress changes

For barscoils and point welded fabrics only a re-inspection can take place if no more than 2 samples broke at fewer than 20 106 stress changes In this case 5 extra samples are to be tested whereby no breaks at lt 20 106 stress changes may occur In this case the test series is satisfactory If this is not complied with further testing is necessary to find the cause and corrective measures are to be taken in order to avoid reoccurrence If necessary a new initial audit for the fatigue strength is to be performed

45 Biannual reporting The test results of all test units of the continuous inspections are to be collected and statistically evaluated for Re Agt RmRe and ReactRenom (if relevant) based on data of the production of the previous six months or the 200 most recent data dependent on which is the largest number These data shall biannually be sent to the certification institute in conformity with the model in annex 4

National Assessment Guideline BRL 0501 01 September 2010 copy Kiwa NV - -

17

46 Identification Contrary to NEN-EN 10080 art 101211 the product numbers (technical classes) are not assigned by a European organisation However the other requirements concerning the identification are observed in conformity with NEN 6008 and NEN-EN 10080

47 Certification mark Each packaging unit must have a label with the following obligatory indications

bull KOMO mark bull product certificate number + delivery condition (bars coils fabrics) bull the reinforcing steel type and the manufacturer number bull name andor logo of the manufacturer bull mentioning BRL0501

A packaging unit can be characterised

bull with reinforcing steel on coils as lsquothe coilrsquo marking min 1 label per coil bull with reinforcing steel bars as lsquothe bundlesrsquo marking min 1 label per bundle bull with point welded fabrics as lsquonumber of fabricsrsquo marking at least 1 label per unit of max

40 reinforcement fabrics or max 2 tons Additionally each point welded fabric in which only externally purchased and delivered reinforcing steel has been used must be marked in an indelible and non-removable way For example when using a ldquoSchlatter Etikettiermachinen Methoderdquo or equivalent the point welded reinforcement fabrics are to be marked with at least 1 label

National Assessment Guideline BRL 0501 01 September 2010 copy Kiwa NV - -

18

5 Requirements to the quality system

51 General This chapter includes the requirements that the quality system of the supplier has to meet

52 Administrator of the quality system A staff member is to be appointed as quality system manager within the organisational structure

53 Internal quality controlquality plan The supplier must have and use a schedule for internal quality control (an IQC schedule) in accordance with the model indicated in annex 2 In this IQC schedule the following must be demonstrably recorded

bull what aspects the manufacturer will inspect bull what methods will be used for these inspections bull the frequency of these inspections bull how to record and file the inspection results bull aspects with respect to the production of point welded reinforcement fabrics

Also the supplier must have a procedure for organising the production process of any post-stretching alignment and the reinforcement fabrics to be point welded and how this is implemented inspected and monitored This IQC schedule must have been derived from the IQC schedule included in the annex and must have been set up such that it gives the CI enough confidence that the requirements set out in this assessment guideline are continuously met

This must function at least 3 months before issuing the certificate

54 Procedures and work instructions The supplier must be able to submit

bull procedures for - handling out of spec products and (semi-)products to be repaired - corrective measures after observed defects - handling complaints about products andor services delivered - monitoring the quality using the extra value a - a4 - the work instructions and inspection forms used including the biannual reporting

(see annex 4)

55 Other requirements to the quality system

551 Reinforcing steel The following are regarded as sufficient proof that the purchased reinforcing steel complies with the product standard mentioned (NEN 6008) and other technical specifications

bull KOMO quality statement issued on the basis of BRL 0501 lsquoReinforcing steelrsquo by a certification andor attestation institute acknowledged by the Dutch Authority for Accreditation for the discipline involved

bull a (quality) statement the equivalence of which with the above-mentioned KOMO quality statement has been demonstrated

The traceability of the purchased reinforcing steel is guaranteed by the rolling mark and the labelling The origin (certificate number) of the reinforcing steel must be recorded at the initial audit

National Assessment Guideline BRL 0501 01 September 2010 copy Kiwa NV - -

19

552 Storage of reinforcing steel Reinforcing steel must be stored free from the ground Store and label reinforcing steel such that the chance of exchange for instance with foreign qualities is eliminated

National Assessment Guideline BRL 0501 01 September 2010 copy Kiwa NV - -

20

6 Requirements for the functioning of a test laboratory for testing reinforcing steel andor point welded reinforcement fabrics

61 The supplier has its own laboratory for testing reinforcing steel for its variable and attributive properties The laboratory equipment as well as the test methods must comply with

bull NEN-EN 10002-22001 Metallic materials tensile testing part 1 method of testing at ambient temperature

bull NEN-EN-ISO 15630-12002 Steel for the reinforcement and prestressing of concrete Test methods ndash Part 1 reinforcing bars wire rod and wire June 2002

bull NEN-EN-ISO 15630-22002 Steel for the reinforcement and prestressing of concrete Test methods ndash Part 2 welded fabric

Measuring equipment that has not been classified for one of the above-mentioned standards can be used as soon as they have been tested assessed and qualified by the CI

62 Outsourcing of testing Tests for the chemical composition and the fatigue strength of reinforcing steel can be outsourced as well De test results can be indicated as being lsquoperformed in a reliable wayrsquo if

bull The tests have been performed by a laboratory that meets the accreditation standard referred to in article 14 of this BRL NEN-EN-ISOIEC 17025 lsquoGeneral requirements for the competence of testing and calibration laboratoriesrsquo This accreditation must concern the performance of tests in conformity with the outsourcing assignment Besides a 31 or a 22 certificate of the results in conformity with NEN-EN 10204 is to be submitted or

bull The supplier receives the test results of the chemical composition from a company that has a product certificate of the lsquotechnical disciplinersquo (H9) mentioned in this BRL with the CI and the relevant measuring equipment in the laboratory concerned is covered by the product certificate audit

If the above requirements are not complied with the certification institute will perform or have performed the audit concerned itself In this case the certification institute will base its test on the accreditation standard NEN-EN-ISOIEC 17025

63 Verification audit An initial audit includes external verification of both the attributive and the variable properties Also an external verification for the performance of the used tensile tests takes place every two years The diameter is to be selected such that the diameters that occur most are tested in a period of 5 years When using a new tensile testing machinemeasuring equipment a verification audit is to be performed as well

National Assessment Guideline BRL 0501 01 September 2010 copy Kiwa NV - -

21

631 Variable properties For the verification of variable properties (the results of the tensile test) at least 15 random samples of one selected diameter must be taken in the presence of the inspector (audit testing) for each selected reinforcing steel type each of a length suitable for two test pieces for testing The selected representative diameters must change at the two-yearly verification With bars and coils the samples must have been spread over at least 3 loads of 1 diameter The samples for point welded reinforcement fabrics and the corresponding bars must come from 1 diameter combination produced on different days For each sample the two collected test pieces must be marked and then the test pieces must be bundled into two series of at least 15 test pieces A third series can be taken as spare series in case of discussions about the achieved results One series must be tested in the presence of the inspector at the manufacturerrsquos The inspector must have the other series tested at an external laboratory The time between the performances of both test series must be short enough to allow for neglecting any natural ageing of the testing material The test (tensile test) includes determination of the 02 yield limit or flow limit (Re) the tensile strength (Rm) the RmRe ratio and the yield with maximum load (Agt) of each individual test piece The thus obtained two series of measurement pairs must then be tested for their differences between both performances of the test Any systematic differences are to be tracked and eliminated

With the statistic comparison of two different performances of tests the differences of paired measurements are to be checked in relation with the hypothesis that the expected value of the average difference is zero (Student test) Rejection of this hypothesis indicates that there is a possibility of systematic differences For each variable property the xfi (i = 1n) of the measurement results of the manufacturer and the xei (i = 1hellip n) of the external institute must be calculated separately

bull Difference vi = xfi ndash xei considering the positive or negative difference and then the average difference

= sum

=

n

iiv

nv

1

1

bull standard deviation of the differences

minus

minus= sum

=

2

1

2

11 vnv

ns

n

iiv

bull value vsvt =

It must be verified for the variable properties the 02 yield limit or flow limit (Reee ) the tensile strength (Rmmm ) and the yield with maximum load (Aggg ttt ) whether or not t exceeds a critical limit to The critical values to depend on the number of tests and have been derived from ISO 3301 1975 with a = 001 (see table 9)

National Assessment Guideline BRL 0501 01 September 2010 copy Kiwa NV - -

22

Table 9 ndash Critical values of to

n to n to n to

10 103 11 096 12 090 13 085 14 080

15 077 16 074 17 071 18 068 19 066

20 064 25 056 30 050 35 047 40 043

If t gt to the hypothesis that there is no difference between the two series of paired measurements is rejected and so the cause of this must be found and eliminated This does not apply when sv and v are both below the reference values Sov and Vo in table 9 because of insufficient relevance

If t le to the hypothesis that there is no difference between the two series of paired measurements is not rejected The test can then be concluded unless Sv ge Sov In this case the standard deviation of the differences is excessive showing that the material concerned is unsuitable for the verification test Further investigation is then required

Table 10 ndash Reference values of Sov and Vo

sov vo 02 yield limit or flow limit 15 15 Tensile strength in MPa 15 20 Yield at maximum load in B500A B500B B500C

11 25 30

11 25 30

632 Attributive properties For the verification of attributive properties (mass per length chemical composition profiling bending test and if necessary a shearing test) the measurements of mass per length and profiling must be done in advance with the two series of at least 15 test pieces meant for the tensile test (see above) For the measurements of the bending test and shearing test (if applicable) the number of test pieces from the above described random samples must be extended with at least 5 test pieces for the bending test and if necessary the shearing test For the verification assessment of the chemical composition the number of test pieces is limited to a series of 3 test pieces from 3 test units Any combinations in the random samples of the above-mentioned verification assessments are allowed The test series at the manufacturerrsquos and the series of external tests (see above) should not produce other differences than those that can unambiguously be explained and eliminated

National Assessment Guideline BRL 0501 01 September 2010 copy Kiwa NV - -

23

7 Summary audit and inspection

Below a summary is provided of the tests to be performed for certification bull Initial audit the audit to determine whether all requirements in the BRL are met bull Inspection audit the audit performed after granting the certificate to determine whether

the certified products continuously meet the requirements set in the BRL Also indicates the frequency of the inspection audits to be performed by the certification institute (CI)

bull Inspection of the quality system inspection for compliance with the IQC schedule and the procedures

Here the frequency with which the certification institute must perform an inspection audit is indicated as well

Audit related to

Supervision by CI after granting the certificate1)

Requirement description Article BRL Initial audit

Inspection2) Frequency Product requirements bull Indication of product 2342 X X continuously bull Variable properties 4243 X X 34 x per year bull Chemical composition 4243 X X 34 x per year bull Bending test 42 X X 34 x per year bull Shearing test 42 X X 4 x per year bull Fatigue strength 4244 X X 1 x per year bull Geometry form 4243 X X 34 x per year bull Mass per unit 4243 X X 34 x per year bull Dimensions of fabricsbars 42 X X 34 x per year bull Bendndashbend back tensile

test 42 X X 3 x per year

Own testing laboratory bull Own laboratory 61 X X 1 x per year bull Outsourcing of tests 62 X X 34 x per year bull Verification audit 63 X X 1 x per 2 years System requirements bull IQC schedule 5 X X 34 x per year bull Quality mark 4647 X X 34 x per year

Table 11

1) In case of significant changes in the production process to be assessed by the CI the product requirements need to be tested again

2) The inspector or the certificate holder in the presence of the inspector will determine all product properties that can be performed within the visiting time (maximum 1 day) If this is not possible the CI and the certificate holder will make arrangements with respect to how the inspection will be performed

Inspection of the quality system The certification institute checks if the manufacturer meets the quality system requirements in chapter 5 of this BRL according to the frequency in article 86 of this BRL

National Assessment Guideline BRL 0501 01 September 2010 copy Kiwa NV - -

24

8 Requirements of de certification institute

81 General The certification institute must meet the requirements set out in EN 45011 Besides for the purpose of this BRL the institute must have been accredited by the Dutch Authority for Accreditation (RvA) or a similar body (an accreditation institute with which the RvA has entered into an agreement of mutual acceptance) The certification institute must have a set of regulations or a similar document defining the general rules to be observed during certification These particularly include bull The general rules for performance of the initial audit to be structured as follows

o The way in which suppliers are informed about the handling of a request o The performance of the audit o The decision based on the audit performed

bull The general rules concerning the performance of inspections and the inspection aspects used here

bull The measures the certification institute must take in case of defects bull The rules for terminating a certificate bull The possibility to make an appeal against decisions or measures of the certification

institute

82 Certification staff Staff involved in certification procedures include bull Auditors charged with performing the initial audit and assessing the reports of the

inspectors bull Inspectors charged with performing the external inspection at the supplierrsquos bull Decision-makers charged with taking decisions based on the initial audits performed

about continuation of certification based on inspections performed and about the necessity to take corrective measures

821 Qualification requirements A distinction is made with respect to 8211 Qualification requirements for the certification executives of a CI meeting the

requirements set out in EN 45011 8212 Supplementary qualification requirements for the certification executives of a CI as

determined by the Board of Experts for the subject of this BRL

National Assessment Guideline BRL 0501 01 September 2010 copy Kiwa NV - -

25

8211 Qualification requirements for the certification executives of a CI meeting the requirements set out in EN 45011

The qualification of the certification executives of a CI must comply with chapter 5 of EN 45011 The manual of the CI must describe how the qualification of the certification executives is performed

EN45011

Auditor

initial product assessment and assessment of the

production location

Inspector

assessment product location field and

projects after granting of certificate

Decision-maker

for granting and extending a certificate

Education General

Higher Vocational thinking and working level

Intermediate vocational working and thinking level

Higher Vocational thinking and working level

Education Specific

Basic training for auditing Basic training for auditing

Basic training for auditing

Experience General

1 year of relevant working experience with min 4 audits including 1 full initial audit done independently under supervision

1 year of relevant working experience with min 4 audits including 1 done independent under supervision

4 years of relevant working experience of which at least 1 year with respect to certification

Experience Specific

knowledge of BRL at detailed level and 4 audits related to the specific BRL or to similar BRLs

knowledge of BRL at detailed level and 4 audits related to the specific BRL or to similar BRLs

Basic knowledge of the specific certification schedule

8212 Supplementary qualification requirements for the certification executives of a CI as determined by the Board of Experts for the subject of this BRL

Certification staff Education Experience Auditor Higher vocational education level in one of the

following disciplines - Constructional engineering - Civil engineering - Mechanical engineering

2 years

Inspector Intermediate vocational education level in one of the following disciplines - ConstructionalCivil engineering - Materials science - Mechanical engineering

2 years

Decision-maker Higher vocational education level in one of the following disciplines - Constructional engineering - Civil engineering - Quality science - Mechanical engineering

4 years Managerial experience

822 Qualification Certification staff must be demonstrably qualified by comparing the education and experience with the requirements set out above If qualification takes place based on deviating criteria this must be laid down in writing The qualification authority is vested with

National Assessment Guideline BRL 0501 01 September 2010 copy Kiwa NV - -

26

bull Decision-makers qualification of auditors and inspectors bull Management of the certification institute qualification of decision-makers

83 Initial audit report The certification institute records the findings of the initial audit in a report The report must meet the following requirements bull Completeness the report makes a statement about all requirements set out in the

assessment guideline bull Traceability the findings the statement are based on must have been recorded in a

traceable way bull Basis for decision the decision-maker for granting a certificate must be able to base his

decision on the findings recorded in the report

84 Decision about granting the certificate The decision concerning the granting of the certificate must be made by a decision-maker who is qualified to do so and who has not been involved in the certificate audit himself The decision must have been recorded in a traceable way

85 Presentation of the quality statement The product certificate must be presented in conformity with the model included in the annex

86 Nature and frequency of external inspections The certification institute must regularly inspect the supplier for compliance with his obligations The Board of Experts will decide upon the frequency of the inspections At the time this assessment guideline took effect the frequency was set to bull 3 inspection visits per year at suppliers of hot-rolled products bull 4 inspection visits per year at suppliers of other products Inspections will in any case pertain to a number of matters including bull The product specifications laid down in the product specification bull The supplierrsquos production process bull The supplierrsquos IQC schedule and the results of the inspections performed by the supplier bull The correct way of marking the certified products bull Compliance with the required procedures The certification institute will lay down the findings of each inspection performed in a report in a traceable way

87 Reporting to the Board of Experts The certification institute must report on the certification activities performed at least once a year The report must include the following subjects bull Mutations in number of certificates (newlapsed) bull Number of inspections performed in relation to the determined frequency bull Inspection results bull Measures imposed in case of defects bull Complaints received from third parties with respect to certified products

88 Interpretation of requirements The Board of Experts may lay down the requirements set in this assessment guideline in a single separate interpretation document The certification institute is obliged to ensure whether an interpretation document has been drawn up and if so must make use of the interpretations laid down in this

89 Specific rules defined by the Board of Experts The Board of Experts has not defined specific rules that are to be followed with certification by the certification institute

National Assessment Guideline BRL 0501 01 September 2010 copy Kiwa NV - -

27

9 List of documents mentioned

91 Standardsnormative documents

NEN 6008 2008 Reinforcing steel NEN 6720 1995 Technical foundations for building constructions - TGB 1990 ndash

Regulations for concrete - TGB 1990 ndash Structural requirements and calculation methods (VBC 1995) September 1995 including amendment sheet A4 December 2007

NEN 6722 2002 Regulations for concrete ndash Execution December 2002 NEN 6723 1995 Regulations for concrete - Bridges ndash (VBB June 1995) Structural requirements

and calculation methods December 1995 including amendment sheet A1 December 2003

NEN-EN 1992 2005 Design of concrete structures NEN-EN 1994 2005 Design of composite steel and concrete structures NEN-EN 10002 2001 Metallic materials tensile testing - Part 1 Method of testing at ambient

temperature August 2001 NEN-EN 10080 2005 Steel for the reinforcement of concrete ndash Weldable reinforcing steel - General NEN-EN 10204 2004 Metallic products - Types of inspection documents October 2004 NEN-EN 45012 1998 General requirements for bodies operating assessment and

certificationregistration of quality systems NEN-EN-ISO 376 2004 Metallic materials - Calibration of force-proving instruments used for the

verification of uniaxial testing machines NEN-EN-ISO 7500-1 2004 Metallic materials - Verification of static uniaxial testing machines ndash

Part 1 Tensilecompression testing machines - Verification and calibration of the force-measuring system August 2004

NEN-EN-ISO 9513 2002 Metallic materials ndash Calibration of extensometers for uniaxial testing October 2002

NEN-EN-ISO 15630-1 2002 Steel for the reinforcement and prestressing of concrete - Test methods ndash Part 1 Reinforcing bars wire rod and wire June 2002

NEN-EN-ISO 15630-2 2002 Steel for the reinforcement and prestressing of concrete - Test methods ndash Part 2 Welded fabric

NEN-EN-ISOIEC 17020

2004 General criteria for the operation of various types of bodies performing inspection

NEN-EN-ISOIEC 17024

2003 Conformity assessment - General requirements for bodies operating certification of persons

NEN-EN-ISOIEC 17025

2005 General requirements for the competence of testing and calibration laboratories

ISO 3301 1975 Statistical interpretation of data ndash Comparison of two means in the case of paired observations

ISO 4965 1979 Axial load fatigue testing machines - Dynamic force calibration - Strain gauge technique April 1979

ISO 16269-6 2005 Statistical interpretation of data Determination of statistical tolerance intervals

Annex I Model certificate

Issued Replaces Issued date Valid until Indefinite Page 1 of 2

KOMOreg

Product certificate

ltName Productgt ltCertificate holdergt

STATEMENT OF CI This product certificate was issued on the basis of BRL lsquo lsquo in conformity with the regulations for Product Certification CI declares that the justifiable confidence exists that the name product supplied by the certificate holder meets the technical specifications laid down in this product certificate provided that name product has the KOMOreg mark as indicated in this product certificate Director CI Advice refer to wwwltCIgtnl to see if this certificate is valid

Certificate holder T F E I

Assessed Quality system Product

Periodic check

reg is a collective brand of Stichting Bouwkwaliteit

Annex II Model for IQC schedule or framework of IQC schedule

Subjects Aspects Method Frequency Registration

Basic materials or supplied materials bull Recipe sheets bull Inspection of incoming raw

materials bull Mechanical bull Chemical

Production process production equipment material bull Procedures bull Work instructions bull Equipment bull Material bull Process inspection

End products

Measuring and testing equipment

Measuring and testing equipment bull Measuring devices bull Calibration bull Outsourced tests

Logistics bull Internal transport bull Storage bull Packaging bull Preservation bull Identification or marking

of semi-finished and end products

Corrective measures Complaints handling

Annex III Sampling and testing overview

Type

on

derz

oek

1)

Doo

rlope

nd

inte

rn fa

brie

kson

derz

oek

Perio

diek

ex

tern

ond

erzo

ek (a

udit)

To

elat

ings

onde

rzoe

k

(type

onde

rzoe

k)

Type

bet

onst

aal

stav

enro

llen

per d

iam

eter

ge

punt

last

e w

apn

ette

n pe

r dia

-com

bina

tie

stav

enro

llen

3 bp

e va

n 1

diam

eter

8)

gepu

ntla

ste

wap

net

ten

3 bp

e va

n 1

dia-

com

bina

tie 7)

8)

stav

enro

llen

3 bp

e pe

r di

amet

er 6)

gepu

ntla

ste

wap

net

ten

3 bp

e pe

r dia

-co

mbi

natie

6) 7

) R

e 1

per 3

0 t

m

in 3

per

bpe

m

in 2

per

bpe

1

lang

s + d

war

s 5

per b

pe

5 pe

r bpe

3

lang

s + 2

dw

ars

10 p

er b

pe

10 p

er b

pe

5 la

ngs +

5 d

war

s R

mR

e id

em

idem

id

em

idem

id

em

idem

R

eac

tRe

nom

2)

idem

id

em

idem

id

em

idem

id

em

Agt

idem

id

em

idem

id

em

idem

id

em

Bui

gpro

ef

1 pe

r bpe

4)

idem

2

per b

pe

2 pe

r bpe

1

lang

s + 1

dw

ars

5 pe

r bpe

5

per b

pe

3 la

ngs +

2 d

war

s M

assa

per

m

idem

id

em 5)

id

em

idem

5)

idem

id

em 5)

G

eom

etrie

opp

en

pro

fielfa

ctor

id

em

idem

id

em

idem

id

em

Idem

Che

mis

che

sa

men

st +

Ceq

3)

1 pe

r lad

ing

1

per l

adin

g 1

per l

adin

g 1

per l

adin

g 1

per l

adin

g 1

per l

adin

g

Afs

chui

fpro

ef

nv

t m

in 2

per

bpe

n

vt

3 pe

r bpe

n

vt

3 pe

r bpe

B

uig-

te

rugb

uigt

rekp

roe

f

nv

t n

vt

2 pe

r bpe

n

vt

2 pe

r bpe

n

vt

Afm

etin

gen

nv

t m

in 1

per

bpe

n

vt

1 pe

r bpe

n

vt

1 pe

r bpe

V

erm

oeiin

g n

vt

nv

t 5

per j

aar

5 pe

r jaa

r 6

per b

pe 9)

5

per b

pe 10

)

1) The audit is always for each manufacturing process (hot-rolled-cooled -cold-stretched cold-profiles) of a certain type of reinforcing steel 2) If applicable (B500C) 3) Chemical composition + Ceq to be determined and submitted by the steel manufacturer not for each diameter (combination) 4) For bending mass and geometry surface + frfp min 1 per 150 tons 5) Can be determined for welding 6) Smallest largest and intermediate diameters (always skipping 2 consecutive diameters) of the range (deviating from EN 10080) 7) Always the most critical diameter combination that occurs 8) In a period of a maximum of 5 years number and spreading of diameters 9) For d le 28 mm the largest and middle diameters for gt 28 mm the largest diameter 10) The largest middle and smallest diameters Test unit is defined as -- barscoils the load or a part of the load (for bending mass and geometryprofile min 1 per 90 t) -- point welded reinforcement fabrics 50 tons of the same combination of reinforcing steel types and diameters manufactured with the same point welding machine

Annex IV Model for biannual reporting on reinforcing steel

Page 13: National Assessment Guideline - Kiwa · PDF fileThe NEN-EN 10080:2005 is not a harmonised standard and therefore a CE mark can not yet be attached to the products covered by this BRL

National Assessment Guideline BRL 0501 01 September 2010 copy Kiwa NV - -

12

439 Nominal diameters preferred range Supplementary to NEN-EN10080 the table below mentions the general and the preferred range of the nominal diameters The nominal diameters between brackets ( ) are not preferred diameters Nominal diameter

mm

Bars Coils and bars

straightened from coils

Point welded fabric

Nominal surface of the cross section

mm2

Nominal mass per

metre

kgm 40 (x) 126 0099 45 (x) 159 0125 50 (x) x 196 0154 55 (x) (x) 238 0187 60 x x x 283 0222 65 (x) (x) 332 0260 70 x x 385 0302 75 (x) (x) 442 0347 80 x x x 503 0395 85 (x) (x) 567 0445 90 x x 636 0499 95 (x) (x) 709 0556 100 x x x 785 0617 110 (x) x 950 0746 120 x x x 113 0888 140 x x x 154 121 160 x x x 201 158 200 x 314 247 250 x 491 385 280 (x) 616 483 320 x 804 631 400 x 1257 986 500 x 1963 154

Table 4

4310 Values for a1 - a4 NEN EN 100802005 section 81312 provides insufficient clarity and interpretation of how to apply these a-values The a-values included in NEN 60082008 are the absolute minimummaximum a-values that with respect to the a2 and a 4 values are for determining the individual absolute minimum and maximum variable mechanical properties as referred to in NEN EN 100802005 section 11 (testing in case of a dispute)

However when assessing the variable test results per test unit during the production inspection in the factory in conformity with NEN EN 100802005 section 813 1 in case of b) the manufacturer himself shall determine the a1234-values of the population concerned and record this in a solid procedure With these determined manufacturer-specific a-values every test unit must be tested in order to meet the required quality level in the long term ( x - ks ge Cv or x + ks le Cv) The a-values of the manufacturer must al least comply with the absolute minimummaximum a-values included in NEN 60082008 but they are usually higherlower (ie more critical)

The solid procedures with the a-values recorded for each population must always be up-to-date and demonstrate to the satisfaction of the CI that with this the required Cv values (for the longer term) are complied with If these solid procedures are (still) missing in conformity with NEN EN 100802005 section 8131 only situation a) applies so in principle all individual values of the test unit must comply with the specified Cv value

National Assessment Guideline BRL 0501 01 September 2010 copy Kiwa NV - -

13

When determining the a-values solid procedures are preferably applied using the standard deviations and the assumption probabilities

4311 Rib row distance Σe Contrary to NEN 6008 table 1 and analogue with NEN-EN 10080 read for lsquodistance rib rowsdistance Σe le 075drsquo The projection of the cross ribs must cover at least 75 of the circumference of the reinforcing steel to be calculated based on the nominal diameter In formula total distance between the rib rows Σe lt 025 πd

44 Determination methods and test criteria Supplementary and contrary to NEN-EN 10080 and NEN 6008 the following applies

441 Preliminary audit for acceptance Supplementary to NEN-EN 10080 the following data are to be provided for each of the diameters given by the certification institute before the start of the initial audit -- test results of 60 pieces from at least 3 casting loads with 20 samples each the individual

test results of 02 yield limit or flow limit ((Rp02 or Re) yield at maximum load (Agt) the tensile strength02 yield or flow limit ratio RmRp02 or Re if applicable the ratio of the actual 02 yield limit or flow limitthe nominal 02 yield limit or flow limit (ReactRenom) Also the statistic processing of these data with average value ( x ) standard deviation (s) and characteristic value (Cv)

-- test results of 5 pieces from the same loads with 5 samples each the individual test results of the bendability shearing force of point welded reinforcement fabrics mass per metre and profiling (profile factors fR fP rib height rib distance rib width rib flank α rib (inclination) angle distance between the rib rows and the longitudinal rib)

-- chemical composition of each casting load -- (casting) load numbers and roller data (min 10 tons per diameter) -- drawing or sketch of the profiling and the factory brand

442 Inspection for the attributive properties NEN-EN 10080 gives insufficient interpretation of the termination methods and test criteria for inspections for the attributive properties bendability shearing force with point welded reinforcement fabrics mass per metre and profiling (profile factors fR fP rib height rib distance rib width rib flank α rib (inclination) angle β distance between the rib rows and the longitudinal rib Contrary to NEN-EN 10080 with these attributive properties the sampling and the conformity assessment is done as follows -- with the continuous internal production inspection not for each test unit but repeatedly

for the 15 last tested bars of a diameter or a diameter-weld combination -- with the initial audit the test series is to be extended to 15 samples if necessary and to 60

samples when there is initial rejection -- with the periodic external inspection (audit) the results of the attributive properties

obtained during the audit are to be added to the internal test results of the manufacturer Testing If a maximum of 2 of the 15 measurements do not comply the sampling can be extended by 45 extra measurements with respect to the attributive property concerned In this case the attributive properties of a total of 60 test bars are available The property concerned then still complies if not more than 2 of the 60 measurements do not comply with the NEN 6008 The profiling is increasingly measured using an optical camera The manual measurement will be valid in case of disputes

4421 Inspection of the bend-bend tensile test with initial audit and during external inspections (audit testing) By means of a bend-bend back tensile test it is determined whether the reinforcing steel types B500B and B500C in the diameter range le 16 mm can be bent back once with an angle of 90deg

National Assessment Guideline BRL 0501 01 September 2010 copy Kiwa NV - -

14

without significant decrease of the Rp02 or Re RmRe and Agt compared with the non-bent bars The values may not be below the mentioned Cv values for the reinforcing steel type and delivery condition concerned Sampling and testing frequency

Delivery condition Diameter Inspection frequency bars and coils B500BB500C

d le 16 mm 6 samples of different barscoils from 3 (casting) loads for each selected diameter Samples are to be taken from the same barsloads as for the regular tensile tests

Performance of the test Take a sample of reinforcing steel of sufficient length for doing 2 tensile tests A normal tensile test is performed with the one part and a bend-bend back tensile test with the other part The minimum length for the bendbend back tensile test is 70 cm The preparation of the tensile test including the way of ageing and the way of bending is done in accordance with the stipulations in NEN-EN 10080 with the exception of the way of bending back and the bending mandrel diameter to be used The bending mandrel diameter is maximum 4d Bend the bar over a bending mandrel of maximum 4d with a maximum angle of 90deg Mark the bending zone (length ca 9d) Place the test piece in a vice or the like Place an appropriate pipe over the part of the test piece to be bent back preferably with an internal pipe diameter that is max 2 mm larger than the diameter of the test piece and bend the test piece straight again Try to make the test piece as straight as possible Here the difference between the one part and the other part of the test piece may be maximally the diameter of the test piece (the bayonet forming) Age the test piece in conformity with the stipulations of NEN-EN 10080 and perform the tensile test The test is considered to be satisfactory when - the results do not show any significant differences with the results of the non-bent test

pieces - the values are above the set Cv values If the values are not satisfactory find the cause and repeat the tests if necessary

443 Inspection for the variable properties Contrary to NEN-EN 10080 the sampling and testing is done in conformity with BRL 0501 annex 3 for the variable properties 02 yield limit or flow limit (Rp02 or Re) yield at maximum load (Agt) the tensile strength02 yield or flow limit ratio RmRp02 or Re if applicable the ratio of the actual 02 yield limit or flow limitthe nominal 02 yield limit or flow limit (ReactRenom) and the fatigue strength NEN-EN 10080 provides insufficient interpretation of the test requirements the determination methods and the test criteria for inspection for the fatigue properties Therefore the requirements given below apply supplementary to NEN-EN 10080

National Assessment Guideline BRL 0501 01 September 2010 copy Kiwa NV - -

15

4431 Inspection for the fatigue strength in initial audit Sampling and testing frequency

Delivery condition

Diameter Inspection frequency

bars and coils for d le 28 mm the middle and largest of the diameter range For d gt 28 mm the largest diameter

6 samples of different barscoils from 3 (casting) loads for each selected diameter (18 bars per diameter)

point welded fabrics

The smallest middle and largest diameter of the diameter range (always with the least favourable diameter combination)

5 samples of different bars with a point weld from 3 test units for each selected diameter (15 bars per diameter)

Test method a semi-statistical This simplified test is regarded as sufficient if the requirements given below are met

With reinforcing steel bars and coils B500B and B500C in the diameter range d le 28 mm with

the requirement aσ2 ge 175 MPa

a2σ = 175 MPa a2σ = 200 MPa Number of samples 10 sup2) Number of samples 8 sup2) Stress changes (106) Break Stress changes (106) Break

lt 15 lt 20 ge 20

none le l ge 9

lt 075 075 lt 10 10 lt 20 ge 20

none le l

le 2 1)

ge 5 1) le 3 breaks if no break occurred up to 1x106 tension changes sup2) total number 10 + 8 = 18

Table 5

With reinforcing steel bars B500B and B500C in the diameter range d gt 28 mm with the

requirement aσ2 ge 145 MPa

a2σ = 145 MPa a2σ = 170 MPa Number of samples 10 sup2) Number of samples 8 sup2) Stress changes (106) Break Stress changes (106) Break

lt 15 lt 20 ge 20

none le l ge 9

lt 075 075 lt 15 15 lt 20 ge 20

none le 2

le 2 1)

ge 4 1) le 4 breaks if no break occurred up to 15 x 106 tension changes sup2) total number 10 + 8 = 18

Table 6

With point welded fabrics B500A B500B and B500C as well as reinforcing steel bars and coils

B500A with the requirement aσ2 ge 100 MPa

a2σ = 100 MPa a2σ = 180 MPa Number of samples 10 sup1) Number of samples 5 sup1) Stress changes (106) Break Stress changes (106) Break

lt 15 lt 20 ge 20

none le l ge 9

lt 025 025 lt 05 ge 05

none le 3 ge 2

sup1) total number 10 + 5 = 15 Table 7

National Assessment Guideline BRL 0501 01 September 2010 copy Kiwa NV - -

16

Test method b fully statistical This test is done with the appropriate statistic methods considering the requirements p = 095 W = 75 set out in NEN 6008

Here the requirement Cv le x ndash ks must be complied with where x = the average value in which max 2 million load changes must be maintained

for the individual value of one test bar s = the estimate of the standard deviation of the population k = variation coefficient according to the table below (in conformity with ISO 16269-6) Cv = the characteristic value for the tension changes 1 106

n k n k n k n k 15 199 20 193 30 187 50 181 16 199 25 190 40 183 100 176 18 195

Table 8

4432 Inspection for the fatigue strength in periodic external inspections (audit testing) The numbers of test bars of one diameter given below are tested on an annual basis The sampling takes place in the presence of the inspector and is part of the audit testing -- barscoils 5 per year -- point welded fabrics 5 per year provided that in a period of 5 years at least 80 of all certified diameters (diameter combinations) has been tested With the 80 mentioned at least the following must have been tested

bull For barscoils the largest diameter in the range d le 28 mm and the largest diameter in the range d gt 28 mm

bull For point welded fabrics the smallest and the largest diameters always with the least favourable diameter combination

The test is considered to be satisfactory if

bull with the barscoils max 1 sample broke at lt 20106 stress changes and the other 4 samples have at least resisted 20106 tension changes

bull with the point welded fabrics max 1 sample broke at between 10106 and 20106 stress changes and the other 4 samples have at least resisted 20106 stress changes

For barscoils and point welded fabrics only a re-inspection can take place if no more than 2 samples broke at fewer than 20 106 stress changes In this case 5 extra samples are to be tested whereby no breaks at lt 20 106 stress changes may occur In this case the test series is satisfactory If this is not complied with further testing is necessary to find the cause and corrective measures are to be taken in order to avoid reoccurrence If necessary a new initial audit for the fatigue strength is to be performed

45 Biannual reporting The test results of all test units of the continuous inspections are to be collected and statistically evaluated for Re Agt RmRe and ReactRenom (if relevant) based on data of the production of the previous six months or the 200 most recent data dependent on which is the largest number These data shall biannually be sent to the certification institute in conformity with the model in annex 4

National Assessment Guideline BRL 0501 01 September 2010 copy Kiwa NV - -

17

46 Identification Contrary to NEN-EN 10080 art 101211 the product numbers (technical classes) are not assigned by a European organisation However the other requirements concerning the identification are observed in conformity with NEN 6008 and NEN-EN 10080

47 Certification mark Each packaging unit must have a label with the following obligatory indications

bull KOMO mark bull product certificate number + delivery condition (bars coils fabrics) bull the reinforcing steel type and the manufacturer number bull name andor logo of the manufacturer bull mentioning BRL0501

A packaging unit can be characterised

bull with reinforcing steel on coils as lsquothe coilrsquo marking min 1 label per coil bull with reinforcing steel bars as lsquothe bundlesrsquo marking min 1 label per bundle bull with point welded fabrics as lsquonumber of fabricsrsquo marking at least 1 label per unit of max

40 reinforcement fabrics or max 2 tons Additionally each point welded fabric in which only externally purchased and delivered reinforcing steel has been used must be marked in an indelible and non-removable way For example when using a ldquoSchlatter Etikettiermachinen Methoderdquo or equivalent the point welded reinforcement fabrics are to be marked with at least 1 label

National Assessment Guideline BRL 0501 01 September 2010 copy Kiwa NV - -

18

5 Requirements to the quality system

51 General This chapter includes the requirements that the quality system of the supplier has to meet

52 Administrator of the quality system A staff member is to be appointed as quality system manager within the organisational structure

53 Internal quality controlquality plan The supplier must have and use a schedule for internal quality control (an IQC schedule) in accordance with the model indicated in annex 2 In this IQC schedule the following must be demonstrably recorded

bull what aspects the manufacturer will inspect bull what methods will be used for these inspections bull the frequency of these inspections bull how to record and file the inspection results bull aspects with respect to the production of point welded reinforcement fabrics

Also the supplier must have a procedure for organising the production process of any post-stretching alignment and the reinforcement fabrics to be point welded and how this is implemented inspected and monitored This IQC schedule must have been derived from the IQC schedule included in the annex and must have been set up such that it gives the CI enough confidence that the requirements set out in this assessment guideline are continuously met

This must function at least 3 months before issuing the certificate

54 Procedures and work instructions The supplier must be able to submit

bull procedures for - handling out of spec products and (semi-)products to be repaired - corrective measures after observed defects - handling complaints about products andor services delivered - monitoring the quality using the extra value a - a4 - the work instructions and inspection forms used including the biannual reporting

(see annex 4)

55 Other requirements to the quality system

551 Reinforcing steel The following are regarded as sufficient proof that the purchased reinforcing steel complies with the product standard mentioned (NEN 6008) and other technical specifications

bull KOMO quality statement issued on the basis of BRL 0501 lsquoReinforcing steelrsquo by a certification andor attestation institute acknowledged by the Dutch Authority for Accreditation for the discipline involved

bull a (quality) statement the equivalence of which with the above-mentioned KOMO quality statement has been demonstrated

The traceability of the purchased reinforcing steel is guaranteed by the rolling mark and the labelling The origin (certificate number) of the reinforcing steel must be recorded at the initial audit

National Assessment Guideline BRL 0501 01 September 2010 copy Kiwa NV - -

19

552 Storage of reinforcing steel Reinforcing steel must be stored free from the ground Store and label reinforcing steel such that the chance of exchange for instance with foreign qualities is eliminated

National Assessment Guideline BRL 0501 01 September 2010 copy Kiwa NV - -

20

6 Requirements for the functioning of a test laboratory for testing reinforcing steel andor point welded reinforcement fabrics

61 The supplier has its own laboratory for testing reinforcing steel for its variable and attributive properties The laboratory equipment as well as the test methods must comply with

bull NEN-EN 10002-22001 Metallic materials tensile testing part 1 method of testing at ambient temperature

bull NEN-EN-ISO 15630-12002 Steel for the reinforcement and prestressing of concrete Test methods ndash Part 1 reinforcing bars wire rod and wire June 2002

bull NEN-EN-ISO 15630-22002 Steel for the reinforcement and prestressing of concrete Test methods ndash Part 2 welded fabric

Measuring equipment that has not been classified for one of the above-mentioned standards can be used as soon as they have been tested assessed and qualified by the CI

62 Outsourcing of testing Tests for the chemical composition and the fatigue strength of reinforcing steel can be outsourced as well De test results can be indicated as being lsquoperformed in a reliable wayrsquo if

bull The tests have been performed by a laboratory that meets the accreditation standard referred to in article 14 of this BRL NEN-EN-ISOIEC 17025 lsquoGeneral requirements for the competence of testing and calibration laboratoriesrsquo This accreditation must concern the performance of tests in conformity with the outsourcing assignment Besides a 31 or a 22 certificate of the results in conformity with NEN-EN 10204 is to be submitted or

bull The supplier receives the test results of the chemical composition from a company that has a product certificate of the lsquotechnical disciplinersquo (H9) mentioned in this BRL with the CI and the relevant measuring equipment in the laboratory concerned is covered by the product certificate audit

If the above requirements are not complied with the certification institute will perform or have performed the audit concerned itself In this case the certification institute will base its test on the accreditation standard NEN-EN-ISOIEC 17025

63 Verification audit An initial audit includes external verification of both the attributive and the variable properties Also an external verification for the performance of the used tensile tests takes place every two years The diameter is to be selected such that the diameters that occur most are tested in a period of 5 years When using a new tensile testing machinemeasuring equipment a verification audit is to be performed as well

National Assessment Guideline BRL 0501 01 September 2010 copy Kiwa NV - -

21

631 Variable properties For the verification of variable properties (the results of the tensile test) at least 15 random samples of one selected diameter must be taken in the presence of the inspector (audit testing) for each selected reinforcing steel type each of a length suitable for two test pieces for testing The selected representative diameters must change at the two-yearly verification With bars and coils the samples must have been spread over at least 3 loads of 1 diameter The samples for point welded reinforcement fabrics and the corresponding bars must come from 1 diameter combination produced on different days For each sample the two collected test pieces must be marked and then the test pieces must be bundled into two series of at least 15 test pieces A third series can be taken as spare series in case of discussions about the achieved results One series must be tested in the presence of the inspector at the manufacturerrsquos The inspector must have the other series tested at an external laboratory The time between the performances of both test series must be short enough to allow for neglecting any natural ageing of the testing material The test (tensile test) includes determination of the 02 yield limit or flow limit (Re) the tensile strength (Rm) the RmRe ratio and the yield with maximum load (Agt) of each individual test piece The thus obtained two series of measurement pairs must then be tested for their differences between both performances of the test Any systematic differences are to be tracked and eliminated

With the statistic comparison of two different performances of tests the differences of paired measurements are to be checked in relation with the hypothesis that the expected value of the average difference is zero (Student test) Rejection of this hypothesis indicates that there is a possibility of systematic differences For each variable property the xfi (i = 1n) of the measurement results of the manufacturer and the xei (i = 1hellip n) of the external institute must be calculated separately

bull Difference vi = xfi ndash xei considering the positive or negative difference and then the average difference

= sum

=

n

iiv

nv

1

1

bull standard deviation of the differences

minus

minus= sum

=

2

1

2

11 vnv

ns

n

iiv

bull value vsvt =

It must be verified for the variable properties the 02 yield limit or flow limit (Reee ) the tensile strength (Rmmm ) and the yield with maximum load (Aggg ttt ) whether or not t exceeds a critical limit to The critical values to depend on the number of tests and have been derived from ISO 3301 1975 with a = 001 (see table 9)

National Assessment Guideline BRL 0501 01 September 2010 copy Kiwa NV - -

22

Table 9 ndash Critical values of to

n to n to n to

10 103 11 096 12 090 13 085 14 080

15 077 16 074 17 071 18 068 19 066

20 064 25 056 30 050 35 047 40 043

If t gt to the hypothesis that there is no difference between the two series of paired measurements is rejected and so the cause of this must be found and eliminated This does not apply when sv and v are both below the reference values Sov and Vo in table 9 because of insufficient relevance

If t le to the hypothesis that there is no difference between the two series of paired measurements is not rejected The test can then be concluded unless Sv ge Sov In this case the standard deviation of the differences is excessive showing that the material concerned is unsuitable for the verification test Further investigation is then required

Table 10 ndash Reference values of Sov and Vo

sov vo 02 yield limit or flow limit 15 15 Tensile strength in MPa 15 20 Yield at maximum load in B500A B500B B500C

11 25 30

11 25 30

632 Attributive properties For the verification of attributive properties (mass per length chemical composition profiling bending test and if necessary a shearing test) the measurements of mass per length and profiling must be done in advance with the two series of at least 15 test pieces meant for the tensile test (see above) For the measurements of the bending test and shearing test (if applicable) the number of test pieces from the above described random samples must be extended with at least 5 test pieces for the bending test and if necessary the shearing test For the verification assessment of the chemical composition the number of test pieces is limited to a series of 3 test pieces from 3 test units Any combinations in the random samples of the above-mentioned verification assessments are allowed The test series at the manufacturerrsquos and the series of external tests (see above) should not produce other differences than those that can unambiguously be explained and eliminated

National Assessment Guideline BRL 0501 01 September 2010 copy Kiwa NV - -

23

7 Summary audit and inspection

Below a summary is provided of the tests to be performed for certification bull Initial audit the audit to determine whether all requirements in the BRL are met bull Inspection audit the audit performed after granting the certificate to determine whether

the certified products continuously meet the requirements set in the BRL Also indicates the frequency of the inspection audits to be performed by the certification institute (CI)

bull Inspection of the quality system inspection for compliance with the IQC schedule and the procedures

Here the frequency with which the certification institute must perform an inspection audit is indicated as well

Audit related to

Supervision by CI after granting the certificate1)

Requirement description Article BRL Initial audit

Inspection2) Frequency Product requirements bull Indication of product 2342 X X continuously bull Variable properties 4243 X X 34 x per year bull Chemical composition 4243 X X 34 x per year bull Bending test 42 X X 34 x per year bull Shearing test 42 X X 4 x per year bull Fatigue strength 4244 X X 1 x per year bull Geometry form 4243 X X 34 x per year bull Mass per unit 4243 X X 34 x per year bull Dimensions of fabricsbars 42 X X 34 x per year bull Bendndashbend back tensile

test 42 X X 3 x per year

Own testing laboratory bull Own laboratory 61 X X 1 x per year bull Outsourcing of tests 62 X X 34 x per year bull Verification audit 63 X X 1 x per 2 years System requirements bull IQC schedule 5 X X 34 x per year bull Quality mark 4647 X X 34 x per year

Table 11

1) In case of significant changes in the production process to be assessed by the CI the product requirements need to be tested again

2) The inspector or the certificate holder in the presence of the inspector will determine all product properties that can be performed within the visiting time (maximum 1 day) If this is not possible the CI and the certificate holder will make arrangements with respect to how the inspection will be performed

Inspection of the quality system The certification institute checks if the manufacturer meets the quality system requirements in chapter 5 of this BRL according to the frequency in article 86 of this BRL

National Assessment Guideline BRL 0501 01 September 2010 copy Kiwa NV - -

24

8 Requirements of de certification institute

81 General The certification institute must meet the requirements set out in EN 45011 Besides for the purpose of this BRL the institute must have been accredited by the Dutch Authority for Accreditation (RvA) or a similar body (an accreditation institute with which the RvA has entered into an agreement of mutual acceptance) The certification institute must have a set of regulations or a similar document defining the general rules to be observed during certification These particularly include bull The general rules for performance of the initial audit to be structured as follows

o The way in which suppliers are informed about the handling of a request o The performance of the audit o The decision based on the audit performed

bull The general rules concerning the performance of inspections and the inspection aspects used here

bull The measures the certification institute must take in case of defects bull The rules for terminating a certificate bull The possibility to make an appeal against decisions or measures of the certification

institute

82 Certification staff Staff involved in certification procedures include bull Auditors charged with performing the initial audit and assessing the reports of the

inspectors bull Inspectors charged with performing the external inspection at the supplierrsquos bull Decision-makers charged with taking decisions based on the initial audits performed

about continuation of certification based on inspections performed and about the necessity to take corrective measures

821 Qualification requirements A distinction is made with respect to 8211 Qualification requirements for the certification executives of a CI meeting the

requirements set out in EN 45011 8212 Supplementary qualification requirements for the certification executives of a CI as

determined by the Board of Experts for the subject of this BRL

National Assessment Guideline BRL 0501 01 September 2010 copy Kiwa NV - -

25

8211 Qualification requirements for the certification executives of a CI meeting the requirements set out in EN 45011

The qualification of the certification executives of a CI must comply with chapter 5 of EN 45011 The manual of the CI must describe how the qualification of the certification executives is performed

EN45011

Auditor

initial product assessment and assessment of the

production location

Inspector

assessment product location field and

projects after granting of certificate

Decision-maker

for granting and extending a certificate

Education General

Higher Vocational thinking and working level

Intermediate vocational working and thinking level

Higher Vocational thinking and working level

Education Specific

Basic training for auditing Basic training for auditing

Basic training for auditing

Experience General

1 year of relevant working experience with min 4 audits including 1 full initial audit done independently under supervision

1 year of relevant working experience with min 4 audits including 1 done independent under supervision

4 years of relevant working experience of which at least 1 year with respect to certification

Experience Specific

knowledge of BRL at detailed level and 4 audits related to the specific BRL or to similar BRLs

knowledge of BRL at detailed level and 4 audits related to the specific BRL or to similar BRLs

Basic knowledge of the specific certification schedule

8212 Supplementary qualification requirements for the certification executives of a CI as determined by the Board of Experts for the subject of this BRL

Certification staff Education Experience Auditor Higher vocational education level in one of the

following disciplines - Constructional engineering - Civil engineering - Mechanical engineering

2 years

Inspector Intermediate vocational education level in one of the following disciplines - ConstructionalCivil engineering - Materials science - Mechanical engineering

2 years

Decision-maker Higher vocational education level in one of the following disciplines - Constructional engineering - Civil engineering - Quality science - Mechanical engineering

4 years Managerial experience

822 Qualification Certification staff must be demonstrably qualified by comparing the education and experience with the requirements set out above If qualification takes place based on deviating criteria this must be laid down in writing The qualification authority is vested with

National Assessment Guideline BRL 0501 01 September 2010 copy Kiwa NV - -

26

bull Decision-makers qualification of auditors and inspectors bull Management of the certification institute qualification of decision-makers

83 Initial audit report The certification institute records the findings of the initial audit in a report The report must meet the following requirements bull Completeness the report makes a statement about all requirements set out in the

assessment guideline bull Traceability the findings the statement are based on must have been recorded in a

traceable way bull Basis for decision the decision-maker for granting a certificate must be able to base his

decision on the findings recorded in the report

84 Decision about granting the certificate The decision concerning the granting of the certificate must be made by a decision-maker who is qualified to do so and who has not been involved in the certificate audit himself The decision must have been recorded in a traceable way

85 Presentation of the quality statement The product certificate must be presented in conformity with the model included in the annex

86 Nature and frequency of external inspections The certification institute must regularly inspect the supplier for compliance with his obligations The Board of Experts will decide upon the frequency of the inspections At the time this assessment guideline took effect the frequency was set to bull 3 inspection visits per year at suppliers of hot-rolled products bull 4 inspection visits per year at suppliers of other products Inspections will in any case pertain to a number of matters including bull The product specifications laid down in the product specification bull The supplierrsquos production process bull The supplierrsquos IQC schedule and the results of the inspections performed by the supplier bull The correct way of marking the certified products bull Compliance with the required procedures The certification institute will lay down the findings of each inspection performed in a report in a traceable way

87 Reporting to the Board of Experts The certification institute must report on the certification activities performed at least once a year The report must include the following subjects bull Mutations in number of certificates (newlapsed) bull Number of inspections performed in relation to the determined frequency bull Inspection results bull Measures imposed in case of defects bull Complaints received from third parties with respect to certified products

88 Interpretation of requirements The Board of Experts may lay down the requirements set in this assessment guideline in a single separate interpretation document The certification institute is obliged to ensure whether an interpretation document has been drawn up and if so must make use of the interpretations laid down in this

89 Specific rules defined by the Board of Experts The Board of Experts has not defined specific rules that are to be followed with certification by the certification institute

National Assessment Guideline BRL 0501 01 September 2010 copy Kiwa NV - -

27

9 List of documents mentioned

91 Standardsnormative documents

NEN 6008 2008 Reinforcing steel NEN 6720 1995 Technical foundations for building constructions - TGB 1990 ndash

Regulations for concrete - TGB 1990 ndash Structural requirements and calculation methods (VBC 1995) September 1995 including amendment sheet A4 December 2007

NEN 6722 2002 Regulations for concrete ndash Execution December 2002 NEN 6723 1995 Regulations for concrete - Bridges ndash (VBB June 1995) Structural requirements

and calculation methods December 1995 including amendment sheet A1 December 2003

NEN-EN 1992 2005 Design of concrete structures NEN-EN 1994 2005 Design of composite steel and concrete structures NEN-EN 10002 2001 Metallic materials tensile testing - Part 1 Method of testing at ambient

temperature August 2001 NEN-EN 10080 2005 Steel for the reinforcement of concrete ndash Weldable reinforcing steel - General NEN-EN 10204 2004 Metallic products - Types of inspection documents October 2004 NEN-EN 45012 1998 General requirements for bodies operating assessment and

certificationregistration of quality systems NEN-EN-ISO 376 2004 Metallic materials - Calibration of force-proving instruments used for the

verification of uniaxial testing machines NEN-EN-ISO 7500-1 2004 Metallic materials - Verification of static uniaxial testing machines ndash

Part 1 Tensilecompression testing machines - Verification and calibration of the force-measuring system August 2004

NEN-EN-ISO 9513 2002 Metallic materials ndash Calibration of extensometers for uniaxial testing October 2002

NEN-EN-ISO 15630-1 2002 Steel for the reinforcement and prestressing of concrete - Test methods ndash Part 1 Reinforcing bars wire rod and wire June 2002

NEN-EN-ISO 15630-2 2002 Steel for the reinforcement and prestressing of concrete - Test methods ndash Part 2 Welded fabric

NEN-EN-ISOIEC 17020

2004 General criteria for the operation of various types of bodies performing inspection

NEN-EN-ISOIEC 17024

2003 Conformity assessment - General requirements for bodies operating certification of persons

NEN-EN-ISOIEC 17025

2005 General requirements for the competence of testing and calibration laboratories

ISO 3301 1975 Statistical interpretation of data ndash Comparison of two means in the case of paired observations

ISO 4965 1979 Axial load fatigue testing machines - Dynamic force calibration - Strain gauge technique April 1979

ISO 16269-6 2005 Statistical interpretation of data Determination of statistical tolerance intervals

Annex I Model certificate

Issued Replaces Issued date Valid until Indefinite Page 1 of 2

KOMOreg

Product certificate

ltName Productgt ltCertificate holdergt

STATEMENT OF CI This product certificate was issued on the basis of BRL lsquo lsquo in conformity with the regulations for Product Certification CI declares that the justifiable confidence exists that the name product supplied by the certificate holder meets the technical specifications laid down in this product certificate provided that name product has the KOMOreg mark as indicated in this product certificate Director CI Advice refer to wwwltCIgtnl to see if this certificate is valid

Certificate holder T F E I

Assessed Quality system Product

Periodic check

reg is a collective brand of Stichting Bouwkwaliteit

Annex II Model for IQC schedule or framework of IQC schedule

Subjects Aspects Method Frequency Registration

Basic materials or supplied materials bull Recipe sheets bull Inspection of incoming raw

materials bull Mechanical bull Chemical

Production process production equipment material bull Procedures bull Work instructions bull Equipment bull Material bull Process inspection

End products

Measuring and testing equipment

Measuring and testing equipment bull Measuring devices bull Calibration bull Outsourced tests

Logistics bull Internal transport bull Storage bull Packaging bull Preservation bull Identification or marking

of semi-finished and end products

Corrective measures Complaints handling

Annex III Sampling and testing overview

Type

on

derz

oek

1)

Doo

rlope

nd

inte

rn fa

brie

kson

derz

oek

Perio

diek

ex

tern

ond

erzo

ek (a

udit)

To

elat

ings

onde

rzoe

k

(type

onde

rzoe

k)

Type

bet

onst

aal

stav

enro

llen

per d

iam

eter

ge

punt

last

e w

apn

ette

n pe

r dia

-com

bina

tie

stav

enro

llen

3 bp

e va

n 1

diam

eter

8)

gepu

ntla

ste

wap

net

ten

3 bp

e va

n 1

dia-

com

bina

tie 7)

8)

stav

enro

llen

3 bp

e pe

r di

amet

er 6)

gepu

ntla

ste

wap

net

ten

3 bp

e pe

r dia

-co

mbi

natie

6) 7

) R

e 1

per 3

0 t

m

in 3

per

bpe

m

in 2

per

bpe

1

lang

s + d

war

s 5

per b

pe

5 pe

r bpe

3

lang

s + 2

dw

ars

10 p

er b

pe

10 p

er b

pe

5 la

ngs +

5 d

war

s R

mR

e id

em

idem

id

em

idem

id

em

idem

R

eac

tRe

nom

2)

idem

id

em

idem

id

em

idem

id

em

Agt

idem

id

em

idem

id

em

idem

id

em

Bui

gpro

ef

1 pe

r bpe

4)

idem

2

per b

pe

2 pe

r bpe

1

lang

s + 1

dw

ars

5 pe

r bpe

5

per b

pe

3 la

ngs +

2 d

war

s M

assa

per

m

idem

id

em 5)

id

em

idem

5)

idem

id

em 5)

G

eom

etrie

opp

en

pro

fielfa

ctor

id

em

idem

id

em

idem

id

em

Idem

Che

mis

che

sa

men

st +

Ceq

3)

1 pe

r lad

ing

1

per l

adin

g 1

per l

adin

g 1

per l

adin

g 1

per l

adin

g 1

per l

adin

g

Afs

chui

fpro

ef

nv

t m

in 2

per

bpe

n

vt

3 pe

r bpe

n

vt

3 pe

r bpe

B

uig-

te

rugb

uigt

rekp

roe

f

nv

t n

vt

2 pe

r bpe

n

vt

2 pe

r bpe

n

vt

Afm

etin

gen

nv

t m

in 1

per

bpe

n

vt

1 pe

r bpe

n

vt

1 pe

r bpe

V

erm

oeiin

g n

vt

nv

t 5

per j

aar

5 pe

r jaa

r 6

per b

pe 9)

5

per b

pe 10

)

1) The audit is always for each manufacturing process (hot-rolled-cooled -cold-stretched cold-profiles) of a certain type of reinforcing steel 2) If applicable (B500C) 3) Chemical composition + Ceq to be determined and submitted by the steel manufacturer not for each diameter (combination) 4) For bending mass and geometry surface + frfp min 1 per 150 tons 5) Can be determined for welding 6) Smallest largest and intermediate diameters (always skipping 2 consecutive diameters) of the range (deviating from EN 10080) 7) Always the most critical diameter combination that occurs 8) In a period of a maximum of 5 years number and spreading of diameters 9) For d le 28 mm the largest and middle diameters for gt 28 mm the largest diameter 10) The largest middle and smallest diameters Test unit is defined as -- barscoils the load or a part of the load (for bending mass and geometryprofile min 1 per 90 t) -- point welded reinforcement fabrics 50 tons of the same combination of reinforcing steel types and diameters manufactured with the same point welding machine

Annex IV Model for biannual reporting on reinforcing steel

Page 14: National Assessment Guideline - Kiwa · PDF fileThe NEN-EN 10080:2005 is not a harmonised standard and therefore a CE mark can not yet be attached to the products covered by this BRL

National Assessment Guideline BRL 0501 01 September 2010 copy Kiwa NV - -

13

When determining the a-values solid procedures are preferably applied using the standard deviations and the assumption probabilities

4311 Rib row distance Σe Contrary to NEN 6008 table 1 and analogue with NEN-EN 10080 read for lsquodistance rib rowsdistance Σe le 075drsquo The projection of the cross ribs must cover at least 75 of the circumference of the reinforcing steel to be calculated based on the nominal diameter In formula total distance between the rib rows Σe lt 025 πd

44 Determination methods and test criteria Supplementary and contrary to NEN-EN 10080 and NEN 6008 the following applies

441 Preliminary audit for acceptance Supplementary to NEN-EN 10080 the following data are to be provided for each of the diameters given by the certification institute before the start of the initial audit -- test results of 60 pieces from at least 3 casting loads with 20 samples each the individual

test results of 02 yield limit or flow limit ((Rp02 or Re) yield at maximum load (Agt) the tensile strength02 yield or flow limit ratio RmRp02 or Re if applicable the ratio of the actual 02 yield limit or flow limitthe nominal 02 yield limit or flow limit (ReactRenom) Also the statistic processing of these data with average value ( x ) standard deviation (s) and characteristic value (Cv)

-- test results of 5 pieces from the same loads with 5 samples each the individual test results of the bendability shearing force of point welded reinforcement fabrics mass per metre and profiling (profile factors fR fP rib height rib distance rib width rib flank α rib (inclination) angle distance between the rib rows and the longitudinal rib)

-- chemical composition of each casting load -- (casting) load numbers and roller data (min 10 tons per diameter) -- drawing or sketch of the profiling and the factory brand

442 Inspection for the attributive properties NEN-EN 10080 gives insufficient interpretation of the termination methods and test criteria for inspections for the attributive properties bendability shearing force with point welded reinforcement fabrics mass per metre and profiling (profile factors fR fP rib height rib distance rib width rib flank α rib (inclination) angle β distance between the rib rows and the longitudinal rib Contrary to NEN-EN 10080 with these attributive properties the sampling and the conformity assessment is done as follows -- with the continuous internal production inspection not for each test unit but repeatedly

for the 15 last tested bars of a diameter or a diameter-weld combination -- with the initial audit the test series is to be extended to 15 samples if necessary and to 60

samples when there is initial rejection -- with the periodic external inspection (audit) the results of the attributive properties

obtained during the audit are to be added to the internal test results of the manufacturer Testing If a maximum of 2 of the 15 measurements do not comply the sampling can be extended by 45 extra measurements with respect to the attributive property concerned In this case the attributive properties of a total of 60 test bars are available The property concerned then still complies if not more than 2 of the 60 measurements do not comply with the NEN 6008 The profiling is increasingly measured using an optical camera The manual measurement will be valid in case of disputes

4421 Inspection of the bend-bend tensile test with initial audit and during external inspections (audit testing) By means of a bend-bend back tensile test it is determined whether the reinforcing steel types B500B and B500C in the diameter range le 16 mm can be bent back once with an angle of 90deg

National Assessment Guideline BRL 0501 01 September 2010 copy Kiwa NV - -

14

without significant decrease of the Rp02 or Re RmRe and Agt compared with the non-bent bars The values may not be below the mentioned Cv values for the reinforcing steel type and delivery condition concerned Sampling and testing frequency

Delivery condition Diameter Inspection frequency bars and coils B500BB500C

d le 16 mm 6 samples of different barscoils from 3 (casting) loads for each selected diameter Samples are to be taken from the same barsloads as for the regular tensile tests

Performance of the test Take a sample of reinforcing steel of sufficient length for doing 2 tensile tests A normal tensile test is performed with the one part and a bend-bend back tensile test with the other part The minimum length for the bendbend back tensile test is 70 cm The preparation of the tensile test including the way of ageing and the way of bending is done in accordance with the stipulations in NEN-EN 10080 with the exception of the way of bending back and the bending mandrel diameter to be used The bending mandrel diameter is maximum 4d Bend the bar over a bending mandrel of maximum 4d with a maximum angle of 90deg Mark the bending zone (length ca 9d) Place the test piece in a vice or the like Place an appropriate pipe over the part of the test piece to be bent back preferably with an internal pipe diameter that is max 2 mm larger than the diameter of the test piece and bend the test piece straight again Try to make the test piece as straight as possible Here the difference between the one part and the other part of the test piece may be maximally the diameter of the test piece (the bayonet forming) Age the test piece in conformity with the stipulations of NEN-EN 10080 and perform the tensile test The test is considered to be satisfactory when - the results do not show any significant differences with the results of the non-bent test

pieces - the values are above the set Cv values If the values are not satisfactory find the cause and repeat the tests if necessary

443 Inspection for the variable properties Contrary to NEN-EN 10080 the sampling and testing is done in conformity with BRL 0501 annex 3 for the variable properties 02 yield limit or flow limit (Rp02 or Re) yield at maximum load (Agt) the tensile strength02 yield or flow limit ratio RmRp02 or Re if applicable the ratio of the actual 02 yield limit or flow limitthe nominal 02 yield limit or flow limit (ReactRenom) and the fatigue strength NEN-EN 10080 provides insufficient interpretation of the test requirements the determination methods and the test criteria for inspection for the fatigue properties Therefore the requirements given below apply supplementary to NEN-EN 10080

National Assessment Guideline BRL 0501 01 September 2010 copy Kiwa NV - -

15

4431 Inspection for the fatigue strength in initial audit Sampling and testing frequency

Delivery condition

Diameter Inspection frequency

bars and coils for d le 28 mm the middle and largest of the diameter range For d gt 28 mm the largest diameter

6 samples of different barscoils from 3 (casting) loads for each selected diameter (18 bars per diameter)

point welded fabrics

The smallest middle and largest diameter of the diameter range (always with the least favourable diameter combination)

5 samples of different bars with a point weld from 3 test units for each selected diameter (15 bars per diameter)

Test method a semi-statistical This simplified test is regarded as sufficient if the requirements given below are met

With reinforcing steel bars and coils B500B and B500C in the diameter range d le 28 mm with

the requirement aσ2 ge 175 MPa

a2σ = 175 MPa a2σ = 200 MPa Number of samples 10 sup2) Number of samples 8 sup2) Stress changes (106) Break Stress changes (106) Break

lt 15 lt 20 ge 20

none le l ge 9

lt 075 075 lt 10 10 lt 20 ge 20

none le l

le 2 1)

ge 5 1) le 3 breaks if no break occurred up to 1x106 tension changes sup2) total number 10 + 8 = 18

Table 5

With reinforcing steel bars B500B and B500C in the diameter range d gt 28 mm with the

requirement aσ2 ge 145 MPa

a2σ = 145 MPa a2σ = 170 MPa Number of samples 10 sup2) Number of samples 8 sup2) Stress changes (106) Break Stress changes (106) Break

lt 15 lt 20 ge 20

none le l ge 9

lt 075 075 lt 15 15 lt 20 ge 20

none le 2

le 2 1)

ge 4 1) le 4 breaks if no break occurred up to 15 x 106 tension changes sup2) total number 10 + 8 = 18

Table 6

With point welded fabrics B500A B500B and B500C as well as reinforcing steel bars and coils

B500A with the requirement aσ2 ge 100 MPa

a2σ = 100 MPa a2σ = 180 MPa Number of samples 10 sup1) Number of samples 5 sup1) Stress changes (106) Break Stress changes (106) Break

lt 15 lt 20 ge 20

none le l ge 9

lt 025 025 lt 05 ge 05

none le 3 ge 2

sup1) total number 10 + 5 = 15 Table 7

National Assessment Guideline BRL 0501 01 September 2010 copy Kiwa NV - -

16

Test method b fully statistical This test is done with the appropriate statistic methods considering the requirements p = 095 W = 75 set out in NEN 6008

Here the requirement Cv le x ndash ks must be complied with where x = the average value in which max 2 million load changes must be maintained

for the individual value of one test bar s = the estimate of the standard deviation of the population k = variation coefficient according to the table below (in conformity with ISO 16269-6) Cv = the characteristic value for the tension changes 1 106

n k n k n k n k 15 199 20 193 30 187 50 181 16 199 25 190 40 183 100 176 18 195

Table 8

4432 Inspection for the fatigue strength in periodic external inspections (audit testing) The numbers of test bars of one diameter given below are tested on an annual basis The sampling takes place in the presence of the inspector and is part of the audit testing -- barscoils 5 per year -- point welded fabrics 5 per year provided that in a period of 5 years at least 80 of all certified diameters (diameter combinations) has been tested With the 80 mentioned at least the following must have been tested

bull For barscoils the largest diameter in the range d le 28 mm and the largest diameter in the range d gt 28 mm

bull For point welded fabrics the smallest and the largest diameters always with the least favourable diameter combination

The test is considered to be satisfactory if

bull with the barscoils max 1 sample broke at lt 20106 stress changes and the other 4 samples have at least resisted 20106 tension changes

bull with the point welded fabrics max 1 sample broke at between 10106 and 20106 stress changes and the other 4 samples have at least resisted 20106 stress changes

For barscoils and point welded fabrics only a re-inspection can take place if no more than 2 samples broke at fewer than 20 106 stress changes In this case 5 extra samples are to be tested whereby no breaks at lt 20 106 stress changes may occur In this case the test series is satisfactory If this is not complied with further testing is necessary to find the cause and corrective measures are to be taken in order to avoid reoccurrence If necessary a new initial audit for the fatigue strength is to be performed

45 Biannual reporting The test results of all test units of the continuous inspections are to be collected and statistically evaluated for Re Agt RmRe and ReactRenom (if relevant) based on data of the production of the previous six months or the 200 most recent data dependent on which is the largest number These data shall biannually be sent to the certification institute in conformity with the model in annex 4

National Assessment Guideline BRL 0501 01 September 2010 copy Kiwa NV - -

17

46 Identification Contrary to NEN-EN 10080 art 101211 the product numbers (technical classes) are not assigned by a European organisation However the other requirements concerning the identification are observed in conformity with NEN 6008 and NEN-EN 10080

47 Certification mark Each packaging unit must have a label with the following obligatory indications

bull KOMO mark bull product certificate number + delivery condition (bars coils fabrics) bull the reinforcing steel type and the manufacturer number bull name andor logo of the manufacturer bull mentioning BRL0501

A packaging unit can be characterised

bull with reinforcing steel on coils as lsquothe coilrsquo marking min 1 label per coil bull with reinforcing steel bars as lsquothe bundlesrsquo marking min 1 label per bundle bull with point welded fabrics as lsquonumber of fabricsrsquo marking at least 1 label per unit of max

40 reinforcement fabrics or max 2 tons Additionally each point welded fabric in which only externally purchased and delivered reinforcing steel has been used must be marked in an indelible and non-removable way For example when using a ldquoSchlatter Etikettiermachinen Methoderdquo or equivalent the point welded reinforcement fabrics are to be marked with at least 1 label

National Assessment Guideline BRL 0501 01 September 2010 copy Kiwa NV - -

18

5 Requirements to the quality system

51 General This chapter includes the requirements that the quality system of the supplier has to meet

52 Administrator of the quality system A staff member is to be appointed as quality system manager within the organisational structure

53 Internal quality controlquality plan The supplier must have and use a schedule for internal quality control (an IQC schedule) in accordance with the model indicated in annex 2 In this IQC schedule the following must be demonstrably recorded

bull what aspects the manufacturer will inspect bull what methods will be used for these inspections bull the frequency of these inspections bull how to record and file the inspection results bull aspects with respect to the production of point welded reinforcement fabrics

Also the supplier must have a procedure for organising the production process of any post-stretching alignment and the reinforcement fabrics to be point welded and how this is implemented inspected and monitored This IQC schedule must have been derived from the IQC schedule included in the annex and must have been set up such that it gives the CI enough confidence that the requirements set out in this assessment guideline are continuously met

This must function at least 3 months before issuing the certificate

54 Procedures and work instructions The supplier must be able to submit

bull procedures for - handling out of spec products and (semi-)products to be repaired - corrective measures after observed defects - handling complaints about products andor services delivered - monitoring the quality using the extra value a - a4 - the work instructions and inspection forms used including the biannual reporting

(see annex 4)

55 Other requirements to the quality system

551 Reinforcing steel The following are regarded as sufficient proof that the purchased reinforcing steel complies with the product standard mentioned (NEN 6008) and other technical specifications

bull KOMO quality statement issued on the basis of BRL 0501 lsquoReinforcing steelrsquo by a certification andor attestation institute acknowledged by the Dutch Authority for Accreditation for the discipline involved

bull a (quality) statement the equivalence of which with the above-mentioned KOMO quality statement has been demonstrated

The traceability of the purchased reinforcing steel is guaranteed by the rolling mark and the labelling The origin (certificate number) of the reinforcing steel must be recorded at the initial audit

National Assessment Guideline BRL 0501 01 September 2010 copy Kiwa NV - -

19

552 Storage of reinforcing steel Reinforcing steel must be stored free from the ground Store and label reinforcing steel such that the chance of exchange for instance with foreign qualities is eliminated

National Assessment Guideline BRL 0501 01 September 2010 copy Kiwa NV - -

20

6 Requirements for the functioning of a test laboratory for testing reinforcing steel andor point welded reinforcement fabrics

61 The supplier has its own laboratory for testing reinforcing steel for its variable and attributive properties The laboratory equipment as well as the test methods must comply with

bull NEN-EN 10002-22001 Metallic materials tensile testing part 1 method of testing at ambient temperature

bull NEN-EN-ISO 15630-12002 Steel for the reinforcement and prestressing of concrete Test methods ndash Part 1 reinforcing bars wire rod and wire June 2002

bull NEN-EN-ISO 15630-22002 Steel for the reinforcement and prestressing of concrete Test methods ndash Part 2 welded fabric

Measuring equipment that has not been classified for one of the above-mentioned standards can be used as soon as they have been tested assessed and qualified by the CI

62 Outsourcing of testing Tests for the chemical composition and the fatigue strength of reinforcing steel can be outsourced as well De test results can be indicated as being lsquoperformed in a reliable wayrsquo if

bull The tests have been performed by a laboratory that meets the accreditation standard referred to in article 14 of this BRL NEN-EN-ISOIEC 17025 lsquoGeneral requirements for the competence of testing and calibration laboratoriesrsquo This accreditation must concern the performance of tests in conformity with the outsourcing assignment Besides a 31 or a 22 certificate of the results in conformity with NEN-EN 10204 is to be submitted or

bull The supplier receives the test results of the chemical composition from a company that has a product certificate of the lsquotechnical disciplinersquo (H9) mentioned in this BRL with the CI and the relevant measuring equipment in the laboratory concerned is covered by the product certificate audit

If the above requirements are not complied with the certification institute will perform or have performed the audit concerned itself In this case the certification institute will base its test on the accreditation standard NEN-EN-ISOIEC 17025

63 Verification audit An initial audit includes external verification of both the attributive and the variable properties Also an external verification for the performance of the used tensile tests takes place every two years The diameter is to be selected such that the diameters that occur most are tested in a period of 5 years When using a new tensile testing machinemeasuring equipment a verification audit is to be performed as well

National Assessment Guideline BRL 0501 01 September 2010 copy Kiwa NV - -

21

631 Variable properties For the verification of variable properties (the results of the tensile test) at least 15 random samples of one selected diameter must be taken in the presence of the inspector (audit testing) for each selected reinforcing steel type each of a length suitable for two test pieces for testing The selected representative diameters must change at the two-yearly verification With bars and coils the samples must have been spread over at least 3 loads of 1 diameter The samples for point welded reinforcement fabrics and the corresponding bars must come from 1 diameter combination produced on different days For each sample the two collected test pieces must be marked and then the test pieces must be bundled into two series of at least 15 test pieces A third series can be taken as spare series in case of discussions about the achieved results One series must be tested in the presence of the inspector at the manufacturerrsquos The inspector must have the other series tested at an external laboratory The time between the performances of both test series must be short enough to allow for neglecting any natural ageing of the testing material The test (tensile test) includes determination of the 02 yield limit or flow limit (Re) the tensile strength (Rm) the RmRe ratio and the yield with maximum load (Agt) of each individual test piece The thus obtained two series of measurement pairs must then be tested for their differences between both performances of the test Any systematic differences are to be tracked and eliminated

With the statistic comparison of two different performances of tests the differences of paired measurements are to be checked in relation with the hypothesis that the expected value of the average difference is zero (Student test) Rejection of this hypothesis indicates that there is a possibility of systematic differences For each variable property the xfi (i = 1n) of the measurement results of the manufacturer and the xei (i = 1hellip n) of the external institute must be calculated separately

bull Difference vi = xfi ndash xei considering the positive or negative difference and then the average difference

= sum

=

n

iiv

nv

1

1

bull standard deviation of the differences

minus

minus= sum

=

2

1

2

11 vnv

ns

n

iiv

bull value vsvt =

It must be verified for the variable properties the 02 yield limit or flow limit (Reee ) the tensile strength (Rmmm ) and the yield with maximum load (Aggg ttt ) whether or not t exceeds a critical limit to The critical values to depend on the number of tests and have been derived from ISO 3301 1975 with a = 001 (see table 9)

National Assessment Guideline BRL 0501 01 September 2010 copy Kiwa NV - -

22

Table 9 ndash Critical values of to

n to n to n to

10 103 11 096 12 090 13 085 14 080

15 077 16 074 17 071 18 068 19 066

20 064 25 056 30 050 35 047 40 043

If t gt to the hypothesis that there is no difference between the two series of paired measurements is rejected and so the cause of this must be found and eliminated This does not apply when sv and v are both below the reference values Sov and Vo in table 9 because of insufficient relevance

If t le to the hypothesis that there is no difference between the two series of paired measurements is not rejected The test can then be concluded unless Sv ge Sov In this case the standard deviation of the differences is excessive showing that the material concerned is unsuitable for the verification test Further investigation is then required

Table 10 ndash Reference values of Sov and Vo

sov vo 02 yield limit or flow limit 15 15 Tensile strength in MPa 15 20 Yield at maximum load in B500A B500B B500C

11 25 30

11 25 30

632 Attributive properties For the verification of attributive properties (mass per length chemical composition profiling bending test and if necessary a shearing test) the measurements of mass per length and profiling must be done in advance with the two series of at least 15 test pieces meant for the tensile test (see above) For the measurements of the bending test and shearing test (if applicable) the number of test pieces from the above described random samples must be extended with at least 5 test pieces for the bending test and if necessary the shearing test For the verification assessment of the chemical composition the number of test pieces is limited to a series of 3 test pieces from 3 test units Any combinations in the random samples of the above-mentioned verification assessments are allowed The test series at the manufacturerrsquos and the series of external tests (see above) should not produce other differences than those that can unambiguously be explained and eliminated

National Assessment Guideline BRL 0501 01 September 2010 copy Kiwa NV - -

23

7 Summary audit and inspection

Below a summary is provided of the tests to be performed for certification bull Initial audit the audit to determine whether all requirements in the BRL are met bull Inspection audit the audit performed after granting the certificate to determine whether

the certified products continuously meet the requirements set in the BRL Also indicates the frequency of the inspection audits to be performed by the certification institute (CI)

bull Inspection of the quality system inspection for compliance with the IQC schedule and the procedures

Here the frequency with which the certification institute must perform an inspection audit is indicated as well

Audit related to

Supervision by CI after granting the certificate1)

Requirement description Article BRL Initial audit

Inspection2) Frequency Product requirements bull Indication of product 2342 X X continuously bull Variable properties 4243 X X 34 x per year bull Chemical composition 4243 X X 34 x per year bull Bending test 42 X X 34 x per year bull Shearing test 42 X X 4 x per year bull Fatigue strength 4244 X X 1 x per year bull Geometry form 4243 X X 34 x per year bull Mass per unit 4243 X X 34 x per year bull Dimensions of fabricsbars 42 X X 34 x per year bull Bendndashbend back tensile

test 42 X X 3 x per year

Own testing laboratory bull Own laboratory 61 X X 1 x per year bull Outsourcing of tests 62 X X 34 x per year bull Verification audit 63 X X 1 x per 2 years System requirements bull IQC schedule 5 X X 34 x per year bull Quality mark 4647 X X 34 x per year

Table 11

1) In case of significant changes in the production process to be assessed by the CI the product requirements need to be tested again

2) The inspector or the certificate holder in the presence of the inspector will determine all product properties that can be performed within the visiting time (maximum 1 day) If this is not possible the CI and the certificate holder will make arrangements with respect to how the inspection will be performed

Inspection of the quality system The certification institute checks if the manufacturer meets the quality system requirements in chapter 5 of this BRL according to the frequency in article 86 of this BRL

National Assessment Guideline BRL 0501 01 September 2010 copy Kiwa NV - -

24

8 Requirements of de certification institute

81 General The certification institute must meet the requirements set out in EN 45011 Besides for the purpose of this BRL the institute must have been accredited by the Dutch Authority for Accreditation (RvA) or a similar body (an accreditation institute with which the RvA has entered into an agreement of mutual acceptance) The certification institute must have a set of regulations or a similar document defining the general rules to be observed during certification These particularly include bull The general rules for performance of the initial audit to be structured as follows

o The way in which suppliers are informed about the handling of a request o The performance of the audit o The decision based on the audit performed

bull The general rules concerning the performance of inspections and the inspection aspects used here

bull The measures the certification institute must take in case of defects bull The rules for terminating a certificate bull The possibility to make an appeal against decisions or measures of the certification

institute

82 Certification staff Staff involved in certification procedures include bull Auditors charged with performing the initial audit and assessing the reports of the

inspectors bull Inspectors charged with performing the external inspection at the supplierrsquos bull Decision-makers charged with taking decisions based on the initial audits performed

about continuation of certification based on inspections performed and about the necessity to take corrective measures

821 Qualification requirements A distinction is made with respect to 8211 Qualification requirements for the certification executives of a CI meeting the

requirements set out in EN 45011 8212 Supplementary qualification requirements for the certification executives of a CI as

determined by the Board of Experts for the subject of this BRL

National Assessment Guideline BRL 0501 01 September 2010 copy Kiwa NV - -

25

8211 Qualification requirements for the certification executives of a CI meeting the requirements set out in EN 45011

The qualification of the certification executives of a CI must comply with chapter 5 of EN 45011 The manual of the CI must describe how the qualification of the certification executives is performed

EN45011

Auditor

initial product assessment and assessment of the

production location

Inspector

assessment product location field and

projects after granting of certificate

Decision-maker

for granting and extending a certificate

Education General

Higher Vocational thinking and working level

Intermediate vocational working and thinking level

Higher Vocational thinking and working level

Education Specific

Basic training for auditing Basic training for auditing

Basic training for auditing

Experience General

1 year of relevant working experience with min 4 audits including 1 full initial audit done independently under supervision

1 year of relevant working experience with min 4 audits including 1 done independent under supervision

4 years of relevant working experience of which at least 1 year with respect to certification

Experience Specific

knowledge of BRL at detailed level and 4 audits related to the specific BRL or to similar BRLs

knowledge of BRL at detailed level and 4 audits related to the specific BRL or to similar BRLs

Basic knowledge of the specific certification schedule

8212 Supplementary qualification requirements for the certification executives of a CI as determined by the Board of Experts for the subject of this BRL

Certification staff Education Experience Auditor Higher vocational education level in one of the

following disciplines - Constructional engineering - Civil engineering - Mechanical engineering

2 years

Inspector Intermediate vocational education level in one of the following disciplines - ConstructionalCivil engineering - Materials science - Mechanical engineering

2 years

Decision-maker Higher vocational education level in one of the following disciplines - Constructional engineering - Civil engineering - Quality science - Mechanical engineering

4 years Managerial experience

822 Qualification Certification staff must be demonstrably qualified by comparing the education and experience with the requirements set out above If qualification takes place based on deviating criteria this must be laid down in writing The qualification authority is vested with

National Assessment Guideline BRL 0501 01 September 2010 copy Kiwa NV - -

26

bull Decision-makers qualification of auditors and inspectors bull Management of the certification institute qualification of decision-makers

83 Initial audit report The certification institute records the findings of the initial audit in a report The report must meet the following requirements bull Completeness the report makes a statement about all requirements set out in the

assessment guideline bull Traceability the findings the statement are based on must have been recorded in a

traceable way bull Basis for decision the decision-maker for granting a certificate must be able to base his

decision on the findings recorded in the report

84 Decision about granting the certificate The decision concerning the granting of the certificate must be made by a decision-maker who is qualified to do so and who has not been involved in the certificate audit himself The decision must have been recorded in a traceable way

85 Presentation of the quality statement The product certificate must be presented in conformity with the model included in the annex

86 Nature and frequency of external inspections The certification institute must regularly inspect the supplier for compliance with his obligations The Board of Experts will decide upon the frequency of the inspections At the time this assessment guideline took effect the frequency was set to bull 3 inspection visits per year at suppliers of hot-rolled products bull 4 inspection visits per year at suppliers of other products Inspections will in any case pertain to a number of matters including bull The product specifications laid down in the product specification bull The supplierrsquos production process bull The supplierrsquos IQC schedule and the results of the inspections performed by the supplier bull The correct way of marking the certified products bull Compliance with the required procedures The certification institute will lay down the findings of each inspection performed in a report in a traceable way

87 Reporting to the Board of Experts The certification institute must report on the certification activities performed at least once a year The report must include the following subjects bull Mutations in number of certificates (newlapsed) bull Number of inspections performed in relation to the determined frequency bull Inspection results bull Measures imposed in case of defects bull Complaints received from third parties with respect to certified products

88 Interpretation of requirements The Board of Experts may lay down the requirements set in this assessment guideline in a single separate interpretation document The certification institute is obliged to ensure whether an interpretation document has been drawn up and if so must make use of the interpretations laid down in this

89 Specific rules defined by the Board of Experts The Board of Experts has not defined specific rules that are to be followed with certification by the certification institute

National Assessment Guideline BRL 0501 01 September 2010 copy Kiwa NV - -

27

9 List of documents mentioned

91 Standardsnormative documents

NEN 6008 2008 Reinforcing steel NEN 6720 1995 Technical foundations for building constructions - TGB 1990 ndash

Regulations for concrete - TGB 1990 ndash Structural requirements and calculation methods (VBC 1995) September 1995 including amendment sheet A4 December 2007

NEN 6722 2002 Regulations for concrete ndash Execution December 2002 NEN 6723 1995 Regulations for concrete - Bridges ndash (VBB June 1995) Structural requirements

and calculation methods December 1995 including amendment sheet A1 December 2003

NEN-EN 1992 2005 Design of concrete structures NEN-EN 1994 2005 Design of composite steel and concrete structures NEN-EN 10002 2001 Metallic materials tensile testing - Part 1 Method of testing at ambient

temperature August 2001 NEN-EN 10080 2005 Steel for the reinforcement of concrete ndash Weldable reinforcing steel - General NEN-EN 10204 2004 Metallic products - Types of inspection documents October 2004 NEN-EN 45012 1998 General requirements for bodies operating assessment and

certificationregistration of quality systems NEN-EN-ISO 376 2004 Metallic materials - Calibration of force-proving instruments used for the

verification of uniaxial testing machines NEN-EN-ISO 7500-1 2004 Metallic materials - Verification of static uniaxial testing machines ndash

Part 1 Tensilecompression testing machines - Verification and calibration of the force-measuring system August 2004

NEN-EN-ISO 9513 2002 Metallic materials ndash Calibration of extensometers for uniaxial testing October 2002

NEN-EN-ISO 15630-1 2002 Steel for the reinforcement and prestressing of concrete - Test methods ndash Part 1 Reinforcing bars wire rod and wire June 2002

NEN-EN-ISO 15630-2 2002 Steel for the reinforcement and prestressing of concrete - Test methods ndash Part 2 Welded fabric

NEN-EN-ISOIEC 17020

2004 General criteria for the operation of various types of bodies performing inspection

NEN-EN-ISOIEC 17024

2003 Conformity assessment - General requirements for bodies operating certification of persons

NEN-EN-ISOIEC 17025

2005 General requirements for the competence of testing and calibration laboratories

ISO 3301 1975 Statistical interpretation of data ndash Comparison of two means in the case of paired observations

ISO 4965 1979 Axial load fatigue testing machines - Dynamic force calibration - Strain gauge technique April 1979

ISO 16269-6 2005 Statistical interpretation of data Determination of statistical tolerance intervals

Annex I Model certificate

Issued Replaces Issued date Valid until Indefinite Page 1 of 2

KOMOreg

Product certificate

ltName Productgt ltCertificate holdergt

STATEMENT OF CI This product certificate was issued on the basis of BRL lsquo lsquo in conformity with the regulations for Product Certification CI declares that the justifiable confidence exists that the name product supplied by the certificate holder meets the technical specifications laid down in this product certificate provided that name product has the KOMOreg mark as indicated in this product certificate Director CI Advice refer to wwwltCIgtnl to see if this certificate is valid

Certificate holder T F E I

Assessed Quality system Product

Periodic check

reg is a collective brand of Stichting Bouwkwaliteit

Annex II Model for IQC schedule or framework of IQC schedule

Subjects Aspects Method Frequency Registration

Basic materials or supplied materials bull Recipe sheets bull Inspection of incoming raw

materials bull Mechanical bull Chemical

Production process production equipment material bull Procedures bull Work instructions bull Equipment bull Material bull Process inspection

End products

Measuring and testing equipment

Measuring and testing equipment bull Measuring devices bull Calibration bull Outsourced tests

Logistics bull Internal transport bull Storage bull Packaging bull Preservation bull Identification or marking

of semi-finished and end products

Corrective measures Complaints handling

Annex III Sampling and testing overview

Type

on

derz

oek

1)

Doo

rlope

nd

inte

rn fa

brie

kson

derz

oek

Perio

diek

ex

tern

ond

erzo

ek (a

udit)

To

elat

ings

onde

rzoe

k

(type

onde

rzoe

k)

Type

bet

onst

aal

stav

enro

llen

per d

iam

eter

ge

punt

last

e w

apn

ette

n pe

r dia

-com

bina

tie

stav

enro

llen

3 bp

e va

n 1

diam

eter

8)

gepu

ntla

ste

wap

net

ten

3 bp

e va

n 1

dia-

com

bina

tie 7)

8)

stav

enro

llen

3 bp

e pe

r di

amet

er 6)

gepu

ntla

ste

wap

net

ten

3 bp

e pe

r dia

-co

mbi

natie

6) 7

) R

e 1

per 3

0 t

m

in 3

per

bpe

m

in 2

per

bpe

1

lang

s + d

war

s 5

per b

pe

5 pe

r bpe

3

lang

s + 2

dw

ars

10 p

er b

pe

10 p

er b

pe

5 la

ngs +

5 d

war

s R

mR

e id

em

idem

id

em

idem

id

em

idem

R

eac

tRe

nom

2)

idem

id

em

idem

id

em

idem

id

em

Agt

idem

id

em

idem

id

em

idem

id

em

Bui

gpro

ef

1 pe

r bpe

4)

idem

2

per b

pe

2 pe

r bpe

1

lang

s + 1

dw

ars

5 pe

r bpe

5

per b

pe

3 la

ngs +

2 d

war

s M

assa

per

m

idem

id

em 5)

id

em

idem

5)

idem

id

em 5)

G

eom

etrie

opp

en

pro

fielfa

ctor

id

em

idem

id

em

idem

id

em

Idem

Che

mis

che

sa

men

st +

Ceq

3)

1 pe

r lad

ing

1

per l

adin

g 1

per l

adin

g 1

per l

adin

g 1

per l

adin

g 1

per l

adin

g

Afs

chui

fpro

ef

nv

t m

in 2

per

bpe

n

vt

3 pe

r bpe

n

vt

3 pe

r bpe

B

uig-

te

rugb

uigt

rekp

roe

f

nv

t n

vt

2 pe

r bpe

n

vt

2 pe

r bpe

n

vt

Afm

etin

gen

nv

t m

in 1

per

bpe

n

vt

1 pe

r bpe

n

vt

1 pe

r bpe

V

erm

oeiin

g n

vt

nv

t 5

per j

aar

5 pe

r jaa

r 6

per b

pe 9)

5

per b

pe 10

)

1) The audit is always for each manufacturing process (hot-rolled-cooled -cold-stretched cold-profiles) of a certain type of reinforcing steel 2) If applicable (B500C) 3) Chemical composition + Ceq to be determined and submitted by the steel manufacturer not for each diameter (combination) 4) For bending mass and geometry surface + frfp min 1 per 150 tons 5) Can be determined for welding 6) Smallest largest and intermediate diameters (always skipping 2 consecutive diameters) of the range (deviating from EN 10080) 7) Always the most critical diameter combination that occurs 8) In a period of a maximum of 5 years number and spreading of diameters 9) For d le 28 mm the largest and middle diameters for gt 28 mm the largest diameter 10) The largest middle and smallest diameters Test unit is defined as -- barscoils the load or a part of the load (for bending mass and geometryprofile min 1 per 90 t) -- point welded reinforcement fabrics 50 tons of the same combination of reinforcing steel types and diameters manufactured with the same point welding machine

Annex IV Model for biannual reporting on reinforcing steel

Page 15: National Assessment Guideline - Kiwa · PDF fileThe NEN-EN 10080:2005 is not a harmonised standard and therefore a CE mark can not yet be attached to the products covered by this BRL

National Assessment Guideline BRL 0501 01 September 2010 copy Kiwa NV - -

14

without significant decrease of the Rp02 or Re RmRe and Agt compared with the non-bent bars The values may not be below the mentioned Cv values for the reinforcing steel type and delivery condition concerned Sampling and testing frequency

Delivery condition Diameter Inspection frequency bars and coils B500BB500C

d le 16 mm 6 samples of different barscoils from 3 (casting) loads for each selected diameter Samples are to be taken from the same barsloads as for the regular tensile tests

Performance of the test Take a sample of reinforcing steel of sufficient length for doing 2 tensile tests A normal tensile test is performed with the one part and a bend-bend back tensile test with the other part The minimum length for the bendbend back tensile test is 70 cm The preparation of the tensile test including the way of ageing and the way of bending is done in accordance with the stipulations in NEN-EN 10080 with the exception of the way of bending back and the bending mandrel diameter to be used The bending mandrel diameter is maximum 4d Bend the bar over a bending mandrel of maximum 4d with a maximum angle of 90deg Mark the bending zone (length ca 9d) Place the test piece in a vice or the like Place an appropriate pipe over the part of the test piece to be bent back preferably with an internal pipe diameter that is max 2 mm larger than the diameter of the test piece and bend the test piece straight again Try to make the test piece as straight as possible Here the difference between the one part and the other part of the test piece may be maximally the diameter of the test piece (the bayonet forming) Age the test piece in conformity with the stipulations of NEN-EN 10080 and perform the tensile test The test is considered to be satisfactory when - the results do not show any significant differences with the results of the non-bent test

pieces - the values are above the set Cv values If the values are not satisfactory find the cause and repeat the tests if necessary

443 Inspection for the variable properties Contrary to NEN-EN 10080 the sampling and testing is done in conformity with BRL 0501 annex 3 for the variable properties 02 yield limit or flow limit (Rp02 or Re) yield at maximum load (Agt) the tensile strength02 yield or flow limit ratio RmRp02 or Re if applicable the ratio of the actual 02 yield limit or flow limitthe nominal 02 yield limit or flow limit (ReactRenom) and the fatigue strength NEN-EN 10080 provides insufficient interpretation of the test requirements the determination methods and the test criteria for inspection for the fatigue properties Therefore the requirements given below apply supplementary to NEN-EN 10080

National Assessment Guideline BRL 0501 01 September 2010 copy Kiwa NV - -

15

4431 Inspection for the fatigue strength in initial audit Sampling and testing frequency

Delivery condition

Diameter Inspection frequency

bars and coils for d le 28 mm the middle and largest of the diameter range For d gt 28 mm the largest diameter

6 samples of different barscoils from 3 (casting) loads for each selected diameter (18 bars per diameter)

point welded fabrics

The smallest middle and largest diameter of the diameter range (always with the least favourable diameter combination)

5 samples of different bars with a point weld from 3 test units for each selected diameter (15 bars per diameter)

Test method a semi-statistical This simplified test is regarded as sufficient if the requirements given below are met

With reinforcing steel bars and coils B500B and B500C in the diameter range d le 28 mm with

the requirement aσ2 ge 175 MPa

a2σ = 175 MPa a2σ = 200 MPa Number of samples 10 sup2) Number of samples 8 sup2) Stress changes (106) Break Stress changes (106) Break

lt 15 lt 20 ge 20

none le l ge 9

lt 075 075 lt 10 10 lt 20 ge 20

none le l

le 2 1)

ge 5 1) le 3 breaks if no break occurred up to 1x106 tension changes sup2) total number 10 + 8 = 18

Table 5

With reinforcing steel bars B500B and B500C in the diameter range d gt 28 mm with the

requirement aσ2 ge 145 MPa

a2σ = 145 MPa a2σ = 170 MPa Number of samples 10 sup2) Number of samples 8 sup2) Stress changes (106) Break Stress changes (106) Break

lt 15 lt 20 ge 20

none le l ge 9

lt 075 075 lt 15 15 lt 20 ge 20

none le 2

le 2 1)

ge 4 1) le 4 breaks if no break occurred up to 15 x 106 tension changes sup2) total number 10 + 8 = 18

Table 6

With point welded fabrics B500A B500B and B500C as well as reinforcing steel bars and coils

B500A with the requirement aσ2 ge 100 MPa

a2σ = 100 MPa a2σ = 180 MPa Number of samples 10 sup1) Number of samples 5 sup1) Stress changes (106) Break Stress changes (106) Break

lt 15 lt 20 ge 20

none le l ge 9

lt 025 025 lt 05 ge 05

none le 3 ge 2

sup1) total number 10 + 5 = 15 Table 7

National Assessment Guideline BRL 0501 01 September 2010 copy Kiwa NV - -

16

Test method b fully statistical This test is done with the appropriate statistic methods considering the requirements p = 095 W = 75 set out in NEN 6008

Here the requirement Cv le x ndash ks must be complied with where x = the average value in which max 2 million load changes must be maintained

for the individual value of one test bar s = the estimate of the standard deviation of the population k = variation coefficient according to the table below (in conformity with ISO 16269-6) Cv = the characteristic value for the tension changes 1 106

n k n k n k n k 15 199 20 193 30 187 50 181 16 199 25 190 40 183 100 176 18 195

Table 8

4432 Inspection for the fatigue strength in periodic external inspections (audit testing) The numbers of test bars of one diameter given below are tested on an annual basis The sampling takes place in the presence of the inspector and is part of the audit testing -- barscoils 5 per year -- point welded fabrics 5 per year provided that in a period of 5 years at least 80 of all certified diameters (diameter combinations) has been tested With the 80 mentioned at least the following must have been tested

bull For barscoils the largest diameter in the range d le 28 mm and the largest diameter in the range d gt 28 mm

bull For point welded fabrics the smallest and the largest diameters always with the least favourable diameter combination

The test is considered to be satisfactory if

bull with the barscoils max 1 sample broke at lt 20106 stress changes and the other 4 samples have at least resisted 20106 tension changes

bull with the point welded fabrics max 1 sample broke at between 10106 and 20106 stress changes and the other 4 samples have at least resisted 20106 stress changes

For barscoils and point welded fabrics only a re-inspection can take place if no more than 2 samples broke at fewer than 20 106 stress changes In this case 5 extra samples are to be tested whereby no breaks at lt 20 106 stress changes may occur In this case the test series is satisfactory If this is not complied with further testing is necessary to find the cause and corrective measures are to be taken in order to avoid reoccurrence If necessary a new initial audit for the fatigue strength is to be performed

45 Biannual reporting The test results of all test units of the continuous inspections are to be collected and statistically evaluated for Re Agt RmRe and ReactRenom (if relevant) based on data of the production of the previous six months or the 200 most recent data dependent on which is the largest number These data shall biannually be sent to the certification institute in conformity with the model in annex 4

National Assessment Guideline BRL 0501 01 September 2010 copy Kiwa NV - -

17

46 Identification Contrary to NEN-EN 10080 art 101211 the product numbers (technical classes) are not assigned by a European organisation However the other requirements concerning the identification are observed in conformity with NEN 6008 and NEN-EN 10080

47 Certification mark Each packaging unit must have a label with the following obligatory indications

bull KOMO mark bull product certificate number + delivery condition (bars coils fabrics) bull the reinforcing steel type and the manufacturer number bull name andor logo of the manufacturer bull mentioning BRL0501

A packaging unit can be characterised

bull with reinforcing steel on coils as lsquothe coilrsquo marking min 1 label per coil bull with reinforcing steel bars as lsquothe bundlesrsquo marking min 1 label per bundle bull with point welded fabrics as lsquonumber of fabricsrsquo marking at least 1 label per unit of max

40 reinforcement fabrics or max 2 tons Additionally each point welded fabric in which only externally purchased and delivered reinforcing steel has been used must be marked in an indelible and non-removable way For example when using a ldquoSchlatter Etikettiermachinen Methoderdquo or equivalent the point welded reinforcement fabrics are to be marked with at least 1 label

National Assessment Guideline BRL 0501 01 September 2010 copy Kiwa NV - -

18

5 Requirements to the quality system

51 General This chapter includes the requirements that the quality system of the supplier has to meet

52 Administrator of the quality system A staff member is to be appointed as quality system manager within the organisational structure

53 Internal quality controlquality plan The supplier must have and use a schedule for internal quality control (an IQC schedule) in accordance with the model indicated in annex 2 In this IQC schedule the following must be demonstrably recorded

bull what aspects the manufacturer will inspect bull what methods will be used for these inspections bull the frequency of these inspections bull how to record and file the inspection results bull aspects with respect to the production of point welded reinforcement fabrics

Also the supplier must have a procedure for organising the production process of any post-stretching alignment and the reinforcement fabrics to be point welded and how this is implemented inspected and monitored This IQC schedule must have been derived from the IQC schedule included in the annex and must have been set up such that it gives the CI enough confidence that the requirements set out in this assessment guideline are continuously met

This must function at least 3 months before issuing the certificate

54 Procedures and work instructions The supplier must be able to submit

bull procedures for - handling out of spec products and (semi-)products to be repaired - corrective measures after observed defects - handling complaints about products andor services delivered - monitoring the quality using the extra value a - a4 - the work instructions and inspection forms used including the biannual reporting

(see annex 4)

55 Other requirements to the quality system

551 Reinforcing steel The following are regarded as sufficient proof that the purchased reinforcing steel complies with the product standard mentioned (NEN 6008) and other technical specifications

bull KOMO quality statement issued on the basis of BRL 0501 lsquoReinforcing steelrsquo by a certification andor attestation institute acknowledged by the Dutch Authority for Accreditation for the discipline involved

bull a (quality) statement the equivalence of which with the above-mentioned KOMO quality statement has been demonstrated

The traceability of the purchased reinforcing steel is guaranteed by the rolling mark and the labelling The origin (certificate number) of the reinforcing steel must be recorded at the initial audit

National Assessment Guideline BRL 0501 01 September 2010 copy Kiwa NV - -

19

552 Storage of reinforcing steel Reinforcing steel must be stored free from the ground Store and label reinforcing steel such that the chance of exchange for instance with foreign qualities is eliminated

National Assessment Guideline BRL 0501 01 September 2010 copy Kiwa NV - -

20

6 Requirements for the functioning of a test laboratory for testing reinforcing steel andor point welded reinforcement fabrics

61 The supplier has its own laboratory for testing reinforcing steel for its variable and attributive properties The laboratory equipment as well as the test methods must comply with

bull NEN-EN 10002-22001 Metallic materials tensile testing part 1 method of testing at ambient temperature

bull NEN-EN-ISO 15630-12002 Steel for the reinforcement and prestressing of concrete Test methods ndash Part 1 reinforcing bars wire rod and wire June 2002

bull NEN-EN-ISO 15630-22002 Steel for the reinforcement and prestressing of concrete Test methods ndash Part 2 welded fabric

Measuring equipment that has not been classified for one of the above-mentioned standards can be used as soon as they have been tested assessed and qualified by the CI

62 Outsourcing of testing Tests for the chemical composition and the fatigue strength of reinforcing steel can be outsourced as well De test results can be indicated as being lsquoperformed in a reliable wayrsquo if

bull The tests have been performed by a laboratory that meets the accreditation standard referred to in article 14 of this BRL NEN-EN-ISOIEC 17025 lsquoGeneral requirements for the competence of testing and calibration laboratoriesrsquo This accreditation must concern the performance of tests in conformity with the outsourcing assignment Besides a 31 or a 22 certificate of the results in conformity with NEN-EN 10204 is to be submitted or

bull The supplier receives the test results of the chemical composition from a company that has a product certificate of the lsquotechnical disciplinersquo (H9) mentioned in this BRL with the CI and the relevant measuring equipment in the laboratory concerned is covered by the product certificate audit

If the above requirements are not complied with the certification institute will perform or have performed the audit concerned itself In this case the certification institute will base its test on the accreditation standard NEN-EN-ISOIEC 17025

63 Verification audit An initial audit includes external verification of both the attributive and the variable properties Also an external verification for the performance of the used tensile tests takes place every two years The diameter is to be selected such that the diameters that occur most are tested in a period of 5 years When using a new tensile testing machinemeasuring equipment a verification audit is to be performed as well

National Assessment Guideline BRL 0501 01 September 2010 copy Kiwa NV - -

21

631 Variable properties For the verification of variable properties (the results of the tensile test) at least 15 random samples of one selected diameter must be taken in the presence of the inspector (audit testing) for each selected reinforcing steel type each of a length suitable for two test pieces for testing The selected representative diameters must change at the two-yearly verification With bars and coils the samples must have been spread over at least 3 loads of 1 diameter The samples for point welded reinforcement fabrics and the corresponding bars must come from 1 diameter combination produced on different days For each sample the two collected test pieces must be marked and then the test pieces must be bundled into two series of at least 15 test pieces A third series can be taken as spare series in case of discussions about the achieved results One series must be tested in the presence of the inspector at the manufacturerrsquos The inspector must have the other series tested at an external laboratory The time between the performances of both test series must be short enough to allow for neglecting any natural ageing of the testing material The test (tensile test) includes determination of the 02 yield limit or flow limit (Re) the tensile strength (Rm) the RmRe ratio and the yield with maximum load (Agt) of each individual test piece The thus obtained two series of measurement pairs must then be tested for their differences between both performances of the test Any systematic differences are to be tracked and eliminated

With the statistic comparison of two different performances of tests the differences of paired measurements are to be checked in relation with the hypothesis that the expected value of the average difference is zero (Student test) Rejection of this hypothesis indicates that there is a possibility of systematic differences For each variable property the xfi (i = 1n) of the measurement results of the manufacturer and the xei (i = 1hellip n) of the external institute must be calculated separately

bull Difference vi = xfi ndash xei considering the positive or negative difference and then the average difference

= sum

=

n

iiv

nv

1

1

bull standard deviation of the differences

minus

minus= sum

=

2

1

2

11 vnv

ns

n

iiv

bull value vsvt =

It must be verified for the variable properties the 02 yield limit or flow limit (Reee ) the tensile strength (Rmmm ) and the yield with maximum load (Aggg ttt ) whether or not t exceeds a critical limit to The critical values to depend on the number of tests and have been derived from ISO 3301 1975 with a = 001 (see table 9)

National Assessment Guideline BRL 0501 01 September 2010 copy Kiwa NV - -

22

Table 9 ndash Critical values of to

n to n to n to

10 103 11 096 12 090 13 085 14 080

15 077 16 074 17 071 18 068 19 066

20 064 25 056 30 050 35 047 40 043

If t gt to the hypothesis that there is no difference between the two series of paired measurements is rejected and so the cause of this must be found and eliminated This does not apply when sv and v are both below the reference values Sov and Vo in table 9 because of insufficient relevance

If t le to the hypothesis that there is no difference between the two series of paired measurements is not rejected The test can then be concluded unless Sv ge Sov In this case the standard deviation of the differences is excessive showing that the material concerned is unsuitable for the verification test Further investigation is then required

Table 10 ndash Reference values of Sov and Vo

sov vo 02 yield limit or flow limit 15 15 Tensile strength in MPa 15 20 Yield at maximum load in B500A B500B B500C

11 25 30

11 25 30

632 Attributive properties For the verification of attributive properties (mass per length chemical composition profiling bending test and if necessary a shearing test) the measurements of mass per length and profiling must be done in advance with the two series of at least 15 test pieces meant for the tensile test (see above) For the measurements of the bending test and shearing test (if applicable) the number of test pieces from the above described random samples must be extended with at least 5 test pieces for the bending test and if necessary the shearing test For the verification assessment of the chemical composition the number of test pieces is limited to a series of 3 test pieces from 3 test units Any combinations in the random samples of the above-mentioned verification assessments are allowed The test series at the manufacturerrsquos and the series of external tests (see above) should not produce other differences than those that can unambiguously be explained and eliminated

National Assessment Guideline BRL 0501 01 September 2010 copy Kiwa NV - -

23

7 Summary audit and inspection

Below a summary is provided of the tests to be performed for certification bull Initial audit the audit to determine whether all requirements in the BRL are met bull Inspection audit the audit performed after granting the certificate to determine whether

the certified products continuously meet the requirements set in the BRL Also indicates the frequency of the inspection audits to be performed by the certification institute (CI)

bull Inspection of the quality system inspection for compliance with the IQC schedule and the procedures

Here the frequency with which the certification institute must perform an inspection audit is indicated as well

Audit related to

Supervision by CI after granting the certificate1)

Requirement description Article BRL Initial audit

Inspection2) Frequency Product requirements bull Indication of product 2342 X X continuously bull Variable properties 4243 X X 34 x per year bull Chemical composition 4243 X X 34 x per year bull Bending test 42 X X 34 x per year bull Shearing test 42 X X 4 x per year bull Fatigue strength 4244 X X 1 x per year bull Geometry form 4243 X X 34 x per year bull Mass per unit 4243 X X 34 x per year bull Dimensions of fabricsbars 42 X X 34 x per year bull Bendndashbend back tensile

test 42 X X 3 x per year

Own testing laboratory bull Own laboratory 61 X X 1 x per year bull Outsourcing of tests 62 X X 34 x per year bull Verification audit 63 X X 1 x per 2 years System requirements bull IQC schedule 5 X X 34 x per year bull Quality mark 4647 X X 34 x per year

Table 11

1) In case of significant changes in the production process to be assessed by the CI the product requirements need to be tested again

2) The inspector or the certificate holder in the presence of the inspector will determine all product properties that can be performed within the visiting time (maximum 1 day) If this is not possible the CI and the certificate holder will make arrangements with respect to how the inspection will be performed

Inspection of the quality system The certification institute checks if the manufacturer meets the quality system requirements in chapter 5 of this BRL according to the frequency in article 86 of this BRL

National Assessment Guideline BRL 0501 01 September 2010 copy Kiwa NV - -

24

8 Requirements of de certification institute

81 General The certification institute must meet the requirements set out in EN 45011 Besides for the purpose of this BRL the institute must have been accredited by the Dutch Authority for Accreditation (RvA) or a similar body (an accreditation institute with which the RvA has entered into an agreement of mutual acceptance) The certification institute must have a set of regulations or a similar document defining the general rules to be observed during certification These particularly include bull The general rules for performance of the initial audit to be structured as follows

o The way in which suppliers are informed about the handling of a request o The performance of the audit o The decision based on the audit performed

bull The general rules concerning the performance of inspections and the inspection aspects used here

bull The measures the certification institute must take in case of defects bull The rules for terminating a certificate bull The possibility to make an appeal against decisions or measures of the certification

institute

82 Certification staff Staff involved in certification procedures include bull Auditors charged with performing the initial audit and assessing the reports of the

inspectors bull Inspectors charged with performing the external inspection at the supplierrsquos bull Decision-makers charged with taking decisions based on the initial audits performed

about continuation of certification based on inspections performed and about the necessity to take corrective measures

821 Qualification requirements A distinction is made with respect to 8211 Qualification requirements for the certification executives of a CI meeting the

requirements set out in EN 45011 8212 Supplementary qualification requirements for the certification executives of a CI as

determined by the Board of Experts for the subject of this BRL

National Assessment Guideline BRL 0501 01 September 2010 copy Kiwa NV - -

25

8211 Qualification requirements for the certification executives of a CI meeting the requirements set out in EN 45011

The qualification of the certification executives of a CI must comply with chapter 5 of EN 45011 The manual of the CI must describe how the qualification of the certification executives is performed

EN45011

Auditor

initial product assessment and assessment of the

production location

Inspector

assessment product location field and

projects after granting of certificate

Decision-maker

for granting and extending a certificate

Education General

Higher Vocational thinking and working level

Intermediate vocational working and thinking level

Higher Vocational thinking and working level

Education Specific

Basic training for auditing Basic training for auditing

Basic training for auditing

Experience General

1 year of relevant working experience with min 4 audits including 1 full initial audit done independently under supervision

1 year of relevant working experience with min 4 audits including 1 done independent under supervision

4 years of relevant working experience of which at least 1 year with respect to certification

Experience Specific

knowledge of BRL at detailed level and 4 audits related to the specific BRL or to similar BRLs

knowledge of BRL at detailed level and 4 audits related to the specific BRL or to similar BRLs

Basic knowledge of the specific certification schedule

8212 Supplementary qualification requirements for the certification executives of a CI as determined by the Board of Experts for the subject of this BRL

Certification staff Education Experience Auditor Higher vocational education level in one of the

following disciplines - Constructional engineering - Civil engineering - Mechanical engineering

2 years

Inspector Intermediate vocational education level in one of the following disciplines - ConstructionalCivil engineering - Materials science - Mechanical engineering

2 years

Decision-maker Higher vocational education level in one of the following disciplines - Constructional engineering - Civil engineering - Quality science - Mechanical engineering

4 years Managerial experience

822 Qualification Certification staff must be demonstrably qualified by comparing the education and experience with the requirements set out above If qualification takes place based on deviating criteria this must be laid down in writing The qualification authority is vested with

National Assessment Guideline BRL 0501 01 September 2010 copy Kiwa NV - -

26

bull Decision-makers qualification of auditors and inspectors bull Management of the certification institute qualification of decision-makers

83 Initial audit report The certification institute records the findings of the initial audit in a report The report must meet the following requirements bull Completeness the report makes a statement about all requirements set out in the

assessment guideline bull Traceability the findings the statement are based on must have been recorded in a

traceable way bull Basis for decision the decision-maker for granting a certificate must be able to base his

decision on the findings recorded in the report

84 Decision about granting the certificate The decision concerning the granting of the certificate must be made by a decision-maker who is qualified to do so and who has not been involved in the certificate audit himself The decision must have been recorded in a traceable way

85 Presentation of the quality statement The product certificate must be presented in conformity with the model included in the annex

86 Nature and frequency of external inspections The certification institute must regularly inspect the supplier for compliance with his obligations The Board of Experts will decide upon the frequency of the inspections At the time this assessment guideline took effect the frequency was set to bull 3 inspection visits per year at suppliers of hot-rolled products bull 4 inspection visits per year at suppliers of other products Inspections will in any case pertain to a number of matters including bull The product specifications laid down in the product specification bull The supplierrsquos production process bull The supplierrsquos IQC schedule and the results of the inspections performed by the supplier bull The correct way of marking the certified products bull Compliance with the required procedures The certification institute will lay down the findings of each inspection performed in a report in a traceable way

87 Reporting to the Board of Experts The certification institute must report on the certification activities performed at least once a year The report must include the following subjects bull Mutations in number of certificates (newlapsed) bull Number of inspections performed in relation to the determined frequency bull Inspection results bull Measures imposed in case of defects bull Complaints received from third parties with respect to certified products

88 Interpretation of requirements The Board of Experts may lay down the requirements set in this assessment guideline in a single separate interpretation document The certification institute is obliged to ensure whether an interpretation document has been drawn up and if so must make use of the interpretations laid down in this

89 Specific rules defined by the Board of Experts The Board of Experts has not defined specific rules that are to be followed with certification by the certification institute

National Assessment Guideline BRL 0501 01 September 2010 copy Kiwa NV - -

27

9 List of documents mentioned

91 Standardsnormative documents

NEN 6008 2008 Reinforcing steel NEN 6720 1995 Technical foundations for building constructions - TGB 1990 ndash

Regulations for concrete - TGB 1990 ndash Structural requirements and calculation methods (VBC 1995) September 1995 including amendment sheet A4 December 2007

NEN 6722 2002 Regulations for concrete ndash Execution December 2002 NEN 6723 1995 Regulations for concrete - Bridges ndash (VBB June 1995) Structural requirements

and calculation methods December 1995 including amendment sheet A1 December 2003

NEN-EN 1992 2005 Design of concrete structures NEN-EN 1994 2005 Design of composite steel and concrete structures NEN-EN 10002 2001 Metallic materials tensile testing - Part 1 Method of testing at ambient

temperature August 2001 NEN-EN 10080 2005 Steel for the reinforcement of concrete ndash Weldable reinforcing steel - General NEN-EN 10204 2004 Metallic products - Types of inspection documents October 2004 NEN-EN 45012 1998 General requirements for bodies operating assessment and

certificationregistration of quality systems NEN-EN-ISO 376 2004 Metallic materials - Calibration of force-proving instruments used for the

verification of uniaxial testing machines NEN-EN-ISO 7500-1 2004 Metallic materials - Verification of static uniaxial testing machines ndash

Part 1 Tensilecompression testing machines - Verification and calibration of the force-measuring system August 2004

NEN-EN-ISO 9513 2002 Metallic materials ndash Calibration of extensometers for uniaxial testing October 2002

NEN-EN-ISO 15630-1 2002 Steel for the reinforcement and prestressing of concrete - Test methods ndash Part 1 Reinforcing bars wire rod and wire June 2002

NEN-EN-ISO 15630-2 2002 Steel for the reinforcement and prestressing of concrete - Test methods ndash Part 2 Welded fabric

NEN-EN-ISOIEC 17020

2004 General criteria for the operation of various types of bodies performing inspection

NEN-EN-ISOIEC 17024

2003 Conformity assessment - General requirements for bodies operating certification of persons

NEN-EN-ISOIEC 17025

2005 General requirements for the competence of testing and calibration laboratories

ISO 3301 1975 Statistical interpretation of data ndash Comparison of two means in the case of paired observations

ISO 4965 1979 Axial load fatigue testing machines - Dynamic force calibration - Strain gauge technique April 1979

ISO 16269-6 2005 Statistical interpretation of data Determination of statistical tolerance intervals

Annex I Model certificate

Issued Replaces Issued date Valid until Indefinite Page 1 of 2

KOMOreg

Product certificate

ltName Productgt ltCertificate holdergt

STATEMENT OF CI This product certificate was issued on the basis of BRL lsquo lsquo in conformity with the regulations for Product Certification CI declares that the justifiable confidence exists that the name product supplied by the certificate holder meets the technical specifications laid down in this product certificate provided that name product has the KOMOreg mark as indicated in this product certificate Director CI Advice refer to wwwltCIgtnl to see if this certificate is valid

Certificate holder T F E I

Assessed Quality system Product

Periodic check

reg is a collective brand of Stichting Bouwkwaliteit

Annex II Model for IQC schedule or framework of IQC schedule

Subjects Aspects Method Frequency Registration

Basic materials or supplied materials bull Recipe sheets bull Inspection of incoming raw

materials bull Mechanical bull Chemical

Production process production equipment material bull Procedures bull Work instructions bull Equipment bull Material bull Process inspection

End products

Measuring and testing equipment

Measuring and testing equipment bull Measuring devices bull Calibration bull Outsourced tests

Logistics bull Internal transport bull Storage bull Packaging bull Preservation bull Identification or marking

of semi-finished and end products

Corrective measures Complaints handling

Annex III Sampling and testing overview

Type

on

derz

oek

1)

Doo

rlope

nd

inte

rn fa

brie

kson

derz

oek

Perio

diek

ex

tern

ond

erzo

ek (a

udit)

To

elat

ings

onde

rzoe

k

(type

onde

rzoe

k)

Type

bet

onst

aal

stav

enro

llen

per d

iam

eter

ge

punt

last

e w

apn

ette

n pe

r dia

-com

bina

tie

stav

enro

llen

3 bp

e va

n 1

diam

eter

8)

gepu

ntla

ste

wap

net

ten

3 bp

e va

n 1

dia-

com

bina

tie 7)

8)

stav

enro

llen

3 bp

e pe

r di

amet

er 6)

gepu

ntla

ste

wap

net

ten

3 bp

e pe

r dia

-co

mbi

natie

6) 7

) R

e 1

per 3

0 t

m

in 3

per

bpe

m

in 2

per

bpe

1

lang

s + d

war

s 5

per b

pe

5 pe

r bpe

3

lang

s + 2

dw

ars

10 p

er b

pe

10 p

er b

pe

5 la

ngs +

5 d

war

s R

mR

e id

em

idem

id

em

idem

id

em

idem

R

eac

tRe

nom

2)

idem

id

em

idem

id

em

idem

id

em

Agt

idem

id

em

idem

id

em

idem

id

em

Bui

gpro

ef

1 pe

r bpe

4)

idem

2

per b

pe

2 pe

r bpe

1

lang

s + 1

dw

ars

5 pe

r bpe

5

per b

pe

3 la

ngs +

2 d

war

s M

assa

per

m

idem

id

em 5)

id

em

idem

5)

idem

id

em 5)

G

eom

etrie

opp

en

pro

fielfa

ctor

id

em

idem

id

em

idem

id

em

Idem

Che

mis

che

sa

men

st +

Ceq

3)

1 pe

r lad

ing

1

per l

adin

g 1

per l

adin

g 1

per l

adin

g 1

per l

adin

g 1

per l

adin

g

Afs

chui

fpro

ef

nv

t m

in 2

per

bpe

n

vt

3 pe

r bpe

n

vt

3 pe

r bpe

B

uig-

te

rugb

uigt

rekp

roe

f

nv

t n

vt

2 pe

r bpe

n

vt

2 pe

r bpe

n

vt

Afm

etin

gen

nv

t m

in 1

per

bpe

n

vt

1 pe

r bpe

n

vt

1 pe

r bpe

V

erm

oeiin

g n

vt

nv

t 5

per j

aar

5 pe

r jaa

r 6

per b

pe 9)

5

per b

pe 10

)

1) The audit is always for each manufacturing process (hot-rolled-cooled -cold-stretched cold-profiles) of a certain type of reinforcing steel 2) If applicable (B500C) 3) Chemical composition + Ceq to be determined and submitted by the steel manufacturer not for each diameter (combination) 4) For bending mass and geometry surface + frfp min 1 per 150 tons 5) Can be determined for welding 6) Smallest largest and intermediate diameters (always skipping 2 consecutive diameters) of the range (deviating from EN 10080) 7) Always the most critical diameter combination that occurs 8) In a period of a maximum of 5 years number and spreading of diameters 9) For d le 28 mm the largest and middle diameters for gt 28 mm the largest diameter 10) The largest middle and smallest diameters Test unit is defined as -- barscoils the load or a part of the load (for bending mass and geometryprofile min 1 per 90 t) -- point welded reinforcement fabrics 50 tons of the same combination of reinforcing steel types and diameters manufactured with the same point welding machine

Annex IV Model for biannual reporting on reinforcing steel

Page 16: National Assessment Guideline - Kiwa · PDF fileThe NEN-EN 10080:2005 is not a harmonised standard and therefore a CE mark can not yet be attached to the products covered by this BRL

National Assessment Guideline BRL 0501 01 September 2010 copy Kiwa NV - -

15

4431 Inspection for the fatigue strength in initial audit Sampling and testing frequency

Delivery condition

Diameter Inspection frequency

bars and coils for d le 28 mm the middle and largest of the diameter range For d gt 28 mm the largest diameter

6 samples of different barscoils from 3 (casting) loads for each selected diameter (18 bars per diameter)

point welded fabrics

The smallest middle and largest diameter of the diameter range (always with the least favourable diameter combination)

5 samples of different bars with a point weld from 3 test units for each selected diameter (15 bars per diameter)

Test method a semi-statistical This simplified test is regarded as sufficient if the requirements given below are met

With reinforcing steel bars and coils B500B and B500C in the diameter range d le 28 mm with

the requirement aσ2 ge 175 MPa

a2σ = 175 MPa a2σ = 200 MPa Number of samples 10 sup2) Number of samples 8 sup2) Stress changes (106) Break Stress changes (106) Break

lt 15 lt 20 ge 20

none le l ge 9

lt 075 075 lt 10 10 lt 20 ge 20

none le l

le 2 1)

ge 5 1) le 3 breaks if no break occurred up to 1x106 tension changes sup2) total number 10 + 8 = 18

Table 5

With reinforcing steel bars B500B and B500C in the diameter range d gt 28 mm with the

requirement aσ2 ge 145 MPa

a2σ = 145 MPa a2σ = 170 MPa Number of samples 10 sup2) Number of samples 8 sup2) Stress changes (106) Break Stress changes (106) Break

lt 15 lt 20 ge 20

none le l ge 9

lt 075 075 lt 15 15 lt 20 ge 20

none le 2

le 2 1)

ge 4 1) le 4 breaks if no break occurred up to 15 x 106 tension changes sup2) total number 10 + 8 = 18

Table 6

With point welded fabrics B500A B500B and B500C as well as reinforcing steel bars and coils

B500A with the requirement aσ2 ge 100 MPa

a2σ = 100 MPa a2σ = 180 MPa Number of samples 10 sup1) Number of samples 5 sup1) Stress changes (106) Break Stress changes (106) Break

lt 15 lt 20 ge 20

none le l ge 9

lt 025 025 lt 05 ge 05

none le 3 ge 2

sup1) total number 10 + 5 = 15 Table 7

National Assessment Guideline BRL 0501 01 September 2010 copy Kiwa NV - -

16

Test method b fully statistical This test is done with the appropriate statistic methods considering the requirements p = 095 W = 75 set out in NEN 6008

Here the requirement Cv le x ndash ks must be complied with where x = the average value in which max 2 million load changes must be maintained

for the individual value of one test bar s = the estimate of the standard deviation of the population k = variation coefficient according to the table below (in conformity with ISO 16269-6) Cv = the characteristic value for the tension changes 1 106

n k n k n k n k 15 199 20 193 30 187 50 181 16 199 25 190 40 183 100 176 18 195

Table 8

4432 Inspection for the fatigue strength in periodic external inspections (audit testing) The numbers of test bars of one diameter given below are tested on an annual basis The sampling takes place in the presence of the inspector and is part of the audit testing -- barscoils 5 per year -- point welded fabrics 5 per year provided that in a period of 5 years at least 80 of all certified diameters (diameter combinations) has been tested With the 80 mentioned at least the following must have been tested

bull For barscoils the largest diameter in the range d le 28 mm and the largest diameter in the range d gt 28 mm

bull For point welded fabrics the smallest and the largest diameters always with the least favourable diameter combination

The test is considered to be satisfactory if

bull with the barscoils max 1 sample broke at lt 20106 stress changes and the other 4 samples have at least resisted 20106 tension changes

bull with the point welded fabrics max 1 sample broke at between 10106 and 20106 stress changes and the other 4 samples have at least resisted 20106 stress changes

For barscoils and point welded fabrics only a re-inspection can take place if no more than 2 samples broke at fewer than 20 106 stress changes In this case 5 extra samples are to be tested whereby no breaks at lt 20 106 stress changes may occur In this case the test series is satisfactory If this is not complied with further testing is necessary to find the cause and corrective measures are to be taken in order to avoid reoccurrence If necessary a new initial audit for the fatigue strength is to be performed

45 Biannual reporting The test results of all test units of the continuous inspections are to be collected and statistically evaluated for Re Agt RmRe and ReactRenom (if relevant) based on data of the production of the previous six months or the 200 most recent data dependent on which is the largest number These data shall biannually be sent to the certification institute in conformity with the model in annex 4

National Assessment Guideline BRL 0501 01 September 2010 copy Kiwa NV - -

17

46 Identification Contrary to NEN-EN 10080 art 101211 the product numbers (technical classes) are not assigned by a European organisation However the other requirements concerning the identification are observed in conformity with NEN 6008 and NEN-EN 10080

47 Certification mark Each packaging unit must have a label with the following obligatory indications

bull KOMO mark bull product certificate number + delivery condition (bars coils fabrics) bull the reinforcing steel type and the manufacturer number bull name andor logo of the manufacturer bull mentioning BRL0501

A packaging unit can be characterised

bull with reinforcing steel on coils as lsquothe coilrsquo marking min 1 label per coil bull with reinforcing steel bars as lsquothe bundlesrsquo marking min 1 label per bundle bull with point welded fabrics as lsquonumber of fabricsrsquo marking at least 1 label per unit of max

40 reinforcement fabrics or max 2 tons Additionally each point welded fabric in which only externally purchased and delivered reinforcing steel has been used must be marked in an indelible and non-removable way For example when using a ldquoSchlatter Etikettiermachinen Methoderdquo or equivalent the point welded reinforcement fabrics are to be marked with at least 1 label

National Assessment Guideline BRL 0501 01 September 2010 copy Kiwa NV - -

18

5 Requirements to the quality system

51 General This chapter includes the requirements that the quality system of the supplier has to meet

52 Administrator of the quality system A staff member is to be appointed as quality system manager within the organisational structure

53 Internal quality controlquality plan The supplier must have and use a schedule for internal quality control (an IQC schedule) in accordance with the model indicated in annex 2 In this IQC schedule the following must be demonstrably recorded

bull what aspects the manufacturer will inspect bull what methods will be used for these inspections bull the frequency of these inspections bull how to record and file the inspection results bull aspects with respect to the production of point welded reinforcement fabrics

Also the supplier must have a procedure for organising the production process of any post-stretching alignment and the reinforcement fabrics to be point welded and how this is implemented inspected and monitored This IQC schedule must have been derived from the IQC schedule included in the annex and must have been set up such that it gives the CI enough confidence that the requirements set out in this assessment guideline are continuously met

This must function at least 3 months before issuing the certificate

54 Procedures and work instructions The supplier must be able to submit

bull procedures for - handling out of spec products and (semi-)products to be repaired - corrective measures after observed defects - handling complaints about products andor services delivered - monitoring the quality using the extra value a - a4 - the work instructions and inspection forms used including the biannual reporting

(see annex 4)

55 Other requirements to the quality system

551 Reinforcing steel The following are regarded as sufficient proof that the purchased reinforcing steel complies with the product standard mentioned (NEN 6008) and other technical specifications

bull KOMO quality statement issued on the basis of BRL 0501 lsquoReinforcing steelrsquo by a certification andor attestation institute acknowledged by the Dutch Authority for Accreditation for the discipline involved

bull a (quality) statement the equivalence of which with the above-mentioned KOMO quality statement has been demonstrated

The traceability of the purchased reinforcing steel is guaranteed by the rolling mark and the labelling The origin (certificate number) of the reinforcing steel must be recorded at the initial audit

National Assessment Guideline BRL 0501 01 September 2010 copy Kiwa NV - -

19

552 Storage of reinforcing steel Reinforcing steel must be stored free from the ground Store and label reinforcing steel such that the chance of exchange for instance with foreign qualities is eliminated

National Assessment Guideline BRL 0501 01 September 2010 copy Kiwa NV - -

20

6 Requirements for the functioning of a test laboratory for testing reinforcing steel andor point welded reinforcement fabrics

61 The supplier has its own laboratory for testing reinforcing steel for its variable and attributive properties The laboratory equipment as well as the test methods must comply with

bull NEN-EN 10002-22001 Metallic materials tensile testing part 1 method of testing at ambient temperature

bull NEN-EN-ISO 15630-12002 Steel for the reinforcement and prestressing of concrete Test methods ndash Part 1 reinforcing bars wire rod and wire June 2002

bull NEN-EN-ISO 15630-22002 Steel for the reinforcement and prestressing of concrete Test methods ndash Part 2 welded fabric

Measuring equipment that has not been classified for one of the above-mentioned standards can be used as soon as they have been tested assessed and qualified by the CI

62 Outsourcing of testing Tests for the chemical composition and the fatigue strength of reinforcing steel can be outsourced as well De test results can be indicated as being lsquoperformed in a reliable wayrsquo if

bull The tests have been performed by a laboratory that meets the accreditation standard referred to in article 14 of this BRL NEN-EN-ISOIEC 17025 lsquoGeneral requirements for the competence of testing and calibration laboratoriesrsquo This accreditation must concern the performance of tests in conformity with the outsourcing assignment Besides a 31 or a 22 certificate of the results in conformity with NEN-EN 10204 is to be submitted or

bull The supplier receives the test results of the chemical composition from a company that has a product certificate of the lsquotechnical disciplinersquo (H9) mentioned in this BRL with the CI and the relevant measuring equipment in the laboratory concerned is covered by the product certificate audit

If the above requirements are not complied with the certification institute will perform or have performed the audit concerned itself In this case the certification institute will base its test on the accreditation standard NEN-EN-ISOIEC 17025

63 Verification audit An initial audit includes external verification of both the attributive and the variable properties Also an external verification for the performance of the used tensile tests takes place every two years The diameter is to be selected such that the diameters that occur most are tested in a period of 5 years When using a new tensile testing machinemeasuring equipment a verification audit is to be performed as well

National Assessment Guideline BRL 0501 01 September 2010 copy Kiwa NV - -

21

631 Variable properties For the verification of variable properties (the results of the tensile test) at least 15 random samples of one selected diameter must be taken in the presence of the inspector (audit testing) for each selected reinforcing steel type each of a length suitable for two test pieces for testing The selected representative diameters must change at the two-yearly verification With bars and coils the samples must have been spread over at least 3 loads of 1 diameter The samples for point welded reinforcement fabrics and the corresponding bars must come from 1 diameter combination produced on different days For each sample the two collected test pieces must be marked and then the test pieces must be bundled into two series of at least 15 test pieces A third series can be taken as spare series in case of discussions about the achieved results One series must be tested in the presence of the inspector at the manufacturerrsquos The inspector must have the other series tested at an external laboratory The time between the performances of both test series must be short enough to allow for neglecting any natural ageing of the testing material The test (tensile test) includes determination of the 02 yield limit or flow limit (Re) the tensile strength (Rm) the RmRe ratio and the yield with maximum load (Agt) of each individual test piece The thus obtained two series of measurement pairs must then be tested for their differences between both performances of the test Any systematic differences are to be tracked and eliminated

With the statistic comparison of two different performances of tests the differences of paired measurements are to be checked in relation with the hypothesis that the expected value of the average difference is zero (Student test) Rejection of this hypothesis indicates that there is a possibility of systematic differences For each variable property the xfi (i = 1n) of the measurement results of the manufacturer and the xei (i = 1hellip n) of the external institute must be calculated separately

bull Difference vi = xfi ndash xei considering the positive or negative difference and then the average difference

= sum

=

n

iiv

nv

1

1

bull standard deviation of the differences

minus

minus= sum

=

2

1

2

11 vnv

ns

n

iiv

bull value vsvt =

It must be verified for the variable properties the 02 yield limit or flow limit (Reee ) the tensile strength (Rmmm ) and the yield with maximum load (Aggg ttt ) whether or not t exceeds a critical limit to The critical values to depend on the number of tests and have been derived from ISO 3301 1975 with a = 001 (see table 9)

National Assessment Guideline BRL 0501 01 September 2010 copy Kiwa NV - -

22

Table 9 ndash Critical values of to

n to n to n to

10 103 11 096 12 090 13 085 14 080

15 077 16 074 17 071 18 068 19 066

20 064 25 056 30 050 35 047 40 043

If t gt to the hypothesis that there is no difference between the two series of paired measurements is rejected and so the cause of this must be found and eliminated This does not apply when sv and v are both below the reference values Sov and Vo in table 9 because of insufficient relevance

If t le to the hypothesis that there is no difference between the two series of paired measurements is not rejected The test can then be concluded unless Sv ge Sov In this case the standard deviation of the differences is excessive showing that the material concerned is unsuitable for the verification test Further investigation is then required

Table 10 ndash Reference values of Sov and Vo

sov vo 02 yield limit or flow limit 15 15 Tensile strength in MPa 15 20 Yield at maximum load in B500A B500B B500C

11 25 30

11 25 30

632 Attributive properties For the verification of attributive properties (mass per length chemical composition profiling bending test and if necessary a shearing test) the measurements of mass per length and profiling must be done in advance with the two series of at least 15 test pieces meant for the tensile test (see above) For the measurements of the bending test and shearing test (if applicable) the number of test pieces from the above described random samples must be extended with at least 5 test pieces for the bending test and if necessary the shearing test For the verification assessment of the chemical composition the number of test pieces is limited to a series of 3 test pieces from 3 test units Any combinations in the random samples of the above-mentioned verification assessments are allowed The test series at the manufacturerrsquos and the series of external tests (see above) should not produce other differences than those that can unambiguously be explained and eliminated

National Assessment Guideline BRL 0501 01 September 2010 copy Kiwa NV - -

23

7 Summary audit and inspection

Below a summary is provided of the tests to be performed for certification bull Initial audit the audit to determine whether all requirements in the BRL are met bull Inspection audit the audit performed after granting the certificate to determine whether

the certified products continuously meet the requirements set in the BRL Also indicates the frequency of the inspection audits to be performed by the certification institute (CI)

bull Inspection of the quality system inspection for compliance with the IQC schedule and the procedures

Here the frequency with which the certification institute must perform an inspection audit is indicated as well

Audit related to

Supervision by CI after granting the certificate1)

Requirement description Article BRL Initial audit

Inspection2) Frequency Product requirements bull Indication of product 2342 X X continuously bull Variable properties 4243 X X 34 x per year bull Chemical composition 4243 X X 34 x per year bull Bending test 42 X X 34 x per year bull Shearing test 42 X X 4 x per year bull Fatigue strength 4244 X X 1 x per year bull Geometry form 4243 X X 34 x per year bull Mass per unit 4243 X X 34 x per year bull Dimensions of fabricsbars 42 X X 34 x per year bull Bendndashbend back tensile

test 42 X X 3 x per year

Own testing laboratory bull Own laboratory 61 X X 1 x per year bull Outsourcing of tests 62 X X 34 x per year bull Verification audit 63 X X 1 x per 2 years System requirements bull IQC schedule 5 X X 34 x per year bull Quality mark 4647 X X 34 x per year

Table 11

1) In case of significant changes in the production process to be assessed by the CI the product requirements need to be tested again

2) The inspector or the certificate holder in the presence of the inspector will determine all product properties that can be performed within the visiting time (maximum 1 day) If this is not possible the CI and the certificate holder will make arrangements with respect to how the inspection will be performed

Inspection of the quality system The certification institute checks if the manufacturer meets the quality system requirements in chapter 5 of this BRL according to the frequency in article 86 of this BRL

National Assessment Guideline BRL 0501 01 September 2010 copy Kiwa NV - -

24

8 Requirements of de certification institute

81 General The certification institute must meet the requirements set out in EN 45011 Besides for the purpose of this BRL the institute must have been accredited by the Dutch Authority for Accreditation (RvA) or a similar body (an accreditation institute with which the RvA has entered into an agreement of mutual acceptance) The certification institute must have a set of regulations or a similar document defining the general rules to be observed during certification These particularly include bull The general rules for performance of the initial audit to be structured as follows

o The way in which suppliers are informed about the handling of a request o The performance of the audit o The decision based on the audit performed

bull The general rules concerning the performance of inspections and the inspection aspects used here

bull The measures the certification institute must take in case of defects bull The rules for terminating a certificate bull The possibility to make an appeal against decisions or measures of the certification

institute

82 Certification staff Staff involved in certification procedures include bull Auditors charged with performing the initial audit and assessing the reports of the

inspectors bull Inspectors charged with performing the external inspection at the supplierrsquos bull Decision-makers charged with taking decisions based on the initial audits performed

about continuation of certification based on inspections performed and about the necessity to take corrective measures

821 Qualification requirements A distinction is made with respect to 8211 Qualification requirements for the certification executives of a CI meeting the

requirements set out in EN 45011 8212 Supplementary qualification requirements for the certification executives of a CI as

determined by the Board of Experts for the subject of this BRL

National Assessment Guideline BRL 0501 01 September 2010 copy Kiwa NV - -

25

8211 Qualification requirements for the certification executives of a CI meeting the requirements set out in EN 45011

The qualification of the certification executives of a CI must comply with chapter 5 of EN 45011 The manual of the CI must describe how the qualification of the certification executives is performed

EN45011

Auditor

initial product assessment and assessment of the

production location

Inspector

assessment product location field and

projects after granting of certificate

Decision-maker

for granting and extending a certificate

Education General

Higher Vocational thinking and working level

Intermediate vocational working and thinking level

Higher Vocational thinking and working level

Education Specific

Basic training for auditing Basic training for auditing

Basic training for auditing

Experience General

1 year of relevant working experience with min 4 audits including 1 full initial audit done independently under supervision

1 year of relevant working experience with min 4 audits including 1 done independent under supervision

4 years of relevant working experience of which at least 1 year with respect to certification

Experience Specific

knowledge of BRL at detailed level and 4 audits related to the specific BRL or to similar BRLs

knowledge of BRL at detailed level and 4 audits related to the specific BRL or to similar BRLs

Basic knowledge of the specific certification schedule

8212 Supplementary qualification requirements for the certification executives of a CI as determined by the Board of Experts for the subject of this BRL

Certification staff Education Experience Auditor Higher vocational education level in one of the

following disciplines - Constructional engineering - Civil engineering - Mechanical engineering

2 years

Inspector Intermediate vocational education level in one of the following disciplines - ConstructionalCivil engineering - Materials science - Mechanical engineering

2 years

Decision-maker Higher vocational education level in one of the following disciplines - Constructional engineering - Civil engineering - Quality science - Mechanical engineering

4 years Managerial experience

822 Qualification Certification staff must be demonstrably qualified by comparing the education and experience with the requirements set out above If qualification takes place based on deviating criteria this must be laid down in writing The qualification authority is vested with

National Assessment Guideline BRL 0501 01 September 2010 copy Kiwa NV - -

26

bull Decision-makers qualification of auditors and inspectors bull Management of the certification institute qualification of decision-makers

83 Initial audit report The certification institute records the findings of the initial audit in a report The report must meet the following requirements bull Completeness the report makes a statement about all requirements set out in the

assessment guideline bull Traceability the findings the statement are based on must have been recorded in a

traceable way bull Basis for decision the decision-maker for granting a certificate must be able to base his

decision on the findings recorded in the report

84 Decision about granting the certificate The decision concerning the granting of the certificate must be made by a decision-maker who is qualified to do so and who has not been involved in the certificate audit himself The decision must have been recorded in a traceable way

85 Presentation of the quality statement The product certificate must be presented in conformity with the model included in the annex

86 Nature and frequency of external inspections The certification institute must regularly inspect the supplier for compliance with his obligations The Board of Experts will decide upon the frequency of the inspections At the time this assessment guideline took effect the frequency was set to bull 3 inspection visits per year at suppliers of hot-rolled products bull 4 inspection visits per year at suppliers of other products Inspections will in any case pertain to a number of matters including bull The product specifications laid down in the product specification bull The supplierrsquos production process bull The supplierrsquos IQC schedule and the results of the inspections performed by the supplier bull The correct way of marking the certified products bull Compliance with the required procedures The certification institute will lay down the findings of each inspection performed in a report in a traceable way

87 Reporting to the Board of Experts The certification institute must report on the certification activities performed at least once a year The report must include the following subjects bull Mutations in number of certificates (newlapsed) bull Number of inspections performed in relation to the determined frequency bull Inspection results bull Measures imposed in case of defects bull Complaints received from third parties with respect to certified products

88 Interpretation of requirements The Board of Experts may lay down the requirements set in this assessment guideline in a single separate interpretation document The certification institute is obliged to ensure whether an interpretation document has been drawn up and if so must make use of the interpretations laid down in this

89 Specific rules defined by the Board of Experts The Board of Experts has not defined specific rules that are to be followed with certification by the certification institute

National Assessment Guideline BRL 0501 01 September 2010 copy Kiwa NV - -

27

9 List of documents mentioned

91 Standardsnormative documents

NEN 6008 2008 Reinforcing steel NEN 6720 1995 Technical foundations for building constructions - TGB 1990 ndash

Regulations for concrete - TGB 1990 ndash Structural requirements and calculation methods (VBC 1995) September 1995 including amendment sheet A4 December 2007

NEN 6722 2002 Regulations for concrete ndash Execution December 2002 NEN 6723 1995 Regulations for concrete - Bridges ndash (VBB June 1995) Structural requirements

and calculation methods December 1995 including amendment sheet A1 December 2003

NEN-EN 1992 2005 Design of concrete structures NEN-EN 1994 2005 Design of composite steel and concrete structures NEN-EN 10002 2001 Metallic materials tensile testing - Part 1 Method of testing at ambient

temperature August 2001 NEN-EN 10080 2005 Steel for the reinforcement of concrete ndash Weldable reinforcing steel - General NEN-EN 10204 2004 Metallic products - Types of inspection documents October 2004 NEN-EN 45012 1998 General requirements for bodies operating assessment and

certificationregistration of quality systems NEN-EN-ISO 376 2004 Metallic materials - Calibration of force-proving instruments used for the

verification of uniaxial testing machines NEN-EN-ISO 7500-1 2004 Metallic materials - Verification of static uniaxial testing machines ndash

Part 1 Tensilecompression testing machines - Verification and calibration of the force-measuring system August 2004

NEN-EN-ISO 9513 2002 Metallic materials ndash Calibration of extensometers for uniaxial testing October 2002

NEN-EN-ISO 15630-1 2002 Steel for the reinforcement and prestressing of concrete - Test methods ndash Part 1 Reinforcing bars wire rod and wire June 2002

NEN-EN-ISO 15630-2 2002 Steel for the reinforcement and prestressing of concrete - Test methods ndash Part 2 Welded fabric

NEN-EN-ISOIEC 17020

2004 General criteria for the operation of various types of bodies performing inspection

NEN-EN-ISOIEC 17024

2003 Conformity assessment - General requirements for bodies operating certification of persons

NEN-EN-ISOIEC 17025

2005 General requirements for the competence of testing and calibration laboratories

ISO 3301 1975 Statistical interpretation of data ndash Comparison of two means in the case of paired observations

ISO 4965 1979 Axial load fatigue testing machines - Dynamic force calibration - Strain gauge technique April 1979

ISO 16269-6 2005 Statistical interpretation of data Determination of statistical tolerance intervals

Annex I Model certificate

Issued Replaces Issued date Valid until Indefinite Page 1 of 2

KOMOreg

Product certificate

ltName Productgt ltCertificate holdergt

STATEMENT OF CI This product certificate was issued on the basis of BRL lsquo lsquo in conformity with the regulations for Product Certification CI declares that the justifiable confidence exists that the name product supplied by the certificate holder meets the technical specifications laid down in this product certificate provided that name product has the KOMOreg mark as indicated in this product certificate Director CI Advice refer to wwwltCIgtnl to see if this certificate is valid

Certificate holder T F E I

Assessed Quality system Product

Periodic check

reg is a collective brand of Stichting Bouwkwaliteit

Annex II Model for IQC schedule or framework of IQC schedule

Subjects Aspects Method Frequency Registration

Basic materials or supplied materials bull Recipe sheets bull Inspection of incoming raw

materials bull Mechanical bull Chemical

Production process production equipment material bull Procedures bull Work instructions bull Equipment bull Material bull Process inspection

End products

Measuring and testing equipment

Measuring and testing equipment bull Measuring devices bull Calibration bull Outsourced tests

Logistics bull Internal transport bull Storage bull Packaging bull Preservation bull Identification or marking

of semi-finished and end products

Corrective measures Complaints handling

Annex III Sampling and testing overview

Type

on

derz

oek

1)

Doo

rlope

nd

inte

rn fa

brie

kson

derz

oek

Perio

diek

ex

tern

ond

erzo

ek (a

udit)

To

elat

ings

onde

rzoe

k

(type

onde

rzoe

k)

Type

bet

onst

aal

stav

enro

llen

per d

iam

eter

ge

punt

last

e w

apn

ette

n pe

r dia

-com

bina

tie

stav

enro

llen

3 bp

e va

n 1

diam

eter

8)

gepu

ntla

ste

wap

net

ten

3 bp

e va

n 1

dia-

com

bina

tie 7)

8)

stav

enro

llen

3 bp

e pe

r di

amet

er 6)

gepu

ntla

ste

wap

net

ten

3 bp

e pe

r dia

-co

mbi

natie

6) 7

) R

e 1

per 3

0 t

m

in 3

per

bpe

m

in 2

per

bpe

1

lang

s + d

war

s 5

per b

pe

5 pe

r bpe

3

lang

s + 2

dw

ars

10 p

er b

pe

10 p

er b

pe

5 la

ngs +

5 d

war

s R

mR

e id

em

idem

id

em

idem

id

em

idem

R

eac

tRe

nom

2)

idem

id

em

idem

id

em

idem

id

em

Agt

idem

id

em

idem

id

em

idem

id

em

Bui

gpro

ef

1 pe

r bpe

4)

idem

2

per b

pe

2 pe

r bpe

1

lang

s + 1

dw

ars

5 pe

r bpe

5

per b

pe

3 la

ngs +

2 d

war

s M

assa

per

m

idem

id

em 5)

id

em

idem

5)

idem

id

em 5)

G

eom

etrie

opp

en

pro

fielfa

ctor

id

em

idem

id

em

idem

id

em

Idem

Che

mis

che

sa

men

st +

Ceq

3)

1 pe

r lad

ing

1

per l

adin

g 1

per l

adin

g 1

per l

adin

g 1

per l

adin

g 1

per l

adin

g

Afs

chui

fpro

ef

nv

t m

in 2

per

bpe

n

vt

3 pe

r bpe

n

vt

3 pe

r bpe

B

uig-

te

rugb

uigt

rekp

roe

f

nv

t n

vt

2 pe

r bpe

n

vt

2 pe

r bpe

n

vt

Afm

etin

gen

nv

t m

in 1

per

bpe

n

vt

1 pe

r bpe

n

vt

1 pe

r bpe

V

erm

oeiin

g n

vt

nv

t 5

per j

aar

5 pe

r jaa

r 6

per b

pe 9)

5

per b

pe 10

)

1) The audit is always for each manufacturing process (hot-rolled-cooled -cold-stretched cold-profiles) of a certain type of reinforcing steel 2) If applicable (B500C) 3) Chemical composition + Ceq to be determined and submitted by the steel manufacturer not for each diameter (combination) 4) For bending mass and geometry surface + frfp min 1 per 150 tons 5) Can be determined for welding 6) Smallest largest and intermediate diameters (always skipping 2 consecutive diameters) of the range (deviating from EN 10080) 7) Always the most critical diameter combination that occurs 8) In a period of a maximum of 5 years number and spreading of diameters 9) For d le 28 mm the largest and middle diameters for gt 28 mm the largest diameter 10) The largest middle and smallest diameters Test unit is defined as -- barscoils the load or a part of the load (for bending mass and geometryprofile min 1 per 90 t) -- point welded reinforcement fabrics 50 tons of the same combination of reinforcing steel types and diameters manufactured with the same point welding machine

Annex IV Model for biannual reporting on reinforcing steel

Page 17: National Assessment Guideline - Kiwa · PDF fileThe NEN-EN 10080:2005 is not a harmonised standard and therefore a CE mark can not yet be attached to the products covered by this BRL

National Assessment Guideline BRL 0501 01 September 2010 copy Kiwa NV - -

16

Test method b fully statistical This test is done with the appropriate statistic methods considering the requirements p = 095 W = 75 set out in NEN 6008

Here the requirement Cv le x ndash ks must be complied with where x = the average value in which max 2 million load changes must be maintained

for the individual value of one test bar s = the estimate of the standard deviation of the population k = variation coefficient according to the table below (in conformity with ISO 16269-6) Cv = the characteristic value for the tension changes 1 106

n k n k n k n k 15 199 20 193 30 187 50 181 16 199 25 190 40 183 100 176 18 195

Table 8

4432 Inspection for the fatigue strength in periodic external inspections (audit testing) The numbers of test bars of one diameter given below are tested on an annual basis The sampling takes place in the presence of the inspector and is part of the audit testing -- barscoils 5 per year -- point welded fabrics 5 per year provided that in a period of 5 years at least 80 of all certified diameters (diameter combinations) has been tested With the 80 mentioned at least the following must have been tested

bull For barscoils the largest diameter in the range d le 28 mm and the largest diameter in the range d gt 28 mm

bull For point welded fabrics the smallest and the largest diameters always with the least favourable diameter combination

The test is considered to be satisfactory if

bull with the barscoils max 1 sample broke at lt 20106 stress changes and the other 4 samples have at least resisted 20106 tension changes

bull with the point welded fabrics max 1 sample broke at between 10106 and 20106 stress changes and the other 4 samples have at least resisted 20106 stress changes

For barscoils and point welded fabrics only a re-inspection can take place if no more than 2 samples broke at fewer than 20 106 stress changes In this case 5 extra samples are to be tested whereby no breaks at lt 20 106 stress changes may occur In this case the test series is satisfactory If this is not complied with further testing is necessary to find the cause and corrective measures are to be taken in order to avoid reoccurrence If necessary a new initial audit for the fatigue strength is to be performed

45 Biannual reporting The test results of all test units of the continuous inspections are to be collected and statistically evaluated for Re Agt RmRe and ReactRenom (if relevant) based on data of the production of the previous six months or the 200 most recent data dependent on which is the largest number These data shall biannually be sent to the certification institute in conformity with the model in annex 4

National Assessment Guideline BRL 0501 01 September 2010 copy Kiwa NV - -

17

46 Identification Contrary to NEN-EN 10080 art 101211 the product numbers (technical classes) are not assigned by a European organisation However the other requirements concerning the identification are observed in conformity with NEN 6008 and NEN-EN 10080

47 Certification mark Each packaging unit must have a label with the following obligatory indications

bull KOMO mark bull product certificate number + delivery condition (bars coils fabrics) bull the reinforcing steel type and the manufacturer number bull name andor logo of the manufacturer bull mentioning BRL0501

A packaging unit can be characterised

bull with reinforcing steel on coils as lsquothe coilrsquo marking min 1 label per coil bull with reinforcing steel bars as lsquothe bundlesrsquo marking min 1 label per bundle bull with point welded fabrics as lsquonumber of fabricsrsquo marking at least 1 label per unit of max

40 reinforcement fabrics or max 2 tons Additionally each point welded fabric in which only externally purchased and delivered reinforcing steel has been used must be marked in an indelible and non-removable way For example when using a ldquoSchlatter Etikettiermachinen Methoderdquo or equivalent the point welded reinforcement fabrics are to be marked with at least 1 label

National Assessment Guideline BRL 0501 01 September 2010 copy Kiwa NV - -

18

5 Requirements to the quality system

51 General This chapter includes the requirements that the quality system of the supplier has to meet

52 Administrator of the quality system A staff member is to be appointed as quality system manager within the organisational structure

53 Internal quality controlquality plan The supplier must have and use a schedule for internal quality control (an IQC schedule) in accordance with the model indicated in annex 2 In this IQC schedule the following must be demonstrably recorded

bull what aspects the manufacturer will inspect bull what methods will be used for these inspections bull the frequency of these inspections bull how to record and file the inspection results bull aspects with respect to the production of point welded reinforcement fabrics

Also the supplier must have a procedure for organising the production process of any post-stretching alignment and the reinforcement fabrics to be point welded and how this is implemented inspected and monitored This IQC schedule must have been derived from the IQC schedule included in the annex and must have been set up such that it gives the CI enough confidence that the requirements set out in this assessment guideline are continuously met

This must function at least 3 months before issuing the certificate

54 Procedures and work instructions The supplier must be able to submit

bull procedures for - handling out of spec products and (semi-)products to be repaired - corrective measures after observed defects - handling complaints about products andor services delivered - monitoring the quality using the extra value a - a4 - the work instructions and inspection forms used including the biannual reporting

(see annex 4)

55 Other requirements to the quality system

551 Reinforcing steel The following are regarded as sufficient proof that the purchased reinforcing steel complies with the product standard mentioned (NEN 6008) and other technical specifications

bull KOMO quality statement issued on the basis of BRL 0501 lsquoReinforcing steelrsquo by a certification andor attestation institute acknowledged by the Dutch Authority for Accreditation for the discipline involved

bull a (quality) statement the equivalence of which with the above-mentioned KOMO quality statement has been demonstrated

The traceability of the purchased reinforcing steel is guaranteed by the rolling mark and the labelling The origin (certificate number) of the reinforcing steel must be recorded at the initial audit

National Assessment Guideline BRL 0501 01 September 2010 copy Kiwa NV - -

19

552 Storage of reinforcing steel Reinforcing steel must be stored free from the ground Store and label reinforcing steel such that the chance of exchange for instance with foreign qualities is eliminated

National Assessment Guideline BRL 0501 01 September 2010 copy Kiwa NV - -

20

6 Requirements for the functioning of a test laboratory for testing reinforcing steel andor point welded reinforcement fabrics

61 The supplier has its own laboratory for testing reinforcing steel for its variable and attributive properties The laboratory equipment as well as the test methods must comply with

bull NEN-EN 10002-22001 Metallic materials tensile testing part 1 method of testing at ambient temperature

bull NEN-EN-ISO 15630-12002 Steel for the reinforcement and prestressing of concrete Test methods ndash Part 1 reinforcing bars wire rod and wire June 2002

bull NEN-EN-ISO 15630-22002 Steel for the reinforcement and prestressing of concrete Test methods ndash Part 2 welded fabric

Measuring equipment that has not been classified for one of the above-mentioned standards can be used as soon as they have been tested assessed and qualified by the CI

62 Outsourcing of testing Tests for the chemical composition and the fatigue strength of reinforcing steel can be outsourced as well De test results can be indicated as being lsquoperformed in a reliable wayrsquo if

bull The tests have been performed by a laboratory that meets the accreditation standard referred to in article 14 of this BRL NEN-EN-ISOIEC 17025 lsquoGeneral requirements for the competence of testing and calibration laboratoriesrsquo This accreditation must concern the performance of tests in conformity with the outsourcing assignment Besides a 31 or a 22 certificate of the results in conformity with NEN-EN 10204 is to be submitted or

bull The supplier receives the test results of the chemical composition from a company that has a product certificate of the lsquotechnical disciplinersquo (H9) mentioned in this BRL with the CI and the relevant measuring equipment in the laboratory concerned is covered by the product certificate audit

If the above requirements are not complied with the certification institute will perform or have performed the audit concerned itself In this case the certification institute will base its test on the accreditation standard NEN-EN-ISOIEC 17025

63 Verification audit An initial audit includes external verification of both the attributive and the variable properties Also an external verification for the performance of the used tensile tests takes place every two years The diameter is to be selected such that the diameters that occur most are tested in a period of 5 years When using a new tensile testing machinemeasuring equipment a verification audit is to be performed as well

National Assessment Guideline BRL 0501 01 September 2010 copy Kiwa NV - -

21

631 Variable properties For the verification of variable properties (the results of the tensile test) at least 15 random samples of one selected diameter must be taken in the presence of the inspector (audit testing) for each selected reinforcing steel type each of a length suitable for two test pieces for testing The selected representative diameters must change at the two-yearly verification With bars and coils the samples must have been spread over at least 3 loads of 1 diameter The samples for point welded reinforcement fabrics and the corresponding bars must come from 1 diameter combination produced on different days For each sample the two collected test pieces must be marked and then the test pieces must be bundled into two series of at least 15 test pieces A third series can be taken as spare series in case of discussions about the achieved results One series must be tested in the presence of the inspector at the manufacturerrsquos The inspector must have the other series tested at an external laboratory The time between the performances of both test series must be short enough to allow for neglecting any natural ageing of the testing material The test (tensile test) includes determination of the 02 yield limit or flow limit (Re) the tensile strength (Rm) the RmRe ratio and the yield with maximum load (Agt) of each individual test piece The thus obtained two series of measurement pairs must then be tested for their differences between both performances of the test Any systematic differences are to be tracked and eliminated

With the statistic comparison of two different performances of tests the differences of paired measurements are to be checked in relation with the hypothesis that the expected value of the average difference is zero (Student test) Rejection of this hypothesis indicates that there is a possibility of systematic differences For each variable property the xfi (i = 1n) of the measurement results of the manufacturer and the xei (i = 1hellip n) of the external institute must be calculated separately

bull Difference vi = xfi ndash xei considering the positive or negative difference and then the average difference

= sum

=

n

iiv

nv

1

1

bull standard deviation of the differences

minus

minus= sum

=

2

1

2

11 vnv

ns

n

iiv

bull value vsvt =

It must be verified for the variable properties the 02 yield limit or flow limit (Reee ) the tensile strength (Rmmm ) and the yield with maximum load (Aggg ttt ) whether or not t exceeds a critical limit to The critical values to depend on the number of tests and have been derived from ISO 3301 1975 with a = 001 (see table 9)

National Assessment Guideline BRL 0501 01 September 2010 copy Kiwa NV - -

22

Table 9 ndash Critical values of to

n to n to n to

10 103 11 096 12 090 13 085 14 080

15 077 16 074 17 071 18 068 19 066

20 064 25 056 30 050 35 047 40 043

If t gt to the hypothesis that there is no difference between the two series of paired measurements is rejected and so the cause of this must be found and eliminated This does not apply when sv and v are both below the reference values Sov and Vo in table 9 because of insufficient relevance

If t le to the hypothesis that there is no difference between the two series of paired measurements is not rejected The test can then be concluded unless Sv ge Sov In this case the standard deviation of the differences is excessive showing that the material concerned is unsuitable for the verification test Further investigation is then required

Table 10 ndash Reference values of Sov and Vo

sov vo 02 yield limit or flow limit 15 15 Tensile strength in MPa 15 20 Yield at maximum load in B500A B500B B500C

11 25 30

11 25 30

632 Attributive properties For the verification of attributive properties (mass per length chemical composition profiling bending test and if necessary a shearing test) the measurements of mass per length and profiling must be done in advance with the two series of at least 15 test pieces meant for the tensile test (see above) For the measurements of the bending test and shearing test (if applicable) the number of test pieces from the above described random samples must be extended with at least 5 test pieces for the bending test and if necessary the shearing test For the verification assessment of the chemical composition the number of test pieces is limited to a series of 3 test pieces from 3 test units Any combinations in the random samples of the above-mentioned verification assessments are allowed The test series at the manufacturerrsquos and the series of external tests (see above) should not produce other differences than those that can unambiguously be explained and eliminated

National Assessment Guideline BRL 0501 01 September 2010 copy Kiwa NV - -

23

7 Summary audit and inspection

Below a summary is provided of the tests to be performed for certification bull Initial audit the audit to determine whether all requirements in the BRL are met bull Inspection audit the audit performed after granting the certificate to determine whether

the certified products continuously meet the requirements set in the BRL Also indicates the frequency of the inspection audits to be performed by the certification institute (CI)

bull Inspection of the quality system inspection for compliance with the IQC schedule and the procedures

Here the frequency with which the certification institute must perform an inspection audit is indicated as well

Audit related to

Supervision by CI after granting the certificate1)

Requirement description Article BRL Initial audit

Inspection2) Frequency Product requirements bull Indication of product 2342 X X continuously bull Variable properties 4243 X X 34 x per year bull Chemical composition 4243 X X 34 x per year bull Bending test 42 X X 34 x per year bull Shearing test 42 X X 4 x per year bull Fatigue strength 4244 X X 1 x per year bull Geometry form 4243 X X 34 x per year bull Mass per unit 4243 X X 34 x per year bull Dimensions of fabricsbars 42 X X 34 x per year bull Bendndashbend back tensile

test 42 X X 3 x per year

Own testing laboratory bull Own laboratory 61 X X 1 x per year bull Outsourcing of tests 62 X X 34 x per year bull Verification audit 63 X X 1 x per 2 years System requirements bull IQC schedule 5 X X 34 x per year bull Quality mark 4647 X X 34 x per year

Table 11

1) In case of significant changes in the production process to be assessed by the CI the product requirements need to be tested again

2) The inspector or the certificate holder in the presence of the inspector will determine all product properties that can be performed within the visiting time (maximum 1 day) If this is not possible the CI and the certificate holder will make arrangements with respect to how the inspection will be performed

Inspection of the quality system The certification institute checks if the manufacturer meets the quality system requirements in chapter 5 of this BRL according to the frequency in article 86 of this BRL

National Assessment Guideline BRL 0501 01 September 2010 copy Kiwa NV - -

24

8 Requirements of de certification institute

81 General The certification institute must meet the requirements set out in EN 45011 Besides for the purpose of this BRL the institute must have been accredited by the Dutch Authority for Accreditation (RvA) or a similar body (an accreditation institute with which the RvA has entered into an agreement of mutual acceptance) The certification institute must have a set of regulations or a similar document defining the general rules to be observed during certification These particularly include bull The general rules for performance of the initial audit to be structured as follows

o The way in which suppliers are informed about the handling of a request o The performance of the audit o The decision based on the audit performed

bull The general rules concerning the performance of inspections and the inspection aspects used here

bull The measures the certification institute must take in case of defects bull The rules for terminating a certificate bull The possibility to make an appeal against decisions or measures of the certification

institute

82 Certification staff Staff involved in certification procedures include bull Auditors charged with performing the initial audit and assessing the reports of the

inspectors bull Inspectors charged with performing the external inspection at the supplierrsquos bull Decision-makers charged with taking decisions based on the initial audits performed

about continuation of certification based on inspections performed and about the necessity to take corrective measures

821 Qualification requirements A distinction is made with respect to 8211 Qualification requirements for the certification executives of a CI meeting the

requirements set out in EN 45011 8212 Supplementary qualification requirements for the certification executives of a CI as

determined by the Board of Experts for the subject of this BRL

National Assessment Guideline BRL 0501 01 September 2010 copy Kiwa NV - -

25

8211 Qualification requirements for the certification executives of a CI meeting the requirements set out in EN 45011

The qualification of the certification executives of a CI must comply with chapter 5 of EN 45011 The manual of the CI must describe how the qualification of the certification executives is performed

EN45011

Auditor

initial product assessment and assessment of the

production location

Inspector

assessment product location field and

projects after granting of certificate

Decision-maker

for granting and extending a certificate

Education General

Higher Vocational thinking and working level

Intermediate vocational working and thinking level

Higher Vocational thinking and working level

Education Specific

Basic training for auditing Basic training for auditing

Basic training for auditing

Experience General

1 year of relevant working experience with min 4 audits including 1 full initial audit done independently under supervision

1 year of relevant working experience with min 4 audits including 1 done independent under supervision

4 years of relevant working experience of which at least 1 year with respect to certification

Experience Specific

knowledge of BRL at detailed level and 4 audits related to the specific BRL or to similar BRLs

knowledge of BRL at detailed level and 4 audits related to the specific BRL or to similar BRLs

Basic knowledge of the specific certification schedule

8212 Supplementary qualification requirements for the certification executives of a CI as determined by the Board of Experts for the subject of this BRL

Certification staff Education Experience Auditor Higher vocational education level in one of the

following disciplines - Constructional engineering - Civil engineering - Mechanical engineering

2 years

Inspector Intermediate vocational education level in one of the following disciplines - ConstructionalCivil engineering - Materials science - Mechanical engineering

2 years

Decision-maker Higher vocational education level in one of the following disciplines - Constructional engineering - Civil engineering - Quality science - Mechanical engineering

4 years Managerial experience

822 Qualification Certification staff must be demonstrably qualified by comparing the education and experience with the requirements set out above If qualification takes place based on deviating criteria this must be laid down in writing The qualification authority is vested with

National Assessment Guideline BRL 0501 01 September 2010 copy Kiwa NV - -

26

bull Decision-makers qualification of auditors and inspectors bull Management of the certification institute qualification of decision-makers

83 Initial audit report The certification institute records the findings of the initial audit in a report The report must meet the following requirements bull Completeness the report makes a statement about all requirements set out in the

assessment guideline bull Traceability the findings the statement are based on must have been recorded in a

traceable way bull Basis for decision the decision-maker for granting a certificate must be able to base his

decision on the findings recorded in the report

84 Decision about granting the certificate The decision concerning the granting of the certificate must be made by a decision-maker who is qualified to do so and who has not been involved in the certificate audit himself The decision must have been recorded in a traceable way

85 Presentation of the quality statement The product certificate must be presented in conformity with the model included in the annex

86 Nature and frequency of external inspections The certification institute must regularly inspect the supplier for compliance with his obligations The Board of Experts will decide upon the frequency of the inspections At the time this assessment guideline took effect the frequency was set to bull 3 inspection visits per year at suppliers of hot-rolled products bull 4 inspection visits per year at suppliers of other products Inspections will in any case pertain to a number of matters including bull The product specifications laid down in the product specification bull The supplierrsquos production process bull The supplierrsquos IQC schedule and the results of the inspections performed by the supplier bull The correct way of marking the certified products bull Compliance with the required procedures The certification institute will lay down the findings of each inspection performed in a report in a traceable way

87 Reporting to the Board of Experts The certification institute must report on the certification activities performed at least once a year The report must include the following subjects bull Mutations in number of certificates (newlapsed) bull Number of inspections performed in relation to the determined frequency bull Inspection results bull Measures imposed in case of defects bull Complaints received from third parties with respect to certified products

88 Interpretation of requirements The Board of Experts may lay down the requirements set in this assessment guideline in a single separate interpretation document The certification institute is obliged to ensure whether an interpretation document has been drawn up and if so must make use of the interpretations laid down in this

89 Specific rules defined by the Board of Experts The Board of Experts has not defined specific rules that are to be followed with certification by the certification institute

National Assessment Guideline BRL 0501 01 September 2010 copy Kiwa NV - -

27

9 List of documents mentioned

91 Standardsnormative documents

NEN 6008 2008 Reinforcing steel NEN 6720 1995 Technical foundations for building constructions - TGB 1990 ndash

Regulations for concrete - TGB 1990 ndash Structural requirements and calculation methods (VBC 1995) September 1995 including amendment sheet A4 December 2007

NEN 6722 2002 Regulations for concrete ndash Execution December 2002 NEN 6723 1995 Regulations for concrete - Bridges ndash (VBB June 1995) Structural requirements

and calculation methods December 1995 including amendment sheet A1 December 2003

NEN-EN 1992 2005 Design of concrete structures NEN-EN 1994 2005 Design of composite steel and concrete structures NEN-EN 10002 2001 Metallic materials tensile testing - Part 1 Method of testing at ambient

temperature August 2001 NEN-EN 10080 2005 Steel for the reinforcement of concrete ndash Weldable reinforcing steel - General NEN-EN 10204 2004 Metallic products - Types of inspection documents October 2004 NEN-EN 45012 1998 General requirements for bodies operating assessment and

certificationregistration of quality systems NEN-EN-ISO 376 2004 Metallic materials - Calibration of force-proving instruments used for the

verification of uniaxial testing machines NEN-EN-ISO 7500-1 2004 Metallic materials - Verification of static uniaxial testing machines ndash

Part 1 Tensilecompression testing machines - Verification and calibration of the force-measuring system August 2004

NEN-EN-ISO 9513 2002 Metallic materials ndash Calibration of extensometers for uniaxial testing October 2002

NEN-EN-ISO 15630-1 2002 Steel for the reinforcement and prestressing of concrete - Test methods ndash Part 1 Reinforcing bars wire rod and wire June 2002

NEN-EN-ISO 15630-2 2002 Steel for the reinforcement and prestressing of concrete - Test methods ndash Part 2 Welded fabric

NEN-EN-ISOIEC 17020

2004 General criteria for the operation of various types of bodies performing inspection

NEN-EN-ISOIEC 17024

2003 Conformity assessment - General requirements for bodies operating certification of persons

NEN-EN-ISOIEC 17025

2005 General requirements for the competence of testing and calibration laboratories

ISO 3301 1975 Statistical interpretation of data ndash Comparison of two means in the case of paired observations

ISO 4965 1979 Axial load fatigue testing machines - Dynamic force calibration - Strain gauge technique April 1979

ISO 16269-6 2005 Statistical interpretation of data Determination of statistical tolerance intervals

Annex I Model certificate

Issued Replaces Issued date Valid until Indefinite Page 1 of 2

KOMOreg

Product certificate

ltName Productgt ltCertificate holdergt

STATEMENT OF CI This product certificate was issued on the basis of BRL lsquo lsquo in conformity with the regulations for Product Certification CI declares that the justifiable confidence exists that the name product supplied by the certificate holder meets the technical specifications laid down in this product certificate provided that name product has the KOMOreg mark as indicated in this product certificate Director CI Advice refer to wwwltCIgtnl to see if this certificate is valid

Certificate holder T F E I

Assessed Quality system Product

Periodic check

reg is a collective brand of Stichting Bouwkwaliteit

Annex II Model for IQC schedule or framework of IQC schedule

Subjects Aspects Method Frequency Registration

Basic materials or supplied materials bull Recipe sheets bull Inspection of incoming raw

materials bull Mechanical bull Chemical

Production process production equipment material bull Procedures bull Work instructions bull Equipment bull Material bull Process inspection

End products

Measuring and testing equipment

Measuring and testing equipment bull Measuring devices bull Calibration bull Outsourced tests

Logistics bull Internal transport bull Storage bull Packaging bull Preservation bull Identification or marking

of semi-finished and end products

Corrective measures Complaints handling

Annex III Sampling and testing overview

Type

on

derz

oek

1)

Doo

rlope

nd

inte

rn fa

brie

kson

derz

oek

Perio

diek

ex

tern

ond

erzo

ek (a

udit)

To

elat

ings

onde

rzoe

k

(type

onde

rzoe

k)

Type

bet

onst

aal

stav

enro

llen

per d

iam

eter

ge

punt

last

e w

apn

ette

n pe

r dia

-com

bina

tie

stav

enro

llen

3 bp

e va

n 1

diam

eter

8)

gepu

ntla

ste

wap

net

ten

3 bp

e va

n 1

dia-

com

bina

tie 7)

8)

stav

enro

llen

3 bp

e pe

r di

amet

er 6)

gepu

ntla

ste

wap

net

ten

3 bp

e pe

r dia

-co

mbi

natie

6) 7

) R

e 1

per 3

0 t

m

in 3

per

bpe

m

in 2

per

bpe

1

lang

s + d

war

s 5

per b

pe

5 pe

r bpe

3

lang

s + 2

dw

ars

10 p

er b

pe

10 p

er b

pe

5 la

ngs +

5 d

war

s R

mR

e id

em

idem

id

em

idem

id

em

idem

R

eac

tRe

nom

2)

idem

id

em

idem

id

em

idem

id

em

Agt

idem

id

em

idem

id

em

idem

id

em

Bui

gpro

ef

1 pe

r bpe

4)

idem

2

per b

pe

2 pe

r bpe

1

lang

s + 1

dw

ars

5 pe

r bpe

5

per b

pe

3 la

ngs +

2 d

war

s M

assa

per

m

idem

id

em 5)

id

em

idem

5)

idem

id

em 5)

G

eom

etrie

opp

en

pro

fielfa

ctor

id

em

idem

id

em

idem

id

em

Idem

Che

mis

che

sa

men

st +

Ceq

3)

1 pe

r lad

ing

1

per l

adin

g 1

per l

adin

g 1

per l

adin

g 1

per l

adin

g 1

per l

adin

g

Afs

chui

fpro

ef

nv

t m

in 2

per

bpe

n

vt

3 pe

r bpe

n

vt

3 pe

r bpe

B

uig-

te

rugb

uigt

rekp

roe

f

nv

t n

vt

2 pe

r bpe

n

vt

2 pe

r bpe

n

vt

Afm

etin

gen

nv

t m

in 1

per

bpe

n

vt

1 pe

r bpe

n

vt

1 pe

r bpe

V

erm

oeiin

g n

vt

nv

t 5

per j

aar

5 pe

r jaa

r 6

per b

pe 9)

5

per b

pe 10

)

1) The audit is always for each manufacturing process (hot-rolled-cooled -cold-stretched cold-profiles) of a certain type of reinforcing steel 2) If applicable (B500C) 3) Chemical composition + Ceq to be determined and submitted by the steel manufacturer not for each diameter (combination) 4) For bending mass and geometry surface + frfp min 1 per 150 tons 5) Can be determined for welding 6) Smallest largest and intermediate diameters (always skipping 2 consecutive diameters) of the range (deviating from EN 10080) 7) Always the most critical diameter combination that occurs 8) In a period of a maximum of 5 years number and spreading of diameters 9) For d le 28 mm the largest and middle diameters for gt 28 mm the largest diameter 10) The largest middle and smallest diameters Test unit is defined as -- barscoils the load or a part of the load (for bending mass and geometryprofile min 1 per 90 t) -- point welded reinforcement fabrics 50 tons of the same combination of reinforcing steel types and diameters manufactured with the same point welding machine

Annex IV Model for biannual reporting on reinforcing steel

Page 18: National Assessment Guideline - Kiwa · PDF fileThe NEN-EN 10080:2005 is not a harmonised standard and therefore a CE mark can not yet be attached to the products covered by this BRL

National Assessment Guideline BRL 0501 01 September 2010 copy Kiwa NV - -

17

46 Identification Contrary to NEN-EN 10080 art 101211 the product numbers (technical classes) are not assigned by a European organisation However the other requirements concerning the identification are observed in conformity with NEN 6008 and NEN-EN 10080

47 Certification mark Each packaging unit must have a label with the following obligatory indications

bull KOMO mark bull product certificate number + delivery condition (bars coils fabrics) bull the reinforcing steel type and the manufacturer number bull name andor logo of the manufacturer bull mentioning BRL0501

A packaging unit can be characterised

bull with reinforcing steel on coils as lsquothe coilrsquo marking min 1 label per coil bull with reinforcing steel bars as lsquothe bundlesrsquo marking min 1 label per bundle bull with point welded fabrics as lsquonumber of fabricsrsquo marking at least 1 label per unit of max

40 reinforcement fabrics or max 2 tons Additionally each point welded fabric in which only externally purchased and delivered reinforcing steel has been used must be marked in an indelible and non-removable way For example when using a ldquoSchlatter Etikettiermachinen Methoderdquo or equivalent the point welded reinforcement fabrics are to be marked with at least 1 label

National Assessment Guideline BRL 0501 01 September 2010 copy Kiwa NV - -

18

5 Requirements to the quality system

51 General This chapter includes the requirements that the quality system of the supplier has to meet

52 Administrator of the quality system A staff member is to be appointed as quality system manager within the organisational structure

53 Internal quality controlquality plan The supplier must have and use a schedule for internal quality control (an IQC schedule) in accordance with the model indicated in annex 2 In this IQC schedule the following must be demonstrably recorded

bull what aspects the manufacturer will inspect bull what methods will be used for these inspections bull the frequency of these inspections bull how to record and file the inspection results bull aspects with respect to the production of point welded reinforcement fabrics

Also the supplier must have a procedure for organising the production process of any post-stretching alignment and the reinforcement fabrics to be point welded and how this is implemented inspected and monitored This IQC schedule must have been derived from the IQC schedule included in the annex and must have been set up such that it gives the CI enough confidence that the requirements set out in this assessment guideline are continuously met

This must function at least 3 months before issuing the certificate

54 Procedures and work instructions The supplier must be able to submit

bull procedures for - handling out of spec products and (semi-)products to be repaired - corrective measures after observed defects - handling complaints about products andor services delivered - monitoring the quality using the extra value a - a4 - the work instructions and inspection forms used including the biannual reporting

(see annex 4)

55 Other requirements to the quality system

551 Reinforcing steel The following are regarded as sufficient proof that the purchased reinforcing steel complies with the product standard mentioned (NEN 6008) and other technical specifications

bull KOMO quality statement issued on the basis of BRL 0501 lsquoReinforcing steelrsquo by a certification andor attestation institute acknowledged by the Dutch Authority for Accreditation for the discipline involved

bull a (quality) statement the equivalence of which with the above-mentioned KOMO quality statement has been demonstrated

The traceability of the purchased reinforcing steel is guaranteed by the rolling mark and the labelling The origin (certificate number) of the reinforcing steel must be recorded at the initial audit

National Assessment Guideline BRL 0501 01 September 2010 copy Kiwa NV - -

19

552 Storage of reinforcing steel Reinforcing steel must be stored free from the ground Store and label reinforcing steel such that the chance of exchange for instance with foreign qualities is eliminated

National Assessment Guideline BRL 0501 01 September 2010 copy Kiwa NV - -

20

6 Requirements for the functioning of a test laboratory for testing reinforcing steel andor point welded reinforcement fabrics

61 The supplier has its own laboratory for testing reinforcing steel for its variable and attributive properties The laboratory equipment as well as the test methods must comply with

bull NEN-EN 10002-22001 Metallic materials tensile testing part 1 method of testing at ambient temperature

bull NEN-EN-ISO 15630-12002 Steel for the reinforcement and prestressing of concrete Test methods ndash Part 1 reinforcing bars wire rod and wire June 2002

bull NEN-EN-ISO 15630-22002 Steel for the reinforcement and prestressing of concrete Test methods ndash Part 2 welded fabric

Measuring equipment that has not been classified for one of the above-mentioned standards can be used as soon as they have been tested assessed and qualified by the CI

62 Outsourcing of testing Tests for the chemical composition and the fatigue strength of reinforcing steel can be outsourced as well De test results can be indicated as being lsquoperformed in a reliable wayrsquo if

bull The tests have been performed by a laboratory that meets the accreditation standard referred to in article 14 of this BRL NEN-EN-ISOIEC 17025 lsquoGeneral requirements for the competence of testing and calibration laboratoriesrsquo This accreditation must concern the performance of tests in conformity with the outsourcing assignment Besides a 31 or a 22 certificate of the results in conformity with NEN-EN 10204 is to be submitted or

bull The supplier receives the test results of the chemical composition from a company that has a product certificate of the lsquotechnical disciplinersquo (H9) mentioned in this BRL with the CI and the relevant measuring equipment in the laboratory concerned is covered by the product certificate audit

If the above requirements are not complied with the certification institute will perform or have performed the audit concerned itself In this case the certification institute will base its test on the accreditation standard NEN-EN-ISOIEC 17025

63 Verification audit An initial audit includes external verification of both the attributive and the variable properties Also an external verification for the performance of the used tensile tests takes place every two years The diameter is to be selected such that the diameters that occur most are tested in a period of 5 years When using a new tensile testing machinemeasuring equipment a verification audit is to be performed as well

National Assessment Guideline BRL 0501 01 September 2010 copy Kiwa NV - -

21

631 Variable properties For the verification of variable properties (the results of the tensile test) at least 15 random samples of one selected diameter must be taken in the presence of the inspector (audit testing) for each selected reinforcing steel type each of a length suitable for two test pieces for testing The selected representative diameters must change at the two-yearly verification With bars and coils the samples must have been spread over at least 3 loads of 1 diameter The samples for point welded reinforcement fabrics and the corresponding bars must come from 1 diameter combination produced on different days For each sample the two collected test pieces must be marked and then the test pieces must be bundled into two series of at least 15 test pieces A third series can be taken as spare series in case of discussions about the achieved results One series must be tested in the presence of the inspector at the manufacturerrsquos The inspector must have the other series tested at an external laboratory The time between the performances of both test series must be short enough to allow for neglecting any natural ageing of the testing material The test (tensile test) includes determination of the 02 yield limit or flow limit (Re) the tensile strength (Rm) the RmRe ratio and the yield with maximum load (Agt) of each individual test piece The thus obtained two series of measurement pairs must then be tested for their differences between both performances of the test Any systematic differences are to be tracked and eliminated

With the statistic comparison of two different performances of tests the differences of paired measurements are to be checked in relation with the hypothesis that the expected value of the average difference is zero (Student test) Rejection of this hypothesis indicates that there is a possibility of systematic differences For each variable property the xfi (i = 1n) of the measurement results of the manufacturer and the xei (i = 1hellip n) of the external institute must be calculated separately

bull Difference vi = xfi ndash xei considering the positive or negative difference and then the average difference

= sum

=

n

iiv

nv

1

1

bull standard deviation of the differences

minus

minus= sum

=

2

1

2

11 vnv

ns

n

iiv

bull value vsvt =

It must be verified for the variable properties the 02 yield limit or flow limit (Reee ) the tensile strength (Rmmm ) and the yield with maximum load (Aggg ttt ) whether or not t exceeds a critical limit to The critical values to depend on the number of tests and have been derived from ISO 3301 1975 with a = 001 (see table 9)

National Assessment Guideline BRL 0501 01 September 2010 copy Kiwa NV - -

22

Table 9 ndash Critical values of to

n to n to n to

10 103 11 096 12 090 13 085 14 080

15 077 16 074 17 071 18 068 19 066

20 064 25 056 30 050 35 047 40 043

If t gt to the hypothesis that there is no difference between the two series of paired measurements is rejected and so the cause of this must be found and eliminated This does not apply when sv and v are both below the reference values Sov and Vo in table 9 because of insufficient relevance

If t le to the hypothesis that there is no difference between the two series of paired measurements is not rejected The test can then be concluded unless Sv ge Sov In this case the standard deviation of the differences is excessive showing that the material concerned is unsuitable for the verification test Further investigation is then required

Table 10 ndash Reference values of Sov and Vo

sov vo 02 yield limit or flow limit 15 15 Tensile strength in MPa 15 20 Yield at maximum load in B500A B500B B500C

11 25 30

11 25 30

632 Attributive properties For the verification of attributive properties (mass per length chemical composition profiling bending test and if necessary a shearing test) the measurements of mass per length and profiling must be done in advance with the two series of at least 15 test pieces meant for the tensile test (see above) For the measurements of the bending test and shearing test (if applicable) the number of test pieces from the above described random samples must be extended with at least 5 test pieces for the bending test and if necessary the shearing test For the verification assessment of the chemical composition the number of test pieces is limited to a series of 3 test pieces from 3 test units Any combinations in the random samples of the above-mentioned verification assessments are allowed The test series at the manufacturerrsquos and the series of external tests (see above) should not produce other differences than those that can unambiguously be explained and eliminated

National Assessment Guideline BRL 0501 01 September 2010 copy Kiwa NV - -

23

7 Summary audit and inspection

Below a summary is provided of the tests to be performed for certification bull Initial audit the audit to determine whether all requirements in the BRL are met bull Inspection audit the audit performed after granting the certificate to determine whether

the certified products continuously meet the requirements set in the BRL Also indicates the frequency of the inspection audits to be performed by the certification institute (CI)

bull Inspection of the quality system inspection for compliance with the IQC schedule and the procedures

Here the frequency with which the certification institute must perform an inspection audit is indicated as well

Audit related to

Supervision by CI after granting the certificate1)

Requirement description Article BRL Initial audit

Inspection2) Frequency Product requirements bull Indication of product 2342 X X continuously bull Variable properties 4243 X X 34 x per year bull Chemical composition 4243 X X 34 x per year bull Bending test 42 X X 34 x per year bull Shearing test 42 X X 4 x per year bull Fatigue strength 4244 X X 1 x per year bull Geometry form 4243 X X 34 x per year bull Mass per unit 4243 X X 34 x per year bull Dimensions of fabricsbars 42 X X 34 x per year bull Bendndashbend back tensile

test 42 X X 3 x per year

Own testing laboratory bull Own laboratory 61 X X 1 x per year bull Outsourcing of tests 62 X X 34 x per year bull Verification audit 63 X X 1 x per 2 years System requirements bull IQC schedule 5 X X 34 x per year bull Quality mark 4647 X X 34 x per year

Table 11

1) In case of significant changes in the production process to be assessed by the CI the product requirements need to be tested again

2) The inspector or the certificate holder in the presence of the inspector will determine all product properties that can be performed within the visiting time (maximum 1 day) If this is not possible the CI and the certificate holder will make arrangements with respect to how the inspection will be performed

Inspection of the quality system The certification institute checks if the manufacturer meets the quality system requirements in chapter 5 of this BRL according to the frequency in article 86 of this BRL

National Assessment Guideline BRL 0501 01 September 2010 copy Kiwa NV - -

24

8 Requirements of de certification institute

81 General The certification institute must meet the requirements set out in EN 45011 Besides for the purpose of this BRL the institute must have been accredited by the Dutch Authority for Accreditation (RvA) or a similar body (an accreditation institute with which the RvA has entered into an agreement of mutual acceptance) The certification institute must have a set of regulations or a similar document defining the general rules to be observed during certification These particularly include bull The general rules for performance of the initial audit to be structured as follows

o The way in which suppliers are informed about the handling of a request o The performance of the audit o The decision based on the audit performed

bull The general rules concerning the performance of inspections and the inspection aspects used here

bull The measures the certification institute must take in case of defects bull The rules for terminating a certificate bull The possibility to make an appeal against decisions or measures of the certification

institute

82 Certification staff Staff involved in certification procedures include bull Auditors charged with performing the initial audit and assessing the reports of the

inspectors bull Inspectors charged with performing the external inspection at the supplierrsquos bull Decision-makers charged with taking decisions based on the initial audits performed

about continuation of certification based on inspections performed and about the necessity to take corrective measures

821 Qualification requirements A distinction is made with respect to 8211 Qualification requirements for the certification executives of a CI meeting the

requirements set out in EN 45011 8212 Supplementary qualification requirements for the certification executives of a CI as

determined by the Board of Experts for the subject of this BRL

National Assessment Guideline BRL 0501 01 September 2010 copy Kiwa NV - -

25

8211 Qualification requirements for the certification executives of a CI meeting the requirements set out in EN 45011

The qualification of the certification executives of a CI must comply with chapter 5 of EN 45011 The manual of the CI must describe how the qualification of the certification executives is performed

EN45011

Auditor

initial product assessment and assessment of the

production location

Inspector

assessment product location field and

projects after granting of certificate

Decision-maker

for granting and extending a certificate

Education General

Higher Vocational thinking and working level

Intermediate vocational working and thinking level

Higher Vocational thinking and working level

Education Specific

Basic training for auditing Basic training for auditing

Basic training for auditing

Experience General

1 year of relevant working experience with min 4 audits including 1 full initial audit done independently under supervision

1 year of relevant working experience with min 4 audits including 1 done independent under supervision

4 years of relevant working experience of which at least 1 year with respect to certification

Experience Specific

knowledge of BRL at detailed level and 4 audits related to the specific BRL or to similar BRLs

knowledge of BRL at detailed level and 4 audits related to the specific BRL or to similar BRLs

Basic knowledge of the specific certification schedule

8212 Supplementary qualification requirements for the certification executives of a CI as determined by the Board of Experts for the subject of this BRL

Certification staff Education Experience Auditor Higher vocational education level in one of the

following disciplines - Constructional engineering - Civil engineering - Mechanical engineering

2 years

Inspector Intermediate vocational education level in one of the following disciplines - ConstructionalCivil engineering - Materials science - Mechanical engineering

2 years

Decision-maker Higher vocational education level in one of the following disciplines - Constructional engineering - Civil engineering - Quality science - Mechanical engineering

4 years Managerial experience

822 Qualification Certification staff must be demonstrably qualified by comparing the education and experience with the requirements set out above If qualification takes place based on deviating criteria this must be laid down in writing The qualification authority is vested with

National Assessment Guideline BRL 0501 01 September 2010 copy Kiwa NV - -

26

bull Decision-makers qualification of auditors and inspectors bull Management of the certification institute qualification of decision-makers

83 Initial audit report The certification institute records the findings of the initial audit in a report The report must meet the following requirements bull Completeness the report makes a statement about all requirements set out in the

assessment guideline bull Traceability the findings the statement are based on must have been recorded in a

traceable way bull Basis for decision the decision-maker for granting a certificate must be able to base his

decision on the findings recorded in the report

84 Decision about granting the certificate The decision concerning the granting of the certificate must be made by a decision-maker who is qualified to do so and who has not been involved in the certificate audit himself The decision must have been recorded in a traceable way

85 Presentation of the quality statement The product certificate must be presented in conformity with the model included in the annex

86 Nature and frequency of external inspections The certification institute must regularly inspect the supplier for compliance with his obligations The Board of Experts will decide upon the frequency of the inspections At the time this assessment guideline took effect the frequency was set to bull 3 inspection visits per year at suppliers of hot-rolled products bull 4 inspection visits per year at suppliers of other products Inspections will in any case pertain to a number of matters including bull The product specifications laid down in the product specification bull The supplierrsquos production process bull The supplierrsquos IQC schedule and the results of the inspections performed by the supplier bull The correct way of marking the certified products bull Compliance with the required procedures The certification institute will lay down the findings of each inspection performed in a report in a traceable way

87 Reporting to the Board of Experts The certification institute must report on the certification activities performed at least once a year The report must include the following subjects bull Mutations in number of certificates (newlapsed) bull Number of inspections performed in relation to the determined frequency bull Inspection results bull Measures imposed in case of defects bull Complaints received from third parties with respect to certified products

88 Interpretation of requirements The Board of Experts may lay down the requirements set in this assessment guideline in a single separate interpretation document The certification institute is obliged to ensure whether an interpretation document has been drawn up and if so must make use of the interpretations laid down in this

89 Specific rules defined by the Board of Experts The Board of Experts has not defined specific rules that are to be followed with certification by the certification institute

National Assessment Guideline BRL 0501 01 September 2010 copy Kiwa NV - -

27

9 List of documents mentioned

91 Standardsnormative documents

NEN 6008 2008 Reinforcing steel NEN 6720 1995 Technical foundations for building constructions - TGB 1990 ndash

Regulations for concrete - TGB 1990 ndash Structural requirements and calculation methods (VBC 1995) September 1995 including amendment sheet A4 December 2007

NEN 6722 2002 Regulations for concrete ndash Execution December 2002 NEN 6723 1995 Regulations for concrete - Bridges ndash (VBB June 1995) Structural requirements

and calculation methods December 1995 including amendment sheet A1 December 2003

NEN-EN 1992 2005 Design of concrete structures NEN-EN 1994 2005 Design of composite steel and concrete structures NEN-EN 10002 2001 Metallic materials tensile testing - Part 1 Method of testing at ambient

temperature August 2001 NEN-EN 10080 2005 Steel for the reinforcement of concrete ndash Weldable reinforcing steel - General NEN-EN 10204 2004 Metallic products - Types of inspection documents October 2004 NEN-EN 45012 1998 General requirements for bodies operating assessment and

certificationregistration of quality systems NEN-EN-ISO 376 2004 Metallic materials - Calibration of force-proving instruments used for the

verification of uniaxial testing machines NEN-EN-ISO 7500-1 2004 Metallic materials - Verification of static uniaxial testing machines ndash

Part 1 Tensilecompression testing machines - Verification and calibration of the force-measuring system August 2004

NEN-EN-ISO 9513 2002 Metallic materials ndash Calibration of extensometers for uniaxial testing October 2002

NEN-EN-ISO 15630-1 2002 Steel for the reinforcement and prestressing of concrete - Test methods ndash Part 1 Reinforcing bars wire rod and wire June 2002

NEN-EN-ISO 15630-2 2002 Steel for the reinforcement and prestressing of concrete - Test methods ndash Part 2 Welded fabric

NEN-EN-ISOIEC 17020

2004 General criteria for the operation of various types of bodies performing inspection

NEN-EN-ISOIEC 17024

2003 Conformity assessment - General requirements for bodies operating certification of persons

NEN-EN-ISOIEC 17025

2005 General requirements for the competence of testing and calibration laboratories

ISO 3301 1975 Statistical interpretation of data ndash Comparison of two means in the case of paired observations

ISO 4965 1979 Axial load fatigue testing machines - Dynamic force calibration - Strain gauge technique April 1979

ISO 16269-6 2005 Statistical interpretation of data Determination of statistical tolerance intervals

Annex I Model certificate

Issued Replaces Issued date Valid until Indefinite Page 1 of 2

KOMOreg

Product certificate

ltName Productgt ltCertificate holdergt

STATEMENT OF CI This product certificate was issued on the basis of BRL lsquo lsquo in conformity with the regulations for Product Certification CI declares that the justifiable confidence exists that the name product supplied by the certificate holder meets the technical specifications laid down in this product certificate provided that name product has the KOMOreg mark as indicated in this product certificate Director CI Advice refer to wwwltCIgtnl to see if this certificate is valid

Certificate holder T F E I

Assessed Quality system Product

Periodic check

reg is a collective brand of Stichting Bouwkwaliteit

Annex II Model for IQC schedule or framework of IQC schedule

Subjects Aspects Method Frequency Registration

Basic materials or supplied materials bull Recipe sheets bull Inspection of incoming raw

materials bull Mechanical bull Chemical

Production process production equipment material bull Procedures bull Work instructions bull Equipment bull Material bull Process inspection

End products

Measuring and testing equipment

Measuring and testing equipment bull Measuring devices bull Calibration bull Outsourced tests

Logistics bull Internal transport bull Storage bull Packaging bull Preservation bull Identification or marking

of semi-finished and end products

Corrective measures Complaints handling

Annex III Sampling and testing overview

Type

on

derz

oek

1)

Doo

rlope

nd

inte

rn fa

brie

kson

derz

oek

Perio

diek

ex

tern

ond

erzo

ek (a

udit)

To

elat

ings

onde

rzoe

k

(type

onde

rzoe

k)

Type

bet

onst

aal

stav

enro

llen

per d

iam

eter

ge

punt

last

e w

apn

ette

n pe

r dia

-com

bina

tie

stav

enro

llen

3 bp

e va

n 1

diam

eter

8)

gepu

ntla

ste

wap

net

ten

3 bp

e va

n 1

dia-

com

bina

tie 7)

8)

stav

enro

llen

3 bp

e pe

r di

amet

er 6)

gepu

ntla

ste

wap

net

ten

3 bp

e pe

r dia

-co

mbi

natie

6) 7

) R

e 1

per 3

0 t

m

in 3

per

bpe

m

in 2

per

bpe

1

lang

s + d

war

s 5

per b

pe

5 pe

r bpe

3

lang

s + 2

dw

ars

10 p

er b

pe

10 p

er b

pe

5 la

ngs +

5 d

war

s R

mR

e id

em

idem

id

em

idem

id

em

idem

R

eac

tRe

nom

2)

idem

id

em

idem

id

em

idem

id

em

Agt

idem

id

em

idem

id

em

idem

id

em

Bui

gpro

ef

1 pe

r bpe

4)

idem

2

per b

pe

2 pe

r bpe

1

lang

s + 1

dw

ars

5 pe

r bpe

5

per b

pe

3 la

ngs +

2 d

war

s M

assa

per

m

idem

id

em 5)

id

em

idem

5)

idem

id

em 5)

G

eom

etrie

opp

en

pro

fielfa

ctor

id

em

idem

id

em

idem

id

em

Idem

Che

mis

che

sa

men

st +

Ceq

3)

1 pe

r lad

ing

1

per l

adin

g 1

per l

adin

g 1

per l

adin

g 1

per l

adin

g 1

per l

adin

g

Afs

chui

fpro

ef

nv

t m

in 2

per

bpe

n

vt

3 pe

r bpe

n

vt

3 pe

r bpe

B

uig-

te

rugb

uigt

rekp

roe

f

nv

t n

vt

2 pe

r bpe

n

vt

2 pe

r bpe

n

vt

Afm

etin

gen

nv

t m

in 1

per

bpe

n

vt

1 pe

r bpe

n

vt

1 pe

r bpe

V

erm

oeiin

g n

vt

nv

t 5

per j

aar

5 pe

r jaa

r 6

per b

pe 9)

5

per b

pe 10

)

1) The audit is always for each manufacturing process (hot-rolled-cooled -cold-stretched cold-profiles) of a certain type of reinforcing steel 2) If applicable (B500C) 3) Chemical composition + Ceq to be determined and submitted by the steel manufacturer not for each diameter (combination) 4) For bending mass and geometry surface + frfp min 1 per 150 tons 5) Can be determined for welding 6) Smallest largest and intermediate diameters (always skipping 2 consecutive diameters) of the range (deviating from EN 10080) 7) Always the most critical diameter combination that occurs 8) In a period of a maximum of 5 years number and spreading of diameters 9) For d le 28 mm the largest and middle diameters for gt 28 mm the largest diameter 10) The largest middle and smallest diameters Test unit is defined as -- barscoils the load or a part of the load (for bending mass and geometryprofile min 1 per 90 t) -- point welded reinforcement fabrics 50 tons of the same combination of reinforcing steel types and diameters manufactured with the same point welding machine

Annex IV Model for biannual reporting on reinforcing steel

Page 19: National Assessment Guideline - Kiwa · PDF fileThe NEN-EN 10080:2005 is not a harmonised standard and therefore a CE mark can not yet be attached to the products covered by this BRL

National Assessment Guideline BRL 0501 01 September 2010 copy Kiwa NV - -

18

5 Requirements to the quality system

51 General This chapter includes the requirements that the quality system of the supplier has to meet

52 Administrator of the quality system A staff member is to be appointed as quality system manager within the organisational structure

53 Internal quality controlquality plan The supplier must have and use a schedule for internal quality control (an IQC schedule) in accordance with the model indicated in annex 2 In this IQC schedule the following must be demonstrably recorded

bull what aspects the manufacturer will inspect bull what methods will be used for these inspections bull the frequency of these inspections bull how to record and file the inspection results bull aspects with respect to the production of point welded reinforcement fabrics

Also the supplier must have a procedure for organising the production process of any post-stretching alignment and the reinforcement fabrics to be point welded and how this is implemented inspected and monitored This IQC schedule must have been derived from the IQC schedule included in the annex and must have been set up such that it gives the CI enough confidence that the requirements set out in this assessment guideline are continuously met

This must function at least 3 months before issuing the certificate

54 Procedures and work instructions The supplier must be able to submit

bull procedures for - handling out of spec products and (semi-)products to be repaired - corrective measures after observed defects - handling complaints about products andor services delivered - monitoring the quality using the extra value a - a4 - the work instructions and inspection forms used including the biannual reporting

(see annex 4)

55 Other requirements to the quality system

551 Reinforcing steel The following are regarded as sufficient proof that the purchased reinforcing steel complies with the product standard mentioned (NEN 6008) and other technical specifications

bull KOMO quality statement issued on the basis of BRL 0501 lsquoReinforcing steelrsquo by a certification andor attestation institute acknowledged by the Dutch Authority for Accreditation for the discipline involved

bull a (quality) statement the equivalence of which with the above-mentioned KOMO quality statement has been demonstrated

The traceability of the purchased reinforcing steel is guaranteed by the rolling mark and the labelling The origin (certificate number) of the reinforcing steel must be recorded at the initial audit

National Assessment Guideline BRL 0501 01 September 2010 copy Kiwa NV - -

19

552 Storage of reinforcing steel Reinforcing steel must be stored free from the ground Store and label reinforcing steel such that the chance of exchange for instance with foreign qualities is eliminated

National Assessment Guideline BRL 0501 01 September 2010 copy Kiwa NV - -

20

6 Requirements for the functioning of a test laboratory for testing reinforcing steel andor point welded reinforcement fabrics

61 The supplier has its own laboratory for testing reinforcing steel for its variable and attributive properties The laboratory equipment as well as the test methods must comply with

bull NEN-EN 10002-22001 Metallic materials tensile testing part 1 method of testing at ambient temperature

bull NEN-EN-ISO 15630-12002 Steel for the reinforcement and prestressing of concrete Test methods ndash Part 1 reinforcing bars wire rod and wire June 2002

bull NEN-EN-ISO 15630-22002 Steel for the reinforcement and prestressing of concrete Test methods ndash Part 2 welded fabric

Measuring equipment that has not been classified for one of the above-mentioned standards can be used as soon as they have been tested assessed and qualified by the CI

62 Outsourcing of testing Tests for the chemical composition and the fatigue strength of reinforcing steel can be outsourced as well De test results can be indicated as being lsquoperformed in a reliable wayrsquo if

bull The tests have been performed by a laboratory that meets the accreditation standard referred to in article 14 of this BRL NEN-EN-ISOIEC 17025 lsquoGeneral requirements for the competence of testing and calibration laboratoriesrsquo This accreditation must concern the performance of tests in conformity with the outsourcing assignment Besides a 31 or a 22 certificate of the results in conformity with NEN-EN 10204 is to be submitted or

bull The supplier receives the test results of the chemical composition from a company that has a product certificate of the lsquotechnical disciplinersquo (H9) mentioned in this BRL with the CI and the relevant measuring equipment in the laboratory concerned is covered by the product certificate audit

If the above requirements are not complied with the certification institute will perform or have performed the audit concerned itself In this case the certification institute will base its test on the accreditation standard NEN-EN-ISOIEC 17025

63 Verification audit An initial audit includes external verification of both the attributive and the variable properties Also an external verification for the performance of the used tensile tests takes place every two years The diameter is to be selected such that the diameters that occur most are tested in a period of 5 years When using a new tensile testing machinemeasuring equipment a verification audit is to be performed as well

National Assessment Guideline BRL 0501 01 September 2010 copy Kiwa NV - -

21

631 Variable properties For the verification of variable properties (the results of the tensile test) at least 15 random samples of one selected diameter must be taken in the presence of the inspector (audit testing) for each selected reinforcing steel type each of a length suitable for two test pieces for testing The selected representative diameters must change at the two-yearly verification With bars and coils the samples must have been spread over at least 3 loads of 1 diameter The samples for point welded reinforcement fabrics and the corresponding bars must come from 1 diameter combination produced on different days For each sample the two collected test pieces must be marked and then the test pieces must be bundled into two series of at least 15 test pieces A third series can be taken as spare series in case of discussions about the achieved results One series must be tested in the presence of the inspector at the manufacturerrsquos The inspector must have the other series tested at an external laboratory The time between the performances of both test series must be short enough to allow for neglecting any natural ageing of the testing material The test (tensile test) includes determination of the 02 yield limit or flow limit (Re) the tensile strength (Rm) the RmRe ratio and the yield with maximum load (Agt) of each individual test piece The thus obtained two series of measurement pairs must then be tested for their differences between both performances of the test Any systematic differences are to be tracked and eliminated

With the statistic comparison of two different performances of tests the differences of paired measurements are to be checked in relation with the hypothesis that the expected value of the average difference is zero (Student test) Rejection of this hypothesis indicates that there is a possibility of systematic differences For each variable property the xfi (i = 1n) of the measurement results of the manufacturer and the xei (i = 1hellip n) of the external institute must be calculated separately

bull Difference vi = xfi ndash xei considering the positive or negative difference and then the average difference

= sum

=

n

iiv

nv

1

1

bull standard deviation of the differences

minus

minus= sum

=

2

1

2

11 vnv

ns

n

iiv

bull value vsvt =

It must be verified for the variable properties the 02 yield limit or flow limit (Reee ) the tensile strength (Rmmm ) and the yield with maximum load (Aggg ttt ) whether or not t exceeds a critical limit to The critical values to depend on the number of tests and have been derived from ISO 3301 1975 with a = 001 (see table 9)

National Assessment Guideline BRL 0501 01 September 2010 copy Kiwa NV - -

22

Table 9 ndash Critical values of to

n to n to n to

10 103 11 096 12 090 13 085 14 080

15 077 16 074 17 071 18 068 19 066

20 064 25 056 30 050 35 047 40 043

If t gt to the hypothesis that there is no difference between the two series of paired measurements is rejected and so the cause of this must be found and eliminated This does not apply when sv and v are both below the reference values Sov and Vo in table 9 because of insufficient relevance

If t le to the hypothesis that there is no difference between the two series of paired measurements is not rejected The test can then be concluded unless Sv ge Sov In this case the standard deviation of the differences is excessive showing that the material concerned is unsuitable for the verification test Further investigation is then required

Table 10 ndash Reference values of Sov and Vo

sov vo 02 yield limit or flow limit 15 15 Tensile strength in MPa 15 20 Yield at maximum load in B500A B500B B500C

11 25 30

11 25 30

632 Attributive properties For the verification of attributive properties (mass per length chemical composition profiling bending test and if necessary a shearing test) the measurements of mass per length and profiling must be done in advance with the two series of at least 15 test pieces meant for the tensile test (see above) For the measurements of the bending test and shearing test (if applicable) the number of test pieces from the above described random samples must be extended with at least 5 test pieces for the bending test and if necessary the shearing test For the verification assessment of the chemical composition the number of test pieces is limited to a series of 3 test pieces from 3 test units Any combinations in the random samples of the above-mentioned verification assessments are allowed The test series at the manufacturerrsquos and the series of external tests (see above) should not produce other differences than those that can unambiguously be explained and eliminated

National Assessment Guideline BRL 0501 01 September 2010 copy Kiwa NV - -

23

7 Summary audit and inspection

Below a summary is provided of the tests to be performed for certification bull Initial audit the audit to determine whether all requirements in the BRL are met bull Inspection audit the audit performed after granting the certificate to determine whether

the certified products continuously meet the requirements set in the BRL Also indicates the frequency of the inspection audits to be performed by the certification institute (CI)

bull Inspection of the quality system inspection for compliance with the IQC schedule and the procedures

Here the frequency with which the certification institute must perform an inspection audit is indicated as well

Audit related to

Supervision by CI after granting the certificate1)

Requirement description Article BRL Initial audit

Inspection2) Frequency Product requirements bull Indication of product 2342 X X continuously bull Variable properties 4243 X X 34 x per year bull Chemical composition 4243 X X 34 x per year bull Bending test 42 X X 34 x per year bull Shearing test 42 X X 4 x per year bull Fatigue strength 4244 X X 1 x per year bull Geometry form 4243 X X 34 x per year bull Mass per unit 4243 X X 34 x per year bull Dimensions of fabricsbars 42 X X 34 x per year bull Bendndashbend back tensile

test 42 X X 3 x per year

Own testing laboratory bull Own laboratory 61 X X 1 x per year bull Outsourcing of tests 62 X X 34 x per year bull Verification audit 63 X X 1 x per 2 years System requirements bull IQC schedule 5 X X 34 x per year bull Quality mark 4647 X X 34 x per year

Table 11

1) In case of significant changes in the production process to be assessed by the CI the product requirements need to be tested again

2) The inspector or the certificate holder in the presence of the inspector will determine all product properties that can be performed within the visiting time (maximum 1 day) If this is not possible the CI and the certificate holder will make arrangements with respect to how the inspection will be performed

Inspection of the quality system The certification institute checks if the manufacturer meets the quality system requirements in chapter 5 of this BRL according to the frequency in article 86 of this BRL

National Assessment Guideline BRL 0501 01 September 2010 copy Kiwa NV - -

24

8 Requirements of de certification institute

81 General The certification institute must meet the requirements set out in EN 45011 Besides for the purpose of this BRL the institute must have been accredited by the Dutch Authority for Accreditation (RvA) or a similar body (an accreditation institute with which the RvA has entered into an agreement of mutual acceptance) The certification institute must have a set of regulations or a similar document defining the general rules to be observed during certification These particularly include bull The general rules for performance of the initial audit to be structured as follows

o The way in which suppliers are informed about the handling of a request o The performance of the audit o The decision based on the audit performed

bull The general rules concerning the performance of inspections and the inspection aspects used here

bull The measures the certification institute must take in case of defects bull The rules for terminating a certificate bull The possibility to make an appeal against decisions or measures of the certification

institute

82 Certification staff Staff involved in certification procedures include bull Auditors charged with performing the initial audit and assessing the reports of the

inspectors bull Inspectors charged with performing the external inspection at the supplierrsquos bull Decision-makers charged with taking decisions based on the initial audits performed

about continuation of certification based on inspections performed and about the necessity to take corrective measures

821 Qualification requirements A distinction is made with respect to 8211 Qualification requirements for the certification executives of a CI meeting the

requirements set out in EN 45011 8212 Supplementary qualification requirements for the certification executives of a CI as

determined by the Board of Experts for the subject of this BRL

National Assessment Guideline BRL 0501 01 September 2010 copy Kiwa NV - -

25

8211 Qualification requirements for the certification executives of a CI meeting the requirements set out in EN 45011

The qualification of the certification executives of a CI must comply with chapter 5 of EN 45011 The manual of the CI must describe how the qualification of the certification executives is performed

EN45011

Auditor

initial product assessment and assessment of the

production location

Inspector

assessment product location field and

projects after granting of certificate

Decision-maker

for granting and extending a certificate

Education General

Higher Vocational thinking and working level

Intermediate vocational working and thinking level

Higher Vocational thinking and working level

Education Specific

Basic training for auditing Basic training for auditing

Basic training for auditing

Experience General

1 year of relevant working experience with min 4 audits including 1 full initial audit done independently under supervision

1 year of relevant working experience with min 4 audits including 1 done independent under supervision

4 years of relevant working experience of which at least 1 year with respect to certification

Experience Specific

knowledge of BRL at detailed level and 4 audits related to the specific BRL or to similar BRLs

knowledge of BRL at detailed level and 4 audits related to the specific BRL or to similar BRLs

Basic knowledge of the specific certification schedule

8212 Supplementary qualification requirements for the certification executives of a CI as determined by the Board of Experts for the subject of this BRL

Certification staff Education Experience Auditor Higher vocational education level in one of the

following disciplines - Constructional engineering - Civil engineering - Mechanical engineering

2 years

Inspector Intermediate vocational education level in one of the following disciplines - ConstructionalCivil engineering - Materials science - Mechanical engineering

2 years

Decision-maker Higher vocational education level in one of the following disciplines - Constructional engineering - Civil engineering - Quality science - Mechanical engineering

4 years Managerial experience

822 Qualification Certification staff must be demonstrably qualified by comparing the education and experience with the requirements set out above If qualification takes place based on deviating criteria this must be laid down in writing The qualification authority is vested with

National Assessment Guideline BRL 0501 01 September 2010 copy Kiwa NV - -

26

bull Decision-makers qualification of auditors and inspectors bull Management of the certification institute qualification of decision-makers

83 Initial audit report The certification institute records the findings of the initial audit in a report The report must meet the following requirements bull Completeness the report makes a statement about all requirements set out in the

assessment guideline bull Traceability the findings the statement are based on must have been recorded in a

traceable way bull Basis for decision the decision-maker for granting a certificate must be able to base his

decision on the findings recorded in the report

84 Decision about granting the certificate The decision concerning the granting of the certificate must be made by a decision-maker who is qualified to do so and who has not been involved in the certificate audit himself The decision must have been recorded in a traceable way

85 Presentation of the quality statement The product certificate must be presented in conformity with the model included in the annex

86 Nature and frequency of external inspections The certification institute must regularly inspect the supplier for compliance with his obligations The Board of Experts will decide upon the frequency of the inspections At the time this assessment guideline took effect the frequency was set to bull 3 inspection visits per year at suppliers of hot-rolled products bull 4 inspection visits per year at suppliers of other products Inspections will in any case pertain to a number of matters including bull The product specifications laid down in the product specification bull The supplierrsquos production process bull The supplierrsquos IQC schedule and the results of the inspections performed by the supplier bull The correct way of marking the certified products bull Compliance with the required procedures The certification institute will lay down the findings of each inspection performed in a report in a traceable way

87 Reporting to the Board of Experts The certification institute must report on the certification activities performed at least once a year The report must include the following subjects bull Mutations in number of certificates (newlapsed) bull Number of inspections performed in relation to the determined frequency bull Inspection results bull Measures imposed in case of defects bull Complaints received from third parties with respect to certified products

88 Interpretation of requirements The Board of Experts may lay down the requirements set in this assessment guideline in a single separate interpretation document The certification institute is obliged to ensure whether an interpretation document has been drawn up and if so must make use of the interpretations laid down in this

89 Specific rules defined by the Board of Experts The Board of Experts has not defined specific rules that are to be followed with certification by the certification institute

National Assessment Guideline BRL 0501 01 September 2010 copy Kiwa NV - -

27

9 List of documents mentioned

91 Standardsnormative documents

NEN 6008 2008 Reinforcing steel NEN 6720 1995 Technical foundations for building constructions - TGB 1990 ndash

Regulations for concrete - TGB 1990 ndash Structural requirements and calculation methods (VBC 1995) September 1995 including amendment sheet A4 December 2007

NEN 6722 2002 Regulations for concrete ndash Execution December 2002 NEN 6723 1995 Regulations for concrete - Bridges ndash (VBB June 1995) Structural requirements

and calculation methods December 1995 including amendment sheet A1 December 2003

NEN-EN 1992 2005 Design of concrete structures NEN-EN 1994 2005 Design of composite steel and concrete structures NEN-EN 10002 2001 Metallic materials tensile testing - Part 1 Method of testing at ambient

temperature August 2001 NEN-EN 10080 2005 Steel for the reinforcement of concrete ndash Weldable reinforcing steel - General NEN-EN 10204 2004 Metallic products - Types of inspection documents October 2004 NEN-EN 45012 1998 General requirements for bodies operating assessment and

certificationregistration of quality systems NEN-EN-ISO 376 2004 Metallic materials - Calibration of force-proving instruments used for the

verification of uniaxial testing machines NEN-EN-ISO 7500-1 2004 Metallic materials - Verification of static uniaxial testing machines ndash

Part 1 Tensilecompression testing machines - Verification and calibration of the force-measuring system August 2004

NEN-EN-ISO 9513 2002 Metallic materials ndash Calibration of extensometers for uniaxial testing October 2002

NEN-EN-ISO 15630-1 2002 Steel for the reinforcement and prestressing of concrete - Test methods ndash Part 1 Reinforcing bars wire rod and wire June 2002

NEN-EN-ISO 15630-2 2002 Steel for the reinforcement and prestressing of concrete - Test methods ndash Part 2 Welded fabric

NEN-EN-ISOIEC 17020

2004 General criteria for the operation of various types of bodies performing inspection

NEN-EN-ISOIEC 17024

2003 Conformity assessment - General requirements for bodies operating certification of persons

NEN-EN-ISOIEC 17025

2005 General requirements for the competence of testing and calibration laboratories

ISO 3301 1975 Statistical interpretation of data ndash Comparison of two means in the case of paired observations

ISO 4965 1979 Axial load fatigue testing machines - Dynamic force calibration - Strain gauge technique April 1979

ISO 16269-6 2005 Statistical interpretation of data Determination of statistical tolerance intervals

Annex I Model certificate

Issued Replaces Issued date Valid until Indefinite Page 1 of 2

KOMOreg

Product certificate

ltName Productgt ltCertificate holdergt

STATEMENT OF CI This product certificate was issued on the basis of BRL lsquo lsquo in conformity with the regulations for Product Certification CI declares that the justifiable confidence exists that the name product supplied by the certificate holder meets the technical specifications laid down in this product certificate provided that name product has the KOMOreg mark as indicated in this product certificate Director CI Advice refer to wwwltCIgtnl to see if this certificate is valid

Certificate holder T F E I

Assessed Quality system Product

Periodic check

reg is a collective brand of Stichting Bouwkwaliteit

Annex II Model for IQC schedule or framework of IQC schedule

Subjects Aspects Method Frequency Registration

Basic materials or supplied materials bull Recipe sheets bull Inspection of incoming raw

materials bull Mechanical bull Chemical

Production process production equipment material bull Procedures bull Work instructions bull Equipment bull Material bull Process inspection

End products

Measuring and testing equipment

Measuring and testing equipment bull Measuring devices bull Calibration bull Outsourced tests

Logistics bull Internal transport bull Storage bull Packaging bull Preservation bull Identification or marking

of semi-finished and end products

Corrective measures Complaints handling

Annex III Sampling and testing overview

Type

on

derz

oek

1)

Doo

rlope

nd

inte

rn fa

brie

kson

derz

oek

Perio

diek

ex

tern

ond

erzo

ek (a

udit)

To

elat

ings

onde

rzoe

k

(type

onde

rzoe

k)

Type

bet

onst

aal

stav

enro

llen

per d

iam

eter

ge

punt

last

e w

apn

ette

n pe

r dia

-com

bina

tie

stav

enro

llen

3 bp

e va

n 1

diam

eter

8)

gepu

ntla

ste

wap

net

ten

3 bp

e va

n 1

dia-

com

bina

tie 7)

8)

stav

enro

llen

3 bp

e pe

r di

amet

er 6)

gepu

ntla

ste

wap

net

ten

3 bp

e pe

r dia

-co

mbi

natie

6) 7

) R

e 1

per 3

0 t

m

in 3

per

bpe

m

in 2

per

bpe

1

lang

s + d

war

s 5

per b

pe

5 pe

r bpe

3

lang

s + 2

dw

ars

10 p

er b

pe

10 p

er b

pe

5 la

ngs +

5 d

war

s R

mR

e id

em

idem

id

em

idem

id

em

idem

R

eac

tRe

nom

2)

idem

id

em

idem

id

em

idem

id

em

Agt

idem

id

em

idem

id

em

idem

id

em

Bui

gpro

ef

1 pe

r bpe

4)

idem

2

per b

pe

2 pe

r bpe

1

lang

s + 1

dw

ars

5 pe

r bpe

5

per b

pe

3 la

ngs +

2 d

war

s M

assa

per

m

idem

id

em 5)

id

em

idem

5)

idem

id

em 5)

G

eom

etrie

opp

en

pro

fielfa

ctor

id

em

idem

id

em

idem

id

em

Idem

Che

mis

che

sa

men

st +

Ceq

3)

1 pe

r lad

ing

1

per l

adin

g 1

per l

adin

g 1

per l

adin

g 1

per l

adin

g 1

per l

adin

g

Afs

chui

fpro

ef

nv

t m

in 2

per

bpe

n

vt

3 pe

r bpe

n

vt

3 pe

r bpe

B

uig-

te

rugb

uigt

rekp

roe

f

nv

t n

vt

2 pe

r bpe

n

vt

2 pe

r bpe

n

vt

Afm

etin

gen

nv

t m

in 1

per

bpe

n

vt

1 pe

r bpe

n

vt

1 pe

r bpe

V

erm

oeiin

g n

vt

nv

t 5

per j

aar

5 pe

r jaa

r 6

per b

pe 9)

5

per b

pe 10

)

1) The audit is always for each manufacturing process (hot-rolled-cooled -cold-stretched cold-profiles) of a certain type of reinforcing steel 2) If applicable (B500C) 3) Chemical composition + Ceq to be determined and submitted by the steel manufacturer not for each diameter (combination) 4) For bending mass and geometry surface + frfp min 1 per 150 tons 5) Can be determined for welding 6) Smallest largest and intermediate diameters (always skipping 2 consecutive diameters) of the range (deviating from EN 10080) 7) Always the most critical diameter combination that occurs 8) In a period of a maximum of 5 years number and spreading of diameters 9) For d le 28 mm the largest and middle diameters for gt 28 mm the largest diameter 10) The largest middle and smallest diameters Test unit is defined as -- barscoils the load or a part of the load (for bending mass and geometryprofile min 1 per 90 t) -- point welded reinforcement fabrics 50 tons of the same combination of reinforcing steel types and diameters manufactured with the same point welding machine

Annex IV Model for biannual reporting on reinforcing steel

Page 20: National Assessment Guideline - Kiwa · PDF fileThe NEN-EN 10080:2005 is not a harmonised standard and therefore a CE mark can not yet be attached to the products covered by this BRL

National Assessment Guideline BRL 0501 01 September 2010 copy Kiwa NV - -

19

552 Storage of reinforcing steel Reinforcing steel must be stored free from the ground Store and label reinforcing steel such that the chance of exchange for instance with foreign qualities is eliminated

National Assessment Guideline BRL 0501 01 September 2010 copy Kiwa NV - -

20

6 Requirements for the functioning of a test laboratory for testing reinforcing steel andor point welded reinforcement fabrics

61 The supplier has its own laboratory for testing reinforcing steel for its variable and attributive properties The laboratory equipment as well as the test methods must comply with

bull NEN-EN 10002-22001 Metallic materials tensile testing part 1 method of testing at ambient temperature

bull NEN-EN-ISO 15630-12002 Steel for the reinforcement and prestressing of concrete Test methods ndash Part 1 reinforcing bars wire rod and wire June 2002

bull NEN-EN-ISO 15630-22002 Steel for the reinforcement and prestressing of concrete Test methods ndash Part 2 welded fabric

Measuring equipment that has not been classified for one of the above-mentioned standards can be used as soon as they have been tested assessed and qualified by the CI

62 Outsourcing of testing Tests for the chemical composition and the fatigue strength of reinforcing steel can be outsourced as well De test results can be indicated as being lsquoperformed in a reliable wayrsquo if

bull The tests have been performed by a laboratory that meets the accreditation standard referred to in article 14 of this BRL NEN-EN-ISOIEC 17025 lsquoGeneral requirements for the competence of testing and calibration laboratoriesrsquo This accreditation must concern the performance of tests in conformity with the outsourcing assignment Besides a 31 or a 22 certificate of the results in conformity with NEN-EN 10204 is to be submitted or

bull The supplier receives the test results of the chemical composition from a company that has a product certificate of the lsquotechnical disciplinersquo (H9) mentioned in this BRL with the CI and the relevant measuring equipment in the laboratory concerned is covered by the product certificate audit

If the above requirements are not complied with the certification institute will perform or have performed the audit concerned itself In this case the certification institute will base its test on the accreditation standard NEN-EN-ISOIEC 17025

63 Verification audit An initial audit includes external verification of both the attributive and the variable properties Also an external verification for the performance of the used tensile tests takes place every two years The diameter is to be selected such that the diameters that occur most are tested in a period of 5 years When using a new tensile testing machinemeasuring equipment a verification audit is to be performed as well

National Assessment Guideline BRL 0501 01 September 2010 copy Kiwa NV - -

21

631 Variable properties For the verification of variable properties (the results of the tensile test) at least 15 random samples of one selected diameter must be taken in the presence of the inspector (audit testing) for each selected reinforcing steel type each of a length suitable for two test pieces for testing The selected representative diameters must change at the two-yearly verification With bars and coils the samples must have been spread over at least 3 loads of 1 diameter The samples for point welded reinforcement fabrics and the corresponding bars must come from 1 diameter combination produced on different days For each sample the two collected test pieces must be marked and then the test pieces must be bundled into two series of at least 15 test pieces A third series can be taken as spare series in case of discussions about the achieved results One series must be tested in the presence of the inspector at the manufacturerrsquos The inspector must have the other series tested at an external laboratory The time between the performances of both test series must be short enough to allow for neglecting any natural ageing of the testing material The test (tensile test) includes determination of the 02 yield limit or flow limit (Re) the tensile strength (Rm) the RmRe ratio and the yield with maximum load (Agt) of each individual test piece The thus obtained two series of measurement pairs must then be tested for their differences between both performances of the test Any systematic differences are to be tracked and eliminated

With the statistic comparison of two different performances of tests the differences of paired measurements are to be checked in relation with the hypothesis that the expected value of the average difference is zero (Student test) Rejection of this hypothesis indicates that there is a possibility of systematic differences For each variable property the xfi (i = 1n) of the measurement results of the manufacturer and the xei (i = 1hellip n) of the external institute must be calculated separately

bull Difference vi = xfi ndash xei considering the positive or negative difference and then the average difference

= sum

=

n

iiv

nv

1

1

bull standard deviation of the differences

minus

minus= sum

=

2

1

2

11 vnv

ns

n

iiv

bull value vsvt =

It must be verified for the variable properties the 02 yield limit or flow limit (Reee ) the tensile strength (Rmmm ) and the yield with maximum load (Aggg ttt ) whether or not t exceeds a critical limit to The critical values to depend on the number of tests and have been derived from ISO 3301 1975 with a = 001 (see table 9)

National Assessment Guideline BRL 0501 01 September 2010 copy Kiwa NV - -

22

Table 9 ndash Critical values of to

n to n to n to

10 103 11 096 12 090 13 085 14 080

15 077 16 074 17 071 18 068 19 066

20 064 25 056 30 050 35 047 40 043

If t gt to the hypothesis that there is no difference between the two series of paired measurements is rejected and so the cause of this must be found and eliminated This does not apply when sv and v are both below the reference values Sov and Vo in table 9 because of insufficient relevance

If t le to the hypothesis that there is no difference between the two series of paired measurements is not rejected The test can then be concluded unless Sv ge Sov In this case the standard deviation of the differences is excessive showing that the material concerned is unsuitable for the verification test Further investigation is then required

Table 10 ndash Reference values of Sov and Vo

sov vo 02 yield limit or flow limit 15 15 Tensile strength in MPa 15 20 Yield at maximum load in B500A B500B B500C

11 25 30

11 25 30

632 Attributive properties For the verification of attributive properties (mass per length chemical composition profiling bending test and if necessary a shearing test) the measurements of mass per length and profiling must be done in advance with the two series of at least 15 test pieces meant for the tensile test (see above) For the measurements of the bending test and shearing test (if applicable) the number of test pieces from the above described random samples must be extended with at least 5 test pieces for the bending test and if necessary the shearing test For the verification assessment of the chemical composition the number of test pieces is limited to a series of 3 test pieces from 3 test units Any combinations in the random samples of the above-mentioned verification assessments are allowed The test series at the manufacturerrsquos and the series of external tests (see above) should not produce other differences than those that can unambiguously be explained and eliminated

National Assessment Guideline BRL 0501 01 September 2010 copy Kiwa NV - -

23

7 Summary audit and inspection

Below a summary is provided of the tests to be performed for certification bull Initial audit the audit to determine whether all requirements in the BRL are met bull Inspection audit the audit performed after granting the certificate to determine whether

the certified products continuously meet the requirements set in the BRL Also indicates the frequency of the inspection audits to be performed by the certification institute (CI)

bull Inspection of the quality system inspection for compliance with the IQC schedule and the procedures

Here the frequency with which the certification institute must perform an inspection audit is indicated as well

Audit related to

Supervision by CI after granting the certificate1)

Requirement description Article BRL Initial audit

Inspection2) Frequency Product requirements bull Indication of product 2342 X X continuously bull Variable properties 4243 X X 34 x per year bull Chemical composition 4243 X X 34 x per year bull Bending test 42 X X 34 x per year bull Shearing test 42 X X 4 x per year bull Fatigue strength 4244 X X 1 x per year bull Geometry form 4243 X X 34 x per year bull Mass per unit 4243 X X 34 x per year bull Dimensions of fabricsbars 42 X X 34 x per year bull Bendndashbend back tensile

test 42 X X 3 x per year

Own testing laboratory bull Own laboratory 61 X X 1 x per year bull Outsourcing of tests 62 X X 34 x per year bull Verification audit 63 X X 1 x per 2 years System requirements bull IQC schedule 5 X X 34 x per year bull Quality mark 4647 X X 34 x per year

Table 11

1) In case of significant changes in the production process to be assessed by the CI the product requirements need to be tested again

2) The inspector or the certificate holder in the presence of the inspector will determine all product properties that can be performed within the visiting time (maximum 1 day) If this is not possible the CI and the certificate holder will make arrangements with respect to how the inspection will be performed

Inspection of the quality system The certification institute checks if the manufacturer meets the quality system requirements in chapter 5 of this BRL according to the frequency in article 86 of this BRL

National Assessment Guideline BRL 0501 01 September 2010 copy Kiwa NV - -

24

8 Requirements of de certification institute

81 General The certification institute must meet the requirements set out in EN 45011 Besides for the purpose of this BRL the institute must have been accredited by the Dutch Authority for Accreditation (RvA) or a similar body (an accreditation institute with which the RvA has entered into an agreement of mutual acceptance) The certification institute must have a set of regulations or a similar document defining the general rules to be observed during certification These particularly include bull The general rules for performance of the initial audit to be structured as follows

o The way in which suppliers are informed about the handling of a request o The performance of the audit o The decision based on the audit performed

bull The general rules concerning the performance of inspections and the inspection aspects used here

bull The measures the certification institute must take in case of defects bull The rules for terminating a certificate bull The possibility to make an appeal against decisions or measures of the certification

institute

82 Certification staff Staff involved in certification procedures include bull Auditors charged with performing the initial audit and assessing the reports of the

inspectors bull Inspectors charged with performing the external inspection at the supplierrsquos bull Decision-makers charged with taking decisions based on the initial audits performed

about continuation of certification based on inspections performed and about the necessity to take corrective measures

821 Qualification requirements A distinction is made with respect to 8211 Qualification requirements for the certification executives of a CI meeting the

requirements set out in EN 45011 8212 Supplementary qualification requirements for the certification executives of a CI as

determined by the Board of Experts for the subject of this BRL

National Assessment Guideline BRL 0501 01 September 2010 copy Kiwa NV - -

25

8211 Qualification requirements for the certification executives of a CI meeting the requirements set out in EN 45011

The qualification of the certification executives of a CI must comply with chapter 5 of EN 45011 The manual of the CI must describe how the qualification of the certification executives is performed

EN45011

Auditor

initial product assessment and assessment of the

production location

Inspector

assessment product location field and

projects after granting of certificate

Decision-maker

for granting and extending a certificate

Education General

Higher Vocational thinking and working level

Intermediate vocational working and thinking level

Higher Vocational thinking and working level

Education Specific

Basic training for auditing Basic training for auditing

Basic training for auditing

Experience General

1 year of relevant working experience with min 4 audits including 1 full initial audit done independently under supervision

1 year of relevant working experience with min 4 audits including 1 done independent under supervision

4 years of relevant working experience of which at least 1 year with respect to certification

Experience Specific

knowledge of BRL at detailed level and 4 audits related to the specific BRL or to similar BRLs

knowledge of BRL at detailed level and 4 audits related to the specific BRL or to similar BRLs

Basic knowledge of the specific certification schedule

8212 Supplementary qualification requirements for the certification executives of a CI as determined by the Board of Experts for the subject of this BRL

Certification staff Education Experience Auditor Higher vocational education level in one of the

following disciplines - Constructional engineering - Civil engineering - Mechanical engineering

2 years

Inspector Intermediate vocational education level in one of the following disciplines - ConstructionalCivil engineering - Materials science - Mechanical engineering

2 years

Decision-maker Higher vocational education level in one of the following disciplines - Constructional engineering - Civil engineering - Quality science - Mechanical engineering

4 years Managerial experience

822 Qualification Certification staff must be demonstrably qualified by comparing the education and experience with the requirements set out above If qualification takes place based on deviating criteria this must be laid down in writing The qualification authority is vested with

National Assessment Guideline BRL 0501 01 September 2010 copy Kiwa NV - -

26

bull Decision-makers qualification of auditors and inspectors bull Management of the certification institute qualification of decision-makers

83 Initial audit report The certification institute records the findings of the initial audit in a report The report must meet the following requirements bull Completeness the report makes a statement about all requirements set out in the

assessment guideline bull Traceability the findings the statement are based on must have been recorded in a

traceable way bull Basis for decision the decision-maker for granting a certificate must be able to base his

decision on the findings recorded in the report

84 Decision about granting the certificate The decision concerning the granting of the certificate must be made by a decision-maker who is qualified to do so and who has not been involved in the certificate audit himself The decision must have been recorded in a traceable way

85 Presentation of the quality statement The product certificate must be presented in conformity with the model included in the annex

86 Nature and frequency of external inspections The certification institute must regularly inspect the supplier for compliance with his obligations The Board of Experts will decide upon the frequency of the inspections At the time this assessment guideline took effect the frequency was set to bull 3 inspection visits per year at suppliers of hot-rolled products bull 4 inspection visits per year at suppliers of other products Inspections will in any case pertain to a number of matters including bull The product specifications laid down in the product specification bull The supplierrsquos production process bull The supplierrsquos IQC schedule and the results of the inspections performed by the supplier bull The correct way of marking the certified products bull Compliance with the required procedures The certification institute will lay down the findings of each inspection performed in a report in a traceable way

87 Reporting to the Board of Experts The certification institute must report on the certification activities performed at least once a year The report must include the following subjects bull Mutations in number of certificates (newlapsed) bull Number of inspections performed in relation to the determined frequency bull Inspection results bull Measures imposed in case of defects bull Complaints received from third parties with respect to certified products

88 Interpretation of requirements The Board of Experts may lay down the requirements set in this assessment guideline in a single separate interpretation document The certification institute is obliged to ensure whether an interpretation document has been drawn up and if so must make use of the interpretations laid down in this

89 Specific rules defined by the Board of Experts The Board of Experts has not defined specific rules that are to be followed with certification by the certification institute

National Assessment Guideline BRL 0501 01 September 2010 copy Kiwa NV - -

27

9 List of documents mentioned

91 Standardsnormative documents

NEN 6008 2008 Reinforcing steel NEN 6720 1995 Technical foundations for building constructions - TGB 1990 ndash

Regulations for concrete - TGB 1990 ndash Structural requirements and calculation methods (VBC 1995) September 1995 including amendment sheet A4 December 2007

NEN 6722 2002 Regulations for concrete ndash Execution December 2002 NEN 6723 1995 Regulations for concrete - Bridges ndash (VBB June 1995) Structural requirements

and calculation methods December 1995 including amendment sheet A1 December 2003

NEN-EN 1992 2005 Design of concrete structures NEN-EN 1994 2005 Design of composite steel and concrete structures NEN-EN 10002 2001 Metallic materials tensile testing - Part 1 Method of testing at ambient

temperature August 2001 NEN-EN 10080 2005 Steel for the reinforcement of concrete ndash Weldable reinforcing steel - General NEN-EN 10204 2004 Metallic products - Types of inspection documents October 2004 NEN-EN 45012 1998 General requirements for bodies operating assessment and

certificationregistration of quality systems NEN-EN-ISO 376 2004 Metallic materials - Calibration of force-proving instruments used for the

verification of uniaxial testing machines NEN-EN-ISO 7500-1 2004 Metallic materials - Verification of static uniaxial testing machines ndash

Part 1 Tensilecompression testing machines - Verification and calibration of the force-measuring system August 2004

NEN-EN-ISO 9513 2002 Metallic materials ndash Calibration of extensometers for uniaxial testing October 2002

NEN-EN-ISO 15630-1 2002 Steel for the reinforcement and prestressing of concrete - Test methods ndash Part 1 Reinforcing bars wire rod and wire June 2002

NEN-EN-ISO 15630-2 2002 Steel for the reinforcement and prestressing of concrete - Test methods ndash Part 2 Welded fabric

NEN-EN-ISOIEC 17020

2004 General criteria for the operation of various types of bodies performing inspection

NEN-EN-ISOIEC 17024

2003 Conformity assessment - General requirements for bodies operating certification of persons

NEN-EN-ISOIEC 17025

2005 General requirements for the competence of testing and calibration laboratories

ISO 3301 1975 Statistical interpretation of data ndash Comparison of two means in the case of paired observations

ISO 4965 1979 Axial load fatigue testing machines - Dynamic force calibration - Strain gauge technique April 1979

ISO 16269-6 2005 Statistical interpretation of data Determination of statistical tolerance intervals

Annex I Model certificate

Issued Replaces Issued date Valid until Indefinite Page 1 of 2

KOMOreg

Product certificate

ltName Productgt ltCertificate holdergt

STATEMENT OF CI This product certificate was issued on the basis of BRL lsquo lsquo in conformity with the regulations for Product Certification CI declares that the justifiable confidence exists that the name product supplied by the certificate holder meets the technical specifications laid down in this product certificate provided that name product has the KOMOreg mark as indicated in this product certificate Director CI Advice refer to wwwltCIgtnl to see if this certificate is valid

Certificate holder T F E I

Assessed Quality system Product

Periodic check

reg is a collective brand of Stichting Bouwkwaliteit

Annex II Model for IQC schedule or framework of IQC schedule

Subjects Aspects Method Frequency Registration

Basic materials or supplied materials bull Recipe sheets bull Inspection of incoming raw

materials bull Mechanical bull Chemical

Production process production equipment material bull Procedures bull Work instructions bull Equipment bull Material bull Process inspection

End products

Measuring and testing equipment

Measuring and testing equipment bull Measuring devices bull Calibration bull Outsourced tests

Logistics bull Internal transport bull Storage bull Packaging bull Preservation bull Identification or marking

of semi-finished and end products

Corrective measures Complaints handling

Annex III Sampling and testing overview

Type

on

derz

oek

1)

Doo

rlope

nd

inte

rn fa

brie

kson

derz

oek

Perio

diek

ex

tern

ond

erzo

ek (a

udit)

To

elat

ings

onde

rzoe

k

(type

onde

rzoe

k)

Type

bet

onst

aal

stav

enro

llen

per d

iam

eter

ge

punt

last

e w

apn

ette

n pe

r dia

-com

bina

tie

stav

enro

llen

3 bp

e va

n 1

diam

eter

8)

gepu

ntla

ste

wap

net

ten

3 bp

e va

n 1

dia-

com

bina

tie 7)

8)

stav

enro

llen

3 bp

e pe

r di

amet

er 6)

gepu

ntla

ste

wap

net

ten

3 bp

e pe

r dia

-co

mbi

natie

6) 7

) R

e 1

per 3

0 t

m

in 3

per

bpe

m

in 2

per

bpe

1

lang

s + d

war

s 5

per b

pe

5 pe

r bpe

3

lang

s + 2

dw

ars

10 p

er b

pe

10 p

er b

pe

5 la

ngs +

5 d

war

s R

mR

e id

em

idem

id

em

idem

id

em

idem

R

eac

tRe

nom

2)

idem

id

em

idem

id

em

idem

id

em

Agt

idem

id

em

idem

id

em

idem

id

em

Bui

gpro

ef

1 pe

r bpe

4)

idem

2

per b

pe

2 pe

r bpe

1

lang

s + 1

dw

ars

5 pe

r bpe

5

per b

pe

3 la

ngs +

2 d

war

s M

assa

per

m

idem

id

em 5)

id

em

idem

5)

idem

id

em 5)

G

eom

etrie

opp

en

pro

fielfa

ctor

id

em

idem

id

em

idem

id

em

Idem

Che

mis

che

sa

men

st +

Ceq

3)

1 pe

r lad

ing

1

per l

adin

g 1

per l

adin

g 1

per l

adin

g 1

per l

adin

g 1

per l

adin

g

Afs

chui

fpro

ef

nv

t m

in 2

per

bpe

n

vt

3 pe

r bpe

n

vt

3 pe

r bpe

B

uig-

te

rugb

uigt

rekp

roe

f

nv

t n

vt

2 pe

r bpe

n

vt

2 pe

r bpe

n

vt

Afm

etin

gen

nv

t m

in 1

per

bpe

n

vt

1 pe

r bpe

n

vt

1 pe

r bpe

V

erm

oeiin

g n

vt

nv

t 5

per j

aar

5 pe

r jaa

r 6

per b

pe 9)

5

per b

pe 10

)

1) The audit is always for each manufacturing process (hot-rolled-cooled -cold-stretched cold-profiles) of a certain type of reinforcing steel 2) If applicable (B500C) 3) Chemical composition + Ceq to be determined and submitted by the steel manufacturer not for each diameter (combination) 4) For bending mass and geometry surface + frfp min 1 per 150 tons 5) Can be determined for welding 6) Smallest largest and intermediate diameters (always skipping 2 consecutive diameters) of the range (deviating from EN 10080) 7) Always the most critical diameter combination that occurs 8) In a period of a maximum of 5 years number and spreading of diameters 9) For d le 28 mm the largest and middle diameters for gt 28 mm the largest diameter 10) The largest middle and smallest diameters Test unit is defined as -- barscoils the load or a part of the load (for bending mass and geometryprofile min 1 per 90 t) -- point welded reinforcement fabrics 50 tons of the same combination of reinforcing steel types and diameters manufactured with the same point welding machine

Annex IV Model for biannual reporting on reinforcing steel

Page 21: National Assessment Guideline - Kiwa · PDF fileThe NEN-EN 10080:2005 is not a harmonised standard and therefore a CE mark can not yet be attached to the products covered by this BRL

National Assessment Guideline BRL 0501 01 September 2010 copy Kiwa NV - -

20

6 Requirements for the functioning of a test laboratory for testing reinforcing steel andor point welded reinforcement fabrics

61 The supplier has its own laboratory for testing reinforcing steel for its variable and attributive properties The laboratory equipment as well as the test methods must comply with

bull NEN-EN 10002-22001 Metallic materials tensile testing part 1 method of testing at ambient temperature

bull NEN-EN-ISO 15630-12002 Steel for the reinforcement and prestressing of concrete Test methods ndash Part 1 reinforcing bars wire rod and wire June 2002

bull NEN-EN-ISO 15630-22002 Steel for the reinforcement and prestressing of concrete Test methods ndash Part 2 welded fabric

Measuring equipment that has not been classified for one of the above-mentioned standards can be used as soon as they have been tested assessed and qualified by the CI

62 Outsourcing of testing Tests for the chemical composition and the fatigue strength of reinforcing steel can be outsourced as well De test results can be indicated as being lsquoperformed in a reliable wayrsquo if

bull The tests have been performed by a laboratory that meets the accreditation standard referred to in article 14 of this BRL NEN-EN-ISOIEC 17025 lsquoGeneral requirements for the competence of testing and calibration laboratoriesrsquo This accreditation must concern the performance of tests in conformity with the outsourcing assignment Besides a 31 or a 22 certificate of the results in conformity with NEN-EN 10204 is to be submitted or

bull The supplier receives the test results of the chemical composition from a company that has a product certificate of the lsquotechnical disciplinersquo (H9) mentioned in this BRL with the CI and the relevant measuring equipment in the laboratory concerned is covered by the product certificate audit

If the above requirements are not complied with the certification institute will perform or have performed the audit concerned itself In this case the certification institute will base its test on the accreditation standard NEN-EN-ISOIEC 17025

63 Verification audit An initial audit includes external verification of both the attributive and the variable properties Also an external verification for the performance of the used tensile tests takes place every two years The diameter is to be selected such that the diameters that occur most are tested in a period of 5 years When using a new tensile testing machinemeasuring equipment a verification audit is to be performed as well

National Assessment Guideline BRL 0501 01 September 2010 copy Kiwa NV - -

21

631 Variable properties For the verification of variable properties (the results of the tensile test) at least 15 random samples of one selected diameter must be taken in the presence of the inspector (audit testing) for each selected reinforcing steel type each of a length suitable for two test pieces for testing The selected representative diameters must change at the two-yearly verification With bars and coils the samples must have been spread over at least 3 loads of 1 diameter The samples for point welded reinforcement fabrics and the corresponding bars must come from 1 diameter combination produced on different days For each sample the two collected test pieces must be marked and then the test pieces must be bundled into two series of at least 15 test pieces A third series can be taken as spare series in case of discussions about the achieved results One series must be tested in the presence of the inspector at the manufacturerrsquos The inspector must have the other series tested at an external laboratory The time between the performances of both test series must be short enough to allow for neglecting any natural ageing of the testing material The test (tensile test) includes determination of the 02 yield limit or flow limit (Re) the tensile strength (Rm) the RmRe ratio and the yield with maximum load (Agt) of each individual test piece The thus obtained two series of measurement pairs must then be tested for their differences between both performances of the test Any systematic differences are to be tracked and eliminated

With the statistic comparison of two different performances of tests the differences of paired measurements are to be checked in relation with the hypothesis that the expected value of the average difference is zero (Student test) Rejection of this hypothesis indicates that there is a possibility of systematic differences For each variable property the xfi (i = 1n) of the measurement results of the manufacturer and the xei (i = 1hellip n) of the external institute must be calculated separately

bull Difference vi = xfi ndash xei considering the positive or negative difference and then the average difference

= sum

=

n

iiv

nv

1

1

bull standard deviation of the differences

minus

minus= sum

=

2

1

2

11 vnv

ns

n

iiv

bull value vsvt =

It must be verified for the variable properties the 02 yield limit or flow limit (Reee ) the tensile strength (Rmmm ) and the yield with maximum load (Aggg ttt ) whether or not t exceeds a critical limit to The critical values to depend on the number of tests and have been derived from ISO 3301 1975 with a = 001 (see table 9)

National Assessment Guideline BRL 0501 01 September 2010 copy Kiwa NV - -

22

Table 9 ndash Critical values of to

n to n to n to

10 103 11 096 12 090 13 085 14 080

15 077 16 074 17 071 18 068 19 066

20 064 25 056 30 050 35 047 40 043

If t gt to the hypothesis that there is no difference between the two series of paired measurements is rejected and so the cause of this must be found and eliminated This does not apply when sv and v are both below the reference values Sov and Vo in table 9 because of insufficient relevance

If t le to the hypothesis that there is no difference between the two series of paired measurements is not rejected The test can then be concluded unless Sv ge Sov In this case the standard deviation of the differences is excessive showing that the material concerned is unsuitable for the verification test Further investigation is then required

Table 10 ndash Reference values of Sov and Vo

sov vo 02 yield limit or flow limit 15 15 Tensile strength in MPa 15 20 Yield at maximum load in B500A B500B B500C

11 25 30

11 25 30

632 Attributive properties For the verification of attributive properties (mass per length chemical composition profiling bending test and if necessary a shearing test) the measurements of mass per length and profiling must be done in advance with the two series of at least 15 test pieces meant for the tensile test (see above) For the measurements of the bending test and shearing test (if applicable) the number of test pieces from the above described random samples must be extended with at least 5 test pieces for the bending test and if necessary the shearing test For the verification assessment of the chemical composition the number of test pieces is limited to a series of 3 test pieces from 3 test units Any combinations in the random samples of the above-mentioned verification assessments are allowed The test series at the manufacturerrsquos and the series of external tests (see above) should not produce other differences than those that can unambiguously be explained and eliminated

National Assessment Guideline BRL 0501 01 September 2010 copy Kiwa NV - -

23

7 Summary audit and inspection

Below a summary is provided of the tests to be performed for certification bull Initial audit the audit to determine whether all requirements in the BRL are met bull Inspection audit the audit performed after granting the certificate to determine whether

the certified products continuously meet the requirements set in the BRL Also indicates the frequency of the inspection audits to be performed by the certification institute (CI)

bull Inspection of the quality system inspection for compliance with the IQC schedule and the procedures

Here the frequency with which the certification institute must perform an inspection audit is indicated as well

Audit related to

Supervision by CI after granting the certificate1)

Requirement description Article BRL Initial audit

Inspection2) Frequency Product requirements bull Indication of product 2342 X X continuously bull Variable properties 4243 X X 34 x per year bull Chemical composition 4243 X X 34 x per year bull Bending test 42 X X 34 x per year bull Shearing test 42 X X 4 x per year bull Fatigue strength 4244 X X 1 x per year bull Geometry form 4243 X X 34 x per year bull Mass per unit 4243 X X 34 x per year bull Dimensions of fabricsbars 42 X X 34 x per year bull Bendndashbend back tensile

test 42 X X 3 x per year

Own testing laboratory bull Own laboratory 61 X X 1 x per year bull Outsourcing of tests 62 X X 34 x per year bull Verification audit 63 X X 1 x per 2 years System requirements bull IQC schedule 5 X X 34 x per year bull Quality mark 4647 X X 34 x per year

Table 11

1) In case of significant changes in the production process to be assessed by the CI the product requirements need to be tested again

2) The inspector or the certificate holder in the presence of the inspector will determine all product properties that can be performed within the visiting time (maximum 1 day) If this is not possible the CI and the certificate holder will make arrangements with respect to how the inspection will be performed

Inspection of the quality system The certification institute checks if the manufacturer meets the quality system requirements in chapter 5 of this BRL according to the frequency in article 86 of this BRL

National Assessment Guideline BRL 0501 01 September 2010 copy Kiwa NV - -

24

8 Requirements of de certification institute

81 General The certification institute must meet the requirements set out in EN 45011 Besides for the purpose of this BRL the institute must have been accredited by the Dutch Authority for Accreditation (RvA) or a similar body (an accreditation institute with which the RvA has entered into an agreement of mutual acceptance) The certification institute must have a set of regulations or a similar document defining the general rules to be observed during certification These particularly include bull The general rules for performance of the initial audit to be structured as follows

o The way in which suppliers are informed about the handling of a request o The performance of the audit o The decision based on the audit performed

bull The general rules concerning the performance of inspections and the inspection aspects used here

bull The measures the certification institute must take in case of defects bull The rules for terminating a certificate bull The possibility to make an appeal against decisions or measures of the certification

institute

82 Certification staff Staff involved in certification procedures include bull Auditors charged with performing the initial audit and assessing the reports of the

inspectors bull Inspectors charged with performing the external inspection at the supplierrsquos bull Decision-makers charged with taking decisions based on the initial audits performed

about continuation of certification based on inspections performed and about the necessity to take corrective measures

821 Qualification requirements A distinction is made with respect to 8211 Qualification requirements for the certification executives of a CI meeting the

requirements set out in EN 45011 8212 Supplementary qualification requirements for the certification executives of a CI as

determined by the Board of Experts for the subject of this BRL

National Assessment Guideline BRL 0501 01 September 2010 copy Kiwa NV - -

25

8211 Qualification requirements for the certification executives of a CI meeting the requirements set out in EN 45011

The qualification of the certification executives of a CI must comply with chapter 5 of EN 45011 The manual of the CI must describe how the qualification of the certification executives is performed

EN45011

Auditor

initial product assessment and assessment of the

production location

Inspector

assessment product location field and

projects after granting of certificate

Decision-maker

for granting and extending a certificate

Education General

Higher Vocational thinking and working level

Intermediate vocational working and thinking level

Higher Vocational thinking and working level

Education Specific

Basic training for auditing Basic training for auditing

Basic training for auditing

Experience General

1 year of relevant working experience with min 4 audits including 1 full initial audit done independently under supervision

1 year of relevant working experience with min 4 audits including 1 done independent under supervision

4 years of relevant working experience of which at least 1 year with respect to certification

Experience Specific

knowledge of BRL at detailed level and 4 audits related to the specific BRL or to similar BRLs

knowledge of BRL at detailed level and 4 audits related to the specific BRL or to similar BRLs

Basic knowledge of the specific certification schedule

8212 Supplementary qualification requirements for the certification executives of a CI as determined by the Board of Experts for the subject of this BRL

Certification staff Education Experience Auditor Higher vocational education level in one of the

following disciplines - Constructional engineering - Civil engineering - Mechanical engineering

2 years

Inspector Intermediate vocational education level in one of the following disciplines - ConstructionalCivil engineering - Materials science - Mechanical engineering

2 years

Decision-maker Higher vocational education level in one of the following disciplines - Constructional engineering - Civil engineering - Quality science - Mechanical engineering

4 years Managerial experience

822 Qualification Certification staff must be demonstrably qualified by comparing the education and experience with the requirements set out above If qualification takes place based on deviating criteria this must be laid down in writing The qualification authority is vested with

National Assessment Guideline BRL 0501 01 September 2010 copy Kiwa NV - -

26

bull Decision-makers qualification of auditors and inspectors bull Management of the certification institute qualification of decision-makers

83 Initial audit report The certification institute records the findings of the initial audit in a report The report must meet the following requirements bull Completeness the report makes a statement about all requirements set out in the

assessment guideline bull Traceability the findings the statement are based on must have been recorded in a

traceable way bull Basis for decision the decision-maker for granting a certificate must be able to base his

decision on the findings recorded in the report

84 Decision about granting the certificate The decision concerning the granting of the certificate must be made by a decision-maker who is qualified to do so and who has not been involved in the certificate audit himself The decision must have been recorded in a traceable way

85 Presentation of the quality statement The product certificate must be presented in conformity with the model included in the annex

86 Nature and frequency of external inspections The certification institute must regularly inspect the supplier for compliance with his obligations The Board of Experts will decide upon the frequency of the inspections At the time this assessment guideline took effect the frequency was set to bull 3 inspection visits per year at suppliers of hot-rolled products bull 4 inspection visits per year at suppliers of other products Inspections will in any case pertain to a number of matters including bull The product specifications laid down in the product specification bull The supplierrsquos production process bull The supplierrsquos IQC schedule and the results of the inspections performed by the supplier bull The correct way of marking the certified products bull Compliance with the required procedures The certification institute will lay down the findings of each inspection performed in a report in a traceable way

87 Reporting to the Board of Experts The certification institute must report on the certification activities performed at least once a year The report must include the following subjects bull Mutations in number of certificates (newlapsed) bull Number of inspections performed in relation to the determined frequency bull Inspection results bull Measures imposed in case of defects bull Complaints received from third parties with respect to certified products

88 Interpretation of requirements The Board of Experts may lay down the requirements set in this assessment guideline in a single separate interpretation document The certification institute is obliged to ensure whether an interpretation document has been drawn up and if so must make use of the interpretations laid down in this

89 Specific rules defined by the Board of Experts The Board of Experts has not defined specific rules that are to be followed with certification by the certification institute

National Assessment Guideline BRL 0501 01 September 2010 copy Kiwa NV - -

27

9 List of documents mentioned

91 Standardsnormative documents

NEN 6008 2008 Reinforcing steel NEN 6720 1995 Technical foundations for building constructions - TGB 1990 ndash

Regulations for concrete - TGB 1990 ndash Structural requirements and calculation methods (VBC 1995) September 1995 including amendment sheet A4 December 2007

NEN 6722 2002 Regulations for concrete ndash Execution December 2002 NEN 6723 1995 Regulations for concrete - Bridges ndash (VBB June 1995) Structural requirements

and calculation methods December 1995 including amendment sheet A1 December 2003

NEN-EN 1992 2005 Design of concrete structures NEN-EN 1994 2005 Design of composite steel and concrete structures NEN-EN 10002 2001 Metallic materials tensile testing - Part 1 Method of testing at ambient

temperature August 2001 NEN-EN 10080 2005 Steel for the reinforcement of concrete ndash Weldable reinforcing steel - General NEN-EN 10204 2004 Metallic products - Types of inspection documents October 2004 NEN-EN 45012 1998 General requirements for bodies operating assessment and

certificationregistration of quality systems NEN-EN-ISO 376 2004 Metallic materials - Calibration of force-proving instruments used for the

verification of uniaxial testing machines NEN-EN-ISO 7500-1 2004 Metallic materials - Verification of static uniaxial testing machines ndash

Part 1 Tensilecompression testing machines - Verification and calibration of the force-measuring system August 2004

NEN-EN-ISO 9513 2002 Metallic materials ndash Calibration of extensometers for uniaxial testing October 2002

NEN-EN-ISO 15630-1 2002 Steel for the reinforcement and prestressing of concrete - Test methods ndash Part 1 Reinforcing bars wire rod and wire June 2002

NEN-EN-ISO 15630-2 2002 Steel for the reinforcement and prestressing of concrete - Test methods ndash Part 2 Welded fabric

NEN-EN-ISOIEC 17020

2004 General criteria for the operation of various types of bodies performing inspection

NEN-EN-ISOIEC 17024

2003 Conformity assessment - General requirements for bodies operating certification of persons

NEN-EN-ISOIEC 17025

2005 General requirements for the competence of testing and calibration laboratories

ISO 3301 1975 Statistical interpretation of data ndash Comparison of two means in the case of paired observations

ISO 4965 1979 Axial load fatigue testing machines - Dynamic force calibration - Strain gauge technique April 1979

ISO 16269-6 2005 Statistical interpretation of data Determination of statistical tolerance intervals

Annex I Model certificate

Issued Replaces Issued date Valid until Indefinite Page 1 of 2

KOMOreg

Product certificate

ltName Productgt ltCertificate holdergt

STATEMENT OF CI This product certificate was issued on the basis of BRL lsquo lsquo in conformity with the regulations for Product Certification CI declares that the justifiable confidence exists that the name product supplied by the certificate holder meets the technical specifications laid down in this product certificate provided that name product has the KOMOreg mark as indicated in this product certificate Director CI Advice refer to wwwltCIgtnl to see if this certificate is valid

Certificate holder T F E I

Assessed Quality system Product

Periodic check

reg is a collective brand of Stichting Bouwkwaliteit

Annex II Model for IQC schedule or framework of IQC schedule

Subjects Aspects Method Frequency Registration

Basic materials or supplied materials bull Recipe sheets bull Inspection of incoming raw

materials bull Mechanical bull Chemical

Production process production equipment material bull Procedures bull Work instructions bull Equipment bull Material bull Process inspection

End products

Measuring and testing equipment

Measuring and testing equipment bull Measuring devices bull Calibration bull Outsourced tests

Logistics bull Internal transport bull Storage bull Packaging bull Preservation bull Identification or marking

of semi-finished and end products

Corrective measures Complaints handling

Annex III Sampling and testing overview

Type

on

derz

oek

1)

Doo

rlope

nd

inte

rn fa

brie

kson

derz

oek

Perio

diek

ex

tern

ond

erzo

ek (a

udit)

To

elat

ings

onde

rzoe

k

(type

onde

rzoe

k)

Type

bet

onst

aal

stav

enro

llen

per d

iam

eter

ge

punt

last

e w

apn

ette

n pe

r dia

-com

bina

tie

stav

enro

llen

3 bp

e va

n 1

diam

eter

8)

gepu

ntla

ste

wap

net

ten

3 bp

e va

n 1

dia-

com

bina

tie 7)

8)

stav

enro

llen

3 bp

e pe

r di

amet

er 6)

gepu

ntla

ste

wap

net

ten

3 bp

e pe

r dia

-co

mbi

natie

6) 7

) R

e 1

per 3

0 t

m

in 3

per

bpe

m

in 2

per

bpe

1

lang

s + d

war

s 5

per b

pe

5 pe

r bpe

3

lang

s + 2

dw

ars

10 p

er b

pe

10 p

er b

pe

5 la

ngs +

5 d

war

s R

mR

e id

em

idem

id

em

idem

id

em

idem

R

eac

tRe

nom

2)

idem

id

em

idem

id

em

idem

id

em

Agt

idem

id

em

idem

id

em

idem

id

em

Bui

gpro

ef

1 pe

r bpe

4)

idem

2

per b

pe

2 pe

r bpe

1

lang

s + 1

dw

ars

5 pe

r bpe

5

per b

pe

3 la

ngs +

2 d

war

s M

assa

per

m

idem

id

em 5)

id

em

idem

5)

idem

id

em 5)

G

eom

etrie

opp

en

pro

fielfa

ctor

id

em

idem

id

em

idem

id

em

Idem

Che

mis

che

sa

men

st +

Ceq

3)

1 pe

r lad

ing

1

per l

adin

g 1

per l

adin

g 1

per l

adin

g 1

per l

adin

g 1

per l

adin

g

Afs

chui

fpro

ef

nv

t m

in 2

per

bpe

n

vt

3 pe

r bpe

n

vt

3 pe

r bpe

B

uig-

te

rugb

uigt

rekp

roe

f

nv

t n

vt

2 pe

r bpe

n

vt

2 pe

r bpe

n

vt

Afm

etin

gen

nv

t m

in 1

per

bpe

n

vt

1 pe

r bpe

n

vt

1 pe

r bpe

V

erm

oeiin

g n

vt

nv

t 5

per j

aar

5 pe

r jaa

r 6

per b

pe 9)

5

per b

pe 10

)

1) The audit is always for each manufacturing process (hot-rolled-cooled -cold-stretched cold-profiles) of a certain type of reinforcing steel 2) If applicable (B500C) 3) Chemical composition + Ceq to be determined and submitted by the steel manufacturer not for each diameter (combination) 4) For bending mass and geometry surface + frfp min 1 per 150 tons 5) Can be determined for welding 6) Smallest largest and intermediate diameters (always skipping 2 consecutive diameters) of the range (deviating from EN 10080) 7) Always the most critical diameter combination that occurs 8) In a period of a maximum of 5 years number and spreading of diameters 9) For d le 28 mm the largest and middle diameters for gt 28 mm the largest diameter 10) The largest middle and smallest diameters Test unit is defined as -- barscoils the load or a part of the load (for bending mass and geometryprofile min 1 per 90 t) -- point welded reinforcement fabrics 50 tons of the same combination of reinforcing steel types and diameters manufactured with the same point welding machine

Annex IV Model for biannual reporting on reinforcing steel

Page 22: National Assessment Guideline - Kiwa · PDF fileThe NEN-EN 10080:2005 is not a harmonised standard and therefore a CE mark can not yet be attached to the products covered by this BRL

National Assessment Guideline BRL 0501 01 September 2010 copy Kiwa NV - -

21

631 Variable properties For the verification of variable properties (the results of the tensile test) at least 15 random samples of one selected diameter must be taken in the presence of the inspector (audit testing) for each selected reinforcing steel type each of a length suitable for two test pieces for testing The selected representative diameters must change at the two-yearly verification With bars and coils the samples must have been spread over at least 3 loads of 1 diameter The samples for point welded reinforcement fabrics and the corresponding bars must come from 1 diameter combination produced on different days For each sample the two collected test pieces must be marked and then the test pieces must be bundled into two series of at least 15 test pieces A third series can be taken as spare series in case of discussions about the achieved results One series must be tested in the presence of the inspector at the manufacturerrsquos The inspector must have the other series tested at an external laboratory The time between the performances of both test series must be short enough to allow for neglecting any natural ageing of the testing material The test (tensile test) includes determination of the 02 yield limit or flow limit (Re) the tensile strength (Rm) the RmRe ratio and the yield with maximum load (Agt) of each individual test piece The thus obtained two series of measurement pairs must then be tested for their differences between both performances of the test Any systematic differences are to be tracked and eliminated

With the statistic comparison of two different performances of tests the differences of paired measurements are to be checked in relation with the hypothesis that the expected value of the average difference is zero (Student test) Rejection of this hypothesis indicates that there is a possibility of systematic differences For each variable property the xfi (i = 1n) of the measurement results of the manufacturer and the xei (i = 1hellip n) of the external institute must be calculated separately

bull Difference vi = xfi ndash xei considering the positive or negative difference and then the average difference

= sum

=

n

iiv

nv

1

1

bull standard deviation of the differences

minus

minus= sum

=

2

1

2

11 vnv

ns

n

iiv

bull value vsvt =

It must be verified for the variable properties the 02 yield limit or flow limit (Reee ) the tensile strength (Rmmm ) and the yield with maximum load (Aggg ttt ) whether or not t exceeds a critical limit to The critical values to depend on the number of tests and have been derived from ISO 3301 1975 with a = 001 (see table 9)

National Assessment Guideline BRL 0501 01 September 2010 copy Kiwa NV - -

22

Table 9 ndash Critical values of to

n to n to n to

10 103 11 096 12 090 13 085 14 080

15 077 16 074 17 071 18 068 19 066

20 064 25 056 30 050 35 047 40 043

If t gt to the hypothesis that there is no difference between the two series of paired measurements is rejected and so the cause of this must be found and eliminated This does not apply when sv and v are both below the reference values Sov and Vo in table 9 because of insufficient relevance

If t le to the hypothesis that there is no difference between the two series of paired measurements is not rejected The test can then be concluded unless Sv ge Sov In this case the standard deviation of the differences is excessive showing that the material concerned is unsuitable for the verification test Further investigation is then required

Table 10 ndash Reference values of Sov and Vo

sov vo 02 yield limit or flow limit 15 15 Tensile strength in MPa 15 20 Yield at maximum load in B500A B500B B500C

11 25 30

11 25 30

632 Attributive properties For the verification of attributive properties (mass per length chemical composition profiling bending test and if necessary a shearing test) the measurements of mass per length and profiling must be done in advance with the two series of at least 15 test pieces meant for the tensile test (see above) For the measurements of the bending test and shearing test (if applicable) the number of test pieces from the above described random samples must be extended with at least 5 test pieces for the bending test and if necessary the shearing test For the verification assessment of the chemical composition the number of test pieces is limited to a series of 3 test pieces from 3 test units Any combinations in the random samples of the above-mentioned verification assessments are allowed The test series at the manufacturerrsquos and the series of external tests (see above) should not produce other differences than those that can unambiguously be explained and eliminated

National Assessment Guideline BRL 0501 01 September 2010 copy Kiwa NV - -

23

7 Summary audit and inspection

Below a summary is provided of the tests to be performed for certification bull Initial audit the audit to determine whether all requirements in the BRL are met bull Inspection audit the audit performed after granting the certificate to determine whether

the certified products continuously meet the requirements set in the BRL Also indicates the frequency of the inspection audits to be performed by the certification institute (CI)

bull Inspection of the quality system inspection for compliance with the IQC schedule and the procedures

Here the frequency with which the certification institute must perform an inspection audit is indicated as well

Audit related to

Supervision by CI after granting the certificate1)

Requirement description Article BRL Initial audit

Inspection2) Frequency Product requirements bull Indication of product 2342 X X continuously bull Variable properties 4243 X X 34 x per year bull Chemical composition 4243 X X 34 x per year bull Bending test 42 X X 34 x per year bull Shearing test 42 X X 4 x per year bull Fatigue strength 4244 X X 1 x per year bull Geometry form 4243 X X 34 x per year bull Mass per unit 4243 X X 34 x per year bull Dimensions of fabricsbars 42 X X 34 x per year bull Bendndashbend back tensile

test 42 X X 3 x per year

Own testing laboratory bull Own laboratory 61 X X 1 x per year bull Outsourcing of tests 62 X X 34 x per year bull Verification audit 63 X X 1 x per 2 years System requirements bull IQC schedule 5 X X 34 x per year bull Quality mark 4647 X X 34 x per year

Table 11

1) In case of significant changes in the production process to be assessed by the CI the product requirements need to be tested again

2) The inspector or the certificate holder in the presence of the inspector will determine all product properties that can be performed within the visiting time (maximum 1 day) If this is not possible the CI and the certificate holder will make arrangements with respect to how the inspection will be performed

Inspection of the quality system The certification institute checks if the manufacturer meets the quality system requirements in chapter 5 of this BRL according to the frequency in article 86 of this BRL

National Assessment Guideline BRL 0501 01 September 2010 copy Kiwa NV - -

24

8 Requirements of de certification institute

81 General The certification institute must meet the requirements set out in EN 45011 Besides for the purpose of this BRL the institute must have been accredited by the Dutch Authority for Accreditation (RvA) or a similar body (an accreditation institute with which the RvA has entered into an agreement of mutual acceptance) The certification institute must have a set of regulations or a similar document defining the general rules to be observed during certification These particularly include bull The general rules for performance of the initial audit to be structured as follows

o The way in which suppliers are informed about the handling of a request o The performance of the audit o The decision based on the audit performed

bull The general rules concerning the performance of inspections and the inspection aspects used here

bull The measures the certification institute must take in case of defects bull The rules for terminating a certificate bull The possibility to make an appeal against decisions or measures of the certification

institute

82 Certification staff Staff involved in certification procedures include bull Auditors charged with performing the initial audit and assessing the reports of the

inspectors bull Inspectors charged with performing the external inspection at the supplierrsquos bull Decision-makers charged with taking decisions based on the initial audits performed

about continuation of certification based on inspections performed and about the necessity to take corrective measures

821 Qualification requirements A distinction is made with respect to 8211 Qualification requirements for the certification executives of a CI meeting the

requirements set out in EN 45011 8212 Supplementary qualification requirements for the certification executives of a CI as

determined by the Board of Experts for the subject of this BRL

National Assessment Guideline BRL 0501 01 September 2010 copy Kiwa NV - -

25

8211 Qualification requirements for the certification executives of a CI meeting the requirements set out in EN 45011

The qualification of the certification executives of a CI must comply with chapter 5 of EN 45011 The manual of the CI must describe how the qualification of the certification executives is performed

EN45011

Auditor

initial product assessment and assessment of the

production location

Inspector

assessment product location field and

projects after granting of certificate

Decision-maker

for granting and extending a certificate

Education General

Higher Vocational thinking and working level

Intermediate vocational working and thinking level

Higher Vocational thinking and working level

Education Specific

Basic training for auditing Basic training for auditing

Basic training for auditing

Experience General

1 year of relevant working experience with min 4 audits including 1 full initial audit done independently under supervision

1 year of relevant working experience with min 4 audits including 1 done independent under supervision

4 years of relevant working experience of which at least 1 year with respect to certification

Experience Specific

knowledge of BRL at detailed level and 4 audits related to the specific BRL or to similar BRLs

knowledge of BRL at detailed level and 4 audits related to the specific BRL or to similar BRLs

Basic knowledge of the specific certification schedule

8212 Supplementary qualification requirements for the certification executives of a CI as determined by the Board of Experts for the subject of this BRL

Certification staff Education Experience Auditor Higher vocational education level in one of the

following disciplines - Constructional engineering - Civil engineering - Mechanical engineering

2 years

Inspector Intermediate vocational education level in one of the following disciplines - ConstructionalCivil engineering - Materials science - Mechanical engineering

2 years

Decision-maker Higher vocational education level in one of the following disciplines - Constructional engineering - Civil engineering - Quality science - Mechanical engineering

4 years Managerial experience

822 Qualification Certification staff must be demonstrably qualified by comparing the education and experience with the requirements set out above If qualification takes place based on deviating criteria this must be laid down in writing The qualification authority is vested with

National Assessment Guideline BRL 0501 01 September 2010 copy Kiwa NV - -

26

bull Decision-makers qualification of auditors and inspectors bull Management of the certification institute qualification of decision-makers

83 Initial audit report The certification institute records the findings of the initial audit in a report The report must meet the following requirements bull Completeness the report makes a statement about all requirements set out in the

assessment guideline bull Traceability the findings the statement are based on must have been recorded in a

traceable way bull Basis for decision the decision-maker for granting a certificate must be able to base his

decision on the findings recorded in the report

84 Decision about granting the certificate The decision concerning the granting of the certificate must be made by a decision-maker who is qualified to do so and who has not been involved in the certificate audit himself The decision must have been recorded in a traceable way

85 Presentation of the quality statement The product certificate must be presented in conformity with the model included in the annex

86 Nature and frequency of external inspections The certification institute must regularly inspect the supplier for compliance with his obligations The Board of Experts will decide upon the frequency of the inspections At the time this assessment guideline took effect the frequency was set to bull 3 inspection visits per year at suppliers of hot-rolled products bull 4 inspection visits per year at suppliers of other products Inspections will in any case pertain to a number of matters including bull The product specifications laid down in the product specification bull The supplierrsquos production process bull The supplierrsquos IQC schedule and the results of the inspections performed by the supplier bull The correct way of marking the certified products bull Compliance with the required procedures The certification institute will lay down the findings of each inspection performed in a report in a traceable way

87 Reporting to the Board of Experts The certification institute must report on the certification activities performed at least once a year The report must include the following subjects bull Mutations in number of certificates (newlapsed) bull Number of inspections performed in relation to the determined frequency bull Inspection results bull Measures imposed in case of defects bull Complaints received from third parties with respect to certified products

88 Interpretation of requirements The Board of Experts may lay down the requirements set in this assessment guideline in a single separate interpretation document The certification institute is obliged to ensure whether an interpretation document has been drawn up and if so must make use of the interpretations laid down in this

89 Specific rules defined by the Board of Experts The Board of Experts has not defined specific rules that are to be followed with certification by the certification institute

National Assessment Guideline BRL 0501 01 September 2010 copy Kiwa NV - -

27

9 List of documents mentioned

91 Standardsnormative documents

NEN 6008 2008 Reinforcing steel NEN 6720 1995 Technical foundations for building constructions - TGB 1990 ndash

Regulations for concrete - TGB 1990 ndash Structural requirements and calculation methods (VBC 1995) September 1995 including amendment sheet A4 December 2007

NEN 6722 2002 Regulations for concrete ndash Execution December 2002 NEN 6723 1995 Regulations for concrete - Bridges ndash (VBB June 1995) Structural requirements

and calculation methods December 1995 including amendment sheet A1 December 2003

NEN-EN 1992 2005 Design of concrete structures NEN-EN 1994 2005 Design of composite steel and concrete structures NEN-EN 10002 2001 Metallic materials tensile testing - Part 1 Method of testing at ambient

temperature August 2001 NEN-EN 10080 2005 Steel for the reinforcement of concrete ndash Weldable reinforcing steel - General NEN-EN 10204 2004 Metallic products - Types of inspection documents October 2004 NEN-EN 45012 1998 General requirements for bodies operating assessment and

certificationregistration of quality systems NEN-EN-ISO 376 2004 Metallic materials - Calibration of force-proving instruments used for the

verification of uniaxial testing machines NEN-EN-ISO 7500-1 2004 Metallic materials - Verification of static uniaxial testing machines ndash

Part 1 Tensilecompression testing machines - Verification and calibration of the force-measuring system August 2004

NEN-EN-ISO 9513 2002 Metallic materials ndash Calibration of extensometers for uniaxial testing October 2002

NEN-EN-ISO 15630-1 2002 Steel for the reinforcement and prestressing of concrete - Test methods ndash Part 1 Reinforcing bars wire rod and wire June 2002

NEN-EN-ISO 15630-2 2002 Steel for the reinforcement and prestressing of concrete - Test methods ndash Part 2 Welded fabric

NEN-EN-ISOIEC 17020

2004 General criteria for the operation of various types of bodies performing inspection

NEN-EN-ISOIEC 17024

2003 Conformity assessment - General requirements for bodies operating certification of persons

NEN-EN-ISOIEC 17025

2005 General requirements for the competence of testing and calibration laboratories

ISO 3301 1975 Statistical interpretation of data ndash Comparison of two means in the case of paired observations

ISO 4965 1979 Axial load fatigue testing machines - Dynamic force calibration - Strain gauge technique April 1979

ISO 16269-6 2005 Statistical interpretation of data Determination of statistical tolerance intervals

Annex I Model certificate

Issued Replaces Issued date Valid until Indefinite Page 1 of 2

KOMOreg

Product certificate

ltName Productgt ltCertificate holdergt

STATEMENT OF CI This product certificate was issued on the basis of BRL lsquo lsquo in conformity with the regulations for Product Certification CI declares that the justifiable confidence exists that the name product supplied by the certificate holder meets the technical specifications laid down in this product certificate provided that name product has the KOMOreg mark as indicated in this product certificate Director CI Advice refer to wwwltCIgtnl to see if this certificate is valid

Certificate holder T F E I

Assessed Quality system Product

Periodic check

reg is a collective brand of Stichting Bouwkwaliteit

Annex II Model for IQC schedule or framework of IQC schedule

Subjects Aspects Method Frequency Registration

Basic materials or supplied materials bull Recipe sheets bull Inspection of incoming raw

materials bull Mechanical bull Chemical

Production process production equipment material bull Procedures bull Work instructions bull Equipment bull Material bull Process inspection

End products

Measuring and testing equipment

Measuring and testing equipment bull Measuring devices bull Calibration bull Outsourced tests

Logistics bull Internal transport bull Storage bull Packaging bull Preservation bull Identification or marking

of semi-finished and end products

Corrective measures Complaints handling

Annex III Sampling and testing overview

Type

on

derz

oek

1)

Doo

rlope

nd

inte

rn fa

brie

kson

derz

oek

Perio

diek

ex

tern

ond

erzo

ek (a

udit)

To

elat

ings

onde

rzoe

k

(type

onde

rzoe

k)

Type

bet

onst

aal

stav

enro

llen

per d

iam

eter

ge

punt

last

e w

apn

ette

n pe

r dia

-com

bina

tie

stav

enro

llen

3 bp

e va

n 1

diam

eter

8)

gepu

ntla

ste

wap

net

ten

3 bp

e va

n 1

dia-

com

bina

tie 7)

8)

stav

enro

llen

3 bp

e pe

r di

amet

er 6)

gepu

ntla

ste

wap

net

ten

3 bp

e pe

r dia

-co

mbi

natie

6) 7

) R

e 1

per 3

0 t

m

in 3

per

bpe

m

in 2

per

bpe

1

lang

s + d

war

s 5

per b

pe

5 pe

r bpe

3

lang

s + 2

dw

ars

10 p

er b

pe

10 p

er b

pe

5 la

ngs +

5 d

war

s R

mR

e id

em

idem

id

em

idem

id

em

idem

R

eac

tRe

nom

2)

idem

id

em

idem

id

em

idem

id

em

Agt

idem

id

em

idem

id

em

idem

id

em

Bui

gpro

ef

1 pe

r bpe

4)

idem

2

per b

pe

2 pe

r bpe

1

lang

s + 1

dw

ars

5 pe

r bpe

5

per b

pe

3 la

ngs +

2 d

war

s M

assa

per

m

idem

id

em 5)

id

em

idem

5)

idem

id

em 5)

G

eom

etrie

opp

en

pro

fielfa

ctor

id

em

idem

id

em

idem

id

em

Idem

Che

mis

che

sa

men

st +

Ceq

3)

1 pe

r lad

ing

1

per l

adin

g 1

per l

adin

g 1

per l

adin

g 1

per l

adin

g 1

per l

adin

g

Afs

chui

fpro

ef

nv

t m

in 2

per

bpe

n

vt

3 pe

r bpe

n

vt

3 pe

r bpe

B

uig-

te

rugb

uigt

rekp

roe

f

nv

t n

vt

2 pe

r bpe

n

vt

2 pe

r bpe

n

vt

Afm

etin

gen

nv

t m

in 1

per

bpe

n

vt

1 pe

r bpe

n

vt

1 pe

r bpe

V

erm

oeiin

g n

vt

nv

t 5

per j

aar

5 pe

r jaa

r 6

per b

pe 9)

5

per b

pe 10

)

1) The audit is always for each manufacturing process (hot-rolled-cooled -cold-stretched cold-profiles) of a certain type of reinforcing steel 2) If applicable (B500C) 3) Chemical composition + Ceq to be determined and submitted by the steel manufacturer not for each diameter (combination) 4) For bending mass and geometry surface + frfp min 1 per 150 tons 5) Can be determined for welding 6) Smallest largest and intermediate diameters (always skipping 2 consecutive diameters) of the range (deviating from EN 10080) 7) Always the most critical diameter combination that occurs 8) In a period of a maximum of 5 years number and spreading of diameters 9) For d le 28 mm the largest and middle diameters for gt 28 mm the largest diameter 10) The largest middle and smallest diameters Test unit is defined as -- barscoils the load or a part of the load (for bending mass and geometryprofile min 1 per 90 t) -- point welded reinforcement fabrics 50 tons of the same combination of reinforcing steel types and diameters manufactured with the same point welding machine

Annex IV Model for biannual reporting on reinforcing steel

Page 23: National Assessment Guideline - Kiwa · PDF fileThe NEN-EN 10080:2005 is not a harmonised standard and therefore a CE mark can not yet be attached to the products covered by this BRL

National Assessment Guideline BRL 0501 01 September 2010 copy Kiwa NV - -

22

Table 9 ndash Critical values of to

n to n to n to

10 103 11 096 12 090 13 085 14 080

15 077 16 074 17 071 18 068 19 066

20 064 25 056 30 050 35 047 40 043

If t gt to the hypothesis that there is no difference between the two series of paired measurements is rejected and so the cause of this must be found and eliminated This does not apply when sv and v are both below the reference values Sov and Vo in table 9 because of insufficient relevance

If t le to the hypothesis that there is no difference between the two series of paired measurements is not rejected The test can then be concluded unless Sv ge Sov In this case the standard deviation of the differences is excessive showing that the material concerned is unsuitable for the verification test Further investigation is then required

Table 10 ndash Reference values of Sov and Vo

sov vo 02 yield limit or flow limit 15 15 Tensile strength in MPa 15 20 Yield at maximum load in B500A B500B B500C

11 25 30

11 25 30

632 Attributive properties For the verification of attributive properties (mass per length chemical composition profiling bending test and if necessary a shearing test) the measurements of mass per length and profiling must be done in advance with the two series of at least 15 test pieces meant for the tensile test (see above) For the measurements of the bending test and shearing test (if applicable) the number of test pieces from the above described random samples must be extended with at least 5 test pieces for the bending test and if necessary the shearing test For the verification assessment of the chemical composition the number of test pieces is limited to a series of 3 test pieces from 3 test units Any combinations in the random samples of the above-mentioned verification assessments are allowed The test series at the manufacturerrsquos and the series of external tests (see above) should not produce other differences than those that can unambiguously be explained and eliminated

National Assessment Guideline BRL 0501 01 September 2010 copy Kiwa NV - -

23

7 Summary audit and inspection

Below a summary is provided of the tests to be performed for certification bull Initial audit the audit to determine whether all requirements in the BRL are met bull Inspection audit the audit performed after granting the certificate to determine whether

the certified products continuously meet the requirements set in the BRL Also indicates the frequency of the inspection audits to be performed by the certification institute (CI)

bull Inspection of the quality system inspection for compliance with the IQC schedule and the procedures

Here the frequency with which the certification institute must perform an inspection audit is indicated as well

Audit related to

Supervision by CI after granting the certificate1)

Requirement description Article BRL Initial audit

Inspection2) Frequency Product requirements bull Indication of product 2342 X X continuously bull Variable properties 4243 X X 34 x per year bull Chemical composition 4243 X X 34 x per year bull Bending test 42 X X 34 x per year bull Shearing test 42 X X 4 x per year bull Fatigue strength 4244 X X 1 x per year bull Geometry form 4243 X X 34 x per year bull Mass per unit 4243 X X 34 x per year bull Dimensions of fabricsbars 42 X X 34 x per year bull Bendndashbend back tensile

test 42 X X 3 x per year

Own testing laboratory bull Own laboratory 61 X X 1 x per year bull Outsourcing of tests 62 X X 34 x per year bull Verification audit 63 X X 1 x per 2 years System requirements bull IQC schedule 5 X X 34 x per year bull Quality mark 4647 X X 34 x per year

Table 11

1) In case of significant changes in the production process to be assessed by the CI the product requirements need to be tested again

2) The inspector or the certificate holder in the presence of the inspector will determine all product properties that can be performed within the visiting time (maximum 1 day) If this is not possible the CI and the certificate holder will make arrangements with respect to how the inspection will be performed

Inspection of the quality system The certification institute checks if the manufacturer meets the quality system requirements in chapter 5 of this BRL according to the frequency in article 86 of this BRL

National Assessment Guideline BRL 0501 01 September 2010 copy Kiwa NV - -

24

8 Requirements of de certification institute

81 General The certification institute must meet the requirements set out in EN 45011 Besides for the purpose of this BRL the institute must have been accredited by the Dutch Authority for Accreditation (RvA) or a similar body (an accreditation institute with which the RvA has entered into an agreement of mutual acceptance) The certification institute must have a set of regulations or a similar document defining the general rules to be observed during certification These particularly include bull The general rules for performance of the initial audit to be structured as follows

o The way in which suppliers are informed about the handling of a request o The performance of the audit o The decision based on the audit performed

bull The general rules concerning the performance of inspections and the inspection aspects used here

bull The measures the certification institute must take in case of defects bull The rules for terminating a certificate bull The possibility to make an appeal against decisions or measures of the certification

institute

82 Certification staff Staff involved in certification procedures include bull Auditors charged with performing the initial audit and assessing the reports of the

inspectors bull Inspectors charged with performing the external inspection at the supplierrsquos bull Decision-makers charged with taking decisions based on the initial audits performed

about continuation of certification based on inspections performed and about the necessity to take corrective measures

821 Qualification requirements A distinction is made with respect to 8211 Qualification requirements for the certification executives of a CI meeting the

requirements set out in EN 45011 8212 Supplementary qualification requirements for the certification executives of a CI as

determined by the Board of Experts for the subject of this BRL

National Assessment Guideline BRL 0501 01 September 2010 copy Kiwa NV - -

25

8211 Qualification requirements for the certification executives of a CI meeting the requirements set out in EN 45011

The qualification of the certification executives of a CI must comply with chapter 5 of EN 45011 The manual of the CI must describe how the qualification of the certification executives is performed

EN45011

Auditor

initial product assessment and assessment of the

production location

Inspector

assessment product location field and

projects after granting of certificate

Decision-maker

for granting and extending a certificate

Education General

Higher Vocational thinking and working level

Intermediate vocational working and thinking level

Higher Vocational thinking and working level

Education Specific

Basic training for auditing Basic training for auditing

Basic training for auditing

Experience General

1 year of relevant working experience with min 4 audits including 1 full initial audit done independently under supervision

1 year of relevant working experience with min 4 audits including 1 done independent under supervision

4 years of relevant working experience of which at least 1 year with respect to certification

Experience Specific

knowledge of BRL at detailed level and 4 audits related to the specific BRL or to similar BRLs

knowledge of BRL at detailed level and 4 audits related to the specific BRL or to similar BRLs

Basic knowledge of the specific certification schedule

8212 Supplementary qualification requirements for the certification executives of a CI as determined by the Board of Experts for the subject of this BRL

Certification staff Education Experience Auditor Higher vocational education level in one of the

following disciplines - Constructional engineering - Civil engineering - Mechanical engineering

2 years

Inspector Intermediate vocational education level in one of the following disciplines - ConstructionalCivil engineering - Materials science - Mechanical engineering

2 years

Decision-maker Higher vocational education level in one of the following disciplines - Constructional engineering - Civil engineering - Quality science - Mechanical engineering

4 years Managerial experience

822 Qualification Certification staff must be demonstrably qualified by comparing the education and experience with the requirements set out above If qualification takes place based on deviating criteria this must be laid down in writing The qualification authority is vested with

National Assessment Guideline BRL 0501 01 September 2010 copy Kiwa NV - -

26

bull Decision-makers qualification of auditors and inspectors bull Management of the certification institute qualification of decision-makers

83 Initial audit report The certification institute records the findings of the initial audit in a report The report must meet the following requirements bull Completeness the report makes a statement about all requirements set out in the

assessment guideline bull Traceability the findings the statement are based on must have been recorded in a

traceable way bull Basis for decision the decision-maker for granting a certificate must be able to base his

decision on the findings recorded in the report

84 Decision about granting the certificate The decision concerning the granting of the certificate must be made by a decision-maker who is qualified to do so and who has not been involved in the certificate audit himself The decision must have been recorded in a traceable way

85 Presentation of the quality statement The product certificate must be presented in conformity with the model included in the annex

86 Nature and frequency of external inspections The certification institute must regularly inspect the supplier for compliance with his obligations The Board of Experts will decide upon the frequency of the inspections At the time this assessment guideline took effect the frequency was set to bull 3 inspection visits per year at suppliers of hot-rolled products bull 4 inspection visits per year at suppliers of other products Inspections will in any case pertain to a number of matters including bull The product specifications laid down in the product specification bull The supplierrsquos production process bull The supplierrsquos IQC schedule and the results of the inspections performed by the supplier bull The correct way of marking the certified products bull Compliance with the required procedures The certification institute will lay down the findings of each inspection performed in a report in a traceable way

87 Reporting to the Board of Experts The certification institute must report on the certification activities performed at least once a year The report must include the following subjects bull Mutations in number of certificates (newlapsed) bull Number of inspections performed in relation to the determined frequency bull Inspection results bull Measures imposed in case of defects bull Complaints received from third parties with respect to certified products

88 Interpretation of requirements The Board of Experts may lay down the requirements set in this assessment guideline in a single separate interpretation document The certification institute is obliged to ensure whether an interpretation document has been drawn up and if so must make use of the interpretations laid down in this

89 Specific rules defined by the Board of Experts The Board of Experts has not defined specific rules that are to be followed with certification by the certification institute

National Assessment Guideline BRL 0501 01 September 2010 copy Kiwa NV - -

27

9 List of documents mentioned

91 Standardsnormative documents

NEN 6008 2008 Reinforcing steel NEN 6720 1995 Technical foundations for building constructions - TGB 1990 ndash

Regulations for concrete - TGB 1990 ndash Structural requirements and calculation methods (VBC 1995) September 1995 including amendment sheet A4 December 2007

NEN 6722 2002 Regulations for concrete ndash Execution December 2002 NEN 6723 1995 Regulations for concrete - Bridges ndash (VBB June 1995) Structural requirements

and calculation methods December 1995 including amendment sheet A1 December 2003

NEN-EN 1992 2005 Design of concrete structures NEN-EN 1994 2005 Design of composite steel and concrete structures NEN-EN 10002 2001 Metallic materials tensile testing - Part 1 Method of testing at ambient

temperature August 2001 NEN-EN 10080 2005 Steel for the reinforcement of concrete ndash Weldable reinforcing steel - General NEN-EN 10204 2004 Metallic products - Types of inspection documents October 2004 NEN-EN 45012 1998 General requirements for bodies operating assessment and

certificationregistration of quality systems NEN-EN-ISO 376 2004 Metallic materials - Calibration of force-proving instruments used for the

verification of uniaxial testing machines NEN-EN-ISO 7500-1 2004 Metallic materials - Verification of static uniaxial testing machines ndash

Part 1 Tensilecompression testing machines - Verification and calibration of the force-measuring system August 2004

NEN-EN-ISO 9513 2002 Metallic materials ndash Calibration of extensometers for uniaxial testing October 2002

NEN-EN-ISO 15630-1 2002 Steel for the reinforcement and prestressing of concrete - Test methods ndash Part 1 Reinforcing bars wire rod and wire June 2002

NEN-EN-ISO 15630-2 2002 Steel for the reinforcement and prestressing of concrete - Test methods ndash Part 2 Welded fabric

NEN-EN-ISOIEC 17020

2004 General criteria for the operation of various types of bodies performing inspection

NEN-EN-ISOIEC 17024

2003 Conformity assessment - General requirements for bodies operating certification of persons

NEN-EN-ISOIEC 17025

2005 General requirements for the competence of testing and calibration laboratories

ISO 3301 1975 Statistical interpretation of data ndash Comparison of two means in the case of paired observations

ISO 4965 1979 Axial load fatigue testing machines - Dynamic force calibration - Strain gauge technique April 1979

ISO 16269-6 2005 Statistical interpretation of data Determination of statistical tolerance intervals

Annex I Model certificate

Issued Replaces Issued date Valid until Indefinite Page 1 of 2

KOMOreg

Product certificate

ltName Productgt ltCertificate holdergt

STATEMENT OF CI This product certificate was issued on the basis of BRL lsquo lsquo in conformity with the regulations for Product Certification CI declares that the justifiable confidence exists that the name product supplied by the certificate holder meets the technical specifications laid down in this product certificate provided that name product has the KOMOreg mark as indicated in this product certificate Director CI Advice refer to wwwltCIgtnl to see if this certificate is valid

Certificate holder T F E I

Assessed Quality system Product

Periodic check

reg is a collective brand of Stichting Bouwkwaliteit

Annex II Model for IQC schedule or framework of IQC schedule

Subjects Aspects Method Frequency Registration

Basic materials or supplied materials bull Recipe sheets bull Inspection of incoming raw

materials bull Mechanical bull Chemical

Production process production equipment material bull Procedures bull Work instructions bull Equipment bull Material bull Process inspection

End products

Measuring and testing equipment

Measuring and testing equipment bull Measuring devices bull Calibration bull Outsourced tests

Logistics bull Internal transport bull Storage bull Packaging bull Preservation bull Identification or marking

of semi-finished and end products

Corrective measures Complaints handling

Annex III Sampling and testing overview

Type

on

derz

oek

1)

Doo

rlope

nd

inte

rn fa

brie

kson

derz

oek

Perio

diek

ex

tern

ond

erzo

ek (a

udit)

To

elat

ings

onde

rzoe

k

(type

onde

rzoe

k)

Type

bet

onst

aal

stav

enro

llen

per d

iam

eter

ge

punt

last

e w

apn

ette

n pe

r dia

-com

bina

tie

stav

enro

llen

3 bp

e va

n 1

diam

eter

8)

gepu

ntla

ste

wap

net

ten

3 bp

e va

n 1

dia-

com

bina

tie 7)

8)

stav

enro

llen

3 bp

e pe

r di

amet

er 6)

gepu

ntla

ste

wap

net

ten

3 bp

e pe

r dia

-co

mbi

natie

6) 7

) R

e 1

per 3

0 t

m

in 3

per

bpe

m

in 2

per

bpe

1

lang

s + d

war

s 5

per b

pe

5 pe

r bpe

3

lang

s + 2

dw

ars

10 p

er b

pe

10 p

er b

pe

5 la

ngs +

5 d

war

s R

mR

e id

em

idem

id

em

idem

id

em

idem

R

eac

tRe

nom

2)

idem

id

em

idem

id

em

idem

id

em

Agt

idem

id

em

idem

id

em

idem

id

em

Bui

gpro

ef

1 pe

r bpe

4)

idem

2

per b

pe

2 pe

r bpe

1

lang

s + 1

dw

ars

5 pe

r bpe

5

per b

pe

3 la

ngs +

2 d

war

s M

assa

per

m

idem

id

em 5)

id

em

idem

5)

idem

id

em 5)

G

eom

etrie

opp

en

pro

fielfa

ctor

id

em

idem

id

em

idem

id

em

Idem

Che

mis

che

sa

men

st +

Ceq

3)

1 pe

r lad

ing

1

per l

adin

g 1

per l

adin

g 1

per l

adin

g 1

per l

adin

g 1

per l

adin

g

Afs

chui

fpro

ef

nv

t m

in 2

per

bpe

n

vt

3 pe

r bpe

n

vt

3 pe

r bpe

B

uig-

te

rugb

uigt

rekp

roe

f

nv

t n

vt

2 pe

r bpe

n

vt

2 pe

r bpe

n

vt

Afm

etin

gen

nv

t m

in 1

per

bpe

n

vt

1 pe

r bpe

n

vt

1 pe

r bpe

V

erm

oeiin

g n

vt

nv

t 5

per j

aar

5 pe

r jaa

r 6

per b

pe 9)

5

per b

pe 10

)

1) The audit is always for each manufacturing process (hot-rolled-cooled -cold-stretched cold-profiles) of a certain type of reinforcing steel 2) If applicable (B500C) 3) Chemical composition + Ceq to be determined and submitted by the steel manufacturer not for each diameter (combination) 4) For bending mass and geometry surface + frfp min 1 per 150 tons 5) Can be determined for welding 6) Smallest largest and intermediate diameters (always skipping 2 consecutive diameters) of the range (deviating from EN 10080) 7) Always the most critical diameter combination that occurs 8) In a period of a maximum of 5 years number and spreading of diameters 9) For d le 28 mm the largest and middle diameters for gt 28 mm the largest diameter 10) The largest middle and smallest diameters Test unit is defined as -- barscoils the load or a part of the load (for bending mass and geometryprofile min 1 per 90 t) -- point welded reinforcement fabrics 50 tons of the same combination of reinforcing steel types and diameters manufactured with the same point welding machine

Annex IV Model for biannual reporting on reinforcing steel

Page 24: National Assessment Guideline - Kiwa · PDF fileThe NEN-EN 10080:2005 is not a harmonised standard and therefore a CE mark can not yet be attached to the products covered by this BRL

National Assessment Guideline BRL 0501 01 September 2010 copy Kiwa NV - -

23

7 Summary audit and inspection

Below a summary is provided of the tests to be performed for certification bull Initial audit the audit to determine whether all requirements in the BRL are met bull Inspection audit the audit performed after granting the certificate to determine whether

the certified products continuously meet the requirements set in the BRL Also indicates the frequency of the inspection audits to be performed by the certification institute (CI)

bull Inspection of the quality system inspection for compliance with the IQC schedule and the procedures

Here the frequency with which the certification institute must perform an inspection audit is indicated as well

Audit related to

Supervision by CI after granting the certificate1)

Requirement description Article BRL Initial audit

Inspection2) Frequency Product requirements bull Indication of product 2342 X X continuously bull Variable properties 4243 X X 34 x per year bull Chemical composition 4243 X X 34 x per year bull Bending test 42 X X 34 x per year bull Shearing test 42 X X 4 x per year bull Fatigue strength 4244 X X 1 x per year bull Geometry form 4243 X X 34 x per year bull Mass per unit 4243 X X 34 x per year bull Dimensions of fabricsbars 42 X X 34 x per year bull Bendndashbend back tensile

test 42 X X 3 x per year

Own testing laboratory bull Own laboratory 61 X X 1 x per year bull Outsourcing of tests 62 X X 34 x per year bull Verification audit 63 X X 1 x per 2 years System requirements bull IQC schedule 5 X X 34 x per year bull Quality mark 4647 X X 34 x per year

Table 11

1) In case of significant changes in the production process to be assessed by the CI the product requirements need to be tested again

2) The inspector or the certificate holder in the presence of the inspector will determine all product properties that can be performed within the visiting time (maximum 1 day) If this is not possible the CI and the certificate holder will make arrangements with respect to how the inspection will be performed

Inspection of the quality system The certification institute checks if the manufacturer meets the quality system requirements in chapter 5 of this BRL according to the frequency in article 86 of this BRL

National Assessment Guideline BRL 0501 01 September 2010 copy Kiwa NV - -

24

8 Requirements of de certification institute

81 General The certification institute must meet the requirements set out in EN 45011 Besides for the purpose of this BRL the institute must have been accredited by the Dutch Authority for Accreditation (RvA) or a similar body (an accreditation institute with which the RvA has entered into an agreement of mutual acceptance) The certification institute must have a set of regulations or a similar document defining the general rules to be observed during certification These particularly include bull The general rules for performance of the initial audit to be structured as follows

o The way in which suppliers are informed about the handling of a request o The performance of the audit o The decision based on the audit performed

bull The general rules concerning the performance of inspections and the inspection aspects used here

bull The measures the certification institute must take in case of defects bull The rules for terminating a certificate bull The possibility to make an appeal against decisions or measures of the certification

institute

82 Certification staff Staff involved in certification procedures include bull Auditors charged with performing the initial audit and assessing the reports of the

inspectors bull Inspectors charged with performing the external inspection at the supplierrsquos bull Decision-makers charged with taking decisions based on the initial audits performed

about continuation of certification based on inspections performed and about the necessity to take corrective measures

821 Qualification requirements A distinction is made with respect to 8211 Qualification requirements for the certification executives of a CI meeting the

requirements set out in EN 45011 8212 Supplementary qualification requirements for the certification executives of a CI as

determined by the Board of Experts for the subject of this BRL

National Assessment Guideline BRL 0501 01 September 2010 copy Kiwa NV - -

25

8211 Qualification requirements for the certification executives of a CI meeting the requirements set out in EN 45011

The qualification of the certification executives of a CI must comply with chapter 5 of EN 45011 The manual of the CI must describe how the qualification of the certification executives is performed

EN45011

Auditor

initial product assessment and assessment of the

production location

Inspector

assessment product location field and

projects after granting of certificate

Decision-maker

for granting and extending a certificate

Education General

Higher Vocational thinking and working level

Intermediate vocational working and thinking level

Higher Vocational thinking and working level

Education Specific

Basic training for auditing Basic training for auditing

Basic training for auditing

Experience General

1 year of relevant working experience with min 4 audits including 1 full initial audit done independently under supervision

1 year of relevant working experience with min 4 audits including 1 done independent under supervision

4 years of relevant working experience of which at least 1 year with respect to certification

Experience Specific

knowledge of BRL at detailed level and 4 audits related to the specific BRL or to similar BRLs

knowledge of BRL at detailed level and 4 audits related to the specific BRL or to similar BRLs

Basic knowledge of the specific certification schedule

8212 Supplementary qualification requirements for the certification executives of a CI as determined by the Board of Experts for the subject of this BRL

Certification staff Education Experience Auditor Higher vocational education level in one of the

following disciplines - Constructional engineering - Civil engineering - Mechanical engineering

2 years

Inspector Intermediate vocational education level in one of the following disciplines - ConstructionalCivil engineering - Materials science - Mechanical engineering

2 years

Decision-maker Higher vocational education level in one of the following disciplines - Constructional engineering - Civil engineering - Quality science - Mechanical engineering

4 years Managerial experience

822 Qualification Certification staff must be demonstrably qualified by comparing the education and experience with the requirements set out above If qualification takes place based on deviating criteria this must be laid down in writing The qualification authority is vested with

National Assessment Guideline BRL 0501 01 September 2010 copy Kiwa NV - -

26

bull Decision-makers qualification of auditors and inspectors bull Management of the certification institute qualification of decision-makers

83 Initial audit report The certification institute records the findings of the initial audit in a report The report must meet the following requirements bull Completeness the report makes a statement about all requirements set out in the

assessment guideline bull Traceability the findings the statement are based on must have been recorded in a

traceable way bull Basis for decision the decision-maker for granting a certificate must be able to base his

decision on the findings recorded in the report

84 Decision about granting the certificate The decision concerning the granting of the certificate must be made by a decision-maker who is qualified to do so and who has not been involved in the certificate audit himself The decision must have been recorded in a traceable way

85 Presentation of the quality statement The product certificate must be presented in conformity with the model included in the annex

86 Nature and frequency of external inspections The certification institute must regularly inspect the supplier for compliance with his obligations The Board of Experts will decide upon the frequency of the inspections At the time this assessment guideline took effect the frequency was set to bull 3 inspection visits per year at suppliers of hot-rolled products bull 4 inspection visits per year at suppliers of other products Inspections will in any case pertain to a number of matters including bull The product specifications laid down in the product specification bull The supplierrsquos production process bull The supplierrsquos IQC schedule and the results of the inspections performed by the supplier bull The correct way of marking the certified products bull Compliance with the required procedures The certification institute will lay down the findings of each inspection performed in a report in a traceable way

87 Reporting to the Board of Experts The certification institute must report on the certification activities performed at least once a year The report must include the following subjects bull Mutations in number of certificates (newlapsed) bull Number of inspections performed in relation to the determined frequency bull Inspection results bull Measures imposed in case of defects bull Complaints received from third parties with respect to certified products

88 Interpretation of requirements The Board of Experts may lay down the requirements set in this assessment guideline in a single separate interpretation document The certification institute is obliged to ensure whether an interpretation document has been drawn up and if so must make use of the interpretations laid down in this

89 Specific rules defined by the Board of Experts The Board of Experts has not defined specific rules that are to be followed with certification by the certification institute

National Assessment Guideline BRL 0501 01 September 2010 copy Kiwa NV - -

27

9 List of documents mentioned

91 Standardsnormative documents

NEN 6008 2008 Reinforcing steel NEN 6720 1995 Technical foundations for building constructions - TGB 1990 ndash

Regulations for concrete - TGB 1990 ndash Structural requirements and calculation methods (VBC 1995) September 1995 including amendment sheet A4 December 2007

NEN 6722 2002 Regulations for concrete ndash Execution December 2002 NEN 6723 1995 Regulations for concrete - Bridges ndash (VBB June 1995) Structural requirements

and calculation methods December 1995 including amendment sheet A1 December 2003

NEN-EN 1992 2005 Design of concrete structures NEN-EN 1994 2005 Design of composite steel and concrete structures NEN-EN 10002 2001 Metallic materials tensile testing - Part 1 Method of testing at ambient

temperature August 2001 NEN-EN 10080 2005 Steel for the reinforcement of concrete ndash Weldable reinforcing steel - General NEN-EN 10204 2004 Metallic products - Types of inspection documents October 2004 NEN-EN 45012 1998 General requirements for bodies operating assessment and

certificationregistration of quality systems NEN-EN-ISO 376 2004 Metallic materials - Calibration of force-proving instruments used for the

verification of uniaxial testing machines NEN-EN-ISO 7500-1 2004 Metallic materials - Verification of static uniaxial testing machines ndash

Part 1 Tensilecompression testing machines - Verification and calibration of the force-measuring system August 2004

NEN-EN-ISO 9513 2002 Metallic materials ndash Calibration of extensometers for uniaxial testing October 2002

NEN-EN-ISO 15630-1 2002 Steel for the reinforcement and prestressing of concrete - Test methods ndash Part 1 Reinforcing bars wire rod and wire June 2002

NEN-EN-ISO 15630-2 2002 Steel for the reinforcement and prestressing of concrete - Test methods ndash Part 2 Welded fabric

NEN-EN-ISOIEC 17020

2004 General criteria for the operation of various types of bodies performing inspection

NEN-EN-ISOIEC 17024

2003 Conformity assessment - General requirements for bodies operating certification of persons

NEN-EN-ISOIEC 17025

2005 General requirements for the competence of testing and calibration laboratories

ISO 3301 1975 Statistical interpretation of data ndash Comparison of two means in the case of paired observations

ISO 4965 1979 Axial load fatigue testing machines - Dynamic force calibration - Strain gauge technique April 1979

ISO 16269-6 2005 Statistical interpretation of data Determination of statistical tolerance intervals

Annex I Model certificate

Issued Replaces Issued date Valid until Indefinite Page 1 of 2

KOMOreg

Product certificate

ltName Productgt ltCertificate holdergt

STATEMENT OF CI This product certificate was issued on the basis of BRL lsquo lsquo in conformity with the regulations for Product Certification CI declares that the justifiable confidence exists that the name product supplied by the certificate holder meets the technical specifications laid down in this product certificate provided that name product has the KOMOreg mark as indicated in this product certificate Director CI Advice refer to wwwltCIgtnl to see if this certificate is valid

Certificate holder T F E I

Assessed Quality system Product

Periodic check

reg is a collective brand of Stichting Bouwkwaliteit

Annex II Model for IQC schedule or framework of IQC schedule

Subjects Aspects Method Frequency Registration

Basic materials or supplied materials bull Recipe sheets bull Inspection of incoming raw

materials bull Mechanical bull Chemical

Production process production equipment material bull Procedures bull Work instructions bull Equipment bull Material bull Process inspection

End products

Measuring and testing equipment

Measuring and testing equipment bull Measuring devices bull Calibration bull Outsourced tests

Logistics bull Internal transport bull Storage bull Packaging bull Preservation bull Identification or marking

of semi-finished and end products

Corrective measures Complaints handling

Annex III Sampling and testing overview

Type

on

derz

oek

1)

Doo

rlope

nd

inte

rn fa

brie

kson

derz

oek

Perio

diek

ex

tern

ond

erzo

ek (a

udit)

To

elat

ings

onde

rzoe

k

(type

onde

rzoe

k)

Type

bet

onst

aal

stav

enro

llen

per d

iam

eter

ge

punt

last

e w

apn

ette

n pe

r dia

-com

bina

tie

stav

enro

llen

3 bp

e va

n 1

diam

eter

8)

gepu

ntla

ste

wap

net

ten

3 bp

e va

n 1

dia-

com

bina

tie 7)

8)

stav

enro

llen

3 bp

e pe

r di

amet

er 6)

gepu

ntla

ste

wap

net

ten

3 bp

e pe

r dia

-co

mbi

natie

6) 7

) R

e 1

per 3

0 t

m

in 3

per

bpe

m

in 2

per

bpe

1

lang

s + d

war

s 5

per b

pe

5 pe

r bpe

3

lang

s + 2

dw

ars

10 p

er b

pe

10 p

er b

pe

5 la

ngs +

5 d

war

s R

mR

e id

em

idem

id

em

idem

id

em

idem

R

eac

tRe

nom

2)

idem

id

em

idem

id

em

idem

id

em

Agt

idem

id

em

idem

id

em

idem

id

em

Bui

gpro

ef

1 pe

r bpe

4)

idem

2

per b

pe

2 pe

r bpe

1

lang

s + 1

dw

ars

5 pe

r bpe

5

per b

pe

3 la

ngs +

2 d

war

s M

assa

per

m

idem

id

em 5)

id

em

idem

5)

idem

id

em 5)

G

eom

etrie

opp

en

pro

fielfa

ctor

id

em

idem

id

em

idem

id

em

Idem

Che

mis

che

sa

men

st +

Ceq

3)

1 pe

r lad

ing

1

per l

adin

g 1

per l

adin

g 1

per l

adin

g 1

per l

adin

g 1

per l

adin

g

Afs

chui

fpro

ef

nv

t m

in 2

per

bpe

n

vt

3 pe

r bpe

n

vt

3 pe

r bpe

B

uig-

te

rugb

uigt

rekp

roe

f

nv

t n

vt

2 pe

r bpe

n

vt

2 pe

r bpe

n

vt

Afm

etin

gen

nv

t m

in 1

per

bpe

n

vt

1 pe

r bpe

n

vt

1 pe

r bpe

V

erm

oeiin

g n

vt

nv

t 5

per j

aar

5 pe

r jaa

r 6

per b

pe 9)

5

per b

pe 10

)

1) The audit is always for each manufacturing process (hot-rolled-cooled -cold-stretched cold-profiles) of a certain type of reinforcing steel 2) If applicable (B500C) 3) Chemical composition + Ceq to be determined and submitted by the steel manufacturer not for each diameter (combination) 4) For bending mass and geometry surface + frfp min 1 per 150 tons 5) Can be determined for welding 6) Smallest largest and intermediate diameters (always skipping 2 consecutive diameters) of the range (deviating from EN 10080) 7) Always the most critical diameter combination that occurs 8) In a period of a maximum of 5 years number and spreading of diameters 9) For d le 28 mm the largest and middle diameters for gt 28 mm the largest diameter 10) The largest middle and smallest diameters Test unit is defined as -- barscoils the load or a part of the load (for bending mass and geometryprofile min 1 per 90 t) -- point welded reinforcement fabrics 50 tons of the same combination of reinforcing steel types and diameters manufactured with the same point welding machine

Annex IV Model for biannual reporting on reinforcing steel

Page 25: National Assessment Guideline - Kiwa · PDF fileThe NEN-EN 10080:2005 is not a harmonised standard and therefore a CE mark can not yet be attached to the products covered by this BRL

National Assessment Guideline BRL 0501 01 September 2010 copy Kiwa NV - -

24

8 Requirements of de certification institute

81 General The certification institute must meet the requirements set out in EN 45011 Besides for the purpose of this BRL the institute must have been accredited by the Dutch Authority for Accreditation (RvA) or a similar body (an accreditation institute with which the RvA has entered into an agreement of mutual acceptance) The certification institute must have a set of regulations or a similar document defining the general rules to be observed during certification These particularly include bull The general rules for performance of the initial audit to be structured as follows

o The way in which suppliers are informed about the handling of a request o The performance of the audit o The decision based on the audit performed

bull The general rules concerning the performance of inspections and the inspection aspects used here

bull The measures the certification institute must take in case of defects bull The rules for terminating a certificate bull The possibility to make an appeal against decisions or measures of the certification

institute

82 Certification staff Staff involved in certification procedures include bull Auditors charged with performing the initial audit and assessing the reports of the

inspectors bull Inspectors charged with performing the external inspection at the supplierrsquos bull Decision-makers charged with taking decisions based on the initial audits performed

about continuation of certification based on inspections performed and about the necessity to take corrective measures

821 Qualification requirements A distinction is made with respect to 8211 Qualification requirements for the certification executives of a CI meeting the

requirements set out in EN 45011 8212 Supplementary qualification requirements for the certification executives of a CI as

determined by the Board of Experts for the subject of this BRL

National Assessment Guideline BRL 0501 01 September 2010 copy Kiwa NV - -

25

8211 Qualification requirements for the certification executives of a CI meeting the requirements set out in EN 45011

The qualification of the certification executives of a CI must comply with chapter 5 of EN 45011 The manual of the CI must describe how the qualification of the certification executives is performed

EN45011

Auditor

initial product assessment and assessment of the

production location

Inspector

assessment product location field and

projects after granting of certificate

Decision-maker

for granting and extending a certificate

Education General

Higher Vocational thinking and working level

Intermediate vocational working and thinking level

Higher Vocational thinking and working level

Education Specific

Basic training for auditing Basic training for auditing

Basic training for auditing

Experience General

1 year of relevant working experience with min 4 audits including 1 full initial audit done independently under supervision

1 year of relevant working experience with min 4 audits including 1 done independent under supervision

4 years of relevant working experience of which at least 1 year with respect to certification

Experience Specific

knowledge of BRL at detailed level and 4 audits related to the specific BRL or to similar BRLs

knowledge of BRL at detailed level and 4 audits related to the specific BRL or to similar BRLs

Basic knowledge of the specific certification schedule

8212 Supplementary qualification requirements for the certification executives of a CI as determined by the Board of Experts for the subject of this BRL

Certification staff Education Experience Auditor Higher vocational education level in one of the

following disciplines - Constructional engineering - Civil engineering - Mechanical engineering

2 years

Inspector Intermediate vocational education level in one of the following disciplines - ConstructionalCivil engineering - Materials science - Mechanical engineering

2 years

Decision-maker Higher vocational education level in one of the following disciplines - Constructional engineering - Civil engineering - Quality science - Mechanical engineering

4 years Managerial experience

822 Qualification Certification staff must be demonstrably qualified by comparing the education and experience with the requirements set out above If qualification takes place based on deviating criteria this must be laid down in writing The qualification authority is vested with

National Assessment Guideline BRL 0501 01 September 2010 copy Kiwa NV - -

26

bull Decision-makers qualification of auditors and inspectors bull Management of the certification institute qualification of decision-makers

83 Initial audit report The certification institute records the findings of the initial audit in a report The report must meet the following requirements bull Completeness the report makes a statement about all requirements set out in the

assessment guideline bull Traceability the findings the statement are based on must have been recorded in a

traceable way bull Basis for decision the decision-maker for granting a certificate must be able to base his

decision on the findings recorded in the report

84 Decision about granting the certificate The decision concerning the granting of the certificate must be made by a decision-maker who is qualified to do so and who has not been involved in the certificate audit himself The decision must have been recorded in a traceable way

85 Presentation of the quality statement The product certificate must be presented in conformity with the model included in the annex

86 Nature and frequency of external inspections The certification institute must regularly inspect the supplier for compliance with his obligations The Board of Experts will decide upon the frequency of the inspections At the time this assessment guideline took effect the frequency was set to bull 3 inspection visits per year at suppliers of hot-rolled products bull 4 inspection visits per year at suppliers of other products Inspections will in any case pertain to a number of matters including bull The product specifications laid down in the product specification bull The supplierrsquos production process bull The supplierrsquos IQC schedule and the results of the inspections performed by the supplier bull The correct way of marking the certified products bull Compliance with the required procedures The certification institute will lay down the findings of each inspection performed in a report in a traceable way

87 Reporting to the Board of Experts The certification institute must report on the certification activities performed at least once a year The report must include the following subjects bull Mutations in number of certificates (newlapsed) bull Number of inspections performed in relation to the determined frequency bull Inspection results bull Measures imposed in case of defects bull Complaints received from third parties with respect to certified products

88 Interpretation of requirements The Board of Experts may lay down the requirements set in this assessment guideline in a single separate interpretation document The certification institute is obliged to ensure whether an interpretation document has been drawn up and if so must make use of the interpretations laid down in this

89 Specific rules defined by the Board of Experts The Board of Experts has not defined specific rules that are to be followed with certification by the certification institute

National Assessment Guideline BRL 0501 01 September 2010 copy Kiwa NV - -

27

9 List of documents mentioned

91 Standardsnormative documents

NEN 6008 2008 Reinforcing steel NEN 6720 1995 Technical foundations for building constructions - TGB 1990 ndash

Regulations for concrete - TGB 1990 ndash Structural requirements and calculation methods (VBC 1995) September 1995 including amendment sheet A4 December 2007

NEN 6722 2002 Regulations for concrete ndash Execution December 2002 NEN 6723 1995 Regulations for concrete - Bridges ndash (VBB June 1995) Structural requirements

and calculation methods December 1995 including amendment sheet A1 December 2003

NEN-EN 1992 2005 Design of concrete structures NEN-EN 1994 2005 Design of composite steel and concrete structures NEN-EN 10002 2001 Metallic materials tensile testing - Part 1 Method of testing at ambient

temperature August 2001 NEN-EN 10080 2005 Steel for the reinforcement of concrete ndash Weldable reinforcing steel - General NEN-EN 10204 2004 Metallic products - Types of inspection documents October 2004 NEN-EN 45012 1998 General requirements for bodies operating assessment and

certificationregistration of quality systems NEN-EN-ISO 376 2004 Metallic materials - Calibration of force-proving instruments used for the

verification of uniaxial testing machines NEN-EN-ISO 7500-1 2004 Metallic materials - Verification of static uniaxial testing machines ndash

Part 1 Tensilecompression testing machines - Verification and calibration of the force-measuring system August 2004

NEN-EN-ISO 9513 2002 Metallic materials ndash Calibration of extensometers for uniaxial testing October 2002

NEN-EN-ISO 15630-1 2002 Steel for the reinforcement and prestressing of concrete - Test methods ndash Part 1 Reinforcing bars wire rod and wire June 2002

NEN-EN-ISO 15630-2 2002 Steel for the reinforcement and prestressing of concrete - Test methods ndash Part 2 Welded fabric

NEN-EN-ISOIEC 17020

2004 General criteria for the operation of various types of bodies performing inspection

NEN-EN-ISOIEC 17024

2003 Conformity assessment - General requirements for bodies operating certification of persons

NEN-EN-ISOIEC 17025

2005 General requirements for the competence of testing and calibration laboratories

ISO 3301 1975 Statistical interpretation of data ndash Comparison of two means in the case of paired observations

ISO 4965 1979 Axial load fatigue testing machines - Dynamic force calibration - Strain gauge technique April 1979

ISO 16269-6 2005 Statistical interpretation of data Determination of statistical tolerance intervals

Annex I Model certificate

Issued Replaces Issued date Valid until Indefinite Page 1 of 2

KOMOreg

Product certificate

ltName Productgt ltCertificate holdergt

STATEMENT OF CI This product certificate was issued on the basis of BRL lsquo lsquo in conformity with the regulations for Product Certification CI declares that the justifiable confidence exists that the name product supplied by the certificate holder meets the technical specifications laid down in this product certificate provided that name product has the KOMOreg mark as indicated in this product certificate Director CI Advice refer to wwwltCIgtnl to see if this certificate is valid

Certificate holder T F E I

Assessed Quality system Product

Periodic check

reg is a collective brand of Stichting Bouwkwaliteit

Annex II Model for IQC schedule or framework of IQC schedule

Subjects Aspects Method Frequency Registration

Basic materials or supplied materials bull Recipe sheets bull Inspection of incoming raw

materials bull Mechanical bull Chemical

Production process production equipment material bull Procedures bull Work instructions bull Equipment bull Material bull Process inspection

End products

Measuring and testing equipment

Measuring and testing equipment bull Measuring devices bull Calibration bull Outsourced tests

Logistics bull Internal transport bull Storage bull Packaging bull Preservation bull Identification or marking

of semi-finished and end products

Corrective measures Complaints handling

Annex III Sampling and testing overview

Type

on

derz

oek

1)

Doo

rlope

nd

inte

rn fa

brie

kson

derz

oek

Perio

diek

ex

tern

ond

erzo

ek (a

udit)

To

elat

ings

onde

rzoe

k

(type

onde

rzoe

k)

Type

bet

onst

aal

stav

enro

llen

per d

iam

eter

ge

punt

last

e w

apn

ette

n pe

r dia

-com

bina

tie

stav

enro

llen

3 bp

e va

n 1

diam

eter

8)

gepu

ntla

ste

wap

net

ten

3 bp

e va

n 1

dia-

com

bina

tie 7)

8)

stav

enro

llen

3 bp

e pe

r di

amet

er 6)

gepu

ntla

ste

wap

net

ten

3 bp

e pe

r dia

-co

mbi

natie

6) 7

) R

e 1

per 3

0 t

m

in 3

per

bpe

m

in 2

per

bpe

1

lang

s + d

war

s 5

per b

pe

5 pe

r bpe

3

lang

s + 2

dw

ars

10 p

er b

pe

10 p

er b

pe

5 la

ngs +

5 d

war

s R

mR

e id

em

idem

id

em

idem

id

em

idem

R

eac

tRe

nom

2)

idem

id

em

idem

id

em

idem

id

em

Agt

idem

id

em

idem

id

em

idem

id

em

Bui

gpro

ef

1 pe

r bpe

4)

idem

2

per b

pe

2 pe

r bpe

1

lang

s + 1

dw

ars

5 pe

r bpe

5

per b

pe

3 la

ngs +

2 d

war

s M

assa

per

m

idem

id

em 5)

id

em

idem

5)

idem

id

em 5)

G

eom

etrie

opp

en

pro

fielfa

ctor

id

em

idem

id

em

idem

id

em

Idem

Che

mis

che

sa

men

st +

Ceq

3)

1 pe

r lad

ing

1

per l

adin

g 1

per l

adin

g 1

per l

adin

g 1

per l

adin

g 1

per l

adin

g

Afs

chui

fpro

ef

nv

t m

in 2

per

bpe

n

vt

3 pe

r bpe

n

vt

3 pe

r bpe

B

uig-

te

rugb

uigt

rekp

roe

f

nv

t n

vt

2 pe

r bpe

n

vt

2 pe

r bpe

n

vt

Afm

etin

gen

nv

t m

in 1

per

bpe

n

vt

1 pe

r bpe

n

vt

1 pe

r bpe

V

erm

oeiin

g n

vt

nv

t 5

per j

aar

5 pe

r jaa

r 6

per b

pe 9)

5

per b

pe 10

)

1) The audit is always for each manufacturing process (hot-rolled-cooled -cold-stretched cold-profiles) of a certain type of reinforcing steel 2) If applicable (B500C) 3) Chemical composition + Ceq to be determined and submitted by the steel manufacturer not for each diameter (combination) 4) For bending mass and geometry surface + frfp min 1 per 150 tons 5) Can be determined for welding 6) Smallest largest and intermediate diameters (always skipping 2 consecutive diameters) of the range (deviating from EN 10080) 7) Always the most critical diameter combination that occurs 8) In a period of a maximum of 5 years number and spreading of diameters 9) For d le 28 mm the largest and middle diameters for gt 28 mm the largest diameter 10) The largest middle and smallest diameters Test unit is defined as -- barscoils the load or a part of the load (for bending mass and geometryprofile min 1 per 90 t) -- point welded reinforcement fabrics 50 tons of the same combination of reinforcing steel types and diameters manufactured with the same point welding machine

Annex IV Model for biannual reporting on reinforcing steel

Page 26: National Assessment Guideline - Kiwa · PDF fileThe NEN-EN 10080:2005 is not a harmonised standard and therefore a CE mark can not yet be attached to the products covered by this BRL

National Assessment Guideline BRL 0501 01 September 2010 copy Kiwa NV - -

25

8211 Qualification requirements for the certification executives of a CI meeting the requirements set out in EN 45011

The qualification of the certification executives of a CI must comply with chapter 5 of EN 45011 The manual of the CI must describe how the qualification of the certification executives is performed

EN45011

Auditor

initial product assessment and assessment of the

production location

Inspector

assessment product location field and

projects after granting of certificate

Decision-maker

for granting and extending a certificate

Education General

Higher Vocational thinking and working level

Intermediate vocational working and thinking level

Higher Vocational thinking and working level

Education Specific

Basic training for auditing Basic training for auditing

Basic training for auditing

Experience General

1 year of relevant working experience with min 4 audits including 1 full initial audit done independently under supervision

1 year of relevant working experience with min 4 audits including 1 done independent under supervision

4 years of relevant working experience of which at least 1 year with respect to certification

Experience Specific

knowledge of BRL at detailed level and 4 audits related to the specific BRL or to similar BRLs

knowledge of BRL at detailed level and 4 audits related to the specific BRL or to similar BRLs

Basic knowledge of the specific certification schedule

8212 Supplementary qualification requirements for the certification executives of a CI as determined by the Board of Experts for the subject of this BRL

Certification staff Education Experience Auditor Higher vocational education level in one of the

following disciplines - Constructional engineering - Civil engineering - Mechanical engineering

2 years

Inspector Intermediate vocational education level in one of the following disciplines - ConstructionalCivil engineering - Materials science - Mechanical engineering

2 years

Decision-maker Higher vocational education level in one of the following disciplines - Constructional engineering - Civil engineering - Quality science - Mechanical engineering

4 years Managerial experience

822 Qualification Certification staff must be demonstrably qualified by comparing the education and experience with the requirements set out above If qualification takes place based on deviating criteria this must be laid down in writing The qualification authority is vested with

National Assessment Guideline BRL 0501 01 September 2010 copy Kiwa NV - -

26

bull Decision-makers qualification of auditors and inspectors bull Management of the certification institute qualification of decision-makers

83 Initial audit report The certification institute records the findings of the initial audit in a report The report must meet the following requirements bull Completeness the report makes a statement about all requirements set out in the

assessment guideline bull Traceability the findings the statement are based on must have been recorded in a

traceable way bull Basis for decision the decision-maker for granting a certificate must be able to base his

decision on the findings recorded in the report

84 Decision about granting the certificate The decision concerning the granting of the certificate must be made by a decision-maker who is qualified to do so and who has not been involved in the certificate audit himself The decision must have been recorded in a traceable way

85 Presentation of the quality statement The product certificate must be presented in conformity with the model included in the annex

86 Nature and frequency of external inspections The certification institute must regularly inspect the supplier for compliance with his obligations The Board of Experts will decide upon the frequency of the inspections At the time this assessment guideline took effect the frequency was set to bull 3 inspection visits per year at suppliers of hot-rolled products bull 4 inspection visits per year at suppliers of other products Inspections will in any case pertain to a number of matters including bull The product specifications laid down in the product specification bull The supplierrsquos production process bull The supplierrsquos IQC schedule and the results of the inspections performed by the supplier bull The correct way of marking the certified products bull Compliance with the required procedures The certification institute will lay down the findings of each inspection performed in a report in a traceable way

87 Reporting to the Board of Experts The certification institute must report on the certification activities performed at least once a year The report must include the following subjects bull Mutations in number of certificates (newlapsed) bull Number of inspections performed in relation to the determined frequency bull Inspection results bull Measures imposed in case of defects bull Complaints received from third parties with respect to certified products

88 Interpretation of requirements The Board of Experts may lay down the requirements set in this assessment guideline in a single separate interpretation document The certification institute is obliged to ensure whether an interpretation document has been drawn up and if so must make use of the interpretations laid down in this

89 Specific rules defined by the Board of Experts The Board of Experts has not defined specific rules that are to be followed with certification by the certification institute

National Assessment Guideline BRL 0501 01 September 2010 copy Kiwa NV - -

27

9 List of documents mentioned

91 Standardsnormative documents

NEN 6008 2008 Reinforcing steel NEN 6720 1995 Technical foundations for building constructions - TGB 1990 ndash

Regulations for concrete - TGB 1990 ndash Structural requirements and calculation methods (VBC 1995) September 1995 including amendment sheet A4 December 2007

NEN 6722 2002 Regulations for concrete ndash Execution December 2002 NEN 6723 1995 Regulations for concrete - Bridges ndash (VBB June 1995) Structural requirements

and calculation methods December 1995 including amendment sheet A1 December 2003

NEN-EN 1992 2005 Design of concrete structures NEN-EN 1994 2005 Design of composite steel and concrete structures NEN-EN 10002 2001 Metallic materials tensile testing - Part 1 Method of testing at ambient

temperature August 2001 NEN-EN 10080 2005 Steel for the reinforcement of concrete ndash Weldable reinforcing steel - General NEN-EN 10204 2004 Metallic products - Types of inspection documents October 2004 NEN-EN 45012 1998 General requirements for bodies operating assessment and

certificationregistration of quality systems NEN-EN-ISO 376 2004 Metallic materials - Calibration of force-proving instruments used for the

verification of uniaxial testing machines NEN-EN-ISO 7500-1 2004 Metallic materials - Verification of static uniaxial testing machines ndash

Part 1 Tensilecompression testing machines - Verification and calibration of the force-measuring system August 2004

NEN-EN-ISO 9513 2002 Metallic materials ndash Calibration of extensometers for uniaxial testing October 2002

NEN-EN-ISO 15630-1 2002 Steel for the reinforcement and prestressing of concrete - Test methods ndash Part 1 Reinforcing bars wire rod and wire June 2002

NEN-EN-ISO 15630-2 2002 Steel for the reinforcement and prestressing of concrete - Test methods ndash Part 2 Welded fabric

NEN-EN-ISOIEC 17020

2004 General criteria for the operation of various types of bodies performing inspection

NEN-EN-ISOIEC 17024

2003 Conformity assessment - General requirements for bodies operating certification of persons

NEN-EN-ISOIEC 17025

2005 General requirements for the competence of testing and calibration laboratories

ISO 3301 1975 Statistical interpretation of data ndash Comparison of two means in the case of paired observations

ISO 4965 1979 Axial load fatigue testing machines - Dynamic force calibration - Strain gauge technique April 1979

ISO 16269-6 2005 Statistical interpretation of data Determination of statistical tolerance intervals

Annex I Model certificate

Issued Replaces Issued date Valid until Indefinite Page 1 of 2

KOMOreg

Product certificate

ltName Productgt ltCertificate holdergt

STATEMENT OF CI This product certificate was issued on the basis of BRL lsquo lsquo in conformity with the regulations for Product Certification CI declares that the justifiable confidence exists that the name product supplied by the certificate holder meets the technical specifications laid down in this product certificate provided that name product has the KOMOreg mark as indicated in this product certificate Director CI Advice refer to wwwltCIgtnl to see if this certificate is valid

Certificate holder T F E I

Assessed Quality system Product

Periodic check

reg is a collective brand of Stichting Bouwkwaliteit

Annex II Model for IQC schedule or framework of IQC schedule

Subjects Aspects Method Frequency Registration

Basic materials or supplied materials bull Recipe sheets bull Inspection of incoming raw

materials bull Mechanical bull Chemical

Production process production equipment material bull Procedures bull Work instructions bull Equipment bull Material bull Process inspection

End products

Measuring and testing equipment

Measuring and testing equipment bull Measuring devices bull Calibration bull Outsourced tests

Logistics bull Internal transport bull Storage bull Packaging bull Preservation bull Identification or marking

of semi-finished and end products

Corrective measures Complaints handling

Annex III Sampling and testing overview

Type

on

derz

oek

1)

Doo

rlope

nd

inte

rn fa

brie

kson

derz

oek

Perio

diek

ex

tern

ond

erzo

ek (a

udit)

To

elat

ings

onde

rzoe

k

(type

onde

rzoe

k)

Type

bet

onst

aal

stav

enro

llen

per d

iam

eter

ge

punt

last

e w

apn

ette

n pe

r dia

-com

bina

tie

stav

enro

llen

3 bp

e va

n 1

diam

eter

8)

gepu

ntla

ste

wap

net

ten

3 bp

e va

n 1

dia-

com

bina

tie 7)

8)

stav

enro

llen

3 bp

e pe

r di

amet

er 6)

gepu

ntla

ste

wap

net

ten

3 bp

e pe

r dia

-co

mbi

natie

6) 7

) R

e 1

per 3

0 t

m

in 3

per

bpe

m

in 2

per

bpe

1

lang

s + d

war

s 5

per b

pe

5 pe

r bpe

3

lang

s + 2

dw

ars

10 p

er b

pe

10 p

er b

pe

5 la

ngs +

5 d

war

s R

mR

e id

em

idem

id

em

idem

id

em

idem

R

eac

tRe

nom

2)

idem

id

em

idem

id

em

idem

id

em

Agt

idem

id

em

idem

id

em

idem

id

em

Bui

gpro

ef

1 pe

r bpe

4)

idem

2

per b

pe

2 pe

r bpe

1

lang

s + 1

dw

ars

5 pe

r bpe

5

per b

pe

3 la

ngs +

2 d

war

s M

assa

per

m

idem

id

em 5)

id

em

idem

5)

idem

id

em 5)

G

eom

etrie

opp

en

pro

fielfa

ctor

id

em

idem

id

em

idem

id

em

Idem

Che

mis

che

sa

men

st +

Ceq

3)

1 pe

r lad

ing

1

per l

adin

g 1

per l

adin

g 1

per l

adin

g 1

per l

adin

g 1

per l

adin

g

Afs

chui

fpro

ef

nv

t m

in 2

per

bpe

n

vt

3 pe

r bpe

n

vt

3 pe

r bpe

B

uig-

te

rugb

uigt

rekp

roe

f

nv

t n

vt

2 pe

r bpe

n

vt

2 pe

r bpe

n

vt

Afm

etin

gen

nv

t m

in 1

per

bpe

n

vt

1 pe

r bpe

n

vt

1 pe

r bpe

V

erm

oeiin

g n

vt

nv

t 5

per j

aar

5 pe

r jaa

r 6

per b

pe 9)

5

per b

pe 10

)

1) The audit is always for each manufacturing process (hot-rolled-cooled -cold-stretched cold-profiles) of a certain type of reinforcing steel 2) If applicable (B500C) 3) Chemical composition + Ceq to be determined and submitted by the steel manufacturer not for each diameter (combination) 4) For bending mass and geometry surface + frfp min 1 per 150 tons 5) Can be determined for welding 6) Smallest largest and intermediate diameters (always skipping 2 consecutive diameters) of the range (deviating from EN 10080) 7) Always the most critical diameter combination that occurs 8) In a period of a maximum of 5 years number and spreading of diameters 9) For d le 28 mm the largest and middle diameters for gt 28 mm the largest diameter 10) The largest middle and smallest diameters Test unit is defined as -- barscoils the load or a part of the load (for bending mass and geometryprofile min 1 per 90 t) -- point welded reinforcement fabrics 50 tons of the same combination of reinforcing steel types and diameters manufactured with the same point welding machine

Annex IV Model for biannual reporting on reinforcing steel

Page 27: National Assessment Guideline - Kiwa · PDF fileThe NEN-EN 10080:2005 is not a harmonised standard and therefore a CE mark can not yet be attached to the products covered by this BRL

National Assessment Guideline BRL 0501 01 September 2010 copy Kiwa NV - -

26

bull Decision-makers qualification of auditors and inspectors bull Management of the certification institute qualification of decision-makers

83 Initial audit report The certification institute records the findings of the initial audit in a report The report must meet the following requirements bull Completeness the report makes a statement about all requirements set out in the

assessment guideline bull Traceability the findings the statement are based on must have been recorded in a

traceable way bull Basis for decision the decision-maker for granting a certificate must be able to base his

decision on the findings recorded in the report

84 Decision about granting the certificate The decision concerning the granting of the certificate must be made by a decision-maker who is qualified to do so and who has not been involved in the certificate audit himself The decision must have been recorded in a traceable way

85 Presentation of the quality statement The product certificate must be presented in conformity with the model included in the annex

86 Nature and frequency of external inspections The certification institute must regularly inspect the supplier for compliance with his obligations The Board of Experts will decide upon the frequency of the inspections At the time this assessment guideline took effect the frequency was set to bull 3 inspection visits per year at suppliers of hot-rolled products bull 4 inspection visits per year at suppliers of other products Inspections will in any case pertain to a number of matters including bull The product specifications laid down in the product specification bull The supplierrsquos production process bull The supplierrsquos IQC schedule and the results of the inspections performed by the supplier bull The correct way of marking the certified products bull Compliance with the required procedures The certification institute will lay down the findings of each inspection performed in a report in a traceable way

87 Reporting to the Board of Experts The certification institute must report on the certification activities performed at least once a year The report must include the following subjects bull Mutations in number of certificates (newlapsed) bull Number of inspections performed in relation to the determined frequency bull Inspection results bull Measures imposed in case of defects bull Complaints received from third parties with respect to certified products

88 Interpretation of requirements The Board of Experts may lay down the requirements set in this assessment guideline in a single separate interpretation document The certification institute is obliged to ensure whether an interpretation document has been drawn up and if so must make use of the interpretations laid down in this

89 Specific rules defined by the Board of Experts The Board of Experts has not defined specific rules that are to be followed with certification by the certification institute

National Assessment Guideline BRL 0501 01 September 2010 copy Kiwa NV - -

27

9 List of documents mentioned

91 Standardsnormative documents

NEN 6008 2008 Reinforcing steel NEN 6720 1995 Technical foundations for building constructions - TGB 1990 ndash

Regulations for concrete - TGB 1990 ndash Structural requirements and calculation methods (VBC 1995) September 1995 including amendment sheet A4 December 2007

NEN 6722 2002 Regulations for concrete ndash Execution December 2002 NEN 6723 1995 Regulations for concrete - Bridges ndash (VBB June 1995) Structural requirements

and calculation methods December 1995 including amendment sheet A1 December 2003

NEN-EN 1992 2005 Design of concrete structures NEN-EN 1994 2005 Design of composite steel and concrete structures NEN-EN 10002 2001 Metallic materials tensile testing - Part 1 Method of testing at ambient

temperature August 2001 NEN-EN 10080 2005 Steel for the reinforcement of concrete ndash Weldable reinforcing steel - General NEN-EN 10204 2004 Metallic products - Types of inspection documents October 2004 NEN-EN 45012 1998 General requirements for bodies operating assessment and

certificationregistration of quality systems NEN-EN-ISO 376 2004 Metallic materials - Calibration of force-proving instruments used for the

verification of uniaxial testing machines NEN-EN-ISO 7500-1 2004 Metallic materials - Verification of static uniaxial testing machines ndash

Part 1 Tensilecompression testing machines - Verification and calibration of the force-measuring system August 2004

NEN-EN-ISO 9513 2002 Metallic materials ndash Calibration of extensometers for uniaxial testing October 2002

NEN-EN-ISO 15630-1 2002 Steel for the reinforcement and prestressing of concrete - Test methods ndash Part 1 Reinforcing bars wire rod and wire June 2002

NEN-EN-ISO 15630-2 2002 Steel for the reinforcement and prestressing of concrete - Test methods ndash Part 2 Welded fabric

NEN-EN-ISOIEC 17020

2004 General criteria for the operation of various types of bodies performing inspection

NEN-EN-ISOIEC 17024

2003 Conformity assessment - General requirements for bodies operating certification of persons

NEN-EN-ISOIEC 17025

2005 General requirements for the competence of testing and calibration laboratories

ISO 3301 1975 Statistical interpretation of data ndash Comparison of two means in the case of paired observations

ISO 4965 1979 Axial load fatigue testing machines - Dynamic force calibration - Strain gauge technique April 1979

ISO 16269-6 2005 Statistical interpretation of data Determination of statistical tolerance intervals

Annex I Model certificate

Issued Replaces Issued date Valid until Indefinite Page 1 of 2

KOMOreg

Product certificate

ltName Productgt ltCertificate holdergt

STATEMENT OF CI This product certificate was issued on the basis of BRL lsquo lsquo in conformity with the regulations for Product Certification CI declares that the justifiable confidence exists that the name product supplied by the certificate holder meets the technical specifications laid down in this product certificate provided that name product has the KOMOreg mark as indicated in this product certificate Director CI Advice refer to wwwltCIgtnl to see if this certificate is valid

Certificate holder T F E I

Assessed Quality system Product

Periodic check

reg is a collective brand of Stichting Bouwkwaliteit

Annex II Model for IQC schedule or framework of IQC schedule

Subjects Aspects Method Frequency Registration

Basic materials or supplied materials bull Recipe sheets bull Inspection of incoming raw

materials bull Mechanical bull Chemical

Production process production equipment material bull Procedures bull Work instructions bull Equipment bull Material bull Process inspection

End products

Measuring and testing equipment

Measuring and testing equipment bull Measuring devices bull Calibration bull Outsourced tests

Logistics bull Internal transport bull Storage bull Packaging bull Preservation bull Identification or marking

of semi-finished and end products

Corrective measures Complaints handling

Annex III Sampling and testing overview

Type

on

derz

oek

1)

Doo

rlope

nd

inte

rn fa

brie

kson

derz

oek

Perio

diek

ex

tern

ond

erzo

ek (a

udit)

To

elat

ings

onde

rzoe

k

(type

onde

rzoe

k)

Type

bet

onst

aal

stav

enro

llen

per d

iam

eter

ge

punt

last

e w

apn

ette

n pe

r dia

-com

bina

tie

stav

enro

llen

3 bp

e va

n 1

diam

eter

8)

gepu

ntla

ste

wap

net

ten

3 bp

e va

n 1

dia-

com

bina

tie 7)

8)

stav

enro

llen

3 bp

e pe

r di

amet

er 6)

gepu

ntla

ste

wap

net

ten

3 bp

e pe

r dia

-co

mbi

natie

6) 7

) R

e 1

per 3

0 t

m

in 3

per

bpe

m

in 2

per

bpe

1

lang

s + d

war

s 5

per b

pe

5 pe

r bpe

3

lang

s + 2

dw

ars

10 p

er b

pe

10 p

er b

pe

5 la

ngs +

5 d

war

s R

mR

e id

em

idem

id

em

idem

id

em

idem

R

eac

tRe

nom

2)

idem

id

em

idem

id

em

idem

id

em

Agt

idem

id

em

idem

id

em

idem

id

em

Bui

gpro

ef

1 pe

r bpe

4)

idem

2

per b

pe

2 pe

r bpe

1

lang

s + 1

dw

ars

5 pe

r bpe

5

per b

pe

3 la

ngs +

2 d

war

s M

assa

per

m

idem

id

em 5)

id

em

idem

5)

idem

id

em 5)

G

eom

etrie

opp

en

pro

fielfa

ctor

id

em

idem

id

em

idem

id

em

Idem

Che

mis

che

sa

men

st +

Ceq

3)

1 pe

r lad

ing

1

per l

adin

g 1

per l

adin

g 1

per l

adin

g 1

per l

adin

g 1

per l

adin

g

Afs

chui

fpro

ef

nv

t m

in 2

per

bpe

n

vt

3 pe

r bpe

n

vt

3 pe

r bpe

B

uig-

te

rugb

uigt

rekp

roe

f

nv

t n

vt

2 pe

r bpe

n

vt

2 pe

r bpe

n

vt

Afm

etin

gen

nv

t m

in 1

per

bpe

n

vt

1 pe

r bpe

n

vt

1 pe

r bpe

V

erm

oeiin

g n

vt

nv

t 5

per j

aar

5 pe

r jaa

r 6

per b

pe 9)

5

per b

pe 10

)

1) The audit is always for each manufacturing process (hot-rolled-cooled -cold-stretched cold-profiles) of a certain type of reinforcing steel 2) If applicable (B500C) 3) Chemical composition + Ceq to be determined and submitted by the steel manufacturer not for each diameter (combination) 4) For bending mass and geometry surface + frfp min 1 per 150 tons 5) Can be determined for welding 6) Smallest largest and intermediate diameters (always skipping 2 consecutive diameters) of the range (deviating from EN 10080) 7) Always the most critical diameter combination that occurs 8) In a period of a maximum of 5 years number and spreading of diameters 9) For d le 28 mm the largest and middle diameters for gt 28 mm the largest diameter 10) The largest middle and smallest diameters Test unit is defined as -- barscoils the load or a part of the load (for bending mass and geometryprofile min 1 per 90 t) -- point welded reinforcement fabrics 50 tons of the same combination of reinforcing steel types and diameters manufactured with the same point welding machine

Annex IV Model for biannual reporting on reinforcing steel

Page 28: National Assessment Guideline - Kiwa · PDF fileThe NEN-EN 10080:2005 is not a harmonised standard and therefore a CE mark can not yet be attached to the products covered by this BRL

National Assessment Guideline BRL 0501 01 September 2010 copy Kiwa NV - -

27

9 List of documents mentioned

91 Standardsnormative documents

NEN 6008 2008 Reinforcing steel NEN 6720 1995 Technical foundations for building constructions - TGB 1990 ndash

Regulations for concrete - TGB 1990 ndash Structural requirements and calculation methods (VBC 1995) September 1995 including amendment sheet A4 December 2007

NEN 6722 2002 Regulations for concrete ndash Execution December 2002 NEN 6723 1995 Regulations for concrete - Bridges ndash (VBB June 1995) Structural requirements

and calculation methods December 1995 including amendment sheet A1 December 2003

NEN-EN 1992 2005 Design of concrete structures NEN-EN 1994 2005 Design of composite steel and concrete structures NEN-EN 10002 2001 Metallic materials tensile testing - Part 1 Method of testing at ambient

temperature August 2001 NEN-EN 10080 2005 Steel for the reinforcement of concrete ndash Weldable reinforcing steel - General NEN-EN 10204 2004 Metallic products - Types of inspection documents October 2004 NEN-EN 45012 1998 General requirements for bodies operating assessment and

certificationregistration of quality systems NEN-EN-ISO 376 2004 Metallic materials - Calibration of force-proving instruments used for the

verification of uniaxial testing machines NEN-EN-ISO 7500-1 2004 Metallic materials - Verification of static uniaxial testing machines ndash

Part 1 Tensilecompression testing machines - Verification and calibration of the force-measuring system August 2004

NEN-EN-ISO 9513 2002 Metallic materials ndash Calibration of extensometers for uniaxial testing October 2002

NEN-EN-ISO 15630-1 2002 Steel for the reinforcement and prestressing of concrete - Test methods ndash Part 1 Reinforcing bars wire rod and wire June 2002

NEN-EN-ISO 15630-2 2002 Steel for the reinforcement and prestressing of concrete - Test methods ndash Part 2 Welded fabric

NEN-EN-ISOIEC 17020

2004 General criteria for the operation of various types of bodies performing inspection

NEN-EN-ISOIEC 17024

2003 Conformity assessment - General requirements for bodies operating certification of persons

NEN-EN-ISOIEC 17025

2005 General requirements for the competence of testing and calibration laboratories

ISO 3301 1975 Statistical interpretation of data ndash Comparison of two means in the case of paired observations

ISO 4965 1979 Axial load fatigue testing machines - Dynamic force calibration - Strain gauge technique April 1979

ISO 16269-6 2005 Statistical interpretation of data Determination of statistical tolerance intervals

Annex I Model certificate

Issued Replaces Issued date Valid until Indefinite Page 1 of 2

KOMOreg

Product certificate

ltName Productgt ltCertificate holdergt

STATEMENT OF CI This product certificate was issued on the basis of BRL lsquo lsquo in conformity with the regulations for Product Certification CI declares that the justifiable confidence exists that the name product supplied by the certificate holder meets the technical specifications laid down in this product certificate provided that name product has the KOMOreg mark as indicated in this product certificate Director CI Advice refer to wwwltCIgtnl to see if this certificate is valid

Certificate holder T F E I

Assessed Quality system Product

Periodic check

reg is a collective brand of Stichting Bouwkwaliteit

Annex II Model for IQC schedule or framework of IQC schedule

Subjects Aspects Method Frequency Registration

Basic materials or supplied materials bull Recipe sheets bull Inspection of incoming raw

materials bull Mechanical bull Chemical

Production process production equipment material bull Procedures bull Work instructions bull Equipment bull Material bull Process inspection

End products

Measuring and testing equipment

Measuring and testing equipment bull Measuring devices bull Calibration bull Outsourced tests

Logistics bull Internal transport bull Storage bull Packaging bull Preservation bull Identification or marking

of semi-finished and end products

Corrective measures Complaints handling

Annex III Sampling and testing overview

Type

on

derz

oek

1)

Doo

rlope

nd

inte

rn fa

brie

kson

derz

oek

Perio

diek

ex

tern

ond

erzo

ek (a

udit)

To

elat

ings

onde

rzoe

k

(type

onde

rzoe

k)

Type

bet

onst

aal

stav

enro

llen

per d

iam

eter

ge

punt

last

e w

apn

ette

n pe

r dia

-com

bina

tie

stav

enro

llen

3 bp

e va

n 1

diam

eter

8)

gepu

ntla

ste

wap

net

ten

3 bp

e va

n 1

dia-

com

bina

tie 7)

8)

stav

enro

llen

3 bp

e pe

r di

amet

er 6)

gepu

ntla

ste

wap

net

ten

3 bp

e pe

r dia

-co

mbi

natie

6) 7

) R

e 1

per 3

0 t

m

in 3

per

bpe

m

in 2

per

bpe

1

lang

s + d

war

s 5

per b

pe

5 pe

r bpe

3

lang

s + 2

dw

ars

10 p

er b

pe

10 p

er b

pe

5 la

ngs +

5 d

war

s R

mR

e id

em

idem

id

em

idem

id

em

idem

R

eac

tRe

nom

2)

idem

id

em

idem

id

em

idem

id

em

Agt

idem

id

em

idem

id

em

idem

id

em

Bui

gpro

ef

1 pe

r bpe

4)

idem

2

per b

pe

2 pe

r bpe

1

lang

s + 1

dw

ars

5 pe

r bpe

5

per b

pe

3 la

ngs +

2 d

war

s M

assa

per

m

idem

id

em 5)

id

em

idem

5)

idem

id

em 5)

G

eom

etrie

opp

en

pro

fielfa

ctor

id

em

idem

id

em

idem

id

em

Idem

Che

mis

che

sa

men

st +

Ceq

3)

1 pe

r lad

ing

1

per l

adin

g 1

per l

adin

g 1

per l

adin

g 1

per l

adin

g 1

per l

adin

g

Afs

chui

fpro

ef

nv

t m

in 2

per

bpe

n

vt

3 pe

r bpe

n

vt

3 pe

r bpe

B

uig-

te

rugb

uigt

rekp

roe

f

nv

t n

vt

2 pe

r bpe

n

vt

2 pe

r bpe

n

vt

Afm

etin

gen

nv

t m

in 1

per

bpe

n

vt

1 pe

r bpe

n

vt

1 pe

r bpe

V

erm

oeiin

g n

vt

nv

t 5

per j

aar

5 pe

r jaa

r 6

per b

pe 9)

5

per b

pe 10

)

1) The audit is always for each manufacturing process (hot-rolled-cooled -cold-stretched cold-profiles) of a certain type of reinforcing steel 2) If applicable (B500C) 3) Chemical composition + Ceq to be determined and submitted by the steel manufacturer not for each diameter (combination) 4) For bending mass and geometry surface + frfp min 1 per 150 tons 5) Can be determined for welding 6) Smallest largest and intermediate diameters (always skipping 2 consecutive diameters) of the range (deviating from EN 10080) 7) Always the most critical diameter combination that occurs 8) In a period of a maximum of 5 years number and spreading of diameters 9) For d le 28 mm the largest and middle diameters for gt 28 mm the largest diameter 10) The largest middle and smallest diameters Test unit is defined as -- barscoils the load or a part of the load (for bending mass and geometryprofile min 1 per 90 t) -- point welded reinforcement fabrics 50 tons of the same combination of reinforcing steel types and diameters manufactured with the same point welding machine

Annex IV Model for biannual reporting on reinforcing steel

Page 29: National Assessment Guideline - Kiwa · PDF fileThe NEN-EN 10080:2005 is not a harmonised standard and therefore a CE mark can not yet be attached to the products covered by this BRL

Annex I Model certificate

Issued Replaces Issued date Valid until Indefinite Page 1 of 2

KOMOreg

Product certificate

ltName Productgt ltCertificate holdergt

STATEMENT OF CI This product certificate was issued on the basis of BRL lsquo lsquo in conformity with the regulations for Product Certification CI declares that the justifiable confidence exists that the name product supplied by the certificate holder meets the technical specifications laid down in this product certificate provided that name product has the KOMOreg mark as indicated in this product certificate Director CI Advice refer to wwwltCIgtnl to see if this certificate is valid

Certificate holder T F E I

Assessed Quality system Product

Periodic check

reg is a collective brand of Stichting Bouwkwaliteit

Annex II Model for IQC schedule or framework of IQC schedule

Subjects Aspects Method Frequency Registration

Basic materials or supplied materials bull Recipe sheets bull Inspection of incoming raw

materials bull Mechanical bull Chemical

Production process production equipment material bull Procedures bull Work instructions bull Equipment bull Material bull Process inspection

End products

Measuring and testing equipment

Measuring and testing equipment bull Measuring devices bull Calibration bull Outsourced tests

Logistics bull Internal transport bull Storage bull Packaging bull Preservation bull Identification or marking

of semi-finished and end products

Corrective measures Complaints handling

Annex III Sampling and testing overview

Type

on

derz

oek

1)

Doo

rlope

nd

inte

rn fa

brie

kson

derz

oek

Perio

diek

ex

tern

ond

erzo

ek (a

udit)

To

elat

ings

onde

rzoe

k

(type

onde

rzoe

k)

Type

bet

onst

aal

stav

enro

llen

per d

iam

eter

ge

punt

last

e w

apn

ette

n pe

r dia

-com

bina

tie

stav

enro

llen

3 bp

e va

n 1

diam

eter

8)

gepu

ntla

ste

wap

net

ten

3 bp

e va

n 1

dia-

com

bina

tie 7)

8)

stav

enro

llen

3 bp

e pe

r di

amet

er 6)

gepu

ntla

ste

wap

net

ten

3 bp

e pe

r dia

-co

mbi

natie

6) 7

) R

e 1

per 3

0 t

m

in 3

per

bpe

m

in 2

per

bpe

1

lang

s + d

war

s 5

per b

pe

5 pe

r bpe

3

lang

s + 2

dw

ars

10 p

er b

pe

10 p

er b

pe

5 la

ngs +

5 d

war

s R

mR

e id

em

idem

id

em

idem

id

em

idem

R

eac

tRe

nom

2)

idem

id

em

idem

id

em

idem

id

em

Agt

idem

id

em

idem

id

em

idem

id

em

Bui

gpro

ef

1 pe

r bpe

4)

idem

2

per b

pe

2 pe

r bpe

1

lang

s + 1

dw

ars

5 pe

r bpe

5

per b

pe

3 la

ngs +

2 d

war

s M

assa

per

m

idem

id

em 5)

id

em

idem

5)

idem

id

em 5)

G

eom

etrie

opp

en

pro

fielfa

ctor

id

em

idem

id

em

idem

id

em

Idem

Che

mis

che

sa

men

st +

Ceq

3)

1 pe

r lad

ing

1

per l

adin

g 1

per l

adin

g 1

per l

adin

g 1

per l

adin

g 1

per l

adin

g

Afs

chui

fpro

ef

nv

t m

in 2

per

bpe

n

vt

3 pe

r bpe

n

vt

3 pe

r bpe

B

uig-

te

rugb

uigt

rekp

roe

f

nv

t n

vt

2 pe

r bpe

n

vt

2 pe

r bpe

n

vt

Afm

etin

gen

nv

t m

in 1

per

bpe

n

vt

1 pe

r bpe

n

vt

1 pe

r bpe

V

erm

oeiin

g n

vt

nv

t 5

per j

aar

5 pe

r jaa

r 6

per b

pe 9)

5

per b

pe 10

)

1) The audit is always for each manufacturing process (hot-rolled-cooled -cold-stretched cold-profiles) of a certain type of reinforcing steel 2) If applicable (B500C) 3) Chemical composition + Ceq to be determined and submitted by the steel manufacturer not for each diameter (combination) 4) For bending mass and geometry surface + frfp min 1 per 150 tons 5) Can be determined for welding 6) Smallest largest and intermediate diameters (always skipping 2 consecutive diameters) of the range (deviating from EN 10080) 7) Always the most critical diameter combination that occurs 8) In a period of a maximum of 5 years number and spreading of diameters 9) For d le 28 mm the largest and middle diameters for gt 28 mm the largest diameter 10) The largest middle and smallest diameters Test unit is defined as -- barscoils the load or a part of the load (for bending mass and geometryprofile min 1 per 90 t) -- point welded reinforcement fabrics 50 tons of the same combination of reinforcing steel types and diameters manufactured with the same point welding machine

Annex IV Model for biannual reporting on reinforcing steel

Page 30: National Assessment Guideline - Kiwa · PDF fileThe NEN-EN 10080:2005 is not a harmonised standard and therefore a CE mark can not yet be attached to the products covered by this BRL

Annex II Model for IQC schedule or framework of IQC schedule

Subjects Aspects Method Frequency Registration

Basic materials or supplied materials bull Recipe sheets bull Inspection of incoming raw

materials bull Mechanical bull Chemical

Production process production equipment material bull Procedures bull Work instructions bull Equipment bull Material bull Process inspection

End products

Measuring and testing equipment

Measuring and testing equipment bull Measuring devices bull Calibration bull Outsourced tests

Logistics bull Internal transport bull Storage bull Packaging bull Preservation bull Identification or marking

of semi-finished and end products

Corrective measures Complaints handling

Annex III Sampling and testing overview

Type

on

derz

oek

1)

Doo

rlope

nd

inte

rn fa

brie

kson

derz

oek

Perio

diek

ex

tern

ond

erzo

ek (a

udit)

To

elat

ings

onde

rzoe

k

(type

onde

rzoe

k)

Type

bet

onst

aal

stav

enro

llen

per d

iam

eter

ge

punt

last

e w

apn

ette

n pe

r dia

-com

bina

tie

stav

enro

llen

3 bp

e va

n 1

diam

eter

8)

gepu

ntla

ste

wap

net

ten

3 bp

e va

n 1

dia-

com

bina

tie 7)

8)

stav

enro

llen

3 bp

e pe

r di

amet

er 6)

gepu

ntla

ste

wap

net

ten

3 bp

e pe

r dia

-co

mbi

natie

6) 7

) R

e 1

per 3

0 t

m

in 3

per

bpe

m

in 2

per

bpe

1

lang

s + d

war

s 5

per b

pe

5 pe

r bpe

3

lang

s + 2

dw

ars

10 p

er b

pe

10 p

er b

pe

5 la

ngs +

5 d

war

s R

mR

e id

em

idem

id

em

idem

id

em

idem

R

eac

tRe

nom

2)

idem

id

em

idem

id

em

idem

id

em

Agt

idem

id

em

idem

id

em

idem

id

em

Bui

gpro

ef

1 pe

r bpe

4)

idem

2

per b

pe

2 pe

r bpe

1

lang

s + 1

dw

ars

5 pe

r bpe

5

per b

pe

3 la

ngs +

2 d

war

s M

assa

per

m

idem

id

em 5)

id

em

idem

5)

idem

id

em 5)

G

eom

etrie

opp

en

pro

fielfa

ctor

id

em

idem

id

em

idem

id

em

Idem

Che

mis

che

sa

men

st +

Ceq

3)

1 pe

r lad

ing

1

per l

adin

g 1

per l

adin

g 1

per l

adin

g 1

per l

adin

g 1

per l

adin

g

Afs

chui

fpro

ef

nv

t m

in 2

per

bpe

n

vt

3 pe

r bpe

n

vt

3 pe

r bpe

B

uig-

te

rugb

uigt

rekp

roe

f

nv

t n

vt

2 pe

r bpe

n

vt

2 pe

r bpe

n

vt

Afm

etin

gen

nv

t m

in 1

per

bpe

n

vt

1 pe

r bpe

n

vt

1 pe

r bpe

V

erm

oeiin

g n

vt

nv

t 5

per j

aar

5 pe

r jaa

r 6

per b

pe 9)

5

per b

pe 10

)

1) The audit is always for each manufacturing process (hot-rolled-cooled -cold-stretched cold-profiles) of a certain type of reinforcing steel 2) If applicable (B500C) 3) Chemical composition + Ceq to be determined and submitted by the steel manufacturer not for each diameter (combination) 4) For bending mass and geometry surface + frfp min 1 per 150 tons 5) Can be determined for welding 6) Smallest largest and intermediate diameters (always skipping 2 consecutive diameters) of the range (deviating from EN 10080) 7) Always the most critical diameter combination that occurs 8) In a period of a maximum of 5 years number and spreading of diameters 9) For d le 28 mm the largest and middle diameters for gt 28 mm the largest diameter 10) The largest middle and smallest diameters Test unit is defined as -- barscoils the load or a part of the load (for bending mass and geometryprofile min 1 per 90 t) -- point welded reinforcement fabrics 50 tons of the same combination of reinforcing steel types and diameters manufactured with the same point welding machine

Annex IV Model for biannual reporting on reinforcing steel

Page 31: National Assessment Guideline - Kiwa · PDF fileThe NEN-EN 10080:2005 is not a harmonised standard and therefore a CE mark can not yet be attached to the products covered by this BRL

Annex III Sampling and testing overview

Type

on

derz

oek

1)

Doo

rlope

nd

inte

rn fa

brie

kson

derz

oek

Perio

diek

ex

tern

ond

erzo

ek (a

udit)

To

elat

ings

onde

rzoe

k

(type

onde

rzoe

k)

Type

bet

onst

aal

stav

enro

llen

per d

iam

eter

ge

punt

last

e w

apn

ette

n pe

r dia

-com

bina

tie

stav

enro

llen

3 bp

e va

n 1

diam

eter

8)

gepu

ntla

ste

wap

net

ten

3 bp

e va

n 1

dia-

com

bina

tie 7)

8)

stav

enro

llen

3 bp

e pe

r di

amet

er 6)

gepu

ntla

ste

wap

net

ten

3 bp

e pe

r dia

-co

mbi

natie

6) 7

) R

e 1

per 3

0 t

m

in 3

per

bpe

m

in 2

per

bpe

1

lang

s + d

war

s 5

per b

pe

5 pe

r bpe

3

lang

s + 2

dw

ars

10 p

er b

pe

10 p

er b

pe

5 la

ngs +

5 d

war

s R

mR

e id

em

idem

id

em

idem

id

em

idem

R

eac

tRe

nom

2)

idem

id

em

idem

id

em

idem

id

em

Agt

idem

id

em

idem

id

em

idem

id

em

Bui

gpro

ef

1 pe

r bpe

4)

idem

2

per b

pe

2 pe

r bpe

1

lang

s + 1

dw

ars

5 pe

r bpe

5

per b

pe

3 la

ngs +

2 d

war

s M

assa

per

m

idem

id

em 5)

id

em

idem

5)

idem

id

em 5)

G

eom

etrie

opp

en

pro

fielfa

ctor

id

em

idem

id

em

idem

id

em

Idem

Che

mis

che

sa

men

st +

Ceq

3)

1 pe

r lad

ing

1

per l

adin

g 1

per l

adin

g 1

per l

adin

g 1

per l

adin

g 1

per l

adin

g

Afs

chui

fpro

ef

nv

t m

in 2

per

bpe

n

vt

3 pe

r bpe

n

vt

3 pe

r bpe

B

uig-

te

rugb

uigt

rekp

roe

f

nv

t n

vt

2 pe

r bpe

n

vt

2 pe

r bpe

n

vt

Afm

etin

gen

nv

t m

in 1

per

bpe

n

vt

1 pe

r bpe

n

vt

1 pe

r bpe

V

erm

oeiin

g n

vt

nv

t 5

per j

aar

5 pe

r jaa

r 6

per b

pe 9)

5

per b

pe 10

)

1) The audit is always for each manufacturing process (hot-rolled-cooled -cold-stretched cold-profiles) of a certain type of reinforcing steel 2) If applicable (B500C) 3) Chemical composition + Ceq to be determined and submitted by the steel manufacturer not for each diameter (combination) 4) For bending mass and geometry surface + frfp min 1 per 150 tons 5) Can be determined for welding 6) Smallest largest and intermediate diameters (always skipping 2 consecutive diameters) of the range (deviating from EN 10080) 7) Always the most critical diameter combination that occurs 8) In a period of a maximum of 5 years number and spreading of diameters 9) For d le 28 mm the largest and middle diameters for gt 28 mm the largest diameter 10) The largest middle and smallest diameters Test unit is defined as -- barscoils the load or a part of the load (for bending mass and geometryprofile min 1 per 90 t) -- point welded reinforcement fabrics 50 tons of the same combination of reinforcing steel types and diameters manufactured with the same point welding machine

Annex IV Model for biannual reporting on reinforcing steel

Page 32: National Assessment Guideline - Kiwa · PDF fileThe NEN-EN 10080:2005 is not a harmonised standard and therefore a CE mark can not yet be attached to the products covered by this BRL

1) The audit is always for each manufacturing process (hot-rolled-cooled -cold-stretched cold-profiles) of a certain type of reinforcing steel 2) If applicable (B500C) 3) Chemical composition + Ceq to be determined and submitted by the steel manufacturer not for each diameter (combination) 4) For bending mass and geometry surface + frfp min 1 per 150 tons 5) Can be determined for welding 6) Smallest largest and intermediate diameters (always skipping 2 consecutive diameters) of the range (deviating from EN 10080) 7) Always the most critical diameter combination that occurs 8) In a period of a maximum of 5 years number and spreading of diameters 9) For d le 28 mm the largest and middle diameters for gt 28 mm the largest diameter 10) The largest middle and smallest diameters Test unit is defined as -- barscoils the load or a part of the load (for bending mass and geometryprofile min 1 per 90 t) -- point welded reinforcement fabrics 50 tons of the same combination of reinforcing steel types and diameters manufactured with the same point welding machine

Annex IV Model for biannual reporting on reinforcing steel

Page 33: National Assessment Guideline - Kiwa · PDF fileThe NEN-EN 10080:2005 is not a harmonised standard and therefore a CE mark can not yet be attached to the products covered by this BRL

Annex IV Model for biannual reporting on reinforcing steel


Recommended